Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
R2020-234 2020-11-09
RESOLUTION NO. R2020-234 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Shadow Creek Ranch Park Project (Phase II), to Forney Construction, LLC., in the amount of$4,552,384.78. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Shadow Creek Ranch Park Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to Forney Construction, LLC., in the amount of$4,552,384.78. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Shadow Creek Ranch Park Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 9th day of November, A.D., 2020. (ram TOM REID MAYOR ATTE : etia AR ' CRY TAL ROAN, TRMC, CMC ``�F Q�'"" �!O sirs CITY SECRETARY SS)/ J _ APPROVED AS TO FORM: DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY Kimley>>>Horn October 22, 2020 Ms. Morgan Early Project Manager— Engineering and Capital Projects City of Pearland, Tx 2559 Hillhouse Pearland, Tx 77584 Via Email: mearly(c�pearlandtx.gov RE: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 — Bid No. 0820-53 Bid Recommendation Letter To Whom It May Concern: On Thursday, September 3, 2020 - bids were received, publicly opened, and recorded by the City Contract Administrator. The City received six (6) bids for this project (C.A. Walker Construction, DL Meacham LP, Forney Construction, Gadberry Construction Company, Inc., Millis Development & Construction, LLC, and SpawGlass Civil Construction, Inc.). The highest bid was from Millis Development & Construction, LLC at $6,083,438.52 and the lowest bid was from Forney Construction at $ 4,552,384.78 The bids from all bidders were reviewed by the City according to the Selection Criteria identified in the Instruction to Offerors for the Competitive Sealed Proposal. All bidders were deemed "Responsive". The highest score was from Forney Construction at 83.25 and the second highest score was from SpawGlass Civil Construction, Inc. at 79.22. After contacting references and interviewing Forney and Spawglass - the bidders also are found to be "Responsible." Therefore, we recommend the City award the bid in the amount of $ 4,552,384.78 to Forney Construction. Sincerely, Kimley-Horn, Inc. kmb OIQr[�G Kristina Malek, PLA, ASLA Associate and Project Manager kimley-horn.com 11700 Katy Freeway, Ste. 800, Houston, Texas 77079 281 597 9300 Bld a 0820-53 Title Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 Gadberry Construction Millie Development 5. SoawGlase Civil GA.Walker Construction LINE ITEMS Engineer's Estimate Company,Inc. Construction.LLC Construction,Inc. IC.A.Walker,Inc) DL Meacham LP Forney Construction Line Description UOM CITY Unit Extended Unit Extended Unit Extended Unit Extended Unit Extended Unit Extended Unit Extended 1 Base Bid 1 S5,705,316.08 $4,212,987.00 $5,503,328.47 $5,397,810.00 $4,339,867.53 $4,856,000.00 84,266,065.6E Mobilization and Demobilization:Furnish all labor, materials,equipment and Incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize.Shall include all costs for Contractor's insurances and bonds, construction/Wading and slormwater permits and fees, job trailers and site administration expenses and utilities.This item shall not exceed more than three(3) 1.1 percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. LS 1 $44,000.00 $142,224.00 $164,684.00 $161,934.00_ $146,957.91 8115,000.00 $124,927.97 Demolition:Furnish all labor,materials,equipment,and incidentals required for major demolition activities to the extent shown on the drawings,Including all demolition activities associated with the existing facilities. Demolition shag be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the existing facilities.This item shall not include demolition activities associated with specific 1.2 process areas listed in Bid Items 3 through 16. LS 1 512,100.00 S30,305.00 $10,193.00 $17,514.00 $39,500.00 $20,000.00 $14,499.36 Erosion Control and Grading:Construction of erosion control,tree protection fencing.mass grading,and 1.3 related work or equipment as required. LS 1 $226,153.13 $411,049.00 8297,451.72 $147,983.00 8254,630.57 $400,000.00 8552,287.92 Utilities and Storm Drainage:Construction of wet and dry utilities including potable water,sanitary sewer, storm drainage,electric.Internet,and related work or 1.4 equipment as required,complete and in place. LS 1 5251,916.50 $252,497.00 _ 8244,491.93 $343,010.00 $272,311.00 $219,000.00 8310,369.43 Restroom/Concessions building:Construction of the rstroom/concession building and related work or 1.5 equipment as required. LS 1$1,445,400.00 $737,290.00 $1,085,233.47 $1,266,411.00 $799,559.90 $996,000.00 $852,420.27 Multipurpose field:Coordination of construction of the multipurpose field,including synthetic turf preparation. 1.6 wicket infield,fencing,and drainage. LS 1$1,936,060.55 8262,921.00 81,429,213.38 S1,030,265.00 81,288,947.00 $1,025,000.00 $673,017.46 Mirada Field:Construction of the miracle field,Including 1.7 surfacing,dugouts,fencing,electrical system. LS 1 $301,301.00 $449,17&00 $522,786.45 S559,438.00 8177,470.00 $450,000.00 8274,052.91 Parking:The construction of the parking lots,Including 1 pavement,curbs,striping/marking,accessible parking, 1.8 sidewalks,ramps,perimeter fencing,electrical service. LS 1 8842,025.80 5776,432.00 8671,206.62 $814,580.00 8604,401.75 $620,000.00 $508,758.77 Lighting:Coordination of construction of the sports field and parking lot lighting,including provision of power and 1.9 power source,suitably sized control panels. LS 1 5110,000.00 ,$72,329.00 876,846.77 $112,924.00 546,300.00 $134,000.00 317,795.24 Landscape and Irrigation:Construction of the landscape and irrigation,including fine grading,topsoil,bed prep, 1.10 mulch,landscape/plantings,irrigation,flagpoles. LS 1 $130,770.60 0252,587.00 _$224,433.40 $261,258.00 $217,171.00 $344,000.00 $210,939.48 Maintenance building:Construction of the maintenance building.including utility connections,sidewalk 1.11 pavement,building,and building systems. LS 1 8295,000.00 $610,391.00 _8621,747.95 $517,210.00 $408,947.28 $420,000.00 $411,218.01 Left bum lane:Construction of the left turn lane, Including demolition,maintenance of traffic,pavement, 1.12 traffic control,striping. LS 1 S110,5118.50 $215,754.00 8155,037.78 8165,283.00 883,671.12 8113,000.00 8115,778.86 2 Alternate Work Items 1 $301,864.75 $398,723.00 8580,11206 8352,315.00 $347,932.06 8338,000.00 $286,319.10 Additive Alternate#1:Construction of the northeast parking lot,including pavement,curbs,striping,1 light 2.1 pole and directional signs. LS 1 $283,164.75 $333,707.00 $523,845.45 $278,36200 S233,352.55 5215,000.00 5217,503.02 Additive Alternate e2:Site furnishing installation.City to direct purchase items include batting rack,waste 2.2 receptacles,bleachers.and team benches. LS 1 $5,500.00 $5,58100 59,9511.16 $5,849.00 $29,319.22 52,500.00 $0,138.44 Additive Alternate e3:Bleacher installation.City to direct 2.3 purchase. LS 1 $2,200.00 $3,469.00 $9,711.76 511,906.00 517,591.53 $7,000.00 57,044.63 Additive Alternate e4:Shade structure installation.City 2.4 to direct purchase. LS 1 811,000.00 84,420.00 $1,948.14, $35,475.00 521,60422 835,000.00 $9,395.90 Additive Alternate e5:Coordination of construction of the Phase 1 Field 2 sports field lighting,including provision Not Included of power and power source,suitably sized control in&d Set 2.5 panels.City to direct purchase Musco Lighting. LS 1 Eatlmate 551,524.00 $34,648.5/ $20,724.00 545,97254 578,500.00 $44,232.11 Total $6,007,180.63 $4,611,710.0O 55,083,433.52 $5,750,125.00 $4,667,799.59 55,194,000.00 $1,552,384.76 Bid 80820-53 Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II-Evaluation Recap Scoring:5=exceeds expectations,full points;4=Above Expectations;3=Meets Expectations;2=Does Not Quite Meet Expectations;1 Does Not Meet Expectations;0 Non-responsive C.A.Walker Construction(CA. Millis Development&Construction, Walker,Inc) DL Meacham LP Forney Construction Gadberry Construction Company,Inc. LLC SpawGlass Civil Construction,Inc. Bid Amount 54,687,799.59 S5,194,000.00 54,552,384.78 54,611,710.00 $6,083,438.52 S5,750,125.00 Price 50 pts 48.56 43.62 50.00 49.36 37.42 39.59 Experience&awls Project Team 15 pts 6.76 9.02 10.52 6.76 10.52 11.27 Experience W Proj of Similar Scope, Value and Complexity 10 pts 4.00 6.50 7.00 6.50 7.00 8.00 Completeness of Project Approach and Schedule 5 pts 2.00 3.00 2.75 2.75 3.25 4.25 Reputation&Offeror's History W Sub- contractors/Vendors 10 pts 4.00 6.50 6.00 3.00 7.50 8.00 Quality Assurance Program 5 pts 1.00 0.90 0.90 1.10 1.40 1.50 Safety record 5 pts 2.10 2.42 2.28 1.95 2.53 3.00 Financial Capacity to Fund the Work of the Project 5 pts 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 Subtotal Points 72.29 75.16 83.25 75.36 73.34 79.22 Interview Points 50 pts 45.83 46.00 Total Evaluation Points 129.08 125.22 For Compliance to Bid:check to make sure the following forms/letter were provided by vendor: Local Bidder Claim Form Y Y N,not local Y N,not local Y Conflict of Interest Y Y y Y V Y Contractor Questionnaire Y Y Y Y V Y Non-Collusion Stmnt Y Y Y Y Y Y Vendor Reference ? N V ? ? V Bid Bond Y r _ V V y r Part A V V V Y V y Part B V V Y V V r Part C V V V Y Y y Notes: Not much Park experience.One field HOA Park experience.Seems to do Misspellings throughout.Wrong Great similar projects.Field Turf Excellent similar projects.Only GC that listed bit not highlighted.Has built most construction as GC.Symmetry tot be-using-astretucf. In litigation. projects identified.In litigation. specic-Includes turf and grading at does majority of work.No turf installer Pearland FS 1.Symmetry sub for turf sub for turf prep. Similar projects related to parks. the propsed cost of line?Can we identified.Is turf included in price? prep. Symmetry su for turf.Wrong name of substitute?Renamed recenty? Great methodology and approach with project in resume. one of the earliest completions. Schedule uploaded is illegible.Under Provided SOQ that met comparable Did not provide references for GC.Turf Highest Base&Add Alt Bid.Bid price Price for concession building is high. litigation but did not provide details size and scope projects.DID NOT SIGN exceptions.Also,their bid amount Install price Is 25%of all other bidders. for Concession building&turf install Overal price is high.SOQ demonstrated lawyer's advice)5OQ provided did BID BOND.DID NOT SIGN BID(Part A) does not reflect a conditional 5193K Would want to know why they bid it so was Very high.Their proposal significant comparable scope&size not list any municipal or park addition for using Shaw as turf much lower. submission was the most complete&experience projects. supplier.It is unclear why.Project accurate of the 6.Their schedule approach was not specific to this extends the completion date to Sept project at all.EMR increase in 2020- but is within the 255 days u(h Lowest Bidder for all items:Base& Lowest Bidder on Base Bid Only 2nd Alternates lowest with all add alternates EXHIBIT A: SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II CONTRACTOR SCORING TABLE Millis C.A. Walker SpawGlass Civil Gadberry Forney Development & Construction Selection Criteria Construction, DL Meacham LP Construction Construction Construction, (C.A. Walker, Inc. Company, Inc. LLC Inc) Bid Amount $4,552,384.78 $5,750,125.00 $5,194,000.00 $4,611,710.00 $6,083,438.52 $4,687,799.59 Experience & Quals of Project Team 10.52 11.27 9.02 6.76 10.52 6.76 Experience W Proj of Similar Scope, Value and Complexity 7.00 8.00 6.50 6.50 7.00 4.00 Completeness of Project Approach and Schedule 2.75 4.25 3.00 2.75 3.25 2.00 Reputation & Offeror's History W Sub- contractors/Vendors 6.00 8.00 6.50 3.00 7.50 4.00 Quality Assurance Program 0.90 1.50 0.90 1.10 1.40 1.00 Safety record 2.28 3.00 2.42 1.95 2.53 2.10 Financial Capacity to Fund the Work of the Project 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 Score before Price 33.25 39.63 32.09 26.00 35.93 23.74 Price 50.00 39.59 43.82 49.36 37.42 48.56 Total Points 83.25 79.22 75.92 75.36 73.34 72.29 Project Manual for: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 NO 1)1 0 9'P� 2 V 4 D T E X AS E'Sr. Bid No. : 0820-53 July 2020 Prepared By: Kim ley-Hom and Associates, Inc. Contact: Kristina Malek, PLA 11700 Katy Freeway, Ste. 800 Houston, TX 77079 Project Manual for: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 COP Project No. : PK2001 Bid No . : 0820-53 _h G , _ 4, �- �! ?�l\ : '' i 0 Y -=l cmi � 7 JIM D.DALLAS * 0 l�o• 85922 r�S *,p1. ?989 "0( SI;e /CENSE NG-4_'" =__SITE OF �,/0 ��\,�N::E- 7/24/2� July 2020 07/24/2020 =.EOF rE`�� Prepared By: '�''"�. ''���` KimleV Hom and Associates, Inc. C.-• N HARDY h J / '7.1( ,; r 131813 Contact:Kristina Malek, PLA _ It74. '`'cE" ": . 11700 KatyFreeway, Ste. 800 ��''\%,,qrf j�;;o\\°, '�`" 7/23/20 Houston, TX 77079 CITY OF PEARLAND BRAZORIA COUNTY,TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Inspection Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exit 01554 Street Signs 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions Nolo-1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 01720 Field Surveying 01750 Starting Systems 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2—SITE WORK 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding,Backfill,and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02335 Subgrade 02511 Water Meters 02514 Fire Hydrant Assembly 02515 Water Tap and Service Line Installation 02520 Valve Boxes,Meter Boxes,and Meter Vaults 02530 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 02531 Sanitary Sewer Service Leads or Reconnections 02534 PVC Pipe 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 02542 Concrete Manholes and Accessories 02582 Thermoplastic Pavement Markings 02603 Frames,Grates,Rings,and Covers 02630 Storm Sewers 02631 Precast Inlets,Headwalls,and Wingwalls 02632 Cast-in-Place Inlets,Headwalls,and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes,Inlets,and Valve Boxes 02710 Base Course for Pavement 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 02744 Single Course Surface Treatment 02751 Concrete Pavement 02762 Temporary and Removable Reflectorized Pavement Marking 02770 Curb,Curb&Gutter,and Headers 02771 Concrete Sidewalks 02775 Concrete Driveways 02811 Landscape Irrigation 02910 Topsoil 02921 Hydromulch Seeding 02922 Sodding 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting 02980 Pavement Repair and Resurfacing 00010-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 02981 Blast Cleaning of Pavement DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 03310 Structural Concrete END OF SECTION 00010-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2- SITEWORK Section 02361 Termite Control 02361-1 to 1 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE Section 03100 Concrete Formwork (Buildings) 03100-1 to 2 Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement(Buildings) 03200-1 to 2 Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete(Buildings) 03300-1 to 3 DIVISION 4- MASONRY Section 04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04100-1 to 2 Section 04711 Cast-Stone Masonry 04711-1 to 5 Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-1 to 4 Section 04820 Blok-Flash 04820-1 to 2 DIVISION 6—WOOD AND PLASTIC Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 to 3 Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105-1 to 2 Section 06160 Sheathing 06160-1 to 5 Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 06200-1 to 2 Section 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402-1 to 3 Section 06611 Solid Surfacing Fabrications 06611-1 to 7 DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07110 Concrete Sealer 07110-1 to 4 Section 07130 Below Grade Vapor Retarder 07130-1 to 3 Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 to 2 Section 07211 Insulation Board 07211-1 to 2 Section 07411 Metal Roof Panels 07411-1 to 7 Section 07500 Metal Wall Panels 07500-1 to 7 Section 07552 Self-Adhered Roofing Underlayment 07552-1 to 3 Section 07620 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07620-1 to 4 Section 07712 Gutters and Downspouts 07712-1 to 4 Section 07720 Roof Accessories 07720-1 to 2 Section 07920 Joint Sealants 07920-1 to 2 DIVISION 8—DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 to 2 Section 08411 Storefront Windows Section 08710 Door Hardware 08710-1 to 6 Section 08900 Fixed Louvers 08900-1 to 3 DIVISION 9—FINISHES Section 09250 Gyp Board 09250-1 to 4 Section 09513 Acoustical Ceilings 09513-1 to 7 Section 09650 Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 to 6 Section 09653 Resilient Flooring Base 09653-1 to 4 Section 09671 Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring 09671-1 to 5 Section 09772 Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09772-1 to 5 Section 09910 Painting(Building) 09910-1 to 3 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES Section 10155 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 10155-1 to 3 Section 10440 Fire Extinguishers 10440-1 to 3 Section 10510 Solid Plastic Cubbies 10510-1 to 4 Section 10800 Toilet Room Accessories 10800-1 to 5 Section 10930 Athletic Equipment 10930-1 to 3 DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-1 to 7 Section 15055 Cutting and Patching 15055-1 to 1 Section 15060 Electrical Work 15060-1 to 2 Section 15140 Supports and Anchors 15140-1 to 4 Section 15190 Mechanical Identification 15190-1 to 2 Section 15260 Piping Insulation 15260-1 to 3 Section 15290 Ductwork Insulation 15290-1 to 3 Section 15410 Plumbing Piping 15410-1 to 6 Section 15430 Plumbing Specialties 15430-1 to 5 Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15440-1 to 6 Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment 15450-1 to 2 Section 15535 Refrigeration Piping and Specialties 15535-1 to 3 Section 15787 Split System Air Conditioning Units 15787-1 to 3 Section 15870 Power Ventilators 15870-1 to 3 Section 15885 Air Cleaning 15885-1 to 2 Section 15890 Ductwork 15890-1 to 4 Section 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15910-1 to 3 Section 15936 Air Outlets and Inlets 15936-1 to 2 Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 to 5 DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Requirements for Electrical Work 16010-1 to 10 Section 16111 Raceways and Fittings 16111-1 to 4 Section 16112 Surface Raceways 16112-1 to 2 Section 16120 Wire and Cable 16120-1 to 3 Section 16130 Boxes 16130-1 to 3 Section 16141 Wiring Devices 16141-1 to 3 Section 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures 16160-1 to 2 Section 16195 Electrical Identification 16195-1 to 2 Section 16418 Surge Protection Devices 16418-1 to 4 Section 16450 Grounding and Bonding 16450-1 to 2 Section 16461 Transformers 16461-1 to 4 Section 16471 Panelboarrls 16471-1 to 4 Section 16483 Motor Starters 16483-1 to 3 Section 16485 Contactors 16485-1 to 2 Section 16491 Disconnect Switches 16491-1 to 2 Section 16510 Lighting Fixtures 16510-1 to 2 Section 16527 Lighting Control Cabinet 16527-1 to 3 Section 16535 Emergency Lighting Equipment 16535-1 to 2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INFORMATION ONLY Brock PBYSR BrockFill DS Shaw Legion Pro 1.75 Shaw 156SG All Seasons 2 Shaw Truhop Shaw 740 TF Elevate 68 TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE EVALUATIONS Roofing(Lokseam)Certificate Wall Panel(PBR-"R Panel)Certification Exterior Doors(Mesker)Certification and Additional Plans Storefront Windows(Kawneer)Certification and Additional Plans and Glazing Ceiling Shutter(Cornell)Certification and Additional Plans SPECIFICATIONS FOR MAINTENANCE BUILDING ONLY Section 08 71 00 Finish Hardware 08 71 00-1 to 12 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL Electronic Competitive Sealed Proposals(CSP)will be accepted for the following project,through the City's E-bid System. Electronic Proposals shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address by selecting "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes (addenda)to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. Submission of an Electronic Proposal REQUIRES completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes,registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,General(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions,see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, SECTION 00200,PART 2 included in the project proposal documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals are to be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids(a,pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland,City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m.,Thursday,September 3,2020. All Proposals shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly"opened"and read aloud into the public record followingthe closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: PK2001 PROPOSAL NO.:0820-53 A mandatory pre-proposal conference will be held at the Project Site at 13050 Shadow Creek Parkway,Pearland,Texas 77584 at 10:00 a.m.on Thursday August, 13,2020.A virtual option is available: To join by phone: 1-408-418-9388 Access Code 126 650 7959 Meeting Password: jmDJMv7X42J 8/2019 00100-1 of CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE The project will entail the construction of a multi-purpose field, miracle field, maintenance building, restroom/concessions building, pavement, utilities, lighting, fencing, grading, and landscaping complete and in place. Upon award of a contract,the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware,interne access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information,see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, SECTION 00200,PART 1.4. Electronic Proposal Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download at no cost on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (713)956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America,Inc. (713)334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832)613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction—Dodge Reports 1-800-393-6343 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and Proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. Proposals must be accompanied by a Contractors Qualification Statement(Section 00300 Part C). No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety(90)days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to"day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check,Certified Check,or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5%of the total bid price must accompany 8/2019 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE each proposal. Offerors submitting Proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two Offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the request. Bid Security shall be delivered to:Office of City Purchasing,Finance Department,City Hall Annex,3 523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law,as amended,upon the form included in the Contract Documents,in the amount of one hundred percent(100%)of the final contract price, such bonds are to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas,and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570",naming the City of Pearland,Texas as Obligee. Additionally,the successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work,as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement if so stated. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race,color,religion, sex,or national origin. The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance ofthis contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration ofDOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach ofthis agreement, which may result in the termination ofthis agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252,42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations,Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement,minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race,color,or national origin in consideration for an award. Selection Criteria: The Contract will be awarded based on provision of"Best Value" to the Owner. "Best Value"is defined as: the lowest price for the provision of the highest quality of goods and services in the performance of the work as determined to be most advantageous to the Owner. (252.043 Local Government Code) Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a satisfactory scope, schedule or price with the selected Offeror,the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next highest ranked Offeror in the order of the ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. 8/2019 00100-3 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE The Owner may undertake such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work,the accuracy of information provided and the reputation of the Offeror with former clients. Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by,or investigation of,such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Proposals containing any Conditional Modifiers will not be accepted. The City of Pearland(Owner)reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests and to reject any or all proposals for any reason. A proposal that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the proposed price,scope or schedule. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Maria Rodriguez Interim City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date 08/05/2020 Second Publication date 08/12/2020 8/2019 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term"the City". 1.2 The term "Offeror" means one who submits a Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder,who submits a proposal to an Offeror.The term"Successful Offeror" means,on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided,the Offeror submitting a proposal that represents,in the Owner's opinion,the Best Value to the City. The term "Proposal Documents" includes the Invitation to Propose, Instructions to Offerors,the Proposal(Parts A, B and C), and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addendaissued prior to receipts of proposals). 1.3 The term "E-bid System"refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web-based system that provides all Proposal Documents electronically to potential Offerors and forms the pathway for interested Offerors to submit proposals in response to advertisement and invitation. The term "e-bid" and/or "electronic bid" means the Offeror's electronic proposal submitted to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above proposal process to submit an authorized proposal to the City in response to an Invitation to Propose. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and construction records management system used by involved parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized information distribution hub for document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for this system will be issued to the successful Offeror at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Proposal Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term"Alternate(s)"or"Add Alternate(s)"as used interchangeably herein is defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based solely on the Owner's acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor, material, equipment and overhead costs to perform the work of the Alternate as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate shall be added to the Base Proposal and made a part of the Contractprice. 12-2017 00200-1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 2. Registration forE-bid System 2.1 The Owner' s E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx.Proposal documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Potential Offerors MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,General(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Offeror's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of proposal opportunities. Downloading any project proposal data will automatically place the Offeror's contact information on the list of plan holders list and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates,changes or addenda associated with that project 2.2 The electronic Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The foil can be printed for Offeror's use,but the Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid Sy stem may be directed by email to: ebids@pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Proposal Documents 3.1 Complete sets of"electronic" Proposal Documents are available for download to registered Offerors at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Interested Offerors must register as a "Supplier" on this site in order to receive the Proposal Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes,including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Proposal Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Offeror accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents.Downloading of Proposal Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Proposal Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Propose. It is recommended that all interested Offerors, whether proposing directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders proposing to an Offeror,register as a Supplier and download the project Proposal Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Proposal Documents must be used in preparing Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Proposal Documents including, but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 12-2017 00200-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 3.5 Owner and Engineer,in making copies of Proposal Documents available on the above terms,do so only for the purpose of obtaining Proposals on the Work,and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.6 Proposal Documents include but may not be limited to Section 00300 Proposal Parts A,B and C. 4. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 4.1 It is the responsibility of each Offeror before submitting a Proposal, to (a) examine the Proposal Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost,progress,performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal,state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost,progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Offeror's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors,omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents, (f)to recognize and plan for use of the City's "Pro-Trak" software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 4.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Offerors for review,but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Offeror may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes ofbidding or construction. 4.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others,and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof 4.4 Before submitting a Proposal, each Offeror will, at Offeror's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Offeror deems necessary to determine its Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions ofthe Contract Documents. 4.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Offeror access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Offeror deems necessary for submission of a Proposal. Prospective Offerors shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 12-2017 00200-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 4.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures produced by the work have been obtained and paid for by Owner. 4.7 If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 4.8 The submission of a Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Offeror that Offeror has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception,the Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents,and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. If the Offeror knows of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents,he shall notify the Owner and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the proposals are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be considered that the Offeror fully understandsthe Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted in writing no later than five(5)days prior to the opening of proposals. 5. Interpretations and Addenda 5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer via the City's E-bid system during the question period prior to submittal of proposal. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Offerors in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five(5)days prior to the date for opening of Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Proposal Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Offerors that have downloaded Proposal Documents from the City's E- bid Sy stem. 6. Contract Time 6.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed,as set forth in the Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract 12-2017 00200-4 of 12 CITY OFPEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to "time" or"days"shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 7. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus,if any,are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 8. Substitute or"Or-Equal"Items 8.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be awarded on the basis of the selected materials and equipment described in the Plans or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or"or-equal"items.All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean " approved equal". Application for acceptance of any proposed substitution will not be considered by Engineer until after a contract is in place.Offeror shall assume any and all risk associated with the unauthorized substitution of any material of equipment included in or inferred by the plans and specifications. The procedure for submission of any proposed substitution by the Offeror,and its consideration by Engineer,is set forth in the Contract Documents. 9. Proposal Form 9.1 The Proposal form (Section 00300 — Proposal— Parts A, B, C,) is included with the Proposal Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Proposal. All E-bids and Proposals must be submitted on the City's official E-bid Sy stem. All blanks on the Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Offeror shall propose for all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Proposals will be cause for rejection. Only complete proposals will be considered,scored and ranked. 9.2 Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president(or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign)and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed, the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Proposal. 9.3 Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner,executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed, the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Proposal. 9.4 The Offeror shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Proposal form). 9.5 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Proposal must be shown on the Proposal form. 12-2017 00200-5 of 12 CITY OFPEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 9.6 Bid Security and Bonds:Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check,Certified Check,or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid system shall scan and upload a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. 10. Submission of Proposals 10.1 The place,date and/or time designated for opening Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Proposal Schedule shall be made by Addenda. Registered Offerors will receive automatic notification through the E-Bid system by email of any and all changes to the bid documents and or dates and times associated with their submittal. 10.2 Electronic Proposals shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions,terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Offerors utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier. E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Proposals submitted after the proposal date and time will be rejected. Offerors are advised to submit their proposal well in advance of the closing time and to allow for the electronic transfer to complete prior to the closing deadline. 11. Modification and Withdrawal of Proposals 11.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 11.2 Once submitted,Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed(in the manner that a Proposal must be executed)and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, Community Development, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Proposals. 11.3 An Offeror may not modify or withdraw its Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Proposals. No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 11.4 If,within twenty-four(24)hours after Proposals are opened,any Offeror files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Proposal,that Offeror may request to withdraw its Proposal. Thereafter,that Offeror will be disqualified from further proposing on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 12. Opening of Proposals 12.1 Proposals will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly to identify the names of the Offerors and their respective cost proposals,only. An abstract of the amounts of the base Proposals and major alternates(if any) will be made available to Offerors after the opening of Proposals through the E-Bid system. 12-2017 00200-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded,with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Offeror has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 13. Proposals to Remain Subjectto Acceptance 13.1 All Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety(90)days after the day of the Proposal opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Proposal prior to that date. 14. Award of Contract 14.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals,to waive any and all informalities not involving price,schedule or scope and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Offeror deemed,in Owner's sole opinion, to represent the best value. Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: 1) Offeror improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Proposal Documents; 2) Offeror fails to sign the Proposal or improperly signs the Proposal; 3) Offeror qualifies its Proposal; 4) Offeror tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Proposal; 5) Offeror fails to submit the Contractor's Qualifications or fails to respond to any of the required information requested in Section 00300 Proposal or 6) The Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. 14.2 Best Value. The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of"Best Value" to the Owner. Upon receipt of the Proposals,the Owner will consider,score and rank all complete proposals in accordance with the following criteria and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner. Selection Criteria Point Value 1 Proposed price for performance of the full scope of work 50 2 Experience and qualifications of Offeror's project team 15 3 Offeror's experience with projects of similar scope,value and complexity 10 4 Completeness of Offeror's project approach narrative and proposed schedule 5 5 Reputation and Offeror's history with proposed sub-contractors/vendors 10 6 Offeror's Quality Assurance Program and Safety Record 5 7 Offeror's financial capacity to adequately fund the work of the project 5 14.3 In determining to whom to award a contract,the City of Pearland may consider,in addition to the above selection criteria, the following Qualifications of Offeror,and each Offeror must be prepared to submit within two (2) days of Owner's request any or all 12-2017 00200-7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND _ INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS such additional qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Proposal. A contract to be awarded to the Offeror providing the Best Value may be let on either a Lump Sum basis or a Unit Cost basis dependent on the Proposal format. 14.4 Offeror is required to submit for approval a full schedule of values for the project as component of contract negotiations. 14.5 Upon receipt and opening of the proposals, the Owner will score and rank each proposal with respect to the selection criteria contained in this Competitive Sealed Proposal document. After scoring and ranking,an award may be made on the basis ofthe proposal as submitted,without discussion,clarification or modification, or,the Owner may discuss with the selected Offeror,offers for scope and schedule changes and associated cost reductions and other elements of the responder's proposal. If the Owner determines that it is unable to reach a satisfactory contract with the selected responder, then the Owner will terminate discussions with the selected Offeror and proceed to the next responder in order of selection ranking until a contract is reached or the Owner has rejected all proposals. 14.6 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessaryto assist in the evaluation of any Proposal and to establish the responsibility,qualifications and financial ability of Offerors,proposed Subcontractors,suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,to Owner's satisfaction,within the Contract Time. 14.7 Offeror Attendance. The successful Offeror or its representative is required to attend the City Council meeting in which the contract will be considered for award.Owner will establish a schedule for the award with Offeror. 15 Contract Security 15.1 When the Successful Offeror delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner,it must include the required Performance,Payment,Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds(if required)by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 16 Workers'Classification 16.1Texas Government Code § 2155.001 authorizes a penalty of $200 per misclassified individual to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and fails to properly classify their workers and subcontractors.This is effective January 1,2014. 17. Signing of Agreement 17.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Intent to Award to the Successful Offeror,it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form 12-2017 00200-8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS of Agreement,and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten(10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Offeror until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 18. Pre-Proposal Conference 18.1 A pre-proposal conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Propose. Attendance at the pre-proposal conference is MANDATORY to fulfill the prerequisite requirements for Offerors bidding directly to the Owner. 19. Retainage 19.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. 20. Award 20.1 The contract,if awarded,may be awarded to the eligible Offeror submitting the lowest priced and containing the most advantageous proposal for the Owner, complying with these Instructions to Offerors and other proposal requirements in the Documents. By submitting a Proposal,each Offeror agrees and consents that the Owner, in determining the Successful Offeror and his eligibility for award, may consider the Offeror's experience and facilities, conduct and performance under other contracts,financial condition,reputation in the industry, safety record and other factors as noted,which could affect the Offeror's qualifications to perform the work. 20.2 Pursuant to Statute 2269.151 of the Government Code, the City will evaluate the proposals to determine which proposal provides the best value for the Owner. In making said determination, the Owner will consider Criteria as further defined or explained in these Instructions to Offerors and Bid Proposal, including the Offeror's Approach narrative and project schedule, the qualifications and experience of key personnel, quality assurance program and safety record,prior experience on similar projects,acceptability of selected sub- contractors and financial capacity to adequately fund the work of the project. 20.3 The evaluation will be carried out by an evaluation team consisting of members of the Owner's project team and the Engineering Consultant. These team members will assign a score to each of the criteria that ranges from 0-5 described as shown below: Score Description 5 Exceeds Expectations full points 4 Above Expectations 3 Meets Expectations 2 Does not quite Meet Expectations 1 Does not meet Expectations 0 Non-responsive 20.4 The average of the team member's individual rating values will be multiplied by the 12-2017 00200-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS relative weighting points for each of the criteria below, and the total used to rank the Offerors. The Offeror with the highest ranking will be the Offeror considered the Offeror that provides the best responsible value to the Owner and will be recommended to the City for contract award. 20.5 Price=50 points. The Offeror with the lowest proposed price for all work,including all Add or Deductive Alternates,will be awarded Points.All other Offerors will be awarded a score based on a weighted percentage of the difference from the low Offeror. 20.6 Experience of Key Personnel= 15 points.Offeror must demonstrate minimal experience with its project team. The three (3) key staff include: the Project Manager, General Superintendent and the Scheduler/Buyer or Safety Coordinator. Minimal experience required for each Key team member shall be as follows: Project Manager,minimum of ten years verified project management experience on projects of similar size,scope and complexity,minimum one year with Offeror's firm,provide list of prior projects, Superintendent,minimum of ten years verified experience in the industry,minimum of two years with the Offeror's firm,provide list of prior projects. Scheduler/Buyer/Admin,minimum one year experience providing support to the project team and performing duties in support of the project objectives. Provide three recent examples of this team's: • experience with projects of similar scope,complexity and value • ability to schedule and phase the work properly to meet an Owner's schedule • ability to adjust or accelerate portions of the schedule to meet Owner's needs • ability to deal with end-users concerns and expectations The Offeror must allocate 100% of the work hours of the General Superintendent to this project. No member of this team may be replaced without notification to the Owner and Owner reserves the right to review experience of any team member replacement and reject to any team member on the grounds of reputation or experience 20.7 Offeror's Qualifications and work history of the Offeror's firm= 10 points. The Offeror is required to provide references for projects of similar scope, value and complexity to demonstrate its ability to prosecute complex work including high-technology components or similarly complex electrical,mechanical or building components where the subcontractor and Offeror have worked together.The Offeror acknowledges that it is in the best interest of the Owner and the Offeror to have the workperformed by experienced personnel in eachparticular construction discipline with particular interest and attention to the following with provided references: 20.8 Approach and Schedule = 5 points. The thoroughness and detail of the Offeror's approach to prosecuting the work and the ability to commit to an acceptable delivery schedule for the completed project in accordance with the Owner's desired schedule The Offeror's 12-2017 00200-10 of 12 CITY OFPEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS experience and commitment to identifying and meeting the specific milestones for the various components of the project as identified in the approach narrative and schedule. The Offeror's approach to dealing with end-users of the project and shifting concerns. Discuss past performance and lessons learned during project close out phase on the three(3)examples of similar scope,complexity and value. Provide the awarded contract amount, final contract amount and explanation of any change orders. Provide a proposed project schedule using Critical Path Method. Offeror must provide a Critical Path summary level schedule for this Project indicating the Offeror's proposed construction schedule. Owner will assess the quality and clarity of the Offeror's work-plan including schedule, logistics/phasing plan, understanding of the work and sensitivity to ongoing operations in the facilities. 20.9 Identification and History with selected Sub-contractors=10 points. Submit a complete list of selected sub-contractors and the basis for that selection. Provide a brief list of historic relationship with each and a list of projects each sub-contractor has performed with the Offeror. Owner reserves the right to contact sub-contractors to discuss details of previous projects. The Sub-Contractor's reputation among other governmental entities, owners, suppliers,and will be considered for awarding of points.Strong consideration will be given to first-hand experience on prior City of Pearland projects. Owner places positive emphasis on long-term relationships between General and Sub-Contractors. 20.10 Quality Assurance Program=2points and Safety Record=3 points for a total=5 points. The Offeror and the subcontractors must provide owner with their Experience Modification Rate(EMR). The Offeror with the lowest EMR will be awarded a 3 rating.Any Offeror with an EMR above 1.0 or with a planned subcontractor with an EMR above 1.0 will be awarded a 0 rating valve. All Offerors will be awarded a value based on their own EMR. The Offeror must provide a summary of the Offeror firm's Quality Assurance Program based on self-performed work and how this plan includes subcontractors. These criteria will be judged separately for a total of 5 points. 20.11 Financial Statement of Offeror= 5 points. Provide audited financial statement consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Offeror for the Offeror's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal,which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Offeror shall be used to determine a Offeror's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. An Offeror's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Offeror's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being considered. The Offeror's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information,if released,would give advantage to a competitor or bidder,and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Offeror. 12-2017 00200-11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 20.14 MaximumPossible Score=100 Points. END OF SECTION 12-2017 00200-12 of 12 CITYOFPEARLAND SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL Section 00300 SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART A Date: September 3,2020 Bid of Forney Construction, LLC ,an individual proprietorship/a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting of , for the construction of: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: PK2001 PROPOSAL NO.:0820-53 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Propose, and Instructions to Offerors, the undersigned Offeror hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence,labor, machinery,equipment,tools and materials,and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 located at 13050 Shadow CreekPkwy,Pearland,TX 77584 with all related appurtenances,complete,tested,and operational,in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Kimley-Horn and Associates,Inc., Kristina Malek, 346.888.3887,for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Part "B",the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Offeror. It is understood that,in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work,the applicable unit prices shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Offerors is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and,that a fully executed,signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing,Finance Department,City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland,Texas 77581. The Offeror agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Offeror,including the Financial Statement of Offeror,as required by the Instructions to Offerors if requested to do so as a condition of the Proposal process. The Offeror binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond,each in the amount of one hundred percent(100%)of the total Contract Price, according to the fonns included in the Contract Documents,for performing and completing the said work within the time Offeror's Initial's: Zy 12-2017 00300-1 of CITY OF PEARLAND SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL stated and for the prices stated in Part "B"of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. The undersigned Offeror agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 255 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500—Standard Form of Agreement,in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts proposed in this Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety(90)days following date of Proposal opening,or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Offeror. It is understood that in the event the Successful Offeror fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred (100)percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten(10)days of the Notice of Award,the Successful Offeror will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Offerors. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to"day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). The Offeror acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Proposal Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Proposal prices. • Addendum No.: 1 Date:8.10.20 Addendum No.: 3 Date:8.24.20 Addendum No.: 2 Date:8.14.20 Addendum No.: 4 Date:8.31.20 Offeror hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals am those named. Offeror has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement,participated in any collusion,or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name:Forney Construction, LLC Alberto Garza Title: President Address: 8945 Long Point Rd Suite 200 Houston,TX 77055 Phone No: 713.397.0291 ATTEST: (Seal,if Offeror is a Corporation) (Typed or Printed Name) Alberto Garza,President Signature Date: 9/3/20 "4 END OF SECTION Offeror's Initial's: 2/1/ 12-2017 00300-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND Proposal SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM 50 points All items below are for labor,materials,equipment,incidentals and related tasks as required to provide work complete i n place,approved and accepted by Owner,and ready for occupaicy/use at commencement of waranty period. Quantity UOM Description R��ice Unit Price Total Amount • Mobilization and Demobilization: Fumish all labor, $ 124,927.97 $ 124,927.97 materials,equipment and i nci dental s required for the Contractor to mobilize aid demobilize. Shall i nd ude all costs for Contractor's insurances and bonds, Complete 1 Base Bid 1 LS construdion/building aid storm water permits Contrail and fees,job trailers and site administration expenses Documents aid utilities.This item shall not exceed more than three (3)percent of the Total Bid amount of this contrail. Demolition: $ 14,499.36 $ 14,499.36 Fumi sh all labor,materials,equipment,aid incidentals required for major demolition a tivitiesto the extent shown on the drawings,i nd udi ng a all denol i ti on Complete 2 Base Bid 1 LS ailivities associated with the existing fadlities. Contract Demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt Documents operation of the edging facilities.This item shall not include demolition activities associated with specific process seas l i sted in Bid Items 3 through 16. 3 Base Bid 1 LS Erosion Control and Grading: Construction of erosion Complete $ 552,287.92 $ 552,287.92 control,tree protecti on fend ng,mass grading,and Contract related work or equipment as required. Documents Utilities and Storm Drainage: Construction of wet and $ 310,369.43 $ 310,369.43 dry uti l i ti es i nd udi ng potable water, Complete 4 Base Bid 1 LS sanitary sewer,storm drainage,electric, internet,and Contract related work or equipment as required, Documents complete and in place. Offerror'slnitial Z4f 00300-Pat B-1of3 CITY OF PEARLAND Proposal SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM 50 points A l l items below are for labor,materials,equipment,i net dental s and related tasks as required to provide work complete in place,approved and accepted by Owner,aid ready for occupancy/use at commencement of warranty period. Quantity UOM Description ec p Reference Unit Price Total Amount Restroom/Concessions building: Construction of the Complete $ 852,420.27 $ 852,420.27 5 Base Bid 1 LS restroom/concession building aid related work or Contract equipment as required. Documents Multipurposefield: Coordination of $ 873,017.46 $ 873,017.46 construction of the multipurpose field,induding Complete 6 Base Bid 1 LS synthetic turf preparation,wicket infield,fencing,and Contract drainage. Documents MiradeField: Construction of themiradefield, �'omPlae $ 274,052.91 $ 274,052.91 7 Base Bid 1 LS induding surfacing,dugouts,fencing,electrical system. Contract nnri tmcntc Parking: The construction of the parking lots, induding Complete $ 508,758.77 $ 508,758.77 8 Base Bid 1 L S pavement,curbs,stri pi ng/marki ng, Contract accessible parking,sidewalks, ramps,perimeter fencing, Documents electrical service. Lighting: Coordination of construction of the $ 17,795.24 $ 17,795.24 9 Base B i d 1 L S sports field aid pa-king lot lighting,i nd udi ng provision Complete of power aid power source,suitably sized control Contract panf3I s. Documents Landscape and Irrigation: Construction of the $ 210,939.48 $ 210,939.48 landscape aid irrigation,induding fine grading,topsoil, Complete 10 Base Bid 1 LS bed prep,mulch, landscape/plantings, irrigation,flag Contract poles. Documents Maintenance building: Construction of the Complete $ 411,218.01 $ 411,218.01 11 Base Bid 1 LS mantenaice building, induding utility connections, Contract sidewalk pavement,building,aid building systems. Documents - left turn lane: Construction of the left turn lane, Complete $ 115,778.88 $ 115,778.86 12 Base Bid 1 LS induding demolition, mantenaiceof traffic, pavement, Contract traffic control,striping. Documents Offerror's Initial 00300-Pal B-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND Proposal SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART B PRICE PROPOSAL FORM 50 points A l l items below are for labor, materials,equipment,incidentals and related tasks as required to provide work complete in place,approved and accepted by Owner,and ready for omJpaxy/use at commencement of waraity period. Quantity UOM Description Refer�ce Unit Price Total Amount Alternate Additive Alter nate#1: Construction of the northeast Complete $ 217,508.02 $ 217,508.02 13 Work 1 LS perking lot,including pavement,curbs,striping, 1 l i ght Contract Items pole aid directional signs. Documents Alternate AdditiveAlternate#2: Si tefurnishinginstallation. City Complete $ 8,138.44 $ 8,138.44 14 Work 1 LS to direct purchase. Items i nd ude batting rack,waste Contract Items receptacles,bleachers,aid teem benches. Documents Alternate Additive Alternate#3: Bleacher installation.City to Complete $ 7,044.63 $ 7,044.63 15 Work 1 LS direct purchase. Contract Items Documents Alternate Additive Alternate#4: Shade strudure Complete $ 9,395.90 $ 9,395.90 16 Work 1 LS i nstal l ati on. City to direct purchase. Contract Items Documents Alternate AdditiveAlternate#5: Coordination of $ 44,232.11 $ 44,232.11 Work construction of the Phase 1 Add 2 sports field 17 Items 1 LS lighting,including provision of power and mete power source,suitably sized control panels.City Contract to direct purchase M usco Lighting. Documents eror' hori zed Signature Offerror's Initial 2/7 00300-Pat B-3of3 Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II Shadow Creek Ranch Park 13050 Shadow Creek Pkwy Pearland,TX 77584 Bid Date: 9/3/2020 Company: Forney Construction Duration: 36 Weeks 8945 Long Point Rd.Suite 200 Start Date: 10/20/2020 Houston,TX 77055 Completion Date: 7/3/2021 Project: Site Estimator: Zach Hughes Plan Set Issued For Construction:July 24,2020 Terracon Geotechnical Report:June 12,2019 Project Manual Dated:July 2020 Addendum#1:August 10,2020 Addendum#2:August 14,2020 Addendum#3:August 24,2020 Addendum#4:September 1,2020 SLUM Per plans and specs we propose installation of the items spelled out within each category below. pescriotion Ouantlty S&ILf Total Mobilization and Demobllizatlog LS 1.00 S 124,927.97 S 124,927.97 Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize.Shall include all costs for contractor's insurance and bonds,construction and building and stormwater permits and fees,job trailers and site administration expenses and utilities.This item shall not exceed more than three(3)percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. Demolltlon IS 1.00 S 14,499.36 S 14,499.36 Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for major demolition activities to the extent shown on the drawings,including all demolition activities associated with the existing facilities. Demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the exiting facilities.This item shall not include demolition activities associated with specific process areas listed in Bid Items 3 through 16. $Tosion Control and Grading LS 1.00 S 552,287.92 S 552,287.92 Construction of erosion control,tree protection fencing,mass grading,and related work or equipment as required. Utilities and Storm Dreg LS 1.00 S 310,369.43 S 310,369.43 Construction of wet and dry utilities including potable water,sanitary sewer,storm drainage,electric, Internet.and related work or equipment as required,complete and In place. gstroom/Concessions Building LS 1.00 S 852,420.27 S 852,420.27 Construction of the restroom/concession building and related work or equipment as required. Multiouroose Field LS 1.00 S 873,017.46 $ 873,017.46 Coordination of construction of the multipurpose field,including synthetic turf preperation,wicket infield,fencing,and drainage. jgkacale Field LS 1.00 S 274,052.91 S 274,052.91 Construction of the miracle field,including surfacing,dugouts,fencing.electrical system. Parking LS 1.00 S 508,758.77 S 508,758.77 The construction of the parking lots,including pavement,curbs,striping/marking,accessible parking, sidewalks,ramps,perimeter fencing,electrical service. Shadow Creek Ranch Park 13050 Shadow Creek Pkwy Pearland,TX 77584 Bid Date: 9/3/2020 Company: Forney Construction Duration: 36 Weeks 8945 Long Point Rd.Suite 200 Start Date: 10/20/2020 Houston,TX 77055 Completion Date: 7/3/2021 Project: Site Estimator: Zech Hughes tine LS 1.00 S 17,795.24 S 17,795.24 Coordination of construction of the sports fild and parking lot lighting,including provision of power and power source,suitability sized control panels landscape and Irrisatlog LS 1.00 S 210,939.48 S 210,939.48 Construction of the landscape and irrigation,including fine grading,topsoil,bed prep,mulch, landscape/plantings,irrigation,flagpoles.Per Addendum 4 Transplant 6 Trees Maintenance Building LS 1.00 S 411,218.01 S 411,218.01 Construction of the maintenance building,including utility connections,sidewalk pavement,building and building systems. Left Turn Lans LS 1.00 S 115,778.86 S 115,778.86 Construction of the Left Turn Lane,including demolition.maintenance of traffic,pavement,traffic control,striping. Proposal Pricine Good For 90 Days Only All Inclusive Base-Bid Turn-Key Contract S 4,266,065.70 Additive Alternate St LS 1.00 S 217,508.02 S 217,508.02 Construction of the northwest parking lot,including pavement,curbs,stripping,1 light pole and directional signs. Additive Alternate#j IS 1.00 S 8,138.44 S 8,138.44 Site furnishing installation.City to direct purchase.Items include batting rack,waste receptacles, bleachers,and team benches. Additive Alternate#3 LS 1.00 S 7,044.63 S 7,044.63 Bleacher installation,City to direct purchase. Additive Alternate#4 LS 1.00 S 9,395.90 S 9,395.90 Shade structure installation.City to direct purchase. Additive Alternate#S LS 1.00 S 44,232.11 S 44,232.11 Coordination of the Phase 1 Field Sports field lighting,including provision of power and power source, suitability sized control panels.City to direct purchase Musco Lighting. Signature: Date: Authorized Agent,Client,or Architect CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT (Required from ALL OFFORERS) Submitted in reference to: Shadows Creek Ranch Park Phase2 By: Zach Hughes Title: Vice President of Recreation General Offeror Information. The signatory of this questionnaire attests to the truth and accuracy of all statements and of all answers to interrogatories hereinafter made under a penalty of perjury. 1. INDIVIDUAL/PARTNERSHIP/CORPORATION/JOINT VENTURE Principal Office Address: 8945 Long Point Road,Suite 200. Houston,Texas 77055 Telephone Number:( 713 ) 224-1900 Fax Number:( ) N/A Email address: zach.hughesna.forneyconstruction.com Indicate as Applicable: XX A Corporation A Partnership An Individual Forney Construction is a privately held limited liabilit\ corporation. If a Corporation,complete this section: Date of Incorporation: 9/11/2008 State of Incorporation: Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name: Tom Forney President's Name: Alberto Garza Ryan Nunn,Zach Hunches. Bob Fretz, Tracy Daimler,Martin Jasinski,Luke Withers, Vice President's Name(s): Steve Mounts Secretary's Name: Treasurer's Name: Erin Peters If a partnership,complete this section: Date of organization: 4 State whether partnership is general or limited: 12-2017 Offeror's Initials: 00300-PartC-1 of7 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C Name and address of each partner: If an individual,complete this section: Name and business address: All Offerors MUST provide the following information: 1. How many years has your organization been in business as a general contractor under your present business name? 12 years 2. How many years'experience in this type of construction work has your organization had: (a) as a general contractor? 12 years (b)as a subcontractor? 3. Are you a member of the BBB,International Standards Organization(ISO),or other quality associations or quality certifying organizations? 4. Dunn&Bradstreet# N/A 5. Where is your main office located? 8945 Long Point Road.Suite 200. Houston. Texas 77055 6. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? No 7. If so,where and why? N/A 2. O1 FEROR'S KEY PERSONNEL EXPERIENCE 15 points A Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence that the minimum qualification requirements are met for each position: 1. Key Personnel Experience-Provide qualifications of the project personnel who will perform key functions. Minimum information to be contained on the resume of each individual shall include:Years in position,years with Offeror's firm,education, position occupied on each prior assignment,description of duties on each assignment. Provide this information on the following team members below. Once identified these team members may not be changed except with written notification and the Owner's approval of any and all replacement personnel. What is the name and percentage of time allocated to the following personnel? For Project Manager Jason Burt For Project Superintendent Brian Chavis For Scheduler/Safety Zinai Castleberry Provide detailed information regarding each team member's experience on a separate sheet OR provide detailed resume's and add as"Attachment#1 to Part C". 12-2017 Offeror's Initials: Z� 00300-PartC-2 of 7 Proposed Project Team VICE PRESIDENT OF RECREATION ' Zach Hughes 6 , PROJECT MANAGER VICE PRESIDENT OF FIELD OPERATIONS i • NIPGENERAL SUPERINTENDENT y - Jason Burt - Steve Mounts Kevin ® , ,. ".", j Fogarty .40 ASSISTANT PROJECT MANAGER L °' - SAFETY& QUALITY TEAM ONSITE PROJECT '° MI SUPERINTENDENT Forney w, : IAZinai CommitteeSafety fail Castleberry Brian Chavis FORNEY SAFETY & QUALITY TEAM Safety By Design SAFETY & QUALITY TEAM 41, Raken As part of our on-boarding process,each staff member-regardless of position-is asked to take a StrengthsFinder assessment. Not only does this help us learn about our teammates and how to communicate with each other more effectively,it also helps us determine project teams.We look for teams whose strengths complement the others to maximize your client experience. In the resumes that follow,you will get an intimate glimpse into this team,their strengths and get a feel for what really makes them tick. Jason Burt, Project Manager ID Throughout his 23 years of existing construction and site work experience,Jason has an expansive portfolio of work encompassing an impressive collection of renowned golf courses around the ' world.His tenure and project listing illustrate his ability to successfully manage new construction ' and site development projects within occupied facilities, and would be an excellent fit for the ii Primrose Park Project. ( EDUCATION: - r Ohio State University I A.A.S.in Turf Grass Management /'` PROJECT EXPERIENCE: Houston Arboretum and Nature Center I H O U S TON T E X AS Sustainable Sites classified master plan to restore and protect The Houston Arboretum and Nature Strategic Center's natural property as well as expand the current education program.Project scope includes Decisive and critical thinker extensive landscaping restoration,new trail networks,and new Children's Discovery Garden. The Arranger first of its kind in our city,this SITES qualification will position this team as a pioneer of sustainable Excellent coordinator and multi-tasker construction in the Houston area. Responsibility Committed to following though River Oaks Country Club IH O U S TON, T E X AS $14 million renovation and addition of River Oaks Country Club included new construction of a Futuristic 2 story,8,400 square foot Pro Shop and Halfway House on the golf course, new landscape and Inspired by what is yet to come hardscape, and reconfiguration of existing golf tunnel. Jason managed the River Oaks project Ideation while working for Medalist Golf,Inc. In addition to managing over 70 employees and a variety of Improves on the existing subcontractors, he assisted with key sitework such as the installation of an arch culvert,tunnel construction,and bayou restoration. CLIENT TESTIMONIAL: -Part of this project involved the construction Simapo Island Golf Club I H A I K 0 U, H A I N A N CHINA of an extensive drainage system that $20 million high-profile golf course by Tom Doak;part of the project included an extensive drainage included numerous wetlands.Jason system that included numerous wetlands. Jason assisted in the design and water management provided valuable input into the design and water management of the complicated of a complicated system that dealt with tidal marshes and critical establishment of precise water system that dealt with tidal marshes and elevations.This project was completed prior to Jason's hiring at Forney. critical establishment of precise water elevations. Jason showed Diamond Bay I N H A T R A N G, V I E TN A M the highest level of passion and professionalism toward his position.I trust Oversaw entire construction project in beginning phases. Was the fastest moving construction that he can easily provide your project with project at the time in Vietnam. This project was completed prior to Jason's hiring at Fomey the highest level of service in a manner that will produce the project goals.' Dye Course at French Lick I F R EN C H LICK, INDI AN A -RO N FA R R I S, Simpao Island Golf Jason installed the irrigation system for the brand new,Pete Dye golf course situated at the highest Club point in Indiana on a rock.This project was completed prior to Jason's hiring at Forney Pinetree Country Club I K EN N ES A W, G E O R G I A Complete renovation of green,bunkers and irrigation system,completed in 2008.This project was completed prior to Jason's hiring at Fomey. Ritz Carlton Members Course ISAR A S O T A, FLORID A A brand new Tom Fazid Design,Jason was a superintendent on this$14 million project from beginning to completion.This project was completed prior to Jason's hiring at Forney Years in the Industry/ Years with Forney Zinai Flores, Assistant Project Manager Zinai comes to us with 9 years in construction. She is a seasoned professional who excels in coordination and management.As Assistant Project Manager,Zinai will oversee field operations, maintain the project schedule and budget,and buy-out and contract procedures for subcontractors. She is a client-focused leader who illustrates our core values of service driven client satisfaction, goes above and beyond the call of duty for her projects,and is a natural leader within construction teams. PROJECT EXPERIENCE: River Oaks Country Club l HOUSTON, TEXAS Renovation River Oaks Country Club including key sitework such as the installation of an arch culvert,tunnel construction,and bayou restoration. Analytical Thinks things through Houston Arboretum and Nature Center I HOUSTON TEXAS Sustainable Sites classified master plan to restore and protect The Houston Arboretum and Nature Restorative Center's natural property as well as expand the current education program.Project scope includes Finds improvements ad solutions extensive landscaping restoration,new trail networks,and new Children's Discovery Garden. The Focus first of its kind in our city,this SITES qualification will position this team as a pioneer of sustainable Goal setter and goal getter construction in the Houston area Achiever Memorial Park Driving Range and Maintenance Facility I HOUSTON, T E X A S Leads by example Forney was awarded this project from the Houston Astros Golf Foundation in February of 2019. Harmony Construction consisted of a 2-story steel hitting structure -455ft long x 25ft wide. The structure Seeks areas of agreement increased golfer hitting stations from 57 to 84 potential stations.The Fomey team assisted in the CLIENT TESTIMONIAL: design process,development of budget,completing the permit process,build and completing project "You have a great team and they have by November 1st to ensure that the course aligned with the PGA rules to host the Houston Open. performed,and continue to perform for ROCC in a superior manner." 1885 St.James Place Tenant Build-Outs I HOUSTON, TEXAS -J 0 E BENDY, River Oaks Country $450,000 interior build-out for two tenants in this Class A Office Space located in the heart of San Club Felipe Green. The first is a high-end Building Management Office totaling 2.000 square feet. The second build out is for tenant Edelman Financial Services consisting of 4,082 square feet of office space for this nationwide financial services group.Zinai served as Project Manager for build-out of the offices for Edelman Financial Services,Grimes and Fertittta,Erikson Moore and St.James Place Management Office. Eating Recovery Center ITHE WOODLANDS, TEXAS AND HOUSTON, TX $1.4 million build-out of 8,747 square foot healthcare facility in Houston and$1.2 million build-out of 6,828 square foot healthcare facility in The Woodlands. Build-out components included exam rooms,labs,offices,nurse stations,staff rooms,multi-purpose spaces,and lobby. Vecino Airline Children Clinic Expansion j HOUSTON, T E X AS $1.8 million phased project included 5,300 square feet in additions and 2,700 square feet of renovations to the existing offices,nurse stations, and exam rooms.The project doubled Vecino Health Center's capacity to provide high-quality and affordable health care to medically undeserved communities in Houston. Specialized Skill Sets: • Regularly leads construction teams • Focused on client satisfaction q/1 • Leverages recent experience on projects similar to Shadow Creek Ranch Years in the Industry/ Years with Forney Park ..nw Brian Chavis, Project Superintendent • Brian is a hands-on,client-first project superintendent who is proactive in chasing down problems before they occur.His priority is to complete the job at hand on time,in budget,and exactly how you pictured it. He stays busy on each site,producing and expecting productivity from all workers on the job.Brian is a Garza team member known for his constant efficiency,outstanding productivity, and dedication to completing what he started;he is an excellent asset to any project. 44 PROJECT EXPERIENCE: Camp Strake COLDSPRING, TEXAS Camp Strake is the development of a 2,816 acre property surrounded by Sam Houston National Forest set to open in 2020.The camp will include 20 campsites,climbing pavilions,shooting sports center, zip lines,extensive trails systems,new lakes and more.The Leadership Institute will feature a training Strategic center,cabins,dormitories,an arena,and a chapel. Decisive and critical thinker River Oaks Country Club I HOUSTON, TEXAS Achiever Renovation River Oaks CountryClub includingkeysitework such as the installation of an arch Leads by example culvert,tunnel construction,and bayou restoration. Self-Assurance Strong inner compass Houston Arboretum and Nature Center l HOUSTON TEXAS Responsibility Sustainable Sites classified master plan to restore and protect The Houston Arboretum and Nature Committed to following through Center's natural property as well as expand the current education program.Project scope includes Relator extensive landscaping restoration,new trail networks,and new Children's Discovery Garden. The Enjoy close relationships with others first of its kind in our city,this SITES qualification will position this team as a pioneer of sustainable construction in the Houston area. CLIENT TESTIMONIAL: '...has been an extraordinary construction Memorial Hermann Greater Heights Sleep Lab I HOUSTON, T E X AS partner for the Houston Arboretum This 2160 SF healthcare renovation,valued at$380,000,included the remodel of existing office space and Nature Center.On our complicated into a Sleep Lab.This project was marked by a great working relationship with the architect,quick project,they have deftly managed complex civil engineering issues and response and communication,and efficient completion of the project. aging infrastructure while respecting important natural ecosystems.Their Memorial Hermann TIRR Switchgear I HOUSTON, TEXAS knowledge and skills have been invaluable $430,000 healthcare renovation project included relocation of the existing electrical switchgear in the successful implementation of our service from the basement level to the second floor level.The overall project had two phases:exterior extensive restoration effort.' remodel of flood wall surrounding Memorial Hermann TIRR in the medical center and interior remodel D E e a I E MARKEY, Houston of physician spaces and reception areas inside Memorial Hermann TIRR. Arboretum and Nature Center Phillips 66 Headquarters I HOUSTON, TEXAS $500 Million ground up construction of a 14 acre site with two commercial office buildings and parking garage for powerhouse energy company,Phillips 66,the highest-ranking Houston-based Fortune 500 company.(prior to joining Forney) The Sovereign at Regent Square I HOUSTON, T E X AS $100 million ground-up construction of luxury,high end apartments that rise over the banks of Buffalo Bayou.The 21 story building includes swimming pool,fitness center,massage room,ten to fifteen foot ceilings,yoga studio.and more.(prior to joining Forney) Specialized Skill Sets: • Recent experience with Camp Strake and the Houston Arboretum provides a real-world par- allel in scope to Shadow Creek Ranch Park. • Focused on client satisfaction and building a Years in the Industry/ collaborative team at every level Years with Forney CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C 3. OFFEROR'S ORGANIZATIONAL EXPERIENCE 10 points A. Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence of successful,on-time completion of a minimum of three projects of comparable scope,dollar value and technical complexity as the prime general contractor. Projects shall be drawn from work performed within the last five years and shall be examples of-ground-up"construction. If available,examples should include projects performed for governmental entities and in all cases should include the contact information for persons familiar with the project in the employ of the owner at the time of construction. Provision of contacts shall imply your organization's agreement to the Owner contacting those named individuals. Additional information maybe provided on a separate sheet labeled "Attachment 2 to Part C", if required. PROJECT 1: Please review the following project profiles for detailed information. Owner's Name and Contact Information: Project Name: Type of facility: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Year of Completion: Location(City and State): PROJECT#2 Owner's Name and Contact Information: Project Name: Type of facility: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Year of Completion: Location(City and State): PROJECT#3 Owner's Name and Contact Information: Project Name: Type of facility: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Year of Completion: Location(City and State): t2 2017 Offeror's Initials:(.h 00300-PartC-3 of7 Houston Arboretum Master Plan S. 1. r j ; Cr ., ."ill__A _a� ., • wf�;1t',.r - _ _ - v. '44 • • ril w, - ti4rOil ' s t. %lb .. ,••� ','. +'� ..\. ..wz .t ,1 ...i ' ma's - .a• ".'mod A .7. !Y• .t4 ! • •i• - �7' -.a t•T •'a �i1r.J�•4 i �L' .J .. AYE • ;il3 , . w.e, , r - txr .. _ y-At,t1M�w -t.. $ '; • `. ,,\• f` , 7 •` ,• w 1.,t `_4.y •.:r.. �,f .. R t4 ' ► • i � r , I /s'aar - Cfj:.-;'''.7t3"..-t. I's' ----- .._ -._ ________:=—------- = - ,,. ...., .% ,%'. ,..,.irciffiki: 8, r. . ,"f-i ..:'.., ,,,', ', •if f.1- C 'f v � v - - - _ X" __ `- - •1 tw# • F tom'* +t 4ty, x s f. } Team Architect Design Scope Zach Hughes,Drake Forney,Alberto Workshop S14 million master plan to restore and Garza,Scott Linn,Kenneth McGowan, Value protect the natural property and expand Jason Burt,Brian Chavis,Zinai Castleberry $14,000,000 current education program at the Houston Role Arboretum.Project includes new visitor General Contractor Year of Completion 2020 and even pavilion,administrative building, Owner extensive landscaping restoration,new Houston Arboretum&Nature Center trail networks,and new children's discovery garden.Currently operating under the Hosting 200,000 visitors annually, this 155-acre nonprofit nature sustainable SITES Gold-Certification 0,1cD FOR, sanctuary exists to provide education about the natural environ- Standard,this project encompasses a� v ment and serves as a haven for native plants and animals. Forney wetland,ponds,boardwalks,and a phased a ' y is responsible for the implementation of rigorous standards for the • strategic approach across the 75 acres of • m Vegetation and Soil Protection Zones(VSPZ),managing and co - network eyPORN� municating compliance measures to subcontractors on-site When approved for the sustainable SITES Gold-Certification Standard, this project will be the first of its kind in the City of Houston Memorial Park Driving Range ---.---_ : ill� i -r r_. ..r. 1•„„, + „,„„Ltillr 40 .11.,11. %, _,...... .. • r __ _..',�. . ,:.._� ..,•.. ..._. -- .." • I 0 / f S • 1 , RR Or 0 f w L _:. Y • ,0:i FOR, Scope 45 5f;o Team Forney was awarded this project from R. 7, Luke Withers,Zinai the Houston Astros Golf Foundation in ~ Castleberry,Ron Grant February of 2019 Construction consisted •�YFORN�• Role of a 2-story steel hitting structure- Construction Manager at Risk 455ft long x 25ft wide.The structure Memorial Park exists to promote increased golfer hitting stations from Houston Municipal Golf,The City Owner 57 to 84 potential stations.The Forney of Houston,the Parks and Crane Capital Group,LLC team assisted in the design process, Recreation Department and the Architect development of budget,completing the game of golf,by providing the EYP permit process,build and completing highest quality customer service Value project by November 1st to ensure that the and facility conditions possible,in $2,963,664 course aligned with the PGA rules to host the most professional and efficient the Houston Open. manner Year of Completion 2019 River Oaks Country Club - Campus Projects Pro-Shop&Halfway House $3.52 million new construction of a two-story, 8,400 square foot Pro Shop and Halfway House on the golf course.The retail space on the first floor includes a casual dining room, • ._-< - commercial kitchen and Golf Pro Shop.The second floor consists of administrative office it. - r ii.,.'' space. This new building ties into the existing clubhouse which was built in the 1920s. 4-417 ' Forney Construction was brought onto the team early in design in as a Construction i �� ;l+ ► Manager at Risk with a GMP Forney also completed renovations to the existing members 1- ► , entrance,reconfiguring a cart tunnel and renovating the men's restroom,working with the id= s design team from SD all the way to 100%CDs. '' Cart Tunnel&Landscaping $3.12 million renovation of existing cart tunnels to coordinate with the revised landscape and golf course layout.Forney Construction worked with Curtis and Windham providing pre- construction services and acted as the Construction Manager at Risk for the project. The project involved very large excavations adjacent to the existing Clubhouse which involved i- R l r �� shoring and piling to support the existing structure. The outdoor areas include very high t end paving,landscape,lighting and an Event Lawn designed with a SubAire system to dry ► ; the area out after a large flood event.This project was delivered on budget and completed rx , y 14T .r - the same week as the golf course renovation,in order for there to be a Grand Opening for Ckiiii., j > a j� ' X1: _ the course and new outdoor space. ... _ Member Entry $1.52 million new construction of Member Entry and Bag Drop Station. This project was completed in conjunction with the Pro-Shop, Parking Lot Renovation,Halfway House and Cart Tunnel project. The existing site conditions presented challenges to this project as several of the clubs utilities came directly through the site.Also,the entry was surrounded by a mature live oak tree which was designed around and protected throughout construction. Forney Construction acted as the Construction Manager at Risk for this project working with Gensler to maintain the schedule and budget. Parking Lot Renovation . $1.25 million renovation to the existing West and East parking lots during the Member Entry I. 117 Asi " construction.Forney Construction was brought onboard as a Construction Manager at Risk irati •"• and worked directly with the Civil Engineer(#H2B)to come up with the most cost effective • -, ,. way to renovate the parking lots.The challenge with the project was budget and the amount i ..1 1 of traffic the club would have through the course of construction.The project was done in 4 -" phases in order to accommodate members and guests during construction. _ ��,- ' Golf Teaching Center $990,258 new construction of a golf teaching center on the south end of the existing driving range.Forney Construction worked with Robert McKinney through pre-construction providing budgets for owner review. The existing driving range and golf course remained open through construction.The building included high end finishes in the Lounge,Patio and • Office spaces. Al --, Pool House Renovation s.. '' ; . �,«-2 $670,606 complete renovation of a pool house including locker rooms, showers and S — i.-.' • restrooms The existing pool house had not been updated since it was built in the late '' • * �+ 1960's so it was ready for a much-needed face-lift. We installed new acoustical and ., -; sheetrock ceilings, tile walls and floors at wet areas, specialty vinyl woven flooring at 4,11N locker room, millwork and lighting throughout. This project also included renovation of a multi-purpose room by creating a service area with millwork and stone countertops to provide an informal grab-and-go type dining experience.Custom Eliason doors were added for separation between the member space and updated kitchen, kitchen layout modified to better serve members and the annual tennis tournament,which consisted of a revised layout utilizing both new and existing equipment River Oaks Country Club - Multi-Phase Projects • Skylight Removal , $388,002 demolition and removal of 5 existing skylights on an occupied terrace. Each was — "„.' ' AI& '`'' _ carefully planned and removal scheduled to avoid leaving the building exposed during construction Our team installed temporary weatherproof protection to avoid potential r ,+i ._ ri - La damage to the building during this work.The slate tile in the same area required significant __,_, f. , time and care in review and material selection.Matching the existing tile required the color, ° .'--'"-I It" pattern and cut to all match the previous project. Bayou Restoration $17.8 million Bayou Restoration project which Forney Construction is acting as Construction Manager as Advisor assisting in the selection of Binkley Barfield(engineer)and BRH Garver (civil contractor)who performed the work along Buffalo Bayou. The logistics behind this project are incredible.The golf course,which remained partially open through construction, 7. _ had an access road over 1 mile for all the large equipment required for the 362 piers drilled ' ' " along Buffalo Bayou. Forney Construction also managed the golf course contractor(G6) 1: : ` - .; +. to incorporate all the bayou restoration into the golf course. Project completed February �` - 2020. ,� . '. - -.,ki Future Work j '• :J East End Pool Renovation-$21,471,840 aqoJsp(015.:0 FOq Team Architect Q ~ Tom Forne ,Alberto Garza, y Ryan Nunn, Curtis and Windham • kpORN� Tracy Daimler,Zach Hughes,Ricky Gensler Anderson,Jason Burt,Scott Linn, WHR Architects The River Oaks Country Club's expanded Brian Chavis,Zinai Castleberry and renovated clubhouse increases its Value Role $29,286,852 opportunity for more recreational ventures Construction Manager at Risk as well as occasions for community Year of Completion gatherings and events.The club hosts Owner Portions of this project are River Oaks Country Club in progress,while others hundreds of events annually for nonprofit will begin later in 2020. organizations,corporate events,sporting tournaments and more. CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C 4. OFFEROR'S PROJECT APPROACH 5 points Additional information may be provided on a separate sheet labeled"Attachment 3 to Part C",if required. A. Provide a brief description of your firm's approach to the work? Explain,in detail.any portions of the Work that will be particularly challenging. Please review the following management approach for detailed information. B. Explain your methodology for performing the proposed work,including Cost and Schedule control. Add extra sheets as requited. Please review the following management approach for detailed information. C. What portions of the work will your firm self-perform? Forney will not self-perform any portion of the scope of work for this project. D. Attach Critical Path milestone schedule,attach on separate sheet, label"Attachment 4 to Part C" 12-2017 Offeror's Initials: 2g 00300-PartC-4 of 7 o, 4'4 Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II As 13050 Shadow Creek Parkway r F. A _xa - ' Logistics Plan �y fs►. ra4:= FORNEY September 15, 2020 ear rt- 4.. YR _ Clear Creek ...iiars ��-�r - t ; .z; . i`i it .sivalt_ _. , ``�_.`•.,'` '•^�'+r`=`.. - ' ' i. Chain Link Fence _ (Wind Screen Optional) (1 Dumpsters I 1 alW As Needed Lay Down Area 2 r, . �•� 2, Dumpsters As _ r Needed Chain Link Fence t; Office Trailer Wind Screen on _` ,sososhadaMr ,4„ Kingsley Dr. r * *, . Creek P .i.T3) T Fuel 411 Containment Public Access _ iIII c Open us liamm Construction Entrance *' ` Construction �u111 • NI i • Lay Down Area 1 Fence- Orange or ■1wlr� ALT Parking Green Done Last if i. Selected general Note: (In addition to all Specs within contract set of documents) Tree protection & SWPPP per plans. Any disturbance outside a project scope will be refurbished and planted with the necessary approved seed mix/sod. We adopt all guidelines set forth by the City of Pearland Parks Department and affiliated parties. Special Site specific Indoctrination with a COP & Forney Sticker for ID on the hard hat. Every effort made to minimize disturbance & impact on the visiting community. Flaggers usec' seeded throughout construction. Entrance off FN ey remains open. Any shut down will be scheduled in advance. Project Approach Overview Forney's Preconstruction Program 40, FOR, 41 BUILDING IMPACT INTO EACH AND EVERY DOLLAR a40 Our service-driven professionals crafted the Forney Preconstruction Program to aIDCP-9 build value, quality, and accuracy into every dollar our clients entrust w th us. Ourphased program pro-actively addresses four strategic objectives:1)Deliver Accurate • • and 7t'ansparent Pricing, 2) Consult for Constructibility, 3) Create a Competitive 6)),, Bidding Market and 4)Provide Comprehensive Strategy. Through these objectives, we aim to provide a seamless transition from the Preconstruction Phase to when our boots hit the ground on site.Forney's commitment to our clients is to build the most Impact into each and every dollar and serve as our client's advocate for cost savings,value engineering,and a SERVICE-driven building experience. Cost Estimating 1) Over the last 12 years, Forney Construction has developed a niche in the recreation construction industry. Through this knowledge base, we have developed comprehensive cost data for specialized and performance systems that are above the level normallyused in commercial and institutional construction. We believe this experience translates well to the Commons at Hermann Park project and we look forward to providing accurate, timely and transparent preconstruction services. Constructibility Assessment 2)As construction professionals we"plan the work"and"work the plan."As part of the team,we will be an integral back stop to the design and Owner team on constructability and feasibility through preliminary budgets and schedules. We are proposing a team who have been integral to the success of the Houston Arboretum and Nature Center project. We plan to provide this expertise and knowledge to the Hermann Park Team and provide accurate determinations on constructability, real time costs and scheduling impacts. We will use our own in-house budget estimate spreadsheets and Microsoft Project to communicate and track the project. Zach Hughes, Jason Burt and Zinai Castelberry will be supported by our deep estimating department that will provide real time pricing and comparative analysis of different options as needed. Competitive Bidding 3)Forney is a local Houston General Contractor and we value the excellent relationships we have built within our city.As a SERVICE-driven team with a strong reputation for IMPACT,we partner with subcontractors who share that dedication to quality,delivery, and efficiency. Preconstruction is the ideal strategic platform to leverage those relationships into a competitive budget and create a team of transparent,reliable,and qualified team members to perform the work.Utilizing these relationships to create a competitive subcontractor market is essential for the success of your project. Within the preconstruction process, our role is twofold: we generate excitement and interest while removing the uncertainty and risk surrounding potential constructibility concerns. We strategically coordinate our existing relationships and pair them with opportunities that best suit their businesses and seek to present work in a way that streamlines efficiency and reduces risk for all parties involved. Our goal is to ensure clients receive aggressive,competitive pricing on bid day to maximize their resources and meet their project goals. Comprehensive Strategy 4)As a client-focused partner,Forney's goal is to think"big picture"for our clients.Even the smallest design decision can create a ripple effect in both cost and schedule for your project.We are here to pro-actively examine those decisions and serve as a reference point for industry knowledge,consultant for future efficiency on-site, and trusted advisor to help our partners make the right decisions that balances their goals.With a builder's expertise,we develop a schedule that is tailored to our client's needs and their job sites. At Forney,every dollar we spend is to create Impact in the Houston community.We treat your money with the care,wisdom,and intention as if it was our own.You get a completed project, yes - but you also get the experience of working with a_partner who intimately understands your needs and takes those extra steps to ensure your project goals are met. It is the knowledge that you have someone in your corner that is going to address problems before they occur to make your life pro-actively easier. Forney's Preconstruction Program was built to deliver that IMPACT,even before our boots hit the ground,so we can follow through with the service that we promised. Project Approach Overview Control/Management Processes BUILDING IMPACT INTO EACH AND EVERY DOLLAR We believe the foundation of our success is built upon our people, core values, quality and commitment to exceed expectations. The project team will develop the final project plan jointly with the City of Pearland and your selected designers to specifically meet the needs of your unique project. We believe that this collaborative approach will foster an atmosphere that will lead to a successful outcome for the project. Risk Management Risk management in the construction sector is one of the most critical elements of project success. At Forney, we adhere to a process which consists of four main steps: identification, assessment, taking action and monitoring the risks. In each of these steps,there are a number of methods and techniques which facilitate handling the risks. The construction industry operates in a very uncertain environment where conditions can change quickly due to the complexity of each project.We prefer to identify risks in the early stages of the project during planning and contracting of work,so that we can help our clients manage their financial resources.In later stages,our team will apply systematic processes which will assist the team in controlling critical elements which can negatively impact project performance. Additionally, Forney Construction has partnered with reliable and proven partners such as Lockton Companies and Hartford We also utilize a third party safety inspector,Safety By Design,for all of our projects in the field. Developing Contingency The reconstruction process serves as the essential foundation to identify potential allowances and/or contingencies on the front end of the budget creation process.To create that efficiency,the drawings are thoroughly reviewed by Forney's team at the onset of preconstruction to verify constructibility of all items as designed and Forney will conduct site visits with all involved team members to verify existing conditions. Our goal is to create a building process for our clients that is as seamless as possible by providing accurate pricing, minimizing potential surprises, creating contingency to proactively anticipate change orders needed to reach the project's goals. Delivery Process At Forney,we do not believe in just identifyingproblems,we believe it is our responsibility to bring potential solutions to the project team to foster collaborative and inormed discussion in order to remedy th'e issues in the most cost effective manner possible. Through our construction management techniques we will ensure that the quality and effort of the work meets the requirements that have been designed.Quality control is thoroughly documented through the submittal logs,daily construction logs,weekly OAC meetings and schedule adherence.The initial responsibility of quality control is undertaken by Forney to ensure the proper materials and methods are used by the subcontractors and suppliers. We will coordinate with the project management staff to review submittals to assure compliance and Forney's project superintendent will verify the submittal is accurate and the installation is according to specifications. The design entity representative will then provide verification of all materials and the installation through submittal review and on site inspection of all phases of the construction. Finally, Forney Construction is committed to work with the project team until project completion. We will manage the costs and schedule while providing constructibility solutions throughout the life cycle of the project. We will bring the technical expertise, financial integrity and dedication to safety that will produce a project that you will be proud to be part of when completed. Our Step-by-Step Delivery Process is as follows: • Review proposed project program •Assist design team in applying for •Schedule and coordinate building • Review current construction all required permits inspections documents • Execute contract with Owner •Continually monitor quality • Evaluate existing conditions • Orchestrate subcontractor/supplier assurance and safety programs • Generate project construction procurement •Coordinate final inspections for estimate • Establish project-specific quality ultimate project completion • Identify long-lead items and assessment and safety programs •Orchestrate commissioning of all specialty assemblies/systems •Commence construction new equipment and systems • Create initial project schedule • Pro-actively maintain • Publish close-out documentation including preconstruction, communication with the Owner including releases of lien,as-built construction,and post-construction and design team concerning drawings,and O&M documentation phases construction progression and related • Follow-up with Owner during • Periodically up-date the estimate of documentation(Budget Compliance, warranty period to resolve any issues cost and the project schedule as the Requests for Information,Submittals, that may appear design process progresses Change Orders,etc.) Specific Project Approach A significant portion of Forney's portfolio of work is comprised of recreational spaces. This gives us a unique advantage in delivering the Commons at Hermann Park project. As an example, we are currently working on the Houston Arboretum and Nature Center's master plan. This is a $14 million master plan to restore and protect the natural property and expand current education program. Project includes new visitor and event pavilion, administrative building, extensive landscaping restoration, new trail networks, and new children's discovery garden; the scope also encompasses wetland, ponds, boardwalks, and a phased strategic approach across the 75 acres of network. Within that project scope is the directive to follow the Sustainable Sites Initiative (SITES) Gold Certification requirements, which is widely viewed as the premier benchmark for creating sustainable and resilient land development projects. When approved, this will be the first of its kind in the Greater Houston area Specific Estimating/Cost Control Approach This very recent and similar project experience allows us to utilize not only historical data from our past park/ recreation projects but our recent compilations, supplemented by our in house take-offs to develop budgets during the design phase.These design budgets include a detailed breakdown of all construction elements along with quantities and unit prices 12 9 2015 / / FORNEY HOUSTON ARBORETUM&NATURE CENTER-General Contracting Services Design Development Preliminary Budget Estimate Summary Alternate Base Project Alterrate Estimate from DW and Estimate from Estimate Estimates FS Consulting Services OW and FS Delta Consulting Phase/Work Area Services Building A:Visitor Center&Building B.Event Pavilion $4,273,812 $4,519,850 ($246,038) Building C:Adminstration Budding $1,359,134 51,869,224 ($510,090) Site Construction/Hardscape Scope of Work $1,310,154 $1,892,111 ($581,957) Discovery Garden 5530,250 5472,038 558,212 Alternates: Alt 1001 Add Hawk's Nest&Bridge $197,925 $345,279 ($147,354) Alt$102 Add Screened endosure CC3 Café 533,000 $47,984 ($14,984) Alt 403 Add support for PV array @ Visitor Center $35,000 $30,519 54,481 Alt 404 Add covered walkway fA Education Courtyard $111,625 $111,625 Alt$05 Delete LEED certificatior for project ($256,938) ($256,938) Alt a06 Provide dovetail profile metal deck roof it lieu of 565,000 standard profile deck $44,618 520,382 Alt a07 Provide wood roof deck In lieu of standard profile $235,000 metal deck 5130,882 5104,118 Cost of Work Totals 7,473,350 420,613 8,753,223 599,282 (1,279,873) Contractor's General Condition items 488,844 33,649 $639,417 47,943 (150,573) Subtotal S 7,962,194 $ 454,262 ;., 9,392,640 $ 647,225 5 (1,430,446) Permit n/a n/a I 598,262 n/a (98,262) Preconstruction Costs Included Included Included General liability Insurance 0.75% 59,716 3,407 5107,548 - (47,832) Fee 3.00% 238,866 13,730 $214,716 - 24,150 Sales Tax EXEMPT EXEMPT EXEMPT Contractor Contingency 3.00% 247,823 14,142 $786,834 19,417 (539,111) Total Project Construction Estimate $ 8,508,600 $ 485,540 10,600,100 $ 666,641 (2,091,500) Cost of Performance&Payment Bond(Not including Alternates) $82,500 $82,195 305 Specific Project Approach One primary key to the success of a project of the scale and scope of the City of Pearland Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 is the utilization of key subcontractors during the 50%-90% CD budget phase to fine tune pricing and flesh out any questions on design A critical function of this process is the tracking of the cost and quantity variance at each stage which is why we will always show a detailed variance from the last budget we did. A sample preliminary budget estimate performed for the Houston Arboretum and Nature Center project that shows this tracking feature is included for your review. ? 5 I 1114F I11111111111111 ;1 piliP 4 IIII i it i t1 5 i!!!!! !!!!1[1111s g iilvilf11044iIfiqWli i*Iiig 11 iPli iiiilifEirid-if 0 : 1 0 pigii 1 13 . 11q510i/ Ifite“fif i! lil I I Pi" $wfo. ., lw w All k 'h �, { - 1 t 0 ffti fffttf igi7; ttUUUt[Ut1UIUtUU ifs ttItt ttttfttf tits Y 9. i - : W x 9 4 �- � q q rsc �c .. .Ys"C� Wc�::ac;�� 9 xN Y n z 1=s.. i ss•1•l2 x w2 A i ..2 .2 .2 z2 z .2 2 2 2 :: a¢ as;: i rszz rx.:41 2a 2 'a :s=¢x.. R : y C C i ,s a p(yr;; 6 x6p np, (ray (�(W+j}y[�� �+ (}«6�( yyF( bR6■5( i 'r N P + P P R s'S 3 y`� ti ri • . I l i i i i i 8 i i 0 i i l 6 i l i 0 6 l i 1 O a 1 6 6 1 1 . 1 x3H Ta 88H88s 8 g yuj �j+ 6 [ �i$�5��jj 5�}j�pjL per ¢ ... I C y�j' �{F�iF #F �jr ¢S E N 1 C 8 W3'[![ M C2S6tlMi S d s itiiiiiiiff&�� i1111311 d dS dA d d Q i lliiiiiM Q d id di 3 PX'i 5 C A Z T ` 9 I h N. i it r a o El 5 § gt m 8 i v s , s 3 9 lockout Platform Dedunq .,Iowan, d :710 IL,'- 19.00• Wood Frame News on Trail An^-wan:. 1 s L00,000,03 10C.3 13.37/ 79.633 1:1,:00 171.710 177.110 1171,3601 9Pr►Ms Selma en Nun Die INK Unk IOW Seototel ..nr Swcal calends Mona,* 1 a I0,000.00 11.001 25,103 115.0031 1 d,ran 15,000 (15,0001 10 Spedalles 5o&o rawer Oty Unk Unit Mite Warr SiPale Included,ra Sb imps osana, 71,93.3 103,500 :117,4011 Pend,Type 1 Donor Mow.K. I . 750.00 6,000 61,500 (55.5001 grte racks romance ea 300.0) 4.000 6.500 12,50C1 Trash a kecydin61teoetacb Allowance4 e. 1,000.00 4,000 4.000 Weser Saps Mowance 216 ea 150.00 12.400 32.100 44,400 71.300 1/1,500 (119,0001 1370edel Coeslmt5o. S.eoatrrler City irk Flak ate SWtotal So&r Mock Ups Eid.ded i s 10,000.00 10000 .5.000 1/.100 (10,0011 11403 10.000 10000 110,0001 31 Pbaebg S.lm.ka[e0r Oly Der llek4OM Weer* Voter l4arM.ne laouced Fad-Ow l 0 1S S.arty Setae enactor Coy Unit U.Rene SdbalA Sob+. Secusta Adoas(1we61ance E.<.+ses bdu0.d 0 04 gredebl 6.kontr40lo. 0ky Unit Unk One S.Mat toter repast tat.-hb tint romance 43 Is 2,000.00 K000 71.500 13.500 Types Prue-Sm4ated Waed Cullom So re rowan 27 Is 1.000.00 37,000 ass.oc0 (121.0001 Tpe C Stature-gdbed U{te Maresca 13 IS 1.000.00 15.000 21500 39,000 (51.5001 ripe ll-MVVwdU►-t161e Mowance 3 I 1.000.00 3,000 23,000 123,000) 77001-Strbo Up-Udine Masan. 1S Is 250.00 1.750 3.600 11.500 I2a.3501 Types-aeoss.d U.•Ugre Allowance 10 Is 1,200.00 11000 9000 9,000 16,0003 reewG-Sap Oft Altman. $ Is 135.00 110 15.000 (14,1901 Type%• l Morance 2 W Is 120.0D 110 I10 200a Service Mowmoe 1 IS mamas 234100 290300 LOON Contronr Allowance a,duded W.eMpraof GPO Duple.reoeptede A3orace lnduded COnadeAMon Noses Allowance Yqudad Single Pole Seredh Allowance Inducted Panel W Allowance endured Imp for GNP Trandondr Pat Alowance twirled Underground Corral&Wee for grind,shoats Alnwance Included 17.300 (17.3001 Underground Brett,'Spin Corrcki Allowance edud.d 21.450 (21A503 Uederl7*10 Cor.7ete&nosed Conduct to rand W Mowarce Included 39001-; 1390000i Underground Cant0.te incased Conduit for Ct. Mawa4. Idured O*P Uglily Man Nor ...an. Included SWoty Power to Gate Opener Mowance led.ded Relocate Power for lid Sblbn A.Owan:e Included b4vag0n Mona/re erduded Conde Tor Duct tank Mowance alluded Demo Mowance Idwed 433,000 541,4C0 364.754 (374,4503 17 Coawwdrago.. SentotrUattn. lily Unit Unit lab SW/total toads 0ata/Vace Esc.Joel Ea C-oed SKrarty EaC.aced EaC-del 0 31 Site Coe.tr.dbe Subcontractor Oh link Udl Reb Mtn.' roads Ten Praleegen Included In Gr,VI baue.mrds 20,000 110.0001 Mfrs Mowartu I r 100,0 3.00 110000 75.000 35.000 110,0001 Erosion Control Allowance Included Included /ruled Included See Clearing Type l-Clearing!Grubbing Allowance 311710 d 195724 24,750 117.500 43,474 3ReCle0IryType2-Util/OnarN,6 rowan. 54.351 0 6d,ad 5,535 15.535' 304C3in,671pe 3-der8n4 of u4erbrush 60 en aro Allowance 541.336 d Inducted 30000 1300001 Tr.amend Dimes to type 3 t.0043 Mdwance 40,967 d nduded Se,act Ter..4kewal lcbpp.d a nailed to wrier Moran. 304 ea 115,105 114000 radial 160.3951 Sr6o Tee Removal not In dewed arms M0wan:e 440 Inducted Included Included Included repair of Sank role Allowance 15,000.00 15000 15000 (mosaa on Grading at Sib a Pared A.aa Allowance 3.491 cs 1515 56.729 150000 105,1)) 12912713 borate Pend lined*icorI Allowance 6.406 7t 142.122 Included 241/21 Doer MOM*peril 1 to bettors of 14'clef Ever Mewarc. 671 01 nduded Indaded included Orr morale err 1 al sratlar d4E arm to day iron 3Mowarce 1.199 r 0nluded 1radu0ed Included borate Pod 2(w4rds o1bop3 MOwence 6.304 ce Insured Muded Orr exegete par l to Warn of 24'day.nr Mowance 1.034 Of gd„ded 6nduded Oyer morale pond 2 at wetland darra oar En.'&11'Allowance L460 os Inducted Included 0101oe edemas soil or site Mowance Inducted 6dsded Clay lion et ponds(imported) Allowance L733 cs 22.50 39A63 39.133 Or liners l Weir soil el wetland erg areas depset.M Mowance 3.571 cs 1900 3706/ 67.363 00*.e. 440*0*. 1 Is 16.000.00 16.000 1500 3.1,01 (1.0011 4.735 379,76 156,000 117,050) 31 f4 r•prewerms S.6..Oraor Dry inn U.010 retold Toads Wheel Saps IrdAded In;Merblta 6,300 .0 30. 'Wards 0er.ted 2,350 12.35C1 Import Ors Marti br Pled Liner Nulled In Site ConAsellon S0.000 150.000) 0emnpo.d G...Trail Tool(radars'ndnmwdl M.wan 17324 if L30 79.640 211.130 (131.609.60) 0emnpasid Grade hall Type 2(lb0.rad1 Mpwitce 763 d 1.00 3.6M 111A00 (14,560.001 0emmpaed 0rw66e Trail Type 3.Levine Aiewice 12,374 at 3.10 41259 31.025 16.233.60 OG rawng 3C5-06)•Y of OG Allowance 3.391 d 130 20.622 20,612.30 Of Comore Tril Type l Mows,. 12513 d 10J0 135140 50,000 85,140.40 OP Contra Tel Type I Mowa.o 6.341 at 7.70 52,691 37,373 15.313.10 10'Asphalt Pam5Mnt Allowance 66.3i1 d L35 791296 221000 311,000 1242,704.10) lore Water Crassest Mowace L366 4 1100 22.391 22,39100 large%abided SWpadea(ao4n at..wadwOarN 8 OG Mtwa,ce 156,661 d 0.5/ 00,363 alluded /dared 90.333.00 Gra.I Pasemre Meddled Allowance 56526 d 177 130221 165113 144,075 1209.661193p Pavement Mw6n d Re 65 and Sens Morin 312100 30.621 30.62100 r wide Amaple Scrams Allowance 3,550 d 120 17.60 27,360.00 Mulch Trail Type 1 Mowace 1.09E d an 9,031 3,920 5,122.00 somas cas.Srm casement:se sus tang►alit bad,S.W 100 Houston.Tortes 77093 n%1Y lade Yehla/r Gate Morino 2 N 21.250.00 42.500 30,000 12,501.00 6.00,.natars wawa. bawled/Is OW•n bdsded aaduded (Chain Uri fence COMM) 12,000 4,000 136100.003 haws Type I•Cable W wwea3 Mowanc. 1112 I 60.00 37.910 13.500 51.410.00 In.Type 1-Inlay tat Mora. 1.300 I 41.1O 53,300 10,150 21.150.00 fry Typ•1 M J■sensory 7-ail Mowance LIDO ■ S0.00 0,000 17,000 3S,a00 (I.00.003 frw•Trya a 610 Entarce Allowance 45 ■ 730.00 33.750 1,300 30250.00 hdtttoan Gabs /Iowan. 1 .a 441400 3.170 1.500 7410.00 landscaping 4 in pawn banded bd undo 791,300 Iodides 1795,5001 1,1711633 1.01.103 396,341 11.016,3301 131J411y3a3os 3eblreav Oty Ua& Tana law fr00I4 Mtge Moron lift Radon Mora. I •a 36363 Included 311,963 6•moe I`WI rowan. 133 ■ Included IMuded Remo.r WI Allowance 711 M Included Included 6•mwa fir•asdrantl&awing /Itrwance 1 Included Included Cap r Wt Allowance 3 • Indsdad Included MsN.r Owns Lin•s MoraK. 14 Esdutlad Included 6•arws 1r PVC Stance lines wawance 12 Included included Boom W Storm lases Mowance 137 Included Included M.Itn1L13C0.0 Mos pc. Mowa*s LI/ Included Induced 6aapwlr Ma.n. /Iowa*• 147 Included 6Wtafed MeadVS Ir CGM6 Mara*. 13 Included Included Cap 12'Storm Allowance 2 a 6Msded included Cap?loll COMP Are,N W wawa.wawa. a Included mauled demo•Cup ndts wows. 1a Iguded Included Mmoe Nets Nowan[! 1 a Idsold included Remove 4'PVC Pipe Allowance 11 IMwed alluded amen Underground Et4Ial Conduit /Iowa. 07 Included included Cap .7ial Co-wut Mow.. I P • Idudad moue.. demo•San Lary Ma'Woes wawa. 1 • I416od n4sdfd P!VC Wt Palatal 45,3000 10.5003 r Wt C400 OP•11 IV!live Mown. 2,412 114735 47,945 10440 fire Hydrant wawa. t Included 5,000 10,000 1154001 r1c13'TS&v Moran• N Is4ud.d 23,151 10.1531 r Cameo SMte• Allowance aa Icluda1 13310 113.3103 r MP Mow.. w tndud•d 19,351 (1.3513 r Gat*Valve Mora. Included Cat it Pio UM Y r t:.r Marano N Inducted TN rar o' 4410 3.300 110.0007 Two•rar4' 1750 11,n0) Tie to Wont UM wawa*. 1 M Indu0M Remove Sal day Water line Mora. Mil ■ N7ud0 6emar.adatn6 I n ay0ra4 Minoan. 1 N Mudad Trends Safety Mora. La12 ■ aw wed rSantr M yIaoanC•3WDIt33r4 Pipe /Iowan. n 1 134.263 134263 P Sanitary Shc os)S O3t.VC N Mi noan.ora. n ■ Muded 3,4M 76.300 (30441 I"SanitarySIM.33 07034!4C Pipe warn*. Me ■ Included 33,160 (x,liq a 5tNbry Manhole Moran. a w Inclwed 1L052 3.500 115.5513 Sanitary Uf Station Mclean. 1 •a eluded IO1.330 11O1001 Unitary 0410002 Mowan 1 ea Ind wad ISMS.&Replant atpna6 Mawa*e 19 w induced 11ito Edgiryr Una warr,c• 1 M Ind./ad 2.311 0.3133 Mto■dWno a•force Man Allowance1 •a Inducted demos biding Uh Stator, Mawa. 1 ea dewed IWuded nc.d•l Ovoids Sally Allowance 707 ■ ndudad 9,167 0.1673 11'Stew 306•35 D303a PVC Pip• Maws ce 532 6 314'33 16,240 196991 ir Kr Oafs■ Mowanc. 173 ■ IndwM WIC? Maimed 1.375 12.1753 1r 6O wdwa*e 120 ■ nduded MAX (36.4003 ID'&V Moran. 436 ea a'Vuded 61664 161.6641 1r MCP Allowance 163 included 12,066 111}10 aYb Moran. 529 6 INwM 103.340 (103,140 ar b 0aetr: 121124 (111t213 r lawn ManhoM wawanca 1 M Walt-cad 40*6110 Mowasce 13 N induced 16.710 136.7103 Type&Met an Elating line Moran. 1 Widen Jungian red Mowace I M IHwen 11e 14a/ra1 wm•a. 1 N 131.261 3.116 117.137 ]fe►atl lral Allowance1 sat Mua+d 3.311 (3.721) air •alral Allowance 7 1I w Iwx.^. 7,916 17.9161 lip lb, Moran. M a. Ind ueea CM&Plug biding Storm UM Moran. a •a dewed demo N.Inning et Mawr. I OB Included MmaM bistro Storm term /Iowa*. 335 ■ M,d4 Tnmd,Sakty wowance 1.111 I 01,.c.: Wu 0il boss Site Uttly Span Mown 1 1 54231 36,234 1m4.11 733.135 91.300 134,131 Cod of Work 3.313.713 431E.713 4,1121,114 1,707,46E (1233,4433 i310as COn S011UC'Kh MS Lang Port Ewa State 133 Wanton.T•aa3 77055 713.224.13CC Specific Project Approach For projects where phasing is necessary, our standard procedure is presenting information to show the impact to schedule, cost, and logistics of owner operations. Open dialogue between the owner, design team and the general contractor is critical to understanding the needs of the entire team, the facility and availability of long lead time items and trades. A sample of our initial pass at a phasing plan for the Houston Arboretum project is below. 9/9/16 HOUSTON ARBORETUM &NATURE CENTER General Building Infrastructure/Utilities Conditions/Fee/Contingency TOTALS Alternate Phasing Estimate 1 610 Loop Road/Parking&Maintenance Building $400,000 $1,740,482 $363,882 $2,504,364 2 Woodway Entrance&Loop $1,756,508 $175,651 $1,932,159 3 Admin Building and Loop North of Building $1,669,032 $100,000 $212,284 $1,981,316 4a West Side of Education Building $967,101 $967,101 4b East Side of Education Building $967,101 $967,101 4c Discovery Garden/Courtyard $540,250 $225,000 $130,093 $895,343 Demo Existing Entrance Road,Trails at Woodway,and 5 Loop at Education/Admin Area $140,000 $23,800 $163,800 Cost of Work Totals 4,543,484 3,961,990 905,709 9,411,183 Specific Project Approach Building relationships has been the key to Forney's success and is evidenced by the number of clients with whom we partner on multiple projects. Part of what makes those relationships possible, is the transparency in our subcontractor selection process. We are an open book and encourage our clients to be involved in the process with us. Below is a sample of how we show we are utilizing the best value subcontractor. Aieattb.e.l.ghetfan Slut$er Mown.ArboMum a Nato.UMW IMAGO Mils I OwedNen WAemdee Ned yen 121160 MIAS Door fe.ssl Ns.opled awn at Arden Sue.® %di 1e.}n "Am doeeg tee I M1 e I Oran WA.W. Nods IdaSY alto S.3Q e laW, md bring SLAW Onto SIU,75o K 116r.1.et lid Amnon Ira Sala To alto MIMI po Seam. Swam sib SUMO reed=r dad penny W nand tee e One. S.n.ec del.+ SI.276.4 II 70 on,mild tale not 6seeF ew Wm 52A10.300 Men mewed peaty Mint COG prayeoa mae.eli6Aar awn awl*Ink elms e ,IC Tesdlry&Cowman' $226233 Mdesdowny,dew mph*.en*6na DG omes bd easetlp 7 e I sway~ma rainy WAarw Nor ye rr .b SIQ.A6 riddles ddsr&SG nary.=tat w6W.V! me Sheea. $65tQ0 by S..eat Indiana me esb 9111410 Ow nal Feese ateee.poel,DO panes.Y Sad no adal1 S1SS1.5r asphalt one in erMrorR eel r am.re r pool no OG deny me /eepb. SIMMS Dan not Mid.la d doom penny weed=etradynimnegy qky Seed ac MAudYy $20.65 Om re kiddie m rd,dent penny of OG pony lin an1OaF 6t Wan SIA20.700 I enema W Amen. Wes allele arks Syms11 maimed S.do nob csi Neale.weenslpo Nrkelort Oen nem Ind*K ow M cordate Wan 5.M.IN Me andel find,an wine*,no Fanny doe ad ands*tml ewe a a enter tramp,re digit am i mo Wan S121.700 Ora/Mee alb en!belay ane.kews nt I ldel-deee5. Mid Amen* Ian Was le Wm 11I2,173 adde ply lseyrd dosn ray aang cede pen wM%rim sag wren wean 5656.777 mrw•Feed.a.wing 7eede,wide toraaal panful e S IONS Indic a War* Nola Wells EN** S49,000 Almepa%neatly Fatal e den*men $42 Meow.far l•t•6.tout Mbelon SwwnrM poke e I romaa I Omen MG Yarn NNW yen Ara fro 5622.E nee elm nods* mc VW Atae1 $761.6S Gra°pram ennead kid*asdoded me Woe MCI .yW27.9011 Sete edema edu0. u minces seaS.'Ma a. 'e 'ge 5era6aes sea Gee'rpe es,Gra'g wie.Wtulr e7 d Gee *]rep 2 wad Ora Td.aedNaa,* e Seri elb dorm War Uer6 aelYk6e Oniony ,VrAad Van' ...I re ye 4 war s.pa7Q San ST2.1121 reds.dined cameos es amen psn bens and had off me Wean SI.712.U0 OA uedr.ens re.6n A le bawd includes red penny r 1.Mini W deem Nee Ida le 6a5nnaa S.toa news eenentaien mania id nidepry m.eNorel lee none 57*red sr odd.ended K Hw0anrart/minn S71.690 Om ad agleam erdrvbr Flea or weds dna'a b emery 75 Specific Project Approach We are seasoned in providing thorough evaluations of different architectural material options to allow owner/ design team to make decisions in a timely manner. Below is a comparison that was prepared for the Bird Glass at the Houston Arboretum. HANC Bird Glass Comparison-Admin Building Lead Time After Approved Gass Type Net Cost Submittals Comments 3M Bird Friendly Window Film $ 41,699 n/a 7 year warranty period but serviceable life exceeds warranty Glass Pro Bird Glass $ 108,848 4-6 weeks Can see purple lines that should be Invisible Wagner Bird Wass $ 118,910 8-10 weeks Blue visible lines Ornilux Bird Glass S 124,094 Sea Freight 4-5 weeks Comes from Germany,air freight to receive In 10 days add$23,891 •Storefront&windows will be ready to install around 1st week of May •Pricing does not have Forney mark up Specific Project Approach Quality Control Review At Forney,Quality Control isn't just marketing. We live it every day on every project. Layout and site coordination meetings with subs and design team are key for a site development project like this. For example,tree surveys are not 100% accurate so laying out a trail through existing trees is very important because you will very likely need to tweak the layout to avoid sensitive root areas of existing trees. We routinely encourage large scale mock ups of elements to manage expectations of owner and the design team. Below is an example of a fence mock up that was installed and reviewed with comments. Houston Arboretum&Nature Center FORNE�(. Forney Project No.: 1421 Submittal No. &Desc.- 32-31 16 06 Fence Type 4 610 Entrance-Mock Up X Reviewed 0 Revise and Resubmit O No Exceptions Noted 0 Rejected O Revise as Noted Contractor's review is for general conformance with the design concept and contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the subcontractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications, nor departures therefrom. The subcontractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing this work in a safe manner. By :caG A_ kid.{ Date 8/16/17 Comments 41 S .• `: .• F ' .1 •M - r DW did not notice chalk lines for the layout of the fasteners. Forney to make sure that all fasteners are located on a straight vertical line. DW rioted a variety of extrusions and intrusions for the fasteners that were installed.The fasteners should all be attached at the same level.All fasteners should appear flush with the surface of the wood.Consistency of finish is important. ) DW noted a crack in a couple of the boards.Any boards with cracks should be replaced prior to final acceptance of fence.Contractor may use pilot holes as necessary prior to fastening with screws. Specific Project Approach One of the advantages of the increased use of technology has been the ability to utilize drone videos and photos for design team/owner to see layout of elements from a birds eye view As an example, we took weekly drone photos and videos for the project team to review the project's progress.Below shows a comparison of a sketched design and the actual product after construction. !'7Nb ,�� + , '? lip 4 M s tie . , .1. ) f - d L F•� s. s' t �i r „4 . .I.' r' •. , ' y _w bey = � I _ _ "a _ •s.- .14 lit INC k — V110:+.4* . •.1*' "." - - . .;3 • -f•iiiiiihi, Specific Project Approach As part of our close out process, our team discusses lessons learned on each project with the project management staff in our weekly manpower meetings, so that our entire team benefits from the knowledge of others. As an example we learned from similar projects that if decomposed granite is used as an organic binder, it will become jelly-like when exposed to heavy rains. Due to this shared information, we were able to steer the Houston Arboretum team away from using this in their vehicular areas in future phases, saving them money in the long run. Specific Project Approach Value Engineering In our normal course of business, Forney will advise and track a list of potential value engineering ideas to present to the owner and design team Below is an example of the cost reduction options that were presented to the Houston Arboretum allowing them to make more informed decisions and ultimately giving them a project that made the most out of their budget. HANC-Cost Reduction Options 4/21/17 Potential Budget Reductions Yes No Maybe 1 Leave existing mulch trails in place (11.947) TBD TBD TBD 2 Leave Woodway entry concrete in place in lieu of new per drawings. (27,902; TBD TBD TBD 3 Changed all concrete trails to medium broom finish in heu of salt and stamped finish. Currently holding an allowance for stamped concrete (88,875) TBD TBD TBD 4 Reduced the amount of low water crossings to 15%of OG type I trails in lieu of 25%per the drawings. (116,331) TBD TBD TBD 5 Changed steps at trails to concrete in lieu of wood timbers for a cost savings. (86,631) TBD TBD TBD 6 Moved teaching platform work to add alternate list.Includes foundation,framing decking (96,062) TBD TBD TBD 7 Deleted nature sign foundation. (28,811) TBD TBD TBO 8 All maintenance yard work has been deleted from this budget.Includes road to yard. pad,fencing,compost bins foundation and masonry (234,106) TBD TBD TBD This number onlyfacbadn the crushed concrete bed,compost bins,fences and gates,and general conditions. 9 Reduced the quantity of boardwalk guardrail by 7001f and reduced cost by$501t by simplifying the design. (115,000) TBD TBD TBD 10 Changed all boardwalk,low water cross.ng,and bridge decking material to treated pine in lieu of Thermory. (228.750) TBO T80 TBD 11 Changed all wheel stops to reclaimed wood from site in lieu of new cedar wood. (4,320) TBD TBD T80 12 Centerpoint duct bank has been moved to the add alternate list. (53,447) TBD TBD TBD 13 Changed all DG paving to 8'crushed concrete.This will need to be reviewed further by the design team before approved. (30.226) TBD TBD TBD 14 Changed 8"ravel parking to crushed concrete in lieu of DG.The DG is currently shown as an alternate.This will need to be reviewed further by the design team (25.233) TBD TBD TBD 15 Deleted the chip seal finish on the asphalt road. (79,124) TBD TBD TBD 16 Re-using demolished base from existing road for new roads at Woodway loop. (18,965) T3D TBD TBD 17 Vehicular gate type 1 at 610 and Woodway changed to lx cedar and 3'steel in lieu of 2x cedar and 4"steel. (55.325) TBD TBD TBD 18 Pedestrian gate type 1 at Woodway changed to la cedar and 3"steel in lieu of 2x cedar and 4'steel. (1,000) TBD TBD TBD 19 Vehicular gate type 2,pedestrian gate type 2,and fence type 2 at parking lots has been moved to the add alternate list (79,663) TBD TBD TBD 20 Pedestrian gate type 3 at 610 entrance changed to lx cedar and 3"steel in lieu of 2x cedar and 4'steel. (1,000) TBD TBD TBD 21 Cable fence type 1 at Woodway has been changed to treated pine 4"x4"posts in lieu of reclaimed material. (18525) TBD TBD T80 22 Fence type 3 at the multisensorytrail has been moved to the add alternate list (81,892) TBD TBD TBD 23 Fence type 4 at the 610 entrance has been changed to lx cedar and 3' steel in lieu of 2x cedar and 4'steel. (18,200) TBD TBD TBD 5 (1,501,335.00) $ 5 • $ $ (1,501,335.00) 5 - 5 - 5 - Yes l No I Maybe l Specific Project Approach In conjunction with the sample deliverables that we've included for your review previously in this section, we have found that it's most helpful to utilize mock ups and samples when changing architectural materials to save money. We used this philosophy to assist the Houston Arboretum team make cost reduction and quality control decisions that will benefit the staff and the over 200,000 visitors that are hosted annually at this facility. This series of photos shows one of several mock ups that were installed to evaluate decking options. 1 i I • \\= ,J — \ ..„ .. . '{ �� r. . ... . ,,,,... ,,,.............„....„.............,,,. .. , :z...........v____ • •,.......,........... , ...., .. .. . ,,,.. .L ,, „,.. . . ,, . ... . „. .. .., , , . . , ,,,tc _ , . ,,,,,,, ,:r; . , 4p: • k4 : Ili ; ^ ; a. Mrva ti.4 , ,i !n,� j k. . i�� I I '\ ` I 1 \ • • i4.' • '? i ' ,\il., 4:‘ A % -•r$ t.4 I.ft t.i i• :-4 ,, a • 4 +^ ;:""-: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II MI FORNEY- ID Task Name Duration Start Finish I itt 1.2021 _ ..._ S 0 . N D I _.. J F M A _ M __ J 1 Shadow Creek Ranch Park-Phase II 215 days Thu 9/3/20 Wed 6/30/21 I 2 GC Proposals Due 1 day Thu 9/3/20 Thu 9/3/20 --- 3 Letter of Intent 1 day Mon 9/21/20 Mon 9/21/20 �, 4 Preconstruction/Procurement 85 days Tue 9/22/20 Mon 1/18/21 h 5 Submittals 3 wks Tue 9/22/20 Mon 10/12/20 -Ili:La 6 Order Long Lead Items 14 wks Tue 10/13/20 Mon 1/18/21 7 Project Construction 182 days Tue 10/20/20 Wed 6/30/21 6 Mobilization&Set-Up Fencing 4 days Tue 10/20/20 Fri 10/23/20 I'i% 9 Survey&Lay Out/Mark Trees 2 days Mon 10/26/20 Tue 10/27/20 10 Install Erosion Control&SWPPP 4 days Mon 10/26/20 Thu 10/29/20. L 11 Install Tree Protection 3 days Mon 10/26/20 Wed 10/28/20 12 Site Work 172.5 days Thu 10/29/20 Mon 6/28/21 13 Clearing/Site Demo 1.5 wks Thu 10/29/20 Mon 11/9/20 14 Earthwork-Site Grading-As Available 10 wks Mon 11/9/20 Mon 1/18/21 II 15 Utility&Drainage Installation 4 wks Mon 11/2/20 Mon 11/30/201 L. 16 Re-Grade After Utilties/Fine Grade Subgrades 1 wk Mon 11/16/20 Mon 11/23/201 17Parking + Stabilize Lots-As Available 5 wks Mon 11/23/20 Mon 12/28/20 18 Form&Pour Parking Lots-As Available 5 wks Mon 12/28/20 Mon 2/1/21 1' 19 Stabilize Field Subgrades-As Available 5 wks Mon 12/28/20 Mon 2/1/21 20 Form&Pour Foundations-As Available 5 wks Mon 2/1/21 Mon 3/8/21illir 21 Form&Pour Sidewalks 3 wks Wed 3/3/21 Wed 3/24/21 22 Install Subgrade Drainage in Multi-Purpose Fiek 4 wks Mon 2/15/21 Mon 3/15/21 23 ; Install Aggregate Details in Multi-Purpose Field 5 wks Mon 3/1/21 Mon 4/5/21 24 Install Synthetic Turf on Multi-Purpose Field 5 wks Mon 3/29/21 Mon 5/3/21' I 1 25 i Install Fence&Back Stop at Miracle Field 3 wks Mon 3/8/21 Mon 3/29/21 26 I Install Surfacing on Miracle Field 1.5 wks Mon 3/22/21 Wed 3/31/21 ,..\\. - z>' f Left Turn Lane Demo 1 wk Thu 4/1/21 Wed 4/7/21 28 Left Turn Lane Stabilization 3 days Thu 4/8/21 Mon 4/12/21 29 Left Turn Lane Prep 1 wk Tue 4/13/21 Mon 4/19/21, 30 - Left Turn Lane Concrete Pour 3 days Tue 4/20/21 Thu 4/22/21' 31 ' Left Turn Lane Curb Install 3 days Fri 4/23/21 Tue 4/27/21 32 Landscape&Irrigation 5 wks Wed 4/28/21 Tue 6/1/21 September 1,2020 4t ;.- Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II IN PEARLAND FORNEY. ID Task Name Duration Start Finish Half 1.2021 �—._. .__. S 0 N D_. J I ____1__. M A Al J 33 Building Construction 102 days Mon 1/18/21 Wed 6/9/21 6 34 Restroom&Concession Building 66.5 days Mon 1/18/21 Tue 4/20/21.. 6 35 Earthwork-Select Fill Grading 5 days Mon 1/18/21 Mon 1/25/21 36 Layout/Drill Piers 5 days Mon 1/25/21 Mon 2/1/21 37 Install Grade Beams&Prep Slab 1.5 wks Mon 2/1/21 Wed 2/10/21 39 Install Underground Utilities 1 wk Thu 2/11/21 Wed 2/17/21. 39 Pour Grade Beam&Building Slab 1 day Thu 2/18/21 Thu 2/18/21 40 Carpentry/Framing 15 days Wed 2/24/21 Tue 3/16/21 41 MEP Install 3 wks Wed 3/17/21 Tue 4/6/21 42 , Install CMU 20 days Wed 3/10/21 Tue 4/6/21 43 Dry In Building 2 wks Wed 4/7/21 Tue 4/20/21 44 ' Maintenance Building 35 days Mon 1/25/21 Mon 3/15/21 7 t 45 Earthwork-Select Fill Grading 4 days Mon 1/25/21 Fri 1/29/21 46 I Layout/Drill Piers/Piers 4 days Mon 2/1/21 Fri 2/5/21 47 Grade Beams 1 wk Fri 2/5/21 Fri 2/12/21 46 Install Underground Utilities 1 wk Wed 2/10/21 Wed 2/17/21 49 Pour Grade Beams&Building Slab 1 day Wed 2/17/21 Thu 2/18/21 � 50 Delivery of Metal Building 0 days Mon 3/1/21 Mon 3/1/21 1 3/1 51 ' Erect Metal Buildings 10 days Mon 3/1/21 Mon 3/15/21 52 Trim-out buildings 62 days Mon 3/15/21 Wed 6/9/21 T J 53 Trim-Out Buildings-Various Trades-As 12 wks Mon 3/15/21 Mon 6/7/21 q'g Available 54 ' Final Building Inspections 2 days Mon 6/7/21 Wed 6/9/21 55 Parking Lot Sealants 5 days Mon 6/7/21 Mon 6/14/21 - 56 Striping for Parking Lot 3 days Mon 6/14/21 Thu 6/17/21 57 Sidewalk Sealants 3 days Mon 6/14/21 Thu 6/17/21 59 1 Final Inspections 2 days Thu 6/17/21 Mon 6/21/21 59 Weather Days Built into Schedule 40 days Mon 4/26/21 Mon 6/21/21 80 '' Substantial Completion 0 days Mon 6/21/21 Mon 6/21/21 6/2 61 ' Punch List 5 days Mon 6/21/21 Mon 6/28/21 September 1,2020 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C 5.IDENTIFICATION&HISTORY WITH SUB-CONTRACTORS 10 points Offeror proposes the following subcontractors to be used for the Project(list others as applicable). List ALL major Sub-contractors(Mechanical, Electrical,Plumbing, Structural and Civil as a minimum)and any Specialty Item Sub-contractors or any subcontractor The available. Information provided will be used in the evaluation of the Offeror. The references shall include name of project,Owner contact information,and Engineer contact information if contact information.No changes to proposed Sub-Contractors may be made without Owner's approval. Perform 5 percent or more of the Project work. Provide a brief history of your firm's association with listed Sub-Contractors over the last FIVE YEARS on a separate sheet labeled"Attachment 5 to Part C". Provide three references for each Sub-Contractor along with scheduled to TABLE 00300-2 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS SUBCONTRACTORS VALUE OF PERCENTAGE OF SPECIALTY CONTRACT WORK I.Garza Site Development,LLC Demo,Earthwork,Utility&Concrete $2,225,000.00 52% 2.Surface America Synthetic Turf Installer-Miracle Field $117,750.00 3% 3.Gulf Shore Services Plumbing $110,700.00 3% 4.Hightower Electric Company Ltd Electrical $107,855.63 3% 5.Comflow Mechanical Services HVAC/Mechanical $94,615.00 2% 6.GWS Services Inc. Masonry $71,240.00 2% 7.Whirlwind Steel Building,Inc. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Supplier $33,908.00 0.80% 8.Independent Steel Erectors,Inc. Steel Erection $27,052.00 0.60% 9.Texas Concrete Works Concrete Pads $100,050.00 2% 10.Back Water Fence Fencing $107,849.00 3% 11.Misc.Vendors Various Trades $800,778.84 19.00% 12.Forney General Conditions/Overhead $469,267.23 11.00% On a separate sheet labeled as"Attachment 5 to Part C"per above instructions: A.Provide a brief description of your firm's history with each of your proposed major Sub- contractors? See attached within-Total Value of Completed Contracts Graph B. Provide references major Sub-contractors. See attached references within Offeror's Initials: 12-2017 00300-Part C-5 of 7 Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II FORNEY Proposed Subcontractor Reference Form Proposed Subcontract Name: Garza Site Development, LLC Contact: Jason Burt Phone Number: 713.742.2747 Email Address: Jason.burt(<iagarzasite.com REFERENCES REFERENCE 1: Company Name: Houstonian Hotel & Spa Contact: Greg Branum Phone Number: 713.253.2246 Email Address: abranum@houstonian.com REFERENCE 2: Company Name: River Oaks Country Club Contact: Joe Bendy Phone Number: 713.356.1357 Email Address: joe.bendv(ariveroakscc.net REFERENCE 3: Company Name: Houston Arboretum & Nature Center Contact: Debbie Markey Phone Number: 713.366.0371 Email Address: dmarkey(a houstonarboretum.ore Avmmetry Sports Construction Company References • East Texas Baptist University 1 Tiger Drive, Marshall TX 75670 Dr. Blair Blackburn, President-(903) 503-4500-bblackburn@etbu.edu Football Stadium Conversion; Softball Stadium Conversion; Baseball Infield Conversion (2017) • Melissa ISD 1904 Cooper Street, Melissa TX 75454 Duke Sparks, Director of Athletic Operations-(903) 271-8893-dsparks@melissaisd.org New Baseball & Softball Stadium Complex(2017) Football Stadium Field Re-turf;Track Resurface; Football Practice Field Conversion (2020) New Indoor Practice Facility Field(Under Construction) • Paris !SD 1920 Clarksville Street, Paris TX 75460 Chad Heiberg, Assistant Athletic Director-(903) 517-1517-chad.helberg@parisisd.net Football Turf Conversion w/Elastic Layer, Track Resurface(2018) ` 31 2 West Alabama Street I PO Box 121 I Mount Pleasant. Texas 75455 Ims� f��roT s http://www.symmetrysports.com/ ammo 1 Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II FORNEY. Proposed Subcontractor Reference Form Proposed Subcontract Name: Gulf Shore Services, LLC Contact: Daniel Miller, President Phone Number: 979-232-0047 Email Address: dan.gulfshoreservices(iigmail.com REFERENCES REFERENCE 1: Company Name: Ferguson Enterprises Contact: Kenny Sundstrom Phone Number: 281-350-3355/ 713-539-0170 Email Address: Kenny.sunstrom@ferguson.com REFERENCE 2: Company Name: LEAD Construction, LLC Contact:Jacob Lee/ Dayvd Read Phone Number: 832-534-8948 Email Address: Jlee@lead-construction.com /dread@lead-construction.com REFERENCE 3: Company Name: UHS Cypress Creek Contact: Juan Carmona Phone Number: 713-614-6086 Email Address:Juan.Carmona@uhsinc.com Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II FORNEY Proposed Subcontractor Reference Form Proposed Subcontract Name: V-t\6,4"1/4}0, eC F tom- • Contact: 1-S-Iv\c \ Phone Number: 2. - `} G 0 5 Email Address: I rL `e ti\\citi'd-&t,J LC Pt 2c C\C:t • cool REFERENCES REFERENCE 1: Company Name: FOli itZ C--C . T (j( *t0-1\ Contact: ts'c \g-Le_1- CeCLC ZG� Phone Number: 1 13 S(\ ^ G Email Address: c\ -ZC\o,Cp "-Z-c\(a t CINk% 1V-Al tj<., 1 O �l - COYt'1 REFERENCE 2: Company Name: u c k \y\,, -ct CS Contact: S u*\t` Ts Phone Number: -1 13 (ta. e Sj b 6 SG Email Address: J 1-,,L3 bj r , [ w\'\ REFERENCE 3: Company Name: - .TT Contact: Co ei c +� Phone Number: 1 +-7) Email Address: - \.c;v C;r1 @ \,\ --G C_. , C-.c ,Yl Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II FORNEY. Proposed Subcontractor Reference Form Proposed Subcontract Name: Comflow Mechanical Services Contact: Eric Price Phone Number: 713-686-3600 Email Address: epriceacomflowco.com REFERENCES REFERENCE 1: Company Name: Burton Construction Contact: Juan Ospina Phone Number: 281-313-5055 Email Address: jospina iburtonconstruction.com REFERENCE 2: Company Name: E.E. Reed Contact: Scott Crain Phone Number: 281-933-4000 Email Address: scrain deereed.com REFERENCE 3: Company Name: Arch-Con Construction Contact: Chris Heath Phone Number: 713-533-1900 Email Address: cheath(Ziarch-con.com Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II FORNEY. Proposed Subcontractor Reference Form Proposed Subcontract Name:_GWS Services Contact: Elizabeth Haughton Phone Number: 281-973-1733 Email Address: elizabeth(gwsservices.net REFERENCES REFERENCE 1: Company Name: Arch Con Corporation Contact: Javier Guerra Phone Number: 713-533-1900 Email Address: Javier Guerra <jguerra0.arch-con.com> REFERENCE 2: Company Name: Tribble & Stephens Contact: Jim Roach Phone Number: 713-554.7023 Email Address: iroach atribblestephens_com REFERENCE 3: Company Name: Construction Masters Contact: Justin Davis Phone Number: 281-997-2640 Email Address: iustinPcmhou.com Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II FORNEY. Proposed Subcontractor Reference Form Proposed Subcontract Name: Independent Steel Erectors, Inc. Contact: Randy Ratcliff Phone Number: 713-947-9756 Email Address: randvc iseinc.cc REFERENCES REFERENCE 1: Company Name: Caulev Construction Contact: Tommy Caylev Phone Number: 713-248-5191 Email Address: tcaulev7Cc vahoo.com REFERENCE 2: Company Name: Fullbright & Company Contact: Jeff Fullbright Phone Number: 713-828-9115 Email Address: jeff cc fullbrightco.com REFERENCE 3: Company Name: P & S Properties / Pro Comm Builders Contact: Paul Vick Phone Number: 936-624-2253 Email Address: pvicVi vmail.com Total Value of Coi _ _,Meted Contracts 2015-2020 FORNEY 55,000,000.00 54,500,000.00 54,000,000.00 53,500,000.00 $3,000,000.00 $2,500,000.00 I $2,000,000.00 51,500,000.00 51.,000,000.00 • 5500,000.00 5' Garza Site Development Gulf Shore Services Hightower Electric Company Ltd Comflow Mechanical Services GWS Services CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND SAFETY RECORD 5 points 6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM 2 points A. Describe your firm's methodology for ensuring quality control over sub-contracted work. Please review the management approach for details on our quality control program. B. What quality assurance components does your firm put in place with self-performed work? Forney will not self-perfom any portion of this work. C. Are you currently in litigation concerning any of your projects or have you litigated any owner in the last five years? Explain Please review the following details regarding litigation history. 6.2 SAFETY QUESTIONAIRE 3 points A. List your Firm's Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate for the three most recent years as evidenced in Workmen's Compensation Insurance premiums. If your company is not Interstate rated,provide your intrastate EMR. 2018:0.75 2019: 0.75 2020:0.91 The above-mentioned information should be confirmed by a letter from your Worker Compensation Insurance Carrier. 12-2017 Offeror's Initials: 7/5' 00300-PartC-6 of7 Litigation History tLL (De.e(iUa+'t�) Forney Construction, LLC (Forney) was contracted by Bethesda Lutheran Communities, Inc. (the Owner) in May 2014 to construct new facilities in north Harris County, Texas. The project was completed in May 2016 and the Owner occupied the property soon thereafter. In September 2017, Hurricane Harvey, a category 4 storm, affected the Houston area by bringing approximately 52 inches of rainfall to Houston and the surrounding areas. Extensive water entered the Community Life Center and flooded portions of the building. Due to alleged defects in the construction of the project, in May 2018 the Owner filed a performance claim against Forney concerning the roof leak and resulting damage to the property. Forney informed Hartford, its liability insurance provider,of the claim and Hartford has provided continuous legal defense on behalf of Forney. Following extensive forensic investigations at the property, it was determined by experts that the failure was primarily the result of design flaws, not construction performance. Subsequent to these investigations, the Owner also filed a claim against the design firm for failure in design. The attorneys involved in the claim are discussing mediation proceedings,but,as of this moment,no final decision has been made.The claim is currently scheduled for the November 2020 court docket. Safety on Site INVESTING INTO OUR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE OUR PEOPLE Our team has established a company-wide, aggressive Safety Program that is the basis of every project- specific safety plan developed. These requirements exceed OSHA's minimum guidelines. While Forney maintains a company-wide safety program, the Forney team evaluates the individual needs of each client and project and develops a project-specific safety program at project award. Primary responsibility for the development of the project safety program lies with the assigned Project Superintendent; however,our Vice President of Field Operations,Steve Mounts,and our General Superintendent,p Kevin Fogarty,are also heavily involved in the process. Safety By Design Forney Construction has commissioned Safety by Design,a third-party safety consulting firm,to provide weekly,unannounced safety audits at our job sites. The audit results are shared with our field operations management team and members of the executive management team Any items of concern discovered during the audit are quickly evaluated and resolved.We use these job site audits to keep track of long-term safety statistics of our subcontractors performance.If any subcontractor has frequent job site safety infractions they are removed from our database and we will not enlist them on future projects. Forney Safety Committee The purpose of the Forney Safety Committee is twofold First,the committee provides important support functions to our Field Operations Management Team.Second,it is a means of empowering our people to participate directly in a program that they are also required to comply with daily The committee's responsibilities include monitoring successful completion of safety forms for every Forney project, mentoring Forney's young professional superintendents, compiling job site audits, and organizing the job site audit data to track certain statistics deemed important by the Forney Executive Team and our Clients. This committee rotates members annually such that any interested team member has an opportunity to get more deeply involved in the processes surrounding Forney's Safety Program. Lost Time Incident Rate Recordable Incident Rate Fatalities 2011 -0 2011 -0 2011 -0 2012-0 2012-0 2012-0 2013-0 2013-0 2013-0 2014-0 2014-0 2014-0 2015-0 2015-0 2015-0 2016-0 2016-0 2016-0 2017-0 2017-0 2017-0 2018-0 2018-0 2018-0 2019-0 2019-0 2019-0 To Date since Inception 0 To Date since Inception:0 To Date since Inception:0 Worker's Compensation Experience Total Production Modification Rate Man-Hours 2013-0.87 2013 -930,246 2014-0.81 2014-1,071,795 2015-0.81 2015-1,094,552 2016-0.75 2016-1,441,237 2017-0.79 2017-1,487,855 2018-0.75 2018-1,148,751 2019-0 75 2019 - 950,976 Our Commitment to a Safe Site At Forney Construction,Safety is more than a hard hat. It is more than a word or a box to check. It is a commitment to our people and it is the way we work.We achieve this through education and training,a pledge to exceed the standards,a culture that promotes awareness and empowers people to speak up if something doesn't look right,and a routine of frequent inspections.As we state in our core values,we believe the best investment we can make is in the person sitting next to us,and that starts with their safety. k,fig 09/02/2020 Forney Construction, LLC. 8945 Long Point Rd.Suite 200 Houston, TX 77055 Re: Workers'Compensation Experience Modifier—All Operations To Whom It May Concern: Please be advised that the current and four previous NCCI Workers' Compensation Experience Modifiers for Forney Construction, LLC.are as follows; Modifier Effective Date Modifier 10/01/2020 0.91 10/02/2019 0.72 10/01/2018 0.75 10/01/2017 0.79 07/15/2016 0.75 07/15/2015 0.81 10/15/2014 0.81 Please advise if additional information is required. Sincerely, William Cravens Account Services Administrator Lockton Companies W CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL SEALED COMPETITIVE PROPOSAL PART C B. Are accident reports(OSHA 300)and report summaries sent to the following?And if so,how often? We utilize Raken to provide daily safety updates on every project. • Field Superintendent: daily • Vice President—Operations: daily • President of Firm: daily How are accident records and summaries kept? How often are theyreported? C. has not hadone accident on a project jobsite Since our inception,so an inCident would be immediately reported to all levels of our leadership. • Accidents totaled for entire Company: • Accidents totaled for Project: • Accidents Totaled by Superintendent and/or Foreman: D. Existing Safety and Orientation Programs: • Summarize and submit the Offeror firm's safety program execution plan(I page). Outline the training requirements and frequency,meeting types and frequency,and personnel responsible for executing the plan on site as a minimum. Please review the following safety plan. 7. OF FEROR'S FINANCIAL STATEMENT 5 points Provide audited financial statement consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Offeror for the Offeror's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Proposal,which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Offeror shall be used to determine an Offeror's net working capital,which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. An Offeror's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Offeror's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being considered. The Offeror's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as"confidential",and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released,would give advantage to a competitor or bidder,and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Offeror. Financial statements have been uploaded under separate cover,and marked as confidential. END OF SECTION 12-2017 Offeror's Initials:2/r 00300-PartC-7 of7 OSHA's Form 300A Year 2017 Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses U.S.Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Fnrn ap roved 071B no 12,8.8171; All establishments covered by Part 1904 must complete this Summary page,even if no injuries or illnesses occurred during the year. Remember to review the Log to verify that the entries are complete Using the Log,count the individual entries you made for each category. Then write the totals below, Establishment information making sure you've added the entries from every page of the log. If you had no cases write"0." Employees former employees,and their representatives have the right to review the OSHA Form 300 in Your establishment name Forney Construction its entirety. They also have limited access to the OSHA Form 301 or its equivalent. See 29 CFR 1904.35.in OSHA's Recordkeeping rule.for further details on the access provisions for these forms. Street 8945 Long Point Suite 200 Number of Cases City Houston State Texas Zip 77055 Industry description(e.g.,Manufacture of motor truck trailers) Total number of Total number of Total number of cases Total number of General contractor deaths cases with days with job transfer or other recordable away from work restriction cases Standard Industrial Classification(SIC),if known(e.g.,SIC 3715) 0 0 0 0 1 5 4 2 (G) (H) (I) (J) Number of Days Employment information Total number of Total number of days days of job transfer away from work Annual average number of employees 60 or restriction 0 0 Total hours worked by all employees last year 110,795 (K) (L) Injury and Illness Types Sign here Total number of... Knowingly falsifying this document may result in a fine. (M) (1) Injury 0 (4) Poisoning 0 (2) Skin Disorder 0 (5) All other illnesses 0 (3) Respiratory I certify that I have examined this document and that to the best of my knowledge the Condition 0 entries are true,accurate,and complete. Steve Mounts Safety Director Company executive Title 713.224.1900 1/282017 Post this Summary page from February 1 to April 30 of the year following the year covered by the form Phone Date Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 50 minutes per response.including time to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information.Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collector.contact US Department of Labor.OSHA Office of Statistics.Room N-3644.200 Constitution Ave.NW.Washington.DC 20210.Do not send the completed forms to this office. •OSHA's Form 300A Year 2018 Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses U.S.Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration Form approved OMB no.1218-0176 All establishments covered by Part 1904 must complete this Summary page.even if no injuries or illnesses occurred during the year. Remember to review the Log to verify that the entries are complete Using the Log.count the individual entries you made for each category. Then write the totals below, Establishment information making sure you've added the entries from every page of the log. If you had no cases write"0." Employees former employees,and their representatives have the right to review the OSHA Form 300 in Your establishment name Forney Construction its entirety. They also have limited access to the OSHA Form 301 or its equivalent. See 29 CFR 1904.35.in OSHA's Recordkeeping rule.for further details on the access provisions for these forms. Street 8945 Long Point Suite 200 Number of Cases City Houston State Texas Zip 77055 Industry description(e.g.,Manufacture of motor truck trailers) Total number of Total number of Total number of cases Total number of General Contractor deaths cases with days with job transfer or other recordable away from work restriction cases Standard Industrial Classification(SIC),if known(e.g..SIC 3715) 0 0 0 0 1 5 4 2 (G) (H) (I) (J) — — — — Number of Days Employment information Total number of Total number of days days of job transfer away from work Annual average number of employees 66 or restriction 0 0 Total hours worked by all employees last year 135,543 (K) (L) Injury and Illness Types Sign here Total number of... Knowingly falsifying this document may result in a fine. (M) (1) Injury 0 (4) Poisoning 0 (2) Skin Disorder 0 (5) All other illnesses 0 (3) Respiratory I certify that I have examined this document and that to the best of my knowledge the Condition 0 entries are true,accurate,and complete. Steve Mounts Safety Director Company executive Title 713.224.1900 1/16/2019 Post this Summary page from February 1 to April 30 of the year following the year covered by the form Phone Date Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 50 minutes per response,including time to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed,and complete and review the collection of information. Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact:US Department of Labor.OSHA Office of Statistics,Room N-3644.200 Constitution Ave,NW.Washington.DC 20210.Do not send the completed forms to this office. OSHA's Form 300A Year 2019 41> Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses U.S.Department of Labor occupational Safety and Health Administration Form approved OMB no 1218-0176 All establishments covered by Part 1904 must complete this Summary page,even if no injuries or illnesses occurred during the year. Remember to review the Log to verify that the entries are complete Using the Log.count the individual entries you made for each category. Then write the totals below, Establishment information making sure you've added the entries from every page of the log. If you had no cases write"0." Employees former employees,and their representatives have the right to review the OSHA Form 300 in Your establishment name Forney Construction its entirety. They also have limited access to the OSHA Form 301 or its equivalent. See 29 CFR 1904.35.in OSHA's Recordkeeping rule.for further details on the access provisions for these forms. Street 8945 Long Point Suite 200 Number of Cases City Houston State Texas Zip 77055 Industry description(e.g.,Manufacture of motor truck trailers) Total number of Total number of Total number of cases Total number of General Contractor deaths cases with days with job transfer or other recordable away from work restriction cases Standard Industrial Classification(SIC),if known(e.g..SIC 3715) 0 0 0 0 1 5 4 2 (G) (H) (I) (J) — — — — Number of Days Employment information Total number of Total number of days days of job transfer away from work Annual average number of employees 66 or restriction 0 0 Total hours worked by all employees last year 156,000 (K) (L) Injury and Illness Types Sign here Total number of... Knowingly falsifying this document may result in a fine. (M) (1) Injury 0 (4) Poisoning 0 (2) Skin Disorder 0 (5) All other illnesses 0 (3) Respiratory I certify that I have examined this document and that to the best of my knowledge the Condition 0 entries are true,accurate,and complete. Steve Mounts Safety Director Company executive Title 713.224.1900 1/16/2020 Post this Summary page from February 1 to April 30 of the year following the year covered by the form Phone Date Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 50 minutes per response,including time to review the instruction,search and gather the data needed.and complete and review the collection of information.Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. If you have any comments about these estimates or any aspects of this data collection,contact:US Department of Labor.OSHA Office of Statistics.Room N-3644.200 Constitution Ave,NW.Washington,DC 20210. Do not send the completed forms to this office. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland(hereinafter called OWNER or City) and Forney Construction, LLC (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II Project City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: PK2001 BID NO.: 0820-53 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by Kristina Malek, PLA with Kimley-Horn located at 11700 Katy Freeway, Suite 800, Houston,TX 77079who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within two hundred and seventy eight (278) days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable),and completed and ready for Final Payment within three hundred and eight (308)days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run.No work will be allowed on Sundays. 32 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above,plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial 4-2015 00500- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 33 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $4,552,384.78, (the"Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid [and Alternate(s) 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment"of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.12 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion 4-2015 00500-2of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option,may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Final Payment." 52 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost,progress,performance,or furnishing of the Work. 72 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 73 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying)all such examinations, investigations,explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, 4-2015 00500-3of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price,within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 73 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers'Compensation Insurance Coverage,Attachment No.2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 135 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase II, Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. 4-2015 00500-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 92 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 93 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors,assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 95 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event anynotice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried 4-2015 00500-5of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 99 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER (through its employee handbook) considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery, misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A(attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in quintuplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: 20 OWNER CONTRACTOR CITY OF PEARLAND Forney Construct' , LLC By: A ---- By: A119-4, %8% Title: C MF., c,,r— Title: QD l Date: JO Noveyt - ZO??) Date: 11.5—. I/o (Corporate .Seal) ATTEST ATTEST /JlAyl '( ± tk Address for giving notices Address for giving notices City of Pearland rY'j CLASkatunik-it 3519 Liberty Drive 9N S Pd r�.c * Pearland TX 77581 (�U*C vn Oss I Phone: 281-652-1734 Phone:1I3.Z.1.q. ICI VD Fax: Fax: Agent for service of process END OF SECTION 4-2015 00500- 7of7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor') agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions:The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT APPENDIX B House Bill 89 Verification Alberto Garza (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of Forney Construction, LL (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18)years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli-controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. SIGNATURE OF REPRESENTATIVE , SUBSCiIpED,AN� SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day of NNO401 , 207A). Notary f UbIlc —;INAI E. FLORES i �1 i; Notary Public, State of Texas ::1 GV.'v Comm. Expires 10-19-2022 ,'oTF�F`o`s Notary ID 129841965 DUPLICATE ORIGINAL CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 Bond No. 61 BCSIL9425 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Forney Construction, LLC of Houston, County_of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$ Four Million Five Hundred Fifty Two Thousand Three Hundred Eighty Four and 78/100[$4,552,384.78] Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 9th day of November, 20 20 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 City of Pe arland, Texas COP PN: PK2001 BID NO.: 0820-53 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 12/2007 00610- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 26th day of October ,20 20. Principal: Surety: Forney Construction, LLC Hartford Fire Insurance Comoarj 7 By: By: - — Title: 161 t it4( Lel Pr6clQwr Title: Aaron P. Clark,Attorney-In-Fact Address: Address: 8945 Long Point Rd., Suite 200 One Hartford Plaza i-iouston,TX 77055 Hartford, CT 06155 '1 elephone: 713-224-1900 Telephone: 860-547-5000 Fax: Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAYBE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007 00610- 2 of 2 DUPLICATE ORIGINAL CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 Bond No. 61BCSIL9425 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Forney ConstructionLLLC of Houston, County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$Four Million Five Hundred Fifty Two Thousand Three Hundred Eighty Four and 78/100 [$4,552,384.78] Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 9th day of November, 20 20 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: PK2001 BID NO.:0820-53 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00611 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 26th day of October .20 20 Principal: Surety: Forney Construction, LLC Hartford Fire Insurance Company By: By: Title: 1,01AV E N[ Pfas%‘JOiSr. Title: Aaron P. Clark,Attorney-In-Fact Address: Address: 8945 Long Point Rd., Suite 200 One Hartford Plaza Houston,TX 77055 Hartford, CT 06155 Telephone: 713-224-1900 Telephone: 860-547-5000 Fax: Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00611 - 2 of 2 DUPLICATE ORIGINAL CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Section 00612 Bond No. 61BCSIL9425 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Forney Construction, LLC of Houston, County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of$Four Million Five Hundred Fifty Two Thousand Three Hundred Eighty Four and 78/100 [$4,552,384.78] Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 9th day of November, 20 20 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 City of Pe arland, Texas COP PN: PK2001 BID NO.: 0820-53 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00612 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 26th day of October ,20 20. Principal: Surety: Forney ConstructioNIEC Hartford Fire Insurance Company By: By:CI Title: b>� PC6 I Pk-51---- Title: Aaron P. Clark, Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: 8945 Long Point Rd.,Suite 200 One Hartford Plaza Houston,TX 77055 Hartford, CT 06155 Telephone: 713-224-1900 Telephone: 860-547-5000 Fax: Fax: NOTICE:THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAYBE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612 - 2 of 2 Direct Inquiries/Claims to: THE HARTFORD POWER OF ATTORNEY BOND,T-12 HartOne Haford Plaza ford,Conne tcut06155 Bond.Claims(Wthehartford.com call:888-266-3488 or fax:860-757-5835 NOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: LOCKTON COMPANIES LLC Agency Code: 61-614 2 5 0 X Hartford Fire Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut X Hartford Casualty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana X Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin City Fire Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut, (hereinafter collectively referred to as the"Companies")do hereby make, constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Robert F. Bobo, Aaron P. Clark, Kristin Darling, Timothy F. Kelly, Florence McClellan, Rachel Richardson, Autumn Stockton of HOUSTON, Texas their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies) only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 6, 2015 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies, the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. ' �,r,�L raw '/°wiry `�G - ,xs' rs.�J. �+' �'' ���'3 , :,...,.�. o _i','�' �rd�enleu,ir■ a it ••• ! �c. a� s..,1� �' lea r 1657 ►• • �7 • ! S �' • ?a- ! +:•.o \ 3r G r �x �� -IN t.�: 1 p 0 Iy 9 I9,9 /14, 10 John Gray,Assistant Secretary M. Ross Fisher, Senior Vice President STATE OF CONNECTICUT ss. Hartford COUNTY OF HARTFORD ))) On this 5th day of January, 2018, before me personally came M. Ross Fisher,to me known,who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he is the Senior Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto by like authority. 04\ Kathleen T.Maynard Notary Public CERTIFICATE My Commission Expires July 31,2021 I, the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is still in full force effective as of October 2 6, 2 02 0 Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. Tr taw vegiwrr, i a"' ic.�r"� Ai) ‘vor 00""Thega bloo""`"tosci.1 "'"" I} >�." ",or,n. tr,. • • para*a : 1y70 1Dgi• •- .; 919 Kevin Heckman,Assistant Vice President POA 2018 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE FORM CIQ For vendor doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session. OFFICE USE ONLY This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code,by a vendor who Date Received has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the vendor becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a-1),Local Government Code. A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code.An offense under this section is a misdemeanor. J Name of vendor who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. N/A Jn I 1 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire.(The law requires that you file an updated t completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.) 2-1 Name of local government officer about whom the Information Is being disclosed. N/A Name of Officer Describe each employment or other business relationship with the local government officer, or a family member of the officer,as described by Section 176.003(a)(2)(A). Also describe any family relationship with the local government officer. Complete subparts A and B for each employment or business relationship described. Attach additional pages to this Form CIO as necessary. N/A A. Is the local government officer or a family member of the officer receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the vendor? Yes No B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income,other than investment income,from or at the direction of the local government officer or a family member of the officer AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No Describe each employment or business relationship that the vendor named in Section 1 maintains with a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director,or holds an ownership interest of one percent or more. N/A Check this box if the vendor has given the local government officer or a family member of the officer one or more gifts as described in Section 176.003(a)(2)(B) excluding gifts described in Section 176.003(a-1). 2j 9/2/20 Signa re of dor doin business with the governmental entity Date o Garza.President Form provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state tx.us Revised 11 30,2015 CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: construction of a multi-purpose field,miracle field,restroom/concessions building, pavement,utilities, lighting,fencing,grading,and landscaping complete and in place. In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of$ the undersigned,on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made,the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety,if any,through the above date from any and all claims,liens,or right to claim or lien,arising out of this Project under any applicable bond,law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to,before me,this day of ,20 My Commission Expires: Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement,as applicable,and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement,as applicable,and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement,as referenced in Article 8,shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties,including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release,and Attachment No. 3 —Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda,if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; (7) Instructions to Bidders; (8) Bid Proposal;and 10-2012 00700- 1 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits,if any,attached hereto,are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents,or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements,as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority,shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract,unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents,and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended,or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail,Return Receipt Requested,to the last known business address or registered office of such individual,partnership,joint venture or corporation or company,or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance,and all water,light,power,fuel,transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall,if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER,to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans.Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein,a"Work Day"is defined as any Monday through Friday,not a legal holiday,and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 10-2012 00700-2 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work.Refer to paragraph 7.05 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein,is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1 .12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY.A "calendar day"is any day of the week,month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided,all references to"day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete"or"Substantial Completion"as used in this Contract,shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or o c cup ancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations,the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER.Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria,ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed","permitted","designated","required","ordered","considered necessary","prescribed" or words of like import are used,it shall be understood that the direction,requirement,permission, order,opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly,the words"approved","acceptable","satisfactory"or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 10-2012 00700-3 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents,the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish,workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature,be specifically and clearly described and specified,but are necessarily described in general terms,the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment,then, in all such cases,any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative,and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words,terms or clauses defusing the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification,or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer,Contractor,or their consultants,employees,or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein,refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement:(i)to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by(a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays,in the opinion of the Owner,beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items,or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 10-2012 00700-4 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions,inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents,all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations,thereto,as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed,constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing,constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection,performance,construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans,specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and,with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work.All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations,additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done,they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract,otherwise,such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work,then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 10-2012 00700-5 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable,then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties,responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out,and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified,it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four(4)copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR,and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated,for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal o f redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality,and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change.No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover,object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract,including without limitation,the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance,upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance,and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing,inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER,provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work,should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 10-2012 00700-6 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional/or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents,and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents.However,the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed,exhaustive,comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work,nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible,directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and,on the basis of such on-site observations,will keep the OWNER informed o f the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall,in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work,which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents.In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question,the ENGINEER shall,within a reasonable time,provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work,copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.04. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents,shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated,to the best of his knowledge,information and belief;however,such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.11 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 10-2012 00700-7 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract,with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means,method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area,the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity o f such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder,is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person,firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has,by careful examination,satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work,the conformation of the ground,the character,quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access,lay down and storage areas,and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms,meaning,intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents,and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors,and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract,shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal,state or local laws,codes,ordinances,permits and regulations,regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work,and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City,he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws,codes,ordinances,rules or regulations,or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation,and without such notice to the ENGINEER,CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas,and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 10-2012 00700-8 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract,nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law,all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811—Wage Scale for Engineering Construction,or Document 00813 —Wage Scale for Building Construction,or both,as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance,Payment and Maintenance Bonds,each in the sum of one hundred percent(100%)of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code.If the Contract Price does not exceed$25,000.00,the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance,Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure,maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State o f Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract,whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor,or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code,Chapter 151, Subsection H. 10-2012 00700-9 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work,during its progress,a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants,all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner;the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language;the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done,even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work,from its commencement to completion,shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers,skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract,to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are,in his opinion,incompetent,unfaithful or disorderly,or in the ENGINEER's opinion,are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor,or supplier found to be incompetent,unfaithful,disorderly,or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services,tools,equipment,machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials,supplies,machinery,equipment,tools,apparatus,accessories,facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices,or the erection of tents or other forms of protection,will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission,and at 10-2012 00700-10 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct,and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed,placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION.Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site,properly secluded from public observation,shall be constructed and maintaine d by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER,and their use shall be strictly enforced.Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out,shall be the sole responsibility o f the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by any one by reason of the erection,construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials,and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent,upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition.In case of dispute,the OWNER may remove the debris,trash,waste and surplus materials,and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR,or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment,or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time,and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order,at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying performed from the"Control"documents provided in the plans and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. Construction Surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the Work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, Contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction 10-2012 00700-11 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the Work. See section 7.01 Differing Site Conditions. 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, single electronic copies of submittals uploaded to the ProTrak system,unless otherwise specified, o f all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission.The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER,file with him two (2)corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed.The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission,and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing,nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents,and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth,it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby,in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder,and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals,review comments,notes,corrections,schedules and updates,testing results, payment applications,instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak project management software. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies from this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is 10-2012 00700-12 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers,representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers,representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers,representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any subordinate engineer,representative or observer,the CONTRACTOR may,within three(3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative,shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe,inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation,inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents,regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER,it must,if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination,at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated.All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work,which is required to be inspected,tested or approved,is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER,it must,if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests,inspections or approval,and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER,nor inspections,certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 10-2012 00700-13 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER,forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that it shall be in full accordance with this Contract,It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications,as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents,the intent o f such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform.CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound,at his own expense,for design,construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract,including,without limitation,the adequacy of all temporary supports,shoring, bracing, scaffolding,machinery or equipment,safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction,and work performed either directly or incident to construction,and for all loss,damage or injury incident thereto,either to person or property,whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER,the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER,or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes,or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed,as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project,including,without limitation,the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction,or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents,whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss,damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site,as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and 10-2012 00700-14 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways,ladders,bridges,gangplanks,barricades, fences,traffic control,warning signs and other safety devices. No alcoholic beverages,non-prescription drugs,or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees,or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately,and within no more than eight(8)hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR,in his sole discretion as an independent contractor.Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement,as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER,or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered,which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, 10-2012 00700-15 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship,contractual or otherwise,between OWNER and any subcontractor,laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor,laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR 10-2012 00700-16 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY,JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary,in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER,his agents, servants or employees,from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract,and arises from personal injury or death,property injury,or any other expense that arise s from personal injury,death,or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract,and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,disability benefit acts or other employee benefit 10-2012 00700-17 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT acts,and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same,or from the action of the elements,or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. Comment: Is this far reaching enough to protect the City from loss due to natural causes of materials, equipment and work in place and accepted at the time of loss? 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship;and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective,deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents,and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects,deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees,the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract,unless otherwise herein specifically provided,that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons,in such order of precedence,and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction;provided,however,that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done,either by contract or by his own forces,the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract,so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized,and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors by any means determined by the Contractor except where determined to produce a risk to the health and safety of Contractor's or sub-contractors personnel,or the general public. Owner shall have the right to review and comment on any means or methods proposed by the Contractor and,in the event of finding unsafe conditions,halt that work if, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, such risk is deemed present The CONTRACTOR shall submit,an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show 10-2012 00700-18 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project,taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth,and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts,fires,Acts of God,or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay.The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice,in writing and within three(3)days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR,its subcontractors or suppliers,and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work,sufficient to compensate for the delay,and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If,during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time,Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The Owner and the Contractor hereby agree that the addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference,disruption,hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference,disruption,hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract,except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 10-2012 00700-19 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible,or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed,and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER,that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore,the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages,and not as a penalty,the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However,the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR,the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise,from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten(10)days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent o f the claim,along with supporting data,shall be delivered within thirty(30)days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum,the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. 10-2012 00700-20 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT C. Revised,current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR,including,but not limited to,interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work,Contractor shall b e entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or(ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions,acts of God,even if such delays are due in part to the negligence,other fault,breach of contract or warranty,violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act,or strict liability without regard to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to,and within the control of,a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids,then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five(5)days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered,unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any quantity estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be performed and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work.It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences,unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits,or other compensation. 10-2012 00700-21 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER,and all costs,expenses,bond and insurance premiums,taxes,overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents,the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized,installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services,materials or units o f work not actually authorized and installed. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him,and for full performance of the Work and the whole the reo f in the manner and according to this Agreement,Contract Documents,and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract,either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate,approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall,at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER,which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount,prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable,the agreed unit quantities or percentages of completed and approved Work and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month;said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site 10-2012 00700-22 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT only.Payment for materials stored but not incorporating into the Work shall be based solely on the Contractor's identification of this material and his enumeration of this cost as separate components of the work item; i.e. material/ installation. The Contractor's Schedule of Values shall identify Work anticipated to require separate payment for material stored and separate those costs from the costs to install in the Schedule of Values. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment,if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents,the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute,and request that the application be corrected and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615,duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment,the undisputed balance due,less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement,CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a partial release of all claims,direct or indirect, at law or in equity,arising out of or related to the Work to date,excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract,and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent(5%) o f the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood,however,that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER,and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs,through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR,the OWNER may,upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments,and subject to the conditions set forth under"6.08 FINAL PAYMENT." 10-2012 00700-23 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired;but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession,give OWNER written notice of same,and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time,or both,as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR, that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete".Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt,and within a reasonable time thereafter,of such notice,the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work,and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents,the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven(7)days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen(14)days,notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete.Upon Substantial Completion of the Work,ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work,including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work,has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; 10-2012 00700-24 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents,and to satisfy other requirements,if any,which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety,if any,to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed,and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors,vendors,suppliers or manufacturers,as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor,vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment,tools,temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site,and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No.2,executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents,including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties,operation and maintenance manuals,etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion;and (k) the Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions,cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or 10-2012 00700-25 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT provisions of the Contract Documents,except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not,and CONTRACTOR shall,at his own expense,promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten(10)business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove,replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents,CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition,CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents,when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to,and not in lieu of,all warranties or remedies,which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract,and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of,the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment,to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor,OWNER,existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; 10-2012 00700-26 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion;and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction,the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account,charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code,as amended,and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law,CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code,and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work,if subsurface,latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract,the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three(3)calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a)Upon written notification,the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions,and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract,an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits,will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. 10-2012 00700-27 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven(7)calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension,the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven(7)calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a)Upon receipt,the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR,its suppliers,or subcontractors at any approved tier,and not caused by weather,the ENGINEER will make an adjustment(excluding profit)and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination,in writing,whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause,or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement,the OWNER may,at any time or from time to time,order additions,deletions or revisions to the Work;such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price,as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work,and any change in Contract Time,which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall,upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days,prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the 10-2012 00700-28 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order,with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order,Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered,added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive,or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method(A)--By Contract unit prices applicable to the work,if any;or Method(B)--By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price;or Method(C)--If neither Method(A)nor Method(B)can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced,then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the"Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent,ten(10%)for the subcontractor plus five(5%)for the General Contractor or b)For the General Contractor alone,self-performing the extra work,without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent(10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method(C),then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the"Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment,for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents,plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the"Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER.The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing,before the work commences,the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used;otherwise these matters shall be 10-2012 00700-29 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the"Actual Field Cost"to be paid to the CONTRACTOR,shall cover and compensate him for his profit,overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the"Actual Field Cost"as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions,otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work,but shall merely constitute a direction to the CONTRACTOR to perform the work,and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the"Actual Field Cost"thereof,as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work,any changes in the Work or Extra Work,the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission,or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0,within sixty (60)days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER,or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date,and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim,dispute,or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein,all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three(3)days after the ENGINEER has given any directions,order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception.The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty(30)days to such written exceptions,and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the 10-2012 00700-30 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing,to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason,to timely file a Request for Mediation,the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability,and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver,forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim,dispute,or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five(5)days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents,or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety,to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof,and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default,and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner;or otherwise dispose of such machinery,equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work;it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten(10)days after the service of such notice,then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the fo llo wing elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the 10-2012 00700-31 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand;or (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids,under the times and procedures provided for by law,may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER upon demand. However,should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract,the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed,the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts,certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER,prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder,shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate,and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein,the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release o f any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract,or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price,and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract,provided,however,that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen(15)days from the date 10-2012 00700-32 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of such notice,the OWNER may sell such property,equipment,tools,materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work,and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall,in OWNER'S sole opinion,fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supp lie s or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt,timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors,vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required,necessary,essentially unique to the Pro j ect and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project,OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned,unpaid amount u nd e r the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings,makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors,or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four(24)hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further,it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two(72)hours of such request, OWNER 10-2012 00700-33 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance,OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement,such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract,or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract,or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor,and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor,to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions,and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract,or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER,including,but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there,losses of financing,bonding capacity, business and reputation,and claims for lost profit,whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five(5)days written notice to CONTRACTOR,terminate this Contract,in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work,and shall take all reasonable measure s after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents,based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and 10-2012 00700-34 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages,for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible,impact or similarly described cost,damages or expense,and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price.The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract,other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR,then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery,tools and equipment,and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon,the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR,which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by said CONTRACTOR(at the Contract Prices),the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER,and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER,and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute,or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims,disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to,the Contract, or the breach thereof,shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR,and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and 10-2012 00700-3 5 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further,in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER,whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party,in whole or in part,in such proceeding. 10-2012 00700-36 of36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700- A I CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR,prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7),with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700-A3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as Shadow Creek Ranch Park- Phase II (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700- B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the_day of , 20_ CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation,the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the day of 20_by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700- B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We)am (are)the person(s)who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we)have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR- Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me,the day of 20 . Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700- B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release,whose names are set out above,who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation, pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation,the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this,the day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700 - B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO.3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and(c) others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO"means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700-C CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail,return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700-c2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700 -C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned,hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage,as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage,as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700-C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims-Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 10-2012 00700-C5 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: i. Additional expenses due to delay in $ TBD completion of project(where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error, omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications,workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit 25%of direct damage loss v. Earthquake (where applicable) $ TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where $ TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $ TBD viii. Flood(where applicable) $ TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot& Included without sublimit cold testing(where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation, non-renewal or Included 10-2012 00700-C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction—60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law Included without sublimit xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal $ TBD xv. Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below. 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood, Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, B or V d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached, has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700-C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700-C 10 --- 1 ACc REP' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ‘a.....------- 10,1 2021 10/29'2020 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS (TERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES ELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED EPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER LOCKTON COMPANIES CONTACT PHONE 3657 BRIARPARK DRIVE,SUITE 700 HO, E FAx Ext): (A/C,No): HOUSTON TX 77042 E-MAIL 866-260-3538 ADDRESS: INSURERISI AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A: Valley Forge Insurance Company 20508 INSURED Fomey Construction,LLC INSURER B: The Continental Insurance Company 35289 1415525 8945 Long Point Suite 200 INSURER C: American Casualty Company of Reading.PA 20427 Houston TX 77055 INSURER D: Travelers Property Casualty Co of America 25674 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 17093023 REVISION NUMBER: XXXXXXX THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE AWL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LTRINSD WVO POLICY NUMBER (MM/DD/YYYY)(MMIDD/YYYY) LIMITS A x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY y y 6079399627 10/1 2020 10 1/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE n OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED I I PREMISES(Ea occurrence) $ 500,000 X Ded PD Only 5,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $ 15,000 PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 POLICY X PEai n LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 OTHER: AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y Y BUA 6079399613 I0i 1 3020 I Oil,2021 (Ee aacldeDtSINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000 000 X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ XXXXXXX SCHEDULEDX _ AUTOS ONLY T BODILY INJURY(Per accident $ XXXXXXX X AUTOS ONLY AUTO ONLYY PROPERTY DAMAGE $ XXXXXXX -- (Per accident) $ XXXXXXX g X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR Y Y CUE 6079399580 I0i 1 2020 10,li2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 X EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ 10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$I0.000 $ XXXXXXX r. WORKERS COMPENSATION , PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N Y WC 6 79399594 I Oi I 1_0_0 10 l _0i_1 X STATUTE ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? 711 N I A E L.EACH ACCIDENT $ j,000,000 (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 D Excess Liability S lid XS y y ZUP-6I N32901-20-NF (Oil 2020 10/1 2021 Per Occurrence-S I5,000,000 S I OM Aggregate-S 15,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) All policies(except Workers'Compensation:EL)contain a special endorsement with"primary and noncontributory"wording. Re: FCC Project:1835,Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2, 13050 Shadow Creek Pkwy,Pearland,TX 77584. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION See Attachment SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 17093023 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE City Of Pearland 3915 Liberty Drive Pearland TX 77581 ACORD 25(2016/03) ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATI ,All rights reserved The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Attachment Code : D540344 Master ID: 1415525, Certificate ID: 17093023 All policies (except Workers' Compensation/EL) include a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement [provision] that confers additional insured status to the certificate holder only if there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires the named insured to name the certificate holder as an additional insured. In the absence of such a contractual obligation on the part of the named insured, the certificate holder is not an additional insured under the policy. All policies include a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement [provision] that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires it. In the absence of such a contractual obligation on the part of the named insured, the waiver of subrogation feature does not apply. The Umbrella Liability policy includes the General Liability, Auto Liability and Employers Liability policies in the underlying schedule. C� DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) A C CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE 12152020 10272020 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS "'RTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATEVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES LOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED PRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. PRODUCER CONTACT LOCKTON COMPANIES NAME: 3657 BRIARPARK DRIVE,SUITE 700 PHONE FAx INC.No.Exq: (NC.No): HOUSTON TX 77042 E-MAIL 866-260-3538 ADDRESS: PRODUCER CUSTOMER ID: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED Forney Construction,LLC INSURER A: The Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 105103 8945 Long Point INSURER B: Suite 200 Houston TX 77055 INSURER C: INSURER D: INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: LOCATION OF PREMISES/DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY(Attach ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,if more space is required) THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION COVERED PROPERTY LIMITS LTR DATE(MM/DD/YY) DATE(MM/DD/YY) A X PROPERTY QT-660-8074X74A-TLC-20 10i 1 2020 10,1 2021 X BUILDING S 5.000.000 CAUSES OF LOSS DEDUCTIBLES X PERSONAL PROPERTY S 331.500 BASIC BUILDING 5,000 X BUSINESS INCOME S 674,703 BROAD CONTENTS EXTRA EXPENSE S XXXXXXX X SPECIAL 5.000 RENTAL VALUE S XXXXXXX K EARTHQUAKE BLANKET BUILDING S XXXXXXX X WIND BLANKET PERS PROP S XXXXXXX X FLOOD BLANKET BLDG&PP S XXXXXXX S XXXXXXX S XXXXXXX A X INLAND MARINE TYPE OF POLICY 12,15,2019 12.15,2_020 X S See Below CAUSES OF LOSS Builders Risk S XXXXXXX NA.IED PERILS POLICY NUMBER S XXXXXXX QT-660-81920587-TLC-20 s XXXXXXX CRIME S XXXXXXX TYPE OF POLICY NOT APPLICABLE s XXXXXXX s XXXXXXX BOILER&MACHINERY/ XXXXXXX EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN NOT APPLICABLE s XXXXXXX SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OTHER COVERAGES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) Flood Zone B. Flood Zone X(shaded)and Flood Zone X-500: S1.000.000 Occurrence S1,000,000 Aggregate Flood Zone C and Flood Zone X(unshaded):S5.000.00( Occurrence S5,000.000 ABgrecate. Flood Coverage outlined is applicable to the Builders risk only. Re FCC Project:1835 Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase - 13050 Shadow Creek Pkwy,Pearland,TX 77584 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION [N1538544] SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN 210191 ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City Of Pearland 39(5 Liberty Drive AUTHORIZED REPRESEN TINE Pearland TX 77581 1995-2015 ACORD CORPORATION.All rights reserved. ACORD 24(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Miscellaneous Attachment : M538544 Master ID: 105103, Certificate ID: 210191 Forney Builders Risk Coverage Groups: 1.) New Construction and Renovation of Project Sites Consisting of Frame, Joisted Masonry, Brick, Veneer, Stucco or Non-Combustible (metal) Construction outside of Tier 1 Counties 2.) New Construction and Renovations of Project Sites Consisting of Masonry Non-Combustible, Modified Fire Resistive and Fire Resistive Construction outside of Tier 1 Counties 3.) New Construction and Renovations of Project Sites Consisting of Masonry Non-Combustible, Modified Fire Resistive or Fire Resistive Construction Located in Tier 1 Counties Limits And Rates: Coverage Group 1 $5,000,000 .0340 Coverage Group 2 $15,000,000 .0158 Coverage Group 3 $5,000,000 .0210 Deductible: $10,000 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions,Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions,the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: Morgan Early telephone:281. 652. 1854 The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No.3 To General Conditions,Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records,the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly,and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal.At the end of the contract,the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year,proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Not Required to provide either a Field Office or 07/2020 00800- 1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT any interne access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents.Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times,in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day. Contractor Will Not be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS Owner Provided Items: As a part of this contract,the Owner is providing certain project components. These items will be obtained by the Owner directly from manufacturer and delivered to the project site under separate contract. Contractor shall provide services to coordinate delivery,accept,securely store materials, and install items complete in place and ready for use. These items are: Item: Quantity Model/Specification Manufacturer Batting Rack-one for each dugout 2 EA To be Selected by City Synthetic Turf for Field(Type A) 228,826 SF FYI Spec Legion Pro 1.75 Shaw Sports Synthetic Turf for Field(Type B) 7,423 SF FYI Spec-City to Verify Shaw Spoils Shock Pad for Multipurpose Field 236,249 SF FYI Spec Brock PBYSR Brock Waste and Recycling Containers 6 EA To be Selected by City Bleachers 2 EA To be Selected by City Team Benches 6 EA To be Selected by City 40' x 15' Shade Structure 2 EA Full Hip Cantilever USA Shade 10'x 16' Shade Structure 1 EA Hip USA Shade Notes: • Contractor shall coordinate with Owner the schedule,timing,location,delivery of materials at the project site. • By accepting materials into possession,Contractor assumes responsibility for individual items and related appurtenances as complete and ready for installation. • Contractor shall at all-times maintain secure storage of materials. Contractor assumes responsibility for materials in possession. Contractor is responsible for providing adequate storage area and access. • Contractor shall install materials consistent with manufacturer'srecommendations and project documents. Upon completion work shall be complete in place and ready for use. • Contractor shall warranty materials and work consistent with manufacturer's warranty and project documents. 07/2020 00800-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner Provided Systems: As a part of this contract,the Owner is providing certain project component systems. These systems will be obtained by the Owner and installed by forces under separate contract with the Owner.These items will be obtained by the Owner and delivered to the project site under separate contract Contractor shall provide services to coordinate delivery,accept,and securely store materials. These items are: Item: Quantity Model/Specification Manufacturer Multipurpose Field Sports Field Lighting Poles 8 EA Fixtures 104 EA TLC-LED-1500 MUSCO TLC-LED-1200 MUSCO Miracle Field Sports Lighting Poles 2 EA Fixtures 8 EA TLC-LED-900 MUCCO TLC-RGBW-U MUSCO Parking Lot Lighting Poles 12 EA Fixtures 24 EA CREE OSQ CREE END OF SECTION 07/2020 00800-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five (5) feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. (Attach the current wage rates. Number the pages 00811-2, 00811-3, etc.) 10-2012 00811 - 1 of 1 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov "General Decision Number: TX20190032 01/04/2019 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20180044 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy County: Brazoria County in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Including Water and Sewer Lines (Does Not Include Flood Control) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.60 for calendar year 2019 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.60 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2019. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, icluding those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20190032/0/document 1/7 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2019 * SF1X0669-001 04/01/2017 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 29.03 15.84 5UTX2005-018 05/18/2005 Rates Fringes Carperter $ 14.38 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER $ 11.37 1.13 ELECTRICIAN $ 18.40 1.34 Formbuilder/Formsetter $ 9.83 1.69 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 11.29 0.00 Laborers: Common $ 8.99 1.25 Landscape $ 7.35 0.00 Mason Tender Cement $ 9.96 0.00 Pipelayer $ 9.63 1.50 PIPEFITTER $ 17.00 0.04 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Backhoe $ 12.74 0.00 Bulldozer $ 12.46 0.00 Crane $ 11.00 0.74 Excavator $ 16.74 0.00 https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determinationfTX20190032/0/document 2/7 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov Front End Loader $ 10.47 1.28 Grader $ 12.20 1.48 Tractor $ 11.29 1.45 TRUCK DRIVER $ 14.42 1.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their wn illness, injury or other health-related needs, including rreventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20190032/0/document 3/7 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20190032/0/document 4/7 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. urvey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current egotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is ..ased. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20190032/0/document 5/7 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20190032/0/document 6/7 7/16/2019 beta.SAM.gov END OF GENERAL DECISION https://beta.sam.gov/wage-determination/TX20190032/0/document 7/7 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: August 10, 2020 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 BID NO.: 0820-53 BID DATE: September 03, 2020 at 2:00 PM FROM: Morgan R Early Project Manager City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 0100 -Invitation to Propose: Mandatory pre-bid requirement,replace with the following: A mandatory pre-proposal conference will be held at the Project Site at 13050 Shadow Creek Parkway, Pearland, Texas 77584 at 10:00 a.m. on Thursday August 13, 2020. A virtual option is available. To join by phone: 1-408-418-9388 Access Code 126 824 7965 Meeting Password: ETz36wmbPh6. TECHNICAL SPECS: No change. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: No change. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 Morgan R Early Project Manager Department of Engineering and Capital Projects City of Pearland 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.2 Date: August 14, 2020 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 BID NO.: 0820-53lit' D r.--: BID DATE: September 03,2020 at 2:00 PM �� V.'���P • 4,14), ►_ e S.? % a • FROM: Kristina Malek n Project Manager-Kimley-Horn ►+� IrAf. 346.888.3887 Kristina.maleknkimley-hom.com To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties 8/14/2020 This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Pre-proposal sign in sheet(in person and virtual)and agenda provided. 2. Questions from bidders addressed: a. Will there be an intrusion system or cctv on this project? i. There are no intrusion systems or cctv on this project. b. Who will bids be submitted to? i. Proposals shall be submitted on the forms provided in the City of Pearland's E- bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer,City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, September 3, 2020. c. Is it possible to provide a link to the geotech report,or guide me in the direction of whom I can get that information from? i. Geotech provided in this Addendum. d. Proposal response sheet calls out alternate#1 to be the northeast parking lot. However, sheet C2.5 shows the northwest parking lot to be alternate#1, and sheet C2.2 does not call the northeast parking lot to be an alternate. i. Alternate#1 is for the northwest parking lot identified on Sheet C2.5. Revised Bid proposal form provided. 2-22-12 00900-1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM e. When is the last day for questions? i. Questions received less than five(5)days prior to the date for opening of Proposals may not be answered. f. What will the contractor be responsible for on the synthetic turf subgrade prep? i. The contractor will be responsible for compacting the subgrade for the synthetic turf field to 95%density per detail C&E/C7.4 at the correct profile depth. Contractor will be responsible for preparing subgrade to turf contractor's satisfaction. See"Special Conditions"section"Supplemental Conditions—Owner Provided Items"and"Specifications for Information Only"in the Project Manual for more information. g. What will the contractor be responsible for regarding the Musco lighting? i. The contractor will be responsible for coordination of construction of the sports field and parking lot lighting, including provision of power,power source,wiring, switches, conduit, and installation of the control panel provided by Musco. Control panel for the building to be provided by the Contractor. Musco will provide control box, poles, fixture and foundations only. See "Special Conditions"section"Supplemental Conditions—Owner Provided Systems"in the Project Manual for more information. TECHNICAL SPECS: 1. Geotech report appeared corrupted in Project Manual. Geotech Report provided. 2. Add Alternate#5 for Phase 1 Field 2 sports field lighting added to the Proposal Form provided. 3. Push to open door buttons added. Revised specifications provide: a. 08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames(section name change and revised) b. 08710 Door Hardware c. 08713 Automatic Door Operators(added to set) CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Push to open door buttons added. See Sheets: a. A-601 b. E-0 c. E-1 d. E-2 e. E-3 f. E-4 2. Add Alternate#5 for Phase 1 Field 2 sports field lighting added. See Sheets: a. E 1.7A(added to set) b. E1.12 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 Morgan R Early Project Manager Department of Engineering and Capital Projects City of Pearland 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.3 Date: August 24, 2020 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 BID NO.: 0820-53 BID DATE: September 03,2020 at 2:00 PM �� 4; ��P . ,y 14) y�� 4C a FROM: Kristina Malek Y � 7C rn CD Project Manager-Kimley-Horn ' t 346.888.3887 * Kristina.malekakimley-horn.com = s'T,�?911���0111 OF To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties 8/24/2020 This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Questions from bidders addressed: a. Can the construction contract be altered/negotiated with the City by the selected contractor? i. No, the contract will not be negotiated once awarded. Offerors should comply with every requirement of the Contract Documents for performance and furnishing of the Work. 2. Please note- Last day for questions is end of day 8/26/2020. The final addendum will be issued on 8/31/2020 by end of day. TECHNICAL SPECS: 1. Addressed City Comments for Fire Safety — Revised Section 10440 Fire Extinguishers provided. 2. Questions from bidders addressed: a. Section 08900 Substitution Request for Louvers - Construction Specialties Model DC-6174 is approved as an equal. b. Maintenance building drawings call for Pre-Engineered metal building manufacturer on sheet A6.0 note 13.10. Who is the approved manufacturer for this? We cannot find this in the specifications. i. The list of approved PEMB contractors is as follows: Whirlwind Steel Buildings, Rigid Global Buildings, Mueller Inc, Metal Buildings, or approved equal. The manufacturer chosen needs to meet the design intent and specs on 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM the drawings and is designed by a State of Texas Licensed engineer to meet all applicable codes. ii. The approved pre-engineered metal building manufacturer must provide engineered drawings, specifications, and shop drawings for review and approval by the City of Pearland Permit Department and the owner/project architect PRIOR to commencing fabrication. Drawings must be signed and sealed by a State of Texas licensed professional engineer, must meet design intent, and must comply with required wind loads, design pressures, and all applicable codes and regulations. Additionally, the pre-engineered metal building manufacturer must forward column reactions to the Maintenance Building Structural Engineer for completion of the foundation design. iii. Please reference Kimley Horn specification for Maintenance Building door hardware specification. iv. Please reference Kimley Horn drawings `C 1.2 Demolition Plan' and' C4.7 Grading Plan' and `L1.7 Landscape Plan' for required demolition, grading, and landscaping at the Maintenance Building. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Questions from bidders addressed: a. Aluminum soffit panel is noted on A7.0 for the canopies. Are we permitted to utilize our standard L-12 soffit panel with Galvalume substrate instead? i. 24 ga. galvalume steel soffit panel with Kynar finish is an acceptable alternative to the aluminum soffit panel specified. b. Please confirm the insulation requirements for the roof. The plans are describing a R-11 liner system as the top layer of insulation with a R-19 banded system as the bottom layer. Our preference would be to run a R-30 banded system in the roof(3'/2" unfaced over the purlins and 6" vinyl-faced between purlins held in place by banding). Please advise. i. This is an acceptable alternative. The structure must meet 2018 IECC requirements. Please see General Note number 11 on sheet A2.0: Contractor is responsible to provide a 3rd party IECC Certified Energy Code inspector to certify compliance of the facility with 2018 IECC requirements. c. Please confirm the insulation requirements for the walls. The plans are describing the same system as the roof with R-11 liner and R-19 banded both in the walls. If R-30 is required, our preference would be to run a R-30 liner system in the walls as well. Please advise. i. This is an acceptable alternative. The structure must meet 2018 IECC requirements. Please see General Note number 11 on sheet A2.0: : Contractor is responsible to provide a 3rd party IECC Certified Energy Code inspector to certify compliance of the facility with 2018 IECC requirements. d. Please confirm interior metal liner panel locations and heights. Is there full height liner panel located on the stud-framed partition walls? Or should we just follow the Room Finish Schedule listed on sheet A2.0? 2-22-12 00900-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM i. Full height interior metal liner panel is required from slab to deck on the 2-hour rated wall as shown on wall sections and per UL U424. Interior metal liner panels are required to 2'-8" height on exterior vehicle bay walls (covers the inside face of the batt insulation in masonry veneer walls) as shown on the Room Finish Schedule and Section 06/A7.0. e. Do you have a design for the dugout structure/roof? i. Per Detail E/C7.3 - Contractor to submit shop drawings for review and approval. Footings shall be signed by licensed engineer in the state of Texas. f. A call out on Detail B/C7.4 says "Concrete Pool Deck (See Detail 1 Sheet L- 6"). Can you provide clarification on this call out and a correct location of the referenced detail? i. Detail B/C7.4 callout revised. 2. Addressed City Comments. See Sheets provided: a. C3.1 b. C3.2 c. C4.3 d. C4.4 e. C6.1 f. C7.4 g. L1.1 h. L1.3 i. L1.7 j. IR1.3 k. A-101 1. E-1 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 Morgan R Early Project Manager Department of Engineering and Capital Projects City of Pearland 2-22-12 00900-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.4 Date: August 31, 2020 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Park Phase 2 BID NO.: 0820-53 . , BID DATE: September 03,2020 at 2:00 PM 0ti O.P • 49 4) A\ FROM: Kristina Malek y ; Y o Project Manager-Kimley-Horn )14( 'i 346.888.3887 * Kristina.malek(a,kimley-hom.com = srq EpF ��4,Py To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties 8/31/2020 This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Questions from bidders addressed: a. Can you please tell me where I can find the insurance requirements?The project manual says to reference Attachment 1 &3, but I cannot locate the attachments. i. Attachments 1, 2, and 3 provided. b. Is Musco lighting installing the Stadium Pole Lights? i. Yes. Musco will provide control box,poles, fixture and foundations only for the parking lot and sports field lighting. See"Special Conditions"section "Supplemental Conditions—Owner Provided Systems"in the Project Manual for more information. The contractor will be responsible for coordination of construction of the sports field and parking lot lighting, including provision of power,power source,wiring, switches, conduit,and installation of the control panel provided by Musco.Control panel for the building to be provided by the Contractor. c. In addenda#2 are we to add(2) light poles infield 2 or are we adding all poles shown? i. 6 light poles are proposed. See Sheet E 1.7A. d. Where are we to take the main feeder from the concessions building?We are directed to the site drawings but can't find the service outlet location. i. The building feeder is being supplied from the electrical service entrance rack on electrical plan sheet El.5. It is located West of the Northwest corner of the parking lot adjacent to the entrance road. e. On the site drawings for the Musco Light Poles we are directed to build a service rack. For the Musco Lighting panel meter etc. We need a location for this rack.Also need a service outlet location. 2-22-12 00900-1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM i. This is the same location as the electrical service entrance rack shown on electrical plan sheet E 1.5. It is located West of the Northwest corner of the parking lot adjacent to the entrance road. f. Please confirm there is no line item for lump sum of total project. i. Total Lump Sum Bid added to 00300 Part B provided. g. Part B Proposal Form which item would include our overhead and profit for the entire scope of work?Item#1 states that it shall not exceed more than 3%of the Total Bid amount. i. Item#1 is not referencing profit. It is costs for mobilization&demobilization, which should not exceed 3%of the total bid. There is no single line item for OH&profit h. Please confirm striping pricing is to be included in Item#8 Parking and Item#12 Left Turn Lane. No striping included in Item#11 Maintenance Building i. Include striping pricing in associated item—i.e. Item#8 Parking to include all associated striping. i. Has CenterPoint created a design for the underground primary duct bank.Does this scope of work need to be included in the General Contractors lump sum for Item#4 Utilities in the Proposal Form? i. No, CenterPoint has not provided an underground primary duct bank design. Please include in bid Item#4. j. Is there a detail or instructions in regards to the bleacher installation? i. Bleachers to be selected and direct purchase by City.No bleachers have been selected at this time. Detail to be provided upon selection. k. In the Special Conditions of Agreement,under the Owner Provided Items Section,it states that the"Contractor shall provide services to coordinate delivery,accept, securely store materials, and install items complete in place and ready for use." Is the City of Pearland providing the turf and the installation of the turf for the Multipurpose field or does the General Contractor need to include the price of installation in the bid? The turf vendor says the City of Pearland is purchasing and installing the turf. This needs to be clarified so all potential bidders are bidding with the same information. i. Please review the contract documents provided for bid use. Sections 00800 Special Conditions, 00700 General Conditions,and the construction drawings specify which items are Owner provided and Contractor installed vs which are Owner provided and Owner installed. 1. Does the City of Pearland require that the drainage layers and drainage piping for the Multipurpose field be installed by a certified turf installer or can a site work contractor install the drainage layers for the turf contractor? i. Please see answer k above. m. Is the Shock Pad for the Multipurpose Field being provided and installed by the City of Pearland, or does the General Contractor need to include the installation of the Shock Pad in the bid price? i. Please see answer k above. n. .Is the Miracle Field Surface being purchased, supplied and installed by the City of Pearland? i. Please see answer k above. See detail G /C7.4 for clarification. 2. Documents revised and provided: a. General Conditions-Attachments 1,2, and 3. b. 00300 Part B 2-22-12 00900-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM TECHNICAL SPECS: 1. Shade Structure Size Clarification a. Section 00800- Special Conditions updated to include Shade Structure sizes. 2. Approved Substitutions b. Section 08900 Substitution Request for Louvers on the Maintenance Building- Construction Specialties Model DC-5304 is approved as an equal for the Ruskin EME520MD louvers. 3. Questions from bidders addressed: c. Soffits on the Athletic Locker Room call for 3/8"thick plywood. Specs call for no plywood under thickness of Y2"under spec section 06105-2/2.3 Lumber/Panel Products Item D. Can Hardiplank soffit material be used in lieu of plywood? i. 3/8" is typical for soffits and is correct for this application as all soffit vents are sized in thickness for that dimension. HardiSoffit is not an option. 4. Documents revised and provided: a. Section 00800—Special Conditions CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1. Questions from bidders addressed: a. Athletic Locker Room-6x6 Posts on sheet A-401 and AS6 Section 6 call for wood post. Please specify species, if it needs to be treated for ground contact, and finish if any. i. The "General Notes" section on Structural Sheet AS 1 calls for Southern Yellow Pine. Detail 9a/9:AS5 shows a Simpson Strong-Tie CB66 Post Base anchor at the base of the column. This anchor holds the bottom of the post off the top of concrete. However,the bottom of the post should receive a field- applied wood preservative prior to installation. The wood for all posts should be graded to be able to receive either paint or stain. b. Athletic Locker Room-Architectural plans call for ZIP System structural sheathing. Structural plans call for 5/8"APA rated wall sheathing which could be OSB or plywood. Please advise on sheathing specification. i. 5/8"ZIP is correct. c. Detail B/C7.4 does not provide dimensions for the shade structure footing? Can you provide dimensions and reinforcing steel requirements for these footings? i. We provided a typical detail for contractor bidding use. See detail B/Sheet 7.4. The City chosen shade structure manufacturer will provide engineered shop drawings with the exact dimensions/reinforcement,which will not be significantly different than the provided detail and should not substantially alter the cost. Shade Structure Size Clarification added to Sheet C2.4 and C4.4 2-22-12 00900-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM d. Detail E/C7.3 (Side Elevation B-B)references a concrete curb on Detail H/C7.4. Detail H/C7.4 is for a concrete sidewalk with fence post footing. Do you have a detail for the 12"flush curb referenced in Detail E/C7.3? i. Curb detail for the Detail E/C7.3 revised to reference Detail D/C7.4. e. Detail F/C7.3 shows the chain link fence to be 4'tall adjacent to the foul poles. Detail B/C7.2 shows the outfield fence to be 10' tall and Detail BC7.1 show the left field side fence with double gate to be 10' tall. Can you confirm the fence in Detail F/C7.3 is to be 4'tall or should it be 10'tall like the adjacent fencing? i. Detail F/C7.3 revised to 10' tall. f. Sheet C6.2 calls out the perimeter drain as 10" PVC,details on sheet C7.5 call it out as perforated HDPE. Please clarify? i. Pipe callouts updated to HDPE. See Sheet C6.2. g. Please provide details for storm structures. i. Storm structure details added. See Sheet C7.6,C7.17,C7.18,C7.19,&C7.20. h. Reference C7.4/B, shade structure footing—this item is not designed-for bidding purpose, should an allowance be established so that every GCs carry the same numbers. i. See response to question c above. i. Reference C2.2, please confirm the parking lot is concrete-please provide pavement section details. i. Detail C/C7.6 added. Sheet C7.15, C7.16,C2.2,&C2.3 j. An alternate is specified on sheet L2.0"H"to provide Decomposed Granite in lieu of Mulch. However,there is no line item for this on the bid form. Can you please let me know if we need to include for this alternate or disregard it. i. Please disregard—alternate for decomposed granite in lieu of mulch is not applicable. See Sheet L2.0 k. Alternate 1 is for the NW Parking Lot. Sheet C2.5 note states"contractor to landscape if not selected". Please clarify what Item#10 Landscape is supposed to include for this area as far as landscape?All trees shown and sod in lieu of pavement? i. If Alternate#1 is not selected, include sod in lieu of pavement for NW Parking lot in item#10. If Alternate#1 is selected, deduct sod cost from Item#10 and add trees/shrubs associated with NW Parking lot. See Sheet C2.5,L1.1 &L1.5 for clarification. 1. Do you have installation details and locations of installation for the breakaway netting, Detail B:4'Netting, and Detail C: 15' Netting,as shown on Sheet C7.7? Do you have footing details for the Ground Sleeves Required for the netting installation? i. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. m. Can you provide the concrete footing dimensions for the Foul Pole Installation? i. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. n. Silt fence(filter barrier) is mentioned in the erosion control legend. However,it is not indicated in any locations on the erosion control plans(pages C1.4,C1.5, C1.6). Should it be assumed that silt fencing will not be required on this project?Please 2-22-12 00900-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM advise.Note*Based on the grading and surrounding drainage, I believe silt fence will be necessary in some locations. i. Silt fence added. See Sheet C1.4, C1.5,&C1.6. o. Storm sewer conflict with pavement. i. See attached Sheet C6.1 2. Sheets revised and provided: a. CO.1 b. C1.4 c. C1.5 d. C1.6 e. C2.2 f. C2.3 g. C2.4 h. C2.5 i. C4.4 j. C6.1 k. C6.2 1. C7.3 m. C7.4 n. C7.6 o. C7.15 p. C7.16 q. C7.17 r. C7.18 s. C7.19 t. C7.20 u. L1.1 v. L1.5 w. L2.0 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 Morgan R Early Project Manager Department of Engineering and Capital Projects City of Pearland 2-22-12 00900-5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 04/2008 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A Work of the Contract is for the construction of: a multipurpose field, Miracle League field, Restroom/Concession building, parking, lighting, utilities, grading, landscape and irrigation. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A Synthetic Turf and Shock Pad(by others) B Sports field and parking lot lighitng (by others; power to be provided by contractor) 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Shade structures (to be installed by contractor) B Site Furnishings including by not limited to: batting racks, trash receptacles, bleachers, team benches (to be installed by contractor as an Alternate to the Base Bid) C Scoreboard equipment (power to be provided by contractor) 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Work by Owner and Owner Furnished Products to be installed by contractor to be coordinated with Owner. B Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer & Owner for approval as specified in Section 01350 — Submittals. C Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A Future work to be coordinate with Owner upon Project Kickoff. 08/2016 01100- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights-of- way as specified in Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION -NotUsed END OF SECTION 08/2016 01100 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting&Patching 3 Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs,Curb& Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, & Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922—Sodding 10 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement;trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 01/2018 01140- 1 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners,monuments or other demarcations disturbed,damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets;when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting&Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01 140-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours,72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes orbusinesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers,signs,and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs,gutters,and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill,& Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922—Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision,labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals;and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is,but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/2007 01200-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to 'Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order, Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products, rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site,the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal,which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal ,the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06 "Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment,payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310—Coordination &Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options & Substitutions 3. Section 01100—Summary of Work 4. Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix(i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10"Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2"x 11",plain bond,white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5)percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format,or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted,if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700- General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale,and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 01/2008 01350-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard, submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04"Selection Options"and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification;one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification,submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—Construction Photographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size, mounted on 81/2 x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02, T03, etc. 01/2008 01350-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations,and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2008 01350-7of6 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three(3)prints of each view and submit two(2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven(7)days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal,include photographic negatives in protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 01/2008 01380- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph, house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House-walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer(if a professional photographer is used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three -ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work,take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 PROGESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 01/2008 01380-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 FS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 Katy, TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers'Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin, TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East l lth Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin,TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required by individual Technical Specifications. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment, operator training,test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation,as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Submit report within one(1)day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01430-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections,tests,and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager,Engineer,and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 09/2009 01440- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested;to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION 04/2008 01450-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities,telephone, sanitary facilities, field office,storage sheds and building, safety requirements,first aid equipment, fire protection, security measures, protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking,environmental controls,disposal of trash,debris,and excavated material,pest and rodent control,water runoff and erosion control B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200— Instructions to Bidders Section 01100— Summary of Work Section 01350— Submittals Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation Section 01100— Summary of Work Section 01600— Material& Equipment Section 01570— Trench Safety System Section 01555— Traffic Control& Regulation Section 01720— Field Surveying Section 01563— Tree & Plant Protection Section 01564— Control of Ground Water& Surface Water Section 13730- Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) Code of Ordinances,City of Pearland,Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer,water,gas,and other piping,and manholes,chambers, electrical and signal conduits,tunnels,and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures - existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include,but are not limited to buildings, 12-2-2011 01500- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage,piping,poles,wires,posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing,and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel,power,light,heat,and other utility services necessary for execution,completion, testing,and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. For water to be drawn from public water supply, obtain special permit or license and meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a 12-2-2011 01500-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department. A deposit based on rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants,apply for and receive a construction water meter from City' Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed,water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department. Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel C Electricity and Lighting 1 Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work,including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting,operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on-going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service,in the Contractor's name,to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the Project Site,in compliancewih federal,state,and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the work and 12-2-2011 01500-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off-site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement,or Section 01100—Summary of Work. Provide for transportation, move-in, set-up, tie-down and, when project is complete, removal and move-out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre-Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative byway of the submittal process. B. At a minimum,the Contractor's field office shall provide for,contain or serve to:provide a secured space for project administrative operations,periodic progress meetings,on-site storage for project files and plans,office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including:meeting table and chairs,a single two drawer filing cabinet,a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for,at a minimum,a high speed internet connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600 — Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare,submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570— Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal,state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act(Art. 5182a,V.C.S.)and with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act,published in OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence ofcr direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract, and after such investigation or inspection,advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten(10) days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment,in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians,hospitals,and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State,or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241,Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10,Portable Fire Extinguishers,for each temporary building,andfor every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. 12-2-2011 01500-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials,equipment,and property associated with the Work from loss,theft, damage, and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction,and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions,provide programs,and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage,injury or loss, including,but not limited to,the following: a. Store apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly,safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather,theft,breakage,or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse,rubbish, scrap materials,and debris caused by construction operations,keeping the Work safe and orderly. 12-2-2011 01500-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings,for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps,around excavations,elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools, materials or equipment, privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission,neglect,or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor,it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway,right-of-way,or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences,lights,warning signs,and danger signals; provide watchmen; and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work. Conform to Section 01555 — Traffic Control& Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks,public or private elevation or property demarcationand control monumentation,or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing, replace at no cost to the Owner,those monuments,property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720—Field Surveying. D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans,and in accordance with requirements of Section 01563—Tree& Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures,including water,sewer,electric,and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available, but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged, broken,or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations,either temporary or permanent. 12-2-2011 01500-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents,the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700— General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports,Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties,or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures,pipelines,or utilities,give a minimum of five(5)working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused,to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed,prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials,and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials,and surfaces. 12-2-2011 01500-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D Construct and maintain temporary detours,ramps,and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods,equipment,and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes,regulations,and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources,including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969,PL 91-190,Executive Order 11514. C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance,silt fencing,etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish,debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods,means,and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil,water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage,and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site,and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 12-2-2011 01500-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal,state,and local laws and regulations. 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles,equipment,and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards- 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE,Codes of Ordinances,City of Pearland,Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water,runoff,subsurface water,and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water& Surface Water and Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 12-2-2011 01500- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION Section 01505 MOBILIZATION 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(Texas MUTCD) 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent(3%)of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values(Section 01350—Submittals) 2. Trench Safety Program(Section 01570—Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule (Section 01350—Submittals) 4. Pre-construction Photographs (Section 01380—Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s)(Section 01580—Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office(Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 - TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access(Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) D. Payment for 15%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. F. For contracts with a duration of less than 120 days,payment for the remaining 50%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the items listed in B. and C. above, as applicable. 08/2018 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s)per Section 01580. The name, address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580,part 1.03,D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 08/2018 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS Section 01550 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of erosion and sediment control for Stabilized Construction Exits used during construction and until final development of the Project site. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01565 —TPDES Requirements 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required in this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on Geotextile fabric. C Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements in this Section,2.02"Course Aggregates". 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A Provide woven or non-woven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi any principal direction, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack,mildew,and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. 12/2015 01550- 1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS D Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., Or-Equal. 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES A Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone,gravel,concrete,crushed blast furnace slag,or a combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean,hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings, salt,alkali,dirt,clay,loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter. B Course aggregates shall be open graded with a size 3"to 6". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction,staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicle and equipment. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil,other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the Project Site until acceptance of the Work or until directed by the Engineer to remove and discard the existing system. Maintenance shall be performed routinely to remove soil build up or, as required by the Engineer. D Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain them until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction exits promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. E Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems, including vegetative systems shall be repaired immediately. F Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation and Section 01565 TPDES Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on-site vehicle transportation routes where shown on Plans. 12/2015 01550-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS B Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by Engineer, of the sizes and locations where shown on Plans or as specified in this Section. C Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D Details for Stabilized Construction Exits are shown on the Plans. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags,gravel,boards,or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped,washed,or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Plans,but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress. H Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate,thickness,and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit,except where shown otherwise on the Plans. I Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Engineer. J Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Plans, or when approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01550-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS Section 01554 STREET SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Materials,hardware and installation of Traffic Signs. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Signs installed or replaced will be measured by the each sign. Signs refurbished will be measured by each sign. B Payment for installation of traffic signs will be on the basis of each sign installed. C The price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new signs and hardware.Cost of associated posts, footings, and miscellaneous mounting hardware will not be paid for directly but is to be included in the unit price bid for installation of each traffic sign. D Non-standard signs installed or replaced will be measured by the square foot of the sign face. Non-standard signs shall not be installed without prior approval from the City 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Contractor shall submit a list of intended suppliers and products to be used for all signs, posts, and associated hardware. City reserves the right to request actual product samples prior to approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. 12/2015 01554- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS B The following ASTM Standards and documents, of the issue in effect on the date of Invitation for Bid, form a part of this specification to the extent herein. 1. ASTM B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM D 523 Standard Method for Test for Specular Gloss 3. ASTM D 4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control. 4. ASTM E 284 Standard Definition of Terms Relating to Appearance of Materials. 5. ASTM E 308 Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System 6. ASTM E 810 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Retroreflection of Retroreflective Sheeting. 7. ASTM E 1164 Standard Practice for Obtaining Spectrophotometric Data for Object-Color Evaluation. C Substrate (Sign Blanks)—This shall be aluminum alloy 5052-R38. The thickness of sign shall be 0.125 inch with 3/4"radius corner. 1. Metal working—The aluminum shall be free of burrs and pits on both sides, including edges and holes, and shall be made ready for applications of sheeting. 2. Surface preparation—The aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased with solvent and alkaline emulsions cleaner by immersion, spray, or vapor degreasing and dried prior to application of the gold chromate sheeting coat. The aluminum shall be new and corrosion-free with holes drilled or punched, corners round to radii 3/4" and all edges smoothed prior to application of sheeting. The heavy or medium chromate coating shall conform in color and corrosion resistance to that imparted by the Alodine 1200F treatment. 3. Size—The dimension of substrate application for regulatory, warning, and guide signs shall be as specified by the Engineer and as shown on the plans. D Sign Face (Background, Legends, Symbols, and Colors) — These shall be in accordance with the Standard Highway Signs Designs(SHSD)for Texas and with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices(TMUTCD) 1. Street Name shall be constructed from Avery Dennison OL—2007 Green Electronic Cutable Film, using Highway B Series Font, 6"Upper/Lower case, 3" Suffix for St., Dr., Ave. designations. Signs shall have a %2" White Border. a. Tolerance for Horizontal Alignment- Letters, numerals and symbols shall be horizontally aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. b. Tolerance for Vertical Alignment — Letters, numerals, and symbols shall be vertically aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch on each letter in each line. 2. All sign blanks shall be covered with Avery Dennison T—7500 White Vinyl reflective sheeting. 3. Signs requiring"No Outlet"or"Dead End" designations shall be constructed from Avery Dennison Black PC—500— 190—O Vinyl, 2 1/4" 12/2015 01554-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS upper case lettering. Arrow shall be 1 1/4"x 4 1/4" Long, overlaid with Avery Dennison OL—2001 Yellow electronic Cutable Film 5 Y2"x 8". E Street Name Sign shall have a 3/4"x 3/4"City of Pearland dating sticker indicating the month and year of manufacture of each sign. Dating sticker shall be applied to the White Reflective Vinyl,covered by the Green EC film in the manufacturing process. F Avery Dennison is the approved manufacturer of vinyls for the City of Pearland.Any substitutions will require submission of sample materials and specifications sheets to the City Of Pearland Traffic Operations manager prior to use.Any and all components are to be match components. Uses of non-matching components are prohibited. G Sign Posts- Steel post shall conform to the standard specification for hot rolled carbon sheet steel, structural quality, ASTM designation A570, Grade 50. Average minimum yield strength after cold forming is 60,000 psi. 1. The location, height, size and the foundation of the sign post shall conform to the City's standard detail. 2. The signs shall be installed using RPB412F— 12" Round Post Cap and RPB412F— 12" Cross Piece Brackets. Posts caps shall be attached to sign post using 5/16"Carriage Bolts and 5/16" Tuff Nuts. Signs are to be attached to brackets using same. H Warranty - The Contractor shall warrant the materials and workmanship of each sign in accordance with the maximum limits of material warranties extended by manufacturers of raw materials, subject to the conditions they specify. The retro- reflective sheeting will be considered unsatisfactory if it has deteriorated due to natural causes to the extent that: (1)the sign is ineffective for its intended purpose when viewed from a moving vehicle under normal day and night driving conditions; or (2) the coefficient of retro-reflection is less than the minimum specified for that sheeting. When sign failure occurs prior to the minimum years indicated and an inspection demonstrates that the failure is caused by materials warranted to contractor to endure at least that long, the sign will be replaced or repaired free of materials charges. When failure occurs and inspection demonstrates that such failure is due to poor workmanship, the sign will be replaced or repaired at Contractor's expense, including shipping charges. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT The contractor shall provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A Construction shall be high quality with no visible defects in the finished product. Fabrication shall be in accordance with these specifications. Street name signs 12/2015 01554-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS shall always be supplied and installed at each project intersection whether signs previously existed at the location or not. B The removal of existing signs shall be coordinated with the Traffic Operations Section of the Public Works Department (281-652-1900) and arrangements made for a convenient time to deliver City signs and poles. All salvaged traffic signs shall be delivered to the Traffic Operations Center located at 2559 Hillhouse Road, Pearland. All deliveries to the Traffic Operations Center requires a minimum notice of two (2) working days prior to returning or delivering any sign and/or sign related material. 3.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A The contractor is responsible for providing and supplying aluminum traffic signs covered with retro-reflective sheeting, applying standard legends (or special legends if shown in the plans) to the covered sign blanks, galvanized steel sign poles,pole anchors, all hardware for installing the signs and poles, and for installing traffic signs, poles and anchors as shown in the plans or call for in the contract documents, complete and ready for field installations. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01554-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans,signs,signals,control devices,flares,lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation,including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name,badge number,time start,time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.04 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified, use only Flaggers who are off-duty, regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single-lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross-walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. Flaggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS,SIGNALS,AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m.to 9:00 a.m.and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. 3.02 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 3.03 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.04 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.05 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary,bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats,angles,bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimum noise. D Adequately shore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment,materials,supervision,and all incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. 03/2008 01560- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section, 3.02F. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE with support netting,then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall,daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01560-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER Section 01561 REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of reinforced filter fabric barrier to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants in channelized flow areas. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for reinforced filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis between the limits of the beginning and ending fence posts, measured, accepted, and complete in place. B Payment for filter fabric barrier will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, supervision, and incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction.. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric. 05/2008 01561 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM - D4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction, a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 2.02 FILTER FABRIC REINFORCEMENT A Provide woven galvanized steel wire fence with minimum thickness of 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. B Welded wire shall be galvanized, 2-inch by 4-inch, welded wire fabric, 121/2 gauge. 2.03 EXECUTION 2.04 PREPARATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric barrier. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 1562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 05/2008 01561 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.05 INSTALLATION A Install reinforced filter fabric barriers for erosion and sediment control used during construction and until the final development of the Project Site. Reinforced filter fabric barriers are used to retain sedimentation in channelized flow areas. B Provide reinforced filter fabric barrier in accordance with the Plan detail for Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier. Reinforced filter fabric barrier systems shall be installed in such a manner that runoff will percolate through the system and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. C Trench in the toe of the reinforced filter fabric barrier with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Reinforced filter fabric barrier shall have a height of 18 inches. E Securely fasten the filter fabric to the wire with tie wires. F Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. G Inspect the reinforced filter fabric barrier systems after each rainfall, daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the barrier or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 05/2008 01561 -3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation 3. Section 01600—Materials &Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners,along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 07/2006 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on-site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials &Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans,dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. B Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL,WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble,broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01562-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Section 01563 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage,branch,trunk,or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage: 1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations,material storage, or from nailing or bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline,paint, and other noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to: a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete,plaster, or other base materials near roots. 8. Cutting feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees,other than those designated for removal,are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations,remove and replace with same size,species,and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: 0.7854 x D2 x $10.00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade. B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester. 02/2013 01563- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue, free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap: Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer: Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D. Temporary Barrier Fence: Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed,all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed,perform the following: 1. Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed. Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible, on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3. Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below. C For trees or shrubs to remain,perform the following: 1. Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary. a. Trees and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b. Cut limbs at branch collar. No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3. Prevent damage or compaction of root zone (area inside dripline)by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b. Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material inside dripline of trees. c. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4. Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b. This watering shall consist of saturating soils at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5. Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6. At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission,trees and shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS A Protection of trees or shrubs in open area: 1. Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle, approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet minimum above ground. 3. For trees or shrubs in paved areas, use moveable posts constructed from concrete-filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4. Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber-wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1. Wrap trunk with layer of burlap. 2. Install 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's (5-foot to 6-foot lengths)vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3. Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1. Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner, have become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced,the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year. 3. Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4. Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02/2013 01563 -4 of 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER Section 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering,depressurizing,draining,and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems - installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering-lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations;reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization-reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control - diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage - keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564- 1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non-pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564 -2 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section, 3.02 "Requirements for Eductor, Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning(abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and Section 01570- Trench Safety Systems of these Technical Specifications, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches,berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564- 3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells,or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES),for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565— TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review 02/2008 01564-4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells,and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers,piezometric pressures,and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water-bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564-5 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling,dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced,such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system,including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR,WELL POINTS,OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations,but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. 02/2008 01564-6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: 1. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321,placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 02/2008 01564-7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches,curb walls,pipes,sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION 02/2008 01564-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL A As used herein and in conjunction with TPDES General Permit No. TXRI 50000_ the term OPERATOR refers to the CONTRACTOR. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A Description of the required documentation to be prepared,signed and submitted by the Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)General Permit as issued March 5, 2003, re-issued March 5, 2013, and re-issued March 5, 2018, by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Section 26.040 of the Texas Water Code. B Contractor's responsibility for implementation,maintenance,and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including,but not limited to,erosion and sediment controls,storm water management plans,waste collection and disposal,off- site vehicle tracking,and other practices shown on the Plans or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications.This Specification provides guidelines and Best Management Practices(BMP's) information for the Contractor to use in adhering to all local, state and federal environmental regulations with respect to storm water pollution prevention during construction activity. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01310—Coordination& Meetings 3. Section 01770—Contract Closeout D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) E Other References: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP)found in Appendix A of these Technical Specifications. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 08/2018 01565 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIRED NOTICES A The Contractor shall complete,sign,and date the Contractor's Notice of Intent(NOI) attached in Appendix A. The signed copy of the Contractor's NOI shall be returned to the TCEQ. It is contractor's responsibility to pay for any fees associated with the permit. Submission of the NOI is required by both the Owner and the Contractor before construction operations start. B Upon completion of construction and acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Termination (NOT) attached in Appendix A. 3.02 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A On the Operator's Information form attached in Appendix A, the Contractor shall complete name, address, and telephone number for the Contractor; the names of persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures and all Subcontractors. B The Contractor and Subcontractors named in the Contractor's Information form shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's/Subcontractor's Certification form, attached in Appendix A. C The persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's Inspection and Maintenance Certification form, attached in Appendix A. D The Contractor's Information form and all certification forms shall be submitted to the Owner before beginning construction. E Contractor shall review implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction in accordance with Section 01310 — Coordination& Meetings. 3.03 RETENTION OF RECORDS A The Contractor shall keep a copy of the SWPPP at the Project Site or at the Contractor's office from the date that it became effective to the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. B At Contract Closeout,the Contractor shall submit to the Owner all TPDES forms and certifications, as well as a copy of the SWPPP, in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. The SWPPP records and data will be retained by Owner for a period of 3 years from the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. 08/2018 01565 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.04 POSTING OF NOTICES A The following notices shall be posted from the date that this SWPPP goes into effect until the date the Work is accepted by the Owner: 1. Copies of the Notices of Intent submitted by the Owner and Contractor and a brief Description of Construction Activity being conducted at the Project Site, as given in Article 1 of the SWPPP, shall be posted at the Project Site or at Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing. 2. Notice to drivers of equipment and vehicles, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post such notices at every stabilized construction exit area. 3. In an easily visible location on Project Site,post a notice of waste disposal procedures. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures shall be posted with the NOI on Project Site. Keep copies of Material Safety Data Sheets at a location on Project Site that is known to all personnel. 5. Keep a copy of each signed certification at the Project Site or at Contractor's office. APPENDIX A FOLLOWS THIS SECTION END OF SECTION 08/2018 01565-3 of 4 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS (APPENDIX A) Table of Contents TCEQ General Permit NOI TCEQ Form 20022 TCEQ Form—20134 NOC TCEQ Form—20023 Site Notice Forms 08/2018 01565 -4 of 4 rilOal, General Permit to Discharge Under TCEQ the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities TXR150000 Effective March 5, 2018 printed on ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ DE MMI ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ III ❑ ❑ M ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑III ❑ recycled paper Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O.Box 13087,Austin,Texas 78711-3087 WI, GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE UNDER THE TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000,issued March 5,2013 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit,as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ or Commission),the laws of the State of Texas,and other orders of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge route. This includes property belonging to but not limited to any individual,partnership,corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal,state,or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight,five years from the permit effective date. EFFECTIVE DATE: March 5,2018 ISSUED DATE: 2-z ,t$ 5:::=30‘. /I GDP '"-4(„v--" For e.Co _mission TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXR15000o RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 13 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 13 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 13 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 13 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 4. Other Permitted Discharges 14 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 14 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 14 1. Post Construction Discharges 14 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 14 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards 14 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) Requirements 14 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone 15 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 16 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities 16 8. Indian Country Lands 16 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation 16 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 16 ii. Endangered Species Act 16 12. Other 17 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Large Construction Activities 17 2. Small Construction Activities 17 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion- 17 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: 18 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities. 20 5. Effective Date of Coverage 20 6. Notice of Change(NOC) 21 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices 22 8. Contents of the NOI 22 Section F. Terminating Coverage 23 1.. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required 23 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 23 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 24 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control 24 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 25 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 25 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 26 3. Effective Date of a LREW 26 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period 26 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 27 1. Individual Permit Alternative 27 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges 27 3. Individual Permit Required 27 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization 27 Section I. Permit Expiration 27 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) 28 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 29 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 29 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 29 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control 30 Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation,and Compliance 30 Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 30 Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 31. Section F. Contents of SWP3 31 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 40 Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 42 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 42 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements 44 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 46 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 46 Part VI. Retention of Records 47 Part VII.Standard Permit Conditions 47 Part VIII. Fees 48 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 5o Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 52 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 53 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas 54 Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15oo00 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required When calculating the acreage of land area disturbed,include the disturbed land-area of all construction and construction support activities. How much land will be disturbed? (*I) C1i acre ` 1 or more acres tl NO Do you meet the yEs Will 5 or more a definition of r acres be disturbed? "operator?"(*2) (*1) ✓0 YES V Permit Coverage Required • Prepare and implement S VI,1'i • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of Site Notice to MS4 Operator J tAre you a"primary N O operator?"(*2) r 1 Permit Coverage Not YES Reauiredl Unless Part iPermit Coverage Required" of a Larger Common • Prepare and Implement SWP3 Plan of Development • Submit NOI to TCEQ or Sale • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of NOI to MS4 Operator J (*1) To determine the size of the construction project,use the size of the entire area to be disturbed,and include the size of the larger common plan of development or sale,if the project is part of a larger project(refer to Part I.B., "Definitions,"for an explanation of"common plan of development or sale"). (*2) Refer to the definitions for"operator,"primary operator,"and"secondary operator"in Part I., Section B.of this permit. Page 5 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section B. Definitions Arid Areas-Areas with an average annual rainfall of o to io inches. Best Management Practices(BMPs)-Schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures,structural controls,local ordinances,and other management practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements,operating procedures,and practices to control construction site runoff,spills or leaks,waste disposal,or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction-The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavation activities,as well as other construction-related activities (e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition). Common Plan of Development-A construction activity that is completed in separate stages,separate phases,or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development(also known as a"common plan of development or sale")is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project,and may include plats,blueprints,marketing plans,contracts,building permits,a public notice or hearing,zoning requests,or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity(e.g.,a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate"common plans,"with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a"common plan"(e.g.,a building and its associated parking lot and driveways,airport runway and associated taxiways,a building complex,etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located 1/4 mile or more apart,and the area between the projects is not being disturbed,each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale,provided that any interconnecting road,pipeline or utility project that is part of the same"common plan"is not included in the area to be disturbed. Construction Activity-Includes soil disturbance activities,including clearing,grading, excavating,construction-related activity(e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition),and construction support activity. This does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site (e.g.,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Construction Support Activity—A construction-related activity that specifically supports construction activity,which can involve earth disturbance or pollutant-generating activities of its own,and can include,but are not limited to,activities associated with concrete or asphalt batch plants,rock crushers,equipment staging or storage areas,chemical storage areas,material storage areas,material borrow areas,and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activity must only directly support the construction activity authorized under this general permit. Dewatering—The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults,and trenches. Discharge—For the purposes of this permit,the drainage,release,or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities(e.g., clearing,grading,excavation,stockpiling of fill material,and demolition),construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance(e.g.,fill piles,borrow area,concrete truck wash out,fueling),or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g.,concrete or asphalt batch plants)are located. Drought-Stricken Area—For the purposes of this permit,an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S.Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150oo0 likely: (1)"Drought to persist or intensify",(2)"Drought ongoing,some improvement",(3) "Drought likely to improve,impacts ease",or(4)"Drought development likely". See http://www.cpc.ncep.noaa.gov/products/expert assessment/seasonal drought.html. Edwards Aquifer-As defined under Texas Administrative Code(TAC)§213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer),that portion of an arcuate belt of porous,water-bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney,Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,Comal,Hays,Travis,and Williamson Counties;and composed of the Salmon Peak Limestone,McKnight Formation,West Nueces Formation,Devil's River Limestone,Person Formation,Kainer Formation,Edwards Formation,and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less-permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south,overlie the less-permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River,and underlie the less-permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone-Generally,that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out,including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer,where caves,sinkholes,faults,fractures,or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer,located at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html,can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone-The area or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer. The contributing zone is located upstream(upgradient)and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties: all areas within Kinney County,except the area within the watershed draining to Segment No. 2304 of the Rio Grande Basin; all areas within Uvalde,Medina,Bexar,and Comal Counties;all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam,Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No.1403 of the Colorado River Basin; and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir,Segment No.1216 of the Brazos River Basin. The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html. Effluent Limitations Guideline(ELG)—Defined in 4o Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)§122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under§3o4(b)of the Clean Water Act(CWA)to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity—For the purpose of this permit,referring to a construction site,the location of construction activity,or a construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit,including all contiguous land and fixtures(for example,ponds and materials stockpiles),structures,or appurtenances used at a construction site or industrial site. Final Stabilization-A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: (a) All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform(that is, evenly distributed,without large bare areas)perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 7o%of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures,or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(such as the use of riprap,gabions,or geotextiles) have been employed. Page 7 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b) For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition(a)above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for,and benefits of,final stabilization.If temporary stabilization is not feasible,then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs,and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Fulfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan(SWP3). (c) For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes(such as pipelines across crop or range land),final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities,such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition(a)above. (d) In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas only,all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (1) Temporary erosion control measures(for example,degradable rolled erosion control product)are selected,designed,and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator,and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected,designed,and installed to achieve 7o%of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchlorination of Waterlines—Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes,typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank,and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water-A surface water body that is identified as impaired on the latest approved CWA§3o3(d)List or waters with an EPA-approved or established total maximum daily load(TMDL)that are found on the latest EPA approved Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 3o3(d),which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. Indian Country Land—All land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government,notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and,including rights-of-way running through the reservation; (2)all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof,and whether within or without the limits of a state; and(3)all Indian allotments,the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, including rights-of-way running through the same. (40 CFR§122.2) Indian Tribe-Any Indian Tribe,band,group,or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation(4o CFR§122.2). Infeasible—Not technologically possible,or not economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. (4o CFR§450.11(b)). Large Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five(5)acres of total Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project—Includes the construction of roads,bridges,conduits,substructures, pipelines,sewer lines,towers,poles,cables,wires,connectors,switching,regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long,narrow area. Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW)-A written submission to the executive director from an operator of a construction site that is considered as small construction activity under the permit,which qualifies for a waiver from the requirements for small construction activities,only during the period of time when the calculated rainfall erosivity factor is less than five(5). Minimize-To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)-A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States,a state,city,town,county,district,association,or other public body(created by or pursuant to state law)having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage,industrial wastes,stormwater,or other wastes,including special districts under state law such as a sewer district,flood control or drainage district,or similar entity,or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization,that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change(NOC)—Written notification to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this permit,providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent(NOI)-A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination(NOT)-A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator-The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator—the person or persons associated with construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on-site operational control over construction plans and specifications,including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications;or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3)for the site or other permit conditions(for example,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator—The person or entity,often the property owner,whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators,such as a general contractor,to perform or supervise construction activities;or Page 9 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b) the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on-site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site,where they have control over the construction plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site,then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall-For the purpose of this permit,a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers,or pipes, tunnels,or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S.and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee-An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization may be gained through submission of a notice of intent,by waiver,or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction activity. Point Source—Any discernible,confined,and discrete conveyance,including but not limited to,any pipe,ditch,channel,tunnel,conduit,well,discrete fissure,container,rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation,landfill leachate collection system,vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are,or may be,discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff(4o CFR §122.2). Pollutant-Dredged spoil,solid waste,incinerator residue,sewage,garbage,sewage sludge, filter backwash,munitions,chemical wastes,biological materials,radioactive materials,heat, wrecked or discarded equipment,rock,sand,cellar dirt,and industrial,municipal,and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term"pollutant"does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland,pastureland,and farmland. For the purpose of this permit,the term "pollutant"includes sediment. Pollution-The alteration of the physical,thermal,chemical,or biological quality of,or the contamination of,any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful,detrimental, or injurious to humans,animal life,vegetation,or property or to public health,safety,or welfare,or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose(Texas Water Code(TWC)§26.001(14)). Rainfall Erosivity Factor(R factor)-the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects,and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE). Receiving Water-A"Water of the United States"as defined in 4o CFR§122.2 or a surface water in the state into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas-areas with an average annual rainfall of 10 to 20 inches. Separate Storm Sewer System-A conveyance or system of conveyances(including roads with drainage systems,streets,catch basins,curbs,gutters,ditches,man-made channels,or storm drains),designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater;that is not a combined sewer,and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works(POTW). Small Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one(1)acre and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one(1)acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one(1)and Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Steep Slopes—Where a state,Tribe,local government,or industry technical manual(e.g. stormwater BMP manual)has defined what is to be considered a"steep slope",this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition. Where no such definition exists,steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater(or Stormwater Runoff)-Rainfall runoff,snow melt runoff,and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity-Stormwater runoff,as defined above,from a construction activity. Structural Control(or Practice)-A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device,or the use of a device,to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to: silt fences, earthen dikes,drainage swales,sediment traps,check dams,subsurface drains,storm drain inlet protection,rock outlet protection,reinforced soil retaining systems,gabions,and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State- Lakes,bays,ponds,impounding reservoirs,springs,rivers, streams,creeks,estuaries,wetlands,marshes,inlets,canals,the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state(from the mean high water mark(MHWM)out io.36 miles into the Gulf),and all other bodies of surface water,natural or artificial,inland or coastal,fresh or salt,navigable or non-navigable,and including the beds and banks of all water-courses and bodies of surface water,that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or subject to the jurisdiction of the state;except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federal law,regulation,or permit,and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization-A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding,geotextiles,mulches,and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Thawing Conditions—for the purposes of this permit,thawing conditions are expected based on the historical likelihood of two or more days with daytime temperatures greater than 327. This date can be determined by looking at historical weather data. Note: The estimation of thawing conditions is for planning purposes only. During construction,the permittee will be required to conduct site inspections based upon actual conditions(i.e.,if thawing conditions occur sooner than expected,the permittee will be required to conduct inspections at the regular frequency). Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)-The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity—A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States-Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S.means: (a) all waters which are currently used,were used in the past,or may be susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce,including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters,including interstate wetlands; Page ii Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes,rivers,streams(including intermittent streams),mudflats,sandflats,wetlands,sloughs,prairie potholes,wet meadows, playa lakes,or natural ponds that the use,degradation,or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (1) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce;or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs(a)through(d)of this definition; (f) the territorial sea;and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters(other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs(a)through(f)of this definition. Waste treatment systems,including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S.(such as disposal area in wetlands)nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S.do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency,for the purposes of the CWA,the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. Page 12 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction support activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit maybe authorized,provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the construction support activities are located within one(i)mile from the boundary of the construction site where the construction activity authorized under the permit is being conducted that requires the support of these activities; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions in Part III.F of this general permit,and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff according to the provisions in Part III.G of this general permit; (c) the activities are directly related to the construction site; (d) the activities are not a commercial operation,nor serve other unrelated construction projects; and (e) the activities do not continue to operate beyond the completion of the construction activity at the project it supports. Construction support activities that operate outside the terms provided in(a)through(e) above must obtain authorization under a separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)permit,which may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit(MSGP),TXRo50000(related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity),an alternative general permit(if available),or an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire-fighting activities(fire-fighting activities do not include washing of trucks,run-off water from training activities,test water from fire suppression systems,or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings(excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water,surface water,or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants(uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles,the external portion of buildings or structures,and pavement,where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred(unless spilled materials have been removed; and if local state,or federal regulations are applicable,the materials are removed according to those regulations),and where the purpose is to remove mud,dirt,or dust; Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources,including waterline flushings,but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; (f) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water,including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES),TPDES,or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit,provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage i. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed,and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization,are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination(NOT)or removal of the appropriate site notice,as applicable,for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part II.A of this general permit,only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause,have the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses of surface water in the state are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit(see Parts II.H.2 and 3.)to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to,the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part II.H.3 of this general permit. 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)Requirements The permittee shall determine whether the authorized discharge is to an impaired water body on the latest EPA-approved CWA Section 3o3(d)List or waters with an EPA- approved or established TMDL that are found on the latest EPA-approved Texas Page 1.4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 3o3(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 3o TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standard(s)and are listed as category 4 or 5 in the current version of the Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality,and waterbodies listed on the CWA§ 3o3(d)list.Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for coverage under this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TMDL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3,in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL,the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition,goal,or requirement in the TMDL,TMDL Implementation Plan(I-Plan),or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 213(relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition,commencement of construction (i.e.,the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavating activities,as well as other construction-related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition)at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213,may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan(EAPP)has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ),operators must meet all applicable requirements of,and operate according to, 3o TAC Chapter 213(Edwards Aquifer Rule)in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. (b) For existing discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,the requirements of the agency-approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan(WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls,for example,may be required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. (c) For discharges located within ten stream miles upstream of the Edwards Aquifer recharge zone,applicants shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate TCEQ regional office. Counties: Corral,Bexar,Medina,Uvalde, and Kinney Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager San Antonio Regional Office 1425o Judson Road San Antonio,Texas 78233-4480 (210)490-3096 Counties: Williamson,Travis,and Hays Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager Austin Regional Office 12100 Park 35 Circle Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Room 179,Building A Austin,Texas 78753 (512)339-2929 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 311(relating to Watershed Protection)for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal,other state,or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example,this permit does not limit the authority of a home-rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code§401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations,authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development,or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline,are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Authorization for stormwater discharges from construction activities that are associated with production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline must be obtained,as required,from the U.S.EPA or the Texas Railroad Commission,as applicable. Discharge of stormwater related to construction activity, from a facility that stores both refined products intended for off-site use and crude oil in aboveground storage tanks,is regulated by the TCEQ and is eligible for coverage under this general permit. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops,construction of fences to contain livestock,construction of stock ponds,and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations,such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations,would be point sources regulated under this general permit. 11. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit,unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied.Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site-specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species,the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. Page 16 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert force majeure(act of God,war,strike,riot,or other catastrophe)defenses found in 3o TAC§7o.7. Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit,and authorized under the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000(effective on March 5,2013),must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim or grace period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES general permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit,and that do not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part II.F of this general permit,must meet the requirements to be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES Construction General Permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion: Operators of small construction activity,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit, shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,which occur in certain counties and during periods of low potential for erosion that do not meet the conditions of the waiver described in Part II.G of this general permit,may be automatically authorized under this general permit if all the following conditions are met. (a) the construction activity occurs in a county and during the corresponding date range(s)listed in Appendix A; (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed,including either final or temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas,within the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion,permanent stabilization activities have been initiated,and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (d) the permittee signs a completed TCEQ small construction site notice for low potential for erosion,including the certification statement; (e) a signed and certified copy of the small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; NOTE:Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified site notice,with a viewable signature,located on- site and available for review by any applicable regulatory authority. (f) a copy of the signed and certified small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; (g) discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges from any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized under an individual TPDES permit,another TPDES general permit,or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation(discharges are adjacent to water in the state);and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,are not considered by TCEQ to be a wastewater,or are captured and routed for disposal at a publicly operated treatment works or licensed waste disposal facility. If all of the conditions in(a)—(h)above are met,then the operator(s)of small construction activities with low potential for erosion are not required to develop a SWP3. If an operator is conducting small construction activities and any of the above conditions (a)—(h)are not met,the operator cannot declare coverage under the automatic authorization for small construction activities with low potential for erosion and must meet the requirements for automatic authorization(all other)small construction activities,described below in Part II.E.2. For small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion,where automatic authorization under this section is not available,an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting(Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver— LREW),as described in Part II.G of this general permit. Waivers from coverage under the LREW do not allow for any discharges of non-stormwater and the operator must ensure that discharges on non-stormwater are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization. 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit or as defined but who do not meet in the conditions and requirements located in Part II.E.i above,may be automatically authorized for small construction activities,provided that they meet all of the following conditions: Page 18 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit,that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement the SWP3 prior to commencing construction activities; (b) all operators of regulated small construction activities must post a copy of a signed and certified Small Construction site notice,the notice must be posted at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities,at least two days prior to commencing construction activity,and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g. pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites maybe relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities); (c) operators must maintain a posted site notice at the construction site until final stabilization has been achieved;and NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Small Construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. (d) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4)receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities. As described in Part I.B of this general permit,large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five(5)acres of land,but that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five(5)or more acres of land,and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3.below. 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site where the applicant is the operator. The SWP3 must be developed and implemented prior to obtaining coverage and prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators of large construction activities must submit an NOI prior to commencing construction activity at a construction site.A completed NOI must be submitted to TCEQ electronically using the online e-Permits system on TCEQ's website. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver must submit a completed NOI to TCEQ at least seven(7)days prior to prior to commencing construction activity to obtain provisional coverage seven(7)days from the postmark date for delivery to the TCEQ. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted,the additional primary operator must meet the same requirements for existing primary operator(s),as indicated above. If the primary operator changes due to responsibility at the site being transferred from one primary operator to another after the initial NOI is submitted,the new primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten(1o) Page 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 days prior to assuming operational control of a construction site and commencing construction activity. Operators that submit NOIs electronically must use the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2 of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g.pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local, state,and federal authorities); (d) two days prior to commencing construction activities,all primary operators must: i. provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any secondary construction operator,and ii. list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of"secondary operator"in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit,but are not required to submit an NOI,provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI,or prior to commencement of construction activities,a primary operator is required to submit an NOI and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s)of the need to obtain coverage(with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit,may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit,or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available;and (f) all secondary operators of large construction activities must post a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice and provide a copy of the signed and certified site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to the commencement construction activities. NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOI using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage under this general permit,if applicable. The requirements are outlined in Part II.G below. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.i or II.E.2 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.i or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction Page 20 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities as described in Part II.E.3 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part II.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3 above that electronically submit an NOI are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the electronic form by the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver are provisionally authorized seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. For construction activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction activities may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right to take appropriate enforcement action for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. (d) If operators that submitted NOIs have active authorizations for construction activities that are ongoing when the term of the current general permit expires and a new general permit is issued,a 9o-day interim(grace)period is granted to provide coverage that is administratively continued until operators with active authorizations can obtain coverage under the newly issued CGP. The 9o-day grace period starts on the effective date of the newly issued CGP. Deadlines for obtaining coverage for operators of small and large construction are provided in Part II.D.i and 2 above. 6. Notice of Change(NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes,the operator that has submitted the NOI must submit an NOC to TCEQ at least fourteen(14)days before the change occurs, if possible. Where a 14-day advance notice is not possible,the operator must submit an NOC to TCEQ within 14-days of discovery of the change. If the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI, the correct information must be submitted to TCEQ in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director,or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC form or letter must also be placed in the SWP3 and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge. A list that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy of the NOC(or NOC letter)must be included in the SWP3. Information on an NOC may include,but is not limited to,the following: a change in the description of the construction project;an increase in the number of acres disturbed(for increases of one or more acres);or the name of the operator(where the name of the operator has changed). A transfer of operational control from one operator to another,including a transfer of the ownership of a company. Coverage under this general permit is not transferable Page 21 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 from one operator to another or one company to another,and may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company may include,but is not limited to,the following: changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types,so that the filing number(or charter number)that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an NOC using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices NOI forms,NOT forms,NOC letters,and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.44(relating to Signatories for Applications). 8. Contents of the NOI The NOI form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit,where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name,address,and telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (f) confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit,that it will be implemented prior to commencement of construction activities,and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans;for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation for an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity(if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment,then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach);and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA§303(d)List of impaired waters or Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 3o3(d)as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization of large construction activities under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization of large construction must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a paper form to TCEQ supplied by the executive director or electronically via the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day a paper NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ or immediately following confirmation of the receipt of the NOT submitted electronically by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOT using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ,and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy),within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.4 below);or (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) if authorization for construction activity was granted following submission of an NOI,the permittee's site-specific TPDES authorization number for a specific construction site; (b) an indication of whether final stabilization has been achieved at the site and a NOT has been submitted or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name,address,and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and location(latitude/longitude)of the construction project or site;and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur,or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site,and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed,will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3,or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites (a) Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization for small construction or is a secondary operator for large construction must perform the following when terminating coverage under the permit: i. remove the site notice; ii. complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice; and iii. submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator, with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3). (b)The activities described in Part II.F.3.(a)above must be completed by the operator within 3o days of meeting any of the following conditions: i. final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; ii. a transfer of day-to-day operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below);or iii. the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control (a) When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions is transferred to another primary operator,the original operator must do the following: i. submit an NOT within ten(1o)days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates,and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten (1o)days prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(c)below;and ii. submit a copy of the NOT from the primary operator terminating its coverage under the permit and its operational control of the construction site and submit a copy of the NOI from the new primary operator to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Part II.F.i above. (b) For transfer of operational control,operators of small construction activities and secondary operators of large construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must do the following: i. the existing operator must remove the original site notice,and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with the conditions in Part II.F.4.(c)i or ii below;and ii. a copy of the site notice,which must be completed and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge,in accordance with Part II.F.3 above. (c) Each operator is responsible for determining its role as an operator as defined in Part I.B and obtaining authorization under the permit,as described above in Part Page 24 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1.50000 II.E.i—3. Where authorization has been obtained by submitting an NOI for coverage under this general permit,permit coverage is not transferable from one operator to another. A transfer of operational control can include changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation,or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing(or charter) number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. A transfer of operational control can also occur when of the following criteria is met,as applicable: i. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that do not meet the definition for final stabilization; ii. all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3,or transferred to a new operator,provided that the original permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Records of this notification(or attempt at notification)shall be retained by the operator transferring operational control to another operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal;or iii. a homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements of this permit. Under these circumstances,the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to the lot(s)it has operational control over in a larger common plan of development,and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges,and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s) transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit,when the calculated rainfall erosivity(R)factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five(5). The operator must submit either a signed paper Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW) certification form to the TCEQ,supplied by the executive director,or complete the form electronically via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. The form is a certification by the operator that the small construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five(5). The paper LREW certification form must be postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven(7)days before construction activity begins or,if submitted electronically, construction may begin at any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. This waiver from coverage does not apply to any non-stormwater discharges,including what is allowed under this permit. The operator must insure that all non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,or are captured and routed to an authorized treatment facility for disposal. Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Effective September 1,2018,applicants must submit an LREW using the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index(EI)zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit,in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1,or in USDA Handbook 703,by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map(Appendix C of this permit)and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step(c)above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step(d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5,then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five(5)or more,then a waiver may not be obtained,and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2.of this permit. Alternatively,the operator may calculate a site-specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: http://ei.tamu.edu/index.html,or using another available resource. A copy of the LREW certification form is not required to be posted at the small construction site. 3. Effective Date of a LREW Unless otherwise notified by the executive director,operators of small construction activities seeking coverage under a LREW are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven(7)days from the date that a completed paper LREW certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ,or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal,made via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Effective September 1,2018,applicants seeking coverage under a LREW must submit an application for a LREW using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator,the operator must either: (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date,and if the R factor is still under five(5),submit a new waiver certification form at least two(2)days before the end of the original waiver period;or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements for automatic authorization for small construction activities in Part II.E.2 of this permit, prior to the end of the approved LREW period. Page 26 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage i. Individual Permit Alternative Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 3o TAC§305(relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage must be submitted at least three hundred and thirty(33o)days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. Existing coverage under this general permit should not be terminated until an individual permit is issued and in effect. 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges Certain discharges eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),as applicable. 3. Individual Permit Required The executive director may require an operator of a construction site,otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit,to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I-Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause,has a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state:and (c) any other consideration defined in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges)including 3o TAC Chapter 2o5.4(c)(3)(D),which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule,order,or permit of the commission, including non-payment of fees assessed by the executive director. A discharger with a TCEQ compliance history rating of"unsatisfactory"is ineligible for coverage under this general permit. In that case,3o TAC§60.3 requires the executive director to deny or suspend an authorization to discharge under a general permit. However,per TWC§26.o4o(h),a discharger is entitled to a hearing before the commission prior to having an authorization denied or suspended for having an "unsatisfactory"compliance history. Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit for reasons other than compliance history shall be done according to commission rules in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration i. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five(5)years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one(i)of this permit. Following public notice and comment,as provided by 3o TAC§205.3(relating to Public Notice,Public Meetings,and Public Comment),the commission may amend, Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 revoke,cancel,or renew this general permit. All authorizations that are active at the time the permit term expires will be administratively continued as indicated in Part II.I.2 below and in Part II.D.i(b)and D.2(b)of this permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date,the permit will remain in effect for existing,authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit,permittees maybe required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit,unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date,permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date,authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3,prior to submittal of an NOI,to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2 and II.E.3 of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S. This includes discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project,provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site,operators must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator,it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. An SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part II.A.3,in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. An SWP3 must also identify any potential sources of pollution that have been determined to cause,have a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause or contribute to the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state from discharges of stormwater from construction activities and construction support activities. Where potential sources of these pollutants are present at a construction site,the SWP3 must also contain a description of the management practices that will be used to prevent these pollutants from being discharged into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. NOTE: Construction support activities can also include vehicle repair areas,fueling areas,etc.that are present at a construction site solely for the support construction activities and are only used by operators at the construction site. The SWP3 is intended to serve as a road map for how the construction operator will comply with the effluent limits and other conditions of this permit and does not establish the effluent limits that apply to the construction site's discharges. These limits are established in Part III.G of the permit. Page 28 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing,a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators of small and large construction activities must independently obtain authorization under this permit,but may work together with other regulated operators at the construction site to • prepare and implement a single,comprehensive SWP3,which can be shared by some or all operators,for the construction activities that each of the operators are performing at the entire construction site. 1. The SWP3 must include the following: (a) for small construction activities—the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3; (b) for large construction activities-the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3,the general permit authorization numbers of each operator (or the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator that has not received an authorization number for coverage under this permit);and (c) for large and small construction activities-the signature of each operator participating in the shared SWP3. 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan,then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP,and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications All secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; (b) ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit;and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number(s)for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If a primary operator has not been authorized or has abandoned the site,the secondary operator is considered to be the responsible party and must obtain authorization Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 as a primary operator under the permit,until the authority for day-to-day operational control is transferred to another primary operator. The new primary operator must update or develop a new SWP3 that will reflect the transfer of operational control and include any additional updates to the SWP3 to meet requirements of the permit. 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to- day activities; and (d) the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation,and Compliance The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or,if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan,a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to: the executive director;a federal,state,or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans,grading plans,or stormwater management plans;local government officials;and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off-site,then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances,it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. Operators with authorization for construction activity under this general permit must post a TCEQ site notice at the construction site at a place readily available for viewing by the general public,and local,state,and federal authorities. (a) Primary and secondary operators of large construction activities must each post a TCEQ construction site notice,respective to their role as an operator at the construction site,as required above and according to requirements in Part II.E.3 of this general permit. (b) Primary and secondary operators of small construction activities must post the TCEQ site notice as required in Part III.D.2.(a)above and for the specific type of small construction described in Part II.E.i and 2 of the permit. (c) If the construction project is a linear construction project,such as a pipeline or highway,the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Site notices for small and large construction Page 30 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities at these linear construction sites maybe located,as necessary,along the length of the project,but must still be readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities; and contain the following information: i. the site-specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; ii. the operator name,contact name,and contact phone number; iii. a brief description of the project; and iv. the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason,including inspection of a site;nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 within seven days of when any of the following occurs: 1. a change in design,construction,operation,or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications,new operators, new areas of responsibility,and changes in BMPs;or 3. results of inspections or investigations by construction site personnel authorized by the permittee,operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge,authorized TCEQ personnel,or a federal,state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must be developed and implemented by primary operators of small and large construction activities and include,at a minimum,the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III,Section G of the general permit. 1. A site or project description,which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site,including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur,including areas where construction support activities(defined in Part I.B of this general permit)occur; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (f) a map showing the general location of the site(e.g.a portion of a city or county map); (g) a detailed site map(or maps)indicating the following: Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 i. drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities; ii. areas where soil disturbance will occur; iii. locations of all controls and buffers,either planned or in place; iv. locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; v. locations of construction support activities,including those located off-site; vi. surface waters(including wetlands)either at,adjacent,or in close proximity to the site,and also indicate whether those waters are impaired; vii. locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; viii. vehicle wash areas; and ix. designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads(for instance,this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret,the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI,including asphalt plants,concrete plants,and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that may be disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and the acknowledgement of provisional and non-provisional authorization for primary operators of large construction sites,and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; (1) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations,including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site where construction support activities will occur; and (m) locations of all pollutant-generating activities at the construction site and where construction support activities will occur,such as the following: Paving operations; concrete,paint and stucco washout and water disposal; solid waste storage and disposal;and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum,the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements i. Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on-site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography,soil type, and rainfall. ii. Control measures must be properly selected,installed,and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 iii. Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris,and construction materials. (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the construction site,where small or large construction activity will occur. The erosion control and stabilization practices selected by the permittee must be compliant with the requirements for sediment and erosion control,located in Part III.G of this permit. The description of the SWP3 must also include a schedule of when the practices will be implemented. Site plans must ensure that existing vegetation at the construction site is preserved where it is possible. i. Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to: establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation,mulching, geotextiles,sod stabilization,vegetative buffer strips,protection of existing trees and vegetation,slope texturing,temporary velocity dissipation devices,flow diversion mechanisms,and other similar measures. ii. The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3,and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part III.D.1 of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site;and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. iii. Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term"immediately"is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures.In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable,but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth-disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A)through(D)below,these measures must be completed as soon as practicable,but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased due to frozen conditions, non-vegetative controls must be implemented until thawing conditions(as defined in Part I.B of this general permit) are present,and vegetative stabilization measures can be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In arid areas,semi-arid areas,or drought-stricken areas,as they are defined in Part I.B of this general permit,where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions,other types of erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated at the site as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are infeasible due to arid conditions,and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of construction activity in any portion of the site,the operator shall immediately install non- Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 vegetative erosion controls in areas of the construction site where construction activity is complete or has ceased. If non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Part III.F.2.(b).iii.(C)below. (C) In areas where non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible,and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect the BMPs at the frequencies established in Part III.F.7.(c)for unstabilized sites. (D) The requirement for permittees to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that construction activity at the site or in certain areas of the site will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is prevented by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee,the permittee must employ and implement alternative stabilization measures immediately. When conditions at the site changes that would allow for vegetative stabilization,then the permittee must initiate or complete vegetative stabilization as soon as practicable. iv. Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. v. TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- stabilized following construction(e.g.,dirt access roads,utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles,equipment,or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff,including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. i. Sites With Drainage Areas of Ten or More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (1) A sedimentation basin is required,where feasible,for a common drainage location that serves an area with ten(1o)or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin may be temporary or permanent,and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm event,it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent stabilization,if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin.Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. (2) Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. Page 34 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible,then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is feasible,the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope,available area,public safety,precipitation patterns,site geometry,site vegetation,infiltration capacity,geotechnical factors,depth to groundwater,and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible,and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible,when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments,the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. ii. Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten(io) acres. At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. (B) Alternatively,a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,60o cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed,then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used,the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part III.G.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any stormwater control measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures,as follows: (a) permittees authorized under the permit for small construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site;or (b) permittees authorized under the permit for large construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site and prior to submission of an NOT. 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Permittees shall minimize,to the extent practicable,the off-site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources in discharges of stormwater from all areas of the construction site where construction activity,including construction support activities,will be located, and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel(i.e.,runoff conveyance)to provide a non- erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course,so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. (g) For demolition of any structure with at least io,000 square feet of floor space that was built or renovated before January 1,198o,and the receiving waterbody is impaired for polychlorinated biphenyls(PCBs): i. Implement controls to minimize the exposure of PCB-containing building materials,including paint,caulk,and pre-198o fluorescent lighting fixtures to precipitation and to stormwater;and ii. Ensure that disposal of such materials is performed in compliance with applicable state,federal,and local laws. 5. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal,state,or local officials. (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan,including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 3o TAC Chapter 213(related to the Edwards Aquifer),then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If,through inspections or other means,as soon as the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively,then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 of stormwater controls,and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. (b) If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly,is performing inadequately,or is damaged,then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter controls such as silt fences,berms,etc.,the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 50%of the above-ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site,accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts,and prior to the next rain event,if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off-site conveyance,then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas(cleared, graded,or excavated)of the construction site that do not meet the requirements of final stabilization in this general permit,all locations where stabilization measures have been implemented,areas of construction support activity covered under this permit,stormwater controls(including pollution prevention controls) for evidence of,or the potential for,the discharge of pollutants,areas where stormwater typically flows within the construction site,and points of discharge from the construction site. i. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit,the construction activities at the site,and the SWP3 for the site. ii. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. (b) Requirements for Inspections i. Inspect all stormwater controls(including sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3)to ensure that they are installed properly, appear to be operational,and minimizing pollutants in discharges,as intended. ii. Identify locations on the construction site where new or modified stormwater controls are necessary. iii. Check for signs of visible erosion and sedimentation that can be attributed to the points of discharge where discharges leave the construction site or discharge into any surface water in the state flowing within or adjacent to the construction site. iv. Identify any incidents of noncompliance observed during the inspection. v. Inspect locations where vehicles enter or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. vi. If an inspection is performed when discharges from the construction site are occurring: identify all discharge points at the site,observe and document the visual quality of the discharge(i.e.,color,odor,floating,settled,or Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 suspended solids,foam,oil sheen,and other such indicators of pollutants in stormwater). vii. Complete any necessary maintenance needed,based on the results of the inspection and in accordance with the requirements listed in Part III.F.6 above. (c) Inspection frequencies: i. Inspections of construction sites must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,unless as otherwise provided below in Part III.F.7.(c).ii—v below. ii. Inspection frequencies must be conducted at least once every month in areas of the construction site that meet final stabilization or have been temporarily stabilized. iii. Inspection frequencies for construction sites,where runoff is unlikely due to the occurrence of frozen conditions at the site,must be conducted at least once every month until thawing conditions begin to occur(See definitions for thawing conditions in Part I.B). The SWP3 must also contain a record of the approximate beginning and ending dates of when frozen conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. iv. In arid,semi-arid,or drought-stricken areas,inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured,as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of when drought conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly,while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of o.5 inches or greater. v. As an alternative to the inspection schedule in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. vi. The inspection procedures described in Part III.F.7.(c).i.—v above can be performed at the frequencies and under the applicable conditions indicated for each schedule option,provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are made in accordance with the following provisions: the inspection frequency schedule can only be changed a maximum of one time each month;the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month;and the reason for the schedule change documented in the SWP3(e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (d) Utility line installation,pipeline construction,and other examples of long, narrow,linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a)above. i. Inspection of linear construction sites could require the use of vehicles that could compromise areas of temporary or permanent stabilization,cause Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 additional disturbance of soils,and result in the increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances,controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,but representative inspections may be performed. ii. For representative inspections,personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for o.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway,undisturbed right-of-way,or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected 0.25 mile portion may be considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the o.25 mile portion to either the end of the next 0.25 mile inspected portion,or to the end of the project, whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the inspection schedule described in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. iii. The SWP3 for a linear construction site must reflect the current inspection schedule. Any changes to the inspection schedule must be made in accordance with the following provisions: (A) the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month; (B) the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month,and (C) the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 (e.g.,end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (e) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites,inspections must be conducted as soon as access is practicable. (f) Inspection Reports i. A report summarizing the scope of any inspection must be completed within 24-hours following the inspection. The report must also include the date(s) of the inspection and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3. Major observations in the report must include: the locations of where erosion and discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site have occurred;locations of BMPs that need to be maintained;locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location; and locations where additional BMPs are needed. ii. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within,and retained as a part of,the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non- compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non- compliance,the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be retained as part of the SWP3 and signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§3o5.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). iii. The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the permittee may be documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. (g) The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections,as necessary,to better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1.5o0oo within seven(7)calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are modified or if additional BMPs are necessary,an implementation schedule must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge,as listed in Part II.A.3 of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B of this general permit. io. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.4 of this general permit. Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in 4o CFR§§1.25.3o-125.32,any discharge regulated under this general permit,with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity,must achieve,at a minimum,the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available(BPT). i. Erosion and sediment controls. Design,install,and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such controls must be designed,installed,and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion in order to minimize pollutant discharges; (b) Control stormwater discharges,including both peak flowrates and total stormwater volume,to minimize channel and streambank erosion and scour in the immediate vicinity of discharge point(s); (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site. The design,installation,and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount,frequency,intensity and duration of precipitation,the nature of resulting stormwater runoff,and soil characteristics,including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (f) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water in the state,provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary,around surface water in the state,depending on site-specific topography,sensitivity,and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas and maximize stormwater infiltration to reduce pollutant discharges,unless infeasible. If providing buffers is infeasible,the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are infeasible and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site,unless the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that the topsoil be disturbed or removed,or it is infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed, either: i. restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction;or Page 4o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 ii. prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth,if necessary and feasible; Minimizing soil compaction is not required where the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that it be compacted. (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features(e.g.,stormwater conveyance channels,storm drain inlets,sediment basins)to constitute"surface water"for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.i.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization. Stabilization of disturbed areas must,at a minimum,be initiated immediately whenever any clearing,grading,excavating,or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site,or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth- disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary stabilization must be completed no more than 14 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures,and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible,alternative non- vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable.Refer to Part III.F.2.(b)for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. In limited circumstances,stabilization may not be required if the intended function of a specific area of the site necessitates that it remain disturbed. 3. Dewatering.Discharges from dewatering activities,including discharges from dewatering of trenches and excavations,are prohibited,unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures.Design,install,implement,and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such measures must be designed,installed,implemented,and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water,and other wash waters.Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials,building products,construction wastes,trash,landscape materials,fertilizers,pesticides,herbicides,detergents, sanitary waste,and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; (c) Minimize the exposure of waste materials by closing waste container lids at the end of the work day.For waste containers that do not have lids,where the container itself is not sufficiently secure enough to prevent the discharge of pollutants absent a cover and could leak,the permittee must provide either a cover(e.g.,a tarp,plastic sheeting,temporary roof)to minimize exposure of wastes to precipitation,or a similarly effective means designed to minimize the discharge of pollutants(e.g.,secondary containment);and (d) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks,and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges.The following discharges are prohibited: Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete,unless managed by an appropriate control; (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco,paint,form release oils, curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels,oils,or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing;and (e) Toxic or hazardous substances from a spill or other release. 6. Surface outlets.When discharging from basins and impoundments,utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface,unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants present at regulated construction sites and operated as a construction support activity maybe authorized under the provisions of this general permit,provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s)authorized under this permit. Only the discharges of stormwater runoff and non-stormwater from concrete batch plants that meet the requirements of a construction support activity can be authorized under this permit(see the requirements for "Non-Stormwater Discharges"in Part II.A.3 and"Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity"in Part II.A.2). If discharges of stormwater runoff or non-stormwater from concrete batch plants are not authorized under this general permit,then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit[see the requirement in Part II.A.2.(c)]. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements of this section of this general permit,and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: Table 1.Benchmark Parameters Benchmark Benchmark Value Sampling Sample Type Parameter Frequency Oil and Grease(*i) 15 mg/L i/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Total Suspended 5o mg/L i/quarter(*2)(*3) Grab(*4) Solids(*i) pH 6.o—9.o Standard Units i/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) Total Iron(*i) 1.3 mg/L i/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) (*i) All analytical results for these parameters must be obtained from a laboratory that is accredited based on rules located in 3o TAC§25.4(a)or through the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program(NELAP). Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c)and 40 CFR §122.44(i)(1)(iv). Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (*2) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 3o minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample,or to complete the sampling,within the first 3o minutes,sampling must be completed within the first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first 3o minutes of discharge,the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. (*3) Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter,a minimum of one sample shall be collected,provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section II.E.2,and prior to terminating coverage. (*4) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least o.i inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant,and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant,prior to commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. 2. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above,and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit,as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and may be necessary to protect water quality. The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. The operator's investigation must identify the following: (a) any additional potential sources of pollution,such as spills that might have occurred; (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3; (c) additional BMPs,including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs;and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations,then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations may be identified by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-on to the permitted facility,by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non-industrial areas,or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements—The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit,which include,but are not limited to the applicable requirements located in Part III.F.7 of this general permit,as follows: 1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources-The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources(activities and materials)that can cause,have a reasonable potential to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state in stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity and non-stormwater discharges(described in Part II.A.3 of this general permit),in compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit,including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed,at a minimum,in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage—The site map must include the following information: i. the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; ii. a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); iii. structural controls used within the drainage area(s); iv. the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation:vehicle and equipment maintenance activities(including fueling,repair,and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance); areas used for the treatment, storage,or disposal of wastes;liquid storage tanks;material processing and storage areas; and loading and unloading areas; and v. the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond,clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater(including the areas that drain to the treatment device); areas with significant materials;and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. (b) Inventory of Exposed Materials—A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that may be exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. (c) Spills and Leaks-A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed,maintained,and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data-A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained,if available. 2. Measures and Controls-The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's"Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"from Part W.B.i of this permit,and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include,at a minimum: Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Good Housekeeping-Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s)associated with concrete batch plants. i. Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate(including sand or gravel),settled dust,or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation,and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. ii. Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids,such as cement,to stormwater.Where practicable,these materials must be stored in enclosed silos,hoppers or buildings,in covered areas,or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures-Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff,and the drainage areas from these locations,must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate,the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures,storage requirements,and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections-Qualified facility personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit,the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§3o5.128. Inspections of facilities in operation must be performed once every seven days. Inspections of facilities that are not in operation must be performed at a minimum of once per month. The current inspection frequency being implemented at the facility must be recorded in the SWP3. The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must,at a minimum,include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site,including material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training-An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention,with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in the SWP3,and at a minimum,must consist of one training prior to the initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures-A description of spills and similar incidents,plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges,must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (f) Management of Runoff-The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff,including use of infiltration,detention ponds, retention ponds,or reusing of runoff. Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation At least once per year,one or more qualified personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. These include,but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems,and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff(including structural controls and implementation of management practices)must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWP3,such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation,the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.i, "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources");and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.2, "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation,the personnel making the evaluation,the date(s)of the evaluation,major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3,and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance,the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s),and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC§3o5.128,relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part IV.B.2.(c)of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites may be authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the land disposal of wash out from concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under this general permit,provided the following requirements are met. Any discharge of concrete production waste water to surface water in the state must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. A. Discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state,including discharge to storm sewers,is prohibited by this general permit. B. Concrete truck wash out water shall be disposed in areas at the construction site where structural controls have been established to prevent discharge to surface water Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15o000 in the state,or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent discharge to surface water in the state. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms,temporary shallow pits,temporary storage tanks with slow rate release,or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. C. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times,and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. D. The disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks,made under authorization of this general permit must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. E. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented,the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required in Part II.F.1 and 2 of this permit. For activities in which an NOT is not required,records shall be retained for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section II.F.3 of this permit. Records include: A. A copy of the SWP3; B. All reports and actions required by this permit,including a copy of the construction site notice; C. All data used to complete the NOI,if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit;and D. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site,if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions A. The permittee has a duty to comply with all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued(CWA and TWC),and is grounds for enforcement action,for terminating, revoking and reissuance,or modification,or denying coverage under this general permit,or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 4o CFR§122.41 (a). B. Authorization under this general permit may be modified,suspended,revoked and reissued,terminated or otherwise suspended for cause,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,30 TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41(0. Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director,upon request and within a reasonable time,any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for modifying,revoking and reissuing,terminating or,otherwise suspending authorization under this permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,30 TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41(h). Additionally,the permittee must provide to the executive director,upon request,copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. C. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the permit conditions. Page 47 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 D. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28,Texas Health and Safety Code§§361.032-361.o33 and 361.037,and 4o CFR§122.41(i).The statement in TWC§26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety,internal security,and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site,but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. E. The discharger is subject to administrative,civil,and criminal penalties,as applicable,under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: 1. negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA§§3oi,302,306,307,308, 318,or 405,or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA§402,or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA§§4o2(a)(3)or 4o2(b)(8); 2. knowingly making any false statement,representation,or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit,including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance; and 3. knowingly violating CWA§303 and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. F. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). G. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. H. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. I. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control(and related appurtenances)that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures.This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems that are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. J. The permittee shall comply with the monitoring and reporting requirements in 40 CFR§122.41(j)and(1),as applicable. K. Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c)and 4o CFR§122.44(i)(1)(iv). Part VIII. Fees A. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: 1. $325 if submitting a paper NOI,or 2. $225 if submitting an NOI electronically. B. Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. C. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. Page 48 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 D. Effective September 1,2018,applicants seeking coverage under an NOI or LREW must submit their application using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. Page 49 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County—Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov. 15 -Apr.3o Ector: Nov.15-Apr.30 Archer: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Edwards: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Armstrong: Nov. 15-Apr.3o El Paso: Jan.1-Jul.14,or May 15-Jul. 31,or Jun.1-Aug.14,or Jun. 15-Sept. 14, Bailey: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May 14 or Jul. 1-Oct. 14,or Jul.15-Oct.31,or Aug. 1-Apr.30,or Aug. 15-May 14,or Baylor: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Sept. 1-May 30,or Oct. 1-Jun. 14,or Borden: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Nov.1-Jun.30,or Nov. 15-Jul. 14 Brewster: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Fisher: Dec.15-Feb.14 Briscoe: Nov.15-Apr.3o Floyd: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Brown: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Foard: Dec.15-Feb.14 Callahan: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Gaines: Nov.15-Apr.30 Carson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Garza: Nov.15-Apr.30 Castro: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Glasscock: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Childress: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hale: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Cochran: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Hall: Feb. 1-Mar.30 May 14 Hanford: Nov.15-Apr.30 Coke: Dec.15-Feb.14 Hardeman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Coleman: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Hartley: Nov.15-Apr.30 Collingsworth: Jan. 1-Mar. 30, or Dec. 1- Haskell: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Feb. 28 Hockley: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov.15- Concho: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Apr.30 Cottle: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Howard: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Crane: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Hudspeth: Nov. 1-May 14 Crockett: Nov. 15-Jan.14,or Feb. 1- Hutchinson: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mar.3o Irion: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Crosby: Nov.15-Apr.30 Jeff Davis: Nov. 1-Apr.30 or Nov. 15- Culberson: Nov. 1-May 14 May 14 Dallam: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Jones: Dec.15-Feb. 14 3° Kent: Nov.15-Jan.14 or Feb.1-Mar.30 Dawson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Kerr: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Deaf Smith: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Kimble: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Dickens: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb.1-Mar. 30 King: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Dimmit: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Donley: Jan. 1-Mar.30,or Dec.1-Feb. Knox: Dec.15-Feb. 14 28 Lamb: Nov. 1-Apr.14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Eastland: Dec.15-Feb.14 30 Page 50 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Loving: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15 -May Scurry: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 �4 Shackelford: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Lubbock: Nov.15-Apr.3o Sherman: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Lynn: Nov.15-Apr.3o Stephens: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Martin: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Sterling: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mason: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Stonewall: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Maverick: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Sutton: Dec. 15-Feb.14 McCulloch: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Swisher: Nov.15-Apr.30 Menard: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Taylor: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Midland: Nov.15-Apr.3o Terrell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mitchell: Nov.15-Apr.3o Terry: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Moore: Nov.15-Apr.3o Throckmorton: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Motley: Nov.15-Jan.14,or Feb. 1-Mar. Tom Green: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Nolan: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Upton: Nov.15-Apr.30 Oldham: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Uvalde: Dec.15-Feb.14 - Parmer: Nov.1-Apr. 14,or Nov.15-Apr. Val Verde: Nov.15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1 Mar.30 30 Pecos: Nov.15-Apr.3o Ward: Nov. 1-Apr.14,or Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Potter: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Wichita: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Presidio: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov.15- Wilbarger: Dec. 15-Feb.14 May 14 Randall: Nov.15-Apr.3o Winkler: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- May 14 Reagan: Nov.15-Apr.3o Yoakum: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15 - Real: Dec.15-Feb.14 May 14 Reeves: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15 -May Young: Dec.15-Feb. 14 14 Wheeler: Jan.1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1-Feb. Runnels: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 28 Schleicher: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Zavala: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Page 51 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas rf _ .r . .... . , . .-.-,. . . .. . - . ■- (. li .pis— en■■.. p..,. ., ��` . ■. .. ■ tra ....+. .•i le In +..•a�,�•.R„ as NM I. ,■• •• R * • i .►r 4 !i s F a a �s awaw . ' - r■ .■ ■...,■ .r a . 1 '}• *+ 7*; m4r■r+r - •�saq•a*0 i ita '+ .� • 1 - R rr. .� ! .1.F • 'i■...a .■. r E ar as a.�iai.aw •IP44' min ma we.Pappep r .4 •■■4..r. rr p4.•4. y _ :ai Si iMs F4. 44,111...4 -.•..• •• i ,�.Fr4 i 1 --+ as MO,.i4.lk *lb, r•' ra■ + i a 44 a i _. a• . ,. a.a ir•ar �.. ... d l* ■say'.•..e.■ i i w e IOW ' • • T :r•a 4•i s..... WO -W.sr VIP ...: r n ._+ a.r. r. F� F i ana i� S. ' r i a.1 4.4° r s s'i ,= ••i ma an in i� ■man 1 ma um.ana .`i. •.? 'r e sI II. r . a q ra4.■.a.■. • a. a i . r i i •Aa. . . „aa■ra.. ■. . CD r " p iF • '•4�,.- ` •-*.r a rr•►a.•�,* a�■�•.r_a_.., `■ ea• A•M • i r ai..r• ••_ F i• i • rsa 4.4,, .II.MI MO AM Ai NM MS •+ ■.a....� MIA= sMI ay as s' _is�1 •.I '• *ti'*f+A • a ir •, i Y 1Ar11 f j.17 -«ta •i;•, • • • mil • _rLLa • r • t-iiiii Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service Page 52 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map k. ritariiiiiiMOWT410PIP"Mli iliese g WAN. IIU1 W ►,■� _mi ` '. V Wi. 0111111110is ti!- Al 4tiritliliff fig agegdonilaro-jrirritIO7 ififilitirel I flit Vila, erargi �- ■ Ili f IE/i i fllevirt n i..a�. mi I'mmm o■p,iris i"'�l ,dP ''�iWit I iv° 40,—,.. tiirriprinviimprogitrAi,A6 w'rd_4mLiL.,v-t'i'A--mk,- are I0 ■' .a iniqwkitaAarptlypilograi/ ... x iitimillirl 141111,51*416 110114110ditrele r 111 Lt.04PaivrakViirAr .' 4° =51'S 111/11110.4%vberce % w° —Lief* 175 •!1 S ■ lip 228 " gilide It6r Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service Page 53 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas Periods: EI# 1/1 1/16 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/i6 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/12 9/27 10/1210/2711/11 11/2612/11 12/31 89 0 1 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99 100 too 100 90 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 6o 65 69 74 81 87 92 • 95 97 98 99 100 91 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 92 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 93 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 4o 49 56 62 67 72 76 8o 85 91 97 98 99 99 100 94 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 70 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 95 0 1 3 5 7 9 11 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 100 96 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 7o 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 97 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 `37 48 56 61 64 68 72 T7 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 100 io6 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 71 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December ii and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:"Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service Page 54 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: VII Notice of Intent (NOI) for an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity tY under 'KEG TPDES General Permit TXR1 50000 I1�IPORTANT INFORMATION Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the NOI form. Use the NOI Checklist to ensure all required information is completed correctly. Incomplete applications delay approval or result in automatic denial. Once processed your permit authorization can be viewed by entering the following link into your internet browser: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm or you can contact TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700. ePERMTTS Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). To submit an NOI electronically, enter the following web address into your internet browser and follow the instructions: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm APPLICATION FEE AND PAYMENT The application fee for submitting a paper NOI is $325. The application fee for electronic submittal of a NOI through the TCEQ ePermits system(STEERS) is $225. Payment of the application fee can be submitted by mail or through the TCEQ ePay system. The payment and the NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. To access the TCEQ ePay system enter the following web address into your internet browser: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay. Provide your payment information for verification of payment: • If payment was mailed to TCEQ provide the following: o Check/Money Order Number: o Name printed on Check: • If payment was made via ePay, provide the following: o Voucher Number: o A copy of the payment voucher is attached to this paper NOI form. TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2018) Page I Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 RENEWAL(This portion of the NOI is not applicable after June 3, 2018) Is this NOI for a renewal of an existing authorization? 0 Yes 0 No If Yes, provide the authorization number here: TXR15 NOTE: If an authorization number is not provided, a new number will be assigned. SECTION 1. OPERATOR (APPLICANT) a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ, what is the Customer Number (CN) issued to this entity? CN (Refer to Section 1.a) of the Instructions) b) What is the Legal Name of the entity(applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County, or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the contact information for the Operator (Responsible Authority)? Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix ` Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: d) Indicate the type of customer: ❑ Individual ❑ Federal Government ❑ Limited Partnership ❑ County Government ❑ General Partnership ❑ State Government ❑ Trust ❑ City Government ❑ Sole Proprietorship (D.B.A.) ❑ Other Government ❑ Corporation ❑ Other: ❑ Estate e) Is the applicant an independent operator? 0 Yes ❑ No TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2o18) Page 2 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 (If a governmental entity, a subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check No.) f) Number of Employees. Select the range applicable to your company. O 0-20 El 251-500 O 21-100 0 501 or higher O 101-250 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (Required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors.) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: Texas Secretary of State Charter (filing) Number: DUNS Number(if known): SECTION 2. APPLICATION CONTACT Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? ❑ Yes, go to Section 3 ❑ No, complete this section Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): - First and Last Name: �� Suffix: Title: Credential: Organization Name: Phone Number: _ Fax Number E-mail: Mailing Address: Internal Routing(Mail Code, Etc.): City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: SECTION 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) If this is an existing permitted site, what is the Regulated Entity Number (RN) issued to this site? RN (Refer to Section 3.a) of the Instructions) TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2°18) Page 3 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 b) Name of project or site (the name known by the community where it's located): c) In your own words, briefly describe the type of construction occurring at the regulated site (residential, industrial, commercial, or other): d) County or Counties (if located in more than one): e) Latitude: Longitude: f) Site Address/Location If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section A: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section B. Location Description: City (or city nearest to) where the site is located: Zip Code where the site is located: SECTION 4. GENERAL CHAIZACTERISTICS a) Is the project or site located on Indian Country Lands? ❑ Yes, do not submit this form. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. ❑ No b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? ❑ Yes. Note: The construction stormwater runoff may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. ❑ No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? d) What is the Secondary SIC Code(s), if applicable? e) What is the total number of acres to be disturbed? f) Is the project part of a larger common plan of development or sale? TCEQ-20022 (3/6/2(3018) Page 4 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXRi50000 ❑ Yes ❑ No. The total number of acres disturbed, provided in e) above, must be 5 or more. If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5, do not submit this form. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the estimated start date of the project? h) What is the estimated end date of the project? i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? ❑ Yes ❑ No j) What is the name of the first water body(ies) to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? k) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(ies) that the discharge will eventually reach? 1) Is the discharge into a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)? Yes ❑ No If Yes, provide the name of the MS4 operator: Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of this NOI form to the MS4 operator. m) Is the discharge or potential discharge from the site within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, as defined in 30 TAC Chapter 213? ❑ Yes, complete the certification below. ❑ No, go to Section 5 I certify that the copy of the TCEQ approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (30 TAC Chapter 213) that is included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will be implemented. 0 Yes SECTION 5. NOI CERTIFICATION a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). ❑ Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. 0 Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination(NOT) must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. ❑ Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed, will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 0 Yes Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation of an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3, provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator. TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2018) Page 5 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 SECTION 6. APPLICANT CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE Operator Signatory Name: Operator Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-2oo22(3/6/2018) Page 6 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 NOTICE OF INTENT CHECKLIST (TXR1 50000) Did you complete everything? Use this checklist to be sure! Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. Confirm each item(or applicable item) in this form is complete. This checklist is for use by the applicant to ensure a complete application is being submitted. Missing information may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the General Information and Instructions.) APPLICATION FEE If paying by check: ❑ Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) ❑ Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: ❑ The voucher number is provided in this application and a copy of the voucher is attached. RENEWAL ❑ If this application is for renewal of an existing authorization, the authorization number is provided. OPERATOR INFORMATION ❑ Customer Number (CN) issued by TCEQ Central Registry ❑ Legal name as filed to do business in Texas. (Call TX SOS 512-463-5555 to verify.) ❑ Name and title of responsible authority signing the application. ❑ Phone number and e-mail address ❑ Mailing address is complete &verifiable with USPS. ‘111-.v.usps.com ❑ Type of operator (entity type). Is applicant an independent operator? ❑ Number of employees. ❑ For corporations or limited partnerships - Tax ID and SOS filing numbers. ❑ Application contact and address is complete &verifiable with USPS. http://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE ❑ Regulated Entity Number (RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) ❑ Site/project name and construction activity description ❑ County ❑ Latitude and longitude http://Nv ww.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sgmaview.html TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 1 ❑ Site Address/Location. Do not use a rural route or post office box. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ❑ Indian Country Lands -the facility is not on Indian Country Lands. ❑ Construction activity related to facility associated to oil, gas, or geothermal resources ❑ Primary SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site. Ivww.osha.gov/oshstats/sicser.html ❑ Estimated starting and ending dates of the project. ❑ Confirmation of concrete truck washout. ❑ Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NOI. ❑ Common plan of development or sale. ❑ Receiving water body or water bodies. ❑ Segment number or numbers. ❑ MS4 operator. ❑ Edwards Aquifer rule. CERTIFICATION ❑ Certification statements have been checked indicating Yes. ❑ Signature meets 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44 and is original. TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR1 50000) GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Intent (NOI): By Regular Mail: By Overnight or Express Mail: TCEQ TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) P.O. Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX Application Fee: The application fee of $325 is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Payment of the fee may be made by check or money order, payable to TCEQ or through EPAY (electronic payment through the web). Mailed Payments: Use the attached General Permit Payment Submittal Form. The application fee is submitted to a different address than the NOI. Read the General Permit Payment Submittal Form for further instructions, including the address to send the payment. ePAY Electronic Payment: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NOI. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. TCEQ Contact List: Application - status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management - obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases (as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Intent Process: When your NOI is received by the program, the form will be processed as follows: • Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition, the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active (if applicable). The address(es) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Do not give an overnight/express mailing address. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency (NOD) will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 30 days to respond to the NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. • Acknowledgment of Coverage: An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. or Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit may be denied. If coverage is denied, the operator will be notified. General Permit (Your Permit) For NOIs submitted electronically through ePermits, provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOIs, provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site http://www.tceq.texas.gov. Search using keyword TXR150000. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated project or site changes, the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ. After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit, the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number, if one has not already been assigned to this customer or site. For existing customers and sites, you can find the Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number by entering the following web address into your Internet browser: http://www15.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/ or you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. On the website, you can search by your permit number, the Regulated Entity(RN) number, or the Customer Number(CN). If you do not know these numbers, you can select "Advanced Search" to search by permittee name, site address, etc. The Customer (Permittee) is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur. For this permit, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOI FORM Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied, a new permit number will be issued. Section 1. OPERATOR (APPLICANT) a) Customer Number (CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If the applicant is an existing TCEQ customer, the Customer Number is available at the following website: http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If the applicant is not an existing TCEQ customer, leave the space for CN blank. b) Legal Name of Applicant Provide the current legal name of the applicant. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, as filed in the county. You may contact the SOS at 512-463-5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county, provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Contact Information for the Applicant (Responsible Authority) Provide information for the person signing the application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the applicant. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the applicant. d) Type of Customer (Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity. Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for an authorization. Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business, but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office (TX SOS). If the customer is a `General Partnership' or `Joint Venture' filed in the county(not filed with TX SOS), the legal name of each partner forming the `General Partnership' or `Joint Venture' must be provided. Each `legal entity' must apply as a co-applicant. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Trust or Estate A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. Sole Proprietorship (DBA) A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated. This business may: 1. be under the person's name 2. have its own name (doing business as or DBA) 3. have any number of employees. If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA, the 'legal name' of the individual business 'owner' must be provided. The DBA name is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. The DBA name may be used for the site name (regulated entity). Corporation A customer that meets all of these conditions: 1. is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country 2. is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State 3. has proper operating authority to operate in Texas The corporation's 'legal name' as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant. An 'assumed' name of a corporation is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government (as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's 'legal name' must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization is not recognized as the 'legal name'. Other This may include a utility district, water district, tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority. Provide the specific type of government. e) Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary, part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. f) Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations. This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter the Tax ID number. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number(TIN). Enter this number here. Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. TX SOS Charter (filing) Number Corporations and Limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512-463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System) number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT Provide the name and contact information for the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) Regulated Entity Number (RN) The RN is issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity is regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the site has an assigned RN at http://wwwl5.tceci.texas.gov/crpub/. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN, leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, an RN may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. If the site is found, provide the assigned RN and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site. In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 5 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site or project as known by the public in the area where the site is located. The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words, briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Provide the name of the county where the site or project is located. If the site or project is located in more than one county, provide the county names as secondary. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form. For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sqmaview.html. f) Site Address/Location If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site in Section A. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address, you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description in Section B. For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city(or nearest city) and zip code of the site location. Section 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Indian Country Lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands, the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production, you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas (RRC) and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil, gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law, discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the RRC's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the RRC, as applicable. Activities under RRC jurisdiction include construction of a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the RRC; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. The RRC also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the RRC. Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and §1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from field activities or operations associated with{oil and gas} exploration, production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment, whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities unless the discharge is contaminated by contact with any overburden, raw material, intermediate product, finished product, byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility. Under §3.8 of this title (relating to Water Protection), the RRC prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment, in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. For more information about the jurisdictions of the RRC and the TCEQ read the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU)between the RRC and TCEQ at 16 Texas Administrative Code, Part 1, Chapter 3, Rule 3.30, by entering the following link into an internet browser: http://texreg.sos.state.tx.us/public/readtac$ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p_dir=&p_rloc= &p_tloc=&p_ploc=&pg=1&p_tac=&ti=16&pt=1&ch=3&r1=30 or contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 for additional information. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521 - Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522 - Construction of Residential Buildings Other than Single Family Homes • 1541 - Construction of Industrial Buildings and Warehouses TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 7 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • 1542 - Construction of Non-residential Buildings, other than Industrial Buildings and Warehouses • 1611 - Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622 - Bridge, Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 -Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Local Government Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s) may be provided. Leave this blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre, unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres, unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an NOI. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. If you have any questions about this item, please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at 512-239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on what a common plan of development is, refer to the definition of "Common Plan of Development" in the Definitions section of the general permit or enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/common_plan_of_development_steps.html For further information, go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction and search for "Additional Guidance and Quick Links': If you have any further questions about the Common Plan of Development you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 or the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance at 800-447- 2827. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 8 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Estimated Start Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity is initiated at the site. If renewing the permit provide the original start date of when construction activity for this project began. h) Estimated End Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity will end and final stabilization will be achieved at the site. i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? Indicate if you expect that operators of concrete trucks will washout concrete trucks at the construction site. j) Identify the water body(s) receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site. It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake, possibly via a drainage ditch. You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site (a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall, if they are different. k) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Enter the following link into your internet browser to find the segment number of the classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: www.tceq.texas.gov/waterquality/monitoring/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316 by entering the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • 0100 (Canadian River Basin) • 0200 (Red River Basin) • 0300 (Sulfur River Basin) • 0400 (Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500 (Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at 512-239-4671 for further assistance. 1) Discharge into MS4 -Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4, provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city, town, county, or utility district, but possibly can be another form of government. Please note that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 9 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance, you may call the technical staff at 512-239-4671. m) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer by entering the following link into an Internet browser: IN MN.tceg.texas.gov/field/eapp/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at 512-239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site-specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program(30 TAC Chapter 213) is required before construction can begin. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays, Travis and Williamson Counties: Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, 512-339- 2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney, Medina and Uvalde Counties: TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio, TX 78233-4480, 210-490- 3096. Section 5. NOI CERTIFICATION Note: Failure to indicate Yes to all of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit (TXR150000) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit (TXR150000)begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage. You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application. You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site by entering the following link into an Internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction or you may contact the TCEQ Stormwater processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, that is filed in the county where doing business. You may contact the SOS at 512-463 5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under the Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes, final stabilization has TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 10 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 been reached, the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures, your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and filter stormwater, tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out. You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements. This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NOI. The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. Section 6. APPLICANT CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44. If you are a corporation: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(1) (see below). According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. If you are a municipality or other government entity: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(3)(see below). According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed. An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above, please contact the TCEQ's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 11 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications (a)All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation, the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision- making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $2 5 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship, the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency (e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 12 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. Instructions: • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NO! Mail this form and your check to either of the following: By Regular U.S. Mail By Overnight or Express Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, TX 78711-3088 Austin, TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXR150000 1. Check or Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI Information: If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project or Site (RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. Do not submit a copy of the NOI with this form, as it could cause duplicate permit application entries! If there is not enough space on the form to list all of the projects or sites the authorization will cover, then attach a list of the additional sites. Project/Site (RE) Name: Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: Staple the check or money order to this form in this space. TCEQ-20134 (03/06/2018) Page 1 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. • Complete items i through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. Mail this form and your check to: BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office,MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXG920000 1. Check/Money Order No: YY 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI INFORMATION If the check is for more than one NOI,list each Project/Site(RE)Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. DO NOT SUBMIT A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THIS FORM AS IT COULD CAUSE DUPLICATE PERMIT ENTRIES. See Attached List of Sites(If more space is needed,you may attach a list.) Project/Site(RE)Name: Project/Site(RE) Physical Address: YYuY Staple Check in This Space TCEQ-2o1.34(04/1.3/2oo6) Page i TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: N: RN: Region: Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION: Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the form. Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ 20754). ePermits: This form is available on our online permitting system. Sign up for online permitting at: https://www3.tcea.texas.gov/steers/ What is the permit number to be terminated? TXR15 TXRCW Section 1. OPERATOR (Permittee) a) What is the Customer Number(CN)issued to this entity? CN b) What is the Legal Name of the current permittee? c) Provide the contact information for the Operator(Responsible Authority). Prefix(Mr.Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT This is the person TCEQ will contact if additional information is needed regarding this application. Is the application contact the same as the permittee identified above? 0 Yes, go to Section 3. 0 No, complete section below TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information,if outside USA: Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY (RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) TCEQ issued RE Reference Number(RN): RN b) Name of project or site as known by the local community: c) County,or counties if more than 1: d) Latitude: Longitude: e) Site Address/Location: If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section 3A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section 3B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section 3A: Physical Address of Project or Site: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section 3B: Site Location Description: Location description: City where the site is located or,if not in a city, what is the nearest city: Zip Code where the site is located: Section 4. REASON FOR TERMINATION Check the reason for termination: 07 Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Operator and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have been removed, or scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3. O Another permitted Operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized, and temporary erosion controls that have been identified in the SWP3 have been transferred to the new Operator. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 ❑ The discharge is now authorized under an alternate TPDES permit. ❑ The activity never began at this site that is regulated under the general permit. Section 5. CERTIFICATION Signatory Name: Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief,true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Instructions for Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TPDES General Permit TXR150000 GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Termination(NOT): BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL: BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center (MC-228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC-228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,Texas 78711-3087 Austin,TX 78753 TCEQ Contact List: Application status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tcea.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tcea.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management- obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases(as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Termination Process: A Notice of Termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. When your NOT is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: 1) Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to confirm the following: • the permit number is provided; • the permit is active and has been approved; • the entity terminating the permit is the current permittee; • the site information matches the original permit record; and • the form has the required original signature with title and date. 2) Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a phone call will be made to the applicant to clear the deficiency. A letter will not be sent to the permittee if unable to process the form. 3) Confirmation of Termination: A Notice of Termination Confirmation letter will be mailed to the operator. Chan:a in 0 I erator: An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE FORM The majority of permit information related to the current operator and regulated entity are available at the following website: http: v v\v 2.tcea.texas.gov/\v a_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Sect 10n 1. Operator (Current Permittee): a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry assigns each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. The Customer Number, for the current permittee, is available at the following website: http://www2.tcea.texas.gov/wu_dpa/index.cfm. b) Legal Name of Operator The operator must be the same entity as previously submitted on the original Notice of Intent for the permit number provided. The current operator name, as provided on the current authorization,is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. c) Contact Information for the Operator (Responsible Authority) Provide information for person signing the NOT application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. Update the address if different than previously submitted for the Notice of Intent or Notice of Change. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the operator. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the operator. Section 2. As I lication Contact: Provide the name, title and contact information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. Re: lated Enti (RE) Information on Project or Site: a) Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) A number issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number,registration number,or license number. The Regulated Entity Reference Number is available at the following website: http://www2.tcea.texas.gov/wa_dpa/index.cfm. b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site as known by the public in the area where the site is located. c) County Identify the county or counties in which the regulated entity is located. d) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees,minutes,and seconds or decimal form. The latitude and longitude as provided on the current authorization is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. e) Site/Project(RE)Physical Address/Location Information The physical address/location information, as provided on the current authorization,is available at the following website: http://www2.tcea.texas.gov/wa_dna/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 3A. If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police(911 service)or through an online map site used to locate the site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. Section 3B. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description.For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city(or nearest city) and Zip Code of the facility location. Section 4. Reason for Termination: The Notice of Termination form is only for use to terminate the authorization(permit). The Permittee must indicate the specific reason for terminating by checking one of the options. If the reason is not listed then provide an attachment that explains the reason for termination. Please read your general permit carefully to determine when to terminate your permit. Permits will not be reactivated after submitting a termination form. The termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. Section 5. Certification: The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. IF YOUAREA CORPORATION: The regulation that controls who may sign an application form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision,any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOUAREA MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision,only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter,county or city ordinances,or the Texas statutes under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44. Signatories to Applications (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function,or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation;or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production,or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 M IMPMIN 111 MEW 1M1 SIM LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "PRIMARY OPERA TOR"NOTICE This notice applies to construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the interne at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: r rrN IMMO WNW /WSW NMI LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "SECONDARY OPERA TOR " NOTICE This notice applies to secondary operators of construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html .I Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3): For Large Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.3. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.3. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. = NIMES ter.. 111 7111111 ✓▪ ► i SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: !ct Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2.of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part ILF.3. CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and sediments at their source. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant- any substance that could potentially alter the physical, thermal, chemical,or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State, rendering the water harmful, detrimental, or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales,berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions, or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips, mulching, or riprap C When the placement of topsoil,bank sand, or other soil material is specified,after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: 1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences, crate walls,bales of hay, or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing one or more of the following control measures: 1. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging, parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose. 2. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers,distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms, filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Section 01570 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) E. Definitions: 1. Trench. A narrow excavation(in relation to its depth)made below the surface of the ground. In general,the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench(measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. 2. Trench safety system requirements apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent to a trench as defined. 3. Trench safety systems include both Protective Systems and Shoring Systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting,trench boxes or trench shields, slide rail systems, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 5/2013 01570- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM a. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of an adjacent structure. b. Shoring System: A structure, which supports the sides of an excavation, to prevent cave-ins, maintain stable soil conditions, or to prevent movements of the ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. c. Special Shoring: A shoring system meeting Special Shoring Requirements for locations identified on the Plans. 4. Competent Person- one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary,hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on utility excavations is on a linear foot basis, measured along the centerline of the trench. Payment for trench safety systems includes payment for manholes and other line structures. B. Unless indicated in as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for shoring systems under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for trench safety systems. C. If shown on the Plans and included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as a separate Bid Item, Measurement and Payment for Special Shoring system installation for trench excavation is on a square foot basis, measured and completed in place. D. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on structural excavations under this Section. Include cost for trench safety system used on structural excavations in applicable structure installation. E. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on roadway excavation or embankment under this Section. Include cost in applicable Sections. F. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a safety plan specifically for the construction of trench excavation,excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of 5/2013 01570-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. Design the Trench Safety Plan to be in accordance with OSHA Standards - 29CFR governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations, and in accordance with any Special Shoring requirements at locations shown on the Plans. Include in the plan, submittal of the contact information for the Competent Person. C. Have Shop Drawings for trench safety systems sealed, as required by OSHA, by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the provision of Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring,OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,Subpart P, as amended,including Final Rule,published in the Federal Register Vol.54,No.209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these Technical Specifications, by reference, include Standard 1926.650—652. B. A reproduction of the OSHA Standards — 29 CFR included in Subpart P — "Excavations"from the Federal Register Vol. 54,No. 209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding on the Work. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this section of the Federal Register. C. Include in the Trench Safety Program measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970—20 USC 654 which states,"Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." D. Legislation that has been enacted by the State of Texas with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Under Texas Statutes, refer to Chapter 756 of the Health and Safety Code, SUBCHAPTER C. TRENCH SAFETY. E. Reference materials, if developed for this Work, will be issued by the Engineer along with the Bid Documents, including the following: 1. Geotechnical information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system. 2. Special Shoring Requirements. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, and agents, from any and all damages, costs(including,without limitation, legal fees,court costs, and the cost of investigation),judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of 5/2013 01570-3of5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with the Contract Documents and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under state and federal trench safety laws. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards—29 CFR. B. Specially designed trench safety systems shall be installed in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. Install Special Shoring at the locations shown on the Plans. D. Obtain verification from a Competent Person,defined in this Section and as identified in the Contractor's Trench Safety Program, that trench boxes and other pre- manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Conduct daily inspections by Contractor or Contractor's independently retained consultant, of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA Standards—29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 5/2013 01570-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the Work. END OF SECTION 5/2013 01570-5of5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 -Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current, payment will be made by change order. C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer,at no additional cost to the City. If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage, or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction: Post-mounted signs are preferred, but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign background B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial grade,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION 10/2014 01580-3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN EXHIBIT First I mpression S I PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE A],EAWS�PAscypoola unCan SiE „I�u SSX 5P'ae.ae e... 13.500 a�5,41 "WNW PrtuA PROJECT NO. 12345678 captar Improvement CITY OF PEARLAND Signage Layout CAPITAL PROJECT PROJECT SCHEDULE: MONTH/YEAR ^°DAIS} Various MAYOR,TOM REID BUDGET: $DOLLAR AMOUNT d,.,»A,I COUNCIL POSITION I. TONY CARBONI Peadand,Texas COUNCIL POSITION 7: SCOTT SXERMAN ENGINEER/ARCHITECT: a,T October 2014 COUNOL POSITION 3.GARY MOORE NAME GOES HERE PIfMAAE, MAYOR PRO TEN:REITN ORDINEAUX capital 4Xg q prove aee ment COUNCIL POSITION 4 GREG KILL CONTRACTOR: october 2014 0. CITY MANAGER: CLAY PEARSON CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE -anRE,eNnA-4PAPB'15 DEPUTY CITY MANAGER:ION IIANSON NSrYBGIRREI0011[rIRRE'6 ASST CITY MANAGER:TRENT EPPERSON pearlandtx.govldepartmentslengineering-capital-projectslprojects AInRRROSIIRIXROdOMEIEO61 EREMAIiIgAI IIIMOIDIEIOMELCEID R9W000ffiIYIIII&MBRW&OO O RAMICE OREROMOSOI YRIDOIMMONMRUTAW SPECIAL NOTE:CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES ITSTIMENX1010801,111C SERVICE SINGLE SIDE MDO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE Eaxivr to PROVIDE ALL SIGN COMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PRINT 5 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS UNLEsso CCiFIED INSTALL ON TWO 4`X4`TREATED POSTS.MIN.DEPTH IS 24".OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE REO'D.. CLIENT APPROVAL 10/2014 01580-4 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner, by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers' unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 (4un1q!fat d//vuopua#u!si and situ) CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and reference points. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points, including property corners,prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations, lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS Section 01750 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B Demonstration and instructions. C Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D References to Technical specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Contractor shall conduct all start-up operations under this Contract in conformance with Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. C Notify Engineer 7 days prior to startup of each item. D Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. E Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 07/2006 01750- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS F Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H When specified in individual specification sections,require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check and approve equipment or system installation prior to and during start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner two weeks minimum prior to date of Substantial Completion. B Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. D Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.03 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A Contractor shall start, test, adjust, balance, and provide reports on all installed equipment as provided for in this section. B Owner may also appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating observations and results of the tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C Owner's employment of an independent firm shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility under this section. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01750-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files,racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions, including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work,the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30)days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 09/2009 01770-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises G Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 1/2018 02200- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site of trees,shrubs,and other vegetation,except for those designated by Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps,roots,and other debris protruding through ground surface. 1. On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots,to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction, remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3. Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are to be covered by at least 3 feet of embankment D Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth,and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing,blading,and grading so that prepared area is free of holes, unplanned ditches, abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours,and preserve drainage of area. 1. Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage,except in areas to be immediately excavated 1/2018 02200-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil quality before excavating and stockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. C Topsoil Stripping: 1. Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3. Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4. Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter,weeds, roots, leaves, and debris. 5. Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing,stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main root system. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1. Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3. Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.03 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut, remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitable for subsequent construction. B Material used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Construction surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the work B Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. 1/2018 02200-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION C When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with"Structural Fill"and open areas not under structures or roadways with"General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. D Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330—Embankment. 3.05 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed,so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. END OF SECTION 1/2018 02200-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. C Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood, plastics, metals, concrete,masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4. Section 01100—Summary of Work 5. Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item, measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing,and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course, with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yard basis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 07/2006 02220- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans, or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. 07/2006 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition,handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated on Plans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03"Submittals'. B Use of a"drop hammer"must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for demolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. D Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications,pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 07/2006 02220-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.03 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process,water, chemical,gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls,cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonry bulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards,control panels,bus duct,conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 07/2006 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02220-5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Section 02252 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Cement stabilized sand for backfill and bedding. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" b. ASTM D 1632, "Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory" c. ASTM D 1633, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders" d. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" e. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" f. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" g. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" h. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" i. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" j. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" k. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" 1. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as an Extra Item, no separate payment will be made for cement stabilized sand under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for applicable utility or structure installation. B If use of cement stabilized sand is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a per ton basis. A conversion between volumes calculated based on theoretical limits and total weight will be made based on a ratio of 1.64 tons per cubic yard. 02/2009 02252- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material qualification and design mix tests to include: 1. Three series of tests of sand or fine aggregate material from the proposed source. Tests shall include procedures defined in this Section, 2.01 "Materials". 2. Three moisture-density relationship tests prepared using the material qualified by the tests in this Section, 1.03B 1. Blends of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and bank run sand shall be tested at the ratio to be used for the design mix testing. 3. Design mix report to meet the specifications of this Section, 1.04 "Design Requirements". The design mix shall include compressive strength tests after 48-hours and 7 days curing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A Design sand-cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch in 48 hours when compacted to a minimum 95 percent in accordance with ASTM D 558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Mix shall contain a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with a moisture content on the dry side of optimum. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement shall be Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B Sand shall be clean, durable, and meet grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33 and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. 2. Deleterious material content: a. Clay lumps shall comprise less than 0.5 percent by ASTM C 142. b. Lightweight pieces shall comprise less than 5.0 percent by ASTM C 123. c. Organic impurities shall produce color no darker than the standard color by ASTM C 40 ASTM. 3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C Fine aggregate,manufactured from crushed concrete meeting the quality requirements for crushed rock material in Section 02255 - Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials, may be used as a complete or partial substitute for Bank Sand. The blending ratio of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and Bank Sand shall be defined in the mix design report. 02/2009 02252-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D Water shall be potable,free of oils,acids,alkalies,organic matter,or other deleterious substances,meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.02 MIXING MATERIALS A Thoroughly mix sand, cement and water in proportions of the mix design using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. B Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Place sand-cement mixture in 8-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified on Plans. The moisture content during compaction shall be on the dry side of optimum but sufficient for hydration. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at the plant. B Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B Mixing plant inspections will be performed periodically. Material samples will be obtained and tested in accordance with this Section, 2.01 "Materials", if there is evidence of change in material characteristic. C One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples of delivered cement stabilized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665.Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first, middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. D Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D558,Method A,without adjusting moisture content.Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used,but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. E After molding, specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. 02/2009 02252-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND F Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. G A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. H Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. I Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum,the following information: 1. Supplier and plant number 2. Time material was batched 3. Time material was sampled 4. Test age (exact hours) 5. Average 48-hour strength 6. Average 7-day strength 7. Specification section number 8. Indication of compliance/non-compliance 9. Mixture identification 10. Truck and ticket numbers 11. The time of molding 12. Moisture content at time of molding 13. Required strength 14. Test method designations 15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 16. Supplier mixture identification 17. Specimen diameter and height, in. 18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. J The cement content will be checked on samples obtained in the field whenever there are apparent changes in the mix properties. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: 1. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. 2. All 7-day individual strength tests(average of two specimens)are greater than or equal to 100 psi. B Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test(average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement at Contractors expense when individual strength test(average of two specimens)has 7-day strength less than 70 psi 02/2009 02252-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material,which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor,Project Manager,and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42.In such cases,three(3)cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three(3)cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that 70 psi.Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. B When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi,material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard= $30.00 x 2 (100 psi - Actual psi) 100 C When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 02/2009 02252-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS Section 02255 BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A reference source for materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment,specified elsewhere in the Technical Specifications,and their associated material qualification testing requirements. B Source qualifications and handling of these materials. C Material use and application is specified on the Plans or in individual Technical Specifications referencing materials either by Material Classification or by Product Description. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 02910—Topsoil 3. Section 02252—Cement Stabilized Sand E Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" b. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" c. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" d. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" e. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" f. ASTM D 1140, "Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer the No. 200(70-urn) Sieve" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" i. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 07/2007 02255 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A Materials shall be classified for the purpose of quality control in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well- graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D6o/D10- greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve- less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines: a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5 percent. Gradation(GM,SM): amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. c. Borderline gradations with dual classifications(e.g., SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve -between 5 percent and 12 percent. 3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay(GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. 4. Class IVA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. 5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. B Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to the more restrictive class. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 07/2007 02255-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Materials that are classified as ML,CL-ML,MH,PT,OH and OL according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to the required density due to either gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. 4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. B Suitable Material. Soil materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with,for example, lime or cement shall be considered suitable, unless otherwise indicated. C General Fill. Material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches,free of roots,waste, debris,trash,organic material,unstable material,non-soil matter,hydrocarbon or other contamination, conforming to the following limits for deleterious materials: 1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. 2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. 3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. D Random Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I, II, III, N, or fat clay(CH), sand,gravel,or a combination,from excavation or borrow,which can be compacted to form stable embankments, and conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 65 maximum, ASTM - D4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 0 minimum, 45 maximum, ASTM-D4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones,hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. E Structural Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,or N,sand,gravel,or a combination, from excavation or borrow, which can be compacted to form stable embankments and fills conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 45 maximum,ASTM D 4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones,hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. F Select Fill. Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class N lean clay or clayey soils treated with lime or cement, and conforming to: 07/2007 02255-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Plasticity Index: 7 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 3. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. G Concrete Fill. Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. H Topsoil. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02910-Topsoil. Bank Sand: Durable Bank Sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) meeting the following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing the number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. The amount of clay lumps or balls not exceeding 2 percent. 2. Material passing the number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: a. Liquid limit: not exceeding 25 percent. b. Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. J Cement Stabilized Sand. Conform to requirements of Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. K Concrete Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 L Gem Sand. Sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 95 to 100 No. 4 60 to 80 No. 8 15 to 40 07/2007 02255 -4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS M Pea Gravel. Durable particles composed of small,smooth,rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 1/2" 100 3/8" 85 to 100 No. 4 10 to 30 No. 8 0 to 10 No. 16 0 to 5 N Crushed Aggregates. Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for the same construction activity from a single source. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the No.4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by TxDOT Tex- 460-A, Part I. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,sized by crushing to predominantly angular particles from a naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel are not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on the applicable utility embedment drawing details. 6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are the same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material,free from other substances such as asphalt, reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate), or debris. 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with TxDOT Tex-110-E. PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT FOR PIPE SIEVE EMBEDMENT BY RANGES OF NOMINAL PIPES SIZES >15" 15" - 8" <8" 1" 95 - 100 100 - 3/4" 60- 90 90— 100 100 1/2" 25 - 60 - 90— 100 3/8" - 20—55 40- 70 No. 4 0 - 5 0— 10 0 - 15 No. 8 - 0- 5 0 - 5 07/2007 02255-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALIFICATIONS FOR BORROW MATERIAL A Use of material encountered in excavations is acceptable, provided applicable requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable,provide from other approved source. B Identify off-site sources for materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products,furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements will be rejected. Do not use material which,after approval,has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, a Change Order is required to change to a different material. D Bank sand, select fill, and random fill, if available in the project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete the Work from off-site sources. E The Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in the excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING A When material is obtained from either a commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open the pit to expose the vertical faces of the various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate the selected material by vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata to achieve uniformity in the product. B Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control,and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C When stockpiling material near the Project Site,use appropriate methods to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. D Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. Do not place stockpiles of excavated materials on public streets. 07/2007 02255 -6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS E Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. END OF SECTION 07/2007 02255 -7 of 7 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS Section 02316 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation of materials for roadways. B. Excavation of materials for roadside ditches. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 7. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 01720—Field Surveying 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 02200—Site Preparation 12. Section 02330—Embankment 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (ShallowDepth)" d. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement shall be by the cubic yard measured in place,including labor,equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1/2018 02316- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Payment includes control of ground water and surface water, trench safety systems, removal of existing pavements and structures,repair and maintenance of excavated or backfilled areas, and other measures specified in this Section and not included in payment elsewhere. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. No payment will be made for material excavated under the following conditions: 1. More than 2 feet outside of vertical planes behind back of curbs. 2. For portion within limits of trench for utilities constructed by open-cut methods. 3. As indicated otherwise on Drawings. E. Construction Surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the Work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, Contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the Work. F. Excavation and Backfill quantities that exceed the construction plans shall be substantiated with topographic survey of finished grade by survey (RPLS) and verified by the Engineer at contractor's expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C. Submit field red lines documenting location of roadway excavation as installed, referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760—Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.5 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1/2018 02316-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 1.6 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D. Identify existing structures and utilities above and below grade. Stake and flag their location. E. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. F. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. G. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. H. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to lines and grades shown on Plans. 1/2018 02316-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION ANDBACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials, and compacted under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment. C. At intersections,grade back at minimum slope of one inch per foot. Produce a smooth riding junction with intersecting street. Maintain proper drainage. 1/2018 02316-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS D. Fill over-excavated areas in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 — Embankment at no cost to the Owner. 3.4 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B. Compact to minimum densities at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Areas under future paving and shoulders: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Minimum density of 90 percent of maximum dry density. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Three or more tests,at Engineer's/Owner's option,will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.7 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 1/2018 02316-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 3.8 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Maintain ditches and cut temporary swales to allow natural drainage in order to avoid damage to roadway. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 1/2018 02316-6 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES Section 02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Excavation, backfilling, and compaction of backfill for structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450- Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 7. Section 01570-Trench Safety System 8. Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220- Site Demolition 10. Section 02200—Site Preparation 11. Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand 12. Section 01562 - Waste Material Disposal C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D Definitions: 1. Backfill - material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted under controlled conditions around pavements, structures and utilities. 07/2006 02317- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 2. Foundation Backfill - natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class I requirements and Geotextile fabrics as required to control drainage and material separation placed and compacted where needed to provide stable support for the structure foundation base. Foundation backfill may include crushed aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. 3. Foundation Base - provides a smooth, level working surface for the construction of the concrete foundation. 4. Foundation Subgrade-the surface of the natural soil which has been excavated and prepared to support the foundation base or foundation backfill, where needed. 5. Over-Excavation - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below the foundation as shown on the Plans. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Excavation and Backfill for Structures under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for construction of structures. B If Excavation and Backfill for Structures is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit for each structure a work plan for excavation and backfill with a complete written description which identifies details of the proposed method of construction and the sequence of operations for construction relative to excavation and backfill activities. The descriptions, with supporting illustrations, shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to the Engineer that the procedures meet the requirements of the Plans and Technical Specifications. C Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D Submit field red lines documenting location of structures as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 07/2006 02317-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment,backfill,back-dressing,and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B Use equipment which will produce the degree of compaction specified. Backfill within 3 feet of walls shall be compacted with hand operated equipment. Do not use equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Use hand operated power compaction equipment where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in accordance with requirements of Section 02220- Site Demolition, as applicable. D Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 - Site Preparation prior to excavation. 07/2006 02317-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES E Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200- Site Preparation F Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.02 EXCAVATION A Perform excavation work so that the underground structure can be installed to depths and alignments shown on Plans Drawings. Use caution during excavation work to avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. Keep excavation to the absolute minimum necessary. No additional payment will be made for excess excavation not authorized by Engineer. B Avoid settlement of surrounding soil due to equipment operations, excavation procedures, vibration, dewatering, or other construction methods. C Prevent voids from forming outside of sheeting. Immediately fill voids with grout, concrete fill, cement stabilized sand, or other material approved by Engineer. D After completion of the structure, remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing unless Engineer has approved in writing that such temporary structures may remain. Remove sheeting,shoring,and bracing in such a manner as to maintain safety during backfilling operations and to prevent damage to the Work and adjacent structures or improvements. E Immediately fill and compact voids left or caused by removal of sheeting with cement stabilized sand or material approved by Engineer. 3.03 DEWATERING A Maintain ground water control as directed by Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water and until the structure is sufficiently complete to provide the required weight to resist hydrostatic uplift with a minimum safety factor of 1.2. B Maintain the ground water surface a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the foundation base. 3.04 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION A Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to planned completion of foundation excavations. Do not place the foundation base until the excavation is accepted by the Engineer. B Excavate to elevations shown on Plans Drawings,as needed to provide space for the foundation base, forming a level undisturbed surface, free of mud or soft material. Remove pockets of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with foundation backfill material or a material as directed by the Engineer. Prior to placing material 07/2006 02317-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES over it,re-compact the subgrade,scarifying as needed,to 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698. If the specified level of compaction cannot be achieved, moisture condition the subgrade and re-compact until 95 percent is achieved,over-excavate to provide a minimum layer of 24 inches of foundation backfill material, or other means acceptable to the Engineer. C Fill unauthorized excessive excavation with foundation backfill material or other material as directed by the Engineer. D Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in a satisfactory,undisturbed condition. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. E Soils which become unsuitable due to inadequate dewatering or other causes, after initial excavation to the required subgrade, shall be removed and replaced with foundation backfill material, as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F Place foundation base, or foundation backfill material where needed, over the subgrade on same day that excavation is completed to final grade. Where base of excavations are left open for longer periods,protect them with a seal slab or cement- stabilized sand. G Where directed by the Plans Drawings,all crushed aggregate,and other free draining Class I materials,shall have a Geo-textile filter fabric separating it from native soils or select material backfill. The fabric shall overlap a minimum of 12 inches beyond where another material stops contact with the soil. H Crushed aggregate, and other Class I materials, shall be placed in uniform layers of 8-inch maximum thickness. Compaction shall be by means of at least two passes of a vibratory compactor. 3.05 FOUNDATION BASE A After the subgrade is properly prepared, including the placement of foundation backfill where needed, the foundation base shall be placed. The foundation base shall consist of a 12-inch layer of crushed aggregate or cement stabilized sand. Alternately, a 4-inch minimum seal slab may be placed. The foundation base shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edge of the structure foundation. B Where the foundation base and foundation backfill are of the same material,both can be placed in one operation. 07/2006 02317-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 3.06 BACKFILL A Complete backfill to surface of natural ground or to lines and grades shown on Plans Drawings. Use existing material that qualifies as select material, unless indicated otherwise. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. B Do not place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until laboratory test breaks indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the specified compressive strength. Where walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls,do not begin backfill operations until the slab or intermediate walls have been placed and concrete has attained sufficient strength. C Remove concrete forms before starting backfill and remove shoring and bracing as work progresses. D Maintain fill material at no less than 2 percent below and no more than 2 percent above optimum moisture content. Place fill material in uniform 8-inch maximum loose layers. Compaction of fill shall be to at least 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 under paved areas. Compact to at least 90 percent around structures below unpaved areas. E Where backfill is placed against a sloped excavation surface, run compaction equipment across the boundary of the cut slope and backfill to form a compacted slope surface for placement of the next layer of backfill. F Place backfill using cement stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests will be performed initially on minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics,in accordance with ASTM D 4318,and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. B In-place density tests of compacted subgrade and backfill will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions: 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 cubic yards of compacted backfill material. 2. A minimum three density tests for each full work shift. 3. Density tests will be performed in all placement areas. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil types or moisture contents are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density. 07/2006 02317-6of7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES C At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be initially performed for each type of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 698. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. D If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02317-7 of 7 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES Section 02318 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation,trenching,foundation,embedment,and backfill for installation of utilities, storm sewers including manholes, pipeline structures and other associated appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 4. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 7. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 9. Section 02370—Geotextile 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight)Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" d. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" e. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" f. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" g. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 5/2013 02318- 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D. Definitions: 1. Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by removal of material. a. Extra Hand Excavation- excavation by manual labor at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. b. Extra Machine Excavation- excavation by machine at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. c. Special Excavation-excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes, ducts, or other structures, not shown on Plans, which interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or augering. Contractor shall be responsible for locating such underground obstructions,sufficiently in advance of trench excavation or augering,to preclude damage to the obstructions. 2. Pipe Foundation-suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Plans, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over- excavations. 3. Pipe Bedding-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 4. Haunching-the material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to spring-line of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 5. Initial Backfill - the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from spring-line of pipe(top of haunching)up to a level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 6. Pipe Embedment - the portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching, and initial backfill. 7. Trench Zone-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. 5/2013 02318-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 8. Trench Conditions - description of the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill,except where structural trench support is necessary. a. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. b. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. 1) Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. 2) Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances,such as sloughing,sliding,boiling,heaving or loss of density. 9. Sub-trench - a special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. 10. Trench Dam - a placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. 11. Over-Excavation and Backfill - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Plans, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. 12. Foundation Backfill Materials - natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geo-textile filter fabrics as required, to control 5/2013 02318-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. 13. Trench Shield(Trench Box)-a portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as work proceeds, used as a Protective System and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in,thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench excavation,embedment,and backfill under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for all excavation and backfill associated with the placement and construction of: underground piping,boxes,manholes and associated appurtenances including conduit, or duct work. B. If Special Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place,without deduction for space occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across trenches excavated under this item. 1. Payment for Special Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Protection of pipes, ducts, or other structures encountered including bracing, shoring, and sheeting necessary for support. c. Replacement of pipes, ducts, or structures damaged by special excavation operations, except where payment for replacement is authorized by Engineer due to deteriorated condition of pipes,ducts,or structure. d. Temporary disconnecting,plugging, and reconnecting of low volume water pipes,to allow machine excavation or augering,when approved by Engineer. Pipe for replacement shall be new and conform to specification requirements for type of existing pipe removed. e. Placement of material from Special Excavation. f. Geo-textile material and concrete trench dams required to complete the placement of material from Special Excavation. g. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Special Excavation. h. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: 5/2013 02318-4of15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Utility piping installed in trenches excavated under this item. c. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. C. If Extra Hand Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Hand Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from Extra Hand Excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Hand Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component.: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. D. If Extra Machine Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Machine Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from extra machine excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Machine Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. 5/2013 02318-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. No payment will be made for delays in completion of Work resulting from Extra Item Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation,backfill placement and compaction, including: 1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. 5. Procedure for installation of Special Shoring at locations identified on the Plans. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D. Submit field red lines documenting location of Utilities as installed, referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 5/2013 02318-6of15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Special Shoring shall be, in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System, designed by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas,At Contractor's expense. B. Special Shoring shall be designed to provide support for the sides of the excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. C. Special Shoring may be a pre-manufactured system or a field fabricated system that meets the requirements of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B. Manufactured materials,such as crushed concrete,may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in the product specification, and approved by the Engineer,provided that the physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. C. Geotextile(Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02370—Geotextile. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed(bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with track mounted excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other Protective Systems or Shoring Systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. 5/2013 02318-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use Special Shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting the Special Shoring design requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Program as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures conform to Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. D. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. E. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation F. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation,manhole, or other structures. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe,conduit,and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Plans. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using the following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter(O.D.). Maximum trench width shall be the minimum trench width plus 24 inches. NOMINAL MINIMUM TRENCH PIPE SIZE,INCHES WIDTH,INCHES Less than 18 O.D. + 18 18 to 30 O.D. +24 Greater than 30 O.D. + 36 5/2013 02318-8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms,pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. 1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation walls will remain fully laterally supported at all times. 2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing the trench wall soil out from behind the trench wall support. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,leave sheeting driven into or below the pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation and embedment materials. Leave rangers,walers,and braces in place as long as required to support sheeting,which has been cut off,and the trench wall in the vicinity of the pipe zone. 4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports,place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. 5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone,do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone 1 inch. Fill voids left on removal of supports with compacted backfill material. G. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield(trench box)is used as a worker safety device, the following requirements apply: 1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely,without damage to the trench sidewalls. 2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction reduced. 5/2013 02318-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding, move the shield as backfill is placed and ramped in. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. 4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a safe manner. 3.03 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.04 PIPE EMBEDMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials,the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place Geotextile,if specified,to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open- graded(Class I)embedment materials or drainage layers. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching and initial backfill to meet requirements indicated on Plans. PVC & HDPE require cement stabilized sand bedding and backfill to one foot below subgrade or below grade if under pavement,or one foot above top of pipe if not under pavement. D. For pipe installation,manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free-fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of the material against undisturbed soil. F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. 5/2013 02318- 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES G. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside the pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit directly on foundation without bedding. Shovel pipe embedment material in place and compact it using pneumatic tampers in restricted spaces,and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted spaces. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of the next lift. 1. Class I embedment materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed the pipe to meet the deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of trench bottom,foundation or trench walls. 2. Class II embedment and cement stabilized sand. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 3 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on the dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. J. Place trench dams in Class I embedments in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.05 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. Backfill placement and compaction shall apply to all soils excavated for the trench especially including any areas that were "benched" or over-excavated in place of trenched shoring. All disturbed soils generated during excavation,whether inside the trench or associated with it, shall be considered to fall under this requirement. 5/2013 02318- 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal of sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above the crown of the pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from the ground surface. C. For sewer pipes,use backfill materials described here as determined by trench limits. As trench zone backfill in paved areas for streets and to one foot back of curbs and pavements,use cement stabilized sand for pipe of nominal sizes less than 36 inches,or Bank Sand for pipe of nominal sizes 36 inches and larger as indicated on the Drawings. Uniformly backfill trenches unless specified otherwise according to the paved area criteria. Use select backfill within one foot below pavement subgrade for rigid pavement. For asphalt concrete,use flexible base material within one foot below pavement subgrade. D. For water lines, backfill in trench zone, including auger pits, with Bank Sand, Select Fill, or Random Fill material as specified in this Section. E. For trench excavations under pavement,place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods indicated below. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. 1. Bank Sand. a. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 3 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698 2. Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction,but not exceeding 24 inches. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on the dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. 3. Select Fill. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698. F. For trench excavations outside pavements,a Random Fill of suitable material may be used in the trench zone. 5/2013 02318- 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1. Fat clays(CH)may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at the Contractor's option. If the required density is not achieved,the Contractor,at his option and at no additional cost to the Owner,may use lime stabilization to achieve compaction requirements or use a different suitable material. 2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12- inch lift thickness for granular soils. 3. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or to same density as adjacent soils. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. 3.06 MANHOLES,JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as shown on the Plans. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control 1. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. On-site stockpiles. c. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials,as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. C. Provide excavation and Trench Safety Systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction. D. Tests will be performed on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 5/2013 02318- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698,and for cement stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. F. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017,and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Testing shall be performed for each lift thickness for different backfill material specified in Item 3.05. 2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work when backfill is placed. 3. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. 7. Re-compacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series, including verification tests. G. Recondition,re-compact,and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For Cement Stabilized Sand with nonconforming density,core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. H. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 5/2013 02318- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. D. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of existing utilities with utility representative. Excavate by hand to locate existing utility, support utility with methods agreed upon by utility representative. All work shall be subsidiary to bid items in Section 00300 Bid Proposal. No additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02318- 15 of 15 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT Section 02330 EMBANKMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Construction of embankments with excess excavated material and borrow. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 6. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 7. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 8. Section 02910—Topsoil 9. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 10. Section 01720—Field Surveying 11. Section 02220—Site Demolition 12. Section 02200—Site Preparation 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" d. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Embankment under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If embankment is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 5/2013 02330- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit field red lines documenting location of embankments as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. D Submit a Trench Safety Plan under the provisions of Section 01570—Trench Safety System that included measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 — 20 USC 654 which states, "Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. C Borrow Material: Conform to requirements of intended use. Take borrow material from sources approved by Engineer. 5/2013 02330-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify borrow and excess excavated materials to be reused, are approved. B Verify removals, and clearing and grubbing operations,have been completed. C Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures, below future grade, is complete. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. E Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to placing embankment or opening borrow source. F Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. G Backfill test pits,or stump holes and other surface irregularities such as small swales with embankment materials and compact in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. H Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials and compacted in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. I Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Do not conduct placement operations during inclement weather or when existing ground or embankment materials exceed 3 percent of optimum moisture content. Contractor may manipulate wet material to facilitate drying,by disking or windrowing, at Contractor's expense. 5/2013 02330-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT B Do not place embankment material until density and moisture content of previously placed material complies with specified requirements. C Scarify areas to receive embankment to a minimum depth of 4 inches to bond existing and new materials. Mix with first layer of embankment material. D Spread embankment material evenly,from dumped piles or windrows,into horizontal layers approximately parallel to finished grade. Place to meet specified compacted thickness. Break clods and lumps and mix materials by blading,harrowing,discing,or other approved method. Each layer shall extend across full width of embankment. E Each layer shall be homogeneous and contain uniform moisture content before compaction. Mix dissimilar abutting materials to prevent abrupt changes in composition of embankment. F Layers shall not exceed depth as indicated on the Plans. G Where shown on Plans for steep slopes, cut benches into slope and scarify before placing embankment. Place increasingly wide horizontal layers of specified depth,to the level of each bench. H Build embankment layers on back slopes,adjacent to existing roadbeds,to level of old roadbed. Scarify top of old roadbed to minimum depth of four inches and re-compact with next layer. I Construct to lines and grades shown on Plans. 3.04 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B Compact to minimum densities shown on the Plans with a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698. 3.05 TOLERANCES A Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B A minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. 5/2013 02330-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT C If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain all embankment areas in good condition until completion of Work. B Repair and re-compact slides, washouts, settlements, areas with loss of density, or excavation damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02330-5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE Section 02335 SUBGRADE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation course of lime and Portland Cement stabilized in situ subgrade material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 01720—Field Surveying 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" f. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. ASTM D 558- Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement-Mixtures. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for subgrade is on a square yard basis. Separate payment will be made for each different required type and thickness of stabilized Subgrade. Limits of measurement shall match actual pavement replaced, but no greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on Drawings. Limits for measurement will be extended to include installed stabilized subgrade material that extends 2 foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where proposed pavement section 5/2013 02335- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE shares common longitudinal or transverse edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be made for stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits. B. Measurement for hydrated lime and quicklime is by the ton of 2,000 pounds dry- weight basis,determined by the area to be covered and the rate of application. Do not include cost of hydrated lime or quicklime in Bid Item for subgrade. C. Measurement for lime slurry is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of lime calculated on the percentage by weight of dry solids for the grade of slurry. Do not include cost of lime slurry in Bid Item for subgrade. D. Measurement for Portland Cement is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of dry weight basis. Do not include cost of Portland Cement in Bid Item for subgrade. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates stating that hydrated lime,commercial lime slurry and quicklime complies with the requirements in this Section. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of lime to Project Site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for rotary speed mixer and compaction equipment for approval. 1.04 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C. Sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be in accordance with Tex-600-J. D. Sample mixtures of Portland Cement, hydrated lime or quicklime in slurry form will be tested to establish compliance with the requirements in this Section. E. Soil will be evaluated to establish percent of hydrated lime,quicklime,or lime slurry to be applied to subgrade material. F. Moisture-density relationship will be established on material sample from roadway, after stabilization, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 5/2013 02335 -2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE G. Soil will be evaluated to establish ratio of cement to soil to obtain desired stability. Normal range is 6 percent to 10 percent by weight. H. The percentage of moisture in soil,at time of cement application,will be determined by ASTM D 558. Moisture will not be allowed to exceed quantity that will permit uniform, complete mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations nor specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture, as determined. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Bagged lime shall bear manufacturer's name, product identification, and certified weight.Bags varying more than 5 percent of certified weight may be rejected;average weight of 50 random bags in each shipment shall not be less than certified weight. B. Store lime in weatherproof enclosures. Protect lime from ground dampness. C. Quicklime can be dangerous; exercise extreme caution if used for the Work. Contractor shall become informed about recommended precautions in the handling, storage and use of quicklime. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER A. Water shall be clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or organic matter. 2.02 LIME A. Type A-Hydrated Lime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium hydroxide or mixture of calcium hydroxide and an allowable percentage of calcium oxide and magnesium hydroxide. B. Type B-Lime Slurry:Liquid mixture consisting essentially of lime solids and water in slurry form. Water or liquid portion shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for purpose intended. C. Type C - Quicklime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium oxide. Furnish quicklime in either of the following grades: 5/2013 02335 -3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 1. Grade DS: Pebble quicklime of a gradation suitable for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. 2. Grade S:Finely-graded quicklime for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. Do not use Grade S quicklime for dry placing. (So called "Blue Lime"is not acceptable.) D. Lime shall conform to following requirements: CHEMICAL COMPOSITION TYPE A B C Active lime content, 90.0 min' 87.0 mine %by weight Ca(OH)2 +CaO - Unhydrated lime content, %by weight CaO 5.0 max - 87.0 min Free water content, %by weight H2O 5.0 max - - SIZING Wet Sieve, as%by weight residue retained: No. 6 0.2 max 0.2 max2 8.0 max' No. 30 4.0 max 4.0 max2 - Dry sieve, as%by weight residue retained: 1-inch - - 0.0 3/4-inch - - 10.0 max Notes: I Maximum 5.0%by weight CaO shall be allowed in determining total active lime content. 2 Maximum solids content of slurry. 3 Total active lime content, as CaO, in material retained on the No. 6 sieve shall not exceed 2.0%by weight of original Type C lime. E. Lime Slurry may be delivered to the Project Site as Commercial Lime Slurry,or may be prepared at the Project Site using Hydrated Lime or Quicklime. The slurry shall be free of liquids other than water and shall be of a consistency that can be handled and uniformly applied without difficulty. 2.03 PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. ASTM C 150 Type I, bulk or sacked. 5/2013 02335-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 2.04 SOIL A. Provide soil consisting of approved material free from vegetation or other objectable matter encountered in existing roadbed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures below future grade is complete. B. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. C. Verify subgrade lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. B. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. C. Cut material to bottom of subgrade using an approved cutting and pulverizing machine meeting following requirements: 1. Cutters accurately provide a smooth surface over entire width of cut to plane of secondary grade. 2. Visible indication that cut is to proper depth. D. Alternatively, scarify or excavate to bottom of stabilized subgrade. Remove material or windrow to expose secondary grade. Correct wet or unstable material below secondary grade by scarifying,adding lime,and compacting. Obtain uniform stability. E. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 LIME SLURRY APPLICATION A. Mix hydrated lime or quicklime with water to form a slurry of the solids content specified. Commercial lime slurry shall have dry solids content as specified. Conform to cautionary requirements in this Section, 1.06C, concerning use of quicklime. 5/2013 02335-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Apply slurry with a distributor truck equipped with an agitator to keep lime and water in a consistent mixture. Make successive passes over measured section of roadway to attain proper moisture and lime content. Limit spreading to an area where preliminary mixing operations can be completed on the same working day. 3.04 PRELIMINARY MIXING A. Do not mix and place material when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. B. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to mix soil,lime,and water to required depth. Obtain a homogeneous friable mixture free of clods and lumps. C. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. D. Seal subgrade as a precaution against heavy rainfall by rolling lightly with light pneumatic rollers. E. Cure soil-lime material for 1 to 4 days. Keep subgrade moist during cure. 3.05 FINAL MIXING A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to uniformly mix cured soil and lime to required depth. B. Add water to bring moisture content of soil mixture to a minimum of optimum or above. C. Mix and pulverize until all material passes a 1 inch sieve; a minimum of 90 percent, excluding non-slaking fractions,passes a 3/4-inch sieve;and a minimum of 65 percent excluding non-slaking fractions passes a No. 4 sieve. D. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. E. Do not expose hydrated lime to open air for more than 6 hours during interval between application and mixing. Avoid excessive hydrated lime loss due to washing or blowing. 3.06 MIXING - PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Do not place and mix cement when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place Portland Cement base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. 5/2013 02335 -6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Spread cement uniformly on soil at rate specified by laboratory. When bulk cement spreader is used,position it by string lines or other approved method to ensure uniform distribution of cement. Apply cement only to area where operations can be continuous and completed in daylight,within 1 hour of application. Amount of moisture in soil at time of cement placement shall not exceed quantity that will permit uniform mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations. Do not exceed specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture. C. Do not allow equipment other than that used in spreading and mixing, to pass over freshly spread cement until it is mixed with soil. D. Dry mix cement with soil after cement application. Continue mixing until cement has been sufficiently blended with soil to prevent formation of cement balls when water is applied. Mixture of soil and cement that has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes. E. Immediately after dry mixing is complete, uniformly apply water as necessary and incorporate it into mixture. Pressurized equipment must provide adequate supply to ensure continuous application of required amount of water to sections being processed within 3 hours of cement application. Ensure proper moisture distribution at all times. After last increment of water has been added, continue mixing until thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. F. Ensure percentage of moisture in mixture,based on dry weights,is within 2 percentage points of specified optimum moisture content prior to compaction. When uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain indicating that average moisture content exceeds tolerance given at time of final compaction,reconstruct entire section in accordance with this Section at no additional cost to City. 3.07 COMPACTION - LIME SUBGRADE A. Aerate or sprinkle to attain optimum moisture content as determined by Testing Laboratory. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. B. Start compaction immediately after final mixing, unless approved by Engineer. C. Spread and compact in two or more approximately equal layers where total compacted thickness is to be greater than 8 inches. D. Compact with approved heavy pneumatic or vibrating rollers, or a combination of tamping rollers and light pneumatic rollers. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until entire depth is uniformly compacted. E. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and re-compacting. 5/2013 02335 -7 of l0 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE F. Compact to following minimum densities at a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Plans: 1. Areas to receive pavement without subsequent base course:Minimum density of 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Areas to receive subsequent base course: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. G. Seal with approved light pneumatic tired rollers: Prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and re-compact at areas where hair line cracking develops. H. Contractor shall conduct operations to minimize elapsed time between mixing and compacting stabilized subgrade in order to take advantage of rapid initial set characteristics. Complete compaction within 2 hours of commencing compaction and not more than 6 hours after adding and mixing the last stabilizing agent. 3.08 COMPACTION-PORTLAND CEMENT SUBGRADE(ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Prior to beginning compaction,ensure mixture is in loose condition for its full depth. Uniformly compact the loose mixture to specified density, lines and grades. B. After soil and cement mixture is compacted,apply water uniformly as needed and mix thoroughly. Then reshape surface to required lines, grades and cross section and lightly scarify to loosen imprints left by compacting or shaping equipment. C. Roll resulting surface with pneumatic-tired roller and "skin" surface with power grader. Thoroughly compact mixture with pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture,as needed. When aggregate larger than No.4 sieve is present in mixture, make one complete coverage of section with flat-wheel roller immediately after skinning operation. When approved by Project Manager, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure, provided dense uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. Maintain moisture content of surface material at its specified optimum during finishing operations. Compact and finish surface within period not to exceed 2 hours,to produce smooth, closely knit surface,free of cracks, ridges, or loose material, conforming to crown, grade and line shown on Drawings within period not to exceed 2 hours. 3.09 CURING A. Moist cure for a minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course,or opening to traffic. Time may be adjusted as approved by Engineer. Subgrade may be opened to traffic after 2 days if adequate strength has been attained to prevent damage.Restrict traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles weighing less than 10 tons. 5/2013 02335-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep surface knit together. C. Place base, surface, or seal course within 14 days after final mixing and compaction unless prior approval is obtained from Engineer. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16 foot length. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A minimum of three phenolphthalein test will be made at random locations per 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth, place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at random locations near depth determination tests. Three tests will be performed for each 1000 foot roadway section. Rework and re-compact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no cost to the Owner. 3.12 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. Fill test pits with new compacted lime stabilized subgrade. C. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. D. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.13 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized Subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until placement of base or surface course. B. Protect the asphalt membrane, if used, from being picked up by traffic. 5/2013 02335 -9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE C. Repair settlements, areas with loss of density, or areas of subgrade damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner by replacing and re-compacting material to full depth. D. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02335- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER METERS Section 02511 WATER METERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Water meters for customer service, including submeters (i.e., cooling tower meters, sewer credit meters, etc.), for fire service in sizes 5/8 inch through 10 inches. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment 2. Section 02510—Water Mains 3. Section 02541 —Water and Wastewater Line Valves 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of water meters furnished by the Owner is on an each basis for each meter type and size. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of water meters furnished by the Owner as indicated on Plans. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A Water meters shall be furnished by the Owner. 2.02 CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS A Connections: Provide pipe in accordance with Section 02510 — Water Mains, restrained joints only. B Fittings: Restrained ductile iron; push-on bell joints or mechanical joint fittings outside of meter vault installations; Class 125 flanged inside meter vaults; cement mortar lined and sealed. 2.03 LAYING LENGTHS A The minimum length (with 1 inch tolerance) for meter and standard strainer shall be shown as indicated on the detail drawing for water meters. 03/2008 02511 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER METERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 TAPPING AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION A Refer to Section 02541 —Water and Wastewater Line Valves for tapping requirements. END OF SECTION 03/2008 02511 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY Section 02514 FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fire hydrants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 4. Section 02635 —Steel Pipe and Fittings 5. Section 02534—PVC Pipe 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Association of Corrosion Engineers(NACE) 5. Food and Drug Administration(FDA) 6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 7. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 8. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of fire hydrants is on a per each basis,complete in place. Payment includes all valves,fittings,bedding,backfill,and thrust blocking required for the installation of the fire hydrant assembly. B If fire hydrant leads are included as a Bid Item, measurement will be on a linear foot basis. Separate payment will be made for open cut and augered leads. C Measurement for removing and salvaging of fire hydrants is on a per each basis. Payment includes removing hydrant and valve if available, plugging lead, and removing materials from site or returning salvaged fire hydrants to Owner. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 06/2014 02514- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 1. Shop drawing(s) for proposed hydrant: Include model number,parts list,and material specifications, unique drawing number and descriptive legend identifying hydrant. 2. Material safety data sheets for lubricants. 3. Affidavit of compliance for coating materials. 4. Certified hydraulic performance test report for proposed hydrant. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDRANT MATERIALS A Hydrants: AWWA C502; dry barrel design; tamper resistant; same manufacturer throughout project. 1. 0-Ring Seal Packing: Prevent water leakage between barrel and lubrication chamber. Provide dynamic seals of Buna "N" or other oil resistant material and static seals of Buna "N" or other approved synthetic rubber. 2. Bronze: Hydrant components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 8 percent lead. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer:Mueller Super Centurian 250,American Darling B- 84-B, or East Jordan Iron Works WaterMaster 5CD250. B Operating Stems: Everdur, or other high-quality non-corrodible metal where threads are located in barrel or waterway. Bronze-to-bronze working parts in waterway; genuine wrought iron or steel where threads are not located in barrel or waterway, bronze bushed at penetration of stuffing box; seal threads against contact with water regardless of open or closed position of main valve. Connect operating stems with breakable coupling. C Main Valve (shut-off valve): Circular; compression-type; closes with line pressure; minimum opening of 5-1/4 inches in diameter. Seal bottom end of stem threads from contact with water with cap nut. D Valve Mechanism: Bronze valve seat ring threaded into bronze drain ring; seat ring and main valve assembly removable from above ground through upper barrel with lightweight seat removal wrench;breakable stem coupling opposite barrel breakaway; bronze or corrosion-resistant pins and locking devices; bronze valve stem sleeve, 0- ring seals and travel stop; sealed lubricating reservoir at top and bottom which fully lubricates threads and bearing surfaces when opening or closing main valve; thrust bearing or lubricated thrust collar for operating assembly. Lubricants: Food Grade. Valve Seat: Molded "Natural" rubber; scale durometer rating of 90 ±5; minimum thickness of 1/2 inch. Natural Rubbers: Resistant to microbiological attack. E Lower Hydrant Barrel: Single piece coupled to upper barrel to allow 360°rotation of upper barrel. Bury Length: Distance from bottom of inlet to ground line as specified. Ground Line: Clearly marked on barrel. Indicate inside diameter and wall thickness (with tolerances)for upper barrel,lower barrel,and bonnet sections. Show dimensions at minimum sections to demonstrate compliance with Paragraph 3.2.6 of AWWA C502. 06/2014 02514-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY F Extensions: Permit use of one or more standard extensions available from manufacturer in lengths from 6 inches to 60 inches in 6 inch increments. G Provide hydrants with automatic, positively operating, non-corrodible drain or drip valve to drain hydrant completely when main valve is shut. Bronze or corrosion resistant drain line. Tapping of drain holes is not required. H Inlet Connection: Elbow with AWWA Standard bell designed for 6-inch mechanical joint,restrained push-on,or flanged joint and valves. Flanged ends shall comply with ANSI/ASME B16.1, class 125 flanges. Joints: ANSI A21.11; AWWA C111. I Operating Nut and Hold-down Nuts: Stainless steel or cast or ductile iron with bronze inserts or, as an alternative,provide security device with bronze operating nut. Any such security devices shall not require special tools for normal off/on operation of hydrant. Fabricate hold-down assemblies of suitable metallic materials for service intended. J Field-Replaceable Nozzles: NFPA No. 194,ANSI B26-1925;mechanically attached to hydrant body counterclockwise; sealed with 0-rings and mechanically located into place; provide two hose nozzles with 2-1/2 inch nominal inside diameter and one pumper nozzle with 4.492"nominal inside diameter;National Standard Threads;lock in place with security device. K Pumper Nozzle: Allow a minimum unobstructed radius of 10 inches from threaded surface of nozzle throughout path of travel of wrench or other device used to fasten hose to nozzle. L Nozzle Caps: Security chains to hydrant barrel,minimum 1/8 inch diameter;"Natural" rubber or neoprene gasket seals. M Hydrant shoe with 6-inch cast or ductile-iron pipe diameter inlet, flanged, swivel or slip joint with harnessing lugs for restrained joints. Underground flanging shall incorporate minimum of six, full, 3/4-inch stainless steel bolts or four 5/8-inch diameter stainless steel bolts. All bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel. N Provide traffic model hydrants equipped with safety flange on hydrant barrel and stem. Equip body of hydrant with breakable flange,or breakable bolts,above finish grade. O Lubricants: Food grade oil or grease meeting requirements of FDA 21CFR178.3570 and manufactured with FDA approved oxidation inhibitors. P Hydrant Painting: 1. COLOR CODE(BONNETS) Main Size 6" and less Gloss White Code No 225A120 8" Safety Orange Code No 225A122 10"and 12" John Deere Green Code No 225A133 16"and 20" John Deere Yellow Code No 225A138 22"and up Safety Red Code No 225A123 06/2014 02514-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 2. COLOR CODE Fire Hydrant Barrel Safety Blue Code No 225A120 Fire Hydrant Caps (Same as Bonnet Color) Q Shop coated as follows: 1. Exterior Above Traffic Flange(including bolts and nuts) a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10(NACE 2);near white blast cleaned surface. b. Fire hydrants shall be power coated with zinc rich primer followed by a polyester powder coating of 10 to 12 mils, shall meet all the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-550 (latest edition) and AAMA 2604. 2. Exterior Below Traffic Flange: a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10(NACE 2);near white blast cleaned surface. b. Fire hydrants shall be power coated with zinc rich primer followed by a polyester powder coating of 10 to 12 mils, shall meet all the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C-550 (latest edition) and AAMA 2604. 3. Interior Surfaces Above and Below Main Valve: a. All materials used for internal coating of hydrant interior ferrous surfaces must conform to ANSI/NSF Standard 61 as suitable for contact with potable water as required by TCEQ, Chapter 290, Subchapter D: Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems. b. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10(NACE 2);near white blast cleaned surfaces. c. Coating: Powder coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 4. General Coating Requirements: a. Coatings: Applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No requirements of this specification shall cancel or supersede written directions and recommendations of specific manufacturer so as to jeopardize integrity of applied system. b. Hydrant supplier shall furnish an affidavit of compliance that all materials and work furnished complies with requirements of this specification and applicable standards referenced herein. 2.02 HYDRANT PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A Hydraulic Performance Standards: 1. Provide hydrants capable of a free discharge of 1500 gpm or greater from single pumper nozzle at a hydrant inlet static pressure not exceeding 20 PSIG as measured at or corrected to hydrant inlet at its centerline elevation. 2. Provide hydrants capable of a discharge of 1500 gpm or greater from single pumper nozzle at a maximum permissible head loss of 8.0 psig (when 06/2014 02514-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY corrected for inlet and outlet velocity head)for an inlet operating pressure not exceeding 37 psig as measured at or corrected to hydrant inlet at its centerline elevation. B Hydraulic Performance Testing: AWWA C502; conduct certified pressure loss and quantity of flow test by qualified testing laboratory on production model(5-foot bury length)of hydrant(same catalog number)proposed for certification. Submit certified test report containing following information: 1. Date of test, no more than five years prior to date of proposed use, on fire hydrant with similar hydraulic characteristics. 2. Name, catalog number, place of manufacture, and date of production of hydrant(s)tested. 3. Schematic drawing of testing apparatus, containing dimensions of piping elements including: a. Inside diameter and length of inlet piping. b. Distance from flow measuring points to pressure measurement point. c. Distance from flow and pressure monitoring points to hydrant inlet. d. Distance from pressure monitoring point to nozzles. e. Inside diameter and length of discharge tubing. 4. Elevation of points of measurement, inlet, and reports, or certificates documenting accuracy of measuring devices used in test. 5. Conduct test on at least three separate hydrants of same fabrication design. Inlet water temperature: 70° F+ 5° F. C Provide hydrants equipped with breakable barrel feature and breakable valve stem coupling such that vehicular impact will result in clean and complete break of barrel and valve stem at breakable feature. Provide hydrant shutoff valve which remains closed and tight against leakage upon impact. 2.03 LEADS A Branches(Leads): Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02635 — Steel Pipe and Fittings, Section 02534 — PVC Pipe, and section 02532W - HDPE. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Set fire hydrant plumb and brace at locations and grades as shown on Plans. When barrel of hydrant passes through concrete slab, place a piece of standard sidewalk expansion joint material, 3/4 inch thick, around section of barrel passing through concrete. B Locate nozzle centerline minimum 18 inches above finish grade. C Place 12-inch x 12-inch yellow indicators (plastic, sheet metal, plywood, or other material approved by Engineer)on pumper nozzles of new or relocated fire hydrants 06/2014 02514-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY installed on new mains not in service. Remove indicators after new main is tested and approved by Engineer. D Do not cover drain ports when placing concrete thrust block. E Lubricate hydrants with food grade oil or with grease meeting requirements of FDA 21CFR178.3570 and manufactured with FDA approved oxidation inhibitors. F Accomplish replenishment of lubricant for hydrant working parts without removing hydrant bonnet. Store lubricant system in reservoir. Lubricate bearing surfaces and working parts during normal operation of fire hydrant. G All changes in profile from approved plans due to obstructions not shown on plans which require a change in depth of bury of fire hydrant shall be approved in writing by Engineer for design prior to installation of hydrant. Any adjustment required in flow line of water main or to barrel length of fire hydrant shall be incidental to unit price of fire hydrant and no separate payment shall be made for such adjustments. H Remove and dispose of or salvage fire hydrants shown on Plans. I Owner may,at any time prior to or during installation of hydrants for a specific project, randomly select a furnished hydrant for disassembly and laboratory inspection, at Owner's expense,to verify compliance with Owner's requirements. If such hydrant is found to be non-compliant, replace at Contractor's expense, all or a portion of furnished hydrants with hydrants that comply with Owner's requirements. J Install leads in accordance with Section 02510—Water Mains. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02514-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION Section 02515 WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tapping existing mains and furnishing and installing new service lines for water. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2737,"Standard Specification for polyethylene(PE)Plastic Tubing" 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C800 Standard Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings b. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12" for Water Distribution D Definitions: 1. Short Side Connection - service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside water meter box, to water main on same side of street. 2. Long Side Connection - service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside water meter box,to water main on opposite side of street or from center of streets where supply main is located in street center such as boulevards and streets with esplanades. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of 1 inch water taps and service lines is on a per each basis. Separate measurements will be made for "Short Side" and "Long Side" connections. B Measurement for installation of 2 inch water taps and service lines is on a per each basis. Separate measurements will be made for "Short Side" and "Long Side" connections. C Payment for installation of water taps and service lines includes locating water main, tap installation and connection to meter,restoring site,excavation,bedding,backfill, compaction, push-under, etc., and all other labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 06/2014 02515- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Polyethylene Tubing - SDR 9 CTS. B Corporation Stops: AWWA C800 as modified herein: 1. Inlet End: AWWA standard thread. 2. Valve Body: Tapered plug type,0-ring seat ball type,or rubber seat ball type. 3. Outlet End: Compression type fitting for use with type-K, soft copper as well as CTS. C Provide taps for various water main types and sizes in accordance with following schedule: PIPE TAPPING SCHEDULE WATER MAIN SERVICE SIZE TYPE AND DIAMETER 1" 2" 4" Cast Iron or Ductile DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Iron 4" Asbestos Cement WBSS DSS, WBSS 4" PVC (AWWA DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS C900) 6" and 8" Cast Iron or DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Ductile Iron 6" and 8" Asbestos DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Cement 6" and 8" Cast Iron or DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Ductile Iron 6" and 8" PVC DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS (AWWA C900) 12" Cast Iron or Ductile DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Iron 12" Asbestos Cement DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS 12" PVC (AWWA DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS C900) 16" and Up Cast Iron or DWBSS DWBSS Ductile Iron 06/2014 02515-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 16" and Up Asbestos DWBSS DWBSS Cement 16" and Up PVC DWBSS DWBSS (AWWA C900) DSS—Dual Strap Saddles WBSS —Wide Band Strap Saddles DWBSS—Dual Wide Band Strap Saddles *Mueller H-15092, or equal D Dual Strap Saddles: Red brass body and straps; ductile-iron; vinyl-coated body and straps; or ductile-iron,vinyl-coated body and stainless-steel straps. E Taps for PVC Water Mains: Use dual-strap or single,wide-band strap saddles which provide full support around circumference of pipe and bearing area of sufficient width along axis of pipe, 2 inches minimum, ensuring that pipe will not be distorted when saddle is tightened. Romac Series l O1N wide-band,stainless-steel tapping saddle with AWWA standard thread (Mueller thread)or equal. F Taps for Steel Pipe: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Engineer. Use saddle only if tap is approved on steel pipe. G Curb Stops and Brass Fittings: All Brass fittings shall be lead free conforming to the latest EPA's guideline. AWWA C800 as modified herein. 1. Inlet End: Compression-type fitting. 2. Valve Body: Straight-through or angled,meter-stop design equipped with the following: a. 0-Ring seal straight plug type. b. Rubber seat ball type. 3. Outlet End: Female, iron-pipe thread or swivel-nut, meter-spud thread on 1 inch stops and 2-hole flange on 2 inch sizes. 4. Fittings:Ford or approved equal;use same size open end wrenches and tapping machines as used with respective Ford fittings. 5. Factory Testing of Brass Fittings: a. Submerge in water for 10 seconds at 85 psi with stop in both closed and open positions. b. Reject any fitting that shows air leakage. Owner may confirm tests locally. Entire lot from which samples were taken will be rejected when random sampling discloses unsatisfactory fittings. H Angle Stops: In accordance with AWWA C800; ground-key, stop type with bronze lock-wing head stop cap; inlet and outlet threads conform to application tables of AWWA C800; and inlets compression connection. 1. Outlet for 1-inch size: Meter swivel nut with saddle support. 2. Outlet for 2 inch size: 0-ring sealed meter flange, iron pipe threads. I Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C800 and: 1. Castings: Smooth, free from burrs, scales, blisters, sand holes, and defects which would make them unfit for intended use. 06/2014 02515-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 2. Nuts: Smooth cast and have symmetrical hexagonal wrench flats. 3. Thread fittings, of all types, shall have N.P.T. or AWWA threads, and male threaded ends shall be protected in shipment by plastic coating or other equally satisfactory means. 4. Compression tube fittings shall have Buna-N beveled gasket. 5. Stamp of manufacturer's name or trademark and size on body. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Set service taps at right angles to proposed meter location and locate taps in upper pipe segment within 45 degrees of pipe springline unless otherwise approved by Engineer. B For service lines and lateral connections larger than those allowed in this Section,Part 2.01 C,branch connections must be used. C All 2-inch and smaller service taps on pressurized water mains: Use tapping machine manufactured for pressure tapping purposes. D Install service lines in open-cut trench in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities except that service lines under all paved roadways, other paved areas and areas indicated on Plans shall be installed in bored hole as specified in this Section. E Unless otherwise approved by Engineer,lay service lines with minimum of 30 inches of cover as measured from top of curb or, in absence of curbs, from centerline elevation of crowned streets or roads. Provide minimum of 18 inches of cover below flow line of all ditches to service lines,unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Service lines across existing street(push-unders): Pull service line through prepared hole under paving. Only full lengths of tubing will be used. Take care not to damage tubing when pulling it through hole. A compression-type union is only permitted if Contractor cannot span underneath pavement with a full length of tubing. Contractor is allowed one compression-type union for each full length of tubing,provided it is not under the pavement. G Maintain service lines free of dirt, coupons and foreign matter at all times. H Install service lines per City of Pearland. Standard Details. I Locate water meters in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details. Contact Engineer when major landscaping or trees conflict with service line and meter box location. No additional payment will be made for work on customer side of meter. J Joints 1. Minimum joint spacing for 1 inch tubing shall be in multiples of 60 feet and for 2 inch tubing shall be in multiples of 40 feet. 06/2014 02515 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 2. Cut tubing squarely by using an approved cutting tool and avoiding excessive pressure on the cutting wheels which might bend or flatten pipe walls. 3. For compression fittings,cut tubing squarely prior to insertion into the fitting. Final assembly shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure. K Bends 1. Gradual changes in direction may be made by bending PE pipe. The bending radius should not be less than the coil radius when bending with the coil. 3.02 CURB STOP INSTALLATION A Set curb stops or angle stops at outer end of service line inside of meter box. Secure opening in curb stop to prevent unwanted material from entering. In close quarters, make an "S" curve in the field. No flattening of tube. In all 1-inch services, install meter coupling,swivel-nut,or curb stop ahead of meter. Install straight meter coupling on outlet end of meter. 3.03 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A Open trench for proposed service line in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Install curb stop on meter end of service line. C With curb stop open and prior to connecting service line to meter in slack position, open corporation stop and flush service line thoroughly. Close curb stop, leaving corporation stop in full-open position. D Check service line for apparent leaks. Repair any leaks before proceeding. E Call Project Representative to schedule inspection prior to backfilling. After inspection, backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. F Install meter box centered over meter with top of lid 3-inches above finished grade for grasses or landscaped areas,and flush with finished grade for paved areas. Meter box: Refer to Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02515-5 of 6 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Section 02520 VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES,AND METER VAULTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Valve boxes for water service. B Meter boxes for water service. C Meter vaults for water service. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for valve boxes under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B No separate payment will be made for installation of meter boxes furnished by the Owner under this Section. Include cost of installation of meter boxes in Bid Items for which the Work is a component. C Measurement for installation of meter vaults is on a per each basis for each meter vault type and size,complete in place. Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for following items for approval: 1. Each type of valve box and lid. 2. Each type of meter box and cover. 3. Each type of meter vault frame and cover. 06/2014 02520- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS C Submit Shop Drawings for cast-in-place meter vaults for approval if proposed construction varies from Plans. D Submit manufacturer's certification that meter boxes purchased for Work meet the requirements of this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE BOXES A Provide adjustable, cast-iron, screw-type, valve boxes as manufactured by Bass and Hays Foundry,Inc.,or approved equal. Design of valve box shall minimize stresses on valve imposed by loads on box lid. B Cast the word"WATER" into lid, 1/2 inch in height and raised 3/32 inch, for valves serving potable water lines. C Provide 6-inch PVC, Class 150, DR 18, riser pipes. D Concrete for valve box placement: 1. For locations in new concrete pavement,use strength and mix design of new pavement. 2. For other locations, use class "A" concrete, with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi,conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 2.02 METER BOXES A Refer to City of Pearland Standard Details or contact the Public Works Department for list of acceptable products. 2.03 METER VAULTS A Meter vaults may be constructed of precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or solid masonry unless a specific type of construction is required by Plans. B Concrete for meter vaults: Class A concrete, conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete,with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. C Vaults for meters 3" and greater shall be procured through the City's utility billing department. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 06/2014 02520-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS A Obtain approval from the City Engineer or designee for location of meter vault. B Verify lines and grades are correct. C Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults. 3.02 VALVE BOXES A Provide riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover indicated on Plans or to accommodate actual finish grade. B Install adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in a vertical position. Provide 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end,and interior contact flange of valve box,for vertical movement damping. Riser may rest on valve flange, or provide suitable footpiece to support riser pipe. C Paint covers of new valve boxes as directed by the Owner. 3.03 METER BOXES A Install plastic boxes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Construct concrete meter boxes to dimensions shown on Plans. C Adjust top of meter boxes to conform to cover elevations specified in this Section, 3.05 "Frame and Cover for Meter Vaults". D Do not locate under paved areas unless approved by Engineer. Use approved traffic- type box with cast iron lid when meter must be located in paved areas. 3.04 METER VAULTS A Construct concrete meter vaults to dimensions and requirements shown on Plans.Do not cast in presence of water. Make bottom as uniform as practicable. B Precast Meter Vaults: 1. Install precast vaults in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set level on a minimum 3 inch thick bed of sand conforming to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 2. Seal lifting holes cement-sand mortar or non-shrink grout. C Meter Vault Floor Slab: 1. Construct floor slabs of 6-inch-thick reinforced concrete. Slope floor 1/4 inch per foot toward sump. Make sump 12 inches in diameter,or 12 inches square, and 4 inches deep, unless other dimensions are required by Plans. Install dowels at maximum of 18 inches,center-to-center,or install mortar trench for keying walls to floor slab. 2. Precast floor slab elements may be used for precast vault construction. 06/2014 02520-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS 3.05 FRAME AND COVER FOR METER VAULTS A Diamond Plate Aluminum as follows: 1. In unpaved areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 2 to 3 inches above natural grade. 2. In sidewalk areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 1/2 to 1 inch above adjacent concrete. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises B Backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C In unpaved areas, slope backfill around meter boxes and vaults to provide a uniform slope 1 to 5 from top to natural grade. D Meter boxes are not allowed in sidewalk. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02520-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Section 02530 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gravity sanitary sewers and appurtenances, including cleanouts, stacks, service connections, and reconnections. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 02415—Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 7. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220—Site Demolition 10. Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises C Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" c. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" d. ASTM F 679,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series)" h. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" i. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)" 4/2013 02530- 1 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS k. ASTM F 714, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter" 1. ASTM D 2657, "Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining and Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings" m. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" n. ASTM D 3350,"Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" o. ASTM D 3681, "Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition" p. ASTM D 4161, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" q. ASTM D 3262, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe" r. ASTM D 3754, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe" s. ASTM D 618, "Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing" t. ASTM C 828, "Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines" u. ASTM C 924, "Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method" v. ASTM F 1417,"Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air" 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C 900 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pressure Pipe,4"— 12"for Water Distribution b. AWWA C 905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. 3. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) a. PPI TR3,"Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 5. Texas Administrative Code (TAC) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement of pipe installed at depths 8-feet and less by open cut method is on a linear foot basis,measured and complete in place. Measurement will be taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes,except for pipe in casing or augered installation. B Payment includes sewer pipe, excavation, bedding, backfill and special backfill, shoring, earthwork, connections to existing manholes and pipe, stacks, cleanouts, 4/2013 02530-2 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS accessories, inspection and testing. Depths beyond 8' will be paid by 2 vertical feet increments. C Refer to Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers for measurement and payment of augered sewer pipe. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit inspection reports,testing reports,and video tape of television inspections as directed by Engineer. C Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for Gravity Sanitary Sewer construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied facilities or adjacent property. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Qualifications. Gravity Sanitary Sewer shall be watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections. Perform testing in accordance with this Section and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B Regulatory Requirements. 1. Install Gravity Sanitary Sewer to meet the minimum separation distance from any potable water line,as scheduled below. The separation distance is defined as the distance between the outside of the water pipe and the outside of the sewer pipe. When possible,install new Gravity Sanitary Sewers no closer to water lines than 9 feet in all directions. Where this separation distance cannot be achieved,new Gravity Sanitary Sewers shall be installed as specified in this Section. 2. Make notification to the Engineer if water lines are uncovered during Gravity Sanitary Sewer installation where the minimum separation distance cannot be maintained. 3. Lay Gravity Sanitary Sewers lines in straight alignment and grade. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Inspect pipe and fittings upon arrival of materials at the Project Site. 4/2013 02530-3 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS B Handle and store pipe materials and fittings to protect them from damage due to impact,shock,shear,or free fall. Do not drag pipe and fittings along the ground. Do not roll pipe unrestrained from delivery trucks. C Use mechanical means to move or handle pipe. Employ acceptable clamps, rope or slings around the outside barrel of pipe and fittings. Do not use hooks,bars,or other devices in contact with the interior surface of the pipe to lift or move lined pipe 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GASKET MATERIAL FOR USE IN POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED AREAS A Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer,shall have the following Gasket Material for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum(diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE A Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4° F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout, free of voids, cracks, inclusions, and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. All pipe used for gravity sanitary sewer shall be green. C Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. When no contaminant is identified,use elastomeric factory-installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. D Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble,non-toxic, non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 4/2013 02530-4 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS E PVC Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipe shall be green in color and shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER STIFFNESS SIZE OPTIONS DESIGNATION (MIN.) RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D 3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" CertainTeed Can-Tex Approved F 679 SDR 26/PS 115 18"to 48" Carlon Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Diamond Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14"to 36" Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F 949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" Eli Ultra-Rib included in F 794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" the Bid Lamson Vvlon Schedule F 794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to a maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-sewer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. F When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F 679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. G For Gravity Sanitary Sewers up to 12 inch diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation,provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. H Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477, or ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477, shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. I Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sanitary sewer bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied,either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tees,wye fittings,or solvent welds are not acceptable. 2.03 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE(HDPE)SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE A Provide HDPE pipe as follows and only when listed as a Bid Item: WALL PRODUCT ASTM PIPE DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS RANGE (MIN) (INCHES) Solid Wall Drisco 1000 Drisco 8600 Approved F 714 115 psi 8 to 10 Quail Pipe 4/2013 02530-5 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Poly Pipe Plexco B Solid wall pipe shall be produced with plain end construction for heat joining (butt fusion)conforming to ASTM D 2657. Utilize controlled temperatures and pressures for joining to produce a fused leak-free joint. C Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material meeting the requirements of Type III,Class C,Category 5,Grade P34,as defined in ASTM D1248. Material meeting the requirements of cell classification in accordance with ASTM D 3350 are also suitable for making pipe products under these specifications. D Gaskets: 1. Use gaskets meeting requirement of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into a circular form or extruded to the proper section and then spliced into circular form. When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of a properly cured, high-grade elastomeric compound. The basic polymer shall be natural rubber, synthetic elastomer, or a blend of both. E Lubricant. Use a lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no detrimental effect on the gasket or on the pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,holes,foreign inclusions,or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. 2.04 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST FIBERGLASS PIPE A Manufacturers 1. Pre-approved manufacturer for centrifugally cast fiberglass pipe is Hobas Pipe USA, Inc. B Materials 1. Resin Systems: The manufacturer shall use only polyester resin systems with a proven history of performance in this particular application. The historical data shall have been collected from applications of a composite material of similar construction and composition as the proposed product. 2. Glass Reinforcements: The reinforcing glass fibers used to manufacture the components shall be of highest quality commercial grade glass filaments with binder and sizing compatible with impregnating resins. 3. Fillers: Silica sand or other suitable materials may be used. 4. Additives: Resin additives,such as pigments,dyes,and other coloring agents, if used, shall in no way be detrimental to the performance of the product nor shall they impair visual inspection of the finished products. 5. Rubber Gaskets: Supply from an approved gasket manufacturer in accordance with ASTM F 477, when no contaminant is identified and suitable for the service intended. Gaskets shall either be affixed to the pipe by means of a 4/2013 02530-6 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS suitable adhesive or shall be installed in such a manner so as to prevent the gasket from rolling out of the pre-cut groove in the pipe or sleeve coupling. 6. The internal liner resin shall be suitable for service as sewer pipe,and shall be highly resistant to exposure to sulfuric acid as produced by biological activity from hydrogen sulfide gases. Pipe shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D 3681. C Pipes 1. Furnish pipes in the diameters specified and within the tolerances specified below. 2. Manufacture pipe by the centrifugal casting process to result in a dense, nonporous, corrosion-resistant, consistent composite structure to meet the operating conditions as shown on the Plans. 3. Do not use stiffening ribs or rings. D Couplings: Unless otherwise specified, the pipe shall be field connected with fiberglass sleeve couplings that utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets as the sole means to maintain joint watertightness. The joints must meet the performance requirements of ASTM D 4161. E Fittings: Flanges, elbows, reducers, tees, and other fittings shall be capable of withstanding operating conditions when installed. They may be contact molded or manufactured from mitered sections of pipe joined by glass fiber reinforced overlays. F Manhole Connections: Provide a water stop flange (wall pipe) for connection to a cast-in-place manhole base or other structure. G Grout Ports: Provide grout ports in the wall of pipe when required. Provide plugs of 316 stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with the pipe. Grout port plugs shall be designed and installed to meet the test pressure of the pipe. H Dimensions 1. Diameters:The actual outside diameter of the pipes shall be in accordance with Table 3 of ASTM D 3262 for Gravity Sanitary Sewers, or ASTM D 3754 for force mains. 2. Lengths: The pipe standard length will be approximately 20 feet. A maximum of 10 percent of the lengths,excluding special order pipes,may be supplied in random lengths. 3. Wall Thickness: The minimum average wall thickness shall be the stated design thickness. The minimum single point thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the stated design thickness. 4. End Squareness: Pipe ends shall be square to the pipe axis. 5. Tolerance of Fittings: The tolerance of the angle of an elbow and the angle between the main and leg of a wye or tee shall be plus or minus 2 degrees. The tolerance on the laying length of a fitting shall be plus or minus 2 inches. I Stiffness Classes 4/2013 02530-7 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. Stiffness class of FRP pipe shall satisfy design requirements,but shall not be less than 46 psi, when used in direct bury operation; 36 psi, when installed within a primary tunnel liner. 2. Stiffness class of FRP in a pipe jacking operation shall be governed either by the ring deflection limitations or by a pipe design providing longitudinal strength required by the jacking method and shall satisfy design requirements stated below. Submit design calculations as required in Paragraph 1.05, Submittals. a. Pipe stress calculations based on jacking loads shall be provided by the pipe supplier. b. Ring deflection calculations shall conform to design requirements of 30 TAC Chapter 317.20 pertaining to flexible pipe used in Gravity Sanitary Sewers. The pipe deflection calculations shall ensure that predicted deflection will be less than 5 percent under long-term loading conditions(soil prism load) for the highest density of soil overburden and surcharge loads. Deflection on calculations shall be prepared using long-term (drained) values for soil parameters contained in the geotechnical investigation report for the Project,or other site-specific data obtained by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer. J Testing 1. Pipes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 3262 or ASTM D 3754,as applicable,except that the factory hydrostatic pressure testing is not required. 2. Joints: Coupling joints shall be qualified per the tests of Section 7 of ASTM D 4161. K Packaging, Handling, and Shipping 1. Packing, handling, and shipping should be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. L Installation 1. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with requirements of this Section. 2. The manufacturer must supply a suitable qualified field service representative to be present periodically during the installation of pipe. 3. Pipe Bedding: Conform to requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 4. Pipe Handling: Use textile slings. 5. Jointing a. Clean ends of pipe and coupling components. b. Check pipe ends and couplings for damage. Correct any damage found. c. Coupling grooves must be completely free of dirt. d. Apply joint lubricant to pipe ends and rubber seals of coupling. Use only lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer. e. Use suitable auxiliary equipment, such as a wire rope puller, to pull joints together. 4/2013 02530-8 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS f. Do not exceed forces recommended by the manufacturer for coupling pipe. If excessive force is required,remove coupling,determine source of problem, and correct it. g. In the process of jointing the pipe,do not allow the deflection angle to exceed the deflection permitted by the manufacturer. 6. If pressure grouting of the pipe is conducted as part of a pipe jacked tunnel installation,seal the grout holes with liner resin to a thickness equal to the pipe liner thickness, or with a threaded plug for that purpose. 7. Tests: Conform to requirements of this Section. 2.05 INSPECTIONS A The Engineer reserves the right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing. Such inspection shall in no way relieve the manufacturer of the responsibilities to provide products that comply with the applicable standards and these Specifications. B Manufacturer's Notification to Customer. Should the Engineer wish to witness the manufacture of specific pipes, the manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with adequate advance notice of when and where the production of those specific pipes will take place. C Failure to Inspect. Approval of the products or tests is not implied by the Engineer's decision not to inspect the manufacturing,testing, or finished pipes. 2.06 TEST METHODS A Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests are subject to approval by the Engineer. When referee tests are required,condition the specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6 degrees F(23 degrees C plus or minus 2 degrees C)and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under the same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. B Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.05A, in a suitable press until the internal diameter has been reduced to 40 percent of the original inside diameter of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and at 2-inches per minute. The test specimens,when examined under normal light and with the unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of the pipe walls or bracing profiles. C Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except replace the shear load transfer bars and supports with 6 inch wide support blocks that can be either flat or contoured to conform to the pipe's outer contour. D Purpose of Tests. The flattening and the joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine quality control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance. 4/2013 02530-9 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 2.07 MARKING A Mark each standard and random length of pipe in compliance with these Specifications with the following information: 1. Pipe size 2. Pipe class 3. Production code 4. Material designation 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition,as applicable. 3.02 DIVERSION PUMPING A Install and operate required bulkheads, plugs, piping, and diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow and to prevent backup or overflow. Obtain approval for diversion pumping equipment and procedures from the Engineer. B Design piping,joints and accessories to withstand twice the maximum system pressure or 50 psi, whichever is greater. C No sewage shall be diverted into any area outside of the sanitary sewer. D In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the overflow and take action to clean up and disinfect spillage. Promptly notify the Engineer so that required reporting can be made to the TCEQ and the Environmental Protection Agency by the Engineer. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A Acceptance testing of sanitary sewers including: 1. Visual inspection of sewer pipes 2. Mandrel testing for flexible sewer pipes. 3. Leakage testing of sewer pipes. 4. Leakage testing of manholes. B Performance Requirements: 1. Gravity sanitary sewers are required to have a straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes. 4/2013 02530- 10 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 2. Flexible pipe,including"semi-rigid"pipe,is required to show no more than 5 percent deflection. Test pipe no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of a line segment but prior to final acceptance using a standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances. 3. Maximum allowable leakage for Infiltration or Exfiltration a. The total exfiltration,as determined by a hydrostatic head test,shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole or 2 feet above the groundwater elevation, whichever is greater. b. When pipes are installed more than 2 feet below the groundwater level, an infiltration test shall be used in lieu of the exfiltration test. The total infiltration shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Groundwater elevation must be at least 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole. c. Refer to Table 2530-1,Water Test Allowable Leakage,at the end of the Section, for measuring leakage in sewers. Perform leakage testing to verify that leakage criteria are met. 4. Perform air testing in accordance with requirements of this Section and the Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission requirements. Refer to Table 02530-2, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, Table 02530-3,Minimum Testing Times for Low Pressure Air Test,and Table 02530-4,Vacuum Test Time Table, at the end of this Section. C Gravity Sanitary Sewer Quality Assurance: 1. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified requirements when tested. 2. Provide testing reports and video tape of television inspection as directed by Engineer. 3. Upon completion of tape reviews by Engineer, Contractor will be notified regarding final acceptance of the sewer segment. D Sequencing and Scheduling: 1. Perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear feet of installed sewer remains untested at any one time. 2. Coordinate testing schedules with Engineer. Perform testing under observation of Engineer. E Deflection Mandrel: 1. Mandrel Sizing. The rigid mandrel shall have an outside diameter(O.D.)equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter(I.D.)of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. 2. Mandrel Design. The rigid mandrel shall be constructed of a metal or a rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. The 4/2013 02530- 11 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS mandrel shall have nine or more"runners"or"legs"as long as the total number of legs is an odd number. The barrel section of the mandrel shall have a length of at least 75 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow a reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. A proving ring shall be provided and used for modifying each size mandrel. 3. Proving Ring. Furnish a"proving ring"with each mandrel. Fabricate the ring of 1/2 inch thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to a diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel diameter. 4. Mandrel Dimensions (5 percent allowance). Average inside diameter and minimum mandrel diameter are specified in Table 02530-5,Pipe vs. Mandrel Diameter,at the end of this Section. Mandrels for higher strength,thicker wall pipe or other pipe not listed in the table may be used when approved by the Engineer. F Exfiltration Test: 1. Water Meter: Obtain a transient water meter from the City for use when water for testing will be taken from the City system. Conform to City requirements for water meter use. 2. Test Equipment: a. Pipe plugs. b. Pipe risers where the manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe or service lead. G Infiltration Test: 1. Test Equipment: a. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir. b. Pipe plugs. H Low Pressure Air Test: 1. Minimum Requirement for Equipment: a. Control panel. b. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel. c. Pneumatic plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external bracing. d. Air hoses from control panel to: 1) Air supply. 2) Pneumatic plugs. 3) Sealed line for pressuring. 4) Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure. 2. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place a pneumatic plug in each end of a length of pipe on the ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig;then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are acceptable if they remain in place against the test pressure without external aids. I Ground Water Determination: 4/2013 02530- 12 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation determination. J Visual Inspection: 1. Check pipe alignment visually by flashing a light between structures. Verify if alignment is true and no pipes are misplaced. In case of misalignment or damaged pipe,remove and re-lay or replace pipe segment. K Mandrel Testing: 1. Perform deflection testing on flexible and semi-rigid pipe to confirm pipe has no more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D 3034. Perform testing no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment, but prior to final acceptance testing of the line segment. 2. Pull the approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Replace any section of sewer not passing the mandrel. Mandrel testing is not required for stubs. 3. Retest repaired or replaced sewer sections. L Leakage Testing: 1. Test Options: a. Test Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods,as appropriate, or with low pressure air testing. b. Test new or rehabilitated sanitary sewer manholes with water or low pressure air. Manholes tested with low pressure air shall undergo a physical inspection prior to testing. c. Leakage testing shall be performed after backfilling of a line segment, and prior to tie-in of service connections. d. If no installed piezometer is within 500 feet of the sewer segment, Contractor shall provide a temporary piezometer for this purpose. 2. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure: a. Where ground water exists,install a pipe nipple at the same time sewer line is placed. Use a 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10 inches long. Make the installation through manhole wall on top of the sewer line where line enters manhole. b. Immediately before performing line acceptance test,remove cap,clear pipe nipple with air pressure,and connect a clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically and allow water to rise in the tube. After water stops rising, measure height in feet of water over invert of the pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 feet/psi to determine the ground water pressure to be used in line testing. 3. Exfiltration test: a. Determine ground water elevation. b. Plug sewer in downstream manhole. c. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. d. Install riser pipe in outgoing pipe of upstream manhole if highest point in service lead (house service) is less than 2 feet below bottom of manhole cone. 4/2013 02530- 13 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS e. Fill sewer pipe and manhole or pipe riser,if used,with water to a point 2-1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or ground water table,whichever is highest. f. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to determine drop of water surface, in inches, over a one-hour period, and calculate water loss (1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons)or measure the quantity of water required to keep water at same level. Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to Table 02530-1 at the end of this Section. 4. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2.0 feet above highest point of sewer pipe or service lead(house service). a. Determine ground water elevation. b. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. c. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole. d. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes. e. Take five readings of accumulated volume over a period of 2 hours and use average for infiltration. The average must not exceed that calculated for 2 hours from allowable leakage according to the Table 02530-1 at the end of this Section. 5. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 828,ASTM C 924, or ASTM F 1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 02530-2. a. Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 36- inch average inside diameter. b. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be tested at each joint. The minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch during a joint test shall be 10 seconds, regardless of pipe size. c. For pipe sections less than 36-inch average inside diameter: 1) Determine ground water level. 2) Plug both ends of pipe. For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow 2 hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug concrete pipe. 3) After a manhole-to-manhole section of sanitary sewer main has been sliplined and prior to any service lines being connected to new liner, plug liner at each manhole with pneumatic plugs. 4) Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of ground water over highest point in system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to 4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground water table). Refer to Table 02530-2 at the end of this Section. 5) To determine air loss, measure the time interval for pressure to drop to 2.5 psig. The time must exceed that 4/2013 02530- 14 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS listed in the Table 02530-2 at the end of this Section for pipe diameter and length. For sliplining, use diameter of carrier pipe. 6. Retest: Any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements shall be repaired and retested. M Test Criteria Tables 1. Exfiltration and Infiltration Water Tests: Refer to Table 02530-1,Water Test Allowable Leakage, at the end of this Section. 2. Low Pressure Air Test: a. Times in Table 02530-2, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, at the end of this Section, are based on the equation from TCEQ Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems: 317.2(a)(4)(B). T=0.0850(D)(K)/(Q) Where: T = Time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch gauge in seconds K = 0.000419 DL, but not less than 1.0 D = Average inside diameter in inches L = Length of line of same pipe size in feet Q = Rate of loss, 0.0015 ft3/min./sq. ft. internal surface b. Since a K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as given in Table 02732-3, Minimum Testing Times for Low Pressure Air Test. Notes: 1. When two sizes of pipe are involved,the time shall be computed by the ratio of lengths involved. 2. Line with a 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at each joint. 3. Lines with an average inside diameter greater than 36 inches must be air tested for leakage at each joint 4. If the joint test is used, a visual inspection of the joint shall be performed immediately after testing. 5. For joint test, the pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than the pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe. Once the pressure has stabilized, the minimum times allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be 10 seconds. N Leakage Testing for Manholes 4/2013 02530- 15 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. After completion of manhole construction,wall sealing,or rehabilitation,but prior to backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using hydrostatic or vacuum testing procedures. 2. Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably-sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test; follow manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs a minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being dislodged if lines entering manhole have not been backfilled. 3. Vacuum testing: a. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust for proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following manufacturer's instructions and safety precautions,inflate sealing element to the recommended maximum inflation pressure; do not over-inflate. b. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury(Hg), disconnect pump, and monitor vacuum for the time period specified in Table 02530-4, Vacuum Test Time Table. c. If the drop in vacuum exceeds 1 inch Hg over the specified time period tabulated above,locate leaks,complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Hydrostatic exfiltration testing shall be performed as follows: a. Seal wastewater lines coming into the manhole with an internal pipe plug. Then fill the manhole with water and maintain it full for at least one hour. b. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour. c. If water loss exceeds amount tabulated above, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.04 BACKFILL A Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Backfill the trench in specified lifts only after pipe installation is approved by the Engineer. 3.05 CLEAN UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. 4/2013 02530- 16 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain gravity sanitary sewer installations in good condition until completion of the work. Table 02530-1 WATER TEST ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE DIAMETER OF VOLUME PER INCH OF DEPTH ALLOWANCE LEAKAGE* RISER OR STACK IN INCHES INCH GALLONS PIPE SIZE IN GALLONS/MINUTE INCHES PER 100 FT. 1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039 2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053 2.5 4.9087 .0212 10 0.0066 3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079 4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099 5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118 6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138 8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0518 27 0.0177 30 0.0197 36 0.0237 42 0.0276 For other diameters, multiply square of diameters by Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch value for 1"diameter inside diameter per mile per 24 hours * Allowable leakage rate shall be reduced to 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours,when sewer is identified as located within the 25-year flood plain. 4/2013 02530- 17 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS TIME ALLOWED FOR PRESSURE LOSS FROM 3.5 PSIG TO 2.5 PSIG Pipe Min. Length Time for Specification Time for Length(L)Shown(min:sec) Diam Time for Min. LongerLene h (in) (min:sec) Time(ft) (see) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft 6 5:40 398 0.8548 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33 8 7:33 298 1.5196 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:36 15:12 10 9:27 239 2.3743 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11.52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45 12 11:20 199 3.4190 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39 28:30 31:20 34:11 15 14:10 159 5.3423 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43 31:10 35:37 40:04 44:31 48:58 53:25 18 17:00 133 7.6928 17:00 19:14 25:39 32:03 38:28 44:52 51:17 57:42 64:06 70:31 76:56 21 19:50 114 10.4708 19:50 26:11 34:54 43:38 52:21 . 61:05 69:48 78:32 87:15 95:59 104:42 24 22:40 99 13.6762 22:48 34:11 45:35 56:59 68:23 . 79:47 91:10 102:34 113:58 125:22 136:46 27 25:30 88 17.3089 28:51 43:16 57:42 72:07 86:33 100:58 115:24 129:49 144:14 158:40 173:05 30 28:20 80 21.3690 35:37 53:37 71:14 89:02 106:51 124:39 142:28 160:16 178:05 195:53 213:41 31:10 72 25.8565 43:06 64:38 86:11 107:44 129:17 150:50 172:23 193:55 215:28 237:01 258:34 Table 02530-3 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST PIPE MINIMUM LENGTH FOR TIME FOR DIAMETER TIME MINIMUM TIME LONGER LENGTH (INCHES) (SECONDS) (FEET) (SECONDS) 6 340 398 0.855 (L) 8 454 298 1.520(L) 10 567 239 2.374 (L) 12 680 199 3.419(L) 15 850 159 5.342 (L) 18 1020 133 7.693 (L) 21 1190 114 10.471 (L) 24 1360 100 13.676(L) 27 1530 88 17.309 (L) 30 1700 80 21.369 (L) 33 1870 72 25.856 (L) 4/2013 02530- 18 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-4 VACUUM TEST TIME TABLE TIME IN SECONDS BY PIPE DIAMETER DEPTH IN FEET 48" 60" 72" 4 10 13 16 8 20 26 32 12 30 39 48 16 40 52 64 20 50 65 80 24 60 78 96 * 5.0 6.5 8.0 *Add T times for each additional 2-foot depth. (The values listed above have been extrapolated from ASTM C 924-85) 4/2013 02530- 19 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-5 PIPE VS. MANDREL DIAMETER NOMINAL AVERAGE MATERIAL AND SIZE I.D. MINIMUM MANDREL WALL CONSTRUCTION (INCHES) (INCHES) DIAMETER(INCHES) PVC-Solid(SDR 26) 6 5.764 5.476 8 7.715 7.329 10 9 646 9.162 PVC-Solid(SDR 35) 12 11.737 11.150 15 14.374 13.655 18 17.629 16.748 21 20.783 19.744 24 23.381 22.120 27 26.351 25.033 PVC-Profile(ASTM F 794) 12 11.740 11.153 15 14.370 13.652 18 17.650 16.768 21 20.750 19.713 24 23.500 22.325 27 26.500 25.175 30 29.500 28.025 36 35.500 33.725 42 41.500 39.425 48 47.500 45.125 HDPE-Profile 18 18.000 17.100 21 21.000 19.950 24 24.000 22.800 27 27.000 25.650 30 30.000 28.500 36 36.000 34.200 42 42.000 39.900 48 48.000 45.600 54 54.000 51.300 60 60.000 57.000 Fiberglass-Centrifugally Cast 12 12.85 11.822 (Class SN 46) 18 _ 18.66 17.727 20 20.68 19.646 24 24.72 23.484 30 30.68 29.146 36 36.74 34.903 42 42.70 40.565 48 48.76 46.322 54 54.82 52.079 60 60.38 57.361 END OF SECTION 4/2013 02530-20 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS Section 02531 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of service stubs on new sanitary sewers serving areas where sanitary sewer service did not previously exist. B Reconnection of existing service connections along parallel, replacement, or rehabilitated sanitary sewers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" c. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for single, near-side service leads is on a per each basis, complete in place. B Measurement for double, near-side service leads is on a per each basis, completed in place. C Measurement for single,far-side service leads is on a per each basis,complete in place. D Measurement for double, far-side service leads is on a per each basis, complete in place. 02/2008 02531 - 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS E Payment for service leads includes service connections, couplings, clean-outs, adapters, disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. F Measurement for sanitary sewer stacks up to 3 vertical feet is on a per each basis, complete in place. Payment includes riser pipe,service connections,couplings,clean- outs, adapters, disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. G Measurement for extra depth sanitary sewer stacks greater than 3 vertical feet is on a vertical foot basis from the top of the receiving sewer to the invert of the service connection, measured and complete in place. Payment includes excavation, pipe, bedding, and backfill for that portion of the stack in excess of 3 feet. H Measurement for sanitary sewer service reconnections with stacks located within 5 feet of the sanitary sewer main centerline shall be per each reconnection,complete in place. I Measurement for sanitary sewer service reconnections without stacks located within 5 feet of the sanitary sewer main centerline shall be per each reconnection,complete in place. J Payment for sanitary sewer service reconnections includes include service connections, couplings, clean-outs, adapters disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. K Augered pipe for service leads will be paid as provided in Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewer. L One or more connections discharging into a common point are considered one service connection. The Contractor shall not add service reconnections without approval of the Engineer. The Engineer may require reconnections to be moved or relocated to avoid having more than two single family units per reconnection. M Measurement for abandonment of service connection is on a per each basis. No additional payment will be made for abandonment of service connection unless excavation is required beyond new or replacement sewer or service lead trench zone. No separate payment will be made for excavation of sanitary sewer services within the new or replacement sewer trench. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product data for each pipe product, fitting, coupling and adapter. C Submit field red lines documenting location of sanitary sewer stubs and reconnections as installed,referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760 02/2008 02531 -2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. Record the exact distance from each service connection to the nearest downstream manhole. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC SERVICE CONNECTION A As stubouts, use PVC sewer pipe, 4-inch through 10-inch, conforming to ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 3034, with a cell classification of 12454-B. The SDR (ratio of diameter to wall thickness) shall be 26 for pipe 10 inches in diameter or less. B PVC pipe shall be gasket jointed with gasket conforming to ASTM D3212. C Provide service connection pipe in sizes shown on the Plans. For reconnection of existing services, select service connection pipe diameter to match existing service diameter. D Provide a 6-inch service connection when more than one service discharges into a single pipe. E Connect service pipes to new parallel or replacement sewer mains with prefabricated, full-bodied tee or wye fittings conforming to specifications for the sewer main pipe material as specified in other Sections for all sewers up to 18 inches in diameter. F Where new sewers are installed using pipe augering or tunneling, or where the new sewer is greater than 18 inches in diameter, use Fowler"Inserta-Tee" to connect the service to the new sewer main. 2.02 PIPE SADDLES A Use pipe saddles only on rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains. Comply with Paragraph 2.01E for new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains. 02/2008 02531 -3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 2.03 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS A For connection between new PVC pipe stubout and existing service;4-, 6-,or 8-inch diameter, use flexible adapter coupling consisting of a neoprene gasket and stainless steel shear ring, with 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps: 1. Fernco Pipe Connectors, Inc., Series 1055 with shear ring SR-8; 2. Band Seal by Mission Rubber Co., Inc.; 3. Approved equal. B For connection between new PVC pipe stub out and new service,use rubber-gasketed adapter coupling: 1. GPK Products, Inc., IPS & Sewer Adapter. 2. Approved Equal. 2.04 STACKS A Provide stacks for service connections wherever the crown of the sewer is 8 feet or more below finished grade. B Construct stacks of the same material as the sanitary sewer and as shown on the Plans. C Provide stacks of the same nominal diameter at the sanitary service line. 2.05 CLEAN-OUTS A Install clean-outs at property line on each service connection as shown in detail on the Plans. 2.06 PLUGS AND CAPS A Seal the upstream end of unconnected sewer service stubs with rubber gasketed plugs or caps of the same pipe type and size. Provide plugs or caps by GPK Products, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Accurately field locate service connections, whether in service or not, as pipe laying progresses from downstream to upstream. B Properly disconnect existing connections from the sewer and reconnect to the new sewer, as described in this Section. C Reconnect service connections, including those that go to unoccupied or abandoned buildings, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Plug the service connection at the R.O.W. for vacant lots. 02/2008 02531 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS D Connect services 8 inches in diameter and larger to the sewer by construction of a manhole. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to customers whose sanitary sewer service will potentially be interrupted. D Schedule Work so that reconnection of service lines can be completed within 24 hours after disconnection. E Where sewers are existing,field locate existing service connections,whether in service or not. Use existing service locations for reconnection of service lines to new liner or new sanitary sewer main. F For new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains, complete testing and acceptance of downstream sewers as applicable. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.04 RECONNECTION ON NEW SEWER A Install the new service connection on the new sanitary sewer main for each service connection. B Remove and replace cracked, offset or leaking service line for up to 5 feet,measured horizontally, from the centerline of the new sanitary sewer main. C Make up the connection between the new main and the existing service line using PVC sewer pipe and approved couplings, as shown on the Plans. D Test service connections before backfilling. E Embed the service connection and service line as specified for the new sanitary sewer main at this location, and as shown on the Plans. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 02/2008 02531 -5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 3.05 INSTALLATION OF NEW SERVICE LEADS A Install the new service connections on the new sanitary sewer main for each service connection. Provide the length of stub indicated on the Plans. Install plug or cap on the upstream end of the service stub as needed. B Test service connections before backfilling. C Embed the service connection and service line as specified for the new sanitary sewer main at this location, and as shown on the Plans. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Test service reconnections and service stubs. Follow applicable procedures given in Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all installations good condition until completion of Work. B Replace installations by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. C Do not allow sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02531 -6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE Section 02534 PVC PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for water distribution in nominal diameters 4 inches through 16 inches. B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sanitary sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches through 48 inches. C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and force mains in nominal diameters 4 inches through 36 inches. D. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02533 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 7. Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 8. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 9. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities E. Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12"for Water Distribution. b. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. c. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" 05/2013 02534- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE c. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" d. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM F 679,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" h. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series)" i. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup(Falling Weight)" k. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" 3. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) a. ANSI A21.10 Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water. b. ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for PVC pipe under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains,Gravity Sanitary Sewer,and Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. 05/2013 02534-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of this Section and AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 for pressure pipe applications,or the appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe has been hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 and this Section. C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Furnish copies of test reports to the Engineer for review. Cost of testing shall be borne by Contractor or Supplier. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout,free of voids,cracks,inclusions,and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. C. For PVC pressure pipe used for water mains,provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters'Laboratories mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines. D. Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric factory- installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. 2. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants. 05/2013 02534-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer E. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic, non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 2.02 WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWAC900, Class 150, DR 18; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameters. B. Pipe 16-inch: AWWA C905; Class 235; DR 18; nominal 20 foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameter. C. Joints: ASTM D 3139; push-on type joints in integral bell or separate sleeve couplings. Do not use socket type or solvent weld type joints. D. Make curves and bends by deflecting the joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for review by the Engineer. E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C900, AWWA C905, ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); at point of manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification. 2.03 BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A21.10, ductile iron; ANSI A21.11 single rubber gasket push-on type joint; minimum 150 psi pressure rating. B. Coatings and Linings: Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.04 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: 05/2013 02534-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS(MIN.) SIZE RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" _ CertainTeed Approved F679 SDR 26/PS 115 18"to 48" Can-Tex Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Carlon Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14"to 36" Diamond Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" included in the ETI Ultra-Rib Bid Schedule F794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" Lamson Vylon F794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to maximum depth of 10' only. *** For water-seer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. B. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. C. For sewers up to 12-inch-diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. D. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. E. ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477 shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable. 2.05 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE A. Provide PVC pressure pipe conforming to the requirements for water service pipe,and conforming to the minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot,containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use EBAA Iron Series 2000PV, Uniflange Series 1350 restrainer,or equal joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13,for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less. 05/2013 02534-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per this Section,2.03 "Bends and Fittings for PVC Pressure Pipe", except furnish all fittings with one of the following internal linings: 1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248,heat fused to the interior surface of the fitting,as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe "Polybond", or U.S. Pipe "Polyline". 2. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)polyurethane,Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals, Inc. 3. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)ceramic epoxy,Protecto 401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile iron fittings as required by Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap. E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with this Section, 2.02E. F. Manufacturers: Approved manufacturers of pressure rated, solid wall PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains are: 1. J&M Manufacturing Company, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Diamond Plastics Corporation 4. Carlon Company 5. North American Pipe Corporation(NAPCO) 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or harmful chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains, Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers,Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,and Section 02630— Storm Sewers. B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, ASTM D 2321, and manufacturer's recommendations. 05/2013 02534-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Water service pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller: Installed to clear utility lines and have minimum 4 feet of cover below lowest property line grade of street,unless otherwise required by Plans. D. For water service,exclude use of PVC within 200 feet(along the public right-of-way) of underground storage tanks or in undeveloped commercial acreage. Underground storage tanks are primarily located on service stations but can exist at other commercial establishments. E. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle the pipe when lowering pipe into trench. F. Hand shovel pipe bedding under the pipe haunches and along the sides of the pipe barrel and compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. END OF SECTION 05/2013 02534-7 of 7 (This page is intentionally left blank) 11 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES Section 02540 TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tapping sleeves and valves for connections to existing water system. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02541 —Water&Wastewater Line Valves 4. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults 5. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02318—Excavation&Backfill for Utilities C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C 110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of tapping sleeves and valves is on a per each basis. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation as indicated on Plans. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's affidavit that all valves purchased for tapping of existing waterlines conform to Section 02541 — Water & Wastewater Line Valves and to applicable requirements of AWWA C500 and that they have been satisfactorily tested in accordance with AWWA C500. 02/2008 02540- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping Sleeve Bodies: Stainless steel; in two sections to be bolted together with high-strength,corrosion-resistant,low-alloy,steel bolts;mechanical joint ends. a. 12 inch and smaller: stainless steel; JCM 432, Romac, or approved equal. b. 16 inch and larger: epoxy coated ductile iron;JCM,or approved equal. 2. Branch Outlet of Tapping Sleeve: Flanged; machined recess;AWWA C207, Class D,ANSI 150 lb drilling. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to preclude rolling or binding during installation. 3. Where fire service from 6-inch main is approved, use cast iron split sleeve. B Tapping Valves: Meet all requirements of Section 02541 —Water&Wastewater Line Valves with following exceptions: 1. Inlet Flanges: a. AWWA C110; Class 125. b. AWWA C 110; Class 150 and higher: Minimum eight hole flange. 2. Outlet: Standard mechanical or push-on joint; to fit any standard tapping machine. 3. Valve Seat Opening: Accommodate full-size shell cutter for nominal size tap without any contact with valve body; double disc. 4. Open Left operation only. C Valve Boxes: Furnish and install according to Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Install tapping sleeves and valves at locations and of sizes as shown on Drawings. B Thoroughly clean tapping sleeve, tapping valve and pipe prior to installation and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C Hydrostatically test installed tapping sleeve to 150 psig for a minimum of 15 minutes. Inspect sleeve for leaks, and remedy leaks prior to tapping operation. D When tapping concrete pressure pipe, size on size, use shell cutter one standard size smaller than waterline being tapped. E Do not use Large End Bell(LEB)increasers with a next size tap unless existing pipe is asbestos-cement. 02/2008 02540-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 3.02 INSTALLATION A Tighten bolts in proper sequence so that undue stress is not placed on pipe. B Align tapping valve properly and attach it to tapping sleeve. C Make tap with sharp, shell cutter: 1. For 12-inch and smaller tap,use minimum cutter diameter one-half inch less than nominal tap size. 2. For 16-inch and larger tap,use manufacturer's recommended cutter diameter. D Withdraw coupon and flush all cuttings from newly-made tap. E Wrap completed tapping sleeve and valve in accordance with Section 02512 — Polyethylene Wrap. F Place concrete thrust block behind tapping sleeve (NOT over tapping sleeve and valve). G Block under valve using concrete blocks. H Request inspection of installation prior to backfilling. I Backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation&Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02540-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES Section 02541 WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 1.0 GENERAL LO1 SECTION INCLUDES A Gate valves, Plug Valves, Butterfly Valves, Air Release and Pressure Reducing Valves. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittal Procedures 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" b. ASTM B 763,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for Valve Applications" c. ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings" d. ASTM D 429,"Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates" e. ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 240,"Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications" h. ASTM A 276, "Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes" i. ASTM B 584,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications" j. ASTM A 313,"Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 Resilient-seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems c. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants d. AWWA C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves 04/2009 02541 - 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for valves under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Stipulated Price(Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract,payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 and this Section,and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A Gate Valves: AWWA C500, AWWA C509 or C515 and additional requirements of this Section.Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults,aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, use gate valves as line valves for sizes less than 16-inches. If type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C Gate Valves 1-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; single-wedge; disc type; screwed ends; such as Crane No. 428, or approved equal. D Coatings for Gate Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C550; Indurall 3300 or approved equal, non-toxic,imparts no taste to water,functions as physical,chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E Gate Valves 2 Inches in Diameter: Iron body,double gate,non-rising stem, 150-pound test, 2 inch square nut operating clockwise to open. 04/2009 02541 -2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES F Gate Valves 4 Inches to 12 Inches in Diameter: Non-directional, resilient seated (AWWA C509 or AWWA C515) or parallel seat double disc (AWWA C500), 200 psig, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide resilient seated valves manufactured by American Darling AFC-500, US Pipe Metroseal 200, or approved equal. Provide double disc valves manufactured by American Darling 52, Clow F-6102, or approved equal. Comply with following requirements: 1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. 2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts.Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. 3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. 4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number 995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2 inches of 12 percent, non-rising. 5. 0-rings: AWWA C509, sections 2.2.6 and 4.8.2. 6. Stem Seals: Consist of three 0-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar. 7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 8. Resilient Wedge: Molded,synthetic rubber,vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or exceed ASTM D 429, Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. 9. Bolts: AWWA C509 Section 4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. G Gate Valves 16 Inches to 24 Inches in Diameter: AWWA C500 by Mueller;push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified,double disc, 150 psi, and comply with the following: 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. Equip with rollers,tracks, and scrapers. 2. Stems: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. 3. Stem Seals: Consist of one 0-ring above and one 0-ring below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. 4. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely peened into machined dovetailed grooves. 6. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. 04/2009 02541 -3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 7. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on,cast iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for imposed forces. 8. Gear Cases: Cast iron;furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or 0- rings at shaft openings. 9. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. H Gate Valves 20 Inches and Larger: Furnish and equip with bypass valves. 1. Sizes: Provide 3-inch bypass valves for 16-inch through 20 inch gate valves. Provide 4-inch bypass valves for 24-inch gate valves. I Valves 4 Inches through 12 Inches for Installation in Vertical Pipe Lines: 1. Double disc, square bottom. J Valves 14 Inches and Larger for Installation in Horizontal Pipe Lines: 1. Equipped with bronze shoes and slides. K Gate Valves Installed at Greater than 4 foot Depth: 1. Provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade. L Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service)Type Meter Installations: 1. Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; carry label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.;flanged,Class 125;clockwise to close. M Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS A Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Conform to AWWA C504, except as modified or supplemented herein. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or approved equal. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans,butterfly valves shall be used for line valve sizes 16 inch and larger. If type of valve is specified, no substitute will be allowed. C Butterfly valves shall be short-body,flanged design and installed at locations as shown on Plans. D Direct-bury valves,valves in subsurface vaults. Above-ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise. E Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. F Butterfly Valves and Actuators(Additional Requirements for Large-Diameter Water Mains): Valves larger than 72 inches in diameter shall have all components designed 04/2009 02541 -4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES so that the allowable stresses at rated pressure shall not exceed one-third of the yield strength or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of the material used. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or equal. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE CONSTRUCTION A Valves: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125 lb. B Discs for Butterfly Valves: Either cast iron or ductile iron. C Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically retained by stainless steel(18-8)retaining ring held in place by stainless steel(18-8) cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc, seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless-steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316,stainless steel and secured to disc by mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. D Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve,including disc,with epoxy suitable for potable-water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and epoxy application: In accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. Provide two coats of two-component, high-build epoxy with minimum dry thickness of 10 mils. Epoxy coating: Indurall 3300 or approved equal. Coatings shall be holiday tested and measured for thickness. E Valve shaft and keys,dowel pins,or taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc: Type-304 or 316 stainless steel. Shaft Bearings: Stainless steel,bronze,nylon, or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load) in accordance with AWWA C504. F Packing: Field-adjustable, split-V type, and replaceable without removing operator assembly. G Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other approved method, to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects. H Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to the pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow, except where shown otherwise on Plans. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION A Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second, and, unless otherwise shown on Plans, equip with geared manual actuators. Provide 04/2009 02541 -5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type, or worm-gear type for valves 24 inches and smaller. B Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C Provide valve shaft extended from valve to actuator. Space between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no moving parts are exposed to soil or elements. D Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves,specifically designed for buried service or submerged service when located in valve vaults,and factory packed with suitable grease. E Install a valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only. F Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly. G Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators so that a torque of 150 foot-pounds, or less,will operate valve at most adverse condition for which valve is designed.Vertical axis of actuating nut shall not move as valve is opened or closed. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A Provide standard adjustable valve boxes only conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. 2.06 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES A For large-diameter water mains, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Plans conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes. 2.07 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A Air Release Valves: Apco No. 200, GA Industries Fig. 2-AR, or equal. Materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast iron; float and leverage mechanism, ASTM A 240 or A276 stainless steel;orifice and seat,stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Plans. B Air Release and Vacuum Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Plans. 1. For 2 inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet sizes as shown on Plans and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure. Valve materials: body, cover and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron;plug or poppet,ASTM A 276 stainless steel;float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Buna-N; other valve internals, stainless steel. Valve exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with potable 04/2009 02541 -6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES water. Provide Apco Model 145C or 147C, Val-Matic Series 200, or equal valves. 2. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Plans, provide Apco Series 1700 with No. 200 air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. AR/GH- 21K/280,or equal. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover,ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat,Type-304, stainless steel and Buna-N;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air Release Valves. C Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged inlet and outlet connections as shown on Plans. Provide air release valves in combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Plans. Valve shall open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi. Provide Apco Series 1500 with a No. 200A air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. HCARV, or approved equal. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A 313, Type-304, stainless steel;bushing,ASTM B 584 bronze,copper alloy 932;retaining screws,ASTM A 276, Type-304, stainless steel. D Air Release Valve Vault as detailed in Plans. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A Provide Cla-Val Model 90-01, or approved equal, PRV with strainer in location and arrangement as shown on Plans. Valve body: ASTM A 48,cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with ANSI B 16.1, Class 125, flanges. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron. Valve internals: Type-303, stainless steel or B-62 bronze. Rubber parts: Buna-N. No leather parts shall be allowed. Resilient seat shall have rectangular cross section. B Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with "Y" strainer. C PRV: Equip with valve position indicator. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with 60 psi downstream pressure. D Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Plans. Strainer body: quick- opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ANSI B 16.1, Class 150, flanges. Basket: Type-304, stainless steel. Provide Hayward Model 90, or equal, for PRV 4- inch through 24-inch. Provide Hayward Model 510, or equal, for PRV 14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate the use of smaller strainer housing. E Pilot Systems for PRV: Adjustable and pressure sustaining. F Valve Box: Valve Box conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter boxes, and Meter Vaults. 04/2009 02541 -7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Plans. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C For pipe section of each valve box,use only cast iron,ductile iron,or DR 18 PVC pipe cut to proper length. Size to allow future operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Plans. 3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A Perform disinfection and testing of valves and appurtenances as required by Section 02510—Water Mains. B Repair or replace valves which exceed the allowable specified leakage rate. 3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES A Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO Paint No. 2215, or approved equal. END OF SECTION 04/2009 02541 -8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES Section 02542 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-Cast Concrete Manholes for sanitary. B. Pre-Cast and Cast-in-Place Manholes for storm sewer. C. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates, meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. D. Ring grates. E. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises F. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 478,"Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections" b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" d. ASTM C 923, "Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures,Pipes and Laterals" e. ASTM C 1107,"Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,Hydraulic- Cement Grout(Nonshrink)" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" h. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" 05/2013 02542- 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 3. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 5. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" G. Definitions: 1. Shallow Depth Manholes-manholes having a depth of 4 feet or less measured from the top of cover to sewer invert. 2. Normal Depth Manholes-manholes having a depth of greater than 4 feet and up to 8 feet measured from top of cover to sewer invert. 3. Extra Depth Manholes- manholes having a depth of greater than 8 feet measured from the top of cover to sewer invert. 4. Corrosion Resistant Manholes- concrete manholes incorporating additional material, such as liners or coatings, which make them more resistant to corrosion than typical concrete manholes. 5. Standard Manholes Drops- drops of up to 3 vertical feet measured from the invert of the T-fitting to the sewer invert. 6. Extra Depth Manhole Drops-drops in excess of 3 vertical feet measured from the invert of the T-fitting to the sewer invert. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for Normal Depth Manholes and/or Normal Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes shall be per each. B. Measurement for Shallow Depth Manholes and/or Shallow Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes shall be per each. C. Measurement for Extra Depth Manholes and/or Extra Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes is on a vertical foot basis for each foot of depth greater than 8 feet. D. Payment for Manholes under this Section shall be for complete installation including riser, frames, grates, adjustment rings, stainless steel inflow preventers, cut-in work, covers,penetrations,other appurtenances,and be in accordance with Section 01200— Measurement and Payment Procedures. 05/2013 02542-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES E. Measurement for Standard Manhole Drops shall be per each. F. Measurement for Extra Depth Manhole Drops is on a vertical foot basis for each foot of Drop greater than 3 feet. G. Payment for Drops under this Section shall be for assembly components,encasement, other appurtenances, and be in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. H. Payment for Air Release Manhole with Valves and Fittings installed is on a unit price basis for each manhole with air release valves,fittings and appurtenances installed and in accordance with Section 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work needed to make manholes structurally sound, improve flow, prevent entrance of inflow or groundwater, prevent entrance of soil or debris, and provide protection against hydrogen sulfide gas attack. B. Manufacturer's Product Support. 1. Through the Contractor,manufacturers of wall sealing or lining systems shall submit to Engineer for review and approval a detailed description of the proposed coating installation process. Describe surface preparation, independent laboratory test results, mix design procedures and method of controlling uniform thickness. 2. A representative employed by the manufacturer and having technical training in epoxy or cementitious liner shall be named and available for consultation by telephone during business hours and on site upon 48 hours notice. 3. Manufacturer's representative on concrete lining systems shall provide technical assistance to applicators to ensure proper usage of dispensing equipment and accurate proportions of admixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of concrete. C. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval: 1. Frames, grates,rings, and covers. 2. Materials to be used in fabricating drops. 05/2013 02542-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls. 4. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs. 5. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing. 6. Shop Drawings of manhole sections and base units and construction details, including reinforcement,jointing methods, materials and dimensions. 7. Certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in this Section, 2.03E, "Design Loading Criteria". 8. Product data, materials and procedures for corrosion resistant liner and coatings, if required. For coating and resistant liner systems requiring 10-yr manufacturer warranty, submit specific coating system including product, thickness, and application for Engineer's approval. 9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix(bag)concrete,if used for channel inverts and benches. D. Installer Qualifications: Installers of liners and wall repair systems shall submit qualifications to Engineer at least 14 days prior to start of any material application. Submittal shall consist of: 1. Manufacturer's approved equipment list, by name and model number for application of product and contractor's equipment list showing approved equipment available for use in product application. 2. List of contractor's personnel who have satisfactorily completed manufacturer's training in product application within previous two years. Include date of certification for each person. E. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete shall conform to requirements in Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete. B. Minimum concrete compressive strength of 4000 psi. 05/2013 02542-4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES C. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to requirement in Se ction 03300-Cast-In Place Concrete. D. Mortar shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 270,Type S using Portland cement. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. Use manhole sections and base sections conforming to ASTM C 478. Use base riser section with integral floors,unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of the manufacturer of the manhole sections meeting material requirements of ASTM C 478. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel. B. Construct barrels for precast manholes from 48-inch diameter standard reinforced concrete manhole sections unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Use various lengths of manhole sections in combination to provide the correct height with the fewest joints. Wall sections shall be designed for depth as shown and loading conditions as described in this Section,2.03E,"Design Load Criteria",but shall not be less than 5 inches thick. Base section shall have a minimum thickness of 12 inches under the invert. C. Provide cone tops to receive 30-inch cast iron frames and covers, unless indicated otherwise. Use tops designed to support an AASHTO H-20 loading. D. Where the Plans indicate that manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are required, precast base sections of the required diameter shall be provided with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric. The transition shall be located to provide a minimum of 7-foot head clearance from the top of bench to underside of transition. E. Design Loading Criteria: The manhole walls,transition slabs,cone tops,and manhole base slab shall be designed by the manufacturer to the requirements of ASTM C 478 for the depth as shown on Plans and the following design criteria: 1. AASHTO H-20 loading applied to the manhole cover and transmitted down to the transition and base slabs. 2. Unit soil weight of 120 pcf located above all portions of the manhole. including base slab projections. 3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf, with soil pressure acting on empty manhole. 4. Internal liquid pressure based on a unit weight of 63 pcf,with manhole filled with liquid from invert to cover,with no balancing external soil pressure. 5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by the transition and base slabs. 05/2013 02542-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 6. Design additional reinforcing steel to transfer stresses at openings. 7. The minimum clear distance between any two wall penetrations shall be 12 inches or half the diameter of the smaller penetration, whichever is greater. F. Form joints between sections with 0-ring gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443. G. Do not incorporate manhole steps in manhole sections. H. Do not use brick masonry in construction of sanitary sewer manholes. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Provide cast-iron frames, grates, rings, covers, and stainless steel inflow preventers conforming to requirements of this Section and the City of Pearland Standard Construction Details. 2.04 DROPS A. Drops shall conform to the same pipe material requirements used in the main pipe, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 2.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Use resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923. Metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C 923 shall be made of the following materials: 1. External clamps: a. Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: a. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum. 3. Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes: a. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum. b. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum, coated with minimum 16 mm fusion-bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C-213. 4. All precast openings shall be fully circular, 360°openings. B. Where rigid joints between pipe and a cast-in-place manhole base are specified or shown on the Plans, use polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting the physical property requirements of ASTM C 923, Press-Seal WS Series, or equal. 05/2013 02542-6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES C. Storm sewer pipe connections: 1. Connections acceptable for sanitary sewers. 2. Line pipe grouted in place with mortar. Rehabilitate. 2.06 WALL CLEANING MATERIAL A. Cleaners: Detergent or muriatic acid capable of removing dirt, grease, oil and other matter which would prevent a good bond of sealing material to wall. Refer to sealing material manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame shall be Adeka Ultraseal P201, or approved equal. 2.08 WALL REPAIR MATERIALS A. Hydraulic Cements:Use a blend of cement powders or hydraulic cement to stop active leaks in the manhole structure. B. Quickset Mortar: Use a quickset mortar to repair wide cracks, holes or disintegrated mortar. 2.09 CORROSION RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS A. Provide one of the following as indicated on the Plans: 1. Precast cylindrical Portland cement concrete sanitary sewer manhole sections, base sections, and cone sections with one of the following factory applied internal coatings or approved equal: a. NeoPoxyTM NPR-5300 Series "PureEpoxy" spray on epoxy liner and other required fillers/sealants per manufacturer's recommendations: b. NeoPoxy NPR-3501 high tensile elongation epoxy elastomeric gout and sealant. c. NeoPoxy NPR-5305 trowelable epoxy filler, grout and sealant, d. Chemical and cementitious rapid set hydraulic grouts such as Strong-Plug, Strong-Seal QSR, Quadex Hyperform and Quadex Hydro-Plug, or other equivalents pre-approved by the engineer. 05/2013 02542-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES e. NeoPoxy P-88 ultraviolet light resistant topcoat. f. EMACO liner(contact City of Pearland Public Works Department for specific type). g. Raven liner(contact City of Pearland Public Works Department for specific type). h. SewperCoat 100% Calcium aluminate by KerneosTM Aluminate Technologies. 2. Type I Coating: The manufacturer of these applied products shall provide a minimum 10-year material and labor warranty. A 10-year manufacturer warranty shall be applicable for the following sanitary sewer manholes: a. Manholes that receive force main discharge. b. Manholes within the lift/pump station site including last manhole before wet well. c. Manholes with 5 feet diameter and larger or manholes that receive discharge from 15"or larger diameter gravity sewer. d. Manholes as determined by City Engineer. 3. Type II Coating: All other sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated with minimum 125 mil thick coating of products specified in Section 2.09.1.a-d,or approved equal. 2.10 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 02255 — Bedding. Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 2.11 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. For non-shrink grout,use prepackaged, inorganic,flowable,non-gas-liberating,non- metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. It shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi. 05/2013 02542-8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 2.12 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to City of Pearland Standard Construction Details and shall be ASTM A 48, Class 30. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be clean, free from blowholes and,other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.13 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.14 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole covers and frames, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or approval equal. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated, minimum clear openings of 30-inches is required. 2.15 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.16 INFLOW PREVENTERS A. Provide stainless steel inflow preventers with air release vents on all sanitary sewer manholes. 05/2013 02542-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Determine if the subgrade,when scarified and re-compacted,can be compacted to 95 percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of foundation material and base section. If it cannot be compacted to that density,the subgrade shall be moisture conditioned until that density can be reached or shall be treated as an unstable subgrade. C. Do not build sanitary or storm sewer manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by the Engineer. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF PRECAST MANHOLES A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on Plans. B. Place manholes at points of change of alignment, grade, size, pipe intersections, and end of sewer. 3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Place precast base on 12-inch-thick(minimum)foundation of cement stabilized sand or a concrete foundation slab. Compact cement-sand in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered,the subgrade will be examined by the Engineer to determine if the subgrade has heaved upwards after being excavated. If heaving has not occurred, the subgrade shall be over- excavated to allow for a 24-inch thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as the foundation material under the manhole base. If there is evidence of heaving,a pile- supported concrete foundation, as detailed on the Plans, shall be provided under the manhole base, when indicated by the Engineer. 3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Install precast or steel adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust the finished elevation and to support manhole frame. C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout. 05/2013 02542- 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES D. Where PVC liners are required, seal joints between sections in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLE A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure that no concrete,cement stabilized sand,fill,or other rigid material is allowed to enter the space between the pipe and the edge of the wall opening at and around the resilient connector on either the interior or exterior of the manhole. If necessary, fill the space with a compressible material to guarantee the full flexibility provided by the resilient connector. All pipe openings shall be fully circular, 360° openings. C. Where a new manhole is to be constructed on an existing sewer, install precast manhole base with factory installed Fernco type connections and pipe stubouts at least two (2) feet outside manhole wall. Manhole shall be cut-in to existing pipe. No "horseshoe" or"dog house"type connections will be permitted. D. Do not construct joints on sanitary sewer pipe within wall sections of manholes. Use approved connection material. E. Construct pipe stubs with resilient connectors for future connections at locations and with material indicated on Plans. Install approved stub plugs at interior of manhole. F. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling. 3.06 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS A. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria: 1. Slope of invert bench: 1 inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2 inch per foot maximum. 2. Depth of bench to invert: Pipes smaller than 15-inches: one-half largest pipe diameter Pipes 15 to 24-inches: three-fourths the largest pipe diameter Pipes larger than 24-inches: equal to the largest pipe diameter 3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth transition of invert through manhole,unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B. Form invert channels with class A concrete if not integral with manhole base. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts. 05/2013 02542- 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.07 DROPS FOR SANITARY SEWERS A. Construct Drops with same materials used in main pipe unless otherwise indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install a Drop when a sewer line enters a manhole higher than 30-inches above the invert of the manhole. All drops must be interior drops. B. Terminate encasement of blind drops a minimum of 5 inches below top of bell and not less than 12 inches above top of next lower bell. Install approved plug at bell. 3.08 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS A. Combine precast concrete adjustment rings so that the elevation of the installed casting cover is 3/8 inch below the pavement surface. Seal between adjustment ring and the manhole top with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply a latex-based bonding agent to concrete surfaces to be joined with non-shrink grout. Set the cast iron frame on the adjustment ring in a bed of approved sealant. The sealant bed shall consist of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch wide. B. For manholes in unpaved areas,top of frame shall be set a minimum of 6 inches above existing ground line unless otherwise indicated on Plans. In unpaved areas,encase the manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with the face of the manhole ring and the top edge of the frame. Provide a rounded corner around the perimeter. 3.09 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill materials in the area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Use embedment zone backfill material,as specified for the adjacent utilities, from manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to the manhole. Provide trench zone backfill,as specified for the adjacent utilities,above the embedment zone backfill. B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to the manhole, backfill under the existing sewer up to the spring-line of the pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill. 3.10 MANHOLE WALL CLEANING A. The floor and interior walls of the manhole shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free of all foreign materials including dirt, grit, roots, oils, grease, sludge, incompatible existing coatings,waxes,form release,curing compounds,efflorescence,sealers,salts, or other contaminants which may affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. 05/2013 02542- 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 1. High pressure water blasting with a minimum of 3,500 psi shall be used to clean free all foreign material within the manhole 2. When grease and oil are present within the manhole,an approved detergent or muriatic acid shall be used integrally with the high pressure cleaning water. 3. All materials resulting from the cleaning ofthe manhole shall be removed prior to application of the coating. 4. All loose grout, ledges, steps and protruding ledges shall be removed to provide an even surface prior to application of coating. B. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole. C. No separate pay shall be made for this item. Include cost for sealing in the unit price for manholes. D. Manufacturer's representative shall be available at all times on site to answer questions and approve manhole preparation work prior to lining. 3.11 MANHOLE WALL SEALING A. Seal active leaks in the manhole structure by using non-shrink grout. B. Remove loose or defective wall material. Wipe or brush surface clean prior to the application of hydraulic cement C. Drill weep holes at bottom of manhole walls to relieve hydrostatic pressure to stop leaks. Plug pressure relief holes after leaks are stopped using hydraulic cement materials. Lead wool may also be used to plug large leaks. D. Repair wide cracks,or holes with quickset mortars. Follow manufacturer's application procedures. E. Shape manhole inverts before wall sealing work. Apply concrete to cleaned manhole benches as specified in Section 03300. F. After all active leaks have been stopped, clean and prepare walls for application of selected liner material. G. Properly apply the sealing compound to provide the minimum required uniform coating to the wall surface. H. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole. 05/2013 02542- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES I. Strictly follow product manufacturer's published technical specifications and recommendations for surface preparation, application and proportioning. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct leakage testing of manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers. Vacuum test shall be completed prior to coating of the manhole. 3.13 INSPECTION A. After manhole wall sealing has been completed, visually inspect the manhole in the presence of Engineer. Check for cleanliness and for elimination of active leaks. B. At completion of manhole construction, assist Engineer in verifying installation of minimum coating thickness of concrete liner. Test several points on the manhole wall. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment. C. During application of corrosion resistant liner, a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414, shall be used. Measurements shall be taken,documented and attested by the Contractor for submission to the Owner. D. At completion of manhole construction, assist Engineer in inspection of installation. 3.14 TESTING A. After the coating product(s)have set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all surfaces shall be inspected for holidays with high-voltage holiday detection equipment. Reference NACE RPO 188-99 for performing holiday detection. All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired by abrading the coating surface with grit disk paper or other hand tooling method. After abrading and cleaning,additional coating can be hand applied to the repair area. All touch-up/repair procedures shall follow the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Documentation on areas tested, results and repairs made shall be provided to Owner by Contractor. B. Visual inspection shall be made by the Project Engineer and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired according to the procedures set forth herein by Contractor. 3.15 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 05/2013 02542- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.16 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Protect Manholes from damage until subsequent work has been accepted. B. Repair or replace damaged elements of Manholes at no additional cost to the Owner. C. In unpaved areas,provide positive drainage away from manhole frame to natural grade. END OF SECTION 05/2013 02542- 15 of 15 (This page is intentionally left blank) THERMOPLASTIC City of Pearland PAVEMENT MARKING Section 02582 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermoplastic pavement markings. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for linear pavement markings is on a linear foot basis for each width, measured in place. B. Measurement for words and symbols is on a lump sum basis for each word or symbol. C. Refer to Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300—Submittals. B. Each container shall be clearly marked to indicate the color, weight, Type of material, manufacturer's name and the lot/batch number. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Pavement markings are thermoplastic type marking materials that require heating to elevated temperatures for application. B. Materials shall conform to TxDOT Specification Item 666. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prepare pavement surfaces and install markings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and TxDOT specifications. B. Accurately locate and install approved markings to conform to classes, colors, lengths, widths, and configurations indicated on Drawings. Page 1 of 2 THERMOPLASTIC City of Pearland PAVEMENT MARKING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and repair surfaces to receive markups. Blast clean surfaces indicated on Drawings or where directed by the Engineer in accordance with requirements of Section 02581. Do not clean portland cement concrete pavements by grinding. 3.04 SURFACE INSTALLATION A. Test pavement surface for moisture content prior to application of markings. Place an approximate 2 square foot sheet of clear plastic or tar paper on road surface and hold in place for 20 minutes. Immediately inspect the sheet for build up of condensed moisture. If sufficient moisture has condensed to cause water to drip from sheet, do not apply markings. Repeat test as necessary until adequate moisture has evaporated from pavement to allow placement. B. Observe manufacturer's recommended pavement and ambient air temperature requirements for application. If manufacturer has no temperature recommendations, do not install markings if pavement temperature is below 60 degrees F or above 120 degrees F. C. Prime pavement surface and apply markings as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance. B. Repair or replace improperly installed markers at Contractors expense. 3.06 CLEANING A. Keep project site free of unnecessary traffic hazards at all times. B. Clean area upon completion of work and remove rubbish from work site. 3.07 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warrant material and labor for a period of twelve months from date of installation of markings. Immediately upon notification, replace portions of pavement marking lines or legends that have lifted, shifted or spread, lost daytime color, or nighttime retro-reflectivity. END OF SECTION Page 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS Section 02603 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates, meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. B. Ring grates. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" b. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M 306, "Drainage, Sewage,Utility, and Related Castings" 3. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals are included as a Bid Items, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 12/2015 02603- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. Manufacturer shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. or as approved by public works. C. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames,grates,rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48,Class 35B and AASHTO M 306. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be 75%post-consumer recycled material, clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.02 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.03 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide stainless steel inflow preventers and watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole Frames and Covers, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or as approved by public works. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated,minimum clear opening of 30-inches is required. 12/2015 02603 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 2.04 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.05 MORTAR A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installations that have an elevation difference between the final elevation of the manhole cover and the surrounding finished grade greater than 18 inches will be required to be hinged, lift assist gasketed ring and cover. B. Install castings according to approved Shop Drawings, instructions given in related Sections, and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials. C. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings plumb, level, true and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set. D. Ring grates shall be fabricated in accordance with Plans and shall be set in mortar in the mouth of the pipe bell. END OF SECTION 12/2015 02603-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS Section 02630 STORM SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm sewers and appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 9. Section 02629 - Safety End Treatments C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 506, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" d. ASTM C 877,"Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections" e. ASTM C 507, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" f. ASTM C 655, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D- Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" g. ASTM D 3350,"Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" h. ASTM C 1433, "Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers" i. ASTM B 633, "Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel" j. ASTM A 760, "Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains" 5/2013 02630- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for storm sewers is on a linear foot basis taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes or from end to end of culverts, measured and complete in place. Separate measurement will be made for each type and size of pipe installed. B. Payment for storm sewer includes pipe,earthwork,connections to existing manholes and pipe,accessories,equipment and execution required are incidental to storm sewer work. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The condition for acceptance will be a storm sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to- pipe, box-to-box joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections and in box connections. 5/2013 02630-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Handle pipe, fittings, and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do not drop or roll pipe off trucks or trailers. Materials cracked,gouged,chipped,dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved for installation. C. Store pipe and fittings on heavy timbers or platforms to avoid contact with the ground. D. Unload pipe,fittings,and specials as close as practical to the location of installation to avoid unnecessary handling. E. Keep interiors of pipe and fittings completely free of dirt and foreign matter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Materials for storm sewers shall be of the sizes and types indicated on the Plans. B. Materials for pipe and fittings, other than those specified or referenced, may be considered for use in storm sewers. C. For consideration of other materials, submit complete manufacturer's data including materials,sizes,flow carrying capacity,installation procedures,and history of similar installations to Engineer for pre-bid evaluations, if allowed, or as a substitution. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Circular reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 76, for Class III wall thickness. Joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to ASTM C 443. B. Reinforced concrete arch pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 506 for Class A-III. Joints shall conform to ASTM C 877. C. Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe, either vertical or horizontal, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 507 for Class VE-III for vertical or Class HE-III for horizontal. Joints shall be rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 877. D. Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 655. 5/2013 02630-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2.03 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS A. All box sewer sections shall conform to ASTM C1433. B. All pipe and boxes shall be machine-made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. C. Concrete shall conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit-mixed concrete is not acceptable. E. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner as the box sections they represent. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day's production run and each mix design. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they represent. The producer must furnish all equipment required for testing concrete for boxes produced in a precasting plant. F. For precast boxes,provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes of sufficient size for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the box section. Do not use lifting holes larger than 3 in. in diameter. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal. G. Rubber gaskted joints for precast reinforced concrete box culverts and sewers may be selected in lieu of boxes with preformed,flexible,mastic gasket material.When rubber gasket joints are selected, they shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1677 for design of the joints, performance and joint tolerances. When selecting the rubber gasket joint for box, neither filter fabric nor external joint wrap shall be required. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel, aluminized steel, aluminum or precoated galvanized steel as indicated on Plans and conforming to the following: Galvanized Steel AASHTO M218 Aluminized Steel AASHTO M274 Aluminum AASHTO M197 Precoated Galvanized Steel AASHTO M246 1. Reference to gauge of metal is to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets. Tables in AASHTO M218 and AASHTO M274 list thicknesses for coated sheets in inches. The tables in AASHTO M197 list thicknesses in inches for clad aluminum sheets. 5/2013 02630-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS B. Coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall conform to requirements of AASHTO M36 for steel pipe and AASHTO M l 96 for aluminum pipe. 1. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thicknesses lighter than thickness of pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum. 2. Coupling bands shall be made of same base metal and coating (metallic or otherwise) as pipe. 3. Minimum width of corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for corrugations which correspond to end circumferential corrugations on pipes being joined: a. 10 '/2 inches wide for 2 2/3 inch x 1/2-inch corrugations. b. 12 inches wide for 3 inch x 1 inch corrugations. 4. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only when it is necessary to join a new pipe to an existing pipe which was installed with no circumferential end corrugations. In this event pipe furnished with helical corrugations at ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated bands or with bands with projections (dimples). The minimum width of helical corrugated bands shall conform to the following: a. 12 inches wide for 1/2 inch-deep helical end corrugations. b. 14 inches wide for one inch-deep helical end corrugations. 5. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows of projections with one projection for each corrugation. Width of bands with projections shall be not less than the following: a. 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. Bands shall have two circumferential rows of projections. b. 16 '/4 inches wide for pipe diameters of 78 inches and greater. Bands shall have four circumferential rows of projections. 6. Bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Bands 12 inches wide or less will have a minimum of 2 bolts per end at each connection, and bands greater than 12 inches wide shall have a minimum of 3 bolts at each connection. 7. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 232,mechanically galvanized to provide same requirements as AASHTO M 232, or electro-galvanized per ASTM B 633, Type RS. 5/2013 02630-5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch shall be coated inside and out with a bituminous coating which shall meet these performance requirements and requirements of AASHTO M190. 1. Pipe shall be uniformly coated inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch, measured on crests of corrugations. 2. Bituminous coating shall adhere to the metal so that it will not chip,crack,or peel during handling and placement;and shall protect pipe from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Where a paved invert is shown on Plans,pipe or pipe arch,in addition to fully- coated treatment described above,shall receive additional bituminous material, same as specified above, applied to the bottom quarter of circumference to form a smooth pavement. Maintain a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above crests of corrugations. D. Furnish all fittings and specials required for bends, end sections, branches, access manholes,and connections to other fittings. Design fittings and specials in accordance with Plans and ASTM A 760. Fittings and specials are subject to same internal and external loads as straight pipe. 2.05 PIPE FABRICATION A. Steel Pipe: 1. Galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 36, Type I, Type IA, or Type II, as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,helical corrugations with continuous helical lock seam, or ultra-high frequency resistance butt-welded seams is acceptable. B. Aluminum Pipe: 1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196,Type I,Type IA, circular pipe, or Type II,pipe arch as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,or helical corrugations with a continuous helical lock seam. 3. Portions of aluminum pipe that will be in contact with concrete or metal other than aluminum, shall be insulated from these materials with a coating of bituminous material meeting requirements of AASHTO M 190. Extend coating a minimum distance of one foot beyond area of contact. 5/2013 02630-6of12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Precoated Galvanized Steel Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 245, Type I, Type IA or Type II as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted seams, or helical lock seams is acceptable. 3. Inside and outside coating shall be a minimum of 10 mils. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet,headwall or wingwall. C. Rejection: Precast units may be rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that do not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units conform to requirements of these specifications. 2.07 BEDDING,BACKFILL, AND TOPSOIL MATERIAL A. Bedding and Backfill Material: Conform to Plans and requirements of Sections 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 5/2013 02630-7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, 3.02 "Preparation". 3.02 EARTHWORK A. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the Plans. When pipes are laid in a trench,the trench when completed and shaped to receive the pipe,shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of backfill and bedding material under and around pipe. B. Bed pipe in accordance with Plans and Specifications. When requested by Engineer, furnish a simple template for each size and shape of pipe for use in checking shaping of bedding. Template shall consist of a thin plate or board cut to match lower half of cross section. C. Where rock in either ledge or boulder form exists below pipe,remove the rock below grade and replace with suitable materials so that a slightly yielding compacted earth cushion is provided below pipe a minimum of 12 inches thick. D. Where soil encountered at established grade is quicksand, muck or similar unstable materials, such unstable soil shall be removed and replaced in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Do not allow cement stabilized materials for backfill to come into contact with any uncoated aluminum or aluminized pipe surface. E. After metal pipe structure has been completely assembled on proper line and grade and headwalls constructed when required by the drawing details, place selected material from excavation or borrow along both sides of the completed structures equally, in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth(loose measurement),wetted if required and thoroughly compacted between adjacent structures and between structure and sides of trench, or for a distance each side of structure equal to diameter of pipe. Backfill material shall be compacted to the same density requirements as specified for adjoining sections of embankment in accordance with specifications. Above three-fourths point of structure, place uniformly on each side of pipe in layers not to exceed 12 inches. F. Only hand operated tamping equipment will be allowed within vertical planes 2 feet beyond horizontal projection of outside surface of structure for backfilling, until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained. Remove and replace damaged pipe. G. Do not permit heavy earth moving equipment to haul over structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed. 5/2013 02630- 8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS H. During backfilling, obtain uniform backfill material and uniform compacted density throughout length of structure so that unequal pressure will be avoided. Provide proper backfill under structure. I. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material,an inspection will be made of inside periphery of structure for local or unequal deformation caused by improper construction methods. Evidence of deformation will be reason for such corrective measures as may be directed by Engineer. 3.03 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE INSTALLATION A. Place pipes on prepared foundation starting at outlet end. Join sections firmly together, with side laps or circumferential joints pointing upstream and with longitudinal laps on sides. B. Metal in joints which is not protected by galvanizing or aluminizing shall be coated with an approved asphaltum paint. C. Provide proper equipment for hoisting and lowering sections of pipe into trench without damaging pipe or disturbing prepared foundation and sides of trench. Pipe which is not in alignment or which shows undue settlement after laying,or is damaged, shall be taken up and relaid. D. Multiple installations of corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches shall be laid with the center lines of individual barrels parallel. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, maintain the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes: DIAMETER CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN PIPES PIPE ARCH OF PIPE FULL CIRCLE AND PIPE ARCH DESIGN NO. 18" 1' 2" 2 24" 1' 5" 30" 1' 8" 4 36" 1' 11" 42" 2' 2" 6 48" 2' 5" 7 54" 2" 10'" 8 60"—84" 3' 2" 9 90"— 120" 3' 5" 10 & Over E. Where extensions are attached to existing structures, install a proper connection between structure and existing as indicated on Plans, coat the connection with bituminous material when required. F. When existing headwalls and aprons are indicated for reuse on the Plans,sever portion to be reused from the existing culvert, and relocate to prepared position. Damaged 5/2013 02630-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS headwalls,aprons or pipes attached to the headwall,shall be restored to their original condition. 3.04 JOINTING A. Field joints shall maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent infiltration of side material. B. Coupling bands shall lap equally on pipes being connected to form a tightly-closed joint. C. Use corrugated locking bands to field join pipes furnished with circumferential corrugations including pipe with helical corrugations having reformed circumferential corrugations on ends. Fit locking bands into a minimum of one full circumferential corrugation of pipe ends being coupled. 3.05 CONCRETE PIPE INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the Plans and pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, the bottom of the trench shaped, bedding material is installed, and the trench has been approved by the Engineer. C. Install pipe to the line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in the trench so the interior surfaces of the pipe follow the grades and alignments indicated. D. Install pipe with the spigot ends toward the direction of flow. E. Form a concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets. F. Place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Engineer. G. Keep the interior of pipe clean as the installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying the pipe is difficult because of small pipe size,use a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the joint has been completed. H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection. I. When work is not in progress,cover the exposed ends of pipes with an approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. 5/2013 02630- l0 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.06 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BOX SEWERS INSTALLATION A. Placement of Boxes: when precast boxes are used to form multiple barrel structures, place the box sections in conformance with the plans or as directed. Place material to be used between barrels as shown on the plans or as directed. Unless otherwise authorized, start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched. Fit,match,and lay the boxes to form a smooth, uniform conduit true to the established lines and grades. For trench installations, lower the box sections into the trench without damaging the box or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the box before it is placed. Prevent the earth or bedding material from entering the box as it is laid. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, boxes that are not in alignments or that show excessive settlement after laying. Form and place cast-in- place boxes in accordance with Section 03300 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Connections and Stub Ends: Make connections of boxes to existing boxes, pipes, storm drains,or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Connect boxes to any required headwalls,wingwalls, safety end treatments or riprap, or other structures as shown on the plans or as directed. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the box. C. For precast boxes,fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used. 3.07 INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT A. For installation of pipe by augering,boring,or jacking pipe,conform to requirements of Section 02415 - Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers. B. Design pipe and box sewers for jacking,boring or tunneling considering the specific installation conditions such as the soil conditions, installation methods, anticipated deflection angles and jacking pressures. When requested, provide design notes and drawings signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. 3.08 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink grout jointing material as shown on the Plans Drawing or as approved. Make connections water tight. 5/2013 02630- 1 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.09 FINISHES A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at the inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar or field galvanizing. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed, shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to the detailed Plans. C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Backfill the trench only after pipe and box sewer installation is approved by the Engineer. B. Bed pipes with materials conforming to requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and as indicated on Plans. C. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.11 INSPECTION A. Remove and replace all nonconforming work at no additional cost to City. 3.12 SAFETY END TREATMENTS (SET) A. Install safety end treatments in accordance with Section 02629 and as indicated on the plans. Use only approved pre-cast SET's with cross bars. 3.13 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas,grade surface as a uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on the Plans. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02630- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS Section 02631 PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete inlets for storm or sanitary sewers,including cast iron frame and plate or grate. B. Precast concrete headwalls and wingwalls for storm sewers. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01630—Product Options and Substitution 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" E. Definitions: 1. Normal Depth Type A,Type B,Type C and Type E Inlets-depth of 2.25 feet or less(2'3")plus pipe inside diameter when measured from grating,bottom of gutter, or throat to flow line of inlet lead. 2. Normal Depth Type BB Inlet - depth of 2.55 feet (2' 6% ") plus pipe inside diameter when measured from curb beam to flow line of inlet lead. 3. Extra Depth Inlet- specified depth exceeding normal depth for the type inlet used. 5/2013 02631 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for normal depth inlets is on a per each basis, complete in place. B. When extra depth is specified on the Plans,measurement for extra depth inlets is on a vertical foot basis for each foot in excess of normal depth,measured and complete in place. C. Measurement for headwalls and wingwalls is on a per each basis, complete in place. D. Payment for inlets and for culvert headwalls and wingwalls includes connection of lines, and furnishing and installing frames, grates,rings and covers. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings for approval of design and construction details for precast concrete inlets, headwalls and wingwalls. . C. Submit proposals for using equivalent construction products or processes according to Section 01630—Product Options and Substitution. D. Submit manufacturer's data and details for frames, grates, rings, and covers. 1.04 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT A. Store precast units on level blocking. Do not place loads on them until design strength is reached. Shipment of acceptable units may be made when the 28 day strength requirements have been met. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Concrete for precast machine-made units meeting requirements of ASTM C 76 regarding reinforced concrete, cement, aggregate, mixture, and concrete test. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. B. Reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete. Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on Plans and as follows: 5/2013 02631 -2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 1. Provide a positive means for holding steel cages in place throughout production of concrete units. The maximum variation in reinforcement position is plus or minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus 1/2 inch whichever is less. Regardless of variation, the minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement as shown on the Plans shall be maintained. 2. Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on the Plans. C. Mortar: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. D. Miscellaneous metal: Cast-iron frames and plates conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet, headwall or wingwall. C. Rejection: Precast units may be rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units according to requirements of these specifications. 5/2013 02631 -3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install inlets,headwalls,and wingwalls complete in place to the dimensions, lines and grades as shown on the Plans. B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. Bed precast concrete units on cement stabilized sand on foundations of firm, stable material accurately shaped to conform to the shape of unit bases. D. Provide adequate means to lift and place concrete units. 3.03 FINISHES A. Use a cement-sand mortar mix to seal joints, fill lifting holes, and as otherwise required. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to Plans details. C. Accurately adjust cast iron inlet plate frames to line,grade,and slope. Grout frame in place with mortar. 3.04 INLET WATERTIGHTNESS A. Test each inlet for leaks. Verify that inlets are free of visible leaks. Repair leaks in an approved manner. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink jointing material as shown on the Plans or as approved. Make connections water tight. 5/2013 02631 -4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 3.06 BACKFILL A. Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet, headwall or wingwall according to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02631 -5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS Section 02632 CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS,HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place inlets for storm or sanitary sewers,including cast iron frame and plate or grate. B. Cast-in-place headwalls and wingwalls for storm sewers. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02603 —Frames, Grates, Rings,and Covers 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" E. Definitions: 1. Normal Depth Type A,Type B,Type C and Type E Inlets-Depth of 2.25 feet or less(2'3")plus pipe inside diameter when measured from grating,bottom of gutter, or throat to flow line of inlet lead. 2. Normal Depth Type BB Inlet - Depth of 2.55 feet (2' 6%") plus pipe inside diameter when measured from curb beam to flow line of inlet lead. 3. Extra Depth Inlet- Specified depth exceeding normal depth for the type inlet used. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for normal depth inlets is on a per each basis, complete in. B. Measurement for extra depth inlets is on a vertical foot basis for each foot in excess of normal depth, measured and complete in place. C. Measurement for headwalls and wingwalls is on a per each basis, complete in place. 5/2013 02632- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS D. Payment for inlets and for culvert headwalls and wingwalls includes connection of lines and furnishing and installing frames, grates,rings and covers. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings for approval of design and construction details for cast-in-place units which differ from units shown on Plans. C. Submit manufacturer's data and details for frames, grates,rings, and covers. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi conforming to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete, unless otherwise indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. B. Reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Mortar: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. D. Miscellaneous metals: Cast-iron frames, grates, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Section 02603 —Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Construct inlets,headwalls,and wingwalls complete in place to the dimensions. lines and grades as shown on Plans. 5/2013 02632-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. The box section of inlet may be constructed of Class A concrete. D. Forms will be required for both the outside and inside faces of concrete inlet walls, however,if the nature of the material excavated for the inlet is such that it can be hand trimmed to a smooth vertical face,the outside forms may be omitted with approval of the Engineer. E. Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on the Plans. Provide a positive means for holding steel cages in place during concrete placement. Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on the Plans. The maximum variation in reinforcement position is plus or minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus 1/2 inch whichever is less. Regardless of variation, the minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement as shown on the Plans shall be maintained. F. Chamfer exposed edges unless otherwise indicated on Plans. 3.03 FINISHES A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at the inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to the detailed Plans. C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.04 INLET WATERTIGHNESS A. Verify that inlets are free of visible leaks. Repair leaks in an approved manner. 3.05 BACKFILL A. Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet according to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02632-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES Section 02633 ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Adjusting elevation of manholes, inlets, and valve boxes to new grades. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02910—Topsoil 7. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for adjusting utility structures to grade is on a lump sum basis for: 1. Adjusting manholes. 2. Adjusting inlets. 3. Adjusting valve boxes. B Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A For cast in place concrete, refer to Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. B For precast concrete manhole sections and adjustment rings,refer to Section 02542— Concrete Manholes and Accessories. C For mortar mix, conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 07/2006 02633- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES 2.02 CAST IRON ADJUSTING RINGS A For cast iron adjusting rings, refer to Section 02542 — Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS A For riser pipes and fittings, refer to applicable piping materials specifications in Sections 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Examine existing structure, valve box,frame and cover or inlet box,frame and cover or inlet,and piping and connections for damage or defects that would affect adjustment to grade. Report such damage or defects to the Engineer. 3.02 ESTABLISHING GRADE A Coordinate grade related items with existing grade and finished grade or paving, and relate to established bench mark or reference line. 3.03 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND INLETS A Elevation of manhole or inlet can be raised using precast concrete rings or metal adjusting rings. Use of brick for adjustment to grade is prohibited. Elevation of manhole or inlet can be lowered by removing existing masonry,adjusting rings or the top section of the barrel below the new elevation and then rebuilding or raising the elevation to the proper height. B Grout inside and outside adjusting ring joints. C Salvage and reuse cast iron frame and cover or grate. D Protect or block off manhole or inlet bottom using wood forms shaped to fit so that no debris or soil falls to the bottom during adjustment. E Set the cast iron frame for the manhole cover or grate in a full mortar bed and adjust to the established elevation. In streets, adjust covers to be flush to 1/8 inch above pavement. F Verify that manholes and inlets are free of visible leaks as a result of reconstruction. Repair leaks in a manner subject to the Engineer's approval. 3.04 ADJUSTING VALVE BOXES A If usable, salvage and reuse valve box and surrounding concrete block. 07/2006 02633-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES B Remove and replace 6 inch ductile iron riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover required to establish the adjusted elevation to accommodate actual finish grade. C Reinstall in-kind adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in vertical position. Provide minimum 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end and interior contact flange of valve box for vertical movement damping. D After valve box has been set, aligned, and adjusted so that top lid is level with final grade, pour a 24 inch by 24 inch by 8 inch thick concrete pad around valve box. Center valve box horizontally within concrete slab. 3.05 BACKFILL AND GRADING A Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each adjusted manhole, inlet, and valve box and compact according to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Grade the ground surface to drain away from each manhole and valve box. Place earth fill around manholes to the level of the upper rim of the manhole frame. Place earth fill around the valve box concrete block. C In unpaved areas,grade surface at a uniform slope of 1 to 5 from the manhole frame to natural grade. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil and seed in accordance with Section 02921—Hydromulch Seeding. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02633-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT Section 02710 BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Base course of crushed stone, recycled crushed concrete base, cement-stabilized crushed stone,cement-stabilized bank-run gravel,recycled crushed stone and hot mix asphalt base course. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 131,"Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" d. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" e. ASTM D 1557, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort" f. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" g. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" h. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, "Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing" b. Tex-110-E, "Particle Analysis of Soils" c. Tex-120-E, "Soil-Cement Testing" d. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" e. Tex-203-F,"Sand Equivalent Test" 5/2013 02710- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT f. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" g. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" i. Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" j. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for base course is on a square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of base course. B. When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,unit price adjustments shall be made for insufficient in-place depth determined by cores as follows: 1. Adjusted unit price shall be reduced by a ratio of average thickness determined by cores to thickness bid upon,times unit price bid. 2. Adjustment shall apply to lower limit of 90 percent of unit price bid. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit samples of crushed stone,gravel,crushed concrete and soil binder for testing. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of cement to work site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for pug mill and associated equipment, spreading machine, and compaction equipment for approval. E. Submit manufacturing description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the 5/2013 02710-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stockpiles shall be made up of layers of processed aggregate materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Material. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CRUSHED STONE FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE A. Crushed Stone: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone,sandstone,gravel or granite obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 40. 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 12. 3. Maximum Lineal Shrinkage:7(when calculated from volumetric shrinkage at liquid limit). C. Mixed Materials shall meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum compressive strength of 35 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi at 15 psi lateral pressure using triaxial testing procedures. 2. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 3/4-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 No. 40 60 to 85 5/2013 02710-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 2.02 CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE A. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I; bulk or sacked. B. Water: Clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or vegetable matter. C. Crushed Stone: material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. D. Gravel: Durable particles of bank-run gravel or processed material. E. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid limit: 35. 2. Maximum Plasticity index: 10. F. Mixed aggregate and soil binder shall meet the following requirements: 1. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: PERCENT RETAINED SIEVE CRUSHED PROCESSED GRAVEL BANKRUN STONE GR. 1 GR.2 GRAVEL 1 3/4-inch O to 10 O to 5 - O to 5 '/2-inch - - 0 - No. 4 45 to 75 30t075 15 to 35 30 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80 60 to 85 55 to 85 65 to 85 2. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. G. Cut back asphalt: MC30 conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. H. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. 5/2013 02710-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT I. Design mix for minimum average compressive strength of 200 psi at 48 hours using Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength testing procedures. Provide minimum cement content of 1-1/2 sacks, weighing 94 pounds each,per ton of mix. J. Increase cement content if average compressive strength of tests on field samples fall below 200 psi. Refer to Part 3 concerning field samples and tests. K. Mix in stationary pug mill equipped with feeding and metering devices which shall add specified quantities of base material, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix base material and cement sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. L. Resulting mixture shall be homogeneous and uniform in appearance. 2.03 CEMENT-STABILIZED RECYCLED CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE (RCCB) COURSE A. System Description: Provide RCCB with following performance: 1. Minimum 5 percent cement. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 650 psi at 7 days following TxDOT Tex- 120-E. 3. Prepare concrete product in an on-or off-site pug mill,or in an on-or off-site portable concrete mixer. B. Preliminary Design: Prepare preliminary mix for 4 cement ratios; 5, 6, 7 and 8 percent. 1. Designate source of concrete for crushing. 2. Results of compression tests will be used by Engineer to select the final mix design. C. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I, II or III; bulk or sacked. D. Water: Potable. E. Aggregate: Recycled Crushed Concrete: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve, and durable coarse particles of crusher-run reclaimed cured Portland cement concrete, obtained from an approved source. Organic material is prohibited. F. Soil Binder (classified below): Meeting the following requirements when tested following TxDOT Tex-106-E: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 35 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 10 5/2013 02710-5of12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT G. Mixed Aggregate and Soil Binder: Grading following Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 3/4-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80; classified as"Soil Binder" 1. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. H. Asphaltic Seal Cure: 1. Use following as Contractor's option to curing by sprinkling, at no additional cost or time. 2. Cut-back asphalt: MC30 following Section 02742—Prime Coat. 3. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime following Section 02742—Prime Coat. Material Mix and Mixing Equipment 1. Design mix for minimum compressive strength of 650 psi at 7 days following Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength. 2. Cement Ratio: If compressive strength of field samples of installed products fails to meet strength requirements above, increase cement content in one percent increments up to a maximum of 8 percent. 3. Mix according to the requirement s of this Section, 2.03A, with metering devices adding specified quantities of crushed concrete,cement,and water into mixer. Dry mix crushed concrete and cement to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. Produce homogeneous and uniformly mixed product. 2.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE (BLACK BASE) A. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone,or combination thereof that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic, or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 5/2013 02710-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PET B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings, or combination thereof, pas AVsing No.M EN10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,durable stone particles free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No.40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347°F, meeting the following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE TEST AC-10 AC-20 min. max. min. max. Viscosity, 140°F stokes 1000 ± 200 2000 ± 400 Viscosity, 275°F stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.E.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene,percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140°F stokes 3000 - 6000 Ductility, 77°F, 5 cms per min., cms 70 - 50 Spot tests Negative for all 1. Material shall not be cracked. 2. Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. E. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment,hot aggregate screens and bins,and dust collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device 2. Dryer 3. Screens 5/2013 02710- 7of12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales 5. Mixer 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices 7. Asphalt measuring devices 8. Truck scales F. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. G. Mix: Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E, Tex-204-F, Tex-208-F, and Tex-227-F. H. Density and Stability Requirements: PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT MIN MAX OPTIMUM NOT LESS THAN 95 99 97 35 I. Proportions for Asphaltic Material:As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the mix type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Do not mix and place cement stabilized base when temperature is below 40° F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35°F and rising. B. Place material on prepared subgrade in uniform layers to produce thickness indicated on Plans. Depth of layers shall not exceed 8 inches. Do not dump material in piles or windrows. C. Spread with approved spreading machine. Conduct spreading so as to eliminate planes of weakness or pockets of non-uniformly graded material resulting from hauling and dumping operations. 5/2013 02710-8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT D. Provide construction joints between new material and stabilized base that has been in place 4 hours or longer. Joints shall be approximately vertical. Form joint with a temporary header or make vertical cut of previous base immediately before placing subsequent base. E. Use only one longitudinal joint at center line under main lanes and shoulder. Do not use longitudinal joints under frontage roads and ramps. F. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate center of base. Secure a firm bond between reinforcement and base. G. Do not place asphaltic base when air temperature is below 50 F and falling. Base may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. H. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325°F when laid. I. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track-mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. J. Place base courses 4 inches or greater in thickness in two or more layers,each having compacted thickness of not greater than 4 inches. Spread all lifts. Attain smooth course of uniform density to section, line and grades as indicated on Plans. K. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has become cooled. When work is resumed, cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. L. When new asphalt/concrete is laid against existing asphalt, existing asphalt/concrete shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. M. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Start compaction as soon as possible but not more than 60 minutes from start of moist mixing. Compact loose mixture with approved tamping rollers until entire depth is uniformly compacted. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. 5/2013 02710-9of12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and recompacting. C. Apply water to maintain moisture between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 1557. Mix in with a spiked tooth harrow or equal. Reshape surface and lightly scarify to loosen imprints made by equipment. D. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. E. Finish by blading surface to final grade after compacting final course. Seal with approved pneumatic tired rollers which are sufficiently light to prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and recompact at areas where hair line cracking develops. F. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of modified Proctor density at a moisture content of treated material between optimum and 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 1557,unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. G. Maintain surface to required lines and grades throughout operation. 3.04 CURING A. Moist cure for minimum of 7 days before adding pavement courses. Restrict traffic on base to local property access. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. B. If indicated on Plans,cover base surface with a curing membrane as soon as finishing operation is complete. Apply with approved self-propelled pressure distributer at following rates, or as indicated on Plans: 1. MC30: 0.1 gallon per square yard. 2. EPR-1 Prime: 0.15 gallon per square yard. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. B. Top surface of base course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section, or in 16 foot length. 5/2013 02710- 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, a minimum of one core will be taken at random locations per 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at a random location near each depth determination core. Rework and recompact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted cement stabilized base. 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material, sections of base course not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner. Use new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness(as determined by cores)to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized base in good condition until completion of work. Repair defects immediately by replacing base to full depth. 5/2013 02710- 11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Protect the asphalt membrane,if used,from being picked up by traffic. The membrane may remain in place when proposed surface courses or other base courses are to be applied. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02710- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section 02741 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface courses of compacted mixture of coarse and fine aggregates and asphaltic material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat 5. Section 02743 —Tack Coat C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" b. ASTM C 131,"Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" d. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" e. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" f. Tex-207-F, "Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures" g. Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 340,"Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 5/2013 02741 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for asphaltic concrete pavement is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B. Payment for asphaltic concrete pavement includes all labor and materials required to complete placement as indicated on Plans. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. Refer to this Section,3.07"Noncomforming Pavement"for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates that asphaltic materials and aggregates meet requirements of this Section. C. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of surface course in Work. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of mixing plant for approval. E. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate:Crushed stone or gravel or combination thereof,that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles 5/2013 • 02741 -2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings or combination of both passing No. 10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,durable stone particles free from barns or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No.40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347°F, meeting following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE AC-10 AC-20 TEST M IN. MAX. MIN. MAX. Viscosity, 140°stokes 1000 ±200 2000 ±400 Viscosity, 275°stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77°, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.O.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene,percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140°stokes - 3000 - 6000 Ductility, 77°, 5 cms per min., ems 70 - 50 - Spot tests Negative for all grades 1. Material shall not be cracked. 2. The Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment,hot aggregate screens and bins,and dust 5/2013 02741 -3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device. 2. Dryer. 3. Screens. 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales. 5. Mixer. 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices. 7. Asphalt measuring devices. 8. Truck scales. B. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. 2.03 MIXES A. Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E or Tex-204-F and Tex-208-F. B. Density and Stability Requirements: PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT MIN. MAX. OPTIMUM NOT LESS THAN 95 99 97 35 C. Proportions for Asphaltic Material: As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted base course is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prime Coat: If indicated on the Plans,apply a prime coat conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. Do not apply a tack coat until primed base has cured to satisfaction of the Engineer. 5/2013 02741 -4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT B. Tack Coat: Conform to requirements of Section 02743 — Tack Coat. Where the mixture will adhere to the surface on which it is to be placed without use of a tack coat,tack coat may be eliminated if approved by the Engineer. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Do not place asphaltic mixture in rain or when air temperature is below 50° F and falling. Mixture may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. B. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to the project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325°F when laid. C. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track-mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. D. Surface Course Material: Surface course 2 inches or less in thickness may be spread in one lift. Spread all lifts in such manner that,when compacted,finished course will be smooth,of uniform density,and will be to section,line and grade as shown. Coincide construction joints on surface courses with lime lines,or as directed by the Engineer. E. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has cooled. When work is resumed,cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. F. When new asphalt is laid against existing or old asphalt mat, existing or old asphalt shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. G. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear roller without undue displacement or hair cracking. Keep wheels properly moistened with water to prevent adhesion of surface mixture. Do not use excessive water. 5/2013 02741 -5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT B. Compress surface thoroughly and uniformly, first with power-driven, 3-wheel, or tandem rollers weighing from 8 to 10 tons. Obtain subsequent compression by starting at side and rolling longitudinally toward center of pavement,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half width of rear wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in length. Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and all rolling marks are eliminated. Complete all rolling before mixture temperature drops below 175 F. C. Use tandem roller for final rolling. Double coverage with approved pneumatic roller on asphaltic concrete surface is acceptable after flat wheel and tandem rolling has been completed. D. Along walls,curbs,headers and similar structures,and in all locations not accessible to rollers, compact mixture thoroughly with lightly oiled tamps. E. Compact binder course and surface course to density not less than 93 percent of the maximum possible density of voidless mixture composed of same materials in like proportions. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Furnish templates for checking surface in finished sections. Maximum deflection of templates, when supported at center, shall not exceed 1/8 inch. B. Completed surface,when tested with 10-foot straightedge laid parallel to center line of pavement,shall show no deviation in excess of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Correct any surface not meeting this requirement. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, minimum of one core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of asphalt concrete pavement to determine in-place depth and density. B. In-place density will be determined in accordance with Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F from cores or sections of asphaltic base located near each core. Other methods of determining in-place density,which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from roadway specimens,may be used when approved by the Engineer. C. Contractor may,at his own expense,request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. In-place depth at these locations shall be average depth of four cores. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted asphaltic concrete pavement. 5/2013 02741 -6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material sections of surface course pavement not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner. Use new asphaltic concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness(as determined by cores)to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Do not open pavement to traffic until 12 hours after completion of rolling,or as shown on Plans. B. Maintain asphaltic concrete pavement in good condition until completion of Work. C. Repair defects immediately by replacing asphaltic concrete pavement to full depth at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02741 -7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT Section 02744 SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A wearing surface, also known as Seal Coat or Chip-Seal, composed of a single application of asphaltic material, covered with aggregate, constructed on a prepared surface or base course. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 02980—Pavement Repair C Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" 2) Item 302, "Aggregates for Surface Treatments" 3) Item 316, "Surface Treatments" 4) Item 210, "Rolling" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Single Course Surface Treatment is on square yard basis,measured and completed in place. Payment includes materials, equipment, preparation, and work associated with the application of the Surface Treatment. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for repair of failed or defective areas of pavement prior to resurfacing. C If paving repair is included as a Bid Item,measurement is on a square yard basis. The limits are as defined in Section 01100—Summary of Work, or as shown on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 - Submittals. B Submit test results and certifications that asphaltic materials and aggregates meet requirements of this Section prior to use. 07/2006 02744- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT C Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of aggregate spreading and finishing machine(s) for approval. D Submit calibration report of emulsion distributor. The requirement of this submittal may be waived by Engineer when a computer controlled distributor is used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EMULSION A Asphaltic material shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT,Item 300,"Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions". B The asphaltic material shall be Grade CRS-1P or CRS-2P 1. The CRS-1P shall be a rapid setting, cationic emulsion for use in placing surface treatments when the air temperature is between 40°F and 70°F. 2. The CRS-2P shall be a rapid setting, cationic emulsion for use in placing surface treatments when the air temperature is 60°F and rising. C The emulsion shall break and cure in a reasonable amount of time when the aggregate is applied, regardless of sunlight or humidity conditions. 2.02 AGGREGATE A Aggregate material shall conform in type, grade, classification, and quality to the requirements of TxDOT, Item 302, "Aggregates for Surface Treatments". Samples submitted for testing shall be taken from stockpiles located on the Project Site. B Stockpile aggregate separately. Take necessary steps to prevent stockpiles from being contaminated. Do not add materials to approved stockpiles without the Engineer's approval. C When tested by TxDOT, Tex-200-F, Part 1, the aggregate gradation shall meet the requirements in the table below for the specified grade: Aggregate Gradation Requirements (Cumulative % Retained) SIEVE GRADE GRADE SIZE 3 4 3/4 in 0 % in 0— 2 0 ' in 20-40 0-5 3/s in 80— 100 20—40 in 95 - 100 — #4 — 95 — 100 #8 99 — 100 98— 100 07/2006 02744-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT 2.03 EQUIPMENT A Equipment used in each phase of application shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT, Article 316.3 "Equipment". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify compacted base or prepared surface is ready to support imposed loads. B Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A All holes, ruts, depressions, or other defects in the surface shall be repaired and defective areas cleaned out by scarifying or acceptable hand methods under the provisions of Section 02980—Pavement Repair. B Fill defects with new material of the same character,or other materials approved by the Engineer,the road surface shall be compacted by rolling or tamping so that a smooth, hard,well cemented surface,conforming to the lines,grade,and typical cross-section shown on the plans is secured. C After the patches have been allowed to set-up under traffic, sweep the surface of the roadway clean from dirt, dust, and other deleterious matter by means of mechanical, rotary street sweeper, hand brooms, or compressed air. D Before any asphaltic material is applied,all cakes of dust or clay and all foreign matter shall be removed and the surface thoroughly cleaned until the embedded aggregate is cleaned but not discharged or loosened. E The surface may be lightly sprinkled just prior to application of the asphalt if found necessary by the Engineer. 3.03 APPLICATION A Air temperature shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 1. Treatment may be applied when air temperature is above 40°F and rising. 2. Do not apply treatment when air temperature is below 50°F and falling. 3. Do not apply treatment when roadway surface temperature is below 60°F. 4. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, general weather conditions are not suitable, do not apply treatment. B When Grade 3 aggregate is specified, the asphaltic material shall be applied on the prepared surface at a rate of approximately 0.35 gallons per square yard. C When Grade 4 aggregate is specified, the asphaltic material shall be applied on the prepared surface at a rate of approximately 0.30 gallons per square yard. 07/2006 02744- 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT D When Type B(crushed gravel,crushed slag,crushed stone,or limestone rock asphalt) aggregate is specified, the rate of spread shall be one cubic yard to each 90 square yards of surface area. E When Type PB (precoated crushed gravel, crushed slag, crushed stone, or limestone rock asphalt)aggregate is specified, the rate of spread shall be one cubic yard to each 95 square yards of surface area. F The surface shall be thoroughly rolled as soon as aggregate is applied with a self- propelled light, pneumatic roller in accordance with applicable sections of TxDOT, Item 316, "Surface Treatment" and TxDOT, Item 210, "Rolling". G The Contractor shall repair all fatty areas with additional cover material and all lean areas by adding asphalt to the extent that a uniformly dense treatment is finally obtained. Should depressions, unevenness, or irregular spots develop on the surface, they shall be remedied and the surface brought to true grade and cross-section. H The surface shall be broomed to remove excess aggregate as soon as aggregate has sufficiently bonded. Brooming shall be repeated the following work day. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A No traffic or placing of subsequent courses shall be permitted over freshly applied tack coat until authorized by the Engineer. B Contractor is responsible for maintaining Single Course Surface Treatment until Owner accepts the Work. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02744-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section 02751 CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Streets,Driveways and Sidewalks; Joints and Curing Materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" e. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" f. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" g. ASTM C 260 h. ASTM C 494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" i. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" j. ASTM D 994,"Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" k. ASTM D 1751,"Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) 1. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" m. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" n. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" o. ASTM C 143,"Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete" 08/2011 02751 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT p. ASTM C 138,"Standard Test Method for Density(Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" q. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" r. ASTM C 171, "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete" s. ASTM C 309,"Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" t. ASTM C 42,"Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-406-A, "Material Finer than 75-pm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test for Concrete Aggregates) b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 438 "Cleaning and Sealing Joints and Cracks (Rigid Pavements and Bridge Decks)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for concrete paving is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete paving, joints and curing material, as indicated on Plans. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D Refer to this Section,3.26"Noncomforming Pavement"for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350-Submittals. B Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. C Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for mixing equipment, and for traveling form paver, if proposed for use, for approval. D Submit manufacturer's certificates giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT E Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. F Submit samples of dowel cup,metal supports,and deformed metal strip for approval. 1.04 HANDLING AND STORAGE A Do not mix different classes of aggregate without written permission of the Engineer. B Class of aggregate being used may be changed before or during Work with written permission of the Engineer. New class shall comply with specifications. C Segregated aggregate will be rejected. Before using aggregate whose particles are separated by size, mix them uniformly to grading requirements. D Aggregates mixed with dirt, weeds or foreign matter will be rejected. E Do not dump or store aggregate in roadbed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Portland Cement: 1. Sample and test cement to verify compliance with Standards of ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. Bulk cement which meets referenced standards may be used if the method of handling is approved by the Engineer. When using bulk cement, provide satisfactory weighing devices. B Water: Conform to requirements for water in ASTM C 94. C Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone, or combination thereof, which is clean, hard, durable, conforms to requirements of ASTM C 33, and has abrasion loss not more than 45 percent by weight when subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion Test(ASTM C 131). No pit run gravel will be allowed. 1. Maximum percentage by weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed following values: PERCENT BY WEIGHT ITEM OF TOTAL SAMPLE MAXIMUM Clay lumps and friable particles. 3.0 Material finer than 75-pm (No. 200) sieve: Concrete subject to abrasion. 3.0* 08/2011 02751 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT All other concrete. 5.0* Coal and lignite: Where surface appearance of concrete is of 0.5 importance. All other concrete. 1.0 * In case of manufactured sand, if material finer than 75-pm (No. 200) sieve consists of dust of fracture, essentially free from clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively. 2. Coarse aggregate(size 1 1/2 inch to No.4 sieve)shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) (SQUARE OPENINGS) Retained on 1 3/4 inch sieve 0 Retained on 1 1/2 inch sieve 0 to 5 Retained on 3/4 inch sieve 30 to 65 Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 70 to 90 Retained on No. 4 sieve 95 to 100 Loss by Decantation Test *Method Tex-406-A 1.0 maximum * In case of aggregates made primarily from crushing of stone, if material finer than 200 sieve is dust of fracture essentially free from clay or shale as established by Part III of Tex-406-A, percent may be increased to 1.5 D Fine Aggregate: Sand,manufactured sand,or combination thereof,composed of clean, hard,durable,uncoated grains,free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) (SQUARE OPENINGS) Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 0 Retained on No. 4 sieve 0 to 5 Retained on No. 8 sieve 0 to 20 Retained on No. 16 sieve 15 to 50 Retained on No. 30 sieve 35 to 75 Retained on No. 50 sieve 65 to 90 08/2011 02751 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Retained on No. 100 sieve 90 to 100 Retained on No. 200 sieve 97 to 100 1. When subjected to color test for organic impurities (ASTM C 40), fine aggregate shall not show color darker than standard color. Fine aggregate shall be subjected to Sand Equivalent Test(Tex-203-F). Sand equivalent value shall not be less than 80, unless higher value is shown on Plans. E Air Entraining Agent: Furnish an air entraining agent conforming to requirements of ASTM C 260. F Water Reducer: Water reducing admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM C 494 may be used if required to improve the workability of concrete. Amount and type of such admixture shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. G Reinforcing Steel: 1. Provide new billet steel manufactured by open hearth process and conforming to ASTM A 615,Grade 60. Store steel to protect it from mechanical injury and rust. At time of placement,steel shall be free from dirt,scale,rust,paint,oil or other injurious materials. 2. Cold bend reinforcing steel to shapes shown. Once steel has been bent,it may not be rebent. 2.02 CONCRETE JOINTS A When allowed on the Plans,or with approval of the Engineer,Board Expansion Joint Material may be used: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows: 1. Clear,all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear,all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 3. Use wood only when part of a load transmission device assembly. B Unless specified otherwise,use Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751. C Joint Sealing Compound: 1. Hot poured rubber-asphalt compound meeting the requirements of ASTM D 6690. 2. When indicated on Plans, self-leveling Low Modulas Silicone sealant single component meeting the requirements of TxDOT Specification 438. D Load Transmission Devices: 08/2011 02751 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. When indicated on Plans,encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside diameter 1/16 inch greater than diameter of dowel bar. 2. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by the Engineer. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A Equipment: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.04 MIXING A Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare mix designs. Compressive strength shall be as specified using test specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Contractor shall determine and measure batch quantity of each ingredient,including all water for batch designs and all concrete produced for Work. Mix shall conform to these specifications and other requirements indicated on Plans. B Mix design to produce concrete which will have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi at 7days and 3500 psi at 28 days. When high-early-strength cement is used,it shall reach a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 7 days and 4000 at 28 days. Slump of concrete shall be at least 2 inch,but no more than 5 inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143. 1. Concrete pavement shall contain at least 5 1/2 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard,with not more than 6.5 gallons of water,net,per sack of cement (water cement ratio maximum 0.57). Cement content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 138. Addition of mineral filler may be used to improve workability or plasticity of concrete to limits specified. 2. Coarse dry aggregate shall not exceed 85 percent of loose volume of concrete. 3. Add air-entraining admixture to ensure uniform distribution of agent throughout batch. Base air content of freshly mixed air-entrained concrete upon trial mixes with materials to be used in Work, adjusted to produce concrete of required plasticity and workability. Percentage of air entrainment in mix shall be 4 1/2 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent. Air content shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C 231. 4. Use retardant when temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. Proportion shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Use same brand as used for air-entraining agent. Add and batch material using same methods as used for air-entraining agent. Accelerators will not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 2.05 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A Curing materials shall conform to one of following: 1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall be stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 4. Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds: Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C 309. Membrane shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. B Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms, reinforcing steel or concrete. After forms have been set to proper grade and alignment, use subgrade planer to shape subgrade to its final cross section. Check contour of subgrade with template. B Remove subgrade that will not support loaded form. Replace and compact subgrade to required density. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A Alternate equipment and methods, other than those required by this article, may be used provided the Contractor demonstrates that equal, or better, results will be obtained. Maintain equipment for preparing subgrade and for finishing and compacting concrete in good working order. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer or the Plans, slip form paving methods shall be used. B Subgrade Planer and Template: 1. Use subgrade planer with adjustable cutting blades to trim subgrade to exact section shown on Plans. Select planer mounted on visible rollers which ride on forms. Planer frame must have sufficient weight so that it will remain on form 08/2011 02751 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT at all times, and have such strength and rigidity that, under tests made by changing support from wheels to center,planer will not develop deflection of more than 1/8 inch. Tractors used to pull planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in subgrade. When slip form method of paving is used, operate subgrade planer on prepared track grade or have it controlled by electronic sensor system operated from string line to establish horizontal alignment and elevation of subbase. 2. Provide template for checking contour of subgrade. Template shall be long enough to rest upon side forms and have such strength and rigidity that,when supported at center, maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Fit template with accurately adjustable rods projecting downward at 1 foot intervals. Adjust these rods to gauge cross sections of slab bottom when template is resting on side forms. C Texturing Equipment 1. Carpet Drag a. Provide a carpet drag mounted on a work bridge or a moveable support system. Provide a single piece of carpet of sufficient transverse length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. D Machine Finisher: Provide a power-driven,transverse finishing machine designed and operated to strike off and consolidate concrete. Machine shall have two screeds accurately adjusted to crown of pavement and with frame equipped to ride on forms. Use finishing machine with rubber tires if it operates on concrete pavement. E Hand Finishing: 1. Provide mechanical strike and tamping template 2 feet longer than width of pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. 2. Provide two bridges to ride on forms and span pavement for finishing expansion and dummy joints. Provide floats and necessary edging and finishing tools. F Vibrators: Furnish mechanically operated synchronized vibrators mounted on tamping bar which rides on forms and hand-manipulated mechanical vibrators. Furnish vibrators with frequency of vibration to provide maximum consolidation of concrete without segregation. 3.04 FORMS A Side Forms: Use clean metal forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted,provided difference between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch,and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form,or by grouting under form. 08/2011 02751 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. All forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10 feet and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in-place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide reasonable straight edge on concrete. Top of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B Form Setting: 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. Provide supply of forms that will be adequate for orderly and continuous placing of concrete. Set forms and check grade for at least 300 feet ahead of mixer or as approved by the Engineer. 2. Adjacent slabs may be used instead of forms, provided that concrete is well protected from possible damage by finishing equipment. These adjacent slabs shall not be used for forms until concrete has aged at least 7 days. 3.05 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES A Accurately place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position them securely as indicated on Plans. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Place all reinforcing steel and secure to chairs. All reinforcing steel must be positively supported before pour begins. B Place pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure all parts in required positions. Install dowel bars accurately in joint assemblies as shown, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement. Rigidly secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. Accurately cut header boards,joint filler and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers, as required, to provide rigid pavement sections. 08/2011 02751 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.06 PLACEMENT A Place concrete only in rain-free days when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place concrete that is between 40 degrees F and 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. Do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night,as necessary to maintain concrete temperature,as placed, below 95 degrees F. Do not place when concrete temperature is above 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. B Place concrete within 60 minutes of mixing. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C Concrete slump during placement shall be 2 to 5 inches,except when using traveling- form paver slump shall be a maximum of 3 inches. D Deposit concrete rapidly and continuously on subgrade or subbase in successive batches. Distribute concrete to required depth and for entire width of placement in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete rakes in handling concrete. At end of day or in case of unavoidable interruption of more than 30 minutes, place transverse construction joint at point of stopping work. Remove and replace sections less than 10 feet long. E Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.07 FINISHING A Finish concrete pavement with power-driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand-operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template as wide as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make at least two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. 08/2011 02751 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT B On narrow strips and transitions,finish concrete pavement by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike- off screed. Move strike-off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing,maintaining screed in contact with forms,and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C While concrete is still workable,give surface final belting to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Perform belting with short rapid transverse strokes having sweeping longitudinal motion. 3.08 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING A When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B If the limit of removal of existing concrete or asphaltic pavement does not fall on existing joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 1 1/2 inches deep to provide straight, smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes using No.5 deformed tie bars,30 inches long and spaced 18 inches on centers. 3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS A Place 3/4 inch expansion joints at locations shown on Plans. Use no filler shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not more than 2 lengths of filler. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape filler accurately to cross section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and size shown on Plans. Seal with joint sealing compound. 3.11 CONTRACTION JOINTS A Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces indicated on Plans. Maximum spacing of contraction/construction joints,20 feet. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 3.12 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS A Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Plans. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 08/2011 02751 - 1 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.13 SAWED JOINTS A Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 1/2 inch wide.Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. B Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.14 JOINTS FOR CURB,AND CURB AND GUTTER A Place 3/4 inch preformed expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of expansion and contraction joints in pavement; at end of radius returns at street intersections and driveways; and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 60 foot centers. 3.15 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS A Provide 3/4 inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. Where dowels are used, wrap or sleeve one end. 3.16 JOINT SEALING A Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F but less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B Joint sealing equipment shall be in first-class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C Clean joints of loose scale,dirt,dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. 08/2011 02751 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT D Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.17 CONCRETE CURING A Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B Where curing requires use of water,curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 3.18 POLYETHYLENE FILM CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing period by placing acceptable moisture-proof patches or by replacing. 3.19 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. 3.20 COTTON MAT CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats,thoroughly saturated before application,in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that,when lightly compressed,water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. 08/2011 02751 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.21 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 TOLERANCES A Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10 foot straightedge parallel to center of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots. Do not permit ordinates measured from face of straight edge to surface of pavement to exceed 1/16 inch per foot from nearest point of contact. Maximum ordinate with 10 foot straightedge shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Grind spots in excess of requirements of this paragraph to meet surface test requirements. Restore texture by grooving concrete to meet surface finishing specifications. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services. B Test Specimens: Four test specimen cylinders for compressive strength tests will be made for each 150 cubic yards or less of pavement that is placed in one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. For failed 7-day tests, remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39. C Yield test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138 for cement content per cubic yard of concrete. If such cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D At the Engineer's direction a minimum of one 4-inch core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane or 500 square yards of pavement to measure in-place depth. Each core may be tested for 28 day compressive strength according to methods of ASTM C 42. The 28 day compressive strength of each core tested shall be a minimum of 3000 pounds per square inch. E Contractor may,at his own expense,request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. In-place depth at these locations shall be the average of depth of four cores. F Fill cores and density test sections with new concrete paving or non shrink grout. 08/2011 02751 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.24 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A Remove and replace areas of pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent, or that fail compressive strength tests, with new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans at no cost to the Owner. B Areas of concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores) to the thickness required. C No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.25 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details and the Engineer's requirements. 3.26 PROTECTION A Barricade pavement section from use until concrete has attained minimum design strength. B On those sections of pavement to be opened to traffic, seal joints,clean pavement and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of pavement to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for Work. C Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. D Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth. END OF SECTION 08/2011 02751 - 15 of 15 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS Section 02762 TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary retroreflective preformed pavement markings. B Wet retroreflective markers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02981 —Blast Cleaning of Pavement D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4061, "Standard Test Methods for Retroreflectance of Horizontal Coatings" b. ASTM E 1347, "Standard Test Methods for Color and Color- Difference Measurement by Tristimulus (Filter) Colorimetry" c. ASTM E 303, "Standard Test Methods for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using British Pendulum Tester" d. ASTM D 1056, "Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubbber" e. ASTM E 809, "Standard Practice for Measuring Photometric Characteristics of Retroreflectors" f. ASTM E 808, "Standard Practice for Describing Retroreflection"ASTM D 1056, "Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubbber" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for temporary pavement markings is on a linear foot basis,for each class, measured and complete in place. B Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 07/2006 02762- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS B Submit manufacturer's product data for each proposed class of marking material and installation instructions for approval. Include certificate by manufacturer that each class of marking conforms to the requirements of this specification. C Submit details of manufacturer's replacement policy for each class of marker. 1.04 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING CLASSIFICATIONS A Class I- Temporary preformed pavement markings suitable for longitudinal and word and symbol markings where removability will be required. B Class II- Temporary non-removable preformed pavement markings suitable for overlay lane lines,edge lines, and channelizing lines where pavement will be resurfaced. C Class III- Class I markers with wet reflective markers added every 8 feet. D Class IV - Class II markers with wet reflective markers added every 8 feet. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A Deliver preformed plastic marking material in rolls or strips. B Store material in cool dry conditions until application. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFORMED MARKINGS A Retroreflective preformed markings: White or yellow retroreflective tape on conformable backing with pigments conforming to standard highway colors. Glass beads shall be incorporated in film and a reflective layer of beads shall be bonded to the top surface of the film. Bead adhesion shall be such that beads cannot be easily removed by scratching with a thumbnail. B Preformed marking shall be precoated with pressure sensitive adhesive and shall have a demonstrated ability to adhere to roadways under climatic and traffic conditions normally encountered in a construction work zone when properly applied. C Class I markings shall be removable from portland cement and asphaltic concrete pavements intact,or in large pieces,at temperatures above 40 degrees F without use of heat, solvents, grinding, or blast cleaning. Marking film shall be removable after exposure to following minimum traffic exposure when tested on transverse test decks with rolling traffic: 1. Time in Place (days) 632 2. ADT per lane (23% trucks, 3.5 axles/unit) .. 9,000 3. Minimum Axle Hits . 13,000,000 07/2006 02762-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS D Quality performance characteristics: CLASS I CLASS II TEST WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW METHOD 1. Init. Retroreflectance (mcd•ff2•fc1), min. ASTM D 4061 * @ 86.00,0.2° 1770 1310 1360 820 * @ 86.5°, 1.0° 750 450 500 350 2. Daytime Reflectance 65 36 65 36 ASTM E 97 Factor"Y" %,min. 3. Init. Skid Resistance, 50 35 ASTM E 303 Avg. BPN 4. Refractive Index of 9 1 9 Liquid Beads,min. Immersion 5. Thickness,without 40 9 Caliper Gauge adhesive, mils,min. * (Entrance Angle, Observation Angle). 2.02 RAISED WET REFLECTIVE MARKERS A Raised Markers: Expanded rubber extrusions capable of being elastically compressed and deflected when impacted by rotating vehicle tires. Marker body shall have the following properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1056: 1. Compression deflection < 16 psi @ 25°deflection. 2. Oven aged compression deflection % change, +18. 3. Compress set low 10%. 4. Water absorption <9%. 5. Density (lbs/ft) (-24). B Markers shall be precoated with pressure sensitive adhesive capable of holding markers to top of preformed marking film. C Markers shall have enclosed retroreflective lens sheeting elements attached to marker bodies with pressure sensitive adhesive. 1. Retroreflective lenses elements shall have the following initial minimum reflectance when measured in accordance with ASTM E 809: COLOR WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW Observation Angle 0.2° 0.5° 1.0° 1._5° Coeff. of Luminous Intensity, R 1.00 0.60 0.40 0.24 0.19 0.11 0.14 0.08 (cd•fc') Notes: 1. Test at an entrance angle (Beta 2 horizontal entrance component described in ASTM E 808) of—4°measured from an axis perpendicular to top edge of marker when viewed from above. 07/2006 02762-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 2. Angle formed by reflective surface and base of marker shall be betweei 75°and 90°prior to measurement. 2. Marker reflective elements shall be visible at night,to motorists with low beam headlights, under the following conditions: a. Dry conditions .. 1500 feet b. Rainfall at a rate of 1" per hour 1000 feet c. Rainfall at a rate of 8" per hour 250 feet 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Apply markings to clean dry surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at locations indicated on Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. B Place markings on each paving lift that is to be opened to traffic prior to the end of each day's work. C Maintain markings, and replace as needed, until they are covered with subsequent paving courses or replaced by permanent markings on final lifts. 3.02 REMOVAL A Remove and obliterate markings on existing and final lifts used for redirecting traffic during construction. If blast cleaning is required,comply with requirements of Section 02981 —Blast Cleaning of Pavement. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02762-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER, AND HEADERS Section 02770 CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Reinforced concrete curb, reinforced monolithic concrete curb and gutter, and mountable curb. B Paving headers and railroad headers poured monolithically with concrete base or pavement. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement 4. Section 02335 —Subgrade 5. Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for curbs and for curbs and gutter is on linear foot basis measured along face of curb. B Measurement for headers is on linear foot basis measured between lips of gutters adjacent to concrete base and measured between backs of curbs adjacent to concrete pavement. C No separate payment will be made for curbs poured monolithically with concrete pavement. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit details of proposed formwork for approval. C Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual flexural strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. D Submit manufacturer's certifications giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 07/2006 02770- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER, AND HEADERS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. B Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for reinforcing steel of Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. C Grout: Nonmetallic, nonshrink grout containing no chloride producing agents conforming to the following requirements. Compressive strength at 7 days 3,500 psi Compressive strength at 28 days 8,000 psi Initial set time 45 minutes Final set time 1.5 hours D Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. E Joint Sealing Compound: Conform to material requirements of Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. F Mortar: Mortar finish composed of one part Portland cement and 11/2 parts of fine aggregate. Use only when approved by the Engineer. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Prepare subgrade or base in accordance with applicable portions of Section 02335 — Subgrade or Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement. 3.02 PLACEMENT A Guideline: Set to follow top line of curb. Attach indicator to provide constant comparison between top of curb and guideline. Insure flow lines for monolithic curb and gutters conform to slopes indicated on Plans. B Forms: Brace sufficiently to maintain position during pour. Use metal templates cut to section shown on Plans. C Reinforcement: Secure in proper position so that steel will remain in place throughout placement. 07/2006 02770-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS D Joints: Place in accordance with Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. Place dummy groove joints at 6-foot centers at right angles to curb lines. Cut dummy grooves 1/4 inch deep using an approved edging tool. E Place concrete in forms to required depth. Consolidate thoroughly. Do not permit rock pockets in form. Entirely cover top surfaces with mortar. 3.03 MANUAL FINISHING A After concrete is in place, remove front curb forms. Form exposed portions of curb, and of curb and gutter,using mule which conforms to curb shape,as shown on Plans. B Thin coat of mortar may be worked into exposed face of curb using mule and two- handled wooden darby at least 3 feet long. C Before applying final finish move 10 foot straightedge across gutter and up curb to back form of curb. Repeat until curb and gutter are true to grade and section. Lap straightedge every 5 feet. D Steel trowel finish surfaces to smooth, even finish. Make face of finished curb true and straight. E Edge outer edge of gutter with 1/4-inch edger. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 inch radius. F Finish visible surfaces and edges of finished curb and gutter free from blemishes,form marks and tool marks. Finished curb or curb and gutter shall have uniform color, shape and appearance. 3.04 MECHANICAL FINISHING A Mechanical curb forming and finishing machines may be used instead of, or in conjunction with,previously described methods,if approved by the Engineer. Use of mechanical methods shall provide specified curb design and finish. 3.05 CURING A Immediately after finishing operations, cure exposed surfaces of curbs and gutters in accordance with Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. 3.06 TOLERANCES A Top surfaces of curb and gutter shall have uniform width and shall be free from humps,sags or other irregularities. Surfaces of curb top,curb face and gutter shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from edge of a 10-foot long straightedge laid along them, except at grade changes. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain curbs and gutters in good condition until completion of Work. 07/2006 02770-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS B Replace damaged curbs and gutters to comply with this Section. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02770-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Section 02771 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Sidewalks. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" e. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete(Bituminous Type)" f. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) g. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" h. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" i. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" j. ASTM C 138, "Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content(Gravimetric) of Concrete" k. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" 1. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Accessibility Standards of Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statues 5/2013 02771 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for concrete sidewalks is on square foot basis. B. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete sidewalks,joints and curing material. No payment will be made for work in areas where sidewalk has been removed for contractor's convenience. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350 - Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: conform to material requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving for reinforcing steel. Use No. 4 reinforcing bars. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. E. Forms: Use straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to or greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. F. Sand Bed: Conform to material requirements for bank run sand. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REPLACEMENT A. Replace sidewalks which are removed or damaged during construction with thickness and width equivalent to one removed or damaged unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Finish surface (exposed aggregate, brick pavers, etc.) to match existing sidewalk. B. Provide replaced and new sidewalks with wheelchair ramps when sidewalk intersects curb at street. 5/2013 02771 -2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify and protect utilities which are to remain. B. Protect living trees, other plant growth and features designated to remain. C. Conduct clearing and grubbing operations in accordance with Section 02200 - Site Preparation. D. Determine sidewalk horizontal and vertical alignment to facilitate drainage and prevent ponding. Location and slopes must be in compliance with Texas Accessibility Academy Standards latest edition and revisions. E. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of sidewalk. Shape to line, grade and cross section. Compact 6 inches of select fill to minimum of 95% maximum dry density at optimal or above optimal moisture content as per ASTM D698. For soils with plasticity index above 40 percent, stabilize soil with lime in accordance with Section 02335 - Subgrade. Compact subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698. No separate pay for this requirement. This work shall be subsidiary to sidewalk square foot unit pricing. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Setting Forms: Straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth 1/2" greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. Securely stake forms to line and grade. Maintain position during concrete placement. B. Reinforcement: 1. Install No. 4 reinforcing bars. 2. Install reinforcing steel as shown on the Drawings. Lay longitudinal bars in walk continuously through expansion joints. Reinforcing bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Use sufficient number of chairs to support reinforcement in manner to maintain reinforcement in center of slab vertically during placement. 4. Drill dowels into existing paving, sidewalk and driveways, secure with epoxy and provide headers as required. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints with load transfer units in accordance with Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. D. Place concrete in forms to specified depth and tamp thoroughly with "jitterbug" tamp, or other acceptable method. Bring mortar to surface. 5/2013 02771 -3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS E. Strike off to smooth finish with wood strike board. Finish smoothly with wood hand float. Brush across sidewalk lightly with fine-haired brush. F. Apply coating to wheelchair ramp with contrasting color. G. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, mark off sidewalk joints 1/2 inch deep, at spacing equal to width of walk. Use joint tool equal in width to edging tool. H. Finish edges with tool having 3/8 inch radius. I. After concrete has set sufficiently, refill space along sides of sidewalk to 1 inch from top of walk with suitable material. Tamp until firm and solid, place sod as applicable. Dispose of excess material. Repair driveways and parking lots damaged by sidewalk excavation in accordance with Section 02980 - Pavement Repair and Resurfacing. 3.04 CURING A. Conform to requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31 for each 30 cubic yards or less of sidewalk that is placed on one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. Remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Minimum compressive strength: 2500 psi at 7 days and 3500 psi at 28 days. C. Yield test for cement content per cubic yard of concrete will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138. When cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D. If the Contractor places concrete without notifying the City, Contractor will have the concrete tested by means of core test as specified in ASTM C 42. When concrete does not meet specification, cost of test will be deducted from payment. Contractor will replace the cored section of sidewalk at no cost to City. E. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172. F. Take slump tests when cylinders are made and when concrete slump appears excessive. 5/2013 02771 -4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS G. Concrete shall be acceptable when average of two 28 day compression tests is equal to or greater than minimum 28 day strength specified. H. If either of two tests on field samples is less than average of two tests by more than 10 percent, that entire test shall be considered erratic and not indicative of concrete strength. Core samples will be required of in-place concrete in question. I. If 28 day laboratory test indicates that concrete of low strength has been placed,test concrete in question by taking cores as directed by Project Manager. Take and test at least three representative cores as specified in ASTM C 42 and deduct cost from payment due. 3.06 NONCONFORMING CONCRETE A. Remove and replace areas that fail compressive strength tests, with concrete of thickness shown on Drawings. B. Replace nonconforming sections at no additional cost to City. Replacement section shall be no less in length than the width of sidewalks. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Maintain newly placed concrete in good condition until completion of Work. B. Replace damaged areas at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02771 - 5 of 5 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Section 02775 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Driveways. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" b. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" c. ASTM C 260 d. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" e. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" f. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) g. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" h. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" i. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" j. ASTM C 143, "Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete" k. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" 1. ASTM C 171, "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete" m. ASTM C 309, "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane- Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" n. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 5/2013 02775- 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for concrete driveways is on square yard basis and includes removal of existing driveway, driveway curbs, select fill subgrade and reinforcement dowels. B. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete driveways,joints and curing material. No payment will be made for work in areas where driveway has been removed for contractor's convenience. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. C. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. D. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for reinforcing steel of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. Use No. 4 reinforcing bars. C. Subgrade Materials: Conform to subgrade material requirements of Section 02335 - Subgrade. D. Joints: Conform to concrete joint requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. 5/2013 02775-2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. When removing existing concrete, all sawcuts shall be full depth unless otherwise approved by City. B. Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms,reinforcing steel or concrete. C. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of driveway. Shape to line, grade and cross section. Place compacted select fill as needed to bring grade up. Select fill shall be compacted to minimum of 95% maximum dry density at optimal or above optimal moisture content as per ASTM D698. Stabilize top 8" of subgrade with lime in accordance with Section 02335 - Subgrade. Compact subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698. No separate pay for this requirement. This work shall be subsidiary to driveway square yard unit pricing. 3.03 FORMS A. Side Forms: Use clean forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted, provided difference between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch, and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form, or by grouting under form. Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. All forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10 feet and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in-place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide reasonable straight edge on concrete. Top of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of 5/2013 02775-3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B. Form Setting: 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. 3.04 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES A. Accurately place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position them securely. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Place all reinforcing steel and secure to chairs. All reinforcing steel must be positively supported before pour begins. B. Place pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure all parts in required positions. Install dowel bars accurately in joint assemblies as shown, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement. Rigidly secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. Accurately cut header boards, joint filler and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers, as required, to provide rigid pavement sections. 3.05 PLACEMENT A. Place concrete only in rain-free days when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. B. Place concrete within 60 minutes of mixing. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C. Concrete slump during placement shall be 2 to 4 inches. 5/2013 02775-4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS D. Deposit concrete rapidly and continuously on subgrade or subbase in successive batches. Distribute concrete to required depth and for entire width of placement in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete rakes in handling concrete. E. Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.06 FINISHING A. Finish concrete driveway with power-driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand-operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template as wide as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make at least two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. B. On narrow strips and transitions, finish concrete driveway by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike-off screed. Move strike-off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing, maintaining screed in contact with forms, and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C. While concrete is still workable, give surface final belting to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Perform belting with short rapid transverse strokes having sweeping longitudinal motion. 3.07 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING A. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 5/2013 02775-5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1/2 inch wide. Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. C. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. D. Provide 3/4 inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. Where dowels are used, wrap or sleeve one end. E. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F but less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. F. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first-class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. G. Clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. H. Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. I. Install the first expansion joint at Right-of-Way. The expansion joint shall be spaced at intervals same as the width of driveway. Expansion joint shall be placed at half of the width of the driveway if the width of driveway exceeds 20'. 3.08 CONCRETE CURING A. Concrete driveway shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B. Where curing requires use of water, curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 5/2013 02775-6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS C. Cotton Mat Curing: 1. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats, thoroughly saturated before application, in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. 2. Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that, when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. D. Liquid Membrand-Forming Compounds: 1. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10 foot straightedge parallel and longitudinal to center of driveway. Correct any depressions and all high spots. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services and Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. 3.11 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details and the Engineer's requirements. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Barricade pavement section from use until concrete has attained minimum design strength. B. On those sections of driveway to be opened to traffic, seal joints, clean pavement and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of driveway to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for Work. C. Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. 5/2013 02775-7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS D. Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth and limits as directed by Project Manager. Replace nonconforming work at no additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02775-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 02811 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Pipe and fittings,valves, sprinkler heads, accessories. B Control system and wiring for automatic control irrigation system. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02931 —Landscape and Tree Planting 4. Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 2564,"Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Plastic Piping Systems 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for landscape irrigation under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If landscape irrigation is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200— Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's data and details for landscape irrigation system to include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following: 1. General-duty valves. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Control-valve boxes. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Irrigation accessories. 6. Controllers. C Evidence of State of Texas irrigation license and required experience. 12/2014 02811 - 1 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION D Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components.Include water meters,backflow preventers,valves,piping,sprinklers and accessories,controls,and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A Irrigation Lateral Lines: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. D Architect: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Owner's authorized representative or the Landscape Architect or the design engineer. 1.05 RECORD AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete"as-built"record set of drawings which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact "as-built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set. B These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be available at all times for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Architect.Should the record as-built progress sheets not be available for review or not up-to-date at the time of any inspection, it will be assumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the Architect.No other observations shall take place prior to payment of that assessment. C The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as-built progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. D Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all information from the "as-built" prints to a mylar. Contractor shall use symbols and notation consistent with original drawings. E The Contractor shall dimension from two(2)permanent points of reference,building comers, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc.,the location of the following items: 1. Connection to existing water lines 2. Connection to existing electrical power 3. Gate valves 4. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along routing) 12/2014 02811 -2 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 5. Sprinkler control valves 6. Routing of control wiring 7. Quick coupling valves 8. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect 9. Sleeve locations 1.06 EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS A Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings,etc.,as may be required to meet such conditions.Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems,planting, and architectural features. B All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. C The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering.Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative. In the event this notification is not performed,the irrigation contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary. D No irrigation shall be required for undisturbed natural areas or undisturbed existing trees. 1.07 CONTROLLER CHARTS A As-built drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controller charts are prepared. 1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative. 2. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Guarantee statement. 4. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 1.08 UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE (UDC) REFERENCES A Except for single-family lots and developments,all required landscaping areas shall be 100%irrigated by one of, or a combination of, the following methods: 1. An automatic underground irrigation system: 2. A drip irrigation system; 3. A hose attachment within 100 feet of all plant material, provided, however , that a hose attachment within 200 feet of all plant material in non-street yards shall be sufficient 12/2014 02811 -3 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Irrigation zone design-A site plan,at a readable and defined scale,shall be submitted illustrating zones, delineating micro-irrigation zones and areas utilizing irrigation techniques other than micro-irrigation. Fifty (50) percent of the on-site green space shall be allowed to utilize irrigation techniques other than micro-irrigation.Turf areas shall be on separate irrigation zones from other landscaping plant zones.The irrigation system should be prepared by a licensed irrigator and designed to accommodate separate landscape plant zones based on different watering requirements unless approved by the Parks Director as indicated in the UDC Section 4.2.2.5, Item 8.D.1. C Overspray/ Runoff - All irrigation systems shall be designed to avoid overspray / runoff,low head drainage,or other similar conditions where water flows onto or over adjacent property, non-irrigated areas, roadways, walkways, structures, or water features. Narrow areas (four feet wide or less) shall not be irrigated unless micro- irrigation is utilized. D Landscaping - a site plan shall be submitted identifying all existing vegetation to be preserved,proposed turf, and other landscape areas. Installed trees and plants should be grouped together into landscape plant zones according to water and cultural (soil, climate and light) requirements. Plant groupings based on water requirements are as follows: natural, drought tolerant, and oasis. E Turf/Turfgrass-A maximum of fifty(50)percent of green space may be planted with turf grass configured with a permanent irrigation system.Turfgrass planted in excess of this limitation shall not have a permanent irrigation system.Micro-irrigation shall not be used on turfgrass unless approved by the Parks Director as indicated in the UDC Section 4.2.2.5, Item 8.D.1. 1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Electric solenoid controlled underground irrigation system. B Source Power: 120 volt 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B All irrigation systems shall be designed and sealed in accordance with the Texas Licensed Irrigations Act and shall be professionally installed. C Installer-Installation of Irrigation System shall be performed under the direction of a State of Texas licensed irrigator with not less than 5 years' experience in this type of work. D Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. 12/2014 02811 -4 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION E Ordinances,Codes and Regulations:All local,municipal and state laws,and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications,and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations and requirements of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship,or construction of a better quality,higher standard,or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. 1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.13 COORDINATION A Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings B Coordinate work under provisions of Section 02931 —Landscape and Tree Planting. C Coordinate the work with site landscape grading and delivery of plant life. 1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's unopened packaging labeled to indicate manufacturer's name and product identification. Ensure that packaging and labeling remain intact until installation. Materials shall be stored protected from the elements, including direct sunlight. B Pipes shall be handled so as to prevent them from being damaged and to maintain their straightness. Pipe ends shall be wrapped;Pipes shall be stored on beds the full length of the pipes; Damaged or dented pipes or fittings shall not be used. 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications,he may do so by providing the following information to the Owner's authorized representative for approval: 1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate sheet of paper for each item to be substituted. 2. Provide descriptive catalog literature,performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted. 3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. 12/2014 02811 - 5 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Owner's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications. 1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS A Furnish extra components listed as Extra Items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. 1. Two sprinkler heads of each type and size. 2. Two valve box keys. 3. Two wrenches for each type head core and for removing and installing each type head. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22,wrought-copper,solder joint fittings.Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123,cast-copper-alloy,hexagonal-stock body,with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. B Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22,wrought-copper,solder joint fittings.Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123,cast-copper-alloy,hexagonal-stock body,with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. C Mainline PVC pipe: 1. Pressure Main Line: 12/2014 02811 -6 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION a. All main line shall be schedule 40 with solvent welded joints. b. Pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipe must meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70, with an appropriate standard dimension(S.D.R.)(Solvent-weld pipe). 2. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Line Piping: a. Non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC class 200 with solvent-weld joints. b. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC com- pound conforming to ASTM resin specification D I 784. All pipes must meet requirements set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate standard dimension ratio. 3. Fittings 4"and larger shall be push-on Ductile Iron designed and manufactured using ASTM A-536 Grade 70-50-05 ductile iron with tensile strength of 70,000 psi such as manufactured by Harco or approved equal. 4. Fittings 3" and smaller shall be Schedule 40, I-2, II-I NSF approved conforming to ASTM test procedure D2466 PVC solvent-weld fittings. 5. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of Christie's Red Hot Blue Glue and Primer. 6. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Nominal pipe size. c. Schedule or class. d. Pressure rating in P.S.I. e. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval. f. Date of expiration. 7. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, applicable I.P.S., schedule number and NSF seal of approval D Irrigation Lateral Line pipe 1. Pipes 1/2 inch diameter and larger ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 21.0, 200 PSI 2. Pipes 1/4 inch diameter: ASTM D 2241, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 13.5, 315 PSI E Fittings for Threaded Joints 1. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80 F Length of pipes used 1. Use of pipe less than five(5)feet in length is prohibited unless otherwise noted on the plans. G No use of small scrap material to extend water lines 2.03 GENERAL DUTY VALVES A Gate valves 4" and smaller shall be MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising-stem, bronze body with solid wedge,.threaded ends, and malleable-iron hand wheel. 12/2014 02811 - 7 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Gate valves 3"and smaller shall be similar to those manufactured by Nibco,Hammond or approved equal C All gate valves shall be installed per installation detail. D Install six (6) inches of pee gravel into bottom of all valve boxes. E Gate valves 6 inch and larger shall be cast or ductile iron. They shall conform to AWWA C-509. Stem shall be fitted with a 2" x2" square wrench nut and shall be opened counter-clockwise. Stem extension shall be added to bring operating nut to within 2 (two) feet of finished grade. 2.04 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Molded-plastic body,normally closed,diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 1. All electric control valves shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All electric control valves shall have a manual flow adjustment and pressure regulating module. 3. Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve. 4. Electric remote control valve shall be Hunter ICV Series. 5. Install six (6) inches of pea gravel into bottom of all valve boxes. B Automatic Drain Valves 1. Spring-loaded-ball type of construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2%2 to 3 psi. C Quick-Couplers 1. Factory-fabricated,bronze or brass,two-piece assembly.Include coupler water- seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber- covered cap;hose swivel with ASME B 1.20.7,3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. a. Manufacturers: i. Hunter 2. All quick couplers shall be installed using "O"-ring style swing joint and located in 10" round valve box with purple lids. D Remote Control-Valve Boxes 1. Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with, grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 2. Valve boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 17 inch by 11-3/4 inch by 12 inch depth, black with black cover. 3. Valve box shall be Series 1419, non-hinged, non-bolt cover, by Carson Industries, Inc., or approved equal. a. Manufacturers: i. Carson Industries, LLC. ii. Christy Concrete Products, Inc. E Gate Valve and Control Wire Splice Boxes 12/2014 02811 -8 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1. Gate valves and control wire splice boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 10 inch diameter by 101/4 inch deep, black with black cover,No. 910-12B,by Carson Industries, Inc. or approved equal. F Drainage Backfill 1. Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/8 inch minimum to 1 inch maximum. 2.05 SPRINKLERS A Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated,at available water pressure.Manufacturers: Hunter Industries. B Flush, Surface Sprinklers or VANs (Variable Angle Nozzle): Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. C Bubblers: Fixed pattern,with screw-type flow adjustment. D Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. E Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel retraction spring. F Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full-circle and adjustable part- circle types. G Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types. H Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part- circle types. I Matched precipitation rates- Sprays and rotors shall have matching application rates within each irrigation zone. J MP Rotators: wind resistant multi stream nozzle 2.06 CONTROLLERS A The ACC controller shall be capable of two-wire decoder control of up to 99 stations via a plug-in decoder output module. The decoder output module shall be field- installable without tools.The decoder output module shall have an intrinsic capability of up to 99 stations, and shall occupy 3 modular expansion slots inside the ACC controller cabinet. B The decoder output module shall have 6 two-wire output paths to the field. The decoders may be wired in sequence over any combination of the two-wire paths, including all 99 on a single two-wire path.Each path may extend up to 10,000 ft.to the end of the wire run over 14 AWG(1.5mm dia.)wire,or 15,000 ft.over 12 AWG(2mm dia.) 12/2014 02811 -9 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C The wire paths shall be twisted pair; solid-core,color-coded red/blue pairs with each conductor in a polyethylene jacket suitable for direct burial. The two-wire paths shall be Hunter Industries Model IDWIRE I for 14 AWG (1.5mm) conductors, or Model IDWIRE2 for 12 AWG(2mm) conductors for extended range (over 10,000 ft.,up to 15,000 ft.). D All connections in the two-wire paths(outside the controller enclosure)shall be made with 3M DBR-6 waterproof,strain relieving direct burial connectors,or exact equals. Decoder output to solenoid connections shall be made with 3M DBY waterproof, strain-relieving connectors or exact equals.No substitution of wire or wire connection specifications is permissible. All connections,tees, and splices shall be positioned in valve boxes in valve boxes for future location and service. E One Decoder per valve, installed in the valve box is required unless otherwise approved. F The installer shall provide adequate earth ground(not to exceed I 0 Ohms)and connect it to one of the decoder ground leads every 750 ft., or every 10th decoder module, whichever is shorter. Also install on each dead end of the wire path. G The ICD decoders and Sensor Decoders shall be UL and c-UL listed,and shall be CE and C-tick approved. H Final location of automatic controllers shall be approved by the Owner's authorized representative. I Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the 120 volt electrical power to the automatic controller location to be furnished by others. The final electric hook-up shall be the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor. J If two wire systems are not fitting to the system needed, another Hunter Controller with conventional wiring will be used. K Controllers will be capable of communicating with offsite Hunter software, unless otherwise approved by owner. L Control Equipment - Irrigation control equipment shall include and automatic irrigation controller with the following features; program flexibility such as repeat cycles and multiple program capabilities; battery back-up to retain the irrigation programs; and a rain sensor device. 2.07 WIRING A Wiring: AWG-ULUF 600 volt with solid-copper conductors and insulated cable: suitable for direct burial. 1. Manufacturers: 12/2014 02811 - 10 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION a. Paige Cable b. Regency Wire and Cable c. Approved equal B Feeder-Circuit Cables:No. 12 AWG minimum,between building and controllers and runs over 1,000 LF. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color coded different from feeder- circuit-cable jacket color;with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench. C Install 3 spare wires from each controller to farthest valve in each direction. D Where more than one(1)wire is placed in a trench,the wiring shall be taped together at intervals of ten(10) feet. E An expansion curl shall be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection. Expansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each electric control, so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the surface without disconnecting the control wires. F Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench without stress or stretching of control wire conductors. G All splices shall be made with Scotch-Lok #3576 Connector Sealing Packs, DBY (Direct Bury) Splice by 3M or approved equal. Use one splice per connector sealing pack. H Field splices between the automatic controller and electrical control valves,less than 500' apart, will not be allowed without prior approval of the Architect. I All field splices shall be installed in a 10"round valve box as specified in section 2.04 2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A Backflow Preventers shall be bronze and copper,pressure vacuum breaker assembly Febco No. 765 by Febco Sales,Inc. (CMB Industries),or approved equal. Size as per drawings. 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow: Febco No. 825Y 2. Double Check Assembly: Febco No. 850 3. Or approved equal. 2.09 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE TIES A Remote control valve ties shall be Christy's Valve I.D.tag model ID-STD-Y with wire to attach numbered tag to valve. 2.10 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS 12/2014 0281 1 - 1 1 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A CHRISTY'S RED HOT BLUE GLUE T.Christy Enterprises,Inc.,or approved equal. Use a compatible primer recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer. 2.11 SEALANT FOR THREADED JOINTS UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE A RECTOR SEAL LIQUID TEFLON by Rector Seal Corp., or approved equal. 2.12 SLEEVES UNDER PAVING FOR CONTROL WIRE AND IRRIGATION LINES A ASTM D 2455, PVC, Schedule 40 sized as shown on drawings. 2.13 FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS A ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80 2.14 BACKFLOW ENCLOSURES A The backflow enclosure shall be of a vandal and weather resistant nature manufactured entirely of formed tubing and rod,coated with a performance polymer alloy coating to prevent injury. The mounting base and locking mechanism shall be manufactured entirely of metal or fiber glass.The locking mechanism shall be of the full release type which allows for complete removal of the enclosure from its mounting base without the use of tools. The handle controlling the locking mechanism shall be concealed within the surface of the enclosure and provide for a padlock. B The backflow enclosure shall be Strong Box Model manufactured by V.I.T.Products Inc., 800-729-1314.No. SBBC-30CR Or approved equal. C Hot Box Enclosure—CDR Systems Corporation or approved equal. 2.15 RAINFALL MONITOR A Provide a Mini-Clik by Hunter Industries or approved equal. 2.16 FLOW SENSOR A Install Flow sensor-Hunter Flow Click 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Site Conditions: 1. Verify location of existing utilities. 2. Verify that required utilities are available,in proper location,and ready for use. 3. All scaled dimensions are approximate. 4. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this section. 5. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. 12/2014 02811 - 12 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 6. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. 7. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe,so there shall be No interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. 8. Coordinate work with other site contractors. 9. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system. 10. No machine trenching,unless approved by Architect,is to be done within drip line of trees. Trenching is done by hand,tunneling or boring or other methods shall be approved by Architect. 11. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be routed around trees and shrubs in such manner to avoid damage to plants. 3.02 PREPARATION A Physical Layout: 1. Piping and head layout is shown on plans in schematic form only. 2. All pipes to be installed directly behind curbs, walks, and walls wherever possible. 3. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads. 4. All layouts shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. 5. Route pipes to avoid plants, ground cover and structures. 6. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. B Water Supply: 1. Sprinkler Irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points-of- connection as indicated on the drawings. 2. Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on drawings. Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. 3. Reclaimed systems utilizing purple pipe may be requested by owner. In the event of the installation of a reclaimed system.All components will utilize the same previously described manufacturer to provide`purple pipe'components. 4. All Reclaimed/Purple Pipe systems will conform to 30 TAC §344.1 3.03 TRENCHING A Refer to Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B Location of Heads - Design location is represented as accurately as possible. Make minor adjustments on site with approval of Landscape Architect as necessary to ensure consistent and even spacing where applicable. Set all heads minimum 6"from back of curb and 6" from edge of concrete walls. 12/2014 02811 - 13 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. D Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3,to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. E Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Sleeves: 24 inches. F Backfill 1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed, or until cover up is approved by the owner. 2. Trenches shall be carefully back-filled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling,consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. 3. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips,sunken areas,humps or other surface irregularities. 4. A sand material backfill will be initially placed on all lines (minimum 3" depth). No foreign matter larger than one-half(1/2) inch in size will be per- mitted in the initial backfill. 5. Where rock is encountered in trenching, 4" of sand above the pipe and 4" of sand below the pipe will be used as the initial backfill. 6. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of Architect. 7. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the Owner. 8. Trench shall be excavated to accommodate grade changes. 9. Trench shall not be left open overnight unless caution taped or fenced off 10. Existing Lawns-Where trenching is required across existing lawns,(or in the event of changes or repairs after new lawn has been established),uniformly cut strips of sod 6 inches wider than trench. Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep moistened until replanted. 11. Backfill trench to within 6 inches of finished grade and compact. 12. Continue fill with acceptable topsoil and compact to bring sod even with existing lawn. 13. Replant sod within 2 days after removal,roll and water generously;unless new sod or hydro mulch is to be installed. 14. All sod areas not in healthy condition equal to adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting shall be re-sodded and restored to original condition. 3.04 INSTALLATION 12/2014 02811 - 14 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A Pipes 1. Piping Mains and Laterals - Lay out sprinkler mainlines and perform line adjustments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation.Lay pipe on solid sub base, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 2. Coordinate pipe installation with conduit installation. 3. PVC pipe Assembly a. Cut PVC pipe square and de-burr. b. Clean pipe and fittings using primer as recommended by the PVC pipe manufacturer. Use tinted primer to aid in visual inspection and blue glue. c. Apply a thin even flow coat of PVC solvent cement to inside of the fitting and pipe mating surface. d. Cure joints as recommended by the manufacturer and keep pipe and fitting out of service during curing period. e. Construct watertight joints equal or greater in strength than the pipe. Do not tap pipe at fittings. f. Install plastic pipe in dry weather, when temperature is above 40 degrees F.and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. g. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees F before testing. h. Plastic pipe shall be snaked in the trenches in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer. i. Extend primer 1/2" beyond glue joint for visual inspection. j. Ensure that the pipe is not laid on top of fittings and put under stress in any way prior to cover-up. B Sleeves under Paving 1. The majority of sleeves under paving exist as shown on drawings. Where boring is required for new sleeves(refer to drawings),it shall be a"wet bore." Install sleeves 12" beyond edge of pavement. Perform trench and backfill in accordance with these specifications. 2. Sleeves shall be marked on the concrete with 1/4"deep "V" cut into curb. C Concrete Thrust Blocks 1. Install where the rubber-gasketed irrigation main changes direction as at ells and tees and where the rubber-gasketed main terminates. 2. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of 36 to 48 hours following the completion of pouring of the blocks. 3. Blocks for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's specifications and shall be of an adequate size and so placed as to take all thrust created by the maximum internal water pressure. D Irrigation Heads 1. Flush irrigation lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed. 2. Install heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. 12/2014 02811 - 15 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 3. Locate part-circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4, 12, 24, 48 inches from walls and inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Check for uniformity of coverage and pattern correctness. Adjust for 100% coverage where required. 5. Install nozzles with water running at reduced pressure starting with the head closest to the valve. 6. Adjust arcs and radius at normal operating pressure. 7. Ensure heads do not spray into areas not intended to receive water. Example: streets and sidewalks. 8. Install heads at minimum of six (6)inches from back of curb. 9. Spacing - Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 55 percent of the sprinkler diameter of coverage. 10. Separate spray and rotors - Sprays and rotors shall not be combined on the same control valve circuit E Drip Tubing 1. Tubing installed in planting beds is to be placed at spacing indicated on drawings in shallow trench and covered with planting backfill mix 1"-2"deep and then covered with mulch. 2. Tubing is to be placed after bed preparation is complete and plant material is planted and root ball anchor is installed. 3. Drip tubing is to be placed on top of root balls of trees in planting beds to allow for even watering of trees. 4. All tubing is to be reviewed by Owner's Representative prior to burying. F Electric Remote Control Valves 1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each irrigation section. 2. Install valves in valve boxes,arranged for easy adjustment and removal.Locate valves to ensure ease of access for maintenance such that no physical interference with other elements of the project exists. 3. Remote Control Valve Tags to be used in Section 2.09 4. One Remote Control Valve Tag shall be attached to stem of each electric remote control valve. Tags shall be numbered sequentially. Numbers shall correspond to station numbers in electric controller. Provide tags and corresponding numbers for wires pulled for future valves. 5. Valve Boxes - Install valve boxes to cover electric remote control valves. Install one valve per valve box. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support. 6. Control Wire Splice Boxes-Install control wire splice box to cover any splice in control wire. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support.Install control wire splice box to cover wires pulled for future valves. G Gravel Backfill 1. Backfill valve boxes and control wire splice boxes with gravel, minimum 6 inch depth. 12/2014 02811 - 16 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION H Electric Controller 1. Controllers shall be fully grounded. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond with stations 1, 2, 3, successively. 3. Affix a non-fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below controller's name.Irrigation diagram shall be sealed between two plastic sheets, 20 mils. Minimum thickness. Irrigation diagram shall show clearly all valves operated by the controller, showing station number, valve size, and type of planting irrigated. 4. Provide lockable cabinet.Provide two keys to Owner.Keys to be matched with existing controller key locking mechanisms. 5. Power to Controller&Locations: Locations shown on plan for controllers is approximate. Final location shall be determined on site by Owner. 6. Contractor shall supply 120 VAC to controller from adjacent existing power sources. Follow local governing codes in electrical work. 7. Lightning Protection and Grounding: Provide full grounding and lightning protection per system manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Wall mounted controllers; electrical meters and breaker boxes shall be mounted on I-beam structures. Irrigation Control Wires 1. Provide 24 volt system for control of automatic circuit-section valves of underground irrigation system.Provide unit capacity to suit number of circuits indicated. 2. Install control wires with irrigation mains and laterals in common trench where possible.Lay control wires neatly together to side of pipe.Provide looped slack at valves,comers,bores and snake wire in trench to allow for contraction.Tie wires in bundles at 10 foot intervals. Line splices will be allowed on runs of 500 Ft.or more. Splices shall be made and placed in control wire splice boxes. 3. Provide 12 inch long expansion loop within 3 feet of each wire connection and splice on runs of wire 100 feet or longer. J Backflow Preventers 1. Make required connection to water supply according to local codes and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install pressure type backflow devices at required grade in accordance with the local Plumbing Code. 3. Insulate all above ground piping. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A General - Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance when testing will be conducted. Conduct tests in presence of Landscape Architect and owner. B The Parks and Recreation Department will conduct open trench inspections daily,prior to cover-up. 12/2014 02811 - 17 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Hydrostatic Test - Test irrigation main line, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi for 1 hour. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work.Remove and repair or replace piping and connections which do not pass hydrostatic testing. D Shut off mainline at backflow preventer during non-working hours until Contractor has demonstrated the mainline is stable. E Operational Testing - Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed,backfill is in place and irrigation heads are adjusted to final position. F Demonstrate to Landscape Architect that system meets coverage requirements, is as specified and indicated, and that automatic controls function properly. G Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time. H After completion of grading, sodding and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with finish grade. Set shrub sprinkler heads not more than 1/2 inch above top of mulch. I Ensure watering does not extend into unintended areas, such as roadways and sidewalks. J Field inspection and testing will be performed. K Prior to filling,test system for leakage for whole system to maintain 100 psi pressure for one hour. 3.06 FILLING A Provide 3 inch sand cover over piping.Fill trench and compact to subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement. 3.07 ADJUSTING A Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required. B Change and adjust head types for full water coverage as directed. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall correctly maintain the irrigation system during the installation process and throughout the landscaping maintenance service period. B Contractor shall provide "As Built" Drawings for new work, showing dimensioned location of valves,meters,backflow preventers,controllers,and mainline.Contractor shall request reproducible mylar from the Landscape Architect in preparation of"As Built" Drawings. Contractor shall also provide a small laminated set of plans in each irrigation controller, which is color coded for each set of heads each valve operates. 12/2014 02811 - 18 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Maintenance and management - The landscape and irrigation system shall be maintained and managed to ensure water efficiency, and prevent wasteful practices. This should include,but not limited to:resetting the automatic controller according to the season; flushing the filters; testing the rain sensor device; monitoring, adjusting, and repairing irrigation equipment such that the efficiency of the system is maintained and utilizing turf and landscape best management practices during the maintenance period. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A Provide system demonstration. B Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjustment of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. END OF SECTION 12/2014 02811 - 19 of 19 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES Section 02820 WOOD FENCES AND GATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fence framework, material components, and accessories. B Excavation for post bases, concrete foundation for posts, and installation of gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for type and height noted, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for gates shall be per each, complete in place. C Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and specific description of material components. C Product Data: Provide data on material components including posts, rails, bracing, accessories, fittings, and hardware. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fence height shall be as indicated on Plans or as noted to match height of existing. B Line post spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, or as shown on Plans. 07/2006 02820- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES C Provide bracing as appropriate for structural integrity. D Concrete posts in the ground at a depth of, at least, 1/2 the height of the fence. E The diameter of the post hole shall be, at least, 11 times that of the post,or as shown on Plans. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Company specializing in installation of the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2.0 PRODUCTS A When the Work entails replacement of fence structures, the products shall match or exceed the quality of existing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install fence in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and these Technical Specifications. B Use a Class B concrete base or better to set posts into the ground. Allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days before attaching remainder of fence. C Where type of material applies,use standard fence stretching equipment to stretch the fencing before tying it to the rails and posts. Repeat the stretching and tying operations about every 100 feet. Use bottom tension wire where specified on Plans. D Erect gates so they swing or slide in the appropriate direction. Provide gate stops as required. Secure hardware,adjust,and leave in perfect working order. Adjust hinges and diagonal bracing so that gates will hang level. Adjust rollers and guides of sliding gates so that gates are level. E Accommodate contour of ground as indicated on Plans. F Where new fence joins an existing fence, set a corner post and brace post at the junction, or tie in as directed on Plans. G Nuts and bolts shall be in conformance with ASTM-A307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. 07/2006 02820-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES H Other hardware indicated on Plans shall be in accordance with ASTM Standards. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02820-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES Section 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. B Excavation for post bases,concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built-Up Roofing" b. ASTM A 1011, "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy and High- Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability" c. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for height noted,measured and complete in place. B Measurement for gates shall be per each, complete in place. C Payment for chain link fences and gates includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 07/2006 02821 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES B Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. C Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware that indicates that items match or exceed the quality of existing. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fence Height shall be as indicated on Plans or as noted to match height of existing. B Extension arms for barbed wire shall match existing. C Line Post Spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, or as shown on Plans. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED FENCING A Fence fabric shall be No. 9 steel wire, hot galvanized after weaving, to match or exceed existing. B Framework shall be hot-dipped galvanized with a minimum coating of 2 ounces/sf,or one ounce/sf plus 30 micrograms/square inch chromate conversion coating. C Line posts shall be 2" and conform to ASTM A 570 Grade 45 steel or ASTM A 569, cold rolled steel. All posts shall have spherical plugs. D End corner, angle, and pull posts shall be 2 1//2"and conform to ASTM A 570 Grade 45 steel or ASTM A 569 for steel pipe. E Top rails shall be 1.65 x 1.25 inch formed C-section;or 1.6 inch round ASTM A 569, 1.35 lbs/ft;or one 5/8 inch outside diameter steel pipe,2.27 lbs/ft. Top rails shall pass through openings provided for that purpose in post tops. F Fabric ties shall be hog rings, galvanized steel wire not less than 9-ga with a zinc coating of not less than 1.2 ounces/sf. G Bolts and nuts shall be in conformance with ASTM A 307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. 07/2006 02821 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES H Install horizontal braces fabricated of one 5/8 inch,2.271b copper bearing steel pipe at all corner, gate, and end posts. I All posts to have malleable iron top caps. J Bottom tension wire shall be#7 gauge wire. K Gates shall be either swing or slide as shown on the plans. Swing gates shall be hinged to swing 90 degrees from closed to open or hinged to swing 180 degrees from close to open. Slide gates shall be roller type with no vertical obstructions. All gate leaves shall have intermediate members and diagonal stress rods as required for rigid construction and shall be free from sag or twist. All gates shall be fitted with vertical extension arms or shall have frame end number extended to carry barbed wire. Gate posts for gates shall be 4-inch, 9.1 lb pipe. Gate frames shall be made of 2-inch outside diameter,castings. Fabric shall be the same as for the fence. Gates shall have malleable iron ball and socket hinges, catches, stops and padlocks with 3 keys each. Posts for single gates shall be the same as end posts. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install chain link fence in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and these Specifications. B Install line fence posts at not more than l Oft centers and concreted at least 36 inches x 12"diameter into the ground in a Class B concrete base. Allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days before erecting remainder of fence. Fasten fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced about 14 inches apart and to top rail spaced about 24 inches apart. C Use standard chain link fence stretching equipment to stretch the fabric before tying it to the rails and posts. Repeat the stretching and tying operations about every 100 feet. D Erect gates so they swing or slide in the appropriate direction. Provide gate stops as required. Secure hardware,adjust, and leave in perfect working order. Adjust hinges and diagonal bracing so that gates will hang level. Adjust rollers and guides of sliding gates so that gates are level. E At small natural or drainage ditches where it is not practical for the fence to conform to the contour of the ground, span the opening below the fence with wire fastened to stakes of required length. The finished fence shall be plumb, taut, true to line and ground contour. When directed, stake down the chain link fence at several points between posts. 07/2006 02821 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES F Where new fence joins an existing fence, set a corner post and brace post at the junction and brace as directed. If the connection is made at other than the corner of the new fence the last span of the old fence shall contain a brace. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02821 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL Section 02910 TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02200—Site Preparation 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality, material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02910- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the#280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,weeds,non-soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots,stumps,and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPILING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches,or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees,excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02910-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING Section 02921 HYDROMULCH SEEDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintaining areas of commercial, industrial, or undeveloped land disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMEN AND PAYMENT A Measurement for hydromulch seeding is on a per acre basis,measured and complete in place. B Payment for hydromulch seeding shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and preparation necessary for application and maintenance. C No payment shall be made for hydromulch seeding used in restoration of areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02921 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Seed: Conform to U.S.Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80 percent germination and meet the following requirements: 1. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed in labeled Proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers. 2. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon dactylon). Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight, analysis, name of vender, and germination test results. 3. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. D Fertilizer:Dry and free flowing,inorganic,water soluble commercial fertilizer,which is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Caked,damaged,or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of the following elements: Nitrogen: 10 Percent Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent Potash: 10 Percent E Mulch:Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having a minimum of 20 percent fibers 0.42 inches(10.7 mm)in length and 0.01 inches(0.27 mm)in diameter. Mulch shall be dyed green for coverage verification purposes. F Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal. G Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, "Benefin" or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start or perform work under conditions that are not satisfactory to perform tasks due to inclement or impending inclement weather. B After the areas to receive hydromulch seeding have been brought to grade,rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps, and other debris. 07/2006 02921 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact a layer of topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 —Topsoil. F Surface of topsoil shall be smooth and free of weeds,rocks,and other foreign material immediately before applying hydromulch seeding. 3.02 APPLICATION A Seed: Apply uniformly at the following rates for type of seed and planting date: APPLICATION PLANTING TYPE RATE DATE POUNDS/A Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Jan 1 to Mar 31 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Apr 1 to Sep 30 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Oct 1 to Dec 31 Annual Rye Grass(Gulf) 30 B Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 500 pounds per acre. C Mulch: Apply uniformly at a rate of 50 pounds per 1000 square feet. D Soil stabilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 40 pounds per acre. E Weed control agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to Hydromulching. F Suspend all operations under conditions of drought,excessive moisture,high winds,or extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain the Engineer's approval before resuming operations. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintain grassed areas by watering,fertilizing,weeding,and trimming as required to establish and sustain 70% acceptable vegetative cover. B For areas seeded in the fall, continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 07/2006 02921 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain grassed areas a minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. B Once a lawn is established, protect and maintain it until completion of the Work. C Replace seeded areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02921 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn -ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod-blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones,hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (±1") layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING Section 02931 LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing all plants and trees, labor, equipment, appliances and materials for landscape and tree planting. Rough and finish grading is part of the landscape work. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02910—Topsoil 4. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 5. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Landscape Planting is on a Lump Sum. B Payment for Tree Planting is on lump sum basis for each tree planted. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit samples of the plants and grasses to be used for approval prior to installation. Inspection will be done on the project site. C Provide materials from the same source and of the same quality and variety as those inspected and approved. D Soils and/or compost materials must be approved at their source prior to delivery. 1.04 REFERENCES A ANSI Z 60.1 -Nursery Stock. B Federal Specification Q-P-166E- Peat, Moss; Peat, Humus; and Peat, Reed-Sedge. 1.05 SCHEDULE A The plant schedule gives quantities, scientific names, common names, sizes, and special remarks. 12/2014 02931 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B The plant list conforms with Standardized Plant Names, 1942,and American Standard for Nursery Stock, 1949, revised April 14, 2014, as prepared by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature and the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. C In case of discrepancies between the plant list and drawings, the working drawings shall govern. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Pack all plant material to provide protection against damage from wind, weather or other possible sources. Tie plants to prevent whipping when shipment is made by truck. B When shipment is made by rail,pack plants and ventilate cars as required to prevent sweating. C Provide a platform from all B&B root balls over 24 inches in diameter. D Store plants on the site as directed. E Spray with anti-transpirant at time of delivery in warm season months. Apply at rates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Ship trees with Certificates of Inspection as required by governing authorities. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. G Deliver packaged materials in fully labeled original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at Site. H Materials shall not be pruned prior to installation unless approved by the Engineer in writing. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Use protective covering during delivery. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A Substitution of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit cost. B Substitution of an alternate species may be accepted upon written approval from the Engineer. 1.08 ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL A There will be no partial acceptance of grasses. 12/2014 02931 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B Upon Contractor's request,final approval will be made within 15 working days of date of notice to the Engineer if contracted work has been satisfactorily completed. C Final approval of grasses will be given when the following conditions are met: 1. There are no bare spots larger than 9 inches square. • 2. The total area of bare spots does not exceed 5 percent of the entire grass area. 1.09 WARRANTY A Provide 1-year warranty on all plants and grasses. The warranty period commences after final completion. B Replace plants that fail during the warranty period according to the specifications governing the original plants. C Periodically inspect plants for proper watering and spraying,during warranty period. D Damage caused by natural hazards such as hail,high winds or storm is not covered by the warranty. E Plant materials and grasses which die due to normal insects or diseases are included in the warranty. F Existing in situ plant material required to be moved on the site will be protected under the warranty. G Contractor shall warrant trees against defects including death,unsatisfactory growth,or loss of shape due to improper pruning,maintenance,or weather conditions,for 1 year after completion of planting. Contractor shall plumb leaning trees during warranty period. H Remove and replace trees found to be dead during warranty period. Remove and replace trees which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period,or if approved by the Engineer, extend warranty period for such trees for a full growing season. 1.10 SOIL ANALYSIS A Submit for approval an analysis of all soils obtained from off-site sources prior to delivery. B Analysis of existing soil is not required. 1.11 PLANT CERTIFICATES A Submit inspection certificates approved by the Engineer as required by law with the invoice for each shipment or order of stock: 1. Submit certificates to the Engineer for review in ample time to be reviewed and meet installation schedule. 12/2014 02931 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Take all reasonable precautions to prevent injury to people and to avoid damage to existing structures,plants and grasses. Keep the area free of hazardous obstructions. B Construct barricades where necessary for the protection of persons and property. Mark all barricades with red and white paint and with red reflectors. Erect barricades in the following locations: 1. Areas dangerous to workmen and passersby. 2. Along adjoining property that requires protection. 3. Across streets and walks that are temporarily closed or rerouted. 4. Around plants and trees to be protected. C Excavations larger than 1 foot deep and 1 foot wide must be covered when not attended. D Existing trees which may be subject to damage must be protected by fencing or boxing. E During the course of planting operations, protect all installed plants and lawns from damage. If heavy equipment or materials must be moved across lawns,use planks or pontoons to protect the turf. Similarly protect walks across which heavy equipment must pass. 1.13 DEFINITIONS A In situ refers to any soil which is existing and in place on the project site at the time landscape work commences. B Establishment period refers to a period of 45 days after installation during which time 5 percent of the construction costs will be withheld. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Landscaper shall be a firm specializing in landscape and planting work. B Do not make substitutions of approved trees unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non- availability together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Substitutions of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit price. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910 - Topsoil. B Peat moss, bark, and fertilizer: Use material recommended by nursery for establishment of healthy stock after replanting. Moss shall conform to requirements of Federal Specification Q-P-166E. 12/2014 02931 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.02 FERTILIZER A Provide an inorganic commercial fertilizer which is uniform in composition,dry and free flowing, in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. 1. For lawns: 12-24-12. 2. For ground cover areas,shrub beds and tree holes: 20-10-5(Except for Genus Pyrus(Pear). 2.03 ADDITIVES A Adjustment of pH. For topsoil to attain the specified pH level, furnish raw, ground agricultural limestone containing not less than 85 percent calcium carbonate of which 50 percent will pass through a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent through a 70-mesh sieve. Wait 2 months after planting before application of fertilizer. 1. following table is a guideline to establish the pounds of limestone needed per 1000 square feet of turf: LIMESTONE NEEDED PER 1000 SQUARE FEET SOIL PH SANDS,LOAMY SANDS SANDY LOAM CLAY LOAM,CLAY >6.0 0 0 0 5.1 - 6.0 50 75 100 <5.0 100 125 175 B Humus. Provide a rich humus material free of sticks, stones, weedy roots, or other foreign matter. Humus must have ample water holding capacity and plant food retention. Use a humus with a dark brown to black color. C Dressing Mulch. Provide pine or redwood bark that is evenly shredded,consisting of 90 percent organic matter, brown in color, and free of harmful minerals. Maximum particle size not to exceed 3 inches in diameter. D Sharp Sand. Obtain clean sharp sand of hard durable grains, free from dirt, organic matter or other impurities. Use sand with a grade between 0.05 mm and 2 mm. E Concrete Gravel. Provide clean,crushed stone consisting of hard, durable,uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft friable, thin or laminated pieces. Use gravel which conforms to ASTM C 33. The sieve size will be 3/4 inch, 90 to 100 percent passing. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS A Root Ball Anchors: 1. Duck bills will be used to secure the root ball anchors. B Edging: 12/2014 02931 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1. Provide 1/2-inch x 4 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber headerboard. 2. Provide 1 inch x 2 inches x 12 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber stakes. C Cloth for Balling Trees. Use burlap of jute weighing at least 7.2 ounces per square yard. Secure balled plants with 2-ply twine made of jute. D Paper for Wrapping Trees. Use first quality, 4-inch-wide bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to resist insect infestation. E Materials for Flagging Trees: 1. Mark guyed trees with surveyors white plastic tape. 2. Use surveyors plastic tape for marking as follows. a. Red to be removed. b. Yellow to be transplanted. c. Green to remain. d. Blue to identify special handling. F Labels. Legibly label plants with durable labels that identify the plant by scientific and common name. Use waterproof ink. G Tree Seal. All pruning cuts,bruises,or scars over 3/4 inch in diameter on trees will be treated with a commercial tree wound dressing. H Polyethylene. Use virgin base,resin blended polyethylene sheeting with carbon black concentrate of 2.5 percent. 2.05 SPRAYS A Sterilization: 1. Use approved solution of Dyclomec 4G, or equal, for areas to be planted. 2. Use Pramitol, or equal, for areas to be paved. B Herbicides: 1. Use an approved systemic non-selective,post emergent herbicide on specified areas to kill all vegetation. 2. Use Confront, or equal, for general control of broadleaf weeds in lawns. 3. Use Preemerg, Eptam, Dryclomec, or equal for ground cover. 4. Use an approved pre-emergent to control seed germination in specified areas. C Antitranspirant: 1. Use approved antitranspirant for all plant material that is stored and/or heeled- in on the site. 2. Use approved antitranspirant on all planted trees and shrubs. D Root Stimulant. Use approved root stimulant on all newly planted trees,shrubs,vines and/or ground cover areas. 12/2014 02931 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.06 PLANT CHARACTERISTICS A Provide plants which are true to type and name,and typical of their species or variety. Plants must have a normal, well-developed branch structure, with a vigorous root system, and must be generally sound and healthy. Use plants which are free from defects, including: 1. Disfiguring knots. 2. Sun scald. 3. Injuries. 4. Bark abrasions. 5. Plant diseases. 6. Insect eggs. 7. Borers. 8. Infestations. B Select well-formed plants balanced between height and spread typical of the species or variety with branches in normal position. Heading back plants to meet size limits will not be permitted. C Unless otherwise specified, all plants will be nursery grown and at least twice transplanted. Use plants which have been growing under similar climatic conditions to those of the project for at least 2 years prior to the date of the contract. Recently stepped-up plants will not be acceptable. All B&B or bare root plants must be freshly dug; heeled-in or cold storage plants will not be accepted. D Balled,bare root,and container-grown plants will conform to the definitions given in American Standards for Nursery Stock. E No tree will be accepted which has had leaders cut or damaged, or which has a thin, weak trunk and/or poorly formed tops. F Regardless of sample selection, a plant may be rejected at the site by the Engineer. 2.07 NURSERY STOCK A Deciduous Trees. Provide trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown must be in good overall proportion to the entire height of the tree. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line will be furnish. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk. 1. For trees up to 4 inches in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above ground. 2. For trunks larger than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above ground. B Evergreen Trees. Form of the top will be typical of the species and not unnaturally sheared or color-treated. Measure by average caliper. Caliper will be taken 6 inches above the ground on trees up to 4 inches in diameter and 12 inches above the ground on trees larger than 4 inches. 12/2014 02931 - 7of15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Vines and Ground Cover. Provide plants which are container-grown for sufficient time to ensure adequate root growth to hold the soil in place and retain the original shape when removed from the container. 2.08 FIELD-COLLECTED PLANTS A Field-collected plants must be grown in favorable locations that ensure fibrous roots and vigorous growth. Such plants will be selected on site by the Landscape architect. B Provide balls at least 1/3 greater in diameter than those specified for nursery stock. C If dug in dormant season and bare root is acceptable, the spread of roots must be at least 1/3 greater than the spread of roots for bare root nursery stock. 2.09 SEED A Seasonal Limitations: 1. Bermuda: a. Hulled seeds may be planted between October and March. b. Unhulled seeds may be planted between April and September. 2. Rye: a. Plant between October and February. B Bermuda. Provide common Bermuda seed that is extra-fancy, treated, lawn type. Deliver in original,unopened container showing weight,analysis,name of vendor and germination test results. Wet,moldy,or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. C Rye. Deliver annual Winter Rye seed in original unopened containers. Seed must be fresh, clean, and mixed in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. 2.10 HYDROMULCH A Provide hydromulch seeding as noted in Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. 2.11 GRASS A Obtain certified sod from an approved source. B Provide material which is true to type and name,and is typical of the species or variety. C Delivery: 1. Identify and tag sods with correct scientific and common name for each species. 2. Do not deliver more sods than can be planted within 8 hours. 3. Transport and deliver sods in/on pallets. 4. Protect sods against dehydration, overheating or contamination during transportation and delivery. 12/2014 02931 - 8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 5. Cover unplanted sods with moistened burlap to prevent dehydration or overheating while awaiting installation. 6. Sods must be harvested within 12 hours of planting and arrive at the project site in a moist condition. D Products: 1. Material to be uniform in color, leaf texture and density. 2. Material to be graded No. 1, or better. 3. Uniform mowed height at time of harvesting material: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Inspected and certified free of diseases,nematodes,and undesirable insects by authorized representative of State Department of Agriculture. 5. Material will not be acceptable if it contains any quack grass, Johnson grass, poison ivy,nut grass,thistle,common bent grass,wild garlic,morning glory, perennial sorrell, or brome grass. 6. Turf will be considered weed free when found to contain less than 1 percent of dandelion,jimson weed,mustard, chickweed,per 100 square feet. 2.12 TREES A Provide container grown trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown shall be in good overall proportion to the entire height of tree with branching configuration as recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species specified. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line shall be furnished. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk as follows: 1. For trunks up to 4 inches or less in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above top of root ball. 2. For trunks more than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above top of root ball. 3. Caliper measurements shall be by diameter tape measure. Indicated calipers on plans are minimum. Averaging of plant calibers will not be allowed. B Trees shall conform to following requirements: 1. Healthy,vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery. 2. Free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae; and free of defects such as knots, sun- scald, injuries, abrasions, disfigurement, or borers and infestations. 2.13 WATER A Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Notify Engineer,prior to installation, of location where trees that have been selected for planting may be inspected. Plant material will be inspected for compliance with following requirements. 1. Genus, species, variety, size and quality. 2. Size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects. 12/2014 02931 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.15 WORK CONDITIONS A Site Availability. Begin no landscape work where conflicting site work is incomplete or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. B Weather Restrictions. Stop all work during inclement weather such as drought,high winds, excessive rain, extreme heat, cold, or freeze. Obtain authorization before resuming work. 2.16 PLANTING PROCEDURES A Temporary Nursery. A temporary nursery may be used to store plants, but no more than 5 days before planting. Keep plants well watered and protected. 1. Immediately upon delivery, heel-in balled and burlapped (B&B) plants and spray all plants with an antitranspirant. Apply spray from top to bottom. Thoroughly cover plants,but not to the point of run-off. Spray block units and not individual plants. Use a low-pressure,fine-mist applicator. Spray at rates recommended in the manufacturer's directions. 2. Handle all balled and burlapped plants by the ball only. 3. Upon delivery, immediately heel-in bare root plants. Open bundles, separate plants, set roots in trenches, and cover with topsoil. Water plants with an approved root stimulant containing vitamin B. 4. Handle container plants by the container. 5. Handle ground cover plants in flats. Pack flats tightly together and sprinkle plants everyday. 6. Special plants so designated must be kept in an approved enclosure or planted the day of delivery. 7. Store soils and additives on approved platforms. B Digging and Handling: 1. The actual planting operation must proceed without delay and in a manner to avoid undue drying of the in-situ soil or roots because of exposure to air and sun. Keep an ample supply of sawdust available to cover the roots of B&B stock arriving from the storage nursery. Keep the roots well covered and moist until the plants can be placed in the final location and permanently planted. 2. Handle all plant stock with care to prevent injuries to the trunk,branches and roots. 3. Dig bare root plants when fully dormant. Keep all of the root system intact;do not prune the root system. However, any roots that are broken, crushed, or bruised must be cleanly cut back to sound wood. Make the cut on an angle so that the exposed end faces downward. Seal any cut root exceeding 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. 4. Balled and burlapped plants must have the root system encased in a firm,solid ball of natural earth,wrapped in burlap and tightly bound. Each ball must be of sufficient size to encompass all the fibrous feeding roots and not smaller than required by American Standards for Nursery Stock. The ball must remain firm and compact throughout the planting operations. 12/2014 02931 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A Schedule work so that planting can proceed rapidly as portions of site become available. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise approved by Engineer in writing. If planting of trees occurs after seeding work,protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from tree planting operations. B Layout individual trees at locations shown on Drawings. In case of conflicts, notify Engineer before proceeding with Work. Trees shall be staked and approved by Engineer prior to planting. C Existing Trees: 1. Protection: Protect tops,trunks and roots of trees to remain on the site. Before starting work, box, fence or otherwise protect trees subject to construction damage. Remove boxing when directed. Permit no stockpiles of heavy equipment within the branch spread of trees. 2. Removal: Remove trees marked for removal. Do not remove any tree without proper authorization. Stumps within 36 inches of final grade must also be removed. 3. Pruning and Surgery: Cut and trim trees only as directed;do not cut any tree without proper authorization. Trim existing trees of dead or diseased limbs. Cut limbs close to the trunk. Cover cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree would dressing. D Grading Around Trees. As required,fill or grade within the branch spread of trees to remain, observing the following requirements. 1. For trenching beneath trees, tunnel under the tree roots with careful hand digging. Where possible, avoid cutting or injuring roots. 2. Do not raise or lower the grade around an existing tree in any way unless so directed. E Placing Topsoil: 1. Disk,drag,harrow,or handrake subgrade. Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 1- 1/2 inches. Before placing topsoil, rake the subsoil surface clear of stones, wood,rubbish and other debris. Place no topsoil until the subgrade preparation has been approved. 2. Spread,rake, and compact topsoil to form a layer with a minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 6 inches in shrub areas. Place topsoil to conform to finished gradients as shown on the grading plan. 3. Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. 12/2014 02931 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING F In Situ Soil Preparation: 1. Cross-till in two directions all existing soil in designated areas to be planted,as follows: a. In lawn areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. b. In shrub areas to a minimum depth of 10 inches. 2. Evenly broadcast fertilizers and soil additives and thoroughly work into soil. a. Smooth all tilled and amended areas to establish a rough gradient. b. Deeply irrigate all tilled and amended areas to thoroughly wet soil particles and promote settlement. c. After a settlement period of not less than 5 days,and before proceeding with any planting, smooth and rake as necessary to establish finish gradient as required. 3. In all areas which have been utilized for parking, storage or construction lots and/or where heavy equipment has been used, cross-rip the entire compacted areas in two directions to a depth of 10 inches before tilling and amending the soil as specified. A heavy float or drag harrow should be used to smooth all surface areas. a. Verify location of all underground utilities before ripping. b. Ripping teeth should not be set at more than 10-inch spacing. G Fertilizer. Evenly broadcast and work fertilizer into soil at the following rates: 1. Lawns: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. 2. Ground Cover, Shrub, and Tree Areas: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. H Additives: 1. Humus. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 2. Sharp Sand. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 3. Concrete Gravel. Utilize as a drainage course as shown on construction drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B Strip and utilize 4-inch layer of top soil,placed on esplanades under Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding, for planting soil mixture. C Mix recommended soil amendments with topsoil at following rates: 1. Top soil: 50 percent. 2. Peat moss: 25 percent. 3. Well rotted Bark: 25 percent. 4. Fertilizer: Rate recommended by nursery. D Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within 48 hours,unless otherwise directed. 12/2014 02931 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING E Incorporate amendments into the soil as a part of the soil preparation process prior to fine grading,fertilizing,and planting. Broadcast or spread amendments evenly at the specified rate over the planting area. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into the top 3 or 4 inches of soil until amendments are pulverized and have become a homogeneous layer of topsoil ready for planting. 3.03 PLANTING A Excavate pits, beds, or trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation raised a minimum of 6 inches at center for proper drainage. Provide following minimum widths: 1. 15-gallon containers or larger, 2 feet wider than diameter of root ball. 2. 1-and 5-gallon containers, 6 inches wider than diameter of root ball. B When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, or adverse drainage conditions, notify the Engineer of such conditions before planting. C Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after deliver, set trees and shrubs in shade,protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap, or other acceptable means of retaining moisture, and water as needed. D Set root ball on undisturbed soil in center of pit or trench and plumb plant. Place plants at such a level that, after settlement, a natural relationship of plant crown with ground surface will be established. E When set,place additional backfill around base and sides of ball,and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full,water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. F Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches and planted areas. Provide no more than 4-inch thickness of mulch,work into top of backfill,and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Cover entire root ball. G Prune, thin out and shape trees in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed in writing, • do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured and dead branches from flowering trees. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. H Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures. I Anchor root ball immediately after planting. 12/2014 02931 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING J Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities. 3.04 PLANTING GRASS A Preparation: Prepare imported topsoil and/or in situ soil. Hand rake to remove all sticks, stones and clods larger than 1 inch. Apply the final grade but do not mechanically compact the soil. B Seed: 1. Evenly broadcast seed specified in 2.09 at the following rates: a. Bermuda: 1 pound per 1000 square feet b. Rye: 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2. Roll the entire seeded area in two directions with a dry/weighted roller. 3. Evenly top dress the entire seeded area with an approved sterilized commercial steer manure. Apply at 2 cubic feet per 100 square feet. 4. Lightly but thoroughly sprinkle the entire seeded area with water after top dress application. C Sod: 1. Use Bermuda, Buffalo, or St. Augustine sod in accordance with 2.11 A. 2. Prepare soil in accordance with 3.03. 3. Apply eptam (or approved equal) to all areas to be sodded. Follow manufacturer's recommended rates and apply during soil preparation period. 4. Lay sod in a running bond pattern. Pieces should be consistently cut with joints tightly butted together. Water the in-place sod liberally and roll it in two direction with a heavy roller. Areas not level due to fluctuations in the sod depth should be covered and leveled with a 50/50 mix of sharp sand and topsoil. Fertilize in 6 weeks as directed by landscape Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A The Engineer may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at anytime during progress of Work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with these Specifications will be rejected. B An inspection to determine final acceptance will be conducted by the Engineer at the end of the 12 month maintenance period. Additional inspections will be conducted for extended warranty periods provided for in paragraph 1.07B. 3.06 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall maintain trees during planting operations and for a period of 12 months after completion of planting. B Water trees to full depth a minimum of once each week, or as required to maintain a healthy vigorous growth. 12/2014 02931 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Prune, cultivate, and weed as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair rootball anchors, and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A During planting work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B Protect planting work and materials from damage due to planting operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance period. Treat, repair, or replace damaged planting work as directed by the Engineer. C Dispose of excess soil and waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01562— Waste Material Disposal.On-site burning of combustible cleared materials will not be permitted. END OF SECTION 12/2014 02931 - 15 of 15 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR Section 02980 PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Repairing streets,highways,driveways,sidewalks,and other pavements that have been cut, broken, or otherwise damaged during construction. B Repairing areas of failed paving in preparation for resurfacing. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02335—Subgrade 5. Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for pavement repair under this section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If pavement repair is included as a Bid Item,measurement is on a square yard basis. as follows: 1. Trench width plus 48 inches for utilities. 2. Trench width plus 10 feet for structures. 3. As marked in field for failed paving. C If provisions of this Section, 3.01D, require the limits of pavement repairs to be increased, then the payment limits shall be increased to the same extent. D No payment will be made for work outside payment limits, in areas that are not specifically called out as pay items and are incidental to the work or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. E Refer to Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make submittals required by this section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 05/2008 02980- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Provide materials of the same character as existing materials encountered in a cross section of the area to be repaired, or as approved by the Engineer. B Subgrade: Provide on site soil stabilized with lime, lime fly ash, etc., as required by the testing laboratory under the provisions of Section 02335 —Subgrade. C Base: Provide new base material as required by applicable portions of Section 02710— Base Course for Pavement. D Pavement: Provide new paving materials as required by Technical Specifications of applicable surface course treatments. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.02 PREPARATION A For installation of utilities and utility appurtenances, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving)24 inches beyond the width of excavation, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B For installation of structures, saw cut and remove pavement(including base material for asphalt paving)5 feet beyond the width of excavation,unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C For repair of areas of failed paving, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) where indicated in the field or as directed by Engineer. Remove subgrade that is soft and yielding, or to depth as directed by Engineer. D If removed pavement is greater than one-half of pavement lane width, or within 18 inches of a longitudinal joint, on concrete pavement, replace pavement for full lane width or to nearest longitudinal joint as approved by the Engineer. 05/2008 02980-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR E Protect edges of existing pavement to remain from damage during removals, utility placement,backfill,and paving operations. For concrete pavement,leave and protect minimum of 18 inches of undisturbed subgrade on each side of trench to support replacement slab. 3.03 EXAMINATION : A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.04 INSTALLATION A Replace subgrade with material specified in this Section, 2.01B. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment for areas under future paving to match lines and grade of surrounding subgrade. B Replace base course with material specified in this Section,2.01C. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement to match lines and grade of surrounding base course. C Replace pavement with material specified in this Section,2.O1D,and according to the Technical Specifications of the particular surface course treatment so that a smooth, hard, well cemented surface, conforming to the lines and grade of the surround pavement is secured D For concrete pavement, install size and length of reinforcing steel and pavement thickness indicated on Plans. Place types and spacing of joints to match existing or as indicated on Plans. E Where existing pavement consists of concrete pavement with asphaltic surfacing, resurface with minimum 2-inch depth asphaltic pavement. F Repair state highway crossings in accordance with highway department permit and within 1 week after utility work is installed. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pavement in good condition until completion of Work. B Replace pavement damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 05/2008 02980-3 of 3 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT Section 02981 BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of existing pavement markings. B Preparation of pavement surfaces for new pavement markings. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for blast cleaning of lines is on a linear foot basis for each width, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for blast cleaning of symbols and legends is on a square foot basis, measured and complete in place. C Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete blast cleaning where indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit description and characteristics of proposed blasting medium and equipment for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Blasting Media:Approved quality commercial product capable of producing specified surface cleanliness without deposition of deleterious materials on cleaned pavement surface. Do not use high silica content sand that may result in high levels of free crystalline silica dust particles as a blasting agent. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A Equipment shall be power driven and of sufficient capacity to clean the pavement surface to specified cleanliness. Equipment shall utilize moisture and oil traps of 07/2006 02981 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT sufficient capacity to remove contaminants from the air and prevent deposition of moisture, oil or other contaminants on the pavement surface. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING MARKINGS A Remove pavement markings where necessary to prevent driver confusion, or where indicated on drawings. Included are areas where it will be necessary for drivers to cross existing markings which they would not normally cross. Remove or obliterate markings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Do not damage pavement surface. 3.02 CLEANING FOR PLACEMENT OF MARKERS A Remove old pavement markings,loose material,and other contaminants deleterious to the adhesion of new pavement markings to be placed. On Portland cement concrete pavement, minimize over-blasting to prevent damage to pavement surface. Small particles of tightly adhering existing pavement markings may remain if complete removal will result in pavement surface damage. B Follow manufacturer's written instructions for proper cleaning of pavement surfaces to receive pavement marking. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02981 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 07'2006 (This page is intentionally left blank) CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members,floors,shear walls,foundation walls, and supported slabs,vaults,manholes and wet wells. B. Cast-in-place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation,such as slabs on grade,small vaults,site-cast bases for precast units,cast-in-place manholes,including headwalls and miscellaneous small structures. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete seal slabs. E. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. F. Design, construction, erection, and removal of structural concrete formwork. G. Equipment pads, light pole base, thrust blocks. H. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings 4. Section 03600 - Structural Grout 5. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete 6. Section 03100—Concrete Formwork 7. Section 01440—Inspection Services 8. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services I. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) 5. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) 6. Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis 5/2013 03300- 1 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for cast-in-place concrete is on lump-sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. B. Measurement for extra cast-in-place concrete is on cubic-yard basis. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections. C. Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 305R. B. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 306R. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01350—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings detailing reinforcement fabrication, bar replacement location, splices, spacing, bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Provide sufficient detail for placement of reinforcement without use of Plans. Information shall correspond directly to data listed on bill of materials. 2. Use of reproductions of Plans by Contractor,Subcontractor,erector,fabricator or material supplier in preparation of Shop Drawings(or in lieu of preparation of Shop Drawings) signifies acceptance by that party of information shown thereon as correct,and acceptance of obligation to pay for any job expense,real or implied,arising due to errors that may occur thereon. Remove references to Design Engineer, including seals, when reproductions of Plans are used as Shop Drawings. 3. Detail Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315, Figure 6. 5/2013 03300-2 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Submit Shop Drawings showing location of proposed additional construction joints,and obtain approval of the Engineer,prior to submitting reinforcing steel Shop Drawings. C. Bill of Materials: Submit with Shop Drawings. D. Product Data: 1. Mechanical Bar Splices: Submit manufacturer's technical literature,including specifications and installation instructions. 2. Epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened concrete: Submit manufacturer's technical literature including recommended installation procedures. 3. Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. E. Certificates: 1. Submit steel manufacturer's certificates of mill tests giving properties of steel proposed for use. List of manufacturer's test number,heat number,chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength, and percentage of elongation. Identify proposed location of steel in work. 2. Foreign-manufactured reinforcing bars shall be tested for conformance to ASTM requirements by a certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Submit test reports for review. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcement until material has been approved. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350-Submittals. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- IP. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. C. Conform appropriately to ACI 305R-99:Hot Weather Concreting or ACI 306R.1- 90:Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5/2013 03300-3 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM - C 150, Type I - Normal Portland Type II - Moderate Sulphate resistance Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM - C33. C. Use coarse limestone aggregate and crushed limestone for fine aggregate. The product of concrete alkalinity(A,as equivalent calcium carbonate)times the thickness of cover over the reinforcing steel (Z, in inches) shall not be less than 0.54, i.e. concrete shall have an AZ factor greater than or equal to 0.54. Provide a minimum concrete cover of 2" over reinforcing steel on the inside of the structures. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM - C260. B. Chemical: ASTM - C494, Type A - Water Reducing Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating admixture. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film type recommended for below grade application. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents;capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM - D1752; Premolded sponge rubber, fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. 5/2013 03300-4 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Sealant: ASTM -D1190; synthetic rubber. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM - C94, Alternative No. 3. A minimum of 5.75 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete shall be used. For Concrete in Contact with sewage use Portland Type II, ASTM - C 150, Cement. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength 7 days: 2400 psi 2. Compressive Strength 28 days: 4000 psi 3. Slump: 3 to 4 inches for concrete cast against earth in slabs and footings and where used as a topping. 5 to 6 inches for concrete in supported slabs,beams, columns and walls. 4. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to temperature lower than 40 degrees F. Air content shall be 3 percent maximum for concrete with trowel finished surfaces and 3-5 percent for other concrete. 2.06 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: New plywood, metal, plastic, tempered concrete-form hardboard, dressed lumber faced with plywood or lining, or metal-framed plywood-faced panel material,to provide continuous,straight,smooth surfaces. Form material shall be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and,when indicated on Plans,conform to joint system indicated. Form material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Rough Forms: Plywood, metal, dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits or other defects, or other material acceptable to the Engineer of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. C. Plywood: Conform to PS 1, Class 1. D. Lumber: Conform to PS 20. 5/2013 03300-5 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Edge Forms and Intermediate Screed Strips: Type and strength compatible with the screed equipment and methods used. F. Plastic Forms: One-piece forms for domes,beams and pan joists. Single lengths for columns not exceeding height of 7'-6". For columns over 7'-6",use 7'-6" sections and filler sections as needed. To facilitate removal of pan joist forms,taper sides 1 inch per foot. G. Metal Pan Joist Forms: Removable type; fabricated of minimum 14-gage steel; one piece between end closures. Adjustable forms not allowed. Taper sides 1 inch per foot to facilitate removal. H. Earth Cuts for Forms: 1. Use earth cuts for forming unexposed sides of grade beams cast monolithically with slabs on grade. 2. Where sides of excavations are stable enough to prevent caving or sloughing, following surfaces may be cast against neat-cut excavations: a. Sides of footings. b. Inside face of perimeter grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When inside face is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 1 inch. c. Both faces of interior grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When grade beam is cast against earth,increase beam width indicated on Plans by 2 inches. I. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Corrugated fiberboard carton forms, when called for, are intended to form a void space beneath pile-supported and pier-supported slabs and other structural elements as shown. 2. Provide products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in commercial production of double-faced corrugated fiberboard carton forms,constructed of waterproof paper and laminated with waterproof adhesive. 3. Fiberboard forms: Capable of supporting required dead load plus construction loads,and designed to lose their strength upon prolonged contact with moisture and soil bacteria. 4. Seal cuts and ends of each form section by dipping in waterproof wax,unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with waterproofing. 5/2013 03300-6 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Size forms as indicated on Plans. Assemble as recommended by manufacturer, either with steel banding at 4'-0" maximum on centers, or, where liners and flutes are impregnated with waterproofing, with adequate stapling. J. Circular Forms: 1. Form round-section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Provide manufacturer's seamless units to minimize spiral gaps and seams. 2. Fiberglass or steel forms may be used for round-section members. K. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal,with bearing plates;with double wedges at lower end. L. Form Ties: 1. Use commercially-manufactured ties, hangers and other accessories for embedding in concrete. Do not use wire not commercially fabricated for use as a form accessory. 2. Fabricate ties so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing smiling of concrete faces. Depth from formed concrete face to the embedded portion: At least 1 inch, or twice the minimum dimension of tie,whichever is greater. 3. Provide waterstop feature for form ties used on liquid-containing structures and on concrete walls which will have earth backfill on one side. 4. Removable ties: Taper ties may be used when approved by the Engineer. In the hole left by the removal of the taper tie, insert a preformed neoprene or polyurethane plug sized to seat at the center of the wall. M. Form Coating: Commercial formulation of form oil or form-release agent having proven satisfactory performance. Coating shall not bond with, stain or otherwise adversely affect concrete surfaces, or impair their subsequent treatment, including application of bonding agents, curing compounds, paint, protective liners and membrane waterproofing. N. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali-resistant gel-coat. O. Chamfer Strips: Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,provide 3/4 inch chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges where required by this Section, 3.0 "Execution". P. Form Gaskets: Polyethylene rod, closed cell, 1-inch diameter. 5/2013 03300-7 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Conform to ACI 117, ACI 347 and building codes, unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on Plans. Contractor shall design and engineer concrete formwork, including shoring and bracing. Design formwork for applicable gravity loads,lateral pressure,wind loads and allowable stresses. Camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflection during placement of concrete required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Slip Forming: Permitted on written approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall demonstrate suitability of method proposed. 2.08 REINFORCING MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM-A615,grade as indicated on Plans, except column spirals and those shown on Plans to be smooth bars. Where grade is not shown on Plans, use Grade 60. B. Smooth Bars: Where indicated on Plans, use smooth bars conforming to ASTM - A36; ASTM -A615, Grade 60; or ASTM -A675, Grade 70. C. Column Spirals: Bars conforming to ASTM-A615,Grade 60,or wire conforming to ASTM -A82. D. Epoxy-Coated Deformed Bars,Column Spirals and Smooth Bars: Conform to ASTM -A775/A775M. E. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM - A185. 2. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM - A497. 3. Provide wire size, type and spacing as shown. Where type is not shown on Plans, use welded smooth wire fabric. 4. Furnish welded wire fabric in flat sheets only. F. Tie Wire: 16-1/2 gage or heavier annealed steel wire. Use plastic-coated tie wire with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. G. Bar Supports: Provide chairs. Use bar supports and accessories of sizes required to provide required concrete cover. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, water or wastewater,provide plastic accessories only;do not use galvanized or plastic- tipped metal in such locations. Provide metal bar supports and accessories rated Class 1 or 2 conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use epoxy-coated bar supports with epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. 5/2013 03300-8 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. Slabs on Grade: Provide chairs with sheet metal bases or provide precast concrete bar supports 3 inches wide, 6 inches long, and thick enough to allow required cover. Embed tie wires in 3-inch by 6-inch side. Mechanical Bar Splices: 1. Conform to ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; use where indicated on Plans. a. Compression splices shall develop ultimate stress of reinforcing bar. b. Tension splices shall develop 125 percent of minimum yield point stress of reinforcing bar. 2. Regardless of chemical composition of steel,any heat effect shall not adversely affect performance of reinforcing bar. J. Welded Splices: 1. Provide welded splices where shown and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcing steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield grength of the reinforcing bars connected. 2. Provide materials for welded splices conforming to AWS D1.4 — Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. K. Epoxy Grout: High-strength rigid epoxy adhesive,conforming to ASTM-C881,Type IV, manufactured for purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete and the moisture condition, application temperature and orientation of the hole to be filled. Unless otherwise shown,depth of embedment shall be as required to develop the full tensile strength(125 percent of yield strength)of dowel,but not less than 12 diameters. 2.09 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING A. Bending: Fabricate bars to shapes indicated on Plans by cold bending. Bends shall conform to minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. Do not straighten or rebend bars. Fabricate epoxy-coated reinforcing steel to required shapes in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair any epoxy coating with patching material conforming to Item 4.4 of ASTM - A775/A775M. B. Splices: 1. Locate splices as indicated on Plans. Do not locate splices at other locations without approval of the Engineer. Use minimum number of splices located at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 2. Length of lap splices: As shown on Plans. 5/2013 03300-9 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Prepare ends of bars at mechanical splices in accordance with splice manufacturer's requirements. C. Construction Joints: Unless otherwise shown, continue reinforcing through construction joints. D. Bar Fabrication Tolerances:Conform to tolerances listed in ACI 315,Figures 4 and 5. E. Standard Hooks: Conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. F. Marking: Clearly mark bars with waterproof tags showing number of bars,size,mark, length, and yield strength. Mark steel with same designation as member in which it occurs. 2.10 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sealer/Dustproofer (VOC Compliant): Water-based acrylic sealer; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 200-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Conform to local, state and f$deral solvent emission requirements. B. Epoxy Floor Topping: Two-component epoxy resin meeting ASTM-C881 Type III, resistant to wear,staining and chemical attack,blended with granite,sand,trap rock or quartz aggregate,trowel-applied over concrete floor. Topping thickness shall be 1/8 inch. Color shall be gray. C. Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Finish: Fused aluminum oxide grit,or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Material shall be factory graded, packaged, rustproof and nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. D. Epoxy Penetrating Sealer: Low-viscosity,two-component epoxy system designed to give maximum penetration into concrete surfaces. Sealer shall completely seal concrete surfaces from penetration of water, oil and chemicals; prevent dusting and deterioration of concrete surfaces caused by heavy traffic;and be capable of adhering to floor surfaces subject to hydrostatic pressure from below. Color shall be transparent amber or gray. Surface shall be non-slip. E. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable latex base liquid conforming to ASTM - C 1059. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures,bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. F. Bonding Grout: Prepare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand meeting ASTM - C144 but with 100 percent passing No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix with water to consistency of thick cream. At Contractor's option, a commercially-prepared bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturer's 5/2013 03300- 10 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE recommendations and instructions may be used. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. Submit manufacturer's technical information on proposed bonding agent. G. Patching Mortar: 1. Make patching mortar of same materials and of approximately same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Substitute white Portland cement for part of gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to match color of surrounding concrete. Determine color by making trial patch. Use minimum amount of mixing water required for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with trowel until it has reached stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 2. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or specially formulated cementitious repair mortars may be used in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching materials provided that properties of bond and compressive strength meet or exceed the foregoing and color of surrounding concrete can be matched where required. Use such compounds according to manufacturer's recommendations. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, material shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. H. Epoxy Adhesive: Two-component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound developing 100 percent of strength of concrete, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Epoxy used to inject cracks and as a binder in epoxy mortar shall meet ASTM-C881,Type VI. Epoxy used as a bonding agent for fresh concrete shall meet ASTM - C881, Type V. Non-shrink Grout: See Section 03600 - Structural Grout. J. Spray-Applied Coating: Acceptable products are Thoro System Products"Thoroseal Plaster Mix" or approved equal. Color: Gray. K. Concrete Topping: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,as specified in this Section. L. Concrete Fill: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,(Class C where fill thickness exceeds 3 inches throughout a placement), as specified in Section 03310 - Structural Concrete. M. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm, manufactured by Master Builders; Eucobar, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. 5/2013 03300- 11 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.11 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM - C309, Type 1D, and following requirements. 1. Minimum solids content: 30 percent. 2. Compound shall not permanently discolor concrete. When used for liquid- containing structures, curing compound shall be white-pigmented. 3. When used in areas that are to be coated, or that will receive topping or floor covering,material shall not reduce bond of coating,topping,or floor covering to concrete. Curing compound manufacturer's technical information shall state conditions under which compound will not prevent bond. 4. Conform to local,state and federal solvent emission requirements.Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. 5. White pigmented concrete curing compound shall be sprayed on in one even coat with a hand or power sprayer as soon as the surface water disappears from concrete surface. B. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound(VOC Compliant): Conform to ASTM-C309, Type 1,Class B,and the following requirements: 30 percent solids content minimum; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500-hour test in accordance with ASTM- D4587. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. C. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM- C171;waterproof paper,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting. D. Curing Mats(for use in Curing Method 2): Heavy shag rugs or carpets,or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center; 12 ounce per square yard minimum weight when dry. E. Water for curing: Clean and potable. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 5/2013 03300- 12 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Plans call for joint surfaces to be coated,clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting(exposing aggregate),roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. 5/2013 03300- 13 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Plans,Shop Drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer,place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork,inserts,embedded items,reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydro-blasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Formwork Construction 1. Construct and maintain formwork so that it will maintain correct sizes of members,shape,alignment,elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained sufficient strength. Provide for required 5/2013 03300- 14 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages, and inserts. 2. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 3. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. Provide gaskets for wall forms to prevent concrete paste leakage at their base. 4. Place chamfer strips in forms to bevel edges and corners permanently exposed to view,except top edges of walls,and slabs which are indicated on Plans to be tooled. Do not bevel edges of formed joints and interior corners unless indicated on Plans. Form beveled edges for vertical and horizontal corners of equipment bases. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,make bevels 3/4 inch wide. 5. Provide temporary openings at bases of column and wall forms and other points as required for observation and cleaning immediately before concrete is placed. 6. Where runways are required for moving equipment,support runways directly on the formwork or structural members. Do not allow runways or supports to rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Use smooth forms on formed concrete surfaces required to have smooth form finish or rubbed finish. 8. Rough forms may be used on formed concrete surfaces indicated to have rough form finish. B. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Uniformly space form ties and align in horizontal and vertical rows. Install taper ties, if used, with the large end on the wet face of the wall. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back up joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 4. Form exposed corners of beams and columns to produce square,smooth,solid, unbroken lines. 5/2013 03300- 15 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Provide exterior exposed edges with 3/4-inch chamfer or 3/4-inch radius. 6. Arrange facing material in orderly and symmetrical fashion. Keep number of joints to practical minimum. Support facing material adequately to prevent deflection in excess of allowable tolerances. 7. For flush surfaces exposed to view in completed structure,overlap previously- placed hardened concrete with form sheathing by approximately 1 inch. Hold forms against hardened concrete to maintain true surfaces,preventing offsets or loss of mortar. C. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Rubbed Finish: Provide forms as specified in this Section, 3.04B "Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish". Use smooth plywood linings or forms, in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. D. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure supports for types of screeds required. E. Circular Forms: Set forms in one piece for full height of member. F. Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Coordinate surface finish, anchors, reglets, and similar requirements with membrane waterproofing applicator. G. Fireproofing Steel Member: Construct forms to provide not less than the concrete thickness necessary,measured from face of steel member,to provide the required fire rating. Forms for concealed surfaces may be unlined. H. Tolerances: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Plans,construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed in Tables 03100A and 03100B at end of this Section. 2. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the Work. Adjustment of Formwork: 1. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. After final inspection and before concrete placement,fasten in position wedges used for final adjustment of forms. 2. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for settling during concrete placement. 5/2013 03300- 16 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. For wall openings,construct wood forms that facilitate necessary loosening to counteract swelling of forms. J. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Place on smooth firm bed of suitable material to prevent vertical displacement; set tight to prevent horizontal displacement. Exercise care to avoid buckling of forms. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 2. Fit carton forms tightly around piles and piers; completely fill the space between subgrade and concrete placement with carton forms to form a void space. 3. Protect carton forms from moisture and maintain in a dry condition until concrete is placed on them. If they become wet before placement of concrete, allow them to dry and carefully inspect for strength before concrete is placed. 4. Before concrete placement,replace damaged or deteriorated forms which are incapable of supporting concrete dead load plus construction live loads. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials before placing concrete. Remove accumulated mortar, grout,rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form-release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before placing concrete. C. Forms for unexposed surfaces, other than retained-in-place metal forms,may be wet with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. When possibility of freezing temperatures exists,however,the use of coating is mandatory. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within tolerances of Table 03210A at the end of this Section. Bend tie wire away from forms to maintain the specified concrete coverage. B. Interferences: Maintain 2-inch clearance from embedded items. Where reinforcing interferes with location of other reinforcing steel,conduit or embedded items,bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter,whichever is greater. Where 5/2013 03300- 17 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference,notify the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduit, mechanical openings or other items without approval of the Engineer. C. Concrete Cover: Provide clear cover measured from reinforcement to face of concrete as listed in Table 03210B at the end of this Section, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers,chairs,wire ties and other accessory items necessary to assemble,space,and support reinforcing properly. Provide accessories of sufficient number, size and strength to prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection, and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support bar and wire reinforcement on chairs with sheet metal bases or precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use minimum of one support for each 9 square feet. Tie supports to reinforcing bars and wires. F. Vertical Reinforcement in Columns: Offset vertical bars by at least one bar diameter at splices. Provide accurate templates for column dowels to ensure proper placement. G. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations indicated on Plans or reviewed Shop Drawings, without approval of the Engineer. 2. Lap Splices: Unless otherwise shown or noted, Class B, conforming to ACI 318-89,Section 12.15.1. Tie securely with wire prior to concrete placement,to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement. 3. Mechanical Bar Splices: Use only where indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Couplers located at a joint face shall be of a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown. Seal couplers prior to concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. b. Couplers intended for future connections: Recess 1/2 inch minimum from concrete surface. After concrete is placed,plug coupler and fill recess with sealant to prevent contact with water or other corrosive materials. c. Unless noted otherwise, match mechanical coupler spacing and capacity to that shown for the adjacent reinforcing. 5/2013 03300- 18 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints, unless noted otherwise. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, lap adjoining pieces at least 6 inches or one full mesh plus 2 inches, whichever is larger. Lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams,or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Conform to WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric. I. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to Plans. Bars shall be cold-bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect reinforcing for breaks. When reinforcing is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair, as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. J. Epoxy-coated Reinforcing Steel: Install in accordance this Section, 3.06J "Field Bending",and in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair damaged epoxy coating with patching material as specified in Paragraph 2.09 A-Bending. K. Field Cutting: Cut reinforcing bars by shearing or sawing. Do not cut bars with cutting torch. L. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited, except where shown on Plans. 3.07 GROUTING OF REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Use epoxy grout for anchoring reinforcing and dowel steel to existing concrete in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions. Drill hole not more than 1/4 inch larger than steel bar diameter(including height of deformations for deformed bars)in existing concrete. Just before installation of steel,blow hole clean of all debris using compressed air. Partially fill hole with epoxy,using enough epoxy so when steel bar is inserted, epoxy grout will completely fill hole around bar. Dip end of steel bar in epoxy and twist bar while inserting into partially-filled hole. 5/2013 03300- 19 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210A REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCES Placement Tolerances (in inches) Clear Distance - To formed soffit: -1/4 To other formed surfaces: +1/4 Minimum spacing between bars -1/4 Clear distance from unformed surface to top reinforcement - Members 8 inches deep or less: ±1/4 Members more than 8 inches deep but less than 24 inches deep: -1/4, +1/2 Members 24 inches deep or greater: -1/4, +1 Uniform spacing of bars (but the required number of bars shall not reduced): ±- Uniform spacing of stirrups and ties (but the required number of stirrups and ties shall not be reduced): +1 Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of reinforcement - General: ±2 Discontinuous ends of members: ±1/2 Length of bar laps: -1 1/2 Embedded length - For bar sizes No. 3 through 11: -1 For bar sizes No. 14 and 18: -2 5/2013 03300-20 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210B MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT Minimum Surface Cover (in inches) Slabs and Joists - Top and bottom bars for dry conditions— No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1 '2 No. 11 bars and smaller: l Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, or weather, over, or in contact with, sewage; and for bottoms bearing on work mat, or slabs supporting earth cover- No. 5 bars and smaller: 1 1!2 No. 6 through No. 18 bars: 2 Beams and Columns - For dry conditions- Stirrups, spirals and ties: 1 1/2 Principal reinforcement: 2 Exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather Stirrups and ties: 2 Principal reinforcement: 2 1/2 Walls - For dry conditions - No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 No. 14 and No. 18 bars: l 1 2 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather, or in contact with ground- Circular tanks with ring tension: 2 All others: 2 Footings and Base Slabs - At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat: 2 At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth: 3 Over top of piles: 2 Top of footings- - same as slabs 5/2013 03300-21 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of this Section and Chapter 8 of ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete—IP,Chapter 8. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel. 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors,if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. 5/2013 03300-22 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed,below 90 degrees F. 3.09 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R-96:Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Quality Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement(discharge) end of the line. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not 5/2013 03300-23 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2 inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.11 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R-96:Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, Group 3, immersion-type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. Do not transport concrete by vibrating. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.12 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 5/2013 03300-24of38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural Concrete for Mass Concreting. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.14 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Unfinished Surfaces: Finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view in completed structure by earth,ceilings or similar cover,unless indicated otherwise on Plans. B. Rough Form Finish: 1. No form facing material is required on rough form finish surfaces. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 3. Rough form finish may be used on concrete surfaces which will be concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except concealed surfaces required to have smooth form finish, as shown on Plans. C. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Form facing shall produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with wooden blocks to leave smooth,unmarred finished surface. 3. Provide smooth form finish on the wet face of formed surfaces of water- holding structures, and of other formed surfaces not concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except where otherwise indicated on Plans. Walls that will be exposed after future construction,at locations indicated on Plans, shall have smooth form finish. Smooth form finish on exterior face of exterior walls shall extend below final top of ground elevation. Exterior face of all perimeter grade beams shall have smooth form finish for full depth of grade beam. D. Rubbed Finish: 1. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Remove forms as soon as practicable,repair defects,wet surfaces,and rub with No. 16 carborundum stone or similar abrasive. Continue rubbing sufficiently to bring surface paste,remove form marks and fins,and produce smooth,dense 5/2013 03300-25 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE surface of uniform color and texture. Do not use cement paste other than that drawn from concrete itself. Spread paste uniformly over surface with brush. Allow paste to reset,then wash surface with clean water. 3. Use rubbed finish at locations indicated on Plans,except where rubbed finish is indicated for a wall which will be containing a liquid, use spray-applied coating. E. Spray-applied Coating: At Contractor's option,in lieu of rubbed finish,spray-applied coating may be applied after defects have been repaired and fins removed. Remove form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter that would prevent bonding of coating. Apply coating in uniform texture and color in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. F. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3.15 HOT WEATHER FINISHING A. When hot weather conditions exist, as defined in the Section, 1.03A"Hot Weather", and as judged by the Engineer, apply evaporation retardant to the surfaces of slabs, topping and concrete fill placements immediately after each step in the finishing process has been completed. 3.16 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO CLASS A, B AND C TOLERANCES A. Apply Class A, B and C finishes at locations indicated on Plans. Class B or better finish shall be applied if not shown otherwise by the Plans. B. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. See Section 03100- Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. C. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as stiff as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. D. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Check tolerances by placing straightedge of specified length anywhere on slab. Gap between slab and straightedge shall not exceed tolerance listed for specified class. 5/2013 03300-26 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Straightedge Tolerance Class Length in Feet in Inches A 10 1/8 B 10 1/4 C 2 1/4 E. Raked Finish: After concrete has been placed,struck off,consolidated and leveled to Class C tolerance,roughen surface before final set.Roughen with stiff brushes or rakes to depth of approximately 1/4 inch. Notify the Engineer prior to placing concrete requiring initial raked surface finish so that acceptable raked finish standard may be established for project. Protect raked,base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Provide raked finish for following: 1. Surfaces to receive bonded concrete topping or fill. 2. Steep ramps, as noted on Plans. 3. Additional locations as noted on Plans. F. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. After initial floating, re-check tolerance of surface with 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to Class B tolerance. Immediately re-float slab to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Provide float finish at locations not otherwise specified and not otherwise indicated on Plans. G. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional troweling by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to Class A tolerance. On surfaces intended to 5/2013 03300-27 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE support floor coverings,remove defects which might show through covering by grinding. 3. Provide trowel finish for floors which will receive floor covering and additional locations indicated on Plans. H. Broom or Belt Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. Immediately after completing floated finish, draw broom or burlap belt across surface to give coarse transverse scored texture. 2. Provide broom or belt finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.17 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO"F-NUMBER SYSTEM" FINISH A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. Edge forms and screeds: Conform to Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling,do not manipulate surfaces prior to finishing operations. C. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Independent testing laboratory will check floor flatness and levelness in accordance with this Section,3.23F"Field Quality Control". D. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. Check tolerance of surface after initial floating with a 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat slab to uniform, smooth, granular texture to FF20/FL17 tolerance,unless shown otherwise on Plans. 3. Provide "F-Number System" float finish at locations indicated on Plans. 5/2013 03300-28 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to an FF25/FL20 tolerance for slabs on grade and FF25/FL17 for elevated slabs, unless shown otherwise on Plans. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove defects, which might show through covering,by grinding. 3. Provide "F-Number System" trowel finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.18 BONDED CONCRETE TOPPING AND FILL A. Surface Preparation: 1. Protect raked, base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Mechanically remove oil, grease, asphalt, paint, clay stains or other contaminants, leaving clean surface. 2. Prior to placement of topping or fill, thoroughly dampen roughened slab surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately before topping or fill is placed, scrub coat of bonding grout into surface. Do not allow grout to set or dry before topping or fill is placed. B. Concrete Fill: 1. Where concrete fill intersects a wall surface at an angle steeper than 45 degrees from vertical, provide a 1.5-inch deep keyway in the wall at the point of intersection; size keyway so that no portion of the concrete fill is less than 1.5 inches thick. Form keyway in new walls; create by saw cutting the top and bottom lines and chipping in existing walls. 2. Apply wood float finish to surfaces of concrete fill. 3. Provide concrete fill at locations shown on Plans. C. Bonded Concrete Topping in Bottom of Clarifiers and Thickeners: 1. Minimum thickness of concrete topping: 1 inch. Maximum thickness when swept in by clarifier and thickener equipment: 3 inches. 5/2013 03300-29 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Compact topping and fill by rolling or tamping,bring to established grade,and float. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top,for the full width of the placement. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed between finishing operations to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 3. Screed topping to true surface using installed equipment. Protect equipment from damage during sweeping-in process. Perform sweeping-in process under supervision of equipment manufacturer's factory representative. After topping has been screeded, apply wood float finish. During finishing, do not apply water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand to the surface. 4. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the Engineer, fill the tank with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 5. Provide bonded concrete topping in bottom of all clarifiers and thickeners. 3.19 EPDXY PENETRATING SEALER A. Surfaces to receive epoxy penetrating sealer: Apply wood float finish. Clean surface and apply sealer in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: Apply minimum 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surface to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Provide epoxy penetrating sealer at locations indicated on Plans. 3.20 EPDXY FLOOR TOPPING A. Surfaces to receive epoxy floor topping: Apply wood float finish unless recommended otherwise by epoxy floor topping manufacturer. Clean surface and apply epoxy floor topping in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Thickness of topping: 1/8 inch. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: apply 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. 5/2013 03300-30 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surfaces to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs,bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and dimples. F. Provide epoxy floor topping at locations indicated on Plans. 3.21 SEALER/DUSTPROOFER A. Where sealer or sealer/dustproofer is indicated on Plans,just prior to completion of construction, apply coat of specified clear sealer/dustproofing compound to exposed interior concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 NONSLIP FINISH A. Apply float finish as specified. Apply two-thirds of required abrasive aggregate by method that ensures even coverage without segregation and re-float. Apply remainder of abrasive aggregate at right angles to first application,using heavier application of aggregate in areas not sufficiently covered by first application. Re-float after second application of aggregate and complete operations with troweled finish. Perform finishing operations in a manner that will allow the abrasive aggregate to be exposed and not covered with cement paste. B. Provide nonslip finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete-IP and under provisions of Sections 01440 —Inspection Services and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds or less of concrete or as directed by the Engineer. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting,cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5/2013 03300-31 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Provide the results of alkalinity tests of concrete used in sanitary structures. Provide one test for each structure. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Perform the test on the concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure. Alkalinity tests are to be in accordance with Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis, Vol. 15, Page 230, Interscience Publishers Division, John Wiley and Sons. 3.24 PATCHING A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete - IP. 3.25 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details,dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill,touch-up,repair,or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.26 CURING A. Comply with ACI 308.1-98:Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical injury for a period of 7 curing days when Type II or IP cement has been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. A curing day is any calendar day in which the temperature is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if air temperature adjacent to concrete is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather, when artificial heat is not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at the end of calendar days equal to twice the required number of curing days. However, leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached the specified 28-day strength, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rub-finished surface by leaving forms in place for the full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during the curing period. Add water as 5/2013 03300-32 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed after 2 days and curing compound applied. C. Rubbed Finish: 1. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as practicable without damaging the surface. 2. After rub-finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until normal curing period is complete. D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method. 1. After concrete has received a final finish and surplus water sheen has disappeared, immediately seal surface with a uniform coating of approved curing compound, applied at the rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Do not apply less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check rate of application of the compound. 2. Thoroughly agitate the compound during use and apply by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For application on small miscellaneous items,hand-powered spray equipment may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface during spraying operations. 3. Do not apply compound to a dry surface. If concrete surface has become dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations where coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects,or if rain falls on a newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, apply an additional coat of compound at the specified rate of coverage. 3.27 CURING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when curing mass concrete. 1. Minimum curing period: 2 weeks. 2. When ambient air temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect surface of concrete against freezing. 3. Do not use steam or other curing methods that will add heat to concrete. 4. Keep forms and exposed concrete continuously wet for at least the first 48 hours after placing, and whenever surrounding air temperature is above 90 degrees F during final curing period. 5/2013 03300-33 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. During 2-week curing period,provide necessary controls to prevent ambient air temperature immediately adjacent to concrete from falling more than 30 degrees F in 24 hours. 3.28 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time Limits: 1. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required before concrete is aged, forms on vertical surfaces may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Leave formwork for water-retaining structures in place for at least 2 days. Formwork for non-water-retaining columns, walls, sides of beams and other formwork components not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after 12 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations,and provided removal of forms will not disturb members supporting weight of concrete. 3. Forms and shoring supporting weight of concrete or construction loads: Leave in place until concrete has reached minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. Do not remove such forms in less than 4 days. B. Circular Paper or Spiral Tube Forms: Follow manufacturer's directions for form removal. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to concrete surface. When removal is done before completion of curing time,replace form,tie in place,and seal to retard escape of moisture. C. Removal Strength: 1. Control Tests: Suitable strength-control tests will be required as evidence that concrete has attained specified strength for removal of formwork or shoring supporting weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members. Furnish test cylinders and data to verify strength for early form removal. a. Field-cured Test Cylinders: When field-cured test cylinders reach specified removal strength,formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. b. Laboratory-cured Test Cylinders: When concrete has been cured as specified for structural concrete for same time period required by laboratory-cured cylinders to reach specified strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. 5/2013 03300-34 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Determine length of time that concrete has been cured by totaling the days or fractions of days,not necessarily consecutive,during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 degrees F and concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed against evaporation and loss of moisture. 2. Compressive Strengths: The minimum concrete compressive strength for removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete is 75 percent of specified minimum 28-day strength for class of concrete involved. 3.29 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted, plan operations in advance and obtain the Engineer's approval of such operations. While reshoring is under way, keep live load off new construction. Do not permit concrete in any beam, slab, column or other structural member to be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. B. Place reshores as soon as practicable after form-stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without over stressing construction. Leave reshores in place until tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength at time of removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete. C. Floors supporting shores under newly-placed concrete: Leave original supporting shores in place, or re-shore. Locate reshores directly under shore position above. Extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly- placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. 3.30 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish,sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return forms to original condition. 5/2013 03300-35 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100A TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BUILDINGS** For any For any Maximum Variation 20-foot From Variation In 10-foot len h or for Entire length anbay Dimension Lines and Surfaces of Columns, 1/4" - - - 1" Plumb or Piers, Walls and Arrises Specified Exposed Corner Columns, Control - - - 1/4" Batter Joint Grooves, and Other Conspicuous Lines Slab Soffits, Ceilings, Beam Soffits, 1/4" 3'8" 3/4" Level of and Arrises (measured before Specified removal of shores), Grade Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, - - - 1 '4" "1/2 Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines Drawing Position of Linear Building Lines, - - - 1/2" 1" Dimensions Columns, Walls and Partitions Size and Location of Sleeves, Floor - - - - - - +1/4" Openings and Wall Openings Cross Section of Columns, Beams, - - - - - - +1/2", -1/4" Slabs, and Walls Footings* in Plan - - - - - - +2", -1/2" Footing Misplacement or Eccentricity - - - - - - 2%of Width in Direction of Error(the lesser of) or 2" Footing Thickness Decrease - - - - - - 5% Footing Thickness Increase - - - - - - No Limit Step Rise in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - +1/8" Step Tread in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - +1/4" Consecutive Step Rise - - - - - - +1/16" Consecutive Step Tread - - - - - - +1/8" *Footing tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items **Includes water and wastewater process structures 5/2013 03300-36 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100B TOLERANCE FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BRIDGES,WHARVES AND MARINE STRUCTURES Variation From Variation In Maximum Plumb of Specified Surfaces of columns,piers and walls 1/2" in 10' Batter Level or Top surfaces of slabs See Section 03345 Specified Grade Top surfaces of curbs and railings 3/16" in 10- Drawing Cross section of columns,caps, walls, beams, and ±1/2", 1/4'" Dimensions similar members Thickness of deck slabs ±1/4", -1/8" Size and location of slab and wall openings ±1/2" Footings in plan +2, -1/2" Footing misplacement or eccentricity in direction 2%of width or 2" of error(the lesser of) Footing thickness decrease 5% Footing thickness increase No limit Step rise in flight of stairs +1/8" Step tread in flight of stairs ±1/4" Consecutive step rise ±1/16" Consecutive step tread +1/8" 5'2013 03300-37 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.31 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03300-38 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 03310 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place normal-weight structural concrete and mass concrete. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 00300—Bid Proposal 2. Section 01200—Measurement 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for structural concrete is on an each basis for each structure as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these structures in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. B. If Extra Structural Concrete is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic-yard basis, measured in place. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. D. No provisions shall be provided for temperature controlled curing of test cylinder. Test cylinder(s) shall be cured in identical environment until picked up by lab. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Mass Concrete: Concrete sections 4 feet or more in least dimension. B. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 305R. C. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 306R. 5/2013 03310-1 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01350—Submittals. B. Mill Certificates: Required for bulk cement. C. Design Mixes: 1. Submit test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete in the Work, including each class, and variations in type, source or quantity of material. Include type, brand and amount of cementitious materials; type, brand and amount of each admixture; slump; air content; aggregate sources, gradations, specific gravity and absorption;total water(including moisture in aggregate);water/cement ratio; compressive strength test results for 7 and 28 days;and shrinkage tests for Class C and D concrete at 21 or 28 days of drying. 2. Submit abrasion loss and soundness test results for limestone aggregate. 3. Testing of aggregates, including sieve analysis, shall be performed by a certified independent testing laboratory. Tests shall have been performed no earlier than 3 months before Notice to Proceed. 4. Provide standard deviation data for plant producing concrete. Data shall include copies of laboratory test results and standard deviation calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1. Laboratory tests shall have been performed within past 12 months. When standard deviation data is not available, comply with ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. 5. Review and acceptance of mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete of quality and strength required by these Specifications. D. Admixtures: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including following: 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Give requirements to control air content under all conditions,including temperature variations and presence of other admixtures. 2. Chemical Admixtures: Give requirements for quantities and types to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce uniform, workable concrete mix. Submit evidence of compatibility with other admixtures and cementitious materials proposed for use in design mix. E. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): When proposed for use, submit manufacturer's technical information and instructions for use of superplasticizer. State whether superplasticizer will be added at ready-mix plant or job site. When superplasticizer will be added at job site, submit proposed plan for measuring and adding superplasticizer to concrete mix at job site, and establish dosing area on site with holding tanks and metering devices. When superplasticizer is to be added at 5/2013 03310-2 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ready-mix plant,submit contingency plans for adding additional superplasticizer at job site when required due to delay in placing concrete. Identify portions of Work on which superplasticizer is proposed for use. F. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: Submit,when applicable,proposed plans for hot and cold weather concreting. Review and acceptance of proposed procedure will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality of finished product. G. Project Record Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide necessary controls during evaluation of materials,mix designs,production and delivery of concrete, placement and compaction to assure that the Work will be accomplished in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dates, locations, quantities, air temperatures, and test samples taken. B. Code Requirements: Concrete construction for buildings shall conform to ACI 318. Concrete construction for water and wastewater treatment and conveying structures shall conform to ACI 318 with modifications by ACI 350R, Item 2.6. Where this Specification conflicts with ACI 318 or ACI 350R,this Specification governs. C. Testing and Other Quality Control Services: 1. Concrete testing required in this section,except concrete mix design,limestone aggregate test data, and testing of deficient concrete,will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Provide material for and cooperate fully with Owner's testing laboratory technician in obtaining samples for required tests. 3. Standard Services: The following testing and quality control services will be provided by Owner in accordance with Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services: a. Verification that plant equipment and facilities conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready-Mix Concrete Production Facilities". b. Testing of proposed materials for compliance with this Specification. c. Review of proposed mix design submitted by Contractor. 5/2013 03310-3 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE d. Obtaining production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during work progress and testing for compliance with this Specification. e. Strength testing of concrete according to following procedures: 1) Obtaining samples for field test cylinders from every 100 cubic yards and any portion less than 100 cubic yards for each mix design placed each day, according to ASTM C 172, with each sample obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, random basis. Selecting test batches by any means other than random numbers chosen before concrete placement begins is not allowed. 2) Molding four specimens from each sample according to ASTM C31, and curing under standard moisture and temperature conditions as specified in Sections 7(a)and(b)of ASTM C31. 3) Testing two specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days according to ASTM C39, reporting test results averaging strengths of two specimens. However, when one specimen evidences improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be discarded and remaining cylinder considered test result. When high-early-strength concrete is used,specimens will be tested at 3 and 7 days. f. Air content: For each strength test, determination of air content of normal weight concrete according to ASTM C231. g. Slump: For each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, conducting slump test in accordance with ASTM C143. h. Temperature: For each strength test,checking concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C 1064. Lightweight concrete: For each strength test,or more frequently when requested by the Engineer,determination of air content by ASTM C567 and unit weight by ASTM C567. j. Monitoring of current and forecasted climatic conditions to determine when rate of evaporation,as determined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R, will produce loss of 0.2 pounds of water, or more,per square foot per hour. Testing lab representative will advise Contractor to use hot weather precautions when such conditions will exist during concrete placement,and note on concrete test reports when Contractor has been advised that hot weather conditions will exist. 5/2013 03310-4 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE k. Class A and D Concrete Shrinkage Tests: Performance of drying shrinkage tests for trial batches as follows: 1) Preparation and Testing of Specimens: Compression and drying shrinkage test specimens will be taken in each case from the same concrete sample; shrinkage tests will be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C157,modified as follows: (a). Wet curing: Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching and immediately immerse in water at 70 degrees F ±3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes; (b). Measure within 30 minutes after first 30 minutes of immersion to determine original length (not to be confused with "base length"); (c). Then submerge in saturated limewater,at 73 degrees F ±3 degrees F, for 7 days; (d). Then measure at age 7 days to establish "base length" for drying shrinkage calculations ("zero" days drying age); (e). Calculate expansion (base length expressed as a percentage of original length); (f). Immediately store specimens in a temperature and humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F, ±3 degrees, and 50 percent relative humidity, ±4 percent, for the remainder of the test. (g). Measure to determine shrinkage, expressed as percentage of base length. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as the difference between the base length (at ?zero@ days drying age)and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004 inch,disregard the results obtained from that specimen. 5/20 13 03310-5 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Report results of shrinkage tests to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. (h). Report shrinkage separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 4. Additional Testing and Quality Control Services: The following will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450,Testing Laboratory Services, when requested by the Engineer. a. Checking of batching and mixing operations. b. Review of manufacturer's report of each cement shipment and conducting laboratory tests of cement. c. Molding and testing reserve 7-day cylinders or field cylinders. d. Conducting additional field tests for slump,concrete temperature,and ambient temperature. e. Alkalinity Tests: For concrete used in sanitary structures,one test for each structure. Perform alkalinity tests on concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure in accordance with "Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis," Vol. 15, page 230. 5. Contractor shall provide the following testing and quality control services: a. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test design mix for each class of concrete for which material source has been changed. b. Notify commercial testing laboratory employed by Owner 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 6. Testing of deficient concrete in place: a. When averages of three consecutive strength test results fail to equal or exceed specified strength, or when any individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi, strength of concrete shall be considered potentially deficient and core testing, structural analysis or load testing may be required by the Engineer. b. When concrete in place proves to be deficient, Contractor shall pay costs, including costs due to delays, incurred in providing additional 5/2013 03310-6 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE testing and analysis services provided by the Engineer, or the independent commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. c. Replace concrete work judged inadequate by core tests, structural analysis or load tests at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Core Tests: 1) Obtain and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Where concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test; test dry. Where concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. 2) Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. When,before testing,one or more cores shows evidence of having been damaged during or after removal from structure, replace the damaged cores. 3) Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate when average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength, and when no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Patch core holes in accordance with Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. e. Structural Analysis: When core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, the Engineer may perform additional structural analysis at Contractor's expense to confirm safety of structure. f. Load Tests: When core tests and structural analysis do not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required, and their results evaluated, in accordance with ACI 318. g. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, probe penetration tests (Windsor probe), or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure,to evaluate concrete strength in place,or for selecting areas to be cored. However, such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data,shall not be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of structure's safety. 5/2013 03310-7 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Cement: Store cement in weather tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. When there is any doubt as to the expansive potential of shrinkage-compensating cements because of method or length of storage and exposure, laboratory test cement before use. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before next is started. C. Fine Aggregate: Before using, allow fine aggregate to drain until uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions,provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. E. Lightweight Aggregates: Uniformly pre-dampen lightweight aggregates as necessary to prevent excessive variations in moisture content. Allow pre-dampened aggregates to remain in stockpiles,under continuous fog spray, for minimum of 24 hours before use. Provide adequate drainage in stockpile areas to eliminate excess water and accumulation of contaminated fines. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Use same brand of cement used in concrete mix design. Use only one brand of each type in each structure, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I or Type II,gray in color. Use Type III only when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Use Type II, including the requirements of Table 2, in construction of liquid-containing structures and cooling towers, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Admixtures: 1. Do not use calcium chloride,thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260,compatible with other admixtures used. 5/2013 03310-8 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 3. Chemical Admixtures: Polymer type,non-staining, chloride-free admixtures conforming to ASTM C494,Type A, C, D or E. 4. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, compatible with and by the same manufacturer as other admixtures. C. Mixing Water: Use clean, potable water, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source, for exposed concrete in any single structure. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel,crushed gravel or crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C33. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand complying with ASTM C33. 3. Limestone aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: a. Clean,hard,strong and durable particles free of chemicals and coatings of silt,clay,or other fine materials that may affect hydration and bond of cement paste. b. Select crushed limestone: High-calcium limestone (minimum 95 percent CaCO3 and maximum 3.5 percent MgCO3)with maximum Los Angeles Abrasion loss of 38 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. c. Test aggregate for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88; maximum loss shall not exceed 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate test. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate: a. Normal weight concrete, except as noted below: 1-1/2 inches. b. Formed members 6 inches or less in least dimension: 1/5 least dimension. c. Slabs: 1/3 depth of slab. d. Drilled shafts: 1/3 clearance between reinforcing steel,but not greater than 3/4 inch. e. Concrete fill, seal slabs and bonded concrete topping in clarifiers: 3/8 inch. 5/2013 03310-9 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: ASTM C330. Grading limits: 3/4 inch to No. 4. 6. Abrasive Aggregate: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 —Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. E. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. F. Evaporation Retardant: Masterbuilders "Confilm", Euclid "Eucobar", or equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Bonding Agent: Two-component modified epoxy resin. 2. Vapor barrier: 6-mil clear polyethylene film of type recommended for below- grade application. 3. Non-shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement and water-reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX A. Objective: Select proportions of ingredients to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other specified properties. B. Mix Design: Employ and pay an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test mix designs for each type of concrete specified. Proportion mix design ingredients by weight. Submit mix designs and test results for approval. 1. During the trial batches,aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix,a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractor's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. Prepare trial batches using the aggregates,cement and admixtures proposed for the project. Make trial batches large enough to obtain 3 drying shrinkage test specimens and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. Shrinkage testing is required only for Class A and D concrete. 5/2013 03310-10 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Determine compressive strength by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders,made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 and ASTM C39. Test 3 compression test cylinders at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. Average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall be not less than 125 percent of the specified compressive strength. 3. Perform sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch according to of ASTM C136. Report percentage passing each sieve. 4. In mix designs for Class A and D concrete,fine aggregate shall not exceed 41 percent of total aggregate by weight. C. Shrinkage Limitations, Class A and D Concrete 1. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch: 0.036 percent as measured at 21-day drying age or 0.042 percent at 28-day drying age. Use for construction only mix designs that meet trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to Class A and D concrete. 2. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. 3. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction,take any or all of the following actions,at no additional cost to the Owner,for securing the specified shrinkage requirements: Changing the source or aggregates,cement or admixtures; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or its effects. D. Selecting Ingredient Proportions for Concrete: 1. Proportion concrete mix according to ACI 301, Chapter 3. 2. Establish concrete mix design by laboratory trial batches prepared by independent testing laboratory, or on basis of previous field experience in accordance with provisions of ACI 318,Item 5.3;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. 3. Concrete mix design data submitted for review shall have average 28-day compressive strength calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.2.1. When data is not available to determine standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1, average 28-day strength of mix design shall conform to ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. E. Water-Cement Ratios: 1. Maximum allowable water-cement ratios shall be as follows: 5/2013 03310-11 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE a. Concrete for liquid-containing structures: 0.45. b. Concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or deicers: 0.40. c. All other concrete: 0.55. 2. Superplasticizer may be added to maintain specified maximum water-cement ratios. Include free water in aggregate in water-cement ratio computations. F. Adjustment of Mix Proportions: After sufficient data becomes available during construction,mix may be adjusted upon approval of the Engineer,in accordance with ACI 318,Item 5.5;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. G. Entrained Air: Air-entrain all concrete except drilled shafts. Total air content in accordance with ASTM Cl73: 4 to 6 percent. H. Consistency, Workability, and Slump: 1. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period,to produce concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation,and which can be compacted by vibratory methods as specified, to give the desired strength, density, impermeability and smoothness of surface. Change the quantity of water as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. Determine the consistency of the concrete in successive batches by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slumps shall be as follows: Concrete Type Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Portland Cement Concrete 2" 4" Concrete to be dosed with superplasticizer: 1" 3" Normal Weight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 9" Lightweight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 7" Drilled Shaft Concrete: 4"* 8" * Minimum slump where drilled shafts are cast in temporary casings: 5 inches 2. Specified slump shall apply at time when concrete is discharged at job site. Perform slump tests to monitor uniformity and consistency of concrete delivered to job site; however, do not use as basis for mix design. Do not exceed water-cement ratios specified. 5/2013 03310-12 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. Use of accelerator is permitted when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Use of retarder is permitted when temperature of placed concrete exceeds 65 degrees F. J. High-Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use superplasticizer to improve workability of concrete or delay hydration of cement,in accordance with requirements and recommendations of product manufacturer and approved submittals. K. Concrete Classification and Strength: 1. Strength: Conform to values for class of concrete indicated on Drawings for each portion of Work. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early-strength concrete is allowed,requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. 2. Classification: Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Normal-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard Concrete for Structures Containing Water or Wastewater A 4,000 564 (6 sacks) B 1,500 329 (3 '/Z sacks) C 3,000 470 (5 sacks) D 5,000 658 (7 sacks) H 3,000 611 (6 '/2 sacks) Concrete for Buildings, Slabs on Grade and Miscellaneous Structures AB 4,000 Not Applicable BB 1,500 Not Applicable CB 3,000 Not Applicable DB 5,000 Not Applicable Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Light-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard E 3,000 Not Applicable F 4,000 Not Applicable G 5,000 Not Applicable 3. Maximum size aggregate for Class H concrete: 3/8 inch. Maximum size aggregate for all other normal-weight concrete: 1-1/2 inches, except as specified in Paragraph 2.01 D.4. 4. When required strength is not obtained with minimum cement content as specified,add cement,lower water-cement ratio or provide other aggregates as necessary. 5/2013 03310-13 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. In addition to conforming to specified strength, lightweight concrete must be within specified unit weight limits. Maximum air-dry unit weight is 118 pounds per cubic foot; minimum is 110 pounds per cubic foot unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Determine air-dry unit weight in accordance with ASTM C567. Correlate air-dry unit weight with fresh unit weight of the same concrete as a basis for acceptance during construction. L. Use of Classes of Concrete: 1. Use classes of concrete as indicated on the Drawings and in other specifications. 2. Liquid-containing structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes for structures containing water or wastewater and for utility applications in the locations described: a. Class A: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class B: Unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal slabs, thrust blocks, and trench dams, unless indicated otherwise. c. Class H: Fill and topping. Where concrete fill thickness exceeds 3 inches in the majority of a placement and is not less than 1.5 inches thick, Class A concrete may be used. 3. All other structures: If not otherwise indicated,use the following classes in the locations described: a. Class AB: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class CB: Duct banks; see Section 16402—Underground Duct Banks for additional requirements. c. Class BB: Unreinforced concrete fill under structures. 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 7. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1. Measure,batch,mix and transport ready-mixed concrete according to ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities". 5/2013 03310-14 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Provide batch tickets with information specified in ASTM C94. Deliver batch ticket with concrete and give to Owner's on-site testing laboratory representative. C. Batch Mixing at Site: 1. Mix concrete in batch mixer conforming to requirements of CPMB "Concrete Plant Mixer Standards". Use mixer equipped with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and water measuring device. Batch mixer shall be capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into uniform mass within specified mixing time, and of discharging mix without segregation. Operate mixer according to rated capacity and recommended revolutions per minute printed on manufacturer's rating plate. 2. Charge batch into mixer so some water will enter before cement and aggregates. Keep water running until one-fourth of specified mixing time has elapsed. Provide controls to prevent discharging until required mixing time has elapsed. When concrete of normal weight is specified,provide controls to prevent addition of water during mixing. Discharge entire batch before mixer is recharged. 3. Mix each batch of 2 cubic yards or less for not less than 1 minute and 30 seconds. Increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction of cubic yard. 4. Keep mixer clean. Replace pick-up and throw-over blades in drum when they have lost 10 percent of original depth. D. Admixtures: 1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into mixer as solution using automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to accuracy within+ 3 percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. 2. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided that admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. Inject admixtures separately during batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after addition of cement. E. Temperature Control: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep as-mixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete above minimum placing temperature. 5/2013 03310-15 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. When water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when temperature of mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, maintain temperature of concrete below maximum placing temperature. When necessary, temperature may be lowered by cooling ingredients, cooling mixer drum by fog spray, using chilled water or well- crushed ice in whole or part for added water,or arranging delivery sequence so that time of transport and placement does not generate unacceptable temperatures. 4. Submit hot weather and cold weather concreting plans for approval. 2.04 MIXING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Determining Absorption of Aggregates: Mixing procedures vary according to total absorption by weight of lightweight aggregates. Determine total absorption by weight before pre-damping in accordance with ASTM C127. B. Ten Percent or Less Absorption: Follow same requirements as for mixing normal- weight concrete when preparing concrete made with low-absorptive lightweight aggregates having 10 percent or less total absorption by weight. To be low-absorptive, aggregates must absorb less than 2 percent additional water in first hour after mixing. C. More Than 10 Percent Absorption: Batch and mix concrete made with lightweight aggregates having more than 10 percent total absorption by weight, as follows: 1. Place approximately 80 percent of mixing water in mixer. 2. If aggregates are pre-dampened, add air-entraining admixture and all aggregates. Mix for minimum of 30 seconds, or 5 to 10 revolutions of truck mixer. 3. When aggregates have not been pre-dampened,mix aggregates and water for minimum of 1 minute and 30 seconds,or 15 to 30 revolutions of truck mixer. Then add air-entraining admixture and mix for additional 30 seconds. 4. Then,in the following sequence,add specified or permitted admixtures(other than air-entraining agent), all cement,and mixing water previously withheld. 5. Complete mixing using procedures for normal-weight concrete. 2.05 MASS CONCRETE A. Do not use high early-strength cement(Type III) or accelerating admixtures. 5/2013 03310-16 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE B. Use high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer)to minimize water content and cement content. C. Specified water-reducing retarding admixture may be required to prevent cold joints when placing large quantities of concrete,to permit revibration of concrete,to offset effects of high temperature in concrete or weather, and to reduce maximum temperature or rapid temperature rise. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Conform to following equipment and operations requirements. B. Truck mixers, agitators and manner of operation: Conform to ASTM C94. Use of non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete is not permitted. C. Belt conveyors: Configure horizontally, or at a slope causing no segregation or loss. Use approved arrangement at discharge end to prevent separation. Discharge long runs without separation into hopper. D. Chutes: Metal or metal-lined (other than aluminum). Arrange for vertical-to- horizontal slopes not more than 1 to 2 or less than 1 to 3. Chutes longer than 20 feet or not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into hopper before distribution. E. Do not use aluminum or aluminum-alloy pipe or chutes for conveying concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Concreting Under Water: Not permitted except where shown otherwise on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. When shown or permitted,deposit concrete under water by methods acceptable to the Engineer so fresh concrete enters mass of previously- placed concrete from within,causing water to be displaced with minimum disturbance at surface of concrete. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided or the Engineer's approval is obtained, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow or freezing weather. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage surface finish. If rainfall occurs after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect Work. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 5/2013 03310-17 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance,loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Contract Drawings, shop drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. 5/2013 03310-18 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater without special methods. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damagethe surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and this Section. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel that will not be covered by current pour. 5/2013 03310-19 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. Do not transport concrete with vibrators. • 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. Rate of placement shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. 5/2013 03310-20 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE H. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. 3.04 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose(conduit)diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses(conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Control: Take samples for slump,air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge)end of the line. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R Group 3 immersion- type high-speed power vibrators(8,000 to 12,000 rpm)in sufficient number and with 5/2013 03310-21 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.07 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 3.08 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS AND FINISHING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.09 CURING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. 5/2013 03310-22 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03310-23 of 23 (This page is intentionally left blank) SUPPLEMENAL SPECIFICATIONS (This page is intentionally left blank) DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 02361 TERMITECONTROL PART I-GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirements A. Submittals: Product Data and product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that products used comply with U.S.EPA regulations for termiticides. Include application instructions and EPA-Registered Label. B. Engage a licensed professional pest control operator to apply termite control solution. PART lI-PRODUCTS 2.1 Termiticides A. Provide an EPA-registered termitic ide complying with requirements ofauthorities havingjurisdiction, in a soluable or emulsible,concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the lab el volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use,according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Prepare surfaces and apply treatment at rates and concentrations recommended in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply termite control to the following: 1. At foundations. 2. Under concrete floor slabs on grade. 3. At hollow masonry. 4. At expansion and control joints and slab penetrations. 5. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform,porches,and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platfoim and porches are on fill or ground. C. Post warning signs in areas of application. D. Reapply soil termiticide treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 Davis&Davis,Inc. Termite Control 02361-1 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUM ENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORM WORK for BUILDINGS PART 1 -GENERAL SCOPE:The extent of formwork is indicated by the concrete items shown on the drawings.The work includes the design,construction,erection,maintenance,and removal of all formwork for concrete paving,curbs,and any other appropriate concrete item called for. 1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: A. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement.(Buildings) B. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete(Buildings). 1.3 Codes and Standards:Comply with provisions of the following codes,specifications,and standards,exceptas modified or amended herein. A. ACI 347R-94,'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." B. ACI 301-99,"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 Design of Formwork: A. Design,erect,support,brace and maintain foimwork at that concrete items will be of the correct size,shape,alignment,elevation,and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact,shock,or damage to the cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacentmaterials. C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materia I at j oints as maybe required to prevent leakage and fins. D. Wood Forms:Shall be No.2 common southern yellow pine,or equivalent,materials milled to reasonably uniform width and thickness,at least two(2)edges and one(I)side dressed for tight fit. E. Metal Forms:Clean,unpainted,and in good condition to providemembers of widths and depths required.Severely damaged or indented forms are not acceptable. PART III- EXECUTION 3.1 Formwork: A. All forms shall be observed by the Architect/Engineer prior to pla cement o f concrete.The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer at least twenty-four(24)hours prior to placing concrete. B. Forms shall be built to the shapes and dimensions of the concrete on the drawings,shall be set to lines and grades,braced and secured to withstand placing of concrete. Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Formwork 03100-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3.2 Preparation of Form Surfaces: A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with,stain,or adversely affect concrete surfaces andwill not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting ofsurfacesto be cured with water or curing compounds.Thin form-coating compounds only with the thinning agent ofthe type and in amount and under the conditions of the form-coating compound manufacturer's directions.Do not allow excess form-coating materialto accumulate in the forms orto come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.Apply in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Coat steel forms with a non-staining,rust preventive form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.3 Removal of Forms: Forms shall not be removed until concrete has adequately hardened and in any event,not less than two(2)days. 3.4 Re-use of forms:Clean and repair the surfaces of forms that areto be re-used in the work,except that warped,split,frayed,delaminated,or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form-coating compound material to all concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement,thoroughly clean surfaces,remove fins and laitance,and tighten forms to close all joints.Align and secure all jointsto avoid offsets.Do not use "patched"forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. A. All formwork shall comply with AC1302.1 R-96."Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." END OF SECTION 03 l 00 Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Formwork 03100-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT for BUILDINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Scope:The extent of concrete reinforcement is shown on the drawings and in schedules.The work includes fabrication and placement of reinforcement forthe cast-in-place concrete,including bars,ties and supports. 1.2 Related Work Elsewhere: A. Section03100—Concrete Fomnwork. B. Section 03300—Cast-In-Place Concrete(Buildings). 1.3 Codes and Standards:Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards, except as herein modified: A. American Concrete Institute,ACI 315-92 "Manualof Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." B. American Welding Society,AWS,D 12.1 "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel,Metal Inserts and Connection in Reinforced Concrete Construction. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute,"Manual of Standard Practice." 1.4 Submittals:Submit to the Engineer in conformance with the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT. A. For information only,submit two(2)copies of steel producer's certificates of mill tests for reinforcing steel. B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication,bending,and placement of concrete reinforcement.Comply with ACI 315-92"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules,stirrup spacing,diagrams of bent bars,arrangements and assemblies,as required forthe fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. 1.5 Product, Delivery,Handling, and Storage: A. Deliver reinforcement to the project site bundled,tagged,and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths,and otherinfamation corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. B. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or excessive rust. PART II- PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials: A. Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A615 of grade shown on drawings with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Reinforcement 03200-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Supports for Reinforcement:Bolsters,chairs,spacers,and other devices for spacing, supporting,and fastening reinforcement in place. 1. Use wire bar type supports or plastic-type chairs,complying with P57-66,unless otherwise indicated.Do not use wood,brick,and other unacceptable materials. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces,where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic orpla stic-tipped metal. 2.2 Fabrication: A. General:Shop-fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions with fabrication tolerances complying with ACI 315-92.I n case of fabricating errors,do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. B. Unacceptable Materials:Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work: 1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross section due to excessive rusting or other cause. PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation:Comply with the specified codes and standards andthe Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute recommended practice for"Placing Reinforcing Bars"for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. A. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. B. Position,support,and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,construction or concrete placement operations.Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,runners,bolsters, spacers,and hangers,as required. C. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with No.16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations.Set wire ties so that ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. D. Provide sufficientnumbers of supports and of strength to cany reinforcement Do not place reinforcing bars more than two(2")inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support Do not use supports as bases for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. E. Splices:Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends,placing bars in contact,and tightly wire tying.Comply with requirements of ACI 318-99 for minimum lap of spliced bars. END OF SECTION 03200 Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Reinforcement 03200-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE(BUILDINGS) PART I-GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirement A. Submittals: Concrete m ix designs and laboratory test reports. B. Comply with ASTM C 94;ACI 301,"Specification for Structural Concrete";ACI 117,"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials";and CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." C. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to design concrete mixes. PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Deformed Reinforcing Bars:#3 bars Grade40,a ll others ASTM A 61 5/A 615M,Grade 60. B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,as drawn. C .Steel Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,flat sheetsnot rolls. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or III. E. Aggregates: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494,water reducing. H. Vapor Retarder: refer to section 07130,0713 1 and 07132. I. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,clear,Type I,Class B,waterborne. J. Repair Underlayment: Factory-packaged, portland or blended hydraulic cement-based,polymer- m odified,self-leveling underlayment with minimum 28-day compressive strength of4100 psi. K. Repair Topping: Factory-packaged,portland or blended hydraulic cement-based,polymer-modified,self- leveling tra ffic-bearing topping with minimum 28-day compressive strengthof5700 psi. 2.2 Mixes A. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes to provide the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength:3000 psi at 28 days.ASTM specification C-94,"Standard Specific ations for Ready-Mix Concrete.",Verify with structural specs. 2. Slump Limit: 3 to 5 inches at point of placement. Astm specifications C-143. Verify with structural specs. 3. Air Content: 5%plus or minus 1-1/2% for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing,elsewhere at contractor's option.Verify with structural specs. Davis&Davis,Inc. Cast in Place Concrete(Buildings) 03300-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Concreting A. Construct formwork and maintain tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 117 limits of C lass A for concrete exposed to view and Class C for other concrete surfaces. B. Set water stops where indicated to ensure joint watertightness. C. Place vapor retarder or waterproofmg membrane on prepared subgrade,with joints lapped and sealed with fluid applied waterproofing as permanufacturer's recommendations to produce a watertight seal. D. Accurately position,support,and secure reinforcement. E .Install construction,isolation,saw cuts and contraction joints where indicated. Install full-depth j oint- filler strips at isolation joints.Refer to structural for locations. F. Foundation subgrade must be well compacted and damp but not wet before placing the concrete. Foundation subgrade must meet standards of geotechnical report and structural engineer recommendations.Geotecnical or structural engineer must observe and approve foundation sub grade priorto placing concrete.Foundation subgrade is to be tested as per project testing requirements. G. Concrete shall not be placed until all reinforcement is correctly and securely fastened in place, nor until the forms have been inspected and approved and have been properly cleaned,oiled and wetted.Structural engineerto observe and approve steel placement priorto concrete being placed. H. ALL FLOOR DRAINS ARE TO BE SET 1/8" LOWER THAN FINISH BUILDING SLAB ELEVATION AND HAVE A 1% SLOPE RADIUS OF 12". ADJUST RADIUS AS PER FIELD CONDITIONS,BUT IN NO CASE EXCEED 2%SLOPE.BLEND FOR A SMOOTH TRANSITION AT TOP OF SLOPE AND TOP OF SLAB. I. Place concrete in a continuous operation and consolidate using mechanical vibrating equipment. J. Protect concrete from physical damage,premature drying,and reduced strength due to hot or cold weather during m ixing,placing,and curing. K. Formed Surface Finish: Medium broom finish,non-slip. L. Slab Finishes: Medium broom finish to all areas. Where plans call for concrete floors,screed the concreteto a true surface and float when hard enough to support knee boards,float with a levelingdarby and wood float.Fill low spots with fresh concrete.Again trowel and float sufficiently to eliminate all irregularities and to producea smooth,hard finish,free from defects.Finally they shall be gone over with a float to produce a fine,non-slip finish.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THREE (3)TEST PANELS FOR ARCHITECT/ ENGINEER AND OWNER REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. EACH PANEL SHALL HAVE A DIFFERENT DEGREE OF SLIP RESISTANCE AND SHALL BE 36"X 36"IN SIZE AND CONTAIN A FLOOR DRAIN.THE SELECTED PANEL SHALL BE MARKED AND HELD ON SITE TO VERIFY ACTUAL SLAB FINISH. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DELIVERING THE REQUIRED FINISH. M. Begin curing concrete slabs after finishing. Apply m embrane-forming curing compound to concrete. N. Owner will engage a testing agency to perform field tests,slump tests,compression tests. O. Compression and slump tests shall be made of each 50 cubic yards ofconcrete placed.Make 4 cylinders for each compression test,2 for 7 day test and 2 for 28 day test The cylinders shall be made on the job Davis&Davis,Inc. Cast in Place Concrete(Buildings) 03300-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 by the laboratory representative and shall be cured and tested in accordance with ASTM specifications C- 31 and C-39. Payment responsibility shall be established in the Proj ect Manual.Coordinate slump and compression testing with geotechnical report and structural engineer requirements.The m ore stringent shall apply. P. Protect concrete from damage. Repair surface defects in formed concrete and slabs. Q. Repair slabs not meeting surface tolerances by grinding high areas and by applying a repair underlayment to low areas receiving floor coverings and a repairtoppingto low areas to remain exposed. R. Apply concrete sealer as per Section 07110. END OF SECTION 03300 Davis&atvis,Inc. Cast in Place Concrete(Buildings) 03300-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) DIVISION 4 - MASONRY (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 Related Document A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 Section Includes A. Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.3 Submittal A. Samples: Submit 2 strips,1/4"x 6"in size,illustratingmortarcolorandcolorrange. 1.4 Environmental Conditions A. Cold Weather Requirements: Make provisions to conform to ACI 530.1/ASCE6/TMS 602. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Make provisions to conform to ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART It—PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Portland Cement: Refer to structural B. Mortar Aggregate: Refer to structural C. Hydrated Lime: Refer to structural D. Mortar Color:as selected by the Architect. E. Grout Aggregate: Refer to structural F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Source Limitations: Mortar ingredients shall be of a uniform quality,including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component,and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 Mortar Mixes A. Mortar for Load Bearing andNon-load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTMC270, Type S using the Property Specifications.Coordinate with structural. Davis&Davis,Inc. Mortar and Masonry Grout 04100-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.3 Mortar Mixing A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 2.4 Grout Mixes A. Grout for Load Bearing and Non-load Bearing Walls and Pa rtit ions: ASTM C476,using the Proportion Specification. 2.5 Grout Mixing A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine Grout. B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing po int o f the grout. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A Install mortar in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. END OF SECTION 04 100 Davis&Davis,Inc. MortarandMasonry Grout 04100-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 04711 CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cast stone trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section"Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cast Stone: Architectural pre-cast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details,material descriptions,dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for cast stone units. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions,details of reinforcement and anchorages,if any,and indication of finished faces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Forcoloredmortar. D. Samples for Verifications: 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required,10 inches square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label samples to indicate types and amount of pigments use. E. Mockup Samples: Furnish sample unites for each color and texture of cast stone required of sufficient size to be placed in wall mock up. F. Qualification Data: For m anufacturer and testing agency. 1. Include copies of materia l test reports for completed projects,indicating compliance of cast stone wit ASTM C 1364. G. Quality-Control Plan: Manufacturer's written quality-control plan that includes all elements ofthe Cast Stone I n stitute's"Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection". H. Material Test Reports: For each m ix required to produce cast stone,based ontesting accordingto ASTM C 1364,including test for resistance to freezing and thawing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualification: An independent testing agency qualified accordingto ASTM E 329 for testing indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Manufacturer is a producing m ember of the Cast Stone I nstiute. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: As independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated,as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone unties through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Source Lim itations for M ortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color,from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. Davis and Davis,Inc. Cast Stone Masonry 04711-1 1 00%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimizethe need foron- site storage and to avoid delaying the work. B. Pack,handle,and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings;do not use wire rope or ropes thatm ight cause staining. Move cast stone units,if required using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone unites on wood skids or pallets with non-staining,waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store installation materials on elevated platforms,under cover,and in a dry location. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliancewith requirements,products thatmay incorporated into the Work include,but arenot limited to,products specified. 2.2 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement:ASTM C 150,Type I,containing not m ore than 0.60 percnet total alkali when tested according toASTMC 114. C. Course Aggregates: Granite,quartz,or limestone complyingwith ASTM C 33;gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complyingwith ASTM C 33,gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979,synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water- reducing admixtures;color stable,free ofcarbon black,non-fading,and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Do not use admixtues unless specified or approved in writing by Architect. 1. Do not use admixtures that contain m ore than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass ofcementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturerto be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the Exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of4 to 6 percent,except donotadd to zero-slump concretemixes. 4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. 5. Water-Reducing,Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C494/M,Type D. 6. Water-Reducing,AccerleratingAdmixture: ASTM C 494/C 494/M,Type E. G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M. Use • Galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of Cast stone material. H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240/MA 276,or ASTM A 666,Type304. 2.3 CAST STONE UNITS A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the wet-cast method. Davis and Davis,Inc. Cast Stone Masonry 04711-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. Provide units that are resistantto freezing and thawing as determined by Laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666,Procedure A,as modified by ASTM C 1364. B. Design Mix: Cast stone manufacturer is responsible for preparing design mix to attain compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with referenced requirements. C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements,unless otherwise indicated. D. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch,whichever is greater,but in no case by more than ''A inch. 3. Warp,bow,Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves,False Joints,Holes,Anchorages,and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces. E. Cure units by one ofthe following methods: 1. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for24 hours. F. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement fihn from surfaces to be exposed to view. G. Styles,Colors and Textures: Provide units with fine-grainedtexture and no color. All units are to be painted. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Division 04 Section"Unite Masonry". B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II,except Type III may be used for cold- weath er construction. Provide natural colororwhite cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,compound for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to Produce required mortar color. H. Water: Potable. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated,fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 276,or ASTM A 666,Type 304. B. Dowels: Round stainless-steel bars complying with ASTM A 276,Type 304,and'h-inch diameter. C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength,general-purpose cleaner designed for rem oving m ortar/grout stains,efflorescence,and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces;expressly approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use one cast stoneand adjacent masonry materials. 1. Products:Subject to compliance wit requirements,provide one ofthe following: a. SureKlean No.600 Detergent Prosoco,Inc. b. SureKlean Vantrol: ProSoCo,Inc. Davis and Davis,Inc. Cast Stone Masonry 04711-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 c. Prior approved equal. 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section"Unit Masonry" formortarmixes. B. Do not use admixtures,including pigments,air-entraining agents,accelerators,retarders, water-repellent agents,antifreeze compounds,or other admixtures,unless otherwise indicated. C. Comply wit ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Limit cementitious materials in m ortar to Portland cement,mortar cement,and lime. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with Ingredients to produce color required. E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Colored mortar is not needed,all units are to be painted. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C 1364. 1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with require- ments for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section"Unit Masonry." B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and incicated tolerances. C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints,unless otherwiest indicated. 1. If not indicated,set units with joints'A to 3/8 inch. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collarjoints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into m ortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths ofnot less than'A inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layerthoroughly and allow it to becomethumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard,using a jointer larger than joint thickness,unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide expansion,control,and pressure-relieving j oints of widths and at locations Indicated,or as per industry standard if not shown on plans. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 1. Form open joint ofwidth indicated,but not less than 3/8 inch. Davis and Davis,Inc. Cast Stone Masonry 04711-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 I. Prepare joints indicatedto receive sealant and apply sealant oftype and locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants". 1. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant,unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet,'A inch in 20 feet,or'A inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet,'A inch in 20 feet,or'A inch maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth ofnominal joint width,whichever is less. D. Variation in Plan between Adjacent Surfaces(Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicatedto be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch,except due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units andunits not matching samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved smples,complying with other requirements,and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone aswork progresses. 1. Removemortar fins and smears before toolingjoints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately,including spills,smear,and splatter. D. Final Cleaning: After m ortar is thoroughly set and cured,clean of exposed cast stone as follows: 1. Remove large m ortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable m asking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof m asking tape. 3. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners;remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean cast stone by bucket-and brush hand-cleaning method described in BI A Technical Notes No.20. 5. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not damage adjacentmaterials or finishes. END OF SECTION Davis and Davis,Inc. Cast Stone Masonry 04711-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirement A. Submittals: 1. Samples for clay face brick and smooth face concrete masonry units,and split face. 2. Mix Designs: for each type of mortar and grout. 3. Statement of Compressive Strength ofMasonry: for each combination of masonry unit type, provide statementof average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type,and resulting net area, compressive strength of masonry determined according to IMS 602 ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 4. Product Data: for each type ofproduct 5. Material Certificates: Forj o int rein forcement and accessories. B. Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Mockups at each Project Job Site: Construct a sample wall panel approximately 64 inches long by full height with all materials to demonstrate a esthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.This is to be coordinated with all trades involved. D. Delivery,Storage,and Handling: Store masonry components in a dry location and uncontaminated by dirt and oil. E. Field Conditions: 1. Comply with Cold-Weather Requirements of TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 when cold weather conditions apply. 2. Comply with Hot-Weather Requirements of TMS 602/AC I 530.1/ASCE6 when hot weather conditions apply. PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 Unit Masonry General A. Masonry Standard Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE6,unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 Masonry Units A. Normal weight. B. Standard or Smooth Face Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90;Weight Classification,Normal,type 1. Masonry Units as manufactured by Featherlite Building Products Corporation,381 5 Singleton Blvd., Dallas,Texas 75212, (214)-637-2720,or approved equal. 1. Special shapes for lintels,comers,jambs,sash,control joints,and other special conditions. Davis&Davis,Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2. Bullnose units for outside corners of all exposed interior building areas, unless otherwise indicated. 3. No integral color for interior building walls,to be painted.. 4. Include Integral Water Repellent. C. Split Face Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90;Weight C la ssification,Normal typ e 1. Masonry Units as manufactured by Featherlite Building Products Corporation,3815 Singleton Blvd.,Dallas,TX 75212, (2 14)637-2720,or approved equal. 1. Finish: Exposed exterior faces of units to be split-face where noted on plans,forveneer.. 2. Include Integral Water Repellent 3. Special shapes for lintels,comers,jambs,sash,control joints,and other special conditions. 4. All units to have integral color. Standard colorto be determined. D. Ground Face Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90;Weight Classification,Normal type 1. Masonry Units as manufactured by Featherlite Building Products Corporation,3815 Singleton B lvd.,Dallas, TX 75212,(2 14)637-2720,or approved equal. 1. Finish: Exposed faces of units to be ground face(smooth)for veneer. 2. Include Integral Water Repellent. 3. Special shapes for lintels,comers,jambs,sash,control joints,and other special conditions. 4. All units to have integral color. Standard colorto be determined. E. Water Repellents 1. Concrete Masonry Water Repellent Protection (Field Applied): WRP-700 as distributed by Featherlite BuildingProducts Corporation,508 McNeil Road,RoundRock, Texas, (5 1 2)255- 2573. 2. ConcreteMasonry Acrylic Sealer(field Applied):FBP-707 as distributed by Featherlite Building Products Corp,508 McNeil Rd,Round Rock,Texas 78682.9512)255-2573. F. Graffiti Guard Sealer: (All exterior concrete masonry units) 1 Products:Graffiti Guard I IIS—(Sacrificial Type) a. Tex-Cote Decorative Protection Coating Systems:Textured Coatings of America,Inc., Panama City,Fl.Or equal if approved by Architect 2.3 Mortar and Grout A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification. With 28-day compressive strength to meet fm requirements in Part 1.Coordinate with structural. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.Take care to prevent efflorescent. 2. For reinforced masonry,use Type S. 3. For exterior,above-grade,load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls;for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions,and for other applications where another type is not indicated,use Type S. 4. Colored Mortar: For all integral colored masonry units,use colored cement or cement-lim e m ix of color selected by Architect B. Grout: ASTM C 476 2000PSI in 28 days. Coordinate with structural and section 04 100. 2.4 Reinforcement,Ties,and Anchors Davis&Davis,Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615,Grade 60. B. Reinforcing BarPositioners: Wire unites designed to fit into mortar bed j oints spanning m a s onry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed fornumberofbars indicated. C. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951,at 16"on center,vertical,unless noted ot he rwise in Structural Drawings. 1. Coating: Hot-dip galvanized at both interior and exterior walls. 2. For single-wythe masonry,provide either ladder design or truss design. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods:0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for CrossRods:0.148-inchdiameter. 5. Provide in lengths o not less than 10 feet,with prefabricated corner and tee units. 2.5 Miscellaneous Masonry Assemblies A. Compressible Filler: Premolded strips complying with ASTM D 1056,Grade 2A1. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall;made from styrene-butadiene rubber or PVC. PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation,General A. Cut masonry units with saw. Install with cut surfaces and,where possible,cut edges concealed. B. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to pro duce unifo rm blend of colors and textures. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back units;do not tooth. D. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plate s,beams, lint els, posts,and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. E. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height and install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard,unless otherwise indicated. G. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. H. Fill all cells of the first course of concrete masonry units with grout in all walls. I. Lay masonry in a running bond pattern,unless otherwise indicated. J. Bed face shells and webs ofmasonry units in mortar,unless otherwise indicated. Makehead joints of depth equal to bed joints,unless otherwise indicated. K. Use a minimum coverof5/8"for entire length oflongitudinal side rods in mortar. Davis&Davis,Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 L. Provide vertical control joints as per structural specs. 3.2 Lintels A. Provide masonry or steel lintels where shown. Use CMU"U"block tile lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color,texture,and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated.The"U"block is the lower course.If noted on plans use pre-cast structural lintels.Finish to be smooth and from manufacturer's standard color selection. B. Minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated by structural. 3.3 Cleaning A. Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fms and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured,remove large mortar particles,scrub,and rinse unit masonry. 1. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner,then remove c leaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 2. After all exposed exterior masonry has been cleaned apply waterrepellants,sealer and Graffiti Guard to all exterior concrete masonry units as permanufactures directions. 3. DO NOT USE ANY MURIATIC ACID. 3.4 Field and Quality Control A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting ofmaterials that fail to comply with specified req uirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Refer to the Structural Drawings for the list of required special inspections. END OF SECTION 04810 Davis&Davis,Inc. Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 04820 BLOK-FLASH (Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Unit Drainage System) PART I GENERAL 1.1 Related Document A. DIV. 1,General Requirements, and 04810 Unite Masonry Assemblies apply to this Section. 1.2 Section Includes A. Furnishing and installing complete single wythe concrete masonry drainage system. 1.3 References A. Applicable requirements of the latest issue ofconstruction industry codes,standard s and specifications referenced herein apply to work ofthis Section. B. National Concrete Masonry Association(NCMA)TEK Notes. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Mockup: 1. Build drainage pans into sample panel of masonry wall as specified in Section entitled Unit Masonry,and as specified herein. 2. Obtain approval prior to proceeding with any masonry work. B. Pre-Installation Conference:Convene prior to commencing work ofthis Section to coordinate installation requirements.. 1.5 Submittals A. Product Data:Catalog cuts,installation details and specifications for all materials. B. Samples:Of drainage pans with drainage mattes included. 1.6 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Deliver products to site, and store and protect under provisions of Section entitled Materials and Equipment. PART II PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer A. CMU Drainage System as manufactured by MortarNet®USA,326 Melton Road,Bums Harbor,IN 46304 Ph: 1-800-664-6638 Fax: 219-787-5088 or approved equal. 2.2 Drainage System A. Pan is a high density polyethylene composition.0625 inch thick(1.59 m m)with(7.94)perim et er flange, with a weep spout openinganda 45 degrees drip edge that extends 1.0 inch(25.4 mm)from the outer flange,8"(203.2 mm),and 12"(304.8 mm)wall systems. B. Integrated web spacer/bridge unit is a high density polyethylene.0625 inch thick(1.59 mm)that overlappes the adjacentpanand extends from face shell to face shell.Bridge is removable for corner installation. C. Drainage Matteis an open weave polyester mesh(7x16 inch,177.8 mm x 406.4 mm) installed in each CMU cell above the pan. Davis&Davis,Inc. Blok-flash 04820-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART III EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly located. 3.2 Installation of Drainage System A. Lay the course(s)of block below the desired flashing level until above gra de.Eliminate Step 1 if you lay the pans on a formed concrete foundation above grade.The system installs atop the first fully grouted layer. B. Install pans by placing two units on each block or evenly along a formed concrete foundation or slab. Th e drip edge(weep spout)on the pan should extend slightly beyond the face of the CMU,a molded reference lip on the bottom ofthe pan should rest againstthe edge of the block or slab. C. Span the continuous row of pans with attached web spacers/bridge units designed to divert wa ter to the adjoining pans. D. If the walls are reinforced,simply eliminate the pan and bridge at the grouted core. Remove bridge and cross-bed the webs adjacent to the core to be grouted making sure to overlapthe flange.This will prevent grout from spreading beyond the intended core. E. Utilize standard mortar spreading techniques with mortar lapped,first over the inner and second over the outer flanges of the pan units.This will stabilize the units during installation and later help divert moisture into the pan. F. Reduce clogging from mortar and grout droppings by installing the 7" x 16" (177.8 mm x 406.4 mm) polyester mesh drainage mattes into the core cavity above the pans.This will suspend mortar droppings in the core allowing moisture to flow down the inside face ofthe block and into the pan. G. Toolallhead andbedjointsand remove any obstruction fromtheweep spouts. 3. Protection A. Provide protection without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION 04820 Davis&Davis,Inc. Blok-flash 04820-2 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK PARK RANCH PHASE 2 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirements A. Submittals: Model code evaluation reports for treated wood and engineered wood products. PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 Wood Products,General A. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber,S4 S,15 percent maximum moisture content for 2-inch nominal thickness or less,marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. B. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities havingj urisdiction a nd for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. C. Wood Structural Panels: DOC PS 2. Provide plywood complying with DOC PS 1, where plywood is indicated. 1. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions in APA Form No.E30K. 2.2 Treated Materials D. Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPAC2 lumber and AWPAC9 plywood,labeled by an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board ofReview. After treatment,kiln-thy lumber and plywood to 19 and 15 percent moisture content,respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood members in connection with roofmg,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 2. Concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing m embers less than 1 8 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.3 Lumber E. Dimension Lumber: The following grades are per inspection agency indicated: 1. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: No.2: Douglas fir south: WWPA; or Southern pine: SPIB. 2. ExposedFraming: Select Structural No.2,handselected: Spruce-pine-fir: NELMA,NLGA, WCLIB,or WWPA;or Southern pine: SPIB. F. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content: Mixed southern pine: No.2 per SPIB rules. Davis&Davis,Inc. Rough Carpentry 06100-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK PARK RANCH PHASE 2 G. Miscellaneous Lumber: Construction,Stud,or No.3 grade of any species for n a ilers,b lo ckin g, and similar members. 2.4 Engineered Wood Products A. Engineered wood products with allowable design stresses,as published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be demonstrated by comprehensive testing. B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Manufactured with exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 25 59. Allowable design values determined according to ASTM D 5456. 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending,Edgewise: 2850 psi for 12-inch nominal-depth members. 2. Modulus ofElasticity,Edgewise: 2,0 00,000 psi. 2.5 Panel Products A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior,Structural I sheathing. B. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior,Structural single-floor panels or sheathing. C. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood,Exposure 1,C-D Plugged,fire-retardant treated,not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.6 Miscellaneous Products A. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather,in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABONER-272. 2. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel of structural capacity,type,and size indicated. C. Building Paper: Refer to Section 07552. D. Sill-Sealer: Glass-fiber insulation,1-inch thick,compressible to 1/32 inch. E. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: APA AFG-0 1. PART III EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line,cut,and fitted. Locate nailers,blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. Davis&Davis,Inc. Rough Carpentry 06100-2 100%CONSTRUCTI ON DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK PARK RANCH PHASE 2 B. Securely attach rough carpentryto substrates,complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements ofm etal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 2304.9.1,"Fastening Schedule for Structural Members,"in the 2000 International Build in g Code. C. Fastening Methods: Comply with recommendations and"Code Plus"provisions in APA Form No. E3OK and the following: 1. Sheathing: Nail to framing. 2. Provide 1/8"space around all sides of roof sheathing. 3. Provide approved metal clips on top and bottom ofall roof sheating. END OF SECTION 06100 Davis&Davis,Inc. Rough Carpentry 06100-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 1 00%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL Section Requirements A. Submittals: 1. Model code evaluation reports for treated wood. PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 Wood Products,General A. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, 15 percent maximum moisture content for 2-inch nominal thickness or less,marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. B. Wood Structural Panels: DOC PS 2. Provide plywood complying with DOC PS 1, wh ere plywood is indicated. 1. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions in APA Form No.E3OK 2.2 Treated Materials A. Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA C2 lumber and AWPA C9 plywood,labeled by an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board ofReview. After treatment,kiln-thy lumber and plywood to 19 and 15 percent moisture content,respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 2. Wood members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing. 3. Concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Wood framingmembers less than 18 inches above grade. 5. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 6. Wood plates bolted to concrete masonry units and steel beams. 2.3 Lumber A. Other Framing: Construction or No.2 grade: Douglas fir-larch: NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA; or Southernpine: SPIB. B. Exposed Boards: To match ceiling or soffit wood. C. Concealed Boards: Mixed southern pine: No.2 per SPIB rules. D. Miscellaneous Lumber: Construction, Stud, or No.3 grade of any species for nailers,blocking, and similar members. Davis&Davis,Inc. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.4 Interior Wood Trim A. Refer to Section 06200. 2.5 Panel Products A. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: Exposure 1 sheathing,span rating to suit framing in each location. B. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1,Grade PBU. C. Hardboard Underlayment: AHA A135.4,Class 4(Service),SI S;with back side sanded. D. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: A-D Interior,thickness as indicated,but at least 1/2 inch. 2.6 Fasteners A. Fasteners of size and type indicated. Where carpentry is exposed to weather,in ground contact,or in are a of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABONER-272. PART III EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb andtrueto line. Fit carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope for accurate fit. Locate nailers,blocking,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. C. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. D. Installation of Panel Products: Comply with recommendations and"Code Plus"provisions in APA Form No.E3OK E. Install wood trim with minimum number ofjoints practical,using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting j oints with full- surface contact throughout length ofjoint. Use scarf j oints for end-to-end joints. 1. Match color and gra in pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining trim with 1/32- inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. END OF SECTION06105 Davis&Davis,Inc. Miscellaneous Carpentry 06105-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 06160 SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Wall sheathing with integral water-resistive barrier and air barrier. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): www.asme.org 1. ASME B 18.6.1 -Wood Screws(Inch Series) B. ASTM Intemational(ASTM): www.astm.org 1. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission o f Materials 3. ASTM E 108-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of RoofCoverings 4. ASTM El 19-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 5. ASTM E23 57-Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies C. US Department of Commerce(DOC): http://gsi.nist.gov/global/index.cfin/Ll-5/12-44/A-3 55 1. DOC PS 2-Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural Panels D. International Code Council(ICC): www.iccsafe.org 1. ICC IBC-International Building Code 2. ICC IRC-International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings E. ICC Evaluation Service,Inc.(ICC-ES): www.icc-es.org 1. AC3 8—Acceptance Criteria for Weather Resistive Barriers 2. ICC-ES AC 116-Acceptance Criteria forNails and Spikes 3. ICC-ES AC 148-Acceptance Criteria For Flexible Flashing Materials 4. ICC-ES AC201-Acceptance Criteria for Staples 5. ICC-ES AC266 -Acceptance Criteria for Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Factory- Lam inated with an Alternate Roof Underlayment 6. ICC-ES AC310-Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Membranes Factory-bonded to Wood- based Structural Sheathing,Used as Water-ResistiveBarriers 7. ICC-ES ESR-153 9-Power Driven Staples and Nails for Use in Engineered and Non-Engi n ee re d Connections 8. ICC-ES NER-272-Power Driven Staples and Na ils for Use in All Types of Building Construction Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheathing 06160-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of sheathing product specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: From ICC-ES,for wood sheathing and seam tape. B. Product Certifications: From manufacturer,indicating that sheathing p rod ucts comply with ICC-ES AC266 and ICC-ES AC310. C. Certified Wood Certificates: Certificates indicating that manufacturer is currently certified by anSFI-or FSC-accredited certification body,and chain-of-custody certificates indicatingthat sheathing product s comply with forest certification requirements. D. Florida Building Code Supplement: Submit documentation indicating that products comply with requirements of Florida Building Code. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide wood products from manufacturer certified by SFI,FSC,or comparable sustainable forestry program acceptable to Architect. B. Provide wall sheathing products meeting requirements for water-resistive barrier in accordance with ICC- ES AC310. C. Provide roof sheathing products m eetingrequirements forroof underlayments in accordance with ICC-S AC266. D. Florida Building Code Compliance: Provide sheathing complying with Florida Building Code product and installation requirements for locations outside of high velocity wind zone. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protection of sheathing products from weather prior to installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Sp ecialM a nufacturer's Wananty: Manufacturer's standard form in which sheathing manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sheathing products that demonstrate deterioration or failure under normal use due to manufacturing defects within warranty period specified,when installed according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Warranty Period for Sheathing Products:30 years following date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Conditions: Special warranties exclude deterioration or failure due to structural movement resulting in stresses on sheathing products exceeding manufacturer's written specifications,or due to air or moisture infiltration resulting from cladding failure or mechanical damage. Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheathing 06160-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide sheathing products manufactured by Huber Engineered Woods LLC, Charlotte NC;Phone:(800)933-9220;Web site:www.zipsystem.com;www.huberwood.com 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108, Class A, when covered with approved Class A coverings. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated,provide assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119. B. Air-BarrierAssembly Air Leakage: Less than 0.04 cfin/sq.ft.at 1.57 lbf/sq.ft.(0.2 L/s x sq.m at 75 Pa), per ASTM E2375. C. Water-Vapor Permeance,Facer: Minimum 12 perms(689ng/Pax sx sq.m),ASTM E96/E96M. D. Weather Exposure: Manufacturer warranty applies for maximum a llowable exposure period of 180days. 2.3 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Single Source Limitations: Provide wall sheathing by a single manufacturer. B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2,made with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING WI 1}l INTEGRAL WATER-RESIS11VE BARRIER AND AIR BARRIER A. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing with factory-laminated water-resistive barrier facer with printed fastener location symbols. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods LLC;ZIP System Sheathing. 2. Span Rating,PanelGradeandPerfoimanceCategory: Not less than 4 0/2 0; Structural 1; 5/8 Performance Category. 3. Edge Profile: Squareedge 4. Facer: Medium-density,phenolic-impregnated sheet material qualifying as aGrade D weather- resistive barrier in accordance with ICC AC38. a. Provide fastener spacing symbols on facer for 12-inch and 24-inch on center spacing. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Fasteners, General: Size and type complying with manufacturer's written instructions for Project conditions and requirements ofauthorities having j urisdiction. 1. Corrosion Resistance: Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Brads,and Staples: ICCAC116 and ICC AC201. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES-1 539 orNER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. Davis&Covis,Inc. Sheathing 06160-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIAL A. Self-Adhering Seam and Flashing Tape: Pressure-sensitive,self-adhering,cold-applied,seam tape consisting of polyolefm film with acrylic adhesive,meeting ICC-ES AC148, and tested as part of an assembly meeting performance requirements. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods;ZIP System Tape. 2. Thickness: 0.012 inch(0.3 mm). B. Liquid-Applied Flashing Membmne: Gun-grade,cold-applied,silyl-term mated polyether(STPE)liquid flashing m embrane compatible with sheathing/weather barrier and self-adhering seam and flashing tape, and tested as part of an assembly meeting performance requirements. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for integration with ZIP System Tape. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Huber Engineered Woods;ZIP System Liquid Flash. 2. Hardness,Shore A,ASTM C 661: 40 to 45. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flaming spacing and alignment to determine if work is ready to receive sheathing. Proceed with sheathing work once conditions meet requirements. 3.2 SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheathing panels in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Evaluation Reports,and requirements of authorities having j urisdiction. B. Air and Moisture Barrier: Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant sequencing and installation and with adjacent building airandmoisture barrier components to provide complete, continuous air-and moisture-barrier. C. Do not bridge expansion j oints;allow j oint spacing equal to spacing of structural supports. D. Install panels with laminated facer to exterior. Stagger end joints of adjacent panel runs. Support all panel edges. 1. Space square-edged panels 0.125 inch(3 mm). 2. Butt edges of self-spacing edge panels. E. Attach sheathing panels securely to substrate with manufacturerapprovedfasteners in compliance with the following: 1. ICC-ES ESR-153 9 or I CC-NE S NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. IBC: Table 2304.9.1 Fastening Schedule. F. Apply ZIP System Tape at all panel seams,penetrations,and facer defects or cracks to form continuous weathertight surface. Apply tape according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of ICC-ES applicable to tape application. G. Apply liquid-applied flashing membrane at penetrations, gaps, and cracks to form continuous weathertight surface.Apply liquid membraneaccording to manufacturer's written instru ct ion s. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for integration with ZIP System Tape. Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheathing 06160-4 1 00%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 END OF SECTION Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheathing 06160-5 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL Section Requirements A. Submittals: 1. Model code evaluation reports for treated wood. 2. Sample of ceiling, soffits and trim. PART 2-PRODUCT 2.1 Materials General A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and grading rules of inspection agencies certified by Am erican Lumber St andards Committee Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVAHP-1. 2.2 Exterior Finish Carpentry A. Exterior Lumber Trim: Smooth-textured,2 Common hem-fir . B. Exterior Wood Soffit(Non Structural): NA 2.3 Interior Standing and Running Trim A. Interior Softwood Lumber Trim: Grade D Select (Quality),Eastern white,Idaho white,lodgepole, ponderosa,or sugar pine. B. Interior Wood Plank Ceiling: 1"x6" Shiplap V-Grooved, No. 1 Douglas Fir or Hem Fir at random lengths. 2.4 Miscellaneous Materials A. Fasteners for ExteriorFinish Carpentry: hot-dip galvanized steel nails. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation Davis&Davis,Inc. Finish Carpentry 06200-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Condition finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing. B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted!stain finish exposed on the exterior. C. Install finish carpentry level,plumb,true,and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts. D. Install standing and running trim with minimum number of j oints practical,using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Staggerjoints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners. E. Nail siding at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding,unless otherwise recommended by siding manufacturer. Seal joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations. F. Select and arrange paneling for best match of adjacent units. Install with uniform tight joints. END OF SECTION 06200 Davis&Davis,Inc. Finish Carpentry 06200-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirement A. Submittals: Product Data for solid-surfacing materials Shop Drawings and Samples showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available for each type offmish. B. Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards." C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is completed,and HVAC system is operating. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Hardboard: AHAA135.4. B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2,GradeMD. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2. D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. E. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. F. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Comply with LMA SAT--1. G. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 2.2 Cabinet Hardwareand Accessory Materials A. Hardware Standards: Comply with BHMAA156 series standards. B. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BH MA code number indicated. 1. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. C. Furring,Blocking,Shims,and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber,kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content. Davis&Davis,Inc. I nteriorArchitectuml Woodwork 06402-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.3 Interior Woodwork A. Complete fabrication before shipping to Project site to maxim urn extent possible. Disassemble only a s needed for shipping and installing. Where necessary for fitting at Project site,provide for scribing and trimming. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members,kerf backs of other wide,flat members,except for members with ends exposed in finished Work. C. Laminate-Clad Cabinets and Cabinet Toe Recess(Plastic-Covered Casework): Custom gra de. 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush inset with face frame. 2. WIC Construction Style: Style,FaceFrame. 3. WIC Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush. 4. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood. 5. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 6. All surfaces interior and exterior are to be laminate covered,no melamine accepted. D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: Custom grade. 1. LaminateGrade: HGS for flat countertops,HGP for post-formed countertops. 2. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. All surfaces interior and exterior are to be laminate covered,no melamine accepted. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Condition woodwork to prevailing conditions before installing. B. Install woodwork level,plumb,true,and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work,seal cut surfaces,and repair damaged fmish at cuts. D. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible,using full-length pieces to greatest extentpos s ible. Staggerjoints in adjacent and related m embers. E. Anchor countertops securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall. 3.2 Cabinet Hardware and Accessory Schedule A. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch,5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal; B H MA A 156.9, BO 1361 for flush doors and BHMAA156.9,B01521 for overlay doors. B. Concealed(European-Type)Hinges: BHMA A 156.9,B01602. C. Pulls: Wire pulls,4 inches long,5/16 inches in diameter. D. Catches: Magnetic catches,BHMA Al 56.9,B03 141. Davis&Davis,Inc. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 E. Adjustable Shelf Standards: BHMA A156.9,B04071;with shelf rests,BHMA A156.9,B04081. F. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted,zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, complying with BHMA A156.9,Grade 1 and rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides: 751bf. 2. File Drawer Slides: 1501bf. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf. G. DoorLocks: BHMA A156.11,E07121.All doors receive locks.Key each room separately. Lockset within each room is same. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11,E07041.All drawers receive locks.Key each room separately.Lockset within each room is same. I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-inch-OD brown,molded-plastic grommets with plastic cap to match laminate.Locations and quantity to be iden tif ie d upon shop drawing review, a minimum of3 locations will be required at built-in sales counter in room 102 and 3 in built-in counter in room 101. END OF SECTION 06402 Davis&Davis,Inc. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 06611 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:Provide solid surfacing fabrications including butnotlimited to following: 1. m illwork countertops with sinks and cove backsplashes. B. Related Sections:Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1. Provision of plumbing and plumbing fixtures. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. LEED®:Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design;www.cagbc.org. 2. MDF:Medium Density Fiberboard. 3. SCAQMD:South Coast Air Quality Management District;www.aqmd.gov. 4. VOC:Volatile Organic Compound. B. Definitions: 1. Solid Surface:Non-porous,homogeneous material maintainingthe same composition through out the part with a composition of acrylic polymer,aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment. C. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI/NPAA208.2-09 -Medium Density Fiberboard(MDF)For Interior Applications 2. ASTM C920-14a -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D638-10 -Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties ofPlastics 4. ASTM D785-08 -Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness ofPlastics and Electrica l I nsulating Materials 5. ASTMD790-10 -Standard Test Methods for Flexuial Properties ofUnreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 6. ASTM D5420-10 -Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat,Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight(Gardner Impact) 7. ASTME84-14 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 8. ASTM E228-1 1 -Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials with a Push-Rod Dilatometer 9. ASTM G21-13 -Standard Practice for DetemuningResistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi 10. ASTM G22-76(96) -Standard Practice for Deteimining Resistance ofPlastics to Bacteria 1 1. ASTM G155-13 -Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials 12. CSAB45.5-11/ I APMO Z124-201 1 -Plastic Plumbing Fixtures Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 13. NFPA 255-06 -Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 14. NSF/ANSI 51-07 -Food Equipment Materials 15. SCAQMD Rule 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications(amended January 2005) 16. UL 723 -Standard for Test for Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials 17. UL Environment/ -Standard for Chemical Emissions for Building Materials, GREENGUARD - Finishes and Furnishings,Section 7.1 UL 2818 18. UL Environment/ -Gold Standard for Chemical Emissions for Building Materials, GREENGUARD - Finishes and Furnishings,Section7.1 and 7.2 UL 2818 19. UL 2824 -GREENGUARD Certification Program,Method for Measuring Microbial Resistance from Various Sources Using Static Environmental Chambers ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS D. Preinstallation Meetings:Arrange preinstallationm eeting 1 week prior to commencing work with all parties associated with trade as designated in Contract Documents or as requested by Architect.Preside d over by Contractor,include Architect who may attend,Subcontractor performing work of this tra de, Owner's representative,testing company's representative and consultants ofapplicable discipline.Review Contract Documents for work included under this trade and determine complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included,storage and handling of materials,materials to be used,installation of materia Is,sequence and quality control,Project staffing,restrictions on areas of work and other matters affecting construction,to permit compliance with intent of work ofthis Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Indicate Product description including solid surface sheets,sinks,bowls and illustrating full range of standard colors, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements.Submit Product data with resistance to list of chemicals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for work of this Section in accordance with Section 0130 00.Indicate plans,sections,dimensions,component sizes,edge details,thermosetting requirements, fabrication details,attachment provisions,sizes of furring,blocking,including concealed blocking and coordination requirements with adjacent work. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures,faucets,soap dispensers,waste receptacles and other items installed in solid surface. C. Co ordination Dra wings:Submit coordination drawings indicating plumbing and m iscellaneous steel woric indicating locations of wall rated ornon-rated,blocking requirements,locations and recessed wall item s and similar items. D. Samples:Submit samples in accordance with Section 0130 00.Submit minimum 6"x 6" samples. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam.Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.Approved samples will be retained as standards for work. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operational and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data,including repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents. 2. Provide a commercial care and maintenance kit and video.Review maintenance procedures and warranty details with Owner upon completion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Qualifications: 1. Installers:Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in the application of Products,systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. B. Mock-Ups: 1. Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings,erect 1 full size mock-up of each component at Project site demonstrating quality of materials and execution for Architect review. 2. Should mock-up not be approved,rework or remake until approval is secured.Removerejected units from Project site. 3. Approved mock-up will be used as standard for acceptance of subsequent work. 4. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of finished work. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:Deliver no components to Project site until areas are ready for installation. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store components indoors priorto installation. 2. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty:Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for material only for period of 10 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions ofthe Contract.Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period,to satisfaction of Architect and at no expense to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List:Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings,Schedules and Specifications: 1. Corian®by DuPont;www.corian.com 2. Sam sung Chemical USA;www.sta ron.com 3. Wilsonart Contract;www.wilson artcontract.com B. Substitution Limitations:This Specification is based on Corian®Products.Comparable Products from manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements ofthis Specification. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Description: B. Performance/Design Criteria: Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Property Requirement Test Procedure (minor max) 1. Solid Surface Based Products: a. Tensile Strength 6000 psi min ASTM D638 b. Tensile Modulus 1.5 x 106 psi min ASTM D638 c. Tensile Elongation 0.4%min. ASTMD638 d. Flexural Strength 10000psimin ASTM D790 e. Flexural Modulus 1.2 x 106 psi min ASTM D790 f. Hardness >85-Rockwell"M"scale min. ASTM D785 g. Therm al Expansion 2.2 x 10-5 in./in./°F ASTM E228 h. Fungi and Bacteria Does not support microbial growth ASTM G21 &G22 i. Microbial Resistance Highly resistant to mold growth UL 2824 j. Ball Impact No fracture-1/2 lb.Ball: NEMALD 3, 6 mm slab-36"drop Method3.8 12 mm slab-144"drop k. Weatherability AE*94<5 in 1,000 hrs ASTM G155 1. Flammability ASTM E84,NFPA 255 &UL 723 All Colors 6 mm 12 mm m. Flame Spread <25 <25 n. Smoke Developed <25 <25 o. Class A A NFPA 101®,Life Safety C. Solid Surface Material: Industry standard is to use 1/2" thick Products. 1/4"thick Product is used vertically only. D. Non-porous,homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer,aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment;not coated, laminated or of composite construction;meeting following criteria: E. Flammability:Class 1 and A when tested to UL 723. F. Food Equipment Material Compliance:Food Zone to NSF/ANSI 51. 1. Ensure material has minimum physical and performance properties specified under "Performance/Design Criteria". 2. Ensure superficial damage to a depth of 0.010"is repairable by sanding and polishing. G. Adhesive for Bonding to Other Products:One component silicone to ASTM C920. H. Sealant: A standard mildew-resistant,FDA/UL®and NSF/ANSI 51 compliant in Food Zone area, recognized silicone color matched sealant or clear silicone sealants. I. Sink/Bowl Mounting Hardware:Manufacturer's approved bowl clips,brass inserts and fasteners for attachment ofundermount sinks/bowls. Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Counter Perimeter Frame:Ensure 1/2"m in thick,m oisture resistant cores for countertops in wet areas having sinks or lavatories are 3/4"thick exterior grade plywood with waterproof adhesive,Fir or Pop la r plywood,veneer core only.MDF core conforming to ANSI/NPA A208.2 balanced design,manufactured from recycled materials,meeting ANSI Standards for em issions,of m inimum density of 4 8 lb/c u ft an d surfacechatacter to match sample approved by Architect.Ensure fire retardant Product contains fire- retardant chemicals injected with raw materials during manufacturing and achieves a maxim um flame- spread rating of 25 with a maximum smoke development of 200 when tested to ASTM E84. B. Lavatory Tops with Seamed Bowls: 1/2"min thick countertop of solid polymer or 100%acrylic or polyester-acrylic blend solid surfacing material,cast to desired profiles and sizes having edge details a s indicated on Drawings conforming to CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124, complete with bowl. Provide countertops complete with backsplashes of size shown on Drawings.Ensure countertop and backsplash is single color as selected by Architect.Standard color selection. C. Lavatory Tops with Undermount Bowls: 1/2"min thick countertop of solid polymer or 100% acrylic or polyester-acrylic blend solid surfacing material,cast to desired profiles and sizes having edge details as indicatedon Drawings conforming to CSA B45.5/IAPMOZ 124,complete with[1]undermount bowl. Provide countertops complete with backsplashes of size shown on Drawings.Use undermount hard ware according to manufacturer's instructions. Ensure vanity top and backsplash is single color as selected by Architect. D. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated,in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and solid polymer m anufacturer requirements.Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints.Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on Drawings. 2. Where indicated,thermoform corners and edges or other objects to shapes and sizes indicated on Drawings,prior to seaming and joining.Cut components largerthan finished dimensions and sand edges to remove nicks and scratches.Heat entire component uniformly prior to forming. 3. Ensure no blistering,whitening and cracking of components during forming. 4. Fabricate backsplashes from solid surfacing material with optional radius cove where counter and backsplashes meet as indicatedon Drawings.Backsplashes formostcolors may be fabricated by traditional means discussed in K-25294Backsplashes.Colors with metallic/mica particle or veined colors creating directional aesthetics(K-26833 DirectionalAesthetics)may require the techniques in Technical Bulletin K-28235 ThennoformedBacksplash. 5. Fabricate joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive.Ensure joints are inconspicuous in appearance and without voids.Attach 50 mm(2")wide reinforcing strip of solid polymer material under each joint.Reinforcing strip of solid polymer material is not required when using DuPontTM Joint Adhesive 2.0. 6. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on Drawings. 7. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth,uniform finish.Rout cutouts,then sand edges smooth.Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work. 8. Finish:Ensure surfaces have uniform finish: a. Matte,with a 60°gloss rating of 5-20. Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 9. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Variation in Component Size:+/-1/8". b. Location ofOpenings:+/-1/8"from indicated location. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification ofConditions: 1. Examine substrates and conditions,with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfonnanceof work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify actual site dimensions and location ofadjacent materials prior to commencing work. 3. Examine cabinets upon which counter tops are to be installed.Verify cabinets are level to within 1/8"in 10'-0". 4. Notify Architect in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to installation. B. Ev a luation a nd Assessment:Commencement o f work implies a cceptance o f previously completed work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb,level,rigid,scribed to adjacent finishes in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings and Product installation details. B. Fabricate field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive,with joints being inconspicuous in finished work.Exposed joints/seams are not permitted.Keep components andhands clean when making joints. Reinforce field joints as specified herein.Cut and finish component edges with clean,sharp returns. C. Route radii and contours to template.Anchor securely to base component or other supports.Align adjacent components and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match work.Carefully dress joints smooth,remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. D. Install countertops with no more than 1/8"sag,bow or other variation from a straight line. E. Adhere undermount/submount/bevel mount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer's recommended adhesive and mounting hardware. F. Adhere topmount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer recommended adhesives and color- coordinated silicone sealant.[Secure seam mountbowls and sinks to countertops using color matched joint adhesive.] G. Sealbetweenwallandcomponentswithjointsealantasspecifiedherein and in Section 07 92 00, as applicable. H. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on Drawings.Adhere to countertops using a standard color-coordinated silicone sealant.Adhere applied sidesplashes to countertops using a standard co lor- matched silicone sealant.Providecoved backsplashes and sidesplashes at walls and adjacent m illwo rk. Fabricate radius cove at intersection ofcounters with backsplashes to dimensions shown on reviewed Shop Drawings.Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard color-coordinated j oint adhesive. Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 I. Keep components and hands clean during installation.Remove adhesiv es, sealants and other stains. Ensure components are clean on date of Substantial Completion of the Work. J. Coordinate connections of plumbing fixtures with Mechanical. 3.03 REPAIR A. Repair minor imperfections and cracked seams and replace areas of severely damaged surfaces in accordancewith manufacturer's"Technical Bulletins". 3.04 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Non-Conforming Work:Replacedamaged work which cannot be satisfac to rily repaired,restored or cleaned,to satisfaction of Architect at no cost to Owner. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive and sealant from visible surfaces. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's"Care and Maintenance Instructions". 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of Project. B. Protect surfaces from damage until date of Substantial Completion of the Work. END OF SECTION 06611 Davis&Davis Inc. Solid Surfacing Fabrications Section 06611-7 (This page is intentionally left blank) DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07110 CONCRETE SEALER for MAIN BUILDING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 Liquid concrete sealer/densifier/hardener 1.2 Related Requirements A. Section 03300—Cast in Place Concrete 1.3 Reference Standards A. Ohio DOT—Spec Reference 705.24 B. American with Disabilities Act Slip Fall Resistance Test C. EPA—Environmental Protection Agency 1. Modified EPA Test Method 300 D. American Association o f State H igh way and Transportation Officials 1. AASHTO T 259 Modified Crack Sealing Capabilities E. ASTM C 666—Concrete Durability Test F. ASTM C 672—Scaling Resistance G. ASTM C 642—Absorption H. ASTM C 779—Abrasion Resistance I. ASTM E 274—Skid Resistance 1.4 Submittals A. Comply with Section 01-Administiative Requirements,for administiative and procedural requirements for processing of submittals during the construction phase. B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics,performance criteria,limitations,and installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation methods. D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Low emitting VOC E. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Submit invoices and documentation form manufacturer indicating Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)content for products specified. F. LEED Submittals: 1. LEED,I EQ Credit 4.2—Low-Emitting Materials Paints and Coatings: Provide documentation for performance-based standards of products to be used onproject in accordance with credit requirements. Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Sealer 07110-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's nam eand registered with manufacturer. 1.5 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of his section with minimum 3 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Pre-Installation Meeting: 1. Convene preinstallation meeting at the work site. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work ofthis section,including Contractor,and applicator. 3. Review surface preparation,mixing,application,protection,and coordination with other work. 1.6 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging,with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: Store materials in clean,dry,inside area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 Warranty A. See Project Manual for Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer Warranty: Length ofwarranty shall be scheduled or selected by the architect form the manufacturers standard warranties. 1. Warranty states that theproduct shall meet its current specifications. 2. Warranty shall be limited to repair of defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period or replacement with new materials/components at no expense to owner. 3. Warranty is not effective in the case of consequential or incidental damages of any kind. PART II PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer A. Chemtec International(or approved equal) 1. Contact Information: 7771 Woodstone Drive,Suite 100 Cincinnati,OH 45244-2855 a. Phone: (512)474-2090 b. Website: www.concretesealer.net 2.2 Concrete Sealer/Hardener/Densifier Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Sealer 07110-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Description: Water-based,chemically reactive,silicate-blend,concrete floor sealer,hardener,and densifier. For application to freshly placed,new,and existing concrete floors for both interior and exterior application. 1. Appearance:Colorless 2. Total Solids: Proprietary 3. Specific Gravity: 1.08% 4. Toxicity:None 5. flash Point: None 6. VOC:Grams/L=0 7. Scale of pH: 11.3 2.3 Location A. Refer to Finish Schedule-Flooring PART III EXECUTION 3.1 Verification of Conditions A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive this work. B. Examine substrate surfaces,with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions effecting performance. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 Preparation A. New Concrete:prepare surface by removing coatings of wax,grease,recently applied surface sealer,rubber,acrylic paint or other imperious materials that exist onthe surface wherethis work is being applied. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application. Acid washed concrete is unacceptable. B. Existing Concrete:Clean all surfaces so that they are water permeable.Strip off coatings,sealers, paint or other contaminant that would prevent the process from penetrating the concrete. Surface must be completely dry before application. Acid washing is unacceptable. C. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces by masking or other means. Protect asphaltic and mastic surfaces form spillage or overspray. Cover aluminum and glass. 3.3 Application A. Apply in accordance with architectural drawing and in accordance with manufacturer instructions. B. Materials are to be premixed and agitated for use according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Mixture will be applied by pouring,pumping or spraying using equipment recommended by manufacturer. D. Test Area:Contractor shall treatan area and text ures to establish physical and visual effects of application and absorption level to establish coverage rates. Let set and secure approval of Owner prior to completing install. Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Sealer 07110-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 E. Application on steel troweled surfaces: 1. Do not apply on wet concrete. 2. Apply sealer in one application atmanufacturers recommended rate.(Except during heavy duty use that requires two coats.) 3. On new floors,can install immediately after steel troweled process has been completed and the surface is hard enough not to mark. 4. Saturate substrate with sealer keeping the entire surface wet. 5. Use bristle brooms ormechanical scrubbing to keep material fluid until chemical reaction is evident and material is slippery underfoot. 6. Do not allow surfaces to prematurely dry. Re-m isting is acceptable. 7. Do not let material puddle and dry on surface. 3.4 Protection A. Penetrating concrete sealer is slightly irritating to human tissue 1. Protect skin and eyes. 2. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and mist. 3. For use in confined areas,recommend use ofNIOSH approved respirator,chemical goggles or face shield,and rubber or plastic gloves. 3.5 Maintenance A. Comply with manufacturers recommendations B. Immediately remove debris and residue form surface after installation. END OF SECTION 07110 Davis&Davis,Inc. Concrete Sealer 07110-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOC IMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07130 BELOW GRADE VAPOR RETARDER PART 1GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Surface preparation. B. Application of an underslab vapor retarder. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 03300-Concrete. 1.03 References A. ASTM DI 709-09 Standard Test Methods for I m pact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method. B. ASTM E96-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. ASTM E l 54-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs. D. ASTM E 1 643-Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. E. ASTM E 1745-Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. F. ASTM F1249-01 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 1.04 Submittals A. Comply with Section 01 -Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the application of the vapor retarder. B. Obtain vapor retardermaterials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the product. C. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOCs). 1.06 Preconstruction Meeting Davis&Davis,Inc. Below Grade Vapor Retarder 07130-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCIMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Pre-Construction Meeting: Convene one weekpriorto installation of underslabvapourretarder. Attendees to be as follows:-Architect,Engineer,General Contractor,Vapor Retarder Installer,and Vapor Retarder Manufacturer to discuss the application in detail. 1.07 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original,unopened containers and packaging,with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Store materials in a clean,dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. D. Ensure membrane is stamped with manufacturer's name,product name,and membrane thickness at intervals of no m ore than 85"(220 cm). 1.08 Environmental Requirements A. Product not intended for uses subjectto abuse or permanent exposure to the elements. B. Do not apply on frozen ground. PART II PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer A. W.R.MEADOWS,INC.,PO Box 338,Hampshire,I llinois 60140-0338.(800)342-5976.(847)683- 4500.Fax(847)683-4544.Web Site www.wrm eadows.com.,or approved equal. 2.02 Materials A. Plastic Vapor Retarder 1. Performance-Based Specification: Vapor retarder membrane shall be manufactured from virgin polyolefin resins and shall meet or exceed all requirements of ASTM El 745,Class A. a. Maximum Water VaporPermeance(ASTM E154 Sections 7,8,11,12, 13,by ASTM E96,Method B or ASTM F 1249) i. As received: 0.0183 perms. ii. After Wetting and Drying: 0.0219 perms. iii. Resistance to Plastic Flow and Temperature: 0.0197perms. iv. Effect Low Temperature and Flexibility: 0.0212 perms v. Resistance to Deterioration from Organisms and Substances in Contacting Soil: 0.0198 perms. b. Puncture Resistance(ASTM D 1709): >3,500 grams. c. Tensile Strength ASTM El 54,Section 9: 52 Lb.Force/Inch 2. Proprietary-Based Specification: a. PERMINATOR 10 mil by W.R.MEADOWS,or approved equal. 2.03 Accessories A. Seam Tape 1. High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width4"(100 mm). a. Perm inator Tape by W.R.Meadows. Davis&Davis,Inc. Below Grade Vapor Retarder 07130-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCIMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Pipe Collars 1. Construct pipe collars from vapor retarder material and pressure sensitive tape per manufacturer's instructions. PART III EXECUTION 3.01 Surface Preparation A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Level,tamp,or roll earth or granular material beneaththe slab base. 3.02 Examination A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane.Notify architect if surfaces are not acceptable.Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.03 Application A. Install the vapor retarder membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 1643-98. B. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. C. Lap vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls. D. Overlap joints 6"(152mm)and seal with manufacturer's tape. E. Seal all penetrations(including pipes)with manufacturer's pipe boot. F. No penetration ofthe vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and pennanent utilities. G. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches ofvaporbarrier,overlapping damaged area 6" (152 mm)and taping all four sides with tape. END OF SECTION Davis&Davis,Inc. Below Grade Vapor Retarder 07130-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Description: A. Work Included: 1. Ceilings and conditioned space walls. 1.2 Product Handling: A. Protection: 1. Deliver materials to site,store in dry place with labels intact. 2. Protect materials before,during,and after installation. 3. Protect installed work ofother trades. B. Replacements: In event ofdamage,make necessaryrepairs and replacements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Building Insulation A. Insulation shall be the product indicated or an equal approved in advance by the Architect B. Ceiling Insulation: 1. Kraft-Faced Fiberglass: a. Owens-Coming,3-1/2""thick R-13 for walls. b. Owens-Coming,8"thick R—25 for ceilings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions • A. Inspection: 1. Prior to work of this Section,inspect installed work and verify that this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that insulation may be installed in accordance with original design and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies: 1. In event ofdiscrepancy,notify Architect. 2. Do not proceed until discrepancies have been resolved. Davis&Davis,Inc.. Building Insulation 07210-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3.2 Installation: A. General: Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's current edition of insulat ion application instructions. 3.3 Inspection: A. Verify that all insulation work is properly installed and complete. END OF SECTION07210 Davis&Davis,Inc.. Building Insulation 07210-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07211 FOAM BOARD INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: Provide FOAMULAR®extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation. 1.2 References A. Materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the following specifications as applicable to the specific product or end use: 1. American Society for Testing of Materials(ASTM): a. ASTM C 578:Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Poly styrene Thermal Insulation. b. ASTM C 518:Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. c. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. International Code Council Evaluation Service(ICC-ES),Evaluation Report. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data:Submit data on product characteristics,performance criteria,a ndlim it at io ns, including installation instructions. B. Sustainable Design: Submit manufacturer's sustainable design certifications as indicated. C. Warranty: Submit documentation for limited product warranty. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Source Limitations: Obtain exterior building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Each insulation board must be labeled with manufacturer's name,product brand name,AS TM material specification reference,and identification ofthe third party inspection agency used for building code qualification. 1.5 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Store in a dry area and protect from water,direct sunlight,flame,and ignition sources. Do not install insulation that has been damaged or wet. 1. In the event the board insulation becomes wet,wipe dry priorto installation. Davis&Davis,Inc. Insulation Board 07211-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer A. Basis of Design:Owens Coming Insulating Systems,LLC,Toledo,OH 43659;www.owenscorning.com, or approved equal. 2.2 Foam Plastic Board Insulation A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type [X, 15 psi minimum compressive strength,1.30 lb/cu.ft.(21 kg/cu.m)] [IV,25 psi minimum compressive strength, 1.55 lb/cu.ft.(26 kg/cu.m)] [VI,40 psi minimum compressive strength,1.80 lb/cu.ft.(29 kg/cu.m)] [VI I, 60 psi minimum compressive strength,2.20 lb/cu.ft.(35 kg/cu.m)] [V,100 psi compressive strength, 3.00 lb/cu.ft.(48 kg/cu.m)]. 1. Thermal Resistance:(180 day real-time aging as mandated by ASTM C578,measured per ASTM C 518 at mean temperature of 75F):[R-5.0,5.6]per inch of thickness,with 90%lifetime lim it e d warranty on thermal resistance. 2. Blowing Agent Form ulation:Zero ozone depleting. 3. Edge Condition:[Square,Tongue&Groove,Ship-Lap]. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics(ASTM E 84): Fla me spread less than 25,smoke developed less than 450,certified by independent third party such as Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 5. Indoor Air Quality: Compliance certified by independent third party such as GREENGUARD I ndoorAir Quality Certified®and/or GREENGUARD Children and Schools Certifieds''". 6. Recycled Content: Minimum 20%, certified by independent third party such as Scientific Certification Systems. 7. Warranty:Limited lifetime warranty covering all ASTM C578 physical properties. 8. Panel Size: Provide 3/4"thick by 4 ft.wide by 8 ft.long. PART 3-EXECUTION [Not Used] END OF SECTION Davis&Davis,Inc. Insulation Board 07211-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes A. Mechanically-seamed,standing seam metal roo fp anels,with related metal trim and accessories. 1.2 Related Requirements A. Division 07 Section insulation installed under metal panels. B. Division 07 Section"Air Barriers"for air barriers within roof assembly and adjacent to roof assembly. C. Division 07 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for formed sheet metal copings,flashings,reglet s, and roof drainage items in additionto items specified in this Section. D. Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants" 1.3 References A. ASTM International(ASTM): www.astm.org: 1. ASTM A 653-Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792/A792M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,55 %Aluminum-Zinc Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM A 980-Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet,Carbon,Ultra High Strength Cold Rolled. 5. ASTM C 645-Specification for Nonstructural Steel Fra ming Members. 6. ASTM D 226-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 7. ASTM D 1003-Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance o f Tra nsparent Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2244-Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 9. ASTM D 4214-Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 10. ASTM E 1514-Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel RoofPanel Systems. 11. ASTM E 1592-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roofand Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 12. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 13. ASTM E 1680-Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. 14. ASTM E 1980-Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal andLow-Sloped Opaque Surfaces. B. FM Global(FM): www.fmglobal.com: 1. ANSI/FM 4471-Approval Standard for Class 1 Panel Roofs. Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal RoofPanels 07411-1 100%CONSTRUCTI ON DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. International Accreditation Service(IAS): 1. IAS AC 472-Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems,Part B. D. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL): www.ul.com: 1. UL 580-Tests for Uplift Resistance ofRoofAssemblies 1.4 Administrative Requirements A. PreinstallationMeeting: Prior to erection of framing,conductpreinstallation meetingatsite attended by Owner, Architect, manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. 3. Coordinate work of Division 07 Sections"Roof Specialties"and"Roof Accessories"and openings and penetrations and manufacturer's accessories with installation ofinetalpanels. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal roof panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed-base roll forming,and accredited under IAS AC 472 Part B. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum 20 years experience in manufacture of sim ila r products in successful use in sim ila r applications. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements,within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. c. Sample submittal from similar project d. Project references: Minimum of five installations not less than five years old,with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. IAS AC 472 certificate. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements.. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer certified by metal panel manufacturer with minimum of 10 years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic certified by metal panel manufacturer supervising work on site whenever work is underway. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels.Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles,and attachment to building.Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal Roof Panels 07411-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 conditions,joints,fastener and sealant placement,fla slings,openings,penetrations,roof accessories, lightning arresting equipment,and special details.Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. I ndicate po ints of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range ofcolors. D. Samples for Verification: Provide 12-inch long sectionof each metal panel profile.Prov id e color chip verifying color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance ofproducts with requirements,witnessed by a professional engineer. B. Qualification Information: For Installer fi m and Installer's field supervisor. C. IAS Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under provisions of IAS AC 472. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.8 Closeout submittals A. Maintenance data. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.9 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping,handling,and storage to prevent staining, denting,deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels andtrim bundles during shipping. 1. Deliver,unload,store,and erect m etal panel system and accessory items without m isshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. 1.10 Coordination A. Coordinate sizes,profiles,and locations of roof curbs and other roof-mounted equipment and roof penetrations,based upon sizes of actual selected equipment. 1.11 Warranty. A. Special Weathertightness Warranty:On manufacturer's standard form,in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight,including leaks up to cost limitation offourteen dollars($14.00)per square foot of covered area within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Davis&Davis,Inc. MetalRoofPanels 07411-3 100%CONSTRUCTI ON DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer's standardfoim,in which Ma nufacturer agrees to repair or repla ce metal panels that ev idence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion,including: a. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units perASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess ofNo.8 ratingperASTM D 4214. c. Failure of adhesion,peeling,checking,or cracking. 1.Modified Silicone-Polyester Two-Coat System: d. Color fading in excess of 7 Hunter units per ASTM D2244,for non-vertical applications. e. Chalking in excess ofNo.6 rating perASTM D 4214,for non-vertical applications. f. Failure of adhesion,peeling,checking,or cracking. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Houston TX.Tel:(877)713-6224;Email: info@ nbci.com;Web:www.mbci.com. 1. Provide basis of design product orcompaiable product approved by Architect prior to bid. 2.2 Performance Requirements A. General: Provide metal roof panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. System Performance: Comply with ASTM E 1514 and requirements ofthis Section. C. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable ofwithstanding the effects ofindic ate d loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure,importance factor,exposure cat ego ry, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. Referto Structural Plans. a. Wind Uplift Testing: Certify capacity of metal panels by actual testing of proposed assembly perASTM E 1592. 2. Snow Loads: Referto Structural Plans. 3. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of the span with no evidence of failure. Refer to Structural Plans. 4. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7,Section 9,"Earthquake Loads." D. Wind Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift class UL-90. E. Air Infiltration, ASTM E 1680: Maximum 0.09 cfm/sq.ft. at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq.ft.. F. Water Penetration Static Pressure,ASTM E 1646: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 12 lbf/sq.ft. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and Davis&Davis,Inc. M eta 1 Ro of Pa ne ls 07411-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. 2.3 Metal Roof Panels A. Mechanically-seamed,Concealed Fastener,Metal RoofPanels:Structural metalroofpanel consisting of formed metal sheet with vertical ribs at panel edges,installed by lapping and mechanically interlo c kin g edges of adjacent panels,and attaching panels to supports using concealed clips and fasteners in a weathertight installation. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI,SuperLok,www.mbci.com/superlok.html or approved equal. 2. Alum inum-ZincAlloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M,structural quality,Grade 50, Coating Class AZ50 prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Nominal Coated Thickness: 24 gage b. Panel Surface: Smooth with striations in pan c. Exterior Finish:Keynar 500 d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. PanelWidth: 16inches 4. Panel Seam Height: 2 inch. 5. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed. 2.4 Metal Roof Panel Accessories A. General: Provide complete m etal roofpanel assembly incorporating trim,copings,fasciae, gutters and downspouts,and m iscellaneous flashings,in[manufacturer's standard profiles'[profile s as indic ate dl. Provide required fasteners,closure strips,thermal spacers,splice plates,support plates,and sealant s as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim:Match material,thickness,and finish ofmetal panel face sheet C. Panel Clips: Provide panel clip of type specified,at spacing indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Two-piece Floating: ASTM C 645,with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating compliance with performance requirements. 2. Single-Piece Fixed: ASTM C 645,with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, configured for concealment in panel joints, and identical to clips utilized in tests demonstrating complia nce with performance requirements. D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by roof panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided,supply long life fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets,with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating. E. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers a nd t apes, and as follows: 1. Factory-Applied Seam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard hot-melt type. 2. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape,AAMA 809.2. F. Roof Accessories: Approved by metal roof panel manufacturer.Refer to Section 07 "Roof Accessories" for requirements for curbs,equipment supports,roof hatches,heat and smoke vents,ventilators, and preformed flashing sleeves. Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal RoofPanels 07411-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.5 Fabrication A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements,indicated profiles,and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal panel joints configured to accept factory-applied sealant providing weathertight seal a n d preventing metal-to-metal contact and minimizing noise resulting from thermal movement. C. Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs,except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings. D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing andtrim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions,approved shop drawings,and project drawings.Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish. 2.6 Finishes A. Finishes,General: Prepare,pretreat,and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. B. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 — 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat,AAMA 621,meeting solar reflectance index requirements. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI,Signature 300. C. Interior Finish: 0.5 miltotaldry film thickness consisting of primer coat and wash coat ofmanufacturer's standard light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation ofmetal panel installation. 1. Inspect metal panel support substtateto determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements ofmetal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable t o metal panel system manufacturer but not greaterthanthe following: a. 1/4 inch in 20 foot in any direction. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with insulated metal roof panel system installation. 3.2 Preparation A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing,girts, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members according to ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover exposed underlayment per Section 076200"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Davis&Davis,Inc. MetalRoofPanels 07411-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3.3 Metal Panel Installation A. Mechanically-Seamed,Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: Install weathertightm etal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal roof panels in orientation,sizes,and locations indicated,free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses,and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Attach panels to supports using clips,screws,fasteners,and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports with concealed clips at each location indicated on approved shop drawings,with spacing and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved,motorized seamertool so clip, metal roof panel,and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 3. Provide weatherproofjacks for pipe and conduit penetrating m etal panels of types recommended by manufacturer. 4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials,treat faces and edges in contact with dissim ilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 Accessory Installation A. General: InstaIlmetal panel trim,flashing,and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers,with positive anchorage to building, and with weather tight mounting. Provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings,sealants,closure strips,and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings. 4. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal panel assemblies,in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.5 Cleaning and Protection A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal roof panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean fmished surfaces as recommended by metal roofpanel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction ofthe Architect. END OF SECTION 07411 Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal RoofPanels 07411-7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07500 METAL WALL PBR PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES(Note:Refer to included TDI documents for additional specifying and installation requirements) A. Exposed fastener metal wallp a nels,with related metal trim and accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 07 Section"Air Barriers"for air barriers within wall assembly and adjacent to wall assembly. B. Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants"for field-applied Joint Sealants. 1.3 REFERENCES • A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association(AAMA): www.aamanet.org: 1. AAMA 621 -Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings o n C oil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized(HDG)&Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. AAMA 809.2-Voluntary Specification Non-Drying Sealants. B. American Society of Civil Engineers(ASCE): www.asce.org/codes-standards: 1. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. ASTM International(ASTM): www.astm.org: 1. ASTM A 653-Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792/A 792M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,55 %Alum inum-Z in c Alloy- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 645-Specification forNonstructural Steel Framing Members. 5. ASTM C 754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6. ASTM C 920-Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM D 1003-Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmit tan ce o f Tra ns pa ren t Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2244-Test Method for Calculation ofColor Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 9. ASTM D 4214-Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 10. ASTM E 283-Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 11. ASTM E 331 -Test Method for Water Penetiation of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 12. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Davis&L vis,Inc. Metal Wall PBR Panels 07500- 1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 13. ASTM E 1680-Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. 14. ASTM E 1980-Practice for Cakulating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces. D. International Accreditation Service(IAS): 1. I AS AC 472-Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems,Part B. E. US Green Building Council(USGBC): www.usgbc.org: 1. LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating Systems. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing,conduct preinstallation meetingatsite attended by Owner, Architect, manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed-base roll forming,and accredited under I AS AC 472 Part B. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years experience in manufacture ofsim ilar products in successful use in similar applications. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substit ut ion requirements,within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. c. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minim urn of five installations not less than five years old,with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. I AS AC 472 certificate. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements. 3. Approved manufacturers mustmeet separate requirements of Submittals Article. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer and Supervisor with minim um of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic,able to communicate with Owner,Archit ect, and installers,supervising work on site whenever work is underway. Davis&laavis,Inc. Meta I Wall PBR Panels 07500- 2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels.Include details of each condition of installation,panel profiles,and attachment to building.Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions,joints,fastener and sealant placement,flashings,openings,penetrations,and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. I ndicatepoints of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each exposed product specified including sealants. Provide representative color charts of manufacturer's full range ofcolors. D. Samples for Verification: Provide12-inch long section of each metal panel profile.Prov id e color chip verifying color selection. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements,witnessed by a professional engineer. B. Qualification Information: For Installerfirm and Installer's field supervisor. C. IAS Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under provisions of IASAC 472. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.9 DELI VERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping,handling,and storage to prevent staining, denting,deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. 1. Deliver,unload,store,and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: On manufacturer's standard form,in which manufacturer agrees to repair or rep lace metal panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal Wall PBR Panels 07500- 3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer's standardfoim,in which Manufacturer agrees to repairorreplace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within[25]years from date of Substantial Completion,including: 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: (Kyner 500) a. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess ofNo.8 rating per ASTM D4214. c. Failure of adhesion,peeling,checking,or cracking. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Houston TX.Tel:(877)713-6224;Email: info@mbci.com;Web:www.mbci.com. 1. Provide basis of design product[,or comparable product approved by Architect prior to bid]. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal wall panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. C. Recycled Content: For Steel Products: Postconsumerrecycled content plus one-half of pre consumer recycled content not less than[25]percent. D. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indic ate d loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure,importance factor,exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of(as per TDI requirements)of the span with no evidence of failure. 3. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7,Section 9,"Earthquake Loads." E. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 1680: Maximum 0.006cfm/sq.ft.(0.030 Lis per sq. m)at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)static-air-pressure difference. F. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1646: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of20 lbf/sq.ft. (958 Pa). 2.3 METAL PANEL MATERIALS A. Alum inum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet ASTM A 792/A 792M,structural quality,Grade 50,Coating Class AZ50 (Grade 340, Coating Class AZM 150), prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal Wall PBR Panels 07500- 4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.4 METAL WALL PANELS A. Large Tapered-Rib-Profile,Exposed Fastener Metal Panels:Structural metal panel consisting of formed metal sheet with trapezoidal majorribs with intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically p la ce d between major ribs,installed by lapping edges ofadjacent panels. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI,PBR Panel,www.mbci.com/pbr.html. 2. Coverage Width: 36 inches 3. Major Rib Spacing: 12 inches on center. 4. Rib Height: 1-1/4inch. 5. Nominal Coated Thickness: 26 gage 6. Panel Surface: Smooth 7. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymertwo-coat system 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors 2.5 METAL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Providecomplete metal panel assembly incorporating base,corner, and opening trim s and miscellaneous flashings,in[manufacturer's standard profiles][profiles as indicated]. Pro viderequ ire d fasteners,closure strips,support plates,and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim:Match material,thickness,and fmish ofm etal panel face sheet. C. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws and other acceptable fasteners recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Long life fasteners with EPDM or neoprene gaskets,with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating. D. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and tapes. and as follows: 1. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape,AAMA 809.2. E. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60 (Z 180)hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and fmished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements,indicated profiles,and structural requirements. B. Panel Lengths: Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs,except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions,approved shop drawings,and project drawings.Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish. 2.7 FINISHES A. Finishes,General: Prepare,pretreat,and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. R Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal Wall PBR Panels 07500- 5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 — 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat,AAMA 621,meeting solar reflectance index requirements]. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI,Signature 300. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation ofmetal panel installation. 1. Inspect metal panel support substiateto determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements ofinetal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than the following: a. 1/4 inch in 20 foot in any direction. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with metal panel system installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. d Install subframing, girts, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members according to ASTM C 754 andmanufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover exposed underlayment per Section 0762 00"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Exposed Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Install weathertight metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,approved shop drawings,and project drawings. Install metal p a nels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves,warps,buckles,fastening stresses,and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place.Provide for them al and structural movement. B. Panel Sealants: Install manufacturer's recommended tape sealant at panel sidelaps and endlaps. C. Panel Fastening: Attach panels to supports using screws,fasteners,and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated onapprovedshop drawings. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports at each location indicated on a pproved shop drawings, with spacing and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide weatherproofjacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels of types recommended by manufacturer. 3. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials,treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. • Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal Wall PBR Panels 07500- 6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARKPHASE2 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel trim,flashing,and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers,with positive anchorage to building,and with weathertight mounting. Coordin ate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings,sealants,closure strips,and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will b e permanently weather resistant. B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight p erformance of metal panel assemblies,in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect to perform field tests and inspections and to preparetest reports. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot berepairedto the satisfaction ofthe Architect. END OF SECTION Davis&Davis,Inc. Metal Wall PBR Panels 07500- 7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07552 SELF—ADHERED ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. This Section specifies a self-adhering sheet membrane used as underlayment for sloped roofs. 1. High temperature application,300F resistance,extended period. B. Related Sections:Refer to the following specification sections for coordination: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07210—Building Insulation 2. Section 07411—Metal Roof Panels. C. Referenced Standards:Comply with the requirements of the following standards published by AS TM International to the extent referenced in this section. 1. ASTM D4 12-Standard TestMethods for Vulcanized Rubberand Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension. 2. ASTM D461 -Standard Test Methods for Felt. 3. ASTM D 903-Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds. 4. ASTM D1970-Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. 5. ASTM D3767-Standard Practice for Rubber—Measurement of Dimensions. 6. ASTM E96-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 7. ASTM G90—EMM Aqua test 1.2 Submittal A. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements:Comply with requirements of a uthorities having j urisdiction a nd applicable codes at the location ofthe project B. Manufacturer:Minimum 10 years experience producing roofing underlayment. C. Installer:Minimum 2 years experience with installation ofsimilarunderlayment. d. Warranty: Provide 20 year manufacturer watertightness warranty. Refer to manufacturer for requirements. 1.4 DELI VERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages.Protect from damage. B. Cover materials and store in dry condition betweentemperatures of40 and 90 degrees F(5 and 32 degrees C).Use within one year of date of manufacture.Do not store at elevated temperatures as that will reduce the shelf life of the product Davis&Davis,Inc. Self-Adhered Roofing Underlayment 07552-I 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART II-PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer A. Manufacturer: Grace Construction Products,62 Whittemore Avenue,Cambridge,MA 02140,Toll Free 866-333-3726,ti .na.graceconstruction.com.Or equal submitted prior to award of contract. 2.2 Materials A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Roof Underlayment: Provide Grace Ultra by Grace Construction Products with the following characteristics: 1. Material: Cold applied,self-adhering membrane composed of a high strength p o lye th ylene film coated on one side with a layer of butyl rubber adhesive and interwound with a disposable release sheet. An embossed,slip resistant surface is provided on the polyethylene. 2. Color: Gray-black. 3. Membrane Thickness: 30 mil(0.76 mm)ASTM D3767method A. 4. Tensile strength,Membrane: 250 psi(1720 kN/m2)ASTM D412(Die C modified). 5. Elongation,Membrane: 250%ASTM D412(Die C modified). 6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected @-20°F(-29°C)ASTM D1970. 7. Adhesion to Plywood: 3.0 lbs/in width(525 N/m)ASTM D903. 8. Perm eance(max): 0.05 Perms(2.9 ng/m2s Pa)ASTM E96. 9. Material Weight Installed(max): 0.22 lb/ft2(1.1 kg/m2)ASTM D461. 10. Service Temperature:300 degrees F(148.8 degrees C)per ASTM D1204 10. Primer:Water-based Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer by Grace Construction Products. 11. Code and Standards Compliance: Grace Ultra meets the following requirements: a. International Conference ofBuilding Officials(I CBO)ReportNo.3997. b. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.R13399 Class A fire classification under fib erg lass shingles and Class C under organic felt shingles. c. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.Classified Sheathing Material Fire Resistance C la ss if ic atio n Design Numbers P225,P227,P230,P237,P259,P508,P510,P512,P514,P701,P711, P717, P722,P723,P732,P734,P736,P742,P803,P814,P818,P824. PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Prior to start of installation,inspect existing conditions to ensure surfaces are suitable for install at ion of roofing underlayment.Verify flashing has been installed.Starting work indicates installers acceptanceof existing conditions. 3.2 Installation A. Installation:Install roofing underlayment on sloped surfaces at locations indicated on the Drawings, but not less than at hips,ridges,eaves,valleys,sidewalls and chimneys,and surfaces over interior space within 36 inches(914 mm)from the inside face of the exterior wall. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions including but not lim itedto the following: 1. Schedule installation such that underlayment is covered by roofing within the published exposure limit of the underlayment. 2. Do not install underlayment on wet or frozen substrates. 3. Install when surface temperature of substrate is a minimumof40 degrees F (5 degrees C)and rising. 4. Remove dust,dirt,loose materials and protrusions from deck surface. 5. Install membrane on clean,dry,continuous structural deck.Fill voids and damaged or unsupported areas prior to installation. Davis&Davis,Inc. Self-Adhered Roofing Underlayment 07552-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 6. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces using specified primer at a rate of500-600 square feet per gallon(12-15 sgm/L).Priming is not required for other suitable clean and dry surfaces. 7. Install membrane such that all laps shed water.Work from the low point to the high point of the roof at all times.Apply the membrane in valleys before the membrane is applied to the eaves. Following placement along the eaves,continue a pp lication of the membrane up the roof.Membrane may be installed either vertically or horizontally afterthefirst horizontal course. 8. Side laps m inimum 3-1/2 inches(89 mm)and end laps minimum 6 inches(152 mm)following lap lines marked on underlayment. 9. Patch penetrations and damage using manufacturer's recommended methods. 3.02 Cleaning and Protection A. Protection:Protect from damage during construction operations and installation of roofing materials. Promptly repair any damaged ordeteriorated surfaces. B. Repair m inor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect. C. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protective film and reclean as necessary immediately before final acceptance. END OF SECTION-07552 Davis&Davis,Inc. Self-Adhered Roofing Underlayment 07552-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section. 2. Reviewthese documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply to work under this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Flashing and sheetmetal work. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section"General Requirements." 2. Division 01 Section"Special Procedures." 1.2 References A. General: 1. The following documents form part ofthe Specifications to the extent stated.Where differences exist between codes and standards,the one affordingthe greatest protection shall apply. 2. Unless otherwise noted,the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of commencement of the Work. 3. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Requirements"for the list of applicable regulatory requirements. B. BAAQMD Regulation 8-51 -Adhesive and Sealant Products. 1.3 Submittals A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section"General Requirements." B. Product Data: I. Specifications,materials list and schedule for surface preparation procedures. 2. Material safety data sheets. C. Shop Drawings:Details showing each condition separately and cross-referenced with applicable details on the Drawings. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Material Safety Data:Sealant and adhesive quantity use in accordance with requirements of BAAQMD Regulation 8-51. 2. Signed guaranty. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,"latest edition,of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,Inc. Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Take field measurements required for proper and adequate fabrication and installation ofthe work. Exact measurements are the Subcontractor's responsibility. Furnish templates for exact locations of items to be embedded. 1.5 Guarantee A. Guarantee sheet metal and flashing work provided under this section to be watertight for 5 years after substantial completion.Guarantee shall include that other work and materials damaged by leaks shall be promptly repaired atno cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. General:Furnish sheet metal in minimum 20-gauge,except 24-gauge for downspouts and gutters,or as otherwise indicated.Unless otherwise noted,all sheetmetal shall be galvanized,FS QQ-S-775d,Class d, ASTM A525 Class 1.25 commercial galvanizing. 1. Pre-manufactured Reglets:Snap-on type,for two piece flashing,metal to match flashing and sheet metal,factory formed and sealed corners. Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System,MM Systems Corp./Snap-rite System,Morrison&Co./Cushion-lok,or equal. 2. Pre-manufactured RoofCurbs:Box section design,custom heights,minimum 16 gage galvanized steel,continuous mitered and welded corner seams,integral base plate,single and compound roof pitch requirements,combustible materials and wood of any kind are not permitted. Custom Curb,Inc.(800- 251-3001),Roof Products&Systems Corp.(708-595-7320),or equal. B. Lead: ASTM B749,Type L5 1121,minimum 4 lbs./sq.ft.(0.0625 inches thick). C. Solder: For use with steel or copper,Class A,Grade I,half-and-half,pig lead and block tin,ASTM B32, Type 50-50,with rosin flux. 1. For use with stainless steel,60-40 tin/lead solder,ASTM B32,with a cid-chloride flux,except use rosin flux over tinned surfaces. D. Mastic:FS SS-S-1 53,Type 1,black plastic cement E. Nails and Screws:Same metal as flashing/sheet metal,or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer,Stronghold type,with large flat heads and sharp points.Use length sufficient to penetrate wood framinga minimum of 7/8-inch(22 mm). Use lead or neoprene washers where indicated. Use sheet metal screws or self-tapping screws to fasten sheet m etal to other metal. Match finish of exposed heads with finish of material being fastened. F. Lap Joint Sealer:Polyisobutylene non-hardening,non-skinning,non-drying,non-migrating sealant G. Coating for Dissimilar Metals:Bitumastic paint or as required to be compatible with adjacent materials and fmishes. Coordinate requirements with paint systems and coatings furnished under Division 09 Section "Painting". H. Epoxy Seam Sealer:Two-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints. I. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet m anufacturer for waterproof/weat he rproo f seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet J. Paper Slip-Sheet:5-lb(2.27 kg)rosin-sized building paper. Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 K. PolyethyleneUnderlayment:Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film. L. Metal Accessories:Sheet m etal clips,straps,anchoring devices,and similar accessory units as required for installation ofwork,matching or compatible with material being installed,non-corrosive,size and gage as required for performance. M. Gutter and Conductor-Head Guards:20-gauge bronze or nonmagnetic stainless steel mesh or fabricated units, with selvaged edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Use materials compatible with gutters and downspouts. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 Coordination A. Review drawings for sheet metal work.Coordinateto achieve proper incorporation ofthis work within membrane waterproofing work. 3.2 Fabrication and Installation A. Perform work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. B. Fabricate shapes as detailed and approved. C. Accurately fabricate and fit parts,with surfaces free from warp,wave,buckle,dent or other defects,and with square corners and angles,unless otherwise shown. D. Install water and weather tight where exposed to the weather,with the provision for free expansion and contraction without causing leaks. E. Clean soldered surfaces priorto soldering. Fully flow soldered joints fully. Scrape and finish exposed solder smooth. Remove traces of flux or acid. F. Provide locked-butt joints. Where impractical and unless otherwise detailed,providejoints with full backup strips,riveted to one end and soldered;lap other end and seal with lap joint sealer.Turn lock joints,where exposed,in direction offlow. 1. Solder joints and miters. 2. Make ample provisions for expansion and contraction in sheet metal assemblies,and provide by slip joints. In long runs,provide slip joints every 20 feet(6 m)minimum,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.In runs less than 20 feet(6 m),provide one slip joint. 3. Provide reinforcements as required. 4. Shop fabricate corners at parapet wall copings with miters and all joints soldered. G. Exposed fasteners are not permitted. H. Provide heavy coating ofbitumastic paint to insulate dissimilarmetals from each other. I. Fold,bead,hem or return exposed edges of fabricated sheetmetal;no raw edges will be permitted. J. Close all ends. K. Etch sheet metal surfaces which will be concealed in the finish work with an approved acid wash,and then shop paint with one coat of approved galvanized primer.Sheet metal surfaces which will be exposed in the finished work are specified to be treated and prime-painted under Division 09 Section"Painting". Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. Confirm compatibility of shop primers and surface preparation used on concealed surfaces with paints and coatings provided in Division 09 Section"Painting". L. Underlayment:Where stainless steel is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates,install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethyleneunderlayment. M. Install continuous gutter guards on gutters,arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning gutters. Install "beehive"-type strainer guards at conductor heads,removable for cleaning downspouts. 3.3 Cleaning A. Immediately upon completion ofthis work,remove from site all debris and scrap material and clean up all dust and dirt resulting from this work. END OF SECTION 07620 Davis&Davis,Inc. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07712 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. The provisions included under Division 1,General R eq uirements,are included as part of this section as though bound herein. 1.2 Summary A. Provide labor,material,and equipment necessary for furnishing a complete installation of commercial gutter system. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Division 5 Sections 2. Division 6 Sections 3. Division 7 Sections 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data:Each type ofproduct specified.Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations,dimensions of individual components,profiles,and finishes B. Shop Drawings:Show fabrication and installation ofcommercial gutter system including fully dimensioned roofplans,expansion joint locations,sections and details of components and other related trims. C. Finish&Color Selection:Furnish manufacturer's technical data for specified finish and color chart showing full range of colors available.Color to match roof. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Where pre-engineered manufactured products are specified,other field fabricated or shop/field fabricated substitutions will not be accepted.However,where shop/field fabrications are indicated pre- engineered systems will be considered with Architect approval. B. Obtain all components and related accessories from one single source manufacturer. C. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installing commercial gutter system.Follow primary roofing manufacturer's printed instructions for installing associated roof material for flashing gutter system to roof. 1.5 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. All products delivered shall be stored in a clean dry location prior to installation. B. Products furnished with strippable protective masking shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for more than 30minutes withoutremovingmasking. C. Do not install finished materials with scars or abrasions. Davis&Davis,Inc. Gutters and Downspouts 07712-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.6 Project Conditions A. Coordinate work of this Section with adjoining work for proper sequencing to ensure protection from inclem ent weather a nd to protect materials and their fmish againstdamage. B. Do not install commercial gutter system during inclement weather.When installing in cold climates, warm adhesives,caulks,and primers to at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit prior to application. PART II PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Basis of Design:provide commercial gutter system,accessories,and drainware as manufactured by Perimeter Systems,a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company,Inc.8370 East Hwy 78, Villa Rica,GA 30180,(800)334-9823,Online at http://www.saf.com/persys 2.2 Type A. Provide Perimeter Systems'SMACNA Series Gutter System,Figure 1-2,Style A,Box Style. Minimum size 6"x6",with vertical corner splashguards at all valleys. 2.3 Materials and Fabrication A. Gutter:Shall be manufactured from 0.040"mill finished aluminum in 10'-0"lengths.Gutter shall be: 1. Manufactured with 1"telescoping and notched end. 2. Factory punched with fastening holes elongated to allow for thermal movement. 3. Gutters shall be press formed ona CNC Press to provide repeated trueand accurate profiles. B. Support Bracket:Shall be manufactured from 0.125"x 1.00"aluminum,factory punched for fasteners. Match gutter color,maximum of 36"oc.spacing. C. Interior Straps:Shall be manufactured from 0.125"x 1.00"aluminum,maximum 36"oc spacing. 2.4 Accessories A. Mitered Corners:Miter shall be precision saw cut with a continuous heliarc weld watertight joint. B. End Caps:Provide factory end caps at all gutter ends and wa ll abutments. C. Liner Expansion Joint:Provide manufacturer's elastomeric expansion joints with cover plates at 40' intervals or as shown on shop drawings. D. Sealant:Shall be polyurethane or silicon based wa ter-proofing ty pe,compatible with aluminum gutter, downspout,and abutting dissimilar materials for intended application. 2.5 Drainware A. Downspout&Elbows:Provide downspout Model Num ber DS-FM 6"x6"size.Downspouts shall be manufactured from 0.040 aluminum,finished to match gutter.Downspout elbows shall have heliarc welded joints. B. Outlets:At all downspout locations provide aluminum outlets to connect liner to downspout. Davis&Davis,Inc. Gutters and Downspouts 07712-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Wall Brackets:Provide Style 1 Wall brackets at 60"maximum spacing(minimum 2 brackets). Brackets shall be manufactured from 0.125"x 1.00"aluminum,finished to match downspout D. Discharge Adapter:Provide black pvc adapter gasket from downspout to site storm drain system unless noted otherwise. 2.6 Finishes A. General:Apply coatings to exposed aluminum components after fabrication for maximum coating performance and to prevent crazing,abrasion,and damage to finished surfaces. B. Pretreatment:Aluminum components shall be pretreated with solutions to remove organic and inorganic surface soils,removeresidual oxides,followed by a chrome phosphate conversion coating to which organic coatings will firmly adhere. C. Coating Type:High Performance Coating,two-coat,shop applied,70%Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF)coating based on Elf Arkema Chemicals,Inc.Kynar 500 orAusimont U.S.A.,Inc.Hylar 5000 resin,meeting AAMA 2605 specification. D. Color:Gutter match roof color,down spout color to be determined from standard line of colors. PART III EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. The insta ller must examine substrates and conditions under which commercial gutter system will be installed.All wood plates and/or fascia boards shall be installed true,straight,and free of splits,cracks, or other irregularities.Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 Preparation A. Prior to the installation of the commercial gutter system,soffits,extenders,and associated cornice profiles sha ll be installed. B. Installer shall thoroughly read and follow manufacturer's installation instructions before proceeding with installation. 3.3 Installation A. General:The commercial gutter system shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.Deviations from the instructions are nota llowed. B. Support Brackets:Layout support brackets to provide 1/2"slope in 40 linear feet.Install support brackets with#10 x 2"stainless steel wood screws,or appropriate type to coordinate with mounting substrate. C. Gutter:Install gutter onto support brackets and fasten to substrates with 1-1/2"aluminum or stainless steel nails.Rivet and seal liner joints with high grade exterior sealant as recommended by gutter manufacturer. D. Expansion Joints:Installelastomeric expansion jointsas shown on plans and/or shop drawings. Maximum expansion joint spacing shall be 40'centers. Davis&Davis,Inc. Gutters and Downspouts 07712-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 E. Install interior straps by fully engaging them into gutter's hemmed edge,complete by securely riveting. F. When down spout is not tied into site storm drain system all open site drains will discharge away from building.Install concrete splash block/pad when in landscape beds.The open site drain will have all edges and corners returned or hemmed to prevent any sharp edges or corners. END OF SECTION 07712 Davis&Davis,Inc. Gutters and Downspouts 07712-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07720 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Related Document A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions ofthe Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections,apply to this section. B. The General Contractor shall provide all labor,material and equipment to completely install all roof curbs and ridge vents. C. Submittals: Product Data,Shop Drawings,and color Samples. 1.2 Summary A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof Curbs. 2. Ridge Vents. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209,a lclad Alloy 3 005 H25,or a lloy and temper req uired to suit forming operations,with mill fmish,unless otherwise indicated. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T52,or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements,with mill fmish,unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90. 2.2 Roof Accessories A. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports: Fabricate from minimum.080,3003H14 aluminum,orheavie r a s required to support the load,with fully mitered and heli-arc welded corners,integral base plates, with water diverter cricket. B. Ridge Vents: Provide vented ridge. 1. Products: a. MBCI ridge flash with perforated vent drip. 2. Finish: Fabricated from sheet steel of the same gauge,finish,and color as the roof panels. Davis&Davis,Inc. Roof Accessories 07720-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Installation: Unless otherwise indicated,install roof accessory items according to construction details o f NRCA's"Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Coordinate with installation of roof d eck,vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing to ensure combined elements are secure, waterproof, and weathertight END OF SECTION 07720 Davis&Davis,Inc. Roof Accessories 07720-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirements A. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation ofjoint sealants wh en a mbient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. PART 2 -PRODuCTS 2.1 Joint Sealants A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers,and other related materials that a re compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. B. Sealant for Use in Building Expansion Joints: 1. Single-component,neutral-curing silicone sealant,ASTM C 920,Type S;Grade NS; Class 25; Uses T, M, and 0, with the additional capability to withstand 50 percent movement in both extension and compression fora total of 100 percent movement. C. Sealant for Exterior Traffic-BearingJoints,Where Slope Allows Use of Pourable Sealant: 1. Single-component,pourable urethane sealant,ASTM C 920,Type S;Grade P;Class 25; Uses T, M,G, A,and O. D. Sealant for Use in I nteriorJoints and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Single-component,mildew-resistant silicone sealant,ASTM C 920,Type S;Grade NS;Class 25; Uses NT,G, A,and 0;formulated with fungicide. E. Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames: 1. Latex sealant,single-component,nonsag,mildew-resistant,paintable,acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834. F. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Interior Joints: 1. Nonsag,paintable,non-staining,latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. G. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 1. Non-drying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining,gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reducetransmission ofa irborne sound. Davis&Davis,Inc. Joint Sealants 07920-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.2 Joint-Sealant Backing A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining;are compatible with joint substrates,sealants,primers,and otherj o int fillers;and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330,of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optim urn sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid,inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Comply with ASTM C 1193. B. Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications. END OF SECTION 07920 Davis&Davis,Inc. Joint Sealants 07920-2 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES—ADDENDUM#2 (Note:Additional information is provided as part ofTD1 documents) PART I GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes:Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames,including transom frames,sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed,paneled or louvered openings,fire labeled and non-labeled,as scheduled. 1. Flush Steel Doors. 2. Temperature Rise Doors. 3. Embossed Panel Doors. 4. Full Glass Entrance Doors. 5. Hunicane Doors. 6. Steel frames. 7. Hollow Metal Framing Systems. B. Related Sections:Related documents,drawings and general provisions of contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. The latest published edition of each reference applies. 1. Division 06 -Rough Carpentry 2. Division 08-Door Hardware 3. Division 09-Painting 4. Division 08—Automatic Door Operators C. References:The intent of this document is that all hollow metal and its application will comply or exceed the standards identified below. The latest published edition o fea ch reference applies. 1. ANSI-AmericanNational Standards Institute-ansi.org 2. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association a. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors a nd Oth er Opening Protectives b. NFPA 101—Life Safety Code c. NFPA 105—Standard Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives d. NFPA 252-Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. DHI-Door and Hardware Institute—Door Security+Safety Professionals a. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. b. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. c. Recommended Locations for Builders'Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 4. SDI- Steel Door Institute a. SDI-105—Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames b. SDI-107—Hardware on Steel Doors(Reinforcement-Application) c. SDI-111 -Recommended Details for Standard Steel Doors,Frames,Accessories,and Related Components d. SDI-117-Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames e. SDI-118—Basic Fire Door Requirements f. SDI A250.3 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors and Frames g. SDI A250.4-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames,and Frame Anchors h. SDI A250.6-Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames i. SDI A250.8-SDI-100 Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames Davis&Davis,Inc. HollowMetalDoorsandFrames—ADD#2 08110-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 j. SDI A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames k. SDI A250.11 -Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 1. SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swinging Door Assemblies 5. BHMA-Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association a. BHMAAl56.115-Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. BHMAA156.7-Hinge Template Dim ensions. 6. ASTM-American Society for Testing Materials a. ASTM A568/A568M-19a Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet,Carbon,Structural,and High- Strength,Low-Alloy,Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,General Requirements b. ASTM A8 79/A879M-12(201 7)Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface c. ASTM A65 3/A653M-19a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Go lvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process d. ASTM A924/A92 4M-19 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process e. ASTM Al 008/A 1008M-18 Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet,Cold-Rolled,Carbon, Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy,High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened,and Bake Hardenable 7. ICC-International Code Counsel a. ICC Al 1 7.1—Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities. b. ICC 500 Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters 8. UL-Building Materials Directory;Underwriters Laboratories Inc. a. UL 10B-Standard for Neutral Pressure Fire Tests of DoorAssemblies b. UL 10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies c. UL 1784—Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies d. UL 752—Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment 9. NAAMM/HMMA—National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers/Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association a. NAAMM/HMMA 840—Guide Specification for Receipt,Storage,and Installation of Hollow Meta 1 Doors and Frames. 10. WH-Certification Listings;Warnock Hersey International Inc. 11. Federal Emergency Management Agency(FEMA)361 Guidelines,I CC5 00-201 4 12. Miami-Dade County test protocols PA 201,PA 202 and PA 203. 13. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201,TAS 202 and TAS 203. 14. Texas Department of Insurance TDI- Complies with TAS 201,TAS 202 and TAS 203,Large Missile Impact. 1.2 Substitutions: A. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion ofthe architect and their consultant 1.3 Submittals A. Submittals to comply with provisions of Division 01,Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard details and catalog data indicating compliance with referenced standards and manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 openings as those on the contract documents.Shop drawings should includethe following information to ensure doors and frames are properly prepared and coordinated to receive hardware. 1. Elevationsofeachdoorandframetype. 2. Details for door core. 3. Details of doors,including vertical-and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of cutouts for glass and louvers. 5. Frame details for each frame type,including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 6. Mounting locations for hardware. 7. Thickness ofreinforcement/preparations for hardware. 8. Details of anchorages,joints,field splices,and connections. 9. Details of accessories. 10. Details of moldings,removable stops,and glazing. 11. Fire ratings. 12. Finish. D. Samples: 12 by 12 inches(304 mm by 304mm)cut away sample door with provisions for lockset,hinge and corner section of frame welded and prepped for specified hardware. Sample should be furnished with submittals for Owner approval. After approval return sample to door/fame supplier as confirmation of approved construction. E. Closeout Submittals to comply with Division 1,Closeout Submittals procedures. F. Furnish copies of manufacturer's warranty information and maintenance instructions. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Hollow Metal Distributor is to be a direct account of the manufacturer of the products furnished.In addition, that distributor must have in their regula r em ployment a n Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC),Certified Door Consultant(CDC),an Architectural Openings Consultant(AOC),a Door&Hardware Consultant(DHC) or equivalent doorandhardware industry experience who will be available to consult with the Architect and Contractor rega rding any matters affecting the door and frame opening. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Certified Member of the Steel Door Institute in good standing. C. Installer: Minimum fiveyears documented experience installing products sp ecified this Section. D. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer's certification that products comply with referenced standards. 2. Hollow Metal Manufacturer must provide documentation that they are an SDI Certified Manufacturer. E. Hurricane Doors:Provide door systems complying with- 1. Texas Department of Insurance(TDI)protocols TAS 201,TAS 202 and TAS 203. Impact Resistance: a. The doorassemblies are to satisfy TDI's criteria for protection from windbome debris in the Seaward,Inland I and Inland II zones. b. Assemblies mustpass an impact criterion of equivalent to Missile Level D specified in ASTM E 1996. c. Assemblies to be installed at any height on the structure that does not exceed the assembly's design pressure rating. d. Assemblies do not require protection with an impact protective system when installed in areas that require windbome debris protection. 2. Provide test report data validating compliance. 1.5 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Packing and Shipping 1. The use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that can create a humidity chamber shall be avoided to prevent rust or damage. 2. Provide cardboard wrapped or crated product to provide protection during tra nsit and j ob site storage 3. Should wrappers become wet,remove immediately Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Delivery and Site Acceptance 1. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the project site;direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand.Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. 2. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped orcratedto provide protection during transit and job site storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to any factory-finished doors.Mark all doors and frames with architects opening numbers as shown on the contract documents and shop drawings on the center hinge preparation location. 3. Upon delivery,check in doors and frames jointly with supplier.Inspectdoors and frames upon delivery for damage,correct quantities or shortages.Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect Otherwise,remove and replace damaged goods as directed.Note shortages and replace immediately. C. Storage and Protection 1. Handle,store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions,ANSI/SDI A250.8—Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames,A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames,orANSI/SDI A250.3 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors and Frames and andNAAMMIHMrvIA 840—Guide Specification for Receipt,Storage,and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Store all materials in a dry area. All hollow metal material shall be stored so that it does not come in contact with waterormoisture. Protect units from adverse weather elements. 3. Place units on 4 inch(102mm)high wood sills to prevent rust and damage. 4. Store doors vertically undera properly vented cover,five units maximum in a stack with a''A"space between doors to permit air circulation. 5. Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost undercover. 6. Store assembled frames five units maximum in a stack with 2-inch(51 mm)space between frames to permit a rcirculation. 1.6 Coordination A. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving m anufacture or fabrication o f internal cutouts and reinforcement for door hardware,electric devices and recessed items. B. Coordinate Work with frame opening construction,door and hardware installation. C. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware. D. Verify field dimensions for factory assembled frames prior to fabrication. 1.7 Warranty A. Comply with Division 01 Closeout Submittals B. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship fora period ofone(1)year commencing on the date of manufacture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Basis of Design-MESKER a doimakaba Brand,Web:http://meskerdoor.com 1. Acceptable Manufacturer- Curries an ASSA Abloy Company 2. Acceptable Manufacturer- Steelcraft an Allegion Company B. Substitutions: As per Division 01 of Project Manual C. Provide all steel doors and frames from a single SDI certified manufacturer. 2.2 General: A. Physical performance:Units shall comply with the 1 million cycles swing test requirement per ANSI A250.4- Level A. Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Finishing: 1. Prime Gray to meet SDI A250.10 C. Electrical Requirements:Coordinate all electrical requirements for doors and frames.Make provisions for installation of electrical items so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced. 1. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for metal doors and frames to accept electric components. 2. Frame with Electrical Hinges:Junction box welded over center hinge reinforcing.Top or bottom hinge locations are not permitted. 3. Coordinate with Section 08710and08713 for electrified hardware items. 2.3 Doors A. General:Construct exterior/interiordoors to the following designs and gauges: 1. Exterior Doors:Z inc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel(A40)(A60)or Zinc-Coated Galvanized steel(G90)that conforms to ASTM A653/A653M: a. Thickness: 1) 18 gauge b. Provide flush top/closed top channel for exterior swing-out doors to eliminate moisture penetration.Galvannealed steel top caps are permitted. 2. Interior Doors:Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel(A40)(A60)or Zinc-Coated Galvanized steel(G90)that conforms to ASTM A653/A653M: a. Thickness: 1) 18 gauge 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches 4. Vertical edge seams:Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-lockingjoints at lock and hinge edges.Finish edges as follows: a. Visible Interlocked Edge:Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints with visible edge seams. 5. Bevel hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch(3 mm)in 2 inches(50 mm).Square edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are acceptable. 6. Reinforcetop and bottom of doors with galvannealed 16 gauge minimum,welded to both panels. 7. Core Adhesion System—Basis of design-Moisture Cure Polyurethane Hot Melt: a. Adhesives are to cure completely,meaning once set,they cannot be re-melted and will not soften or freeze and lose adhesion. b. Adhesive system will have an enhanced resistance to flame spread in its cured state designed to pass UL 10C,Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. c. Bonded assemblies will withstand prolonged exposure from-35°F(-37°C)to 200°F(93°C) temperatures without exhibiting any signs of bond failure. d. Cured adhesive film will remain flexible to allow for differences in thermal expansion and contraction of various substrates without sacrificing bond performance. 8. Core Material a. Treadcore Polystyrene 9. Glass moldings and stops: a. Fabricate from 18 gauge minimum steel: b. Install trim into the door as a four-sided welded assembly with mitered,reinforced and welded corners. Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 c. Trim:identical on both sides ofthe door. d. Labeledand non-labeled doors: use the same trim to match esthetics. e. Channeling requirements: 1) Cutouts larger than 36"in height require 18 gauge perimeterchannelings in the cutout of the door priorto installation of the lite kit our louver. 10. Hardware Reinforcements: a. Doors shall be mortised and adequately reinforced per the manufacturers guidelines for all hardware. Required mortise hardware reinforcements shall be drilled and tapped atthe factory. Surface applied hardware shall be field drilled by hardware installer. b. Hinge reinforcements for full mortise hinges:minimum 7 gauge with an extra long,high frequency top hinge reinforcement a s a standard feature. c. Lock reinforcements:minimum 16 gauge. d. C loser reinforcements:minimum 14 gauge steel. e. Projection welded hinge and lock reinforcements to the edge of the door. f. Provided adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required. B. Full Flush Doors: 1. Basis of Design: MeskerN Series. 2.4 Door Frames A. General:Construct exterior/interior metal door frames to the following designs and gauges; 1. Exterior Frames:Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel(A40)(A60)or Zinc-Coated Galvanized steel(G90)that conforms to ASTM A 653/A653M: a. Thickness: 1) 16 gauge. 2. Interior Frames in Masonry:Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated galvannealed steel(A40)(A60)or Zinc-Coated Galvanized steel(G90)that conforms to ASTM A 653/A653M: a. Thickness: 1) 16gauge. B. Flush Steel Frames: 1. Basis of Design: MeskerF-Series. 2. Profile: a. Face: 1) 2 Inches face dim ension a nd types and throat dimensions indicated on the Door Schedule. b. Stops: 1) Standard 5/8-inch-high stops 3. Provide reinforcements and accessories for specified hardware per SDI 250.6. 4. Anchors:Locate adjustable anchors in each jamb 6 inches from the top of the door opening to hold fra m e in rigid alignment. a. Exposed fastener type;recessed hole at base ofjamb for countersunk fastener installation. 2.5 Accessories A. Anchors: Manufacturer's standard framing anchors,specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions forproject conditions. B. Astragals for pairs of doors: Manufacturer's standard for labeled and non-labeled openings. C. Plaster Guards: Same material as door frame,minimum 24 gauge(0.5 mm)m inim um;provide for all strike boxes.Plasterguards not mandatory on interior after set frames. Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 D. Silencers:Resilient rubber,Inserted type,three per strike jamb for single openings.Stick-on silencers shall not be permitted except on hollow metal framing systems. E. Glazing: As noted. 2.6 Fabrication A. Steel Frames: 1. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance,and free from defects,warp,or buckle.Where practical,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. a. Clearances shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 80. 2. Factory-welded frames: Head and jamb intersecting corners mitered at 45 degrees,with back welded joints ground smooth. a. Continuous face weld the joint between the head and jamb faces alongtheir length either internally or externally.Grind,prime paint,and finish smooth face joints with no visible face seams. b. Externally weld,grind,prime paint,and finish smooth face joints at meeting m ullions or between mullions and other frame members per a current copy ofANSI/SDI A250.8. 3. Provide temporary steel spreaders(welded to thejambs at each rabbet of door openings)on welded frames during shipment.Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation ofthe frame. B. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117"Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners,reinforcement,edge channels,louvers,and moldings from eithercold-rolledor hot-rolled steel sheet D. Unless otherwise indicated,provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. E. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware per fmal door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier.Comply with applicable requirements of SDI-107 and ANSI-A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. F. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardwareper SDI A250.6.Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware shall be done at Project site.Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closers and exit devices where scheduled. G. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated,per the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI)"Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2.7 Finishes A. Chemical Treatment: Treat steel surfaces to promote p aint adhesion. B. Exposed door and frame surfaces to be cleaned and treated then coated with rust inhibitive primer.Water- based primer and color paint finishes to be free of Hazardous Air Pollutants(HAPS)and Volatile Organic Compounds(VOCs).Paintto comply with ANSI A250.3 and A250.10. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Verify that project conditions are acceptable before beginning installation of frames. 1. Verify that completed openings to receive knock-down wrap-around frames are of correct size and thickness. 2. Verify that completed concrete or masonry openings to receive butt type frames are of correct size. B. Do not begin installation until conditions have been properly prepared. C. Correct unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation. 3.2 Installation Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow MetalDoors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and with Steel Door Institute's recommended erection instructions for steel frames SDI A250.11 and NAAMM/HMMA 840. B. DHI—Door and Hardware Institute—Door Security+Safety Professionals—Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware C. Comply with provisions of SDI-105,"Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames,"unless otherwise indicated.Set frames accurately in position,plumbed,aligned,and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 1. Place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction,install at least 3 wall anchors perjamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb.Acceptable anchors masonry T-shaped anchors.Use additional anchors as required for height per manufacturers'installation instructions. 3. In metal-stud partitions,install at least 3 wall anchors perjamb at hinge and strike levels.In steel-stud partitions,attach wall anchors to studs with screws.Secure Sill Anchors to floor.Use additional anchors as required for height per manufacturers'installation instructions. D. To comply with the Texas Department of Insurance TDI— 1. Wall Framing Construction:The door assemblies may be mounted to several types of wall framing construction. The types of wall framing construction allowed include: a. Grout filled concrete block b. Hollow concrete block c. Wood(Spruce-Pine-Fir,minimum S.G.=0.42) 2. Fastener Requirements: a. Refer to the approved drawings for the anchor layout and notes. b. Refer to the approved drawings forthe minimum embedment depths forthe fasteners and the minimum edge distances(minimum distance fastener must be from the edge of the substrate material)for the fasteners. E. Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation offrames. F. Set frames accurately in position;plumb,align and brace until permanent anchors areset.Afterwall construction is corn plete,remove temporary wood spreaders. 1. Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings. 2. Weld,grind,and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on exposed faces. G. Provide full height 3/8 inch(9.5 mm)to 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)thick strip of polystyrene foam blocking at frames requiring grouting.Apply the strip to the back ofthe frame to facilitate field drilling ortapping. H. Glaze and seal exterior transom,sidelight and window frames in accordance with HMMA-820 TN03. I. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers'instructions and Section 087100 ofthese Specifications.Install hardware with only factory-provided fasteners.Install silencers.Adjust door installation to provide 1/8"at head and 1/8"at strike and hinge jamb with door undercut to meet fire ratings and floor conditions to achievemaximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 3.3 Adjust and Clean A. Adjust doors for proper operation,free from binding or other defects. B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. Remove scraps and debris and leave site in a clean condition. C. Prime Coat Touch-Up:Immediately after erection,sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat,and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. D. Properly clean and apply paint to doors and frames in accordance with HMMA-840 TNO 1 and ANSI A250.8 appendix B along with Manufactures recommended surface preparation for painting. 3.4 Protection Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-8 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Protect installed products and finished surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 08110 Davis&Davis,Inc. Hollow M eta 1 Doors and Frames—ADD#2 08110-9 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 08411 STOREFRONT WINDOWS ( NOTE: REFER TO INCLUDED TDI DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. Frame installation and glazing to meet current TDI requirements for pressure and projectiles. 1.2 Summary A. Section Includes:Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems,including perimeter trims,stools,accessories,shims and anchors,and perimeter sealing of storefront units. 1. Types of Ka wneer Aluminum Storefront Systems include: a. IR 501 T/IR 501 UTFraming—2-3/4"x 5"(69.8 mm x 127 mm)nominal dimension;Thermal;Center Plane,Screw Spline Fabrication. b. IR 501 T/I R 50 lUT Framing—Impact Glazing B. Related Sections: 1. 079200"Joint Sealants"07920 1.3 Definitions A. Definitions:For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA)—AAMA Glossary(AAMA AG). 1.4 Performance Requirements A. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system;include anchorage,capable ofwithstanding wind load design pressures ofL35J lbs./sq.ft.inward and L35 J lbs./sq.ft.outward.The design pressures are based on the LIBC,Building Code;(2018J Edition. 2. Air Leakage:The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.Air Lea kage rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2(0.3 Vs• m2)at a static airpressure differential of 6.2 psf(300 Pa)with interior seal,or,rate sha 11 not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2(0.3 Us•m2)at a static airpressure differential of 1.6 psf(75 Pa)without interior seal. 3. Water Resistance:The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.There shall be no leakage at a minimum static airpressure differential of 15 psf(720 Pa)a s defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load:A static air design load of 30 psf(1436 Pa)shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330.There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load,no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of0.2%of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Energy Efficiency: a. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): When tested to AAMA specification 507 or NFRC 100 the thermal transmittance(U-Factor)shall not be more than: IR 501UT: a. 1"insulating glass: Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1) U-Factornot more than.33 BTU/hr/ft2/°F per AAMA 1503 with exterior 1/4"clear with e 0.035low-e coating on surface#2,1/2"air space with warm edge spacer and 90%argon ga s fill,and interior 1/4"clear glass. Dark Grey tint. 6. Condensation Resistance(CRF):When tested to AAMA Specification 1503,the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: IR501UT: a. 68 frame and 70g,ass(low-e). 7. Sound Transmission Class(STC)and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class(OITC):When tested to AAMA Specifration 1 80 1 and in accordance with ASTM El 425 and ASTM E90,the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: I R 501 UT: a. 38(STC)and 33(OITC). 8. Windbome-Debris-Impact Resistance Perfonnance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 1886,information in ASTM E 1996 and TAS 201/203. a. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet(9.1 m)ofgrade. 9. Material Ingredient Reporting:Shall have a complete list of chemical ingredients to at least 1 00ppm(0.01%)that covers 100%of the product,acceptable documentation includes: a. Manufacturer's inventory with Chemical Abstract Service Registration Number(CASRN or CAS#). 1) Kawneer's Material Transparency Summary(MTS). b. Cradle to Cradle certification:Either document below is acceptable forthis option. 1) Cradle to Cradle CertifiedTM with Material Health section Silver or above. 2) Silver level or above Material Health Certificate. c. Red List Free DECLARE label. B. Environmental Product Declaration(EPD):Shall have a Type III Product-Specific EPD created from a Product Category Rule. C. Material Ingredient Reporting:Shall have a complete list of chemical ingredients to at least 100ppm(0.01%)that covers 100%of the product,acceptable documentation includes: 1. Manufacturer's inventory with Chemical Abstract Service RegistrationNumber(CASRN or CAS#). a. Kawneer's Material Transparency Summary(MTS). 2. Cradle to Cradle certification:Either document below is acceptable forthis option. a. Cradle to Cradle Certified'with Material Health section Silver or above. b. Silver Level or above Material Health Certificate. 3. Red List Free DECLARE label. 1.5 Submittals A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware,finishes,and installation instructions for each type of a luminum-framed storefront system indicated. i. Recycled Content: a. Provide documentation that aluminum has a minimum of 50%m ixed pre-and post-consumer recycled content with a sample document illustrating project specific information that will be provided after product shipment. b. Once product has shipped,provide project specific recycled content information,including: 1) Indicaterecycled content;indicate percentage of pre-and post-consumer recycled content per unit ofproduct 2) Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project. 3) Indicate location recovery ofrecycled content. 4) Indicate location ofmanufacturing facility. 2. Environmental Product Declaration(EPD): a. Include a Type III Product-Specific EPD created from a Product Category Rule. 3. Material Ingredient Reporting: a. Include documentation for material reporting that has a complete list of chemical ingredients to at least 100ppm (0.01%)that covers 100%ofthe product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,hardware,and attachments to other work,operational clearances and installation details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum-framed storefront system and components required. Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for each type,of aluminum-framed storefront. F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems,made from 12"(304.8 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery,including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar unis required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope. B. ManufacturerQualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum-framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requ cements indicated and ofdocumentingthis performance by inclusion oftest reports,and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum-framed storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size,profiles,and dimensional requirements of aluminum-framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated.Refer to Division 01 Section"Product Requirements".Do not modify size and dimensional requirement& 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval If modifications are proposed,submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup for type(s)of storefront elevation(s)indicated,in location(s)shown on Drawings. F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section"Project Managementand Coordination". 1.7 Project Conditions A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum-framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 Warranty A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit,for Owner's acceptance,manufacturer's standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period:Two(2)years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. IR 501 T/IR501UT Framing 3. IR 501 T/IR 501 UT Framing—Impact Glazing 4. System Dimensions:2-3/4"x 5"(69.8 mm x 127 mm) 5. Glass:Center Plane B. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide a comparable product by the following: 1. Manufacturer: CKawneer ) 2. Series: _IR 501 UT Framing&Impact Glazing) 3. Profile dimension: (_referto plans) C. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements. 1. Pre-Contract(Bidding Period)Substitutions:Submit written requests ten(10)days prior to bid date. Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2. Post-Contract(Construction Period)Substitutions:Submit written request in order to avoid storefront installation and construction delays. 3. Product Literature and Drawings:Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requiements and job conditions. 4. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification requirements for storefront system performance criteria,and(2)has been engaged in the design,manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum storefront fora period ofnot less•than ten(10)years.(Company Name) 5. Test Reports:Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project. 6. Samples:Provide samples of typical product sections and fmish samples in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Substitution Acceptance:Acceptance will be in written form,either as an addendum ormodification,and documented by a formal change order signed by the Owner and Contractor. 2.2 Materials A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength,corrosion resistance,and application of required fmish and not less than 0.070"wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221:6063-T6 alloy and temper. 1. Recycled Content:Shall havea minimum of50%mixed pre-and post-consumer recycled content. a. Indicate recycled content;indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. b. Indicate relative dollarvalueof recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project. c. Indicate location recovery ofrecycled content. d. Indicate location ofmanufacturing facility. B. Fasteners: Aluminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members,trim hardware,anchors,and other components. C. Anchors,Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel,or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating;provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel,or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions,or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating;provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system,provide permanently elastic,non-shrinking,and non- m igrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for j oint size and movement. F. Tolerances:Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. G. Red List Free:All parts and materials comply with the Living Building Challenge/DECLARE Red List and the Cradle-to- Cradle(C2C)Banned List. i. PVC free 2. Neoprene free OR H. Red List Free:Product does not contain PVC or Neoprene. 2.3 Storefront Framing System A. Thermal Barrier: 1. I R 501 UT-Kawneer DUAL I soLockTM Thermal Break with two(2)1/4"(6.4 mm)separations consisting of a No-part chemically curing,high-density polyurethane,which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. a. Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TI R-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,nonstaining,nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.Where exposes shall be stainless steel. Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used,provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. D. Packing,Shipping,Handling and Unloading:Deliver materials in manufacturer's original,unopened,undamaged containers with identification labels intact. E. Storage and Protection:Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage.Protect storefront material against damage from elements,construction activities,and other hazards before,during and after storefront installation. 2.4 Glazing Systems A. Glazing: Dark Grey tinti,meetingnecessary impact resistance. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types;replaceable,extrudedEPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems,as recommended by manufacturer for joint type,and as follows: 1. Structural Sealant:ASTM C 1184,single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system componentswith which it comes in contact,specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black 2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Uses NT,G,A, and 0;single-component neutral- curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact;recommended by structural-sealant,weatherseal-sealant,and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. 3. Color: Matching structural sealant. 2.5 Accessory Materials A. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components. B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants". C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied,asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos;formulated for 30 mil(0.762 mm)thickness per coat. 2.6 Fabrication A. Framing Members,General: Fabricate components that,when assembled,have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp,straight,and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints;make joints flush,hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing j oints,condensation within framing m embers,and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing m embers. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement ofglazing. 7. Fasteners,anchors,and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. C. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer's standard installation instructions. D. After fabrication,clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Dra wings. 2.7 Aluminum Finishes A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum fmishes. Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Factory Finishing: I. Ka wneer PermanodicTM AA-M 10C21A44/AA-M45C22A44,AAMA 611,Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating (Color TBD ). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Examination C. Examine openings,substrates,structural support,anchorage,and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions,levelness of sill plate and operational clearances.Examine wall flashings,vapor retarders,water and weather barriers,and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated,weather tight sliding door installation. I. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar,sand,and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry,clean,sound,well nailed,free of voids,and without offsets at joints.Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches(76 mm)of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry;clean;free of grease,oil,dirt,rust,corrosion,and welding slag;without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installations A. Comply with Drawings,Shop Drawings,and manufacturer's written instructions for installing a lumin um framed storefront system,accessories,and other components. B. Install aluminum-framed storefront system level, plumb, square,true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement,anchored securely in place to structural support,and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets,as indicated,for weather tight construction. D. Install aluminum-framed storefront system and components to drain condensation,water penetrating joints,and moisture migrating within aluminum-framed storefront system to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with othermaterials. 3.3 Field Quality Control A. Field Tests:Architect shall select storefront units to be tested as soon as a representative portion of the project has been installed,glazed,perimeter caulked and cured.Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present.Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part ofthe contract amount. 1.Testing:Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency.Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and testing requirements.Testing Standard per AAMA 503,including reference to ASTM E 783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E 1105 Water Infiltration Test. a. Air Infiltration Tests:Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783.Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2,whichever is greater. b.Water Infiltration Tests:Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105.No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 6.2 psf(300 Pa). B. Manufacturer's Field Services:Upon Owner's written request,provide periodic site visit by manufacturer's field service representative. 3.4 Adjusting,Cleaning,and Protection A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum-framed storefronts.Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes.Remove excess sealants,glazing materials,dirt,and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation.Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance.Remove nonpermanent labels,and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken,chipped,cracked,abraded,or damaged during construction period. Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 END OF SECTION 084113 Davis&Davis,Inc. Storefront Windows 08411-7 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE—ADDENDUM#2 (NOTE:IN ADDITION,FOR HARDWARE ASSOCIATED WITH EXTERIOR DOORS REFER TO THE TDI EVALUATION AND ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION PLANS APPROVED BY TDI FOR MESKER"N"SERIES DOORS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Hardware for swinging,sliding,and folding doors except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in other sections. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 08—Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. Division 08—Flush Wood Doors C. Division 08—Overhead Sectional Doors D. Division 08—Metal Framed Storefronts E. Division 08—Automatic Operators F. Section 16—Electrical 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 including Accessibility Guidelines as amended by the D.O.J.September 15,2010,as adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). B. ANSI Al 17.1 -Buildings and Facilities-Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. C. ANSI/BHMA A156(.1 through.21) D. ANSI/DHI—A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. E. FEMA P-361—Safe Rooms for Tornados and Hurricanes. F. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 1 01—Life Safety Code H. IBC-International Building Code,as adopted by public Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). I. State and local Rules and Regulations for Barrier Free Facilities,as adopted by AHJ. 1.04 DOOR HARDWARE TYPES A. Types of fmish hardware required include,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Pivot sets and intermediate pivots. 2. Hinges. 3. Lock cylinders. 4. Keys,keying,and key control. 5. Locksets,latchsets,and privacy sets. 6. Exit devices. 7. Closers. 8. Mullions. 9. Overhead,wall,and floor stops. 10. Protection plates. 11. Gasketing for exterior and interior doors,as required. 12. Door holders. 13. Door bottoms. 14. Thresholds. 15. Silencers. B. Requirements for design,grade,function,finish,size and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware is indicated elsewhere in this section or in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. Refer to Part 2 Products for Manufacturer's identification and allowable substitutions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710- 1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Under provisions of Division 01,submit the following: 1. Product information:Manufacturer's published technical product data for all specified door hardware items indicating compliance with the requirements. 2. Hardware Schedule: a. Hardware schedules are intended for the Contractor's coordination of the work. Review and acceptance by the Architect or Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. b. Submit hardware schedule in the manner and format as specified,complying with the actual construction progress schedule requirements for each draft. Include the following information: 1) Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,codes,at the like,including door handing. 2) Type,style,function,size,and finish of each hardware item. 3) Door and frame sizes and materials cross referenced to the Architect's marks in the door schedule. 4) Room identification(name and number)on each side of door opening as indicated on the drawings. 5) Product name,model number,description,and name of manufacturer of each item. 6) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 7) Locations of hardware cross referenced to architectural floor plans and door schedules. 8) Mounting heights and locations of each type of hardware. 3. Key Schedule: a. Require a qualified representative of the hardware supplier to personally meet with the Owner and Architect to obtain the Owner's written key requirements. b. Include a separate key schedule,showing clearly how the Owner's instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. 4. Samples: Upon request,submit actual material samples of items indicated as for color selection. 5. Templates: Hardware supplier will furnish hardware templates to the Contractor for each fabricator of doors, frames,and other work to be shop prepared or factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request check shop drawings of such other work,to conform that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 6. Provide electrical operation technical sheets including product schematics,point to point diagrams,and electrical requirements of all electrified hardware. Completely coordinate with the general contractor,electrical engineer, electrician,security access subcontractor and the installer. Operational descriptions are for demonstration only— verify operational intent with the owner,architect and electrical engineer. B. Under provisions of Division 01,submit the following: 1. Product information. 2. Hardware schedule. 3. Manufacturer's published operation and maintenance data. Include data on operating hardware,lubrication requirements,and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Tools and extra materials as required. 5. Manufacturer's warranties revise to meet criteria as established within this section. Warranty periods shall commence upon acceptance of the building by the owner. Where warranties listed exceed the manufacturer's standard warranty,obtain in writing an extended warranty to meet the requirements above and as noted. If the manufacturer will not meet these requirements,and another approved manufacturer will comply,supply the alternate approved manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Designs: 1. Items specified in this section are products which are of acceptable design. 2. Do not substitute products without Architect's written prior approval per Division 01. Requests for approval shall be submitted by factory authorized distributor firms representing the products proposed for substitution. Items that are noted to allow no substitution are matching existing materials and the owner's material inventory for servicing the facility. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Manufacturers named in Part 2 of this section with not less than 5 years'experience in manufacturing commercial door hardware of the type indicated. 2. Hardware Supplier: a. A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same state as the project for a period of not less than 5 years. Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 b. Hardware supplier's organization shall include an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC), certified by the Door and Hardware Institute(DHI),who is physically available,at reasonable times during the course of the work,for consultation about project's hardware requirements,to Owner,Architect and Contractor. Mail or telephone correspondence is not acceptable. c. Hardware supplier shall have local warehousing facilities and shall maintain an adequate parts inventory of items supplied for future service to the owner. Supplier will be a factory authorized distributor of all hardware specified. 3. Installer: Company specializing in installing work of this section with not less than 5 years'experience and acceptable to the manufacturers and the hardware supplier. Maintain regular work force of qualified personnel, trained,skilled,and experienced in installing door hardware and constant,competent supervision per the requirements of the General Contractor. The hardware installer shall meet with the representatives of the General Contractor and hardware supplier to jointly inventory all hardware items. Upon satisfactory inventory of products, the hardware installer accepts responsibility for all hardware items inventoried. C. Regulatory and Operational Requirements: 1. Provide hardware for all openings,whether specified or not,in compliance with NFPA Standard No.80,proper operation and local building code requirements. Where required,provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. Label hardware,as required,for compliance with pressure testing criteria as dictated in IBC. 2. Provide hardware which meets or exceeds handicap accessibility per local building code requirements. Conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)of 1990 as amended by the D.O.J.September 15,2010,as adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,HANDLING,AND PROTECTION A. Deliver,store,handle,and protect products to project site under provisions of Division 01 and as specified herein. B. Require hardware supplier to: 1. Tag each item or package separately,with identification related to final hardware schedule. 2. Include manufacturer's basic installation instructions with each item or package. 3. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers,sort and repackage in containers with each item clearly marked with appropriate opening numbers to match the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical items may be packed in the same container. 4. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations(shop or project site)for installation. 5. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the General Contractor,hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. Refer to paragraph 1.6-B-3. C. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in a secure and lockable area. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable,so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses,both before and after installation. Replace lost,missing,damaged,or stolen door hardware items at no additional cost to the Owner as required to meet schedule requirements. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this section with the work of other sections of work under provisions of Division 01 B. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors,frames,and other work to be shop or factory prepared for the installation of hardware. C. Verify completeness and suitability of door hardware with the hardware supplier and the hardware installer. 1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Under provisions of Division 01,furnish to Owner a complete set of special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,maintenance,removal,and replacement of door hardware. B. Special tools and accessories shall be supplied by the hardware component manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. General: 1. Provide all door hardware for complete work,in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. 2. Quantities listed,in any instance,are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. 3. Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational installation. Match the quality and finish of items specified. 4. Provide miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware groups. B. Hand of door:Drawings show direction of slide,swing or hand of each door leaf Door schedule indicates door and frame sizes,materials,required fire ratings,and other pertinent information. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated. C. Where required,provide the manufacturer's standard Molex quick connect wiring system. D. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location(omit removable name plates),except in conjunction with required UL or FM labels and as otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders and latch faceplates only. E. Base Metals:Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated,using manufacturer's standard metal alloy,composition,temper and hardness,but in no case of lesser(commercially recognized)quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish"optional"materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. F. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. 1. Screws:Furnish screws for installation,with each hardware item.Provide Phillips flat head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition)screws to match hardware finish or,if exposed in surfaces of other work,to match finishes of such other work as closely as possible,including"prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 2. Concealed Fasteners:Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed,except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work,except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Stanley 2. Approved Substitutions:Hager,Bommer 3. Continuous hinges will be as manufactured by Stanley.Equal products by Select or ABH are acceptable. B. Templates:Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves)into wood doors and frames,provide only template produced units. C. Screws:Furnish Phillips flat head or machine screws for installation of units,except furnish Phillips flat head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. D. Hinge Pins:Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges:Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges:Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior doors:Non-removable pins. 4. Reverse bevel interior doors(lockable):Non-removable pins. 5. Interior doors:Non-rising pins. E. Pin Tips:Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves. F. Number of Hinges:Provide number of hinges indicated,but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90"or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30"of additional height. G. Butt type hinges and continuous hinges are to be warranted for a period of two years. 2.03 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Best Patented Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Equip locks with 7-pin cylinders for small format interchangeable core pin tumbler inserts with brass construction cores for use during the construction phases. Temporary construction cores shall be removed upon installation of the permanent key system by the owner and returned to the hardware supplier. C. Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze,stainless steel,or nickel silver. 2.04 KEYS,KEYING,AND KEY CONTROL A. Keys: 1. Material:Provide keys of nickel silver only. 2. Quantities:These quantities are to establish a maximum allowable quantity of cut keys to service the project and may not necessarily be assigned as noted. A lesser quantity of cut keys required will not result in any credits,nor a quantity of uncut keys to be issued unless noted otherwise. a. 3 change keys per each cylinder unit. b. 6 master keys per master key level. c. 2 control keys d. 2 construction control keys e. 10 construction keys. 3. Deliver keys to the Owner's representative:Send masterkeys to the Owner via U.S.registered mail direct from hardware supplier or manufacturer. B. Keying: 1. General: Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet in person with owner 8 months prior to occupancy to finalize keying requirements prior to the locks and exit devices being ordered for the project. During keying meeting all hardware functions should be reviewed with the owner to finalize lock and exit device functions. During Keying Meeting obtain Letter of Authorization,Face Sheet and Signature Card required. 2. Comply with Owner's written instructions for masterkeying and,except as otherwise indicated,provide individual change keys for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 3. Grandmaster key all cylinder items to coordinate with the Owner's instructions.Allow for expansion. Permanently inscribe each key with the notation"DO NOT DUPLICATE". C. Key Control: 1. Provide a key control system including envelopes,labels,tags with self-locking key clips,receipt forms,3-way visible card index,temporary markers,permanent markers,and standard metal cabinet,all as recommended by the system manufacturer,with capacity for 150%of the number of locks required for the project. 2. Provide a hinged panel type cabinet,for wall mounting,Telkee RWC-75S or equal. 3. Provide cylinder units with concealed key control and keys with visual key control. 2.05 LOCKSETS,LATCHSETS,AND PRIVACY SETS: A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Best 2. Approved Substitutions:Dorma SFIC Patented B. Types:Locksets,latchsets,and privacy sets as indicated in Door Hardware Schedule. C. Strikes:Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt.Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts,except where not available.At these locations,provide manufacturer's standard recessed strike. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by lock,latch or bolt manufacturer. If aluminum frames are specified,confirm with the aluminum frame supplier that the standard lock strikes will function. Provide the manufacturer's standard extended lip strikes if required. D. Lock Throw:Provide 3/4"minimum throw of mortise type latches and deadbolts used. Cylindrical latches will be 1/2" minimum. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. E. Levers shall be cast solid brass,bronze or stainless steel.Wrought hollow levers are not acceptable. F. Locks and latches shall be warranted for a period of five years. 2.06 EXIT DEVICES AND MULLIONS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Precision,Precision 2. Approved Substitutions:Dorma,Detex B. Provide risers,as needed,to prevent interference with door glazing kits. C. Provide spacers as needed for proper application of removable mullions on narrow stop type frames. Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 D. Devices will be architecturally finished as specified.Powder coat finish will not be allowed. E. Exit devices and related hardware shall be warranted for a period of five years. 2.07 CLOSERS: A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Stanley QDC 100 2. Approved Substitutions:Dorma 8900-DA,LCK 4040 XP-DEL B. Size of Units:Except as otherwise specifically indicated,comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit,depending on the size of the door,exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. C. Provide manufacturer's standard through bolt attachment where door construction is not adequate for support. D. Arms: 1. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers,except as otherwise indicated. Provide drop plates as needed to prevent glazing interference. E. Mount all closers to the maximum allowable degree of opening by the closer manufacturer's template. Where closer arms incorporate dead stop features,mount closers to the maximum degree of opening available before conflict with adjacent structures. If not apparent on the contract documents,verify the use of open space with the Architect or Owner's Representative to determine the maximum allowable degree of opening. F. Access Free Manual Closers:Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped,provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force. Fire protection has precedence over handicap compatibility,check with local jurisdiction. G. Closers shall be cast iron. H. Provide closers with the manufacturer's standard adjustable delayed closing feature. I. Door closers and related hardware shall be warranted for a period of twenty-five years. Electronic closers shall be warranted for a period of two years. 2.9 OVERHEAD STOPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:ABH 2. Approved Substitutions:Glynn Johnson,Rixson B. Mount stops to the maximum degree of opening available before conflict with adjacent structures,or,if adjacent structures are not considered,to the maximum allowable by stop manufacturer's template. C. If not apparent on the contract documents,verify the use of open space with the Architect or Owner's Representative to determine the maximum allowable degree of opening. D. Overhead stops in exterior doors must be manufactured from stainless steel,US32D finish. E. Overhead stops shall be warranted for a period of two years. 2.08 WALL AND FLOOR STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions:Ives,Rockwood B. General:Except as otherwise indicated,provide stops(wall,floor or overhead)at each leaf of every swinging door leaf. 2.09 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions:Ives,Rockwood B. Types:Armor Plates,Kick Plates,Mop Plates C. Fasteners:Provide manufacturer's standard exposed Phillips head fasteners for door trim units;either machine screws or self-tapping sheet metal type screws per manufacturer's recommendations for application to the specified door construction. D. Sizes:Fabricate protection plates(armor,kick or mop)not more than 2"less than door width on stop side and not mot than 1"less than door width on pull side,x the height indicated. E. Plastic Laminate Plates: 1/8"color as selected,beveled four edges(B4E). Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.10 GASKETS AND SWEEPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:National Guard 2. Approved Substitutions:Zero,Pemko B. General:Except as otherwise indicated,provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type,sizes and profiles indicated as drawn or scheduled. C. Fasteners:Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated. D. Replaceable seal strips:Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the manufacturer. E. Perimeter weatherstripping:Flexible,hollow neoprene bulb or loop insert,conforming to MIL R 6055,Class II,Grade 40. F. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms:Provide door bottoms consisting of contact type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size indicated. G. Hot smoke seal,if required by IBC and subsequent UL testing procedures,will be supplied as an integral part of the door assembly by the door manufacturer. H. Gaskets and sweeps shall be warranted for a period of three years. 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:National Guard 2. Approved Substitutions:Zero,Pemko B. Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal threshold unit of type,size and profile as detailed or scheduled. C. Where there is conflict between scheduled thresholds and details,details shall have precedence. Revise details only if necessary,to comply with handicap accessibility requirements. Notify the Architect of such required modifications. D. Verify all existing conditions and revise if necessary.All thresholds must be within ADA parameters.Notify the Architect of required revisions if applicable. E. Thresholds and related items shall be warranted for a period of three years,abrasive coatings shall be warranted for a period of ten years. 2.12 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions:Rockwood,Ives 2.13 FINISHES A. Exposed surfaces of hardware shall be Brushed Chrome(US26D,626),unless otherwise indicated. Items specified in Satin Stainless Steel(US32D,630)shall be supplied in stainless steel with no exceptions. B. The designations used in the schedule and elsewhere to indicate hardware fmishes are the industry recognized standard commercial finishes common to the product's manufacturer listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Under provisions of Division 01,examine and verify that substrates and project site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. B. Do not begin installation until finishes indicated to be field applied have been applied to doors,frames,and similar items requiring project site finishing and are thoroughly dry and cured. C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Beginning installation means installer accepts project site conditions and substrates as ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. General:The types and approximate quantities of door hardware required for this project are indicated at the end of this section. B. Key Cabinet:Install in location as indicated on drawings or as directed by the Architect. C. Heights:Mount hardware units at heights indicated in"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for/standard Steel Doors and Frames"by the Door and Hardware Institute,except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations,and except as may be otherwise directed by the Architect. D. Substrates:Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation of hardware. E. Installation: 1. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions,requirements of NFPA 80,NFPA 101,IBC,ADA,State Rules and Regulations for Barrier Free Facilities and recommendations of the DHI. 2. Set units level,plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. 3. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 4. Where not factory machined,machine cut for hardware per template,as required. 5. Cut and fit thresholds and floor covers to profile of door frames. Join units with concealed welds. Cut smooth openings for spindles,bolts,or similar items. Screw thresholds to substrate with the manufacturer's standard machine screws and expansion anchors(MS/EA)unless otherwise noted. Fill cavities of thresholds at sound rated openings with 1 inch thick(uncompressed thickness)low density fiberglass sill sealer insulation full width and length of the threshold. In addition to fastening requirements,set thresholds for exterior doors in a full bed of butyl- rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 6. Do not install hardware which is incomplete or apparently improper for application. Notify the hardware supplier immediately of any such deficiencies. Failure to comply with this requirement indicates the hardware installer's acceptance of responsibility for proper application and performance. F. Cutting and Patching: Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way,coordinate removal,storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. G. Where existing components are to receive new hardware,prepare the existing component to accept the new hardware specified.If the existing component cannot be fabricated to accept the new hardware,or if the revisions will result in a voided label,immediately contact the architect for direction. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door,to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Adjust resilient faced sound stops for continuous contact with door and threshold. Adjust weatherstripping and sweeps to completely seal doors with frames and to adjacent structures. 2. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Final Adjustment:Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area,return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy,and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes,during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.05 CLEANING AND DEBRIS A. Cleaning: 1. Clean work under provisions of Division 01 2. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by work of this section. B. Debris:Under provisions of Division 01,remove debris from project site and legally dispose of off-site. 3.06 MAINTENANCE Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-8 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area,the hardware installer shall: 1. Return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,materials or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems(of substantial nature)in the performance of the hardware and submit to the Architect. 3.07 PROTECTION Under provisions of Section 01 50 00,protect work of this section as required so that work will be without damage or deterioration at the time of completion and acceptance by the Owner. 3.08 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Manufacturer List Code Name BE Best Access Systems BY By Others DH Design Hardware NA National Guard PR Precision SH Stanley Commercial Hardware ST Stanley TR Trimco Finish List Code Description AL Aluminum 626 Satin Chromium Plated 630 Satin Stainless Steel 689 Aluminum Painted BLACK Black US26D Chromium Plated,Dull US32D Stainless Steel,Dull Hardware Sets SET#02-TDI Storage Doors:D08 3 Hinges K FBB168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset M-07IC-FE US26D DH 1 Door Closer QDC119 689 SH I Kick Plate K0050 10"x 34" 630 TR 1 Drip Cap 16 A-4"ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Threshold 896 N 40" AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR TDI Standards Required.Confirm Product before installation/purchase SET#03-TDI Panic Doors:D03 Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710-9 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3 Hinges K FBB 168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Exit Device 2000R X US32D DH 1 Exit Device Trim LE-08 CURVED US32D DH 1 Rim Cylinder 12E-72 PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer QDC119 689 SH 1 Kick Plate K0050 8"X 2"LDW 630 TR I Drip Cap 16 A-4"ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Threshold 896 N 40" AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR TDI Standards Required.Confirm Product before installation/purchase SET#04-TDI PANIC PAIR Doors:D04 6 Hinges K FBB 168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 2 Exit Device 2000V US32D DH 1 Exit Device Trim LE-08 CURVED US32D DH 1 Rim Cylinder 12E-72 PATD 626 BE 2 Electric Strike VR165 RCI 1 Drip Cap 16 A-4"ODW NA 2 Cover Plate TR 2 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Threshold 896 N AL NA 2 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR TDI Standards Required.Confirm Product before installation/purchase Operation:Electric strike tied into auto operator and will release upon activation.Door normally closed and latched SET#010-TDI Entry Doors:D07 3 Hinges K FBB 168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset M-04IC-FE US26D DH 1 Door Closer QDC116 689 SH 1 Kick Plate K0050 8"X 2"LDW 630 TR 1 Drip Cap 16 A-4"ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Threshold • 896 N AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR TDI Standards Required.Confirm Product before installation/purchase SET#011 -TDI Entry Doors:DO 1,D02, 3 Hinges K FBB 168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset M-04IC-FE US26D DH 1 Electric Strike 5000C 630 HE 1 Kick Plate K0050 8"X 2"LDW 630 TR Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710- 10 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1 Drip Cap 16 A-4"ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Threshold 896 N AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR TDI Standards Required.Confirm Product before installation/purchase Operation:Electric strike tied into auto operator and will release upon activation.Door normally closed and latched SET#100-Storage Doors:D12,D17,D18 3 Hinges K FBB168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 45H-7D14H PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer QDC116 689 SH 1 Wall Bumper 1270CV(As Needed) 626 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR NOTE: Wall bumps for D17&D18,not needed at D12 SET#101 -passage Doors:D 10 3 Hinges CB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D • ST 1 Passage Set 45H-ON14H 626 BE 1 Wall Bumper 1270CV 626 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR SET#102-TDI Doors:D05,D06 3 Hinges K FBB 168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset M-041C-FE US26D DH 1 Electric Strike 5000C 630 HE 1 Kick Plate K0050 8"X 2"LDW 630 TR 1 Drip Cap 16 A-4"ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200 NA NA 1 Threshold 896 N 40" AL NA 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR Operation:Electric strike tied into auto operator and will release upon activation.Door normally closed and latched SET#103-RESTROOMS Doors:D11,D13 3 Hinges CB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Deadlock 45H-7AD PATD 626 BE 1 Pull Plate 1018-3 630 TR 1 Electric Strike 5000C 630 HE I Kick Plate K0050 8"X 2"LDW 630 TR 1 Push Plate 1001-3 630 TR 1 Wall Bumper 1270CV 626 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710- 11 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Operation:Electric strike tied into auto operator and will release upon activation.Door normally closed and latched SET#104-STORAGE PAIR Doors:D09,D14,D15,D16 6 Hinges CB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 2 Surface Bolt 3922L X SMS 626 TR 1 Lockset 45H-7D14H PATD 626 BE 1 Door Closer QDC119 689 SH 1 Astragal By Door Mfg. BY 2 Door Silencers 1229A GEEY TR Davis and Davis,Inc. Door Hardware—ADD#2 08710- 12 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 08713 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS—ADDENDUM#2 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. This section includes thefollowingtypes of automatic door operators: 1. Low-energy door operators for swinging doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Sections for caulking to the extent not specified in this section. 2. Division 8 Sections"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 3. Division 8 Section"Door Hardware"for hardware to the extent not specified in this section. 4. Division 16 Section for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic entrance operators and access-control devices. 1.3 References A. References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisd ict ion. 1. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible andUsable Buildings and Facilities. 2. I CC/IBC-International Building Code. 3. CUL—Approved for use in Canada. 4. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. 6. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. 7. NFPA 105-Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. B. Am erica nNational Standards Institute(ANSI)/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA). 1. ANSI/BHMAA156.19 Standards for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. C. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 1. UL 10C—Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 325-Standard for Safety for Door,Drapery,Gate,Louver,and Window Operators and Systems. D. American Association ofAutomatic Door Manufacturers(AAADM). E. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). 1. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods, Wire,Profiles and Tubes. 2. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. Am erica n Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA). 1. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. Davis&Davis,Inc. Automatic Door Operators—Add#2 08713-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 G. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers(NAAMM). 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural Metal Products. H. International Code Council(IBC). 1. IBC: International Building Code Building Code. 1.4 Definitions A. Activation device:Device that,when actuated,sends an electrical signal to the door operator to initiate the door operation. B. Monitored Safety Devices:A tested system that works in conjunction with the automatic door control that detects the presence ofa person or an object within a zone where contact could occur and provides a signal to stop the movement of the door. C. AAADM:American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. D. Operating ambient Temperature Range: 5 Degrees F to plus 122 degrees F(minus 15 C to 50 degrees C). E. For automatic door terminology,refer to ANSI/BHMA A 156.19 for definitions of terms. 1.5 Performance Requirements A. General: Provide automatic doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performancerequirements,as demonstrated by testing manufacturers corresponding systems. B. Compliance: 1. ICC/IBC International Building Code 2. ANSI/BHMA A 156.19 Am erican Na tional Standard for Power Operated Doors Pedestrian Doors. 3. UL 325 Listed 4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 6. CUL Approved for use in Canada 7. UL Listed Fire Door Operator with Automatic Closer C. Automatic Door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian tra ffic. D. Opening Force Requirements: 1. Power-Operated swinging doors shall open with a manual force not to exceed 30 lbf(133N)to set the door in motion and 15 lbf to fully open the door with force applied at 1"(25mm)from the latched edge of the door.The required force to prevent a stopped door from opening or closing shall to exceed 15 lbf(67N)measured 1"(25mm)from the latch edge of the door at any point during the opening or closing. 2. Should the automatic door opener not be functional for any reason,the force required to open the door must meet the requirements of TAS,ADA, or ANSI standards/guidelines for the minimum force required to open a closed door. E. Closing Time: 1. Door operators shall be field adjustable to close 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 seconds or longer per ANSI/BHMAA 156.19standard. 2. Door shall be field adjusted to close from 10 degrees to fully closed position in not less than 15 seconds. Davis&Davis,Inc. Automatic Door Operators—Add#2 08713-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.6 Submittals A. Comply with Division 01—Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles fabrication,operational descriptions and finishes. C. Shop Drawings:For automatic entrances. Include plans,elevations,sections,details,hardware mounting heights,additional accessories and attachments to other work. D. Samples:color samples of exposed fmish as required. E. Manufacturers Field Reports:Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified technician of inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA A 156.19 after completion of installation. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals:Provide manufacturers operating,owners and maintenance manuals for each item specified as required in Division 01,Closeout Submittals. 1.7 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 10 years minimum of documented experience in manufacturing door equipment similar to that indicated within this specification with a proven record of successful service performance.A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM. B. Installer Qualifications:Installers,trained by the prim ary product manufacturers,with a minimum 5 years documented experience installing and maintenance of units similar in material,design,and extent to that indicated in this specification and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance.Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units by AAADM required for this Project C. Source Limitations for Automatic Operators: Obtain each type of automatic door operator and senor components specified in this section from single source from single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories:Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. E. Power-Operated Door Standard:ANSI/BHMA A 156.19 Currentyear. F. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means ofegress. 1.8 Project Conditions A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings to receive automatic entrances by field measurements before fabrication. Davis&Davis,Inc. Automatic Door Operators—Add#2 08713-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.9 Coordination A. Coordinate door operators with doors,frames,and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand, function,and fmish.Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of project. B. Electrical System Roughing-in:Coordinate layout and installation of automatic power door operatorwith connections to power supplies and access-control system. 1.10 Warranty A. Automatic Door Operators to be free ofdefects in material and workmanship fora period of Two(2)yews from the date of substantial completion. B. During the warranty period a factory trained technician shall preform service and affect repairs.A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form submitted to the owner. C. During the warranty period all warranty work shall be performed during normal working hours. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturer(Basis of Design) A. dorm akaba•Reamstown,PA• 1-844-SPEC-NOW(1-844-773-2669)•Website:www.dormakaba.us• Email:specnow@dorma.com B. Substitutions:As per Project Manual requirements. 2.2 Automatic Swing Door Operator A. Model:doimakaba,ED Series ED250(Basis of Design)An Integrated,self-learning automatic swing door operator with an advanced CPU,a multistage gearbox with realtime adaptive software and available user interface. 1. Automatic Door Configuration: a. Configuration:Single swing door or pair of doors swinging. b. Traffic Pattern:as shown on drawings c. Mounting:Surfaceapplied B. Control Features 1. Power-hold Close 2. Built in Lock Delay 3. On-Off-Hold Open switch control to control door function,(Automatic-Hold Open-Exit Only) 4. On-Off Power Switch 5. Fire Alarm Integration 6. Field Adjustable Handing 7. Push and Go 8. Power Assist Opening Activation 9. Intergraded Connections for Monitored Safety Sensors and other accessories. 10. Integrated access control Davis&Davis,Inc. Automatic Door Operators—Add#2 08713-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Door Control Features 1. Wind Load and Stack Pressure microprocessor monitored with power boost to ensure secure opening and closing in changing conditions. 2. Door Weight Max. -ED2506001bs. D. Header Size:Fine headerheightat 2 3/4"by 5-1/8"depth. 2.3 Activation Devices A. Activation Device: 1. Push plate: Hardwired4 3/4"square stainless steelpushplate engraved with"Push to Open"with a handicap logo. 2.4 Electrical A. Electrical 115 V AC+/-10%50/60Hz 6.6A max. 2.5 Aluminum Finishes A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Anodized Finish: 1. Clear Anodic Finish:AAMA 611,AA-M 12C22A31,Class I I,0.010 mm. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine doors and frames with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,wall and floor construction and other conditions affectingperformance of automatic entrances. B. Examine roughing in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. General: Do not install damaged components Fit framejoints to produce hairline joints free of buns and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp orrack offramingmembers and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers,carrier assemblies,tracks,operating brackets,and guides level and true to location with a nchorage for p ermanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 16 Sections including fire detection system. Davis&Davis,Inc. Automatic Door Operators—Add#2 08713-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 D. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"to provide seal between the operator housing and wall surface.installation. E. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and each sidelight as required by ANSIBHMA A 156.19 3.3 Field Quality Control A. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of automatic doors. 1. Factory trained and AAADM certified representative shall test and inspect each automatic door to determine compliance ofthe installed system to ANSI/BHMA A 156.19 3.4 Adjusting A. Adjust door operators and controls for smooth and safe operation. 3.5 Cleaning and Protection A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by automatic operator installation promptly after installation. 3.6 Demonstration A. Engage a factory authorized representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain safe operation of automatic entrances. END OF SECTION 08713 Davis&Davis,Inc. Automatic Door Operators—Add#2 08713-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 08900 FIXED LOUVERS PART! -GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Related Sections: 1. Fixed,extruded-aluminum louvers. B. See Division 15 Sections for louvers that area part ofmechanical equipment. 1.2 Performance Requirements A Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within lim its and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure as required for the project(150 lbs./sq. ft.[7182 Pa]maximum pressure)acting inward or outward. C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide buyers complying with requirements specified,as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided,except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. D. Miami-Dade protocols: Louver design shall pass the following tests. 1. PA 201-94 Large Missile Impact. 2. PA 202-94 Uniform Pressure(for±150psfwind load). 3. PA 203-94 Cyclic Wind Pressure. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal,include printed catabg pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and b lade profiles,angles,and spacing. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. Davis&Davis,Inc. Fixed Louvers 08900-1 1 00%CONSTRUCTI ON DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 D .Submittal: Comply with stnictura1 performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Note structural design load on drawings. E. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L. 1.4 WARRANTY: Standard manufacturer warranty PART H-PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 M,Alloy 6063-T5. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M,Alloy 3003 with temper as required for forming. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. For fastening aluminum,300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 2.2 Fabrication,General A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances,adjoining material tolerances,and perimeter sea lantj oints. B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with welds concealed from view veelds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louverassembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.3 Fixed,Extruded-Aluminum Louvers A Horizontal High Performance Blade Hurricane Louver: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Architectural Louvers (\v vvvv.a rch louvers.com, phone: 888-568-8371) by Harry, LLC; Model E6WF. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the specified product or comparable product by one of the following: a. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in acconlance with Section 01 -Product Substitution Procedures. 2. LouverFrameDepth: 6 inches(150 mm) 3. Louver Blade Depth:4 inches(100mm) 4. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle. 5. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch(2.03 mm). 6. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 82 sq.ft.(0.76 sq.m)for 48-inch-(1220-mm-)wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-)high louver. b. Air Performance: Not more than 020-inch wg (50-Pa) static pressure drop at 700 fpm (3.6-m/s)free-area velocity. c. Wind-Driven Rain Perfomiance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of 3 inches(75 nun)per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph(13 m/s)at a core- area intake velocity of 680 fpm(3.5 m/s). Davis&Davis,Inc. Fixed Louvers 08900-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 8. Miami-Dade County Approval:Mark units with approval number 2.4 Louver Screens A .General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. C. Louver Screening:Same kind of metal as indicated for louver. 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum,16 x 18 square mesh,0.011-inch ire. 2.5 Aluminum Finishes A .High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pre-treat,and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Locate and place louvers and vents level,plumb,and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather-tight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,as indicated. D .Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E .Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint. END OF SECTION 08900 Davis&Davis,Inc. Fixed Louvers 08900-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) DIVISION 9 - FINISHES (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09250 GYP BOARD PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 Description A. Work included: 1. Gupsum drywall is required ceiling surfaces where scheduled or indicated on the drawings. 2. Related Work Described Elsewhere: a. Miscellaneous carpentry Section 06105. 1.2 Quality Assurance B. Qualifications of Installers: 1. Use only skilled and experienced gypsum drywall installers for laying up the gypsum board, fastening,taping and finishing. 2. In the acceptance orrejection of installed gypsum drywall,no allowance will be made for la c k of skill on the part of the installers. B. Manufacturer's recommendations: C. The Manufacturers'recommended methods of installations shall be the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual installation methods used in this work. 1.3 Submittals A. Manufacturer's recommendations: B. Submit two copies of the manufacturer'current method of installation for each item. 1.4 Product Handling A. Protection: keep materials dry and in a conditioned space away from other tracks. B. Protect gypsum drywall materials,the installed work and materials of other trades before, during and after installation. C. Replacements: D. In the event of damage,immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Interior Gypsum Panels A. Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end buttjoints. Davis&Davis,Inc. Gypsum Wallboard 09250-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. CEILINGS: Gypsum Ceiling Board:ASTM C 36,5/8"thickness,with manufacturer's standard edges.(Sag-resistance type for general ceiling surfaces.) C. WALLS: Gypsum Wallboard:Paperless Interior Drywall ASTM CI629,D3273 and E136, 5/8" thickness with taped edges.Dens Armor Plus High-Performance Interior Panel by Georgia Pacific. 2.2 Joint System A. General: B. A compatible system as recommended by the manufacturer ofthe gypsum panels. C. Components: 1. A single compound may be used for embedment of tape, skim coating, and finishing if recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum panels. 2.3 Fasteners A. Length and pattern recommended by the m anufacturer of the gypsum panels. 1. Wood trusses:Annularringnails. 2.4 Texture A. "Orange Peel"Texture to be used. 2.5 Water A. Clean,fresh,and free from deleterious amounts of foreign material. 2.6 Other Materials A. Materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of gypsum drywall:as selected by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 Surface Conditions A. Inspection: 1. I nspectthe installed work ofothertrades and verify that such work is com pleteto the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that gypsum drywall may be installed in accordance with the origin al design, pertinent codes and regulations,and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies: 2. In the event of discrepancy, do not proceed with installation until such discrepancies have been fully resolved. Davis&Davis,Inc. Gypsum Wallboard 09250-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3.2 Installation A. General: 1. Install all panels plumb,level,and with vertical joints on bearings. B. Cutting: 1. Cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing,working from the face side 2. Smooth cut ends and edges of panels to obtain a smooth joint. 3. Make holes and cut-outs by sawing or by such other methods as will not fracture the core or tear the covering and with such accuracy that plates,escutcheons,or trim will cover the edges. 4. The use of"score-and-knockout"method will not be permitted. C. Fastening: 1. Properly space fasteners in careful accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements.Drive head slightly below the surface without breaking paper cover. 2. Loosely butt joints to be taped,firmly butt joints to be untreated. 3. Stagger end joints and joints between panels. D. Ceilings: 1. Installpriorto installing walls where possible. 3.3 Taping and Finishing A. Environmental Conditions:Minimum temperature:55 degrees F. B. Level of finish andpreparation: 1. Level 4,ASTM C840 and GA—214-96 C. First Coat: 1. Spread compound evenly overjoints. 2. Fill joint recesses and metal trim. 3. Center reinforcing tape on joint and press into fresh compound,wiping down with sufficient pressure to remove excess compound but leaving sufficient compound under tape for proper bound. 4. Feather edges and leave surface free from blisters and tape wrinkles. 5. Apply corn pound to fastener recesses,leaving flush with adjacent surfaces. 6. Fold reinforcing tape along its centerline and apply to interior angles,following same procedure as for joints. D. Second Coat: 1. Lightly sand dry compound with fine sandpaper to remove irregularities. 2. Apply second coat of compound tojoints,feathering approximately three inches beyond edges of tape. 3. Apply second coat to fastener recesses,allow to thy. E. Third Coat: 1. Lightly sand dry compound with fine sandpaper to remove irregularities. 2. Apply final skim coat,feathering out approximately two inches beyond second coat. Davis&Davis,Inc. Gypsum Wallboard 09250-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3. Apply third coat to fastener recesses,metal trim and interior angles;allow to dry. F. "Orange Peel Texture"Finish: 1. Where orange peel finish is called for on the drawings,and where no other finish is called for on the drawings,uniformly apply orange peel finish. 2. Neatly trim interface of orange peel finish and other gypsum wall board fmishes. 3.4 Cleaning Up A. Maintain premises in a neat and orderly condition.In the event of spilling or splashing compound onto other surfaces,immediately remove material and all trace ofresidue. END OF SECTION 09250 Davis&Davis,Inc. Gypsum Wallboard 09250-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09513 ACCOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general conditions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes 1.Acoustical ceiling panels 2.Exposed grid suspension system 3.Wire hangers,fasteners,main runners,cross tees,and wall angle moldings 4.Perimeter Trim B.Related Selections 1.Section 09510-Acoustical Ceilings 2.Divisions 15-HVAC Air Distribution 3.Division 16-Electrical C.Alternates 1. Prior Approval:Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents,proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN(10)working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products that have not been approved by Addenda,the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation. 2.Submittals that do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section,including but not necessarily limited to,the following:Single source materials suppliers(if specified in Section l.5);Underwriters'Laboratories Classified Acoustical performance;Panel design,size,composition,color,and finish;Suspension system component profiles and sizes;Compliance with the referenced standards. 1.3 REFERENCES A.American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1.ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet,Cold Rolled,Carbon,Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability 2.ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Carbon Steel Wire 3.ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process Davis and Davis,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-1 100%CONSTRUC TI ON DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 4.ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method 5.ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 6.ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels 7.ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 8.ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 9.ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material A.Arm strong Fire Guard Products 10.ASTM E 580 Installation of Metal Suspension Systems in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint 11.ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems 12.ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum 13.ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products B.International Building Code C.ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004,Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality D.NFPA 70 National Electrical Code E.ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers,Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures F.International Code Council-Evaluation Services-AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components G.International Code Council-Evaluation Services Report-Seismic Engineer Report 1.ESR 1308-Annstrong Suspension Systems H.International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials-Seismic Engineer Report 1.0244-Armstrong Single Span Suspension System I.California Department of Public HeahhCDPH/EHLB Emission Standard Method Version 1.12010 J.LEED-Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design is a set of rating systems for the design, construction,operation,and maintenance of green buildings. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Continuous/Wall-to-Wall 1.5 SUBMITTALS Davis and Davis,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A.Product Data:Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required. B.Samples:Minim urn 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel;8 inch long samples ofexposed wall molding and suspension system,including main runner and 4 foot cross tees. C.Shop Drawings:Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be coordinated with,or supported by the ceilings. D.Certifications:Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements,including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance,each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification ofNRC,CAC,and AC. E.If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton,subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent orNVLAP approved laboratory for testing,atthe architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed,disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Single-Source Responsibility:Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. 1.Fire Performance Characteristics:Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 2.Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows,tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification. 3.Fire Resistance:As follows tested per ASTM E 119 and listed in the appropriate floor or roof design in the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory B.Acoustical Panels:As with other architectural features located atthe ceiling,may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or accelerate theactivation ofthe sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer,NFPA 13,or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present. C.Coordination of Work:Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including,but not limited to building insulation,gypsum board,light fixtures,mechanical systems,electrical systems,and sprinklers. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original,unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space wherethey will be protected against damage from moisture,direct sunlight,surface contamination,and other causes. B.Before installing acoustical ceiling units,permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Davis and awls,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C.Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Space Enclosure: Hum iGuard Plus Ceilings:Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dustand debris Products with H um iGuard Plus performance and hot dipped galvanized steel,aluminum or stainless steel suspension systems can be installed up to 120°F(49°C)and in spaces before the building is enclosed,where HVAC systems are cycled or not operating.Cannot be used in exterior applications where standing water is present or where moisture will come in direct contact with the ceiling. 1.9 ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION WASTE DISPOSAL A.Ceiling material being reclaim ed must be kept dry and free from debris B.Contact the Arm strong Recycle Center a consultant will verify the condition ofthe m aterial and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling.The Arm strong consultant with provide assistance to fac ilitate the recycling of the ceiling. C.Recycling m ay qualify for LEED Credits: a.LEED 2009-Category 4:Material and Resources(MR) i. Credit MRc2:Construction Waste Management b.LEEDv4-MRp2-Construction Waste Management Planning Qualifies as a material stream(non- structural)targeted for diversion. Ceilings will be source-separated and diverted through the Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Program. c.LEEDv4-MRc5- i. Option 1:Divert ceilings to qualify for one ofthe 3 material streams(50%) ii. Option 2:Divert ceilings to qualify for one of the 4 material streams(75%) 1.10 WARRANTY A.Acoustical Panel:Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer,agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include,but are not limited to the following: 1.Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping 2.Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects B.Warranty Period: 1.Acoustical panels:Ten(10)years from date of substantial completion. Davis and Davis,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.Grid:Ten(10)years from date of substantial completion. 3.Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or Hum iGuard Max performance supplied by one source manufacturer is Thirty(30)years from date of substantial completion. C.The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Ownerm ay have under other provisions ofthe Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A.Extra Materials:Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1.Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed. 2.Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Ceiling Panels:(Basis of Design) 1.Arm strong World Industries,Inc. B. Suspension Systems:(Basis of Design) 1.Arm strong World Industries,Inc. C:Perimeter Systems:(Basis of Design) 1.Armstrong World Industries,Inc. 2.2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A.Acoustical Panels Type Tundra 1.Surface Texture:Fine 2.Composition:Mineral Fiber 3.Color:White 4.Size:24INx 24IN 5.Edge Profile:Lay-in 6.Noise ReductionCoefficient(NRC):ASTM C 423;Classified with UL label on product carton 0.50. 7.Ceiling Attenuation Class(CAC):ASTM C 1414;Classified with UL label on product carton 40. 8.Sabin:N/A 9.Articulation Class(AC): 10.Flame Spread:ASTM E 1264;Fire Resistive 11.Light Reflectance White Panel:ASTM E 1477;0.90 12.Dimensional Stability:HumiGuard Plus Davis and Davis,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 13.Recycle Content:Post-Consumer-1%Pre-Consumer Waste-55% 2.3.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.Components:Main beams and cross tees,base metal and end detail,fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed,capping prefmished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. a.Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty b.Color:White andmatch the actual color of the selected ceiling tile,unless noted otherwise. c.Acceptable Product:Prelude XL Fire Guard Lay-in as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries B.Attachment Devices:Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635,Table 1,Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. C.Wire for Hangers and Ties:ASTM A 641,Class 1 zinc coating,soft annealed,with a yield stress load of at least time three design load,but not less than 12gauge. D.Edge Moldings and Trim: 7807-10ft Wall Molding PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete,terrazzo,plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out,unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception:HumiGuard Max Ceilings) 3.2 PREPARATION A.Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders,and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Follow manufacturer installation instructions. B.Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having j urisdiction. C.Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced4-0 on centeralongthe length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight. D.Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. Davis and Davis,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 E.For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces. F.Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system,with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Replace damaged and broken panels. B.Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings,including trim,edge moldings,and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of m inor fmish damage. Remove any ceiling products that cannot be successfully cleaned and or repaired.Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage. C.Before disposing of ceilings,contact the Aim strong Recycling Center at 877-276-7876,select option#1 then #8 to review with a consultant the condition and location of building where the ceilings will be removed.The consultant will verify the condition ofthe material and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling. The Aim strong consultant with provide assistance to facilitate the recycle o f the ceiling. END OF SECTION 09512 Davis and Davis,Inc. Acoustical Ceilings 09513-7 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENTTILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floortile.(LVT) 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:For each type of product B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data:Foradhesives,indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives,indicating compliance with requirements for low- em itting m aterials. 3. Laboratory Test Reports:For flooring products,indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions,built-in furniture,cabinets,and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. D. Samples:Full-size units of each color and pattern offloortile required. E. Product Schedule:For floortile 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data:For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data:For each type of floortile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents Davis and Davis,Inc. Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENTTILE FLOORING B. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof,of each type,color,and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:A qualified installer with a minimum of 5 years commercial resilient flooring installation experience,and who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Mockups:Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient ba se and accessories. a. Size:Minimum 100 sq.ft.9.3 sq.m for each type,color,and pattern in locations directed by Architect. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements,approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)or more than 90 deg F(32 deg C).Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.9 FI EL D CONDI TIONS A. HVAC system should be operational and running for a minimum of 7 days prior to resilient tile installation and remain running after resilient tile installation. B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 65 deg F (18 degC)or more than 85 deg (29 degC),in spaces to receive floortile during the following tim e periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. Permanently after installation. C. Close spaces to traffic during floortile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic, all heavy rolling loads, and point loads for 48 to 72 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floortile after other finishing operations,including painting,have been completed. Davis and Davis,Inc. Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09650 RESILI ENTTI LE FLOORING 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Resilient Tile;Manufacturer agrees to repair or replacedefectiv e material with in specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include installer's workmanship. 2. Resilient tile must be installed and maintained according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Warranty Period: a. Manufacturing Defects Warranty:10 years. b. Limited Commercial Wear Warranty: 10years. c. Underbed Warranty:10 years. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:For resilient tile flooring,as determined by testing identical product s accordingto ASTM E 648 orNFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification:Class I,not lessthan0.45 W/sq.cm. B. Flooring products shall comply with the requirements ofthe California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation ofVolatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE-Uncommon Ground A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide Shaw Contract Group; Uncommon Ground or comparable product by one ofthe following: 1. Shaw Contract Group B. Tile Standard:ASTM F 1700. 1. Class:Class I II,printed film vinyl tile. 2. Type:B(embossed surface). C. Overall Thickness:0.118 inch(3.0 mm). D. Wear Layer Thickness:0.020 inch(0.5 mm). E. Size:6 by 36 inches(152 by914mm). F. Colors and Patterns:To be determined from standard selections Davis and Davis,Inc. Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 100%CONSTRUCTI ON DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09650 RESILI ENTTI LE FLOORING G. Test Data: 1. Slip Resistance:ASTM D2047,ADA Compliant. 2. Residual Indentation,ASTM F 1914 minimum 3. Flexibility,ASTM F 137:Passes. 4. Static Load:ASTM F 970.1500 psi 5. Dimensional Stability:ASTM F 2199 6. Resistance to Heat,ASTM F 1514:Passes. 7. Resistance to Light,ASTM F 1515:Passes. 8. Resistance to Chemicals,ASTM 925:Passes. 9. Resistance to Fungi,ASTM G 21:Passes,Rate zero(Rate zero:Fungi Free). 10. Antibacterial Activity,AATCC 147:Passes,resists the propagation ofbacteria. 11. Radiant Flux,ASTM E 648:greater than 0.45 watts/cm,NFPA Class!. 12. Smoke Density,ASTM E 662:less than450,Passes. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds:Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufact urer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives:Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of5 0 g/L or less. 2. Adhesive shall comply with thetestingandproductrequirements ofthe California Department of Public Health's"Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, neutral pH liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance ofthe Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks,ridges,depressions,scale,and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion offloortile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Davis and Davis,Inc. Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING B. Concrete Substrates:Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds,sealers,and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax,oil,or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer.Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing,but not less than 7 ormore than 10 pH. 4. Moisture Testing:Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations,but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates are below 90 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound;remove bumps and ridges to produce a unifoan and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation,m ove resilient floor tile and install a tion materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation,sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floortile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls,discounting minor offsets,so tiles at opposite edges of room are ofequal width.Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-halftile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles Perpendicular to long axis or building. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged,if so numbered.Discard broken,cracked,chipped,or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in a stagger pattern with grain in one direction. D. Scribe, cut,and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture,cabinets,pipes,outlets,and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces,door reveals,closets,and similar openings.Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floortiles as marked on substrates.Use chalk or othernonpennanent marking device. G. Install floortiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts,building expansion joint covers,and similar items in finished floor areas.Maintain overall continuity ofcolor a nd pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles.Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers andto cover perimeters. Davis and Davis,Inc. Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09650 RESI LI ENTTI LE FLOORING H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids,raising and puckering at joints,telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from man,marks,indentations,and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Optional Floor Polish:Remove soil,adhesive,and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before a pply in g liquid floor polish. E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09650 Davis and Davis,Inc. Resilient Tile Flooring 09650-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Section 09653 Resilient Flooring Base 1 General A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby madea part ofthis Section of the Specifications. 1.2 Description of Work A. Work Included:Provide labor,materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section,including but not limited to the following: 1. Resilient wall base and accessories. 2. Substrate preparation. B. Related Work:The following items are not included in this Section and are specified underthe designated Sections: 1. Division 3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete substrate;slab surface tolerances; 2. Division 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY for plywood substrate and surface tolerances. C. References(Industry Standards): 1. ASTM International(ASTM): a. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials b. ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source c. ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials d. ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete to Receive Resilient Flooring e. ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base f. ASTM F386 Standard TestMethodforThicknessofResilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces 2. Canadian ULC Standards(CAN/ULC): a. CAN/ULC-S102.2 Surface Burning Characteristics 3. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): a. NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source b. NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials c. NFPA 255 Test Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.3 Submittals A. General:Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions ofthe Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet,care&maintenance document,submittal and/or warranty for each material and accessory proposed for use. C. Samples:Submit representative samples of each product specified for verification. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications:Provide resilient flooring materials manufactured in the United States of America by a firm with a minimum of 10 years'experience with resilient flooring materials of type equivalentto those specified. 1. Manufacturer's quality management system musthave ISO 9001:2000 approval. 2. Provide resilient flooring products,including wall base,accessories and subfloor prepalation products from one manufacturer to ensurecolor matching and compatibility. 3. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing technical training and technical field service representation. B. Installer Qualifications:Installer must be professional,licensed,insured and acceptable to manufacturer of resilient flooring materials.Project Managers or Field Supervisors must be INSTALL(International Standards&Training Alliance) certified,CFI(Certified Floorcovering Installers)Certified and/or an FCICA(The Flooring Contractors Association)CI M (Certified Installation Manager)for the requirements of the project. C. Sustainable Design Requirements: 1. Construction waste take back program for the purpose of reducing jobsite waste by taking back uninstalled waste flooring.Information is available at https://roppe.com/impact/. 2. Wall base and accessories that are easily cleaned and do not require coatings and stripping,or use chemicals that may be hazardous to human health. 3. Supply all required products that are CA 01350 compliant Davis&Davis, Inc. Resilient Flooring Base 09653-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 4. Wall base and accessories that are free of materials known to beteratogenic,m utagenic or carcinogenic. 5. Wall base and accessories that contain no polyvinyl chloride orplasticizers. 6. Wall base and accessories that contain no halogens. 7. Wall base and accessories that contain no asbestos. 1.5 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Deliver materials in labeled packages.Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.Protect from damage due to weather,excessive temperatures,and construction operations. B. Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to the required temperature for 48-hours prior to installation. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Maintain temperature and humidity at service levels or the ambient temperature must remain steady(±10°F)and be between 65°F and 85°F for at lea st 4 8-hours priorto,during and after installation.The ambient relative humidity is recommended to be between 40%and 65%RH;avoid dew point conditions. 1.7 Warranty A. Provide manufacturer's standard lim ited commercial warranty to cover manufacturing defects. 1.8 Acceptable Manufacturer A. Basis-of-Design: Roppe Corporation,1602N Union St.,Fostoria,OH 44830.P:(800)537-9527 B. Substitutions:As per Division 1. 1.9 Resilient Wall Base A. Rubber Wall Base: 1. Product Name: Pinnacles 2. Material Specification: ASTM F 1861 Type TS-rubber,vulcanized th ermoset Group 1- solid,(horn ogenous) Style-Keep(with carpet),Style C-Butt-to(with vinyl floor) 3. Material Height: 4"(101.6 mm) 4. Material Thickness: ASTM F386 1/8"(3.2 mm) 5. Material Length: 48"sections(1.22 m),120'(36.58m) 6. Limited Warranty: 1 year,Manufacturing Only 7. Material&Composition: 100%vulcanized homogenous rubber compound comprised of a premium blend&SBR rubber materials. 8. Color: 70 standard color(TBD) 9. Surface Burning Class B ASTM E84/NFPA 255 10. Flammability/Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E648/NFPA 253 Class 1 (>0.45 Watts per sq.cm.),.082 W/cm2 11. Smoke Density: ASTM E662/NFPA 258 Passes(<450),157(flaming)-197(non-flaming) 12. Surface Burning: CAN/ULC-S 102.2 FSR 50,SDS 175 13. Substrate Preparation: Per ASTM F710 and Roppe Technical Data Sheet 1.10 Installation Product: A. Acrylic Adhesives 1. Product Name: C-630 Davis&Davis,Inc. Resilient Flooring Base 09653-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Product Description: Water-Based Contact Adhesive Product Usage: For interior wall base installations that require a more aggressive bond over porous or non-porous substrates. 1.11 Maintenance Products: A. Cleaners 2. Product Name: NC-900 Product Description: All-Purpose pH Neutral Cleaner Product Usage For initial,daily or routine maintenance and spot cleaning. 3. Product Name: PR 930 Product Description: Performance Finish Remover Product Usage: For removal of finish that has been accidentally or erroneously ap- plied to material. 1.12 General Contractor A. General Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Supply a safe,climate controlled building and subflooras detailed in Roppe Technical Data Sheets. 2. Ensure substrate m eets the requirements of ASTM F710,Roppe Technical Data Sheets and Excelsior Technical Data Sheets. 3. Ensure horizontal concrete substrates have been tested per ASTM F2 170 and/or ASTM F 1 869 to confirm that concrete relative humidity and/or moisture vapor em ission rates are within tolerance of the approved adhesive. 4. Confirm the porosity of all substrates to ensure proper adhesive usage. 5. Provide a secure storage area that is maintained permanently or temporarily at normal operating temperature and humidity conditions(except walk in freezers or sim ilar)between 65°F and 85°F and between 40%and 65%relative humidity,for at least 48-hours prior to and during the application of the flooring,so the flooring contractor can acclimate the flooring materials per manufacturer's instructions. 6. Provide an installation area that is weather tight and maintained either permanently or temporarily at ambient service temperature and humidity(except walk in freezers or similar),normal operatingtemperature and humidity conditions (except walk in freezers or similar)between 65°F and 85°F and between 40%and 65%relative humidity,for at least 48-hours priorto and during the application ofthe flooring per the manufacturer's instructions. 7. Ensure areas with direct prolonged exposure to sunlight are protected with protective UVA/UVB restrictive coatings or films. 8. Areas of the flooring that are subject to direct sunlight through doors or windows should have them covered using blinds,curtains,cardboard or similar for the time of the installation and 72-hours after the installation to allow the adhesive to cure.Note:These areas should be installed using wet adhesives only. 9. Protect newly installed flooring with construction grade paper or protective boards,such as Masonite or Ram Board, to prevent flooring damage,especially by other trades.Limit usage and foot traffic according to the adhesive's requirements.When moving appliances or heavy furniture,protect flooring from scuffmg and tearing using temporary floor protection. 10. Ensure furniture casters are madeof a soft material and have a contact point of at least 1"in width to limit indentation and flooring damage.All rolling chairs or seating must have a resilient flooring chair pad installed over the finished floorto protect floor covering.All fixed furniture legs must have permanent felt or soft rubber floor protectors installed on all contact points to reduce indentation.Floor protectors must have a flat contact point of at least 1"in width and must cover the entire bottom surface of the furniture leg. 11. Conduct initial maintenance priorto final usageperthe Roppe Care&Maintenance Documents.Do not conduct initial maintenance until adhesivehas cured per the adhesive technical data. B. Flooring Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Provide trained installers that are professional,licensed,insured and acceptable to manufacturer of resilient flooring materials. 2. Ensure installers or installation teams meet one of the following requirements: a. Have completed INSTALL(International Standards&Training Alliance)or CFI (Certified Floorcovering Installers)training programs and/or are certified by INSTALL or CFI. b. Are being supervised by Project Managers or Field Supervisors that are INSTALL(International Standards& Training Alliance)certified,CFI(Certified Floorcovering Installers)Certified and/or an FCICA(The Flooring Contractors Association)CI M(Certified Installation Manager). 3. Follow all requirements in the appropriate Roppe and/or Excelsior Technical Data Sheets,Care &Maintenance Documents,Warranties and other technical documents or instructions. Davis&Davis,Inc. Resilient Flooring Base 09653-3 1 00%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.13 Examination A. General:Follow guidelines laid out in Division 01, B. Verification of Conditions: Inspect all substrates to ensure they are clean,smooth,permanently dry,flat,and structurally sound. 1.14 Substrate Preparation A. General:Follow guidelines laid out in Division 01,ensure substrate or subfloor meets manufacturers guidelines are the responsibility of the general contractor. B. Preparation:Ensure substrate meets the requirements of ASTM F710,RoppeTechnical Data Sheets and Excelsior Technical Data Sheets. Substrates must be free of visible water or moisture, dust, sealers, paint, sweeping compounds, curlig compounds,residual adhesives and adhesive removers,concrete hardeners or densifiers,solvents,wax,oil,grease,asphalt, visible alkaline salts or excessive efflorescence,mold,mildew and any other extraneous coating,film,material or foreign matter. 1.15 Installation A. General:Follow all relevant guidelines detailed in Division 01,as well as flooring and adhesive manufacturer's technical data sheets. B. Interface With Other Work:I f caulk ing or sealing is required after installation,please contact the manufacturer fora suitable, matching caulk. 1.16 Cleaning and Maintenance A. General:Clean up installation area and sweep,dust or wipe material to remove any dirt,dust or debris. B. I nitia 1 Maintenance:Conduct initial maintenance per the manufacturer's Care&Maintenancedocuments 1.17 Closeout Activities A. General:Follow all federal,state and local requirements and Division B. Protection:Protect newly installed material with construction grade paper or protective boards,such as Masonite or Ram Board,to protect material from damage by other trades.Limit usage and foot traffic according to th e adhesive's requiremen— When moving appliances or heavy furniture,protectwa 11 base from scuffmg andtearing using temporary floor protection END OF SECTION 09653 Davis&Davis,Inc. Resilient Flooring Base 096534 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION09671 BREATHABLE DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOORING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish necessary material,labor,and equipment required to prepare designated areas and install a Breathable Decoiative Quartz Flooring System. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Drawings and general provisions of contract including General and Special Conditions and Division I, excepting special Submittal and Quality Assurance provisions in this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer's Qualifications Obtain Breathable Decorative Quartz Floo ring System materials from a single manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years verifiable experience providing materials of thetype specified in this section. B.Contractor's Qualifications Installation must be performed by a manufacturer approved contractor with skilled mechanics having not less than three years satisfactory experience in the installation of the type of system as specified in this section,and must be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System. C.Floor System Thickness Verification At the owner's discretion and under his supervision the contractor shall take(4)-1"random cores per 1,000 sq.ft.through the system into the substrate to verify proper system thickness.Cored areas less than specified thickness shall be removed and replaced or increased in thickness by the installing contractor,in a manner that does not affectthe performance or integrity ofthe system.Cored areas that comply with the recommended system thickness shall be built-up to match the surrounding surface elevation prior to applyingthe seal coat(s).Cores taken and patched will be noticeable,therefore,cores should be taken from areas whereaesthetics are less critical. 1.4 WARRANTY A.The contractor and the manufacturer shall furnish a standard guarantee of the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System for a period of one year after installation.The labor and material guarantee shall include loss of bond and wear-through to the concrete substrate from normal use. B.Not included in the warranty are damage due to structural design deficiencies including but not limited to slab cracking from lateral,vertical or rotational movement,and gouging or other damage due to fork lifts,other equipment,delamination caused by vapor transmission,Acts of God,or other elements beyond the scope of protection of this system nor causes not related to the system materials. Davis and Davis,Inc. Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System-Restrooms 09671-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C.In case ofa warranty claim,the owner will notify them anufacturer and contractor in writing within 30 days of the first appearance ofproblems covered under this warranty.Theownerwill provide free and unencumbered access to the area during normal working hours for warranty rework.Property protection is also the owner's responsibility.Remedy is limited to direct repair of the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A.System Data Submit manufacturer's specifications on cured system and individual components ofthe Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System,including physical properties and performance properties and tests described in part2.01 B and submit Material Safety Data Sheets.Each individual component ofthe system will be evaluated on the basis of these standards.For any tests not listed in the manufacturer's standard nationally published data,the manufacturerm ust supply the missing data accompanied by the independent testing laboratory's test results which prove compliance in accordance with the referenced standard(s). Furnish 5 sets of this information.Manufacturer's standard color chart shall also be submitted and must afford the owner color selection from at least 20 standard colors and computerized custom color matching shalt be available upon request.Furnish 5 sets ofthis information. B.The contractor shall submit a 6"x 6"cured system sample which the contractor has made for verification purposes and finish texture approval. Provide 5 samples,each with a different degree of slip resistance. The selected sample shall be reta inedto verify against the installed product. C.Contractor Experience The contractor shall furnish a list of projects using either specified material or equivalent that they have installed during the last 5 years.Information shall include:project name,square footage,owner,contact name with owner's address and phone number.Also,the contractor shall furnish resumes detailing the experience of key project personnel including supervisors and mechanics. D.Substitutions will be considered only when submitted in accordance with the Project Manual. E.The contractor shall submit a copy of the manufacturer's packing slip,tagged for this specific job,along with calculations,signed by an officer of the primary material supplier demonstrating that the quantity of material furnished for the proj e ctwill achieve the specified coverage and m it thickness. 1.6 MATERIAL DELI VERY,HANDLING,AND STORAGE A.Primary system materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's undamaged,unopened containers. Each container shall be clearly marked with the following: -Product name(s)and/ornumber(s) •Manufacturer's name •Component designation(A,B,etc.) •Product Mix Ratio •Health and Safety Information •CHEMTREC Emergency Response Information B.Provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials by methods which prevent damage. Davis and Davis,Inc. Breathable DecorativeQuartz Flooring System-Restrooms 09671-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C.The contractor shall promptly inspect direct jobsite material deliveries to assure that quantities are correct,comply with requirements and are not damaged. D.The contractor shall be responsible for materials furnished by him,and he shall replace,at his own expense,such materialsthatare found to be defective in manufacture orthat have become damaged in transit,handling or storage. E.Store material(s)in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels intact and legible. Maintain temperatures within the required range.Do not usematerials which exceed themanufacturer's maximum recommended shelf life. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A.Prior to placement ofthe building slab the flooring system contractor shall meet with the concrete contractor and general contractor to verify acceptable building slab finish for the specified flooring system. B.The contractor shall visit the j obsite prior to beginning the installation ofthe Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System to evaluate substrate condition,including substrate moisture content,andthe extent of repairs required,if any.Concrete substrates shall be tested to verify that themoisture content of the substrate does not exceed Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System manufacturers'recommendations. C..The contractor should exercise care during surface preparation and system installation to protect surrounding substrates and surfaces,as well as in-place equipment The contractor shall prepare the substrate to remove laitance and open the surface.This shall be achieved by light brush grit blasting. Surface profile achieved shall be sim ila r to medium grit sandpaper and free from bond-inhibiting contaminants.Costs incurred that are associated with damage from negligence or inadequate protection shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor. D.Sub floor tolerances are specified in accordance with ACI 302.Each drain in the installation area must be working and raised or lowered to the actual finished elevation of the Urethane Decorative Flooring System. E.System mustbe protected by the General Contractor or,as a separate bid item,by the installing contractor until it is inspected and turned over to the owner. F.The minimum slab temperature must be conditioned to 40°F before commencing installation,during installation,and for at least 72 hours after installation is complete. G.Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 or more foot-candles in areas where the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System is being installed.It is the recommendation ofthe manufacturer that the permanent lighting be in place and working during the installation. H.Leaks from pipes and other sources mustbe corrected prior to the installation of the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.System Overview The Basis of design is: Davis and Davis,Inc. Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System-Restrooms 096711 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 The General Polymers Fa sTop Ceramic Carpet Flooring System as manufactured by Sherwin-Willams consists of 4080 Binder Resin,with 5035 Neutral Aggregate as slurry,3 746 Self-Leveling Epoxy as bonding coat,grout and seal coat,5900 Ceramic Quartz for broadcast,and cove base 3561v Part A&B with 5900 color quartz aggregateand 3746 topcoat. B.Typical Physical Properties @ 73°F(unless otherwise noted) Typical Physical Properties Pre-Blended Colors, Color Decorative Custom color Blends available Cure Time Recoat 8-12 hours Foot Traffic 18-24 hours Full Service 136-48 hours Abrasion Resistance (20-30 mgs lost ASTM D 4060,CS-17 Wheel,1,000 Cycles Hardness,Shore D 175 ASTM D 2240 Tensile Strength 550-600 psi ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength 5.000 psi ASTM C579 Flexural Strength 13,700 psi ASTM C 580 Impact Resistance Withstands 16 ft.lbs.without cracking, MIL-D-3 134,Sec.4.7.3 delam ination or chipping Part 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION Forthorough instructions regarding preparation of concrete substrates consult General Polymers "Instruction for Concrete Surface Preparation"(Form G-1).Remove all tile and mortar bed as required and shotblast. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.General Apply each component of the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System in compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and strictly adhere to mixing and installation methods, recoat windows,cure times and environmental restrictions.The Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System may be installed directly over non-moving control joints and cracks which have been treated with semi-rigid epoxy and the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System will terminate at the edge of Davis and Davis,Inc. Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System-Restrooms 09671-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 isolation and expansion j oints as designated by the Architect,Engineer or Design Professional.Integral cove base shall be installed where specified in the drawings. Cove Baseto have a feathered top edge. B.Cracks For information pertaining to the treatment of cracks in concrete substrates,consult General Polymers Concrete 102. C.Control Joints For information pertaining to the treatment of control j oints in concrete substrates,consult General Polymers Concrete 103. D.Isolation/Expansionand Other Joints Subject to Movement For information pertaining to the above,consult General Polymers Concrete 105. E. Slurry Installation 4080 Binder Resin 5035 Neutral Aggregate 5900 Color Quartz F.Bonding Coat/Broadcast 3746 Self-Leveling Epoxy 5900 Color Quartz G.Grout Coat 3746 Self-Leveling Epoxy H.Seal Coat 3746 Self-Leveling Epoxy I.Cove Base System 3561 V PartA&B with 5900 color quartz aggregate. 3745 Topcoat. 3.3 CURING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A.Cure Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions,taking care to prevent contamination during stages of the installation and priorto completion of the curing process. B.Protect the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System from damage and wear during other phases of the construction operation,using temporary coverings as recommended by the manufacturer,if required. Remove temporary covering just prior to final inspection.Clean the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System just priorto final inspection,using materials and procedures suitable to the system manufacturer. C.Some cleaners will affectthe color,gloss or texture ofyourpolymerfloorsurfaces.To determine how your cleaner will perform,General Polymers recommends thatyoufirst test each cleaner,in a small area, utilizing yourcleaningtechnique.This precaution will demonstrate the effect of your cleaner and technique.I fno deleterious effects are observed,continue with the procedure.I f deleterious effects do occur,modify the cleaning material and/or procedure.For recommendations regarding types of cleaners, contact the Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System manufacturer. —END OF SECTION— Davis and Davis,Inc. Breathable Decorative Quartz Flooring System-Restrooms 09671-5 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09772 DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: Prefinished polyesterglass reinforced plastic sheets and adhered to unfinished gypsum wallboard. 1. PVC trim. 2. PVC Wall base. B. Products Not Furnished or Installed under This Section: 1. Gypsum substrate board. 2. Resilient Base. 1.2 Related Sections A. Section 09250—Gypsum board. B. Section 06105—Miscellaneous Carpentry C. Section 09910-Painting D. Section 09653-Resilient Wall Base 1.3 References A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications(ASTM) 1. ASTM D 256- Izod Impact Strengths(ft#/in) 2. ASTM D 570- Water Absorption(%) 3. ASTM D 638- Tensile Strengths(psi)&Tensile Modulus(psi) 4. ASTM D 790- Flexural Strengths(psi)&Flexura 1 Modulus(psi) 5. ASTM D 25 83-Barcol Hardness 6. ASTM D5319-Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels. 7. ASTM E 84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit sufficient manufacturer's data to indicate compliance with these specifications, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations of each wall showing location of paneling andtrim members with respect to all discontinuities in the wa 11 elevation. Davis&Davis,Inc. Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09772-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color pattern selection samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns D. Samples for Verification: Submit appropriate section of panel for each finish selected indicating the color,texture,and pattern required. 1. Submit complete with specified applied finish. 2. For selected patterns show complete pattern repeat 3. Exposed Molding and Trim: Provide samples of each type,finish,and color. E. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)for adhesives,sealants and other pertinent m ateria ls prior to their delivery to the site (available as downloads for most Marlite's products at http://www.marlite.com/tech-details.aspx or by contacting Marlite at info marlite.com). 1.5 Quality Assurance A. Conform to building code requirements for interior finish for smoke and flame spread requirements as tested in accordance with: 1. ASTM E 84(Method of test for surfaceburning chaiacteristics of building Materials) a. Wall Required Rating—Class[A][C]. B. Sanitary Standards: System components and finishes to comply with: 1. United States Department o f Agriculture(USDA)requirements for food preparation facilities, incidental contact. 2. Food and Drug Administration(FDA)1999 Food Code 6-101.11. 3. Canadian Food Inspection Agency(CFI A)requirements. 1.6 Delivery,Storage,and Handling A. Deliver materials factory packaged on strong pallets. B. Store panels and trim lying flat,under cover and protected from the elements. Allow panels to acclimate to room temperature(range of 60to 75°F)for48 hours prior to installation. 1.7 Project Conditions A. Environmental Limitations: Building are to be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat (70°)and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work B. During installation and for not less than 48 hours before,maintain an ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation ofadhesive manufacturer. 1. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application ofadhesive as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. 1.8 Warranty A. Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship. Davis&Davis,Inc. Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09772-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Product Basis of Design A. Marlite; 1 Marlite Drive,Dover,OH 44622. 800-377-1221 FAX(330)343-4668 Email: info@marlite.com marlite.com or approved equal. B. Product: 1. Standard FRP 2.2 Panels A. Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D53 19. 1. Coating: Multi-layer print,primer and fmish coats or applied over-layer. 2. Dimensions: a. Thickness-0.090"(2.29mm)nominal b. Width-4'-0" (1.22m)nominal c. Length-8'-0"(2.4m)nominal 3. Tolerance: a. Length and Width: +/-1/8"(3.175mm) b. Square- Not to exceed 1/8"for 8 foot(2.4m)panels B. Properties: Resistant to rot,corrosion,staining,denting,peeling,and splintering. 1. Flexural Strength-1.0 x 104 psi perASTM D 790.(7.0 kilogram-force/square millimeter) 2. Flexural Modulus-3.1 x 105 psi perASTM D 790.(217.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter) 3. Tensile Strength-7.0 x 103 psi per ASTM D 638.(4.9 kilogram-force/squaremillimeter) 4. Tensile Modulus-1.6 x 105 psi perASTM D 638.(112.5 kilogram-force/square millimeter) 5. Water Absorption-0.72%per ASTM D570. 6. Barcol Hardness(scratch resistance)of 35 55 as perASTM D2583. 7. Izod Impact Strength of72 ft.lbs./in ASTM D256 C. Back Surface: Smooth. Imperfections which do not affect functional properties are not cause for rejection. D. Front Finish:Pebble a. Color: 1) Marlite Standard FRP is available in a variety of colors. Colorto be selected from Manufacturers standard colors. b. Fire Rating Class A Fire Rating c. Size: a) 48"x 96"[1.2mx 2.4m]x.090"(3mm)nom. 2.3 Base A. Refer to Section 09653-Resilient Flooring Base Davis&Davis,Inc. Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09772-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.4 Moldings A. PVC Trim: Thin-wall semi-rigid extruded PVC. 1. M 350 Inside Corner,8'length 2. M 360 Outside Corner,8'length 3. M 365 Division,8'length 4. M 370 Edge,8'length 5. V 177135°Inside Corner 8'length 6. V 1 79 13 5°Outside Corner 8'length 7. Match Wall panels B. Outside Corner Guard: 1. M 961 PVC Outside Corner Guard a. Color:Match wall panel,8'length 2.5 Accessories A. Fasteners: Non-staining nylon drive rivets. 1. Match panel colors. 2. Length to suit project conditions. B. Adhesive: Either of the following construction adhesives complying with ASTM C 557. 1. MarliteC-551 FRP Adhesive-Water-resistant,non-flammable adhesive. 2. Marlite C-915 Construction Adhesive-Flexible,water-resistant,solvent based adhesive, formulated for fast,easy application. 3. Titebond Advanced Polymer Panel Adhesive—VOC compliant,non-flammable,environmentally safe adhesive. C. Sealant: 1. Marlite Brand MS-250 Clear Silicone Sealant. 2. Marlite Brand MS-251 White Silicone Sealant. 3. Marlite Brand-Color Match Sealant. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight,surfaces are smooth,uniform, clean and free from foreign matter,nails countersunk,joints and cracks filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 1. Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24"(61 cm)on-center. B. Repair defects prior to installation. 1. Level wall surfaces to panel manufacturer's requirements. Remove protrusions and fill indentations. 3.2 Installation A. Corn ply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Davis&Davis,Inc. Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09772-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1/8"(3 mm)clearance for every 8 foot(2.4m)of panel. 1. Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits,or cut with shears. 2. Pre-drill fastenerholes 1/8"(3mm)oversize with high speed drill bit. a. Space at 8"(200mm)m aximum on center at perimeter,approximately 1"from panel edge. b. Space at in field in rows 16'(40.64cm)on center,with fasteners spaced at 12"(30.48 cm) maximum on center. C. Apply panels to board substrate,above base,vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels. 1. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and cornerjoints. a. Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. b. Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over-tighten. D. Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required clearances. 1. All moldings must provide for a minim um 1/8"(3mm)of panel expansion atjoints and edges,to insure proper installation. 2. Apply sealant to all moldings,channels and joints between the system and different materials to assure watertight installation. 3.3 Cleaning A. Remove excess sealant from panels and moldings. Wipe panel down using a damp cloth and mild soap solution or cleaner. B. Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners. END OF SECTION 097720 Davis&Davis,Inc. Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09772-5 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 09910 PAINTING (BUILDING) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Section Requirements A. Summary: Paint exposed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint the back side of access panels. 2. Color-code m echanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces. 3. Do not paint prefinished items,items with an integral finish,operating parts,a nd labels, unless otherwise indicated. B. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. C. Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample ofeachtype of coating,color,and substrate,applied where directed. D. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from same manufacturer a s finish coats. E. Extra Materials: Deliverto Owner 1 gal.of each color and type off"mish coat paint used on Project, in containers,properly labeled and sealed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Paint A. Products: 1. Sherwin Williams,Kelly Moore,Pratt&Lambert orequal with prior approval. 2. Colors: As selected. B. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates. C. Material Quality: Manufacturer's best-quality paint material of coating types specified that are formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Remove hardware lighting fixtures and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items that cannot be removed. Reinstall item s in each area after painting is complete. B. Clean and prepare all surfaces in an areabeforebeginningpaintinginthatarea. Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces. Davis&Davis,Inc. Painting(Building) 09910-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3.2 Application A. Apply coatings by brush,roller,spray or other applicators according to coatingmanufacturer?s written instructions. 1. Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not practical. 2. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings. B. Pigmented (Opaque)Finishes: Completely cover surfaces to provide a smooth,opaque surface of uniform appearance. Provide a fmish free of cloudiness,spotting,holidays,laps,brush marks,runs,sags, ropiness,or other surfaceimperfections. C. Transparent(Clear)Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free oflaps,runs,cloudiness,color i regularity,brush marks,orange peel,nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 3.3 Exterior Paint Application Schedule A. Concrete: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic: One coat over prim er. B. ConcreteMasonry Units: 1. Graffiti Guard Sealer, (See section 04810). C. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: 1. Acrylic Latex Stain(Semi-Transparent):Two coats over sealer. D. All other Exterior Wood Construction: 1. Acrylic Latex Stain(Semi-Transparent):Two coats over sealer. E. Ferrous Metal: 1. Full-Gloss,Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over rust-inhibitiveprimer. F. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Low-LusterAcrylic: Two coats overgalvanized metal primer. G. Aluminum: 1. Semigloss,Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer. 3.4 Interior Paint Application Schedule Refer and coordinate locations with room finish schedule. A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Semigloss,Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over block filler. Davis&Davis,Inc. Painting(Building) 09910-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2. Semigloss:Two part Epoxy:Two coats over block filler. B. Gypsum Board: 1. Semigloss,Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over primer. (Tape, bed and texture) C. Stained Woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based,Satin Varnish: Two coats over sealer and wood stain. D. Natural-Finish Woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based,Satin Varnish: Two coats over sealer. E. Ferrous Metal: 1. Full-Gloss,Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over ferrous metal primer. F. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Low-Luster ,Acrylic Enamel: Two coats overgalvanizedm etal primer. END OF SECTION 09910 Davis&Davis,Inc. Painting(Building) 09910-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 10155 SOLID PLASTIC TOI LET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01:Administrative,procedural,and temporary work requirements. 1.2 References A. ASTM International(ASTM): 1. B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alum inum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods,Wire, Profiles,and Tubes. 2. E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA)286-Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 1.3 Submittals A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings:Include dimensioned layout,elevations,trim,closures,and accessories. 2. Product Data:Manufacturer's descriptive data for panels,hardware,and accessories. 3. Samples:[2 x 3]inch samples showing available colors. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications:Minimum 10years experience in manufacture of solid plastic Toilet compartments with products in satisfactory use under similar service conditions. B. Installer Qualifications:Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section,under the same company name. 1.5 Warranties A. Provide manufacturer's 25 yearwananty against breakage,corrosion,and delamination under normal conditions. PART II PRODUCTS 2.1 Toilet Corn partments and Screens Davis&Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 10155-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Products:Basis of Design:Scranton Products,Inc.801 Corey St.Scranton,PA 18505 B. Acceptable alternate suppliers: 1. General Partitions Mfg.Corp. P O Box 8370 Erie Pa.16505 2. Bradley Corp. P O Box 309,Menomonee Falls,Wi.53052 2.2 Materials C. Panel,Pilaster,and Door Material: 1. Solid-Plastic,Polym erResin: (H.D.P)H igh-density polymer with homogen ous color, not less than 1 inch thick,with seamless construction and eased edges. 2. Color: As selected. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves(Caps): Solid plastic,polymer resin,not less than 3 inches high. E. Brackets: Continuous. 1. Material: Solid plastic Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 Fabrication F. Toilet Compartments: Overhead braced and floor anchored.(Maintain 6'-8" clear under overhead braceing.) G. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated,24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. H. Door Hardware: Clear anodic aluminum.Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having j urisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Wrap around self-closing type,adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latches and Keepers: Surface-mounted unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. 3. Coat Hook: Sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Install with in ADA/TAS acceptable reach range. 4. Door Bum per: Rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Provide at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides ofdoors at compartm en ts indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. PART III-EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Install units rigid,straight,level,and plumb,with not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Provide brackets,pilaster sh o es, bracing, and other Davis&Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 10155-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 components required fora complete installation. Use theft-resistant exposed fasteners finished to match hardware. Use sleeve nuts for through-bolt applications. 1. Stirrup Brackets: Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10155 Davis&Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 10155-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 10440 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS-ADD#3 PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 Related Document A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 Summary A. Section includes portable,fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate fmal fire extinguishers with mounting brackets. C. Remaining paragraphs are defined in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" as "Information Submittals. "Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 Coordination A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection mounting brackets to ensue fit and function. B. Prior to purchase and installation, verify location / quantity and type with local authorities. Provide a minimum of FIVE,locations to be determined.. 1.6 Warranty Davis&Davis,Inc. Fire Extinguishers 10440-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Portable,Hand-Carried Fire Extinguishers A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen's Manufacturing Company;MP 10,or comparable product by one of the following: 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance,and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Brass container: UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity,with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in chrome-plated brass container. 2.2 Mounting Brackets and Cabinets A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black-backed-enamel finish. Brackets for Mechancial Building are to be stainless steel. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen's Manufacturing Company;Model#846,or comparable product by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated;Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection;a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End&Croker Corporation. f. J.L. Industries,Inc.;a division of Activar Construction Products Group. B. Cabinet: Manufacturer's standard steel cabinet and door with architectural finish. The color is to be from the manufacturer's standard selection. Verify color with Owner's representative. The cabinent is to be designed to house the specified fire extinguisher in a partially rescessed condition with a maximum projection of 2-1/2". The cabinent is to be ADA compliant and mounted in an ADA compliant condition.The cabinent is not fire rated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model is to be Larsen's model 2409-6R,24"ht x 9-1/2"ht x 6" w,or approved equal. Davis&Davis,Inc. Fire Extinguishers 10440-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Identification: lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing,and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words"FIRE EXTINGUISHER"in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged,defective,or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets/cabinents in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets / cabinents: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at location indictated. END OF SECTION 10440 Davis&Davis,Inc. Fire Extinguishers 10440-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 10510 SOLID PLASTIC CUBBIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lockers. B. Locker benches. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 0610 00-Rough Carpentry. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 286-Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0 1 30 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each productto be used,including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings:Drawings shall be submitted showing individual locker size and overall dimensions. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified,two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns E. Verification Samples: Foreachfmish product specified,two samples,minimum size 3 inches square, representing actual product,color,and patterns. F. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Recycled Content:Certify percentages of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. 2. Regional Materials:Certify distance between manufacturer and Project and between manufacturer and extraction or harvest point in miles. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:A company regularly engiged in manufacture of products specified in this section,and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service conditions for not less than 5 years. B. Installer Qualifications:A company regularly engiged in installation of products specified in this Section,with a minimum of5 years experience. Davis and Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Cubbies 10510-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Locker components shall be stored flat until assembly.All finishes shall be protected from soiling and damage during handling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature,humidity,and ventilation)within lim its recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty:Manufacturer guarantees its plastic against breakage,corrosion,and delamination under normal conditions for 25 years from the date of receipt by the customer.If materials are found to be defective duringthat period for reasons listed above,the materials will be replaced free of charge. (Labor not included in warranty.) B. Warranty:Manufacturer guarantees its plastic against breakage,corrosion,and delamination under normal conditions for 15 years from the date of receipt by the customer.I f materials are found to be defective duringthat period for reasons listed above,the materials will be replaced free of charge. (Labor not included in warranty.) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer:Scranton Products,which is located at:801 E.Corey St.;Scranton,PA 18507;Toll Free Tel:800-445-5148;Fax:800-551-6993;Email:request info (info iscrantonproducts.com);Web:www.scrantonproducts.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.2 LOCKERS A. Design:Open small storage locker. 1. Product:TuffTike Cubby Locker. B. Design:Storage locker. 1. Product:TuffTec Lockers. 2. Vertical Stack:Two tier. C. Size:Individual and stack height as indicated on drawings. 1. Locker Depth: 18 inches(457 mm). 2. Locker Width:l 8 inches(457 mm). D. Hardware: 1. Base. E. Bases shall be supplied 4 inches(102 mm)high,black unless otherwise specified.Locker bases shall be fabricated from 1 inch(25 mm)or3/4 inch(19mm)black plastic.Bases areassembled in the field. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION Davis and Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Cubbies 10510-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Frames shall be made from high impact,high density polyethylene(HDPE)formed under high pressure into solid plastic components 1/2 inch(13 mm)thickwith homogeneous color throughout. B. Sides,tops,bottoms,backs,and shelves shall be made from high impact,high density,polyethylene (HDPE)form ed under pressure into solid plastic components 3/8 inch(9.5 mm)thick with homogenous natural color throughout.Out sides,insides,tops,bottoms,backs,dividers and shelves shall be natural in color. C. Assembly profile shall be full height of the lockers.Profile shall be made from PVC plastic and snapfit assemble onto locker sides. D. Assembly profile shall be full height of the lockers.Profile shall be Tongue-and-groove joint construction using 3/8 inch thick HDPE. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Lockers shall be constructed from High Density Polyethylene(HDPE)resins.Material shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure,forming a single component which is waterproof,nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surfacethatresists marks from pens,pencils, markers and other writing instruments. B. Plastic components shall resist deterioration and discoloration when subjected to any of the following acetic acid 80%,acetone,ammonia 12%,ammonium phosphate,bleach 12%,borax,brine,caustic soda,chlorine water,citric acid,copper chloride,core oils,hydrochloric acid 40%,hydrogen peroxide 30%,isopropyl alcohol,lactic acid 25%,lime sulfur,nicotine,potassium bromide;soaps,sodium bicarbonate,trisodium phosphate,urea,urine andvinegar.(Testing in accordance with corrosion testing procedure established by the United States Plastic Corporation.) C. HDPE components shall have a smooth"orange peel"finish.Locker doors and door frames shall be the samecolor. 1. Color:As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Locker components shall be fabricated square and rigid with a finish free of scratches and chips. B. Solid plastic locker components shall snap together at profile connections or slide together at dovetail connections for easy assembly and shall provide a solid and secure anti-racking book case component construction for clean lines and precise reveals.Adjacent lockers shall share a common side panel. Locker units shall be manufactured for assembly in a group ofno more than three adjacent lockers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Davis and Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Cubbies 10510-3 1 00%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Report discrepancies to the architect. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers at the location shown in accordance with the manufacturers'instructions for plumb, level,rigid and flush installations. C. Anchor the units to the wall studs through the locker back and to the floor using 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) tapcon screws. D. Lockers shall be floor-mounted as scheduled or indicated.Floor shall be level for proper installation. E. Lockers shall be installed on a 4 inch(102 mm)high base as scheduled or indicated.Base shall be level for proper installation. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Davis and Davis,Inc. Solid Plastic Cubbies 10510-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 10800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 Summary A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General Conditions,apply to work of this section. B.Extent of eachtype oftoilet accessory is shown on Drawings and schedules and may include but is not limited to: 1)Toilet Tissue Dispensers. 2)Grab Bars. 3)Mirrors. 4)Soap Dispensers. 5)Paper Towel Dispensers. 6)Hand Dryers. 7)Shower Curtain Rod. 8)Diaper Changing Station.9)Fold down ADA dressing bench. 1.2 Related Work A.Section 06200—Finish Carpentry. B.Section 09300-Tile. C.Section 10155-Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments. D.Section 10211—Solid Plastic Shower Compartments 1.3 References A.Comply with local all codes and HealthDepartmentrequirements. 1.Toilet accessory components,mounting heights,and locations shall comply with applicable accessibility codes. 2.When noted or shown on plans papertowel dispensers shall be stainless steel finished and able to dispense the C-fold or 525 multifold towels. 3.Provide a toilet tissue dispenser at each water closet and at the highest accessible height and location. 4.Provide stainless steel grab bars with peened or smooth(as noted on plans)surfaces and flanges for exposed mounting at accessible toilets a.Grab bars and the installation of grab bars shall comply with ADA accessibility code requirements. b.Provide vandal resistant fasteners and backing in partition or wall for sufficient anchoring to resist a 250-pound force applied from any direction. 5.Grab bars,shower seats and dressing room bench seats systems shall be designed to resist a single concentrated load of250 pounds applied in any direction at any point. 1.3 Submittals A.Product Data:Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory prior to work. B.Submit full-size samples of units to Architect for review of design and operation. Acceptable samples maybe used in work. Davis&Davis,Inc. Toilet Room Accessories 10800-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C.Provide shop drawings,templates,instructions,and directions for installation of anchorage devices. 1.4 Quality Assurance A.Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into masonry;coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. Provide and install solid blocking at the proper locations. B.Locations:Coordinate with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. C.Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in sameareas,unless noted otherwise in the Drawings or as approved by Architect. PART II-PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 2.1 Products A.Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements and Architect's approval for product substitutions,provide toilet accessories as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc,or equivalent products from one of the following: a) Bradley Corporation. b) American Specialties Inc. B.Washroom Accessories: 1.Toilet Tissue Dispensers:Surface-mounted,single Jumbo-Roll toilet tissue dispenser,stainless steel with theft-resistant heavy-duty spindles and tumbler lock keyed like other bathroom accessories. Mount at28"to top ofunit forbarrier-free.Provide single Jumbo-Roll paper dispenser by Bobrick:B-2890, or approved equal. 2.Grab Bars:Lengths and configurations as indicated on drawings and as specified in this section.Heavy duty with peened non-slip gripping surface in showers and smooth surface at water closets,1-1/2"diameter,stainless steel,with 1-1/2"wall clearance and vandal,theft-proofexposed fasteners.Straddle bars,wall to floor with socket and horizontal grab bars accordingto manufacturer's model/series numbers.Provide grab bars by Bobrick:B-6806 Series or approved equal. 3.Mirrors:Stainless Steel,Welded,Angle Frame Mirrors: 1. Basis of Design: BobrickModel B-2909.1836. a. Overall Size: 24 inches W x 36 inches H.refer to plan for location. 2. Angle Frame: a. Materials: Type 304 stainless steel angle 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch(19 x 19mm),with satin finish with vertical grain on exposed surfaces. b. Construction: One-piece,roll-formed construction with continuous integral stiffener. c. Design: Beveled design on front of angle to hold mirrortightly against frame; prevents exposure to sharp edges. d. Corners: Heliarc welded,ground,and polished smooth. 3. Mirror: a. 1/4 inch(6mm)laminated glass,electrolytically copper-plated. Davis&Davis,Inc. Toilet Room Accessories 10800-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 b. Edges: Protected with plastic filler strips. c. Back of Mirror: Protected by full-size,shock absorbing,water-resistant,non- abrasive 3/16 inch(5mm)thickpolyethylene padding. Mounting: Removable,galvanized steel back with integral horizontal hanging brackets located attop and bottom formounting on Concealed one-piece rectangular wall hanger(s);galvanized steel back fastened to frame with Concealed screws to permit glass replacement;attachment by rivets or tabs is not acceptable;Concealed Phillips head locking setscrews secure mirror to wall hanger in bottom of frame. Note:All mirrors are laminated glass.This supersedes any plan notes. 4.Soap Dispensers:Integral with lay in restrooms. 5.Paper Towel Dispenser:NA 6.Hand Dryers:Recessed hand dryer shall have a one-piece cast iron cover with white vitreous enamel finish.Nozzle shall adjust for hand and face drying. Nozzle shall automatically return to hand drying position;and cannot be used as a vessel to hold liquids.International graphic operating symbols shall be permanently fused into vitreous enamel cover.Cover shall have no exposed air inlet grille. Motor shall be 1/10 h.p.,6200 rpm,with automatic thermal overload switch.Centrifical fan shall direct air flow through heating element at 150 cfm.Heating element shall be rated at 2300 watts,shall be located on inlet side of fan,shall heat air without hot spots,and be inaccessible to vandals.Electronic sensor shall automatically turn dryer on when hands or nozzle are held under the outlet and will shut-off automatically when hands or nozzle are removed.Sensor shall shut-off automatically after 90 seconds if an inanimate object is used to activate dryer and resets itself after inanimate object is removed.Unit shall be U.L.listed and CSA approved.Unit shall be protected by a limited 10-year warranty on all parts except motto brushes. Motor brushes shall be warranted for a period ofthree years from date of installation.Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to building owner/manager upon completion of project.Recessed automatic hand dryer shall be Bobrick Model B-750(white),or approved equal 7.Shower Curtain Rods:NA 8.Diaper Changing Stations:Vertical and Horizontal Wall-Mounted Baby Changing Stations capable of supporting static load up to 400-lbs.Steel-on-steel hinges with 12-gage steel mounting supports.Changing Stations shall be ADA-compliant with properly installed child protection straps and diaper bag hook.FDA-approved blow-molded high density polyethylene with Microban Antimicrobial additive.Construction shall be of reinforced full-length steel-on-steel mechanism,with 11-gage steel mounting plates and hardware.Molded-in graphics and safety messages shall be in six languages and Braille.The contoured changing surface area shall be at least 442 sq.in.The overall dimensions shall be:36"L x 22"W x 4"H. Provide Baby Changing Station as manufactured by Bobrick(Koala Kare Products)Model#KB 101 or KB 200 depending on location or approved equal. 9.Fixed DressingBench: Refer to plans. 2.2 Materials A.Stainless Steel:AISI Type 302/304,with polished No.4 fnish,22 gauge minimum,unless otherwise indicated. Davis&Davis,Inc. Toilet Room Accessories 10800-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEEKRANCH PARK PHASE 2 B.Brass:Unleaded,flat products,FS QQ-B-613;Rods,shapes,forgings,and flat products with finished edges,FS QQ-B-626. C.Chromium Plating:Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal,ASTM B 456,Type SC 2. D.Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices:ASTM A 386,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E.Fasteners:Vandal-resistant screws,bolts and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of stainless steel in exposed surfaces and galvanized steel where concealed.Use the manufacturer's fasteners to meet warranty requirements. F.Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not permitted.Wherever locks are required for a toilet accessory,provide same keying throughout project.Furnish two keys for each lock,tagged and marked which shall be delivered to the Owner. G.Fabricate units of all welded construction,without mitered comers.Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless-steel piano hinge.Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed. H.Lavatory Insulation Kit: Where lavatories are noted to be insulated for ADA compliance, provide Safety Covers conforming to ANSI A117.1 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closed-cell vinyl construction,1/8-inchnominalthick,whitecolor,forinsulatingtailpiece,P-trap, valves,and supply piping.Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers. Manufacturer. Truebro,Lay-Guard. PART III—EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection A.Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely corn pletion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B.Verify that all support system for grab bars,diaper changing stations and other accessories are properly prepared to receive work accordingto FBC(structural)and ADA requirements. 3.3.1 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.After installation,clean toilet room accessories so as not to damage finish and in conditions satisfactory to Architect. B.Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 Davis&Davis,Inc. Toilet Room Accessories 10800-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 10930 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Conditions,Special Conditions and section"Scope of Work"are a part of and govern work under this section. B. Paving: a. Section 07241—Asphalt Paving b. Section 02771—Concrete Sidewalks 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit four(4)sets to the Architect for approval. Drawings shall show the j ointing and bonding,connections with other work,typical and special anchoring ofthesections,dimensions and other necessary information. All equipment specified shall be permanently anchored in concrete as per manufacturer's instructions or as detailed. B. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions. 1.03 GUARANTEE Contractor shall also guarantee the work o fthis section against defective materials and/or workmanship for a period of one(1)year from date of acceptance by the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT The following equipment shall be as manufactured by BSN Sports,PO Box 7726 Dallas,TX 75209,(1-800-856-3488),or approved equal,as Sports Edge,Troutman,NC(1-800-334-6057)or Sports Field Specialties,Delhi,NY(1-800-975-3343): Name No. Qty Foul Poles SKU#BSFOUL 2 Sports Netting SKU# 1188042 4,455 SF PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. All athletic equipment,and related items,shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions,the specifications and asdetailed.A letter to this effect shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner upon completion of the work. B. Upon completion,clean all exposed surfaces and repair all defective joints a srequired;leave all work clean and free from surface dirt or im perfections. Protect all work of this section from a ll construction damage, during and after installation until acceptance by the Owner. --END-- Kim ley-Hom and Associates,Inc. Athletic Equipment 10930-1 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in stages as required to accommodate the Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period. Coordinate the mechanical schedule and operations with the Owner,Architect and other trades. 1.03 ALTERNATES A. Refer to Division 1. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AABC-Associated Air Balance Council B. AGA-American Gas Association C. AMCA-Air Movement and Control Association D. ANSI-American National Standards Institute E. API-American Petroleum Institute F. ARI -Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute G. ASHRAE-American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,Inc. H. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers I. ASTM-American Society for Testing and Materials J. ASSE-American Society of Sanitary Engineering K. AWS-American Welding Society L. AWWA-American Water Works Association M. BOCA-Building Officials and Code Administrators N. CISPI-Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute O. DOL-U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration P. DOT-U.S. Department of Transportation Q. EPA-Environmental Protection Agency R. FM-Factory Mutual S. FS-Federal Specification T. IAMPO-International Association of Plumbing&Mechanical Officials U. MIL-Military Specification V. MSS-Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve&Fittings Industry,Inc. W. NAPHCC-National Association of Plumbing,Heating,Cooling Contractors X. NEBB-National Environmental Balance Bureau Y. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturers Association Z. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association AA. NSF-National Sanitation Foundation BB. PDI-Plumbing and Drainage Institute CC. SBCCI-Southern Building Code Congress International,Inc.(Standard Plumbing Code) DD. SMACNA-Sheet Metal&Air Conditioning Contractors Nat'l Assoc.,Inc. EE. STI-Steel Tank Institute FF. TDH-Texas Department of Health GG. UL-Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II HH. UPC-Uniform Plumbing Code(IAPMO) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. The number of copies of each submittal shall be per Division 1 but in no case shall it be less than six(6). B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Sections: 1. Section 15430-Plumbing Specialties 2. Section 15440-Plumbing Fixtures 3. Section 15450-Plumbing Equipment 4. Section 15787—Split System Air Conditioning Units 5. Section 15870-Power Ventilators 6. Section 15885-Air Cleaning 7. Section 15890-Ductwork 8. Section 15910-Ductwork Accessories 9. Section 15936-Air Inlets and Outlets • 10. Section 15990-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing C. The Contractor shall check all manufacturer's drawings for conformance to the Plans and Specifications and shall indicate his approval of the Drawings before forwarding them to the Architect. The Engineer will not consider any manufacturer's drawings for review which do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval. D. Forward submittals in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and approval action by the Owner's representative. Time submissions to assure adequate lead time for procurement of contract-required items. Delays attributable to untimely and rejected submittals will not serve as a basis for extending contract time for completion. E. This Contractor shall furnish equipment shop drawings which will indicate power hook up and control connections as required for mechanical equipment. "Stock"wiring diagrams are not acceptable. F. The Contractor is required to submit 1/4"scale sheetmetal coordination drawings showing duct layouts prior to starting work which will be reviewed by the Engineer. Drawings will be used for coordination with other trades. G. Engineer's review of manufacturer's drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in manufacturer drawings and deviations from Drawings or Specifications. H. Items may be referred to in singular or plural on Plans and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for determining quantity of each item. I. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,products, and accessories in a single submittal. J. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Base Bid shall be based on equipment as specified. Where items are mentioned thusly,"may be furnished at the contractor's option",the Contractor may use any one of the items named for his Base Bid. Proposal for substitutions are welcomed,but must be noted separately from the Base Bid and applied for in writing at Bid submittal. B. Any proposed equipment or material not specified or listed as an equal must be bid as a substitution on the Substitution Sheet of Form of Proposal. Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II C. Where the Contractor furnishes equipment or material specified as equal or which is accepted as a substitution, he is responsible for all modifications required for his work,and work of all other trades to install the equipment and insure performance as originally specified. D. Equipment and materials furnished as equal or as a substitution must be equal in quality, design, features, performances,arrangement,and appearance to that specified as standard. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. This Contractor shall file all Drawings,pay all necessary charges and fees,and obtain all necessary permits and certificates of inspection relative to his work. B. All Plumbing Work shall be performed per local Plumbing Code Requirements. C. All Mechanical Work shall conform to Local Mechanical Code Requirements. D. All pressure piping work shall be installed per ASME Pressure Piping Code-Section B31.1 E. All Electrical Work shall be performed according to The National Electrical Code No. 70, National Fire Protection Association. F. All Ductwork Installations shall conform to NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. G. Nothing contained in the Plans and Specifications shall be construed to conflict with these laws, codes and ordinances and they are hereby made a part of these Specifications. 1.08 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall pay all required fees for new utility connections to existing city mains as well as cost for meter installations,etc. The Contractor shall verify exactly what work will be performed and what costs will be charged by the utility company and have this included in his Bid Price. B. The Contractor shall investigate and locate all utilities prior to construction. C. Each Contractor is responsible for rerouting or replacing existing utilities where necessary to permit installation of his work. D. The identity and location of the existing underground utility facilities known to be located in the construction area have been shown on the plans as accurately as provided by the Owner of the underground utility. The Engineer assumes no responsibility as to the accuracy or the depths of the underground utilities shown on the plans. E. Support,protection and restoration of all existing utilities and appurtenances shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost of this work shall be included in the price bid for the various items. F. The Contractor shall alert immediately the occupants of nearby premises as to any emergency that he may create or discover on or near such premises of the underground utility, any break or leak on its lines or any dent, gouge,groove or other damage. Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor is required to visit the site and fully inform himself concerning all conditions affecting the scope of his work. Failure to visit the site shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility in the performance of his contract. B. The Contractor should feel free to contact the Engineer immediately if there is any question regarding the meaning or intent of either Plans or Specifications, or if he notices any discrepancies or omissions in either Plans or Specifications. C. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings,unless prevented by Project conditions. D. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions,including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All material hoisting by trade involved. B. Include any minor details essential to successful operation and any other items specified or shown on the Drawings. C. The Contractor is required to read the Specifications covering all branches of the work and will be held responsible for coordination of his work with work performed under all other Contracts. D. Other than minor adjustments shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before proceeding with the work. E. All connections to,or revisions in,existing piping or facilities shall be done at such time as agreed to by the Architect and Owner and all work shall be scheduled as required under"General Conditions". Revisions to the existing piping systems must be done with the minimum of shutdown time. All piping shall be run to the point of new connections,tested,cleaned and new equipment installed and ready to operate before any connections are made. F. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid interference with the Owner's equipment,especially in the existing portion of the building. Consult with the Architect regarding any points where interferences are likely to occur and follow dimensions carefully where given on the Drawings. Pay particular attention to minimum clear heights when indicated on the Drawings. G. The Contractor,insofar as this Contract is concerned,shall at all times keep the premises and the building in a neat and orderly condition. This includes using a vacuum cleaner in the office areas. H. At the completion of the project,this Contractor shall promptly clean up and remove from the site,all debris and excess materials. I. Factory furnished equipment which has rusted or been damaged shall be cleaned at the completion of the project and rust spots and marred areas shall be refinished and restored to the original factory finish. Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 1.12 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS A. After work is completed but before pipe covering has been applied,the Contractor shall test and adjust the systems he has installed. B. The Architect shall be notified of all scheduled tests and adjustment at least 48 hours before they are scheduled so that he may witness same. If the Contractor performs any test or adjustment without the Architect present or without properly notifying the Architect the Contractor will be required to perform the test or adjustment a second time in the presence of the Architect. C. If the Architect determines that any work requires special inspection,testing,or approval,he will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection,testing or approval. The Contractor shall give timely notice so the Architect may observe the inspections,tests or approvals. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure;otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. D. Concealed lines shall be tested before being concealed. If this is not done and a leak appears during the final test,this Contractor shall repair leak and all damage resulting therefrom. E. This Contractor shall adjust all his equipment in the mechanical system to obtain proper operation and shall demonstrate to the Owner and Architect that the entire system will function properly. 1.13 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS A. The Contractor shall confine operations and storage on owner's property in areas approved by the owner. 1.14 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. These drawings are based on the rendering of a professional service,the essence of which is the providing of advice,judgment,opinion,or similar professional skill. B. Consult all Contract Drawings which may affect the locations of any equipment,apparatus,piping and ductwork and make minor adjustments in location to secure coordination. C. Piping and duct layout is schematic and exact locations shall be determined by structural and other conditions and verified in the field. This shall not be construed to mean that the design of the system may be changed,it refers only to the exact location of piping and ductwork to fit into the building as constructed, and to coordination of all work with piping and equipment included under other Divisions of the Specifications. D. The layout shown on the Drawings is based on a particular make of equipment. If another make of equipment is used which requires modifications or changes of any description from the Drawings or Specifications, this Contractor shall be responsible for making all such modifications and changes,including those involving other trades,as a part of this Contract and the cost thereof shall be included in his Bid. In such case,the Contractor shall submit Drawings and Specifications showing all such modifications and changes prior to starting work, which shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of piping and equipment up to the time of rough-in without additional cost to the Owner. F. Where certain grades and/or elevations are given on the Drawings, they have been obtained from the best information available;however,they are not guaranteed. This Contractor must assume the full responsibility of verifying present elevations in the field and making any adjustments as may be necessary,all of which must be included in his Bid Price. Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II G. Due to the scale of the Drawings, it is impossible to show all offsets and transitions which may be required. This Contractor shall carefully investigate the conditions affecting all work and shall furnish all elbows,fittings, transitions,etc.,required to accomplish the desired result at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Install all work as close as possible to walls,ceilings,struts,members,etc.,consistent with the proper space for covering,access,etc.,so as to occupy the minimum of space. I. Actual dimensions shown on the Drawings and field dimensions shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. This Contractor shall thoroughly instruct and supervise the Owner's Maintenance Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the mechanical system equipment. This Contractor shall be responsible for arranging for the instruction and supervision at a time convenient to the Owner or his representative and for notifying the Architect of the time at least 48 hours in advance. 1. Instructions shall include the following: 2. Location of equipment and explanation of what it does. 3. Reference to"Operating Instructions Manuals"for record and clarity. 4. Coordination of written and verbal instruction so that each is understood by all personnel. 5. Explanation of Temperature Control System including thermostat programming. 6. Specific maintenance to be performed by Owner. B. Furnish one(1)copy of the printed Operating and Maintenance Instructions for the Mechanical Systems for review. Copy shall be neat,legible and bound in a hardback 3-ring notebook. After final approval,provide four(4)copies of Operation and Maintenance Instructions for submittal to Owner. Instructions shall consist of the following items: 1. Title Page: Title of Project, address, date of submittal, names and address of Contractor, name of Architect,name of Engineer. 2. Second Page: Index of Manual Contents. 3. First Section:A copy of each approved shop drawing and submittal with an index at the beginning of the section. 4. Second Section:A list of all equipment used on the project,together with supplier's name and address. 5. Manufacturer's maintenance manuals for each item of equipment furnished under this contract. Manuals shall include such items as parts list,detailed lubrication instructions,procedures for performing normal maintenance functions,preliminary trouble shooting procedures and wiring diagrams. 6. Complete wiring diagrams for the mechanical systems as actually wired including control and interlock wiring. 7. Brief but complete instructions for start-up,shut-down and routing maintenance of each system. 8. Routine and 24-hour emergency information: a) Name,address and telephone number of serving agency. b) Include names of personnel to be contacted for service arrangements. C. Frame one (1)copy of brief start-up, shut-down and routine maintenance instructions and complete system wiring diagrams under glass and mount on the Equipment Room wall. Temperature Control Schematics may be laminated with plastic at the Contractor's option. 1.16 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of deviations from Contract Drawings and Specifications. He shall neatly and correctly enter in colored pencil any deviations on Drawings affected and shall keep the Drawings available for inspection. Extra sets of Drawings will be furnished for this purpose. Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II B. At the completion of project and before final approval,make any final corrections to Drawings and certify to the accuracy of each print by signature and deliver same to Architect. 1.17 SUPERVISION A. This Contractor shall have in charge of the work,on the job during construction,a competent superintendent experienced in the work installed under this Contract. 1.18 UNACCEPTABLE WORK AND OBSERVATION REPORTS A. Work shall be unacceptable when found to be defective or contrary to the Plans,Specifications,Codes specified or accepted standards of good workmanship. B. The Contractor shall promptly correct all work found unacceptable by the Architect whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such unacceptable work,including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. C. During the course of construction,the Engineer will prepare"Observation Reports"with a list of items found to be in need of correction. All items listed shall be corrected by the Contractor. 1.19 FINAL INSPECTION A. When the Contractor determines all work is completed and working properly per the Contract Documents,he shall request a"final"inspection by the Architect in writing. If more than one reinspection is required after this final inspection, the Contractor shall bear all additional costs including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. A final inspection will not be made until Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Air Balance Reports are submitted and approved and all prior"Observation Report" punch lists are completed. B. As part of the fmal checkout of the project,the Engineer will be checking out the operation of the various systems. This Contractor shall provide such assistance as required(including manpower and tools)to start and stop the various systems,open and close valves etc.and simulate summer,winter and other temperature control sequences. The Contractor(not the Engineer)is responsible to turn on the systems and demonstrate they are operating properly. 1.20 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor is responsible for all defects,repairs and replacements in materials and workmanship,for period of one(1)year after final payment is approved by the Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 Not Used END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15055 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I -GENERAL 1.01 Refer to Division 1,General Requirements PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Avoid cutting of concrete,masonry and other new work by using inserts and sleeves. 3.02 This Contractor shall perform cutting for openings,when necessary,with such tools and methods as to prevent unnecessary damage to surrounding areas or equipment. 3.03 Cutting of existing walls,concrete floors and certain other openings where indicated on the General Contract Drawings shall be done by the General Contractor. All other cutting by this Contractor. 3.04 The corners of all openings in poured concrete shall be core drilled to minimize overcutting. 3.05 This Contractor shall give the General Contractor locations and sizes of all openings required for the installation of mechanical equipment (other than piping for openings), before walls, etc., are started. If it becomes necessary to cut into new work because of the failure of this Contractor to notify the General Contractor,then the General Contractor shall do any necessary cutting and patching at this Contractor's expense. 3.06 Fill space in all areas where core drilled with packing where required to maintain fire rating. Openings shall be temporarily fire-stopped until permanent fire stopping is done. This includes holes left due to removal of piping,ductwork or equipment. 3.07 All holes cut for the installation of piping,ductwork and equipment shall be neatly patched and refinished with the same materials as, and to match,adjacent surfaces, and damages thereto shall be repaired in kind and to match existing conditions by this Contractor. This includes patching existing ceilings and floors where required and patching holes left by removal of exiting piping,ductwork,equipment,etc. 3.08 No structural member shall be cut into without the expressed permission of the Owner or Architect. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Cutting and Patching 15055-1 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15060 ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.0I REFERENCE A. Division 16-Electrical 1.02 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall furnish all motors for his equipment. Motor starters,safety switches and wired junction boxes shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor except where specifically specified to be furnished with certain mechanical equipment. This contractor shall be responsible for coordination of this portion of the work. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED-THIS DIVISION A. All control wiring unless otherwise specified. B. 120 volt wiring required for mechanical equipment when not shown or specified elsewhere. C. All conduit and wiring incidental to temperature controls,including switches,controls,transformers and relays shall be the responsibility of this division. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED—DIVISION 16. A. All power wiring. B. Wiring as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. C. Motor starters,contactors,and disconnects where noted under"Products"below. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Electrical Contractor,equipment shop drawings which indicate power hook-up and control connections as required for mechanical equipment. "Stock"Wiring Diagrams are not acceptable. B. Prepare,as a part of Temperature Control shop drawings,complete terminal-to-terminal wiring diagrams. These will show terminal designations on control items and equipment. Wiring diagrams to be compatible with Electrical Drawings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Refer to Division 16-ELECTRICAL A. Motor starters,contactors,and disconnects are provided and installed by the Electrical Contractor,unless part of package equipment furnished by this Contractor,or otherwise specified. This contractor shall be responsible for coordination of this portion of the work. Engineering Associates Electrical Work 15060-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 All wiring,conduits,etc.,shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and Division 16,Electrical Specification. 3.02 All wiring,including low voltage wiring,shall be run in conduit(minimum 3/4"). 3.03 Low voltage wiring may be size and type recommended by the Manufacturer and/or Temperature Control Contractor. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Electrical Work 15060-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe,duct,and equipment hangers,supports,and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: Grinnell,B-Line,F&S,Elcen,Penn,Fee-Mason,PHD Manufacturing,Modern Pipe Hangers,Substitutions per Division 1. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch(12 to 38 mm):Carbon steel,adjustable swivel,split ring. Copper plated for copper pipe. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches(51 to 100 mm)and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches(150 mm)and Over: Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. Copper plated for copper piping to 4 Inches(100 mm)and full round lead sleeves for copper piping 5 Inches(127 mm)and over. D. Hangers for insulated copper piping do not require copper plating or lead sleeves if hanger and saddle are sized for outside of the insulation. E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches(150 mm)and Over:Adjustable steel yoke,cast iron roll,double hanger. F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods;cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches(150 mm)and over. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches(76 nun):Cast iron hook. H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches(100 mm)and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches(150 mm)and over. I. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. Copper plated for copper lines. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches(100 mm)and All Cold Pipe Sizes:Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. K. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches(150 mm)and Over:Adjustable cast iron roll and stand,steel screws,and concrete pier or steel support. L. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches(51 mm)and Smaller: 18 gage(1.2 mm)galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments,minimum 12 inches(300 mm)long at pipe support. M. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches(62 mm)and Larger(Except Cold Water Piping): Pipe covering Engineering Associates Supports&Anchors 15140-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II protective saddles. N. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches(62 mm)and Larger: Hard block non-conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch(300 mm)minimum length,block thickness same as insulation thickness. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods,lugs for attaching to forms;size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing:26 gage(0.5 mm thick)galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft(24.5 kg/sq m)sheet lead for waterproofing;one lb/sq ft(5 kg/sq m)sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing:47 mil(1.2 mm)thick sheet butyl compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel,22 gage(0.8 mm)minimum; 16 gage(1.5 mm)at fire resistant elements. 2.05 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors:Form with 18 gage(1.2 mm thick)galvanized steel large enough to allow 1/4 inch(6 mm)clearance all around pipe(around pipe covering on chilled water,cold water,and high or medium pressure steam),except use machine cut copper sleeves for uninsulated copper pipe. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams,Walls,Footings,and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel large enough to allow 1/4 inch clearance all around pipe(around pipe covering on cold water),except use machine cut copper sleeves for uninsulated copper pipe. C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Stuffing Insulation: Glass fiber type,non-combustible. F. Calk:Acrylic sealant. G. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction(this is especially important for finned tube radiation). Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. 2.06 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. Engineering Associates Supports&Anchors 15140-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Riser clamps shall be used at each floor where required. 3.02 Wall bracket pipe supports shall be installed where required. 3.03 All copper piping is to be shielded from steel pipes or electrical conduit with sheet lead or electrical tape wherever pipes would touch each other. 3.04 Galvanized hangers and strap hangers will not be permitted for supporting copper lines except for hangers sized for outside of insulation. 3.05 Steel pipe to be supported at intervals of not over 10 feet(3.0 m),copper at intervals of not over 8 feet(2.4 m),and at base of each riser. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each joint,with 5 feet(1.5 m) maximum spacing between hangers.Support elsewhere as required in accordance with good workmanship. No pipe shall be supported from another pipe. 3.06 Place a hanger within 12 inches(300 mm)of each horizontal elbow. 3.07 Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)minimum vertical adjustment. 3.08 Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 3.09 Provide pipe anchors and guides where and as indicated on the drawings and elsewhere as required to properly control pipe. Method to suit job conditions. 3.10 Support piping at pumps and equipment from floor,ceiling,or walls,so that piping weight is not supported directly from pumps or equipment. 3.11 Curbs and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.12 Single pipe seals shall be set in mastic by this contractor,flashing and roof seal by General Contractor unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 3.13 Roof openings and weatherproofing of curbs by General Contractor unless indicated otherwise on drawings. Flashing and Counterflashing by this contractor. 3.14 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. B. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling,provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. 3.15 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete where indicated. B. Provide templates,anchor bolts,and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. 3.16 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors,and roofs. Engineering Associates Supports&Anchors 15140-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches(75 mm)minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch(25 nun)minimum into hub,8 inches(200 mm)minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches(600 x 600 mm)sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches(250 mm)clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch(910 x 910 mm)sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal all drains watertight to adjacent materials. 3.17 SLEEVES A. In new construction furnish sleeves to the General Contractor,who installs where directed by this Contractor. Coordinate carefully. B. Sleeves shall be provided for new masonry construction. Sleeves are not required if holes are core drilled through existing walls. C. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1/4 inch(6 min)above fmished floor level in finished areas,3 inches(76 mm)in unfinished areas. Sleeves in partitions shall be same thickness as finished partition. E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor,ceiling,or wall,close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing insulation or fire stopping as required and calk seal air tight. F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. G. Piping shall not bear on sleeve. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Supports&Anchors 15140-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 15. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Color:Unless specified otherwise,conform with ANSI/ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Nameplates:Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. C. Plastic Tags:Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. D. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters;tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. E. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF LENGTH OF SIZE OF 2. INSULATION OR PIPE COLOR FIELD LETTERS 3. 3/4"- 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 4. 1-1/2"-2" 8" 3/4" 5. 2-1/2"-6" 12" 1-1/4" 6. 8"- 10" 24" 2-1/2" 7. Over 10" 32 3-1/2" 8. Equipment 2-1/2" F. Stencil Paint: In accordance with Section 09900,semi-gloss enamel. G. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering;minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and fluid being conveyed. H. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. I. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape of not less than 6 inch wide by 4 mil thick,manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil painting. C. Coordinate labeling with painting. Engineering Associates Mechanical Identification 15190-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Plastic Nameplates:Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners,or screws. Do not use adhesive only. B. Plastic or Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain. C. Stencil Painting:Apply in accordance with Section 09900. D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,directly above buried pipe. G. Equipment:Identify air handling units,pumps,heat transfer equipment,tanks,and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates.Small devices,such as in-line pumps,may be identified with plastic tags. H. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. I. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. J. Piping:Identify piping,concealed or exposed,with plastic pipe markers,plastic tape pipe markers or stenciled painting.Tags may be used on small diameter piping.Identify service,flow direction,and pressure.Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops,adjacent to each valve and"T",at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Label all duct access doors which serve fire dampers,smoke dampers and smoke detectors. Access door shall be identified with letters no less than 1/2"in height to indicate the location of fire protection devices. 3.03 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. In the case of remodeling work when a valve identification system already exists,numbering shall start with the next number after the highest existing number. Install at location as directed. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Mechanical Identification 15190-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All Materials:Maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84,NFPA 255 or UL 723. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manville, B. Owens Corning, C. Knauf, D. CertainTeed, E. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 INSULATION A. Type A:glass fiber insulation with AP(all purpose vapor barrier jacket);ANSI/ASTM C547;'k'value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F('ksi'value of 0.035 at 24 degrees C);noncombustible. Insulation shall be rated for 850 degree F(454 degree C). B. Type B: calcium silicate;ANSI/ASTM C533;rigid white;asbestos free;'k'value of 0.44 at 300 degrees F('ksi' value of 0.060 at 147 degrees C);noncombustible. Insulation shall be rated for 1200 degree F(649 degree C). C. Type C: elastomeric insulation;ASTM C 534;closed-cell,self-seal pipe insulation,black,'k'value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F('ksi'value of 0.039 at 24 degree C);noncombustible. Insulation shall be rated for 220 degree F (104 degree C). 2.03 JACKETS A. Interior Applications(Type A insulation): 1. Vapor Barrier Jackets:Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints,all purpose jacket. 2. Fittings shall be wrapped with compressed fiberglass to same thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation and covered with a molded plastic fitting. B. Interior Applications(Type B insulation): Engineering Associates Piping Insulation 15260-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 1. Secure blocks in place with 16 gauge wire or 1/2"wide stainless steel bands on 12" centers. Where required,provide welded studs,clips,or angles as anchors for the wire or bands. Point all voids with insulating cement to provide a smooth finish. Two 1/4"coats of finishing cement reinforced with 1"hex wire mesh shall be troweled to a smooth fmish. All corners are to be reinforced with corner bead. Finish with glass cloth(minimum 6x6 weave/inch,4.3 ounces per square yard(143 g/sq m))adhered and coated with Foster No.30-36 coating. C. Interior Applications(Type C insulation): 1. No interior jacket required unless indicated otherwise. D. Exterior Applications(Type A insulation): 1. Finish same as for interior application plus: 2. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.020 inch (0.51 mm)thick; smooth finish. Properly install with sealing compounds,aluminum band joint straps,etc.,to make installation weathertight. E. Exterior Applications(Type B insulation): 1. Same as for interior application except glass cloth finish with coating shall be replaced with: 2. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.020 inch (0.51 mm)thick; smooth finish. Properly install with sealing compounds,aluminum band joint straps,etc.,to make installation weathertight. F. Exterior Applications(type C insulation): 1. White solvent-based alkyd fmish for use over closed-cell insulation for exterior weather protection. Finish shall be by same manufacturer as insulation to insure compatibility. Apply finish at rate recommended by manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Jacket Bands:3/8 inch(10 mm)wide;0.015 inch(0.38 mm)thick aluminum. B. Insulating Cement:ANSI/ASTM C195;hydraulic setting mineral wool. C. Finishing Cement:ASTM C449. D. Adhesives:Compatible with insulation and by same manufacturer as insulation to insure compatibility. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. C. In exposed piping,locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. On insulated piping with fluid temperature below ambient-insulate fittings,valves,unions,flanges,strainers, flexible connections,and expansion joints. E. On insulated piping with fluid temperature above ambient but below 250 degrees F(121 degrees C,does not Engineering Associates Piping Insulation 15260-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II include medium and high pressure steam),do not insulate flanges,valves and unions,but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. F. Provide an insert,not less than 6 inches(150 mm)long,of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping,but under the finish jacket,on piping 2 inches(50 mm)diameter or larger,to prevent insulation from sagging at support points.Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.Factory fabricated inserts may be used. G. Neatly finish insulation at supports,protrusions,and interruptions. H. No covering required on supply and return lines inside heating unit cabinets. I. Looped piping serving finned radiation elements located above ceilings which are used to heat the ceiling plenum are not to be insulated. J. Application shall be made on clean,dry surfaces with all joints butted firmly together. K. No insulation is required on pipes which are underground or buried under floor slab. L. Insulation shall not be applied until the general construction has progressed sufficiently to insure against physical or moisture damage to the insulation. All damaged insulation shall be replaced at this Contractor's expense. 3.03 SCHEDULE PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch Inch Domestic Hot Water Supply A all 1 Domestic Cold Water A all 1/2 Cold Condensate Drains A all 1/2 Piping Outside(180 F fluids and above) A all 3 Piping Outside(179 F fluids and below) A all 2 Refrigeration Suction C all 1 END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Piping Insulation 15260-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork insulation. B. Insulation jackets. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials:UL listed;flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with UL 723. PART 2 -PRODUCTS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Manville,Owens Corning,Knauf,CertainTeed,Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Type A:Flexible glass fiber;ANSI/ASTM C553;commercial grade;'k'value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F('ksi' value of 0.042 at 24 degrees C); 1.0 lb/cu ft(16 kg/cu m);0.002 inch(0.05 mm)foil scrim facing. Rated for 450 degree F(232 degree C). B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber;ANSI/ASTM C612,Class 1;'k'value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F('ksi'value of 0.035 at 24 degrees C);6.0 lb/cu ft(96 kg/cu m);0.002 inch(0.05 mm)foil scrim facing.Rated for 350 degree F (177 degree C). C. Type C: Flexible glass fiber;ANSI/ASTM C1071,Type 1;'k'value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F('ksi'value of 0.035 at 24 degrees C); 1.5 lb/cu ft(24 kg/cu m)minimum density;black fire retardant coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min(20.3 m/sec)air velocity. Rated for 250 degree F(121 degree C). Liner shall conform to the requirements for flexible duct liner material as outlined in the SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". D. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type. E. Indoor Jacket:glass cloth,minimum 6x6 weave/inch(6x6 weave/25 min)4.3 ounces per square yard(145 g/sq m). Adhere and coated with Foster's 30-36 coating. F. Outdoor Jacket:Aluminum Jacket,ASTM B209;0.020 inch(0.51 mm)thick;smooth finish. Properly install with sealing compounds,aluminum band joint straps,etc.,to make installation weathertight. G. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to UL 723. H. Impale Anchors:Galvanized steel, 12 gage(2.5 mm),self-adhesive pad. I. Joint Tape:2-1/2"(63 mm)wide pressure sensitive tape to match vapor barrier facing. J. Tie Wire:Annealed steel, 16 gage(1.5 mm). Engineering Associates Ductwork Insulation 15290-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved. B. Clean surfaces for adhesives. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier. C. Exterior Insulation(Type A or Type B)Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. D. Liner(Type C)Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with mechanical fasteners on 15 inch(375 mm)centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 20 inches(500 mm). Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 2. Ductwork dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase ductwork to allow for insulation thickness. 3. Omit liner for a distance of approximately 6"where dampers are installed in ducts to permit proper fit of dampers. 4. Omit liner for approximately 6"where reheat coils are installed in ducts. 5. Seal all leading edges of liner,including at duct joint,coils and dampers,with a thick coat of fire- retardant adhesive to prevent erosion. E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. F. Ductwork required to be lined and is located inside and concealed is not required to be externally insulated. Outside ductwork and interior/exposed ductwork shall be wrapped as specified whether lined or not. G. Cover all variable air volume and mixing box necks as required for inside/concealed supply air ducts. H. Cover top of supply air diffusers above ceilings not in a return air plenum as required for inside/concealed supply air ducts. I. Cover hot water reheat coils when installed in ductwork or connected to terminal boxes in air conditioning systems as required for inside/concealed supply air ducts. J. Cover locations where lined ductwork is discontinued for dampers as required for inside/concealed supply air ducts. K. Plenums shall be insulated with type"B"insulation with thickness and cover as required for associated duct system type. Engineering Associates Ductwork Insulation 15290-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II L. All supply air conditioning ducts shall be insulated continuous through floors,walls,ceilings and roofs. M. Return air ducts located in return air plenums or above ceilings in areas with floors above,do not require exterior insulation. 3.03 SCHEDULE INSULATION DUCTWORK TYPE THICKNESS FINISH Inch Supply Air Ducts(inside,concealed) A 1-1/2 FSK Supply Air Ducts(inside,exposed,rectangular) B 1 FSK&INDOOR JACKET Supply Air Ducts(inside,exposed,round or oval) A 1-1/2 FSK&INDOOR JACKET Return Air Duct(inside,concealed) A 1 FSK Return Air Duct(inside,exposed) B 1 FSK&INDOOR JACKET Lined Ductwork(where indicated on drawings) C 1 - END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Ductwork Insulation 15290-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer and vent piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. E. Excavation and Backfill PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A74 service weight.Fittings:Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot,CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe(where permitted by local authority):ASTM D2665 schedule 40 hub&spigot. Fittings:PVC. Joints: elastomeric gaskets. Number 18 copper tracer wire. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A74 service weight.Fittings:Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot,CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe(where permitted by local authority):ASTM D2665 schedule 40 hub&spigot. Fittings: PVC. Joints: solvent welded. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A74,service weight. Fittings:Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot,CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe:CISPI 301,hubless,service weight.Fittings:Cast iron. Joints:Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies CISPI 310. C. Copper Pipe(2"or smaller):ASTM B306,DWV.Fittings:ANSI/ASME B16.23.Joints:ANSI/ASTM B32,solder. D. PVC Pipe(where permitted by local authority):ASTM D2665 schedule 40 hub&spigot. Fittings: PVC. Joints: solvent welded. 2.04 VENT PIPING,BURIED A. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A74,service weight. Fittings:Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot,CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. Engineering Associates Plumbing Piping 15410-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II B. PVC Pipe(where permitted by local authority):ASTM D2665 schedule 40 hub&spigot. Fittings: PVC. Joints: solvent welded. 2.05 VENT PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe:ASTM A74,service weight. Fittings:Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot,CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301,hubless,service weight.Fittings:Cast iron. Joints:Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies CISPI 310. C. Galvanized Pipe: Steel pipe,seamless galvanized,ASTM A 53,Type S,Grade B. Fittings: Malleable-iron threaded fittings,galvanized ASME B 16.3. D. Copper Pipe:ASTM B306,DWV.Fittings:ANSI/ASME B16.23. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32,solder. E. PVC Pipe(where permitted by local authority):ASTM D2665 schedule 40 hub&spigot. Fittings:PVC. Joints: solvent welded. 2.06 WATER PIPING,BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. 5"and larger: Ductile Iron Pipe:ANSI/AWWA C151. Fittings:ANSI/AWWA C110 Ductile iron,standard thickness. Joints:ANSI/AWWA C111,rubber gasket. Piping,fittings and joints shall be cement mortar lined per ANSI/AWWA C104. Exterior of piping to be covered with ANSI/AWWA C105 polyethylene encasement 10 mil. B. 4"and less:Copper tubing:ASTM B88,Type K hard drawn.Fittings:ANSI/ASME B 16.22,wrought copper.Joints: AWS A5.8,braze. 2.07 WATER PIPING,BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing:ASTM B88,Type K hard drawn.Fittings;ANSI/ASME B16.22,wrought copper.Joints: AWS A5.8,braze. Under building,use type K soft copper tubing with no joints under slab. B. Ductile Iron Pipe:ANSI/AWWA C151. Fittings:ANSI/AWWA C110 Ductile iron,standard thickness. Joints:ANSI/AWWA Cl 11,rubber gasket.Piping,fittings and joints shall be cement mortar lined per ANSI/AWWA C 104.Exterior of piping to be covered with ANSI/AWWA C 105 polyethylene encasement 10 mil. 2.08 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. 4"and smaller:Copper Tubing:ASTM B88,Type L hard drawn.Fittings:ANSI/ASME B16.22,wrought copper. Joints:ANSI/ASTM B32,solder,Grade 95TA. 2.09 FLANGES,UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping;bronze unions for copper pipe,soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping;bronze flanges for copper piping;neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded to asbestos. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,designed Engineering Associates Plumbing Piping 15410-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II to permit some angular deflection,contraction,and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket;steel bolts,nuts,and washers;galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. D. Dielectric Connections:Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,copper solder end,water impervious isolation barrier. 2.10 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: Crane,Hammond, Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,Milwaukee,Nibco,Powell, Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Up to 2 Inches: MSS-SP-80,Bronze body,rising stem and handwheel,inside screw,taper solid wedge disc,threaded ends, 125 lb.S.W.P., C. Over 2 Inches:AWWA C509,Iron body,bronze trim,rising stem OS&Y,resilient wedge,flanged ends, 125 lb. S.W.P.Epoxy coated inside and out.Valves shown with chain on drawings to be chain operated. 2.11 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: Crane,Hammond, Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,Milwaukee,Nibco,Powell,Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Up to 2-1/2 Inches:FS-WW-V-35,Bronze body,stainless steel ball,teflon seats and stuffing box ring,lever handle,(balancing/memory stops where indicated),threaded ends, 125 lb. S.W.P. 2.12 CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: Crane,Hammond, Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,Milwaukee,Nibco,Powell,Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Horizontal Swing Check: 1. Up to 2 Inches:MSS-SP-80,Bronze,horizontal swing check with bronze disc,screwed ends, 125 lb S.W.P. 2. Over 2 Inches:MSS-SP-71,Iron body,bronze trim,horizontal swing check with bronze disc, flanged ends, 125 lb S.W.P. Epoxy coated inside and out. 2.13 RELIEF VALVES A. Manufacturers: Watts,Cash,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Bronze body,teflon seat,steel stem and springs,automatic,direct pressure actuated,capacities ASME certified and labeled. 2.14 CURB BOX A. Manufacturers: Mueller,Clow,Hayes,Ford,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Mueller No.H-10364 two piece adjustable,sliding type,cast iron with cover marked"water",length to suit job requirements. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Engineering Associates Plumbing Piping 15410-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever joining dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not to interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. H. Provide drain valves at low point of water systems. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover unless indicated otherwise. All non-metallic piping shall be buried with number 18 copper tracer wire. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing,scrape,brush clean,and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare exposed pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories not prefinished,ready for fmish painting. Not required in Mechanical equipment rooms. L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal,not inverted. M. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 2 inches and smaller,minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw. N. Make proper connections to all items of equipment in the Contract as recommended by the Manufacturer or as detailed on the Drawings. O. All joints in copper piping above ground shall be made with 95-5 solder. Solders and fluxes containing lead are prohibited. All copper piping below ground shall be made with Silfos. P. Make all changes of directions with fittings,rather than bending. Q. Install thermometers and gauges so they may be read from the floor level. R. All valves and unions to be installed so as to be accessible thru ceiling,access panels,etc. S. Where piping is installed in accessible chases,keep all piping to sides of chase,except portions which must necessarily be in center of chase. Offset vents to side immediately above connection to waste line. T. Where pipe drops occur in block walls,pipes to enter and leave walls at block joints. Coordinate with General Contractor. U. Properly support all relief valve discharge piping and provide no more than one 90 degree ell. V. Bull head connections are strictly prohibited. W. At the end of each day's work and otherwise as required or directed,provide caps and/or plugs at all openings in piping for protection. Particular attention must be given to avoid the possibility of any foreign Engineering Associates Plumbing Piping 15410-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II materials entering the pipes,whether it be inadvertent or with malicious intent. X. Copper piping exposed to soil and concrete at floor penetrations shall be protected with a thick tape wrap or other similar material made for this purpose. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. No welded connections shall be made to valves or equipment. C. Install gate valves with caps at all low points of system for drainage of system. D. All exposed piping including traps shall be chrome plated. 3.03 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements"for additional requirements. B. After work has been completed but before pipe covering has been applied,the Contractor shall test the systems as follows. At these pressures,the circulation shall be free,piping free of leaks and no drop in pressure over the test period shall occur. System Test Medium Pressure Test Period (psig) (hr) 1. Water Lines Water 125 6 2. Drainage Systems "IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE PLUMBING CODES" 3.04 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete,flushed and clean. B. After domestic water lines are all installed,sterilize lines,including outside services as prescribed by AWWA-C-651. Sterilization shall be done under the immediate on the job supervision of a water testing laboratory regularly engaged in the service and shall be done per their instructions. All fees for testing and test equipment shall be paid by this Contractor. C. Furnish a Certificate of Sterilization and Approval for Human Consumption signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State regularly in the employ of the Testing Laboratory. Certification shall be furnished to the Architect. D. Sterilization:Chlorinating material either liquid chlorine meeting AWWA Standard B301,sodium or calcium hypochlorite meeting AWWA Standard B300. E. With all outlets closed,fill system to working pressure and close valve at supply main. F. A cleaning solution containing not less than 150 parts per million of chlorine shall be introduced into the system. G. Each outlet,hot and/or cold,shall be tested during fill to prove the presence of chlorine at the outlet and valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times during the disinfecting time period. H. Water piping systems shall remain filled for a period of 24 hours and each outlet shall be again tested and Engineering Associates Plumbing Piping 15410-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II shall produce not less than 100 parts per million of chlorine at the end of the retention period. I. All outlets shall be opened wide and the main supply valves opened,flushing system with water until chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million or until approved by the Health Department.Flush drain valves. J. After final flushing all aerators on plumbing brass shall be removed,cleaned and reinstalled. K. Sterilization test may be performed at the same time the pressure test is placed on the system. 3.05 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES (The following shall be utilized where these requirements are not established elsewhere(i.e. Other specification sections in this contract,local authority/code requirements,etc.). A. Backfill Materials: 1. Sand:Obtain bank sand that is free from clay lumps,organic and other deleterious material,and having a plasticity index of 4 or less. 2. Earth: Free from roots,rocks larger than 3 inches and building debris with a plasticity index of less than 20. B. Excavation: 1. Safety procedures as described by OSHA shall be followed during excavation and while trench is open. 2. Dig the trench to the proper depth as indicated or required. Trench depth shall not exceed 6 inches below bottom of pipe and shall be properly graded to provide uniform bearing support. Limit clear space on either side of the pipe to 9 inches at and below the top of the pipe. C. Bedding and Initial Backfill 1. Bedding shall be made with bank sand as described above properly compacted to provide a 6 inch bed. Initial backfill to also be made with bank sand properly compacted to 12 inches above utility pipe. Deposit materials in layers not to exceed 6 inches and compact with hand tampers to 95%of maximum density ASTM D698"Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort". Initial backfill under roadways to be compacted to 95%of maximum density per ASTM DI557"Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(50,000 ft-lbf/cu.ft.). D. Final Backfill 1. Earth as described above deposited in layers not to exceed 12 inches compacted to 90%of maximum density per ASTM D698"Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort".Backfill under roadways to be compacted to 95%of maximum density per ASTM D 1557"Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (50,000 ft-lbf/cu.ft.). Final grades shall be coordinated with existing conditions or new grades as required. E. Backfill for Appurtenances(i.e. Manholes.Etc.) 1. After manhole or other appurtenance has been set and cured as required,backfill shall be made with earth(fmal backfill)as described above. F. Repair of damaged surfaces 1. Where utility work by this Contractor is the only work being done and no other surface repair has been planned(i.e.utility work through existing lawns,paved areas,etc.that are intended to remain) This contractor shall then repair work to match existing. G. Depth of utilities shall be a minimum of 3 feet below grade. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Plumbing Piping 15410-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Floor drains B. Floor sinks C. Roof drains D. Downspout nozzles E. Cleanouts F. Strainers G. Backflow preventors. H. Water hammer arresters. I. Thermostatic mixing valve J. Hose bibbs and hydrants. K. Trap Primer L. Thermal Expansion Absorber M. Access Doors N. Thermometers O. Pressure Gauges PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam,Wade,J.R. Smith,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. FD.1:ANSI A112.21.1;(floor drains in finished areas,including Showers):Zurn ZN-415,cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange and weepholes,bottom caulk outlet with type B,nickel bronze adjustable strainer. Furnish with clamping collar except floor drains in on-grade locations. Sizes 1-1/2 inches to 6 inches,refer to drawings for required size. Furnish with trap primer connection. C. FD.2:ANSI A112.21.1;(equipment floor drains in finished areas): Zurn ZN-415,cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange and weepholes,bottom caulk outlet with type E,nickel bronze,round,adjustable strainer with funnel. Inside caulk outlet. Sizes 2 inches to 4 inches,refer to drawings for required size. Furnish with trap primer connection. Engineering Associates Plumbing Specialties 15430-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II D. FD.3:ANSI A 112.21.1;(equipment room floor drains):Zurn Z-610,cast iron square hopper floor drain with double drainage flange,weepholes, 12"x 12"(305 min x 305 mm)top and removable shallow sediment bucket. Inside caulk outlet,lacquered top. Sizes 2 inches(51 min)to 6 inches(152 mm),refer to drawings for required size. Furnish with trap primer connection. 2.02 FLOOR SINKS(FS) A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam,Wade,J.R.Smith,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. FS:Zurn Z-1901, 12"x12"cast iron `SANI-FLOR' Receptor,8 inch deep sump,white acid resisting enamel body interior,nickel bronze square frame,loose-set grate,seepage pane and aluminum anti-splash interior dome strainer. Partial grate to be furnished to facilitate connection from indirect equipment drains. Sizes 2 inches to 4 inches,refer to drawings for required size. Furnish with trap primer connection. 2.03 ROOF DRAINS(RD) A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam,Wade,J.R.Smith,Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Roof Drains(RD):ANSI A112.21.2,Zurn ZA-163,cast iron roof drain and overflow drain combination with sump receiver and flange, deck clamps, removable aluminum mushroom type domes, flashing clamp and perforated gravel guard. Sizes 2 inch(51 mm)to 8 inch(203 min),refer to drawings for required size. 2.04 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES(DN) A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam,Wade,J.R.Smith,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Downspout Nozzle(DS):ANSI A112.21.2,Zurn ZARB-199,plain bronze body downspout nozzle with pipe connection to suit roof drain down spouts. Sizes 2 inch(51mm)to 8 inch(203 mm), refer to drawings for required size. 2.05 CLEANOUTS(WCO,FCO,DCO,GCO) A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam,Wade,J.R. Smith,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. (WCO) In walls of finished areas, use cleanout tee and provide cleanout and access cover similar to Zurn ZABN-1460-8,with round polished stainless steel access cover complete with securing screw and bronze hex- head plug. Size to suit cleanout. C. (FCO) 1. In floors of finished areas,provide frame and access cover similar to Zurn ZN-1400-2,cast iron cleanout with round heavy duty scoriated nickel bronze top (screwdown type), adjustable level, inside caulk connection,bronze plug and membrane clamp. 2. In exposed concrete floors of finished areas,provide frame and access cover similar to Zurn Z-1425-25, cast iron cleanout with round,extra heavy duty,scoriated cast iron top,adjustable to finished floor or grade level,vandal proof screw,bronze plug,inside caulk connection. 3. In vehicular areas,provide frame and access cover similar to Zurn Z-1420-27,cast iron cleanout with round,heavy duty, scoriated,non-tilt cast iron top,adjustable to finished floor or grade level,vandal proof screw,bronze plug,inside caulk connection. D. (DCO,GCO)Outside cleanouts shall be similar to Zurn Z-1425-25,cast iron cleanout with round,extra heavy duty,scoriated cast iron top,adjustable to finished floor or grade level,vandal proof screw,bronze plug,inside caulk connection. Cleanout shall be supported by a minimum 24"x24" x 6 inch thick concrete pad with#4 Engineering Associates Plumbing Specialties 15430-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II reinforcing each way by this contractor. Cleanouts located in concrete paved areas may serve for support in lieu of above mentioned pad. E. All other cleanouts shall be similar to Zurn ZAB-1470 and be flush with floor or wall and have counter-sunk brass head. F. All cleanouts installed in carpeted areas shall be provided with vandal-proof carpet markers. 2.06 STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: Sarco, Dunham-Bush, Armstrong, Mueller, Wheatley, Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Sizes 1/2 inch to 2 inch,threaded,bronze body,stainless steel screen 40 mesh- 1/64 inch openings,250 psi WWP at 210 degree F(99 degree C). C. Sizes over 2 inch,flanged,cast iron body,stainless steel screen 40 mesh-1/64 inch openings, 200 psi WWP at 150 degree F(66 degree C). Epoxy coated inside and out. 2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: Watts, Clayton, Febco, Aero, Lawler, Hersey, Wilkins, Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:ANSI/ASSE 1013,AWWA C506; 3/4 inch to 2 inch shall be similar to Watts 009, rated for 175 psi and 180 degree F(82 degree C),bronze body construction,NPT connections, pressure differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check valves. The assembly shall include two tightly closings shut-off gate valves before and after the device,test cocks and a protective strainer upstream of the No. 1 gate valve.The reduced pressure zone backflow preventer shall have all access port covers secured with stainless steel cap screws which are bolted to valve body. Furnish backflow preventer with Watts No.909AG series fixed air gap. C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013, AWWA C506; 2-1/2 inch to 10 inch shall be similar to Watts 909,rated for 175 psi and 110 degree F(44 degree C),FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron check valve bodies with bronze seats,and FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron relief valve with stainless steel trim, FDA approved epoxy coated strainer, outside stem and yoke gate valve shut-offs, test cocks. Furnish backflow preventer with Watts No.909AG series fixed air gap. D. Double Check Valve Assemblies:ANSI/ASSE 1015;3/4 inch to 2 inch shall be similar to Watts 709,rated for 175 psi and 110 degree F(44 degree C),bronze body construction,stainless steel check seats,NPT connections, gate valve shut-offs,bronze strainer. E. Double Check Valve Assemblies:ANSI/ASSE 1015;2-1/2 inch to 10 inch shall be similar to Watts 709,rated for 175 psi and 110 degree F(44 degree C),FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron check valve bodies with bronze seats,test cocks,FDA approved epoxy coated strainer,outside stem and yoke gate valve shut-offs. 2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS(SHOCK ABSORBERS) A. Manufacturers:Zurn,Josam,Wade,J.R.Smith,Watts,Sioux Chief,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. ASSE Standard 1010 sized in accordance with PDI WH-201,PDI certified,shall be similar to Wade Shokstop, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig working pressure. Engineering Associates Plumbing Specialties 15430-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 2.09 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE(MV or Noted) A. Manufacturers:Zurn/Wilkins,Watts,Leonard,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Master Mixer-Only where indicated-ASSE 1017 Wilkins ZW-1017XL or Watts LFMMV,NSF rated,lead free,tempering mixing valve,all bronze body with brass and stainless steel internal operating components. 1 inch CU sweat connections, rated at 18 GPM with 105 to 110 degree F outlet temperature. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Lavatories or other Hand Washing Fixtures-ASSE 1070 Lead Free equivalent to Watts LFMMV-M 1 or Watts LFUSG-B-M2,brass 4-port"H"body.All valves to be lead free and have integral check valves,integral screens and adjustment nut with locking feature.Minimum flow 0.25-0.5 GPM. 2.10 HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers:Zurn,Josam,Wade,J.R. Smith,Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Wall/Exterior/Encased(HB.1)-Zurn Z-1320 ECOLOTROL encased,Anti-Siphon,wall hydrant complete with Integral Backflow Preventer, non-freeze type, with bronze casing, all bronze interior parts and non-turning operating rod with free-floating compression closure valve,length to suit wall. Face shall be stainless steel and complete with operating key. Unit shall have 3/4 inch American National Straight Thread Hose Connection. C. Interior Exposed Hose Bibbs(HB.2)-All interior hose bibbs shall be rough brass angle pattern,screwed,boiler drain valves with packing nuts,3/4 inch American National Straight Thread Hose Connection and Watts 8A (ASSE No. 1011)non-removable type vacuum breaker. Equivalent vacuum breakers by manufacturers listed under Backflow Preventers above may be furnished at the contractor's option. 2.11 TRAP PRIMER A. Manufacturers:Zurn,Josam,Wade,J.R. Smith,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Zurn Z-1022,Sani-Gard Automatic Trap Primer,all bronze body with integral vacuum breaker,non-limiting internal operating assembly with gasketed bronze cover. 1/2 inch IPS union connections,rated at 125 psi and 110 degree F(43 degree C). 2.12 THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBER A. Manufacturers: Amtrol,Watts,Equivalent manufacturer's at the Contractors Option. B. Diaphragm-type pre-pressurized expansion tank specifically designed for potable hot water systems. ASME rated for 150 psig and 200 degree F working pressure. Tank construction shall be in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Outer steel shell with rigid polypropylene liner and heavy duty Butyl Diaphragm. All internal wetted parts to comply with FDA regulations and approvals. 2.13 ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers:Zurn,Josam, Wade,J.R.Smith,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Concrete and Masonry Walls-Zurn Z-5000,universal door with rounded safety corners,one piece frame with hinged door, 1-1/4 inch mounting flange, flush mounted, concealed locking mechanism with key operated cylinder lock,steel construction, 16 gauge panel, 18 gauge frame,inside latch release,unit to be furnished with prime finish. Size as indicated on drawings. C. Drywall Surfaces-Zurn Z-5040,flush access door with rounded safety corners,one piece frame and hinged door, drywall bead, concealed locking mechanism with key operated cylinder lock for wall mounting/slot Engineering Associates Plumbing Specialties 15430-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II screwdriver operator for ceiling mountings,steel construction, 14 gauge panel, 16 gauge frame, inside latch release,unit to be furnished with prime finish. Size as indicated on drawings. 2.14 THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Trerice,Ashcroft,Marsh,Weiss, Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Thermometers shall be similar to Trerice"Industrial Type"red reading mercury thermometer with 9 inch cast aluminum case,front double-strength clear glass window,straight or angle pattern as required. Provide brass separable socket. 2.15 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Manufacturers:Trerice,Ashcroft,Marsh,Weiss,Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. B. Pressure Gauges shall be similar to Weiss 4PGA-1,standard single spring,aluminum case,4-1/2 inch diameter face,gauge cock and pigtail. Range as indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface.Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Furnish and install with each floor drain a cast iron P-trap. Provide trap primer connections when indicated. E. Provide membrane clamps on all floor drains and cleanouts in floors having waterproofing membrane. F. This Contractor shall be responsible for having all drains and cleanouts flush and level with fmish floor or wall, coordinate elevations with General Contractor. All cleanouts and drains that are not level with floor or flush with walls shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.03 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Install water hammer arrestor with isolation valve at all flush valve locations with 12"x 12"access door. One(1) arrestor may serve multiple flush valves in one(1)chase. Water hammer arrestor sized and located per PDI WH-201. Arrestor to be located between the last two(2)fixtures on a branch and a maximum of 20 feet per arrestor: 1. TABLE P1: WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS No.of Flush Valves PDI WH-201 Arrestor Size a) 2to3 B b) 4to6 C c) 7to 11 D Engineering Associates Plumbing Specialties 15430-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II d) 12to 15 E e) 16 to 33 F END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Plumbing Specialties 15430-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Water closets. B. Urinals. C. Sinks D. Lavatories. E. Mop Basin. F. Drinking Fountain 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout. B. Trim:By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include fixtures,sizes,rough-in dimensions,utility sizes,trim,and finish. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FIXTURES A. Kohler B. American Standard C. Zurn D. Crane E. Delta F. Just G. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. Engineering Associates Plumbing Fixtures 15440-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FIXTURE TRIM A. Zurn B. Kohler C. American Standard D. Delta E. Crane F. Speakman G. Chicago H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FLUSH VALVES A. Zurn B. Sloan C. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-WATER CLOSET SEATS A. Bemis B. Church C. Olsonite D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FIXTURE CARRIERS A. Zurn B. Josam C. J.R. Smith D. Wade E. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—MOP BASIN A. Fiat B. Williams Engineering Associates Plumbing Fixtures 15440-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.07 WATER CLOSET(WALL MOUNTED/FLUSH VALVE/ADA/TAS COMPLIANT)-(WC.1) A. Bowl:ANSI A112.19.2;Kohler Model K-4330,wall mounted,back outlet, 1.28 gallon per flush,siphon jet, elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)top spud connection, vitreous china, china bolt caps. Fixture must meet ADA/TAS requirements. B. Flush Valve:ANSI A117.1;Sloan Regal 111-1.28 SFSM,single flush, 1 inch(25 mm)inlet,exposed chrome plated,diaphragm type,sensor activated,wall and spud flanges,adjustable tailpiece,integral supply stop and vacuum breaker. Smart Sense Technology TM provided with(4)four"C"cell alkaline batteries. C. Seat: Olsonite 95,solid white plastic(fire retardant),open front for elongated bowl,extended back,stainless steel self-sustaining hinge,without cover. D. Carrier:ANSI A112.6.1;Zurn series 1203 or 1204,horizontal or vertical carrier as required,adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud,neoprene seal. Lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.08 URINAL(WALL MOUNTED/FLUSH VALVE/ADA/TAS COMPLIANT)-(UR) A. Urinal:ANSI A112.19.2;Kohler Model K-5016-ET, 14 inch elongated rim,0.5 gallon per flush,vitreous china, wall hung siphon jet,flushing rim,integral trap,3/4 inch top spud,2 inch back outlet,wall hanger. Mounted at ADA/TAS height. Fixture must meet ADA/TAS requirements. B. Flush Valve: ANSI A117.1; Sloan Regal 186-0.5 XL SFSM, 0.5 gallon per flush, 3/4 inch inlet, exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type, sensor activated, wall and spud flanges, adjustable tailpiece, integral screwdriver stop with protective cap,and vacuum breaker. Smart Sense Technology TM provided with(4)four "C"cell alkaline batteries. C. Wall Mounted Carrier:ANSI A 112.6.1;Zurn Series ZR-1222,cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs,lugs for floor and wall attachment, adjustable support plate,threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger and bearing studs. 2.09 SINK(TRIPLE COMPARTMENT/FLOOR MOUNT)-(S.1) A. Basin:ANSI A112.19.2;Just NSFB-345 triple compartment skullery, 14 gauge,NSF Series stainless steel top and bowl with raised 1-1/2 inch rolled edge,fully coved corners,bottoms pitched to drains,93 inch x 27 inch overall,back mounted faucets,24 inch left and right side drain boards, 12 inch backsplash, 1 5/8 inch O.D. 16 gauge stainless steel legs with corrosion resistant bullet feet. B. Trim:ANSI A112.18.1;Two(2)Chicago 445-L12CP polished chrome plated brass back mounted faucet, 12 inch chrome plated swing spout, 1/4 turn ceramic disc cartridges,2.2 gpm pressure compensating aerator,2-3/8 inch vandal resistant,color coded metal wrist blade handles,2 inch continuous waste,2 inch twist handle drains with grid strainers, 1/2 inch loose key angle stops with stainless steel flexible risers and escutcheons.No hose. Furnish with'in-sink-erator'Evolution Series 3/4 HP disposer. Route indirect waste to floor sink. 2.10 SINK(SINGLE COMPARTMENT/WALL MOUNT/FOOD SERVICE)-(S.2) A. Unit:NSF;Just A-544-FS,20 gauge stainless steel,wall mounted 20 inch x 18 inch,6 inch backsplash with 2 inch return. JS-47-TGSA Gooseneck faucet and J-15-FS drain assembly included for a complete package.Z- clip mounting bracket. B. Trim: 1-1/2 inch polished chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon,1/2 inch loose key angle stops with stainless steel flexible risers and escutcheons. Engineering Associates Plumbing Fixtures 15440-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 2.11 SINK(DOUBLE COMPARTMENT/COUNTER MOUNT/ADA/TAS)-(S.3) A. Unit:Just DL-ADA-2233-A-GR, 18 gauge stainless steel,counter mounted 22 inch x 33 inch,self-rimming with fully coated underside sound deadening. J-1174-KS ADA/TAS compliant Gooseneck faucet and ADA-35 drain assembly included for a complete package.Grip Rim Plus with 300 Series Stainless steel mounting channels. B. Trim: 1-1/2 inch polished chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon,1/2 inch loose key angle stops with stainless steel flexible risers and escutcheons. 2.12 LAVATORY(WALL HUNG/PUBLIC/ADA/TAS COMPLIANT)-(LAV) A. Basin:ANSI Z124.3,Z124.6 and ANSI/ICPA SS-1-2001;Bradley MG-2/AST4 push button,wall-hung wash fountain, two user, solid surface polyester resin, vandal resistant, supplied with integral soap dispenser(s), thermostatic mixing valve,p-trap,tailpiece,flexible stainless steel supplies,stainless steel mounting frame and access panel. 2.13 MOP BASIN-(MB) A. Basin:W WP541;Acorn Engineering,Terrazzo Mop Sink,TDF-24-SSC square or TNC-24 neo-corner,24 x 24 x 12 inch deep with 6 inch drop front, one piece precast terrazzo with 2 inch wide shoulders, cast in gray portland cement with terrazzo chips,stainless steel caps on all curbs,3 inch integral stainless steel strainer plate. Provide P-trap to match sewer piping. Refer to drawings for appropriate selection of neo-corner or square basin. Color to be selected by Owner. B. Trim:ANSI A112.18.1;Acorn KFC rough chrome plated,5-3/4 inch vacuum breaker spout,3/4 inch hose thread outlet,pail hook with wall support,integral stop arms,2-1/2 inch metal lever or cross handles,exposed fitting,escutcheons,3 foot hose(KH36)and mop hanger(KMH). 2.14 DRINKING FOUNTAIN—(WALL HUNG/PUBLIC/ADA/TAS COMPLIANT)-(DF) A. Fountain:ANSI/NSF 61;Halsey-Taylor HRFSEBPFR(or Elkay equivalent)bi-level wall mounted drinking fountain, lead free, stainless steel deck, in-line strainer with elevated bubbler and front push-button. Both fountains shall include contour-formed basins to eliminate splashing and standing water with rounded corners and edges. Vandal resistant,chrome plated projector with hood guard and anti-squirt feature. Furnish with freeze resistant boxes,which mount behind the wall. Unit must meet ADA/TAS mounting requirements. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap,easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops,reducers,and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. Engineering Associates Plumbing Fixtures 15440-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Division 7,color to match fixture. F. Install all fixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. G. Refer to Architectural Drawings for wall hung fixture heights. Where fixtures are required to meet TAS requirements,mount at height to meet these requirements. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.04 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with following table of minimum sizes for particular fixtures. Sizes shown on drawings shall take precedence over sizes indicated below. HOT WATER COLD WATER Inch Inch 1. Water Closets(flush valve) - 1 2. Urinals - 3/4 3. Lavatories 1/2(tempered water) 4. Mop Basins 1/2 1/2 5. Sinks 1/2 1/2 6. Showers 1/2(tempered water) END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Plumbing Fixtures 15440-5 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Water heaters. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140-Supports and Anchors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME Section 8D-Pressure Vessels. B. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. C. ANSI/UL 1453-Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. National Sanitation Foundation(NSF). 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME). 3. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors(NBBPVI). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers'Association(NEMA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories(UL). 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NSF,ANSI/NFPA 54,ANSI/NFPA 70,requirements for water heaters. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. C. Include dimensions of tanks,tank lining methods,anchors,attachments,lifting points,tappings,and drains. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. E. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Division 1 that pressure vessels meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Engineering Associates Plumbing Equipment 15450-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include operation,maintenance,and inspection data,replacement part numbers and availability,and service depot location and telephone number. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in Place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide three year manufacturer's non-prorated warranty for domestic water heater and tank under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide a one year warranty for all other equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-WATER HEATERS A. Bradford White B. A.O. Smith C. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 WATER HEATER(ELECTRIC TANK TYPE) A. Water heater-Refer to drawing for manufacture,model number and capacity, controls(thermostat,high temperature cut-off),drain valve,baked enamel finish,3 year warranty. Unit shall be UL listed and meet ASHRAE standards 90A-1980 for energy efficiencies. B. Install service valves unions on inlet and outlet connections. C. Install ASME temperature-pressure relief valve set at 210 degree F and 125 psig. Extend discharge full size to mop basin. Set water supply at 120 degree F. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA,NSF,NFPA,UL requirements. B. Pipe relief valves to floor drain or other approved receptacle. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Plumbing Equipment 15450-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15535 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Piping and Pipe Fittings. B. Refrigeration Specialties. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15130-Firestopping B. Section 15140-Support and Anchors C. Section 15190-Mechanical Identification. D. Section 15260-Piping Insulation. E. Section 15787-Split System Air Conditioning Units. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI B 16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings. B. ANSI B 16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. C. ASTM B32-Solder Metal D. ASTM B 1280-Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration field Service. E. AWS A5.8-Brazing Filler Metal. F. MSS SP-58-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials,Design and Manufacture. G. MSS SP-69-Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application. H. ASHRAE 15-1992-Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer shall have current Refrigeration License indicating certification in this type of work. B. Split System Components:Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly,dimensions,and field connection details. Engineering Associates Refrigeration Piping and Specialties 15535-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II C. Product data shall indicate dimensions,weights,capacities,ratings,and finishes of materials. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include parts lists. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1 with factory-installed shipping plugs. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage. I.08ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work to be performed in accordance with EPA requirements for handling refrigerants. 1.09 EXTRA STOCK A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Refrigeration Systems,Above ground: 1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 1280,Type L,ACR Hard Drawn 2. Fittings:ANSI B16.22,wrought copper. 3. Joints: AWS A5.8,BCuP silver braze. B. Refrigeration Systems,Below ground: 1. (Contractor's option to provide pre-charged tubing) 2. Copper Tube: ASTM B 1280,Type L,ACR Soft Drawn 3. Fittings:ANSI B 16.22,wrought copper. 4. Joints: AWS A5.8,BCuP silver braze. C. Specialties 1. Sight Glass 2. Filter Drier 2.02 GENERAL A. Piping and tubing shall be installed so as to prevent vibration and stress at joints and connections. B. Provide all additional refrigerant required for proper charging of the system. Engineering Associates Refrigeration Piping and Specialties 15535-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install pipe and tubing such that it is not subject to damage from external sources. C. Cut and ream pipe and tubing to prevent burrs and debris inside finished joints. Braze joints in pipe and tubing. During brazing of pipe and tubing connections,purge interior of pipe and tubing continuously with nitrogen. D. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain proper slope for oil return. E. Effect changes in size with reducing fittings. Make changes in direction of required turns or offsets with fittings. F. Provide pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass under ground,through walls,floors,roofs, and partitions. Finish flush at both ends. Extend 2 inches(50 min)above fmished floors.Pack space between pipe or tubing and sleeve,and calk. G. Pressure test and evacuate system prior to covering. H. Insulate piping in accordance with Section 15260 after pressure testing. I. Seal all building penetrations and make weather tight. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Refrigeration Piping and Specialties 15535-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15787 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refrigerant cooling coil and condenser. B. Controls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15890-Ductwork B. Section 15885-Air Cleaning 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15-Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. B. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90A-Energy conservation in new building design standard. C. ANSI/NFPA 90B-Installation of warm air heating and air conditioning systems. D. ARI 210-Unitary air conditioning equipment. E. ARI 270-Sound rating of outdoor unitary equipment. F. ARI 360-Commercial and industrial unitary air conditioning equipment testing and rating standard. G. ANSI/ASHRAE/37-Testing unitary air conditioning equipment. H. ANSI/NFPA 70- 1990-National Electric Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly,unit dimensions,required clearances,construction details,and field connection details. B. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics,and gauges and finishes of materials. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit product data of filter media,filter performance data,filter assembly,and filter frames. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. Engineering Associates Split System Air Conditioning Units 15787-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions,installation instructions,maintenance and repair data,and parts listings. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. C. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting frames are in place, ready for immediate installation of units. 1.07 WARRANTY: PROVIDE 5 YEAR COMPRESSOR WARRANTY 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one additional set of filters(total of 2 sets). One set to be used during construction and replaced at completion of project. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier B. Trane C. Lennox 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNIT A. Provide horizontal,attic-mounted unit without heat,having refrigerant as scheduled. Indoor unit shall be self- contained,packaged,factory assembled and pre-wired,consisting of cabinet,supply fan and evaporative coil. B. Outdoor unit factory package consisting of compressor,condenser coil,condenser fan and controls. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish. B. Supply Fan:Centrifugal type,resiliently mounted with direct drive,3 speed taps minimum. C. Air Filters:2 inch thick MERV-10 disposable media in metal frames,easily removable. 2.04 EVAPORATOR COIL(INDOOR) A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. B. Provide refrigerant piping connections and factory installed thermostatic expansion valve. C. Provide drain pan,corrosion resistant with drain connection. 2.05 COMPRESSOR(OUTDOOR) Engineering Associates Split System Air Conditioning Units 15787-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II A. Provide hermetic compressor,resiliently mounted integral with condenser with positive lubrication,crankcase heater,high and low pressure safety controls,motor overload protection and filter drier. 2.06 CONDENSER(OUTDOOR) A. Air cooled condenser,aluminum fin and copper tube coil,with direct drive aluminum blades axial propeller fan, galvanized fan guard and coil hail guards. 2.07 OPERATING CONTROLS A. All controls shall be furnished with the unit controls to be low voltage(24 volts or less). B. Unit to be controlled by a programmable thermostat with single stage cooling operation.Furnish and install a remote sensor(where indicated)compatible with the thermostat. All thermostats without remote sensors shall be furnished with lockable covers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide flexible duct connections for ducts at unit. C. Mount fan coil unit horizontally above chase. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Split System Air Conditioning Units 15787-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15870 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. In-Line exhausters. B. Roof Exhausters. C. Cabinet and Ceiling exhaust fans. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15890-Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99-Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300-Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 -Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. SMACNA-Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings:Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301,tested to AMCA 300,and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication:Conform to AMCA 99. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide product data roof exhausters. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS—IN-LINE EXHAUSTERS Engineering Associates Power Ventilators 15870-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II A. Cook B. Greenheck C. Substitutions with approval. 2.02 IN-LINE EXHAUSTERS A. Unit:As scheduled,direct drive centrifugal wheel,with resilient mounted motor;corrosion resistant birdscreen at connection of outlet duct to louver;duct connections and rubber isolation hangers supported from structure;secured with stainless steel bolts and screws.Fans exhausting corrosive areas shall have baked enamel or other corrosion resistant finishes and the motor shall be totally enclosed. B. Motors shall be rated at the HP and RPM necessary to meet the scheduled conditions,with voltage and phase as indicated. Motor shall be mounted to eliminate vibration. Motor shall have a drive arrangement consistent with the scheduled equipment with permanent lubrication and thermal protection,designed for efficient operation and low noise at the scheduled condition.Motor shall be totally enclosed with an external rotor in corrosive environment application. C. Backdraft Damper:Gravity activated,aluminum multiple blade construction,felt edged with nylon bearings. D. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired,non-fusible,in housing for thermal overload protected motor. Unit shall include a built-in adjustable thermostat. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-ROOF EXHAUSTERS A. Cook B. Broan C. Fantech D. Substitutions with approval. 2.04 ROOF EXHAUSTERS A. Unit:Direct drive propeller style precision balanced blade,with metal dome.Mesh birdscreen;square base flashing and gasket or caulking;secured with stainless steel self sealing screws.OR other means acceptable to the roof installer.General purpose fans to be aluminum construction.Fans exhausting corrosive areas may be aluminum or other material,but shall have baked enamel or other corrosion resistant finishes and the motor shall be totally enclosed.Refer to scheduled equipment. B. Motors shall be rated at the HP and RPM necessary to meet the scheduled conditions,with voltage and phase as indicated. Motor shall be mounted to eliminate vibration. Motor shall have a drive arrangement consistent with the scheduled equipment with permanent lubrication and thermal protection,designed for efficient operation and low noise at the scheduled condition. C. Roof Flashing:23 gage metal flashing as part of the fan. May be trimmed to fit between the metal roof flutes. Separate roof curb to be provided where scheduled model number indicates. D. Disconnect Switch:Factory wired,non-fusible,in housing for thermal overload protected motor.Unit shall include a built-in adjustable thermostat when available. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS Engineering Associates Power Ventilators 15870-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II A. Reversomatic B. Cook C. Greenheck 2.06 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Centrifugal Fan Unit:Direct driven,with galvanized steel housing lined with ''V2"(13 mm)acoustic insulation,resilient mounted motor,gravity backdraft damper in discharge. B. Disconnect Switch:Factory wired,non-fusible,in housing for thermal overload protected motor. C. Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel finish. D. Furnish with wall louver or roof cap as indicated on drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure wall exhausters with screws to suit wall construction. C. Weather proofing shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Power Ventilators 15870-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15885 AIR CLEANING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Filters B. Filter frames. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15787—Split System Air Conditioning Units B. Section 15890-Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE 52.2-2012-Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Filter media shall be ANSI/UL 900 listed,Class 1,as approved by local authorities. B. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer. C. Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1 on filter media,filter performance data,filter assembly and filter frames. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include instructions for operation,changing,and periodic cleaning. 1.07 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one extra set of filters(total of 2 sets). 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. Engineering Associates Air Cleaning 15885-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glasfloss B. Air Guard C. Eco Air 2.02 DISPOSABLE,EXTENDED AREA PANEL FILTERS A. Media: Glasfloss Z-Line HV,extended surface,thermally bonded,reinforced synthetic fibers pleated in a tapered radial configuration;supported by and laminated to a heavy-duty,galvanized,rust-resistant metal backing;enclosed in heavy-duty beverage board frame;2"deep filter of nominal size to fit unit. Furnish 1" deep filters for filter return air grilles. B. Rating: ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-2012;MERV 10,maximum 0.27" static pressure drop at 500 FPM for 2" filter. C. Holding frames shall provide a maximum 1%leakage rate at 3"static pressure drop. Frames shall be suitable for application to allow for easy replacement of filters. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install air filters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt,rubber,or neoprene gaskets. C. Where indicated,install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Air Cleaning 15885-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK PART I -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ducts. B. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140-Supports and Anchors: Sleeves. B. Section 15290-Duct Insulation. C. Section 15910-Ductwork Accessories. D. Section 15936-Air inlets and Outlets. E. Section 15990-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 90-Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Iron or Steel Articles. B. ASTM A 167-Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip. C. ASTM A 525-General Requirements for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A 527-Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)by Hot-Dip Process,Lock Forming Quality. E. ASTM B209-Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. G. NFPA 90B-Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. H. NFPA 96-Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooling Equipment. I. SMACNA-Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. J. SMACNA-High Pressure Duct Construction Standards. K. UL 181 -Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts,maintain sizes inside lining. B. Low Pressure:2 inch WG(500 Pa)positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm(10 m/sec). All low pressure ductwork shall be constructed per SMACNA standards to meet these requirements. Engineering Associates Ductwork 15890-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 11 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 96 standards. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. Ducts exposed to corrosive air shall be non-metallic as indicated on the drawings.Alternatively,the contractor may install metallic ducts coated with a corrosion resistant PVC or similar fmish that otherwise comply with the size requirements indicated on the drawings. This corrosion resistant requirement also applies to the sections listed below. B. Steel Ducts:ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet,lock-forming quality,having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft(382 g/sq m)for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. All exposed round ducts shall be spiral lockseam construction of gauges as recommended by SMACNA and shall be as manufactured by United Sheet Metal,Lindab,Semco,or Eastern. Shop fabricated duct is acceptable as long as the manufacturing standards are equal to or better than those listed. D. All fittings shall be manufactured from 20 gauge thru 36 inches, 18 gauge for 37 inch thru 50 inch, and 16 gauge over 51 inch zinc-coated steel with continuous corrosion resistant welds. E. All 90 degree elbows in sizes 3 inch through 8 inch diameter shall be die-stamped for minimum air friction loss with continuous corrosion-resistant welds. F. Elbows 9 inch and over shall be 5-piece fabrication. G. Tees and laterals-low loss conical type fittings straight or reducing as required. H. Couplings,end caps,slip joints,concentric reducer and transitions to be standard fittings. I. Flexible duct shall comply with NFPA requirements,Pamphlet 90A,and shall be UL listed with flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. Duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly composed of an inner foil skrim kraft liner providing an air seal and bonded permanently to corrosion resistant coated steel wire helix and 1 inch(25 mm)thick fiber glass insulating blanket and low permeability outer vapor barrier of fiber glass reinforced metalized film laminate. 1. Flexible duct shall be terminal duct for supply air system and shall not exceed 8 feet in length. Do not make more than one(1)90 degree bend with flexible duct. Bend radius shall be a minimum of two(2) times duct diameter. 2. Flexible duct shall be Thermaflex or equivalent. Engineering Associates Ductwork 15890-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 3. Duct shall be rated for minimum 10 inch W.G.(2487 Pa)internal working pressure,for all duct sizes. J. All fan flexible connections shall be made with commercial grade neoprene coated glass fabric(heavy duty). K. Fasteners:Rivets,bolts,or sheet metal screws. L. Sealant:Non-hardening,water resistant,fire resistive,compatible with mating materials;liquid used alone or with tape,or heavy mastic. All duct sealing compounds,mastics and duct tape shall meet NFPA 90A standards and shall be UL listed with ratings not to exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke development. M. Hanger Rod: Steel,galvanized;threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuously threaded. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks,except as indicated. Provide duct material,gages,reinforcing,and sealing for 2 inch W.G.(500 Pa) operating pressures. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. C. Construct T's,bends,and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used,provide turning vanes. D. Increase duct sizes gradually,not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees;convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area,split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape. G. Seal all seams and joints in aluminum ducts. All ducts to be watertight. Pitch ducts to low points and drain all low point in the system. H. Install flexible connections in all duct connections to fans and air handling units,unless otherwise noted. I. All duct joints in duct systems shall be made air tight. Duct tape or joint tape may be used to seal joints. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers,etc. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems. Pilot tube openings to be capped with plastic test plug. B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Engineering Associates Ductwork 15890-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II 3.03 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL 1. Low Pressure Supply Air Steel(galvanized) 2. Return Air Steel(galvanized) 3. General Exhaust Air Steel(galvanized) 4. Chemical Exhaust Air Corrosion Resistant(PVC) 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air,clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters,or bypass during cleaning. Duct cleaning to take place prior to any painting being started. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Ductwork 15890-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control(manual)dampers. B. Gravity backdraft dampers. C. Ceiling and wall access doors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15890-Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA-Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL(MANUAL)DAMPERS. A. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 1.5 sq. ft. (0.14 sq. m.)face area and all round ducts per SMACNA low pressure duct construction standards. B. Rectangular dampers larger than 1.5 sq. ft.(0.14 sq.m.)face area shall be Ruskin Type MD-35/OB opposed blade with molded synthetic bearings,6"wide(152 mm), 16 gauge(1.6 mm)galvanized steel blades,extended shaft and linkage. Equivalent dampers by American Warming and Ventilating or Air Balance may be furnished at the Contractor's option. C. Provide locking,quadrant regulators on all manual dampers. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets,bases,or adapters. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Ruskin B. Air Balance C. Arrow Engineering Associates Ductwork Accessories 15910-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II D. American Warming and Ventilating E. Vent Products F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.03 GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Based on Ruskin Co.Type CBD-6 heavy duty gravity type dampers with extruded aluminum frame of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thickness, 16 gauge (1.8 mm) aluminum blades, vinyl edge seals, zytel bearings, and aluminum linkage. Size as shown on drawings. Use aluminum fasteners for mounting. Counterbalance as required for proper operation. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CEILING AND WALL ACCESS DOORS A. Zurn B. Josam C. Wade D. J.R. Smith E. Substitutions:Under provisions of Division 1. 2.05 CEILING AND WALL ACCESS DOORS A. Concrete and Masonry Walls-Zurn Z-5000,universal door with rounded safety corners,one piece frame with hinged door, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm)mounting flange, flush mounted, concealed locking mechanism with key operated cylinder lock, steel construction, 16 gauge(1.5 mm)panel, 18 gauge(1.2 nun)frame, inside latch release,unit to be furnished with prime finish. Size as indicated on drawings. B. Drywall Surfaces-Zurn Z-5040,flush access door with rounded safety corners,one piece frame and hinged door, drywall bead, concealed locking mechanism with key operated cylinder lock for wall mounting/slot screwdriver operator for ceiling mountings,steel construction, 14 gauge(1.9 mm)panel, 16 gauge(1.5 mm) frame,inside latch release,unit to be furnished with prime finish. Size as indicated on drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install manual balancing dampers with locking quadrants where shown on the Drawings and as required for proper balancing of the systems. Locking quadrants shall be easily accessible. On insulated ducts, locking quadrants shall be installed on outside of insulation by means of a stand-off holding bracket. C. Provide access doors in ducts to all automatic dampers, smoke detectors, and elsewhere as shown on the drawings unless otherwise noted. Doors shall be minimum 12 inch x 24 inch(305 nun x 610 mm), or duct width x 24 inch(610 mm),whichever is smaller,unless otherwise noted. Provide minimum 12 inch x 12 inch (305 mm x 305 mm)access doors in each duct where smoke detector element passes through the duct. D. Access doors at smoke detectors shall be identified with letters no less than 1/2" in height to indicate the location of the smoke protection device within. Engineering Associates Ductwork Accessories 15910-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. 3.02 FLEXIBLE AND ROUND DUCT CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR A. Connection of flexible and round ducts to rectangular ducts to be made with spin-in type fittings complete with extractor and damper with locking operator. 3.03 STATIONARY LOUVERS A. Installation of stationary louvers to be coordinated with the General Contractor. Caulk all around louvers with gun grade"Sonolastic"sealant. Caulking shall be applied with a hand gun and work shall be left neat and clean. 1. Finish to be baked enamel,color approved by Architect 2. Caulk color to match louver finish as close as possible. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Ductwork Accessories 15910-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15936 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Diffusers B. Registers C. Grilles 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 9-Painting:Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062-Certification,Rating and Test Manual. B. ANSI/NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. C. ARI 650-Air Outlets and Inlets. D. ASHRAE 70-Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. SMACNA-Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide product data for items required for this project. C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type,size,K-Factor location,application,and noise level. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-REFER TO AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE ON PLANS A. Krueger B. Titus C. Price Engineering Associates Air Outlets and Inlets 15936-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II D. Nailor 2.02 SQUARE CEILING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS A. Aluminum square ceiling diffusers. 1. Krueger 5SH,aluminum,surface style,white finish,square neck 2. Krueger 1400,aluminum,lay-in style,white finish,round neck. 2.03 SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS A. Registers with louver face,two-way deflection. 1. Krueger 5880H,aluminum,surface mounted,white finish 2.04 RETURN AND EXHAUST AIR GRILLES A. Grilles with louver face. 1. Krueger S580H,aluminum,surface mounted,white finish B. Grilles with perforated face. 1. Krueger 51190,aluminum,surface mounted,white finish,square neck. 2. Krueger 6590,aluminum,lay-in style,white finish,round neck. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features,symmetry,and lighting arrangement. Refer to Division 9. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser,or grille and register assembly. E. All steel registers shall be furnished with factory prime coat of paint. Outlets in ceilings shall be furnished with factory white finish unless otherwise noted. F. Furnish frame and trim compatible with ceilings shown on Architectural drawings. G. All diffusers to have equalizing grid. H. Provide additional support hangers for air devices mounted in lay-in ceilings. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Air Outlets and Inlets 15936-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II SECTION 15990 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART 1-GENERAL I.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing,adjustment,and balancing of air system. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 -Quality Control:Testing laboratory services: B. Division 1 -Starting of Systems. C. Division 1 -Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing of Systems. D. Section 15787-Split System Air Conditioning Units E. Section 15870-Power Ventilators F. Section 15885-Air Cleaning G. Section 15890-Ductwork. H. Section 15910-Ductwork Accessories. I. Section 15936-Air Inlets and Outlets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AABC-National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation,Total System Balance. B. ASHRAE- 1991 HVAC Applications Handbook:Chapter 34,Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. C. NEBB-Procedural Standards for Testing,Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 60 days after award of Contract. Testing and balancing agency shall be independent of the HVAC Contractor and shall be hired by the General Contractor. B. Submit test reports as a submittal under provisions of Division 1. C. Prior to commencing work,submit draft reports indicating adjusting,balancing,and equipment data required. D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. Engineering Associates Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 15990-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II E. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size,3-ring binder manuals,complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets,and indicating thermostat locations. F. Include detailed procedures,agenda,sample report forms 30 days prior to commencing system balance. 1.05 REPORT FORMS A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance B. Forms shall include the following information: 1. Title Page: a) Company name b) Company address c) Company telephone number d) Project name e) Project location f) Project Architect g) Project Engineer h) Project Contractor i) Project altitude 2. Instrument List: a) Instrument b) Manufacturer c) Model d) Serial number e) Range 0 Calibration date 3. Air Moving Equipment: a) Location b) Manufacturer c) Model d) Air flow,specified and actual e) Return air flow,specified and actual f) Outside air flow,specified and actual g) Total static pressure(total external),specified and actual h) Inlet pressure i) Discharge pressure j) Fan RPM 4. Exhaust/ventilation Fan Data: a) Location b) Manufacturer c) Model d) Air flow,specified and actual e) Total static pressure(total external),specified and actual f) Inlet pressure g) Discharge pressure h) Fan RPM 5. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a) Identification/location Engineering Associates Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 15990-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II b) Design air flow c) Actual air flow d) Design return air flow e) Actual return air flow 1) Design outside air flow g) Actual outside air flow h) Return air temperature i) Outside air temperature j) Required mixed air temperature k) Actual mixed air temperature 1) Design outside/return air ratio m) Actual outside/return air ratio 6. Electric Motors: a) Manufacturer b) HP/BHP c) Phase,voltage,amperage;nameplate,actual,no load. d) RPM e) Service factor f) Starter size,rating,heater elements 7. V-Belt Drive: a) Identification/location b) Required driven RPM c) Driven sheave,diameter and RPM d) Belt,size and quantity e) Motor sheave,diameter and RPM f) Center to center distance,maximum,minimum. and actual 8. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a) Air terminal number b) Room number/location c) Terminal type d) Terminal size e) Area factor fj Design velocity g) Design air flow h) Test(final)velocity i) Test(final)air flow j) Percent of design air flow 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and balancing agency shall be independent of the HVAC Contractor and shall be hired by the General Contractor. B. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.certified by AABC or NEBB.Perform Work under supervision of AABC or NEBB Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Engineering Associates Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 15990-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II C. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC or NEBB National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance and ASHRAE - 1992 Systems and Equipment Handbook. PART 2-PRODUCTS A. NOT USED PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before commencing work,verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required,install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Correct fan rotation. 6. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 7. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect/Engineer. C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions,which prevent system balance. D. If,for design reasons,system cannot be properly balanced,report as soon as observed. E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing,adjusting,and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated. B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1. B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured,or observed condition. C. Permanently mark settings of valves,dampers,and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. Engineering Associates Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 15990-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE II D. After adjustment,take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. E. Leave systems in proper working order,replacing belt guards,closing access doors,closing doors to electrical switch boxes,and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection,recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. B. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. C. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. D. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. E. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 15990-5 (This page is intentionally left blank) DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The general requirements for electrical work are intended to be complementary to and not instead of the General Requirements of the Construction Contract of these Specifications. B. Work Included: Provide complete electrical,and telephone service where shown on the drawings,as specified herein,and as needed for a complete and proper installation including,but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Electric service. 2. Service entrance rated panelboard. 3. Telephone/Data service entrance. 4. Distribution and Branch circuit panelboards. 5. Entry building interior lighting. 6. Grounding and bonding system. 7. Lighting fixtures,circuits and controls. 8. Motor circuits and controls. 9. Transformers,contactors and timeclocks. 10. Wiring devices. 11. Branch circuit wiring. 12. Other items and services required to complete the systems 1.2 ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Codes:All electrical work shall conform with the requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all local codes and ordinances. In conflicts between codes, the more stringent requirements shall govern. B. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organization are by reference made a part of these specifications and all electrical work,unless otherwise indicated,shall comply with their requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: Association of Edison Illuminating Companies(A.E.I.C.)Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(I.E.E.E.) American National Standards Institute(A.N.S.I.) American Society for Testing and Materials(A.S.T.M.) Certified Ballast Manufacturers(C.B.M.) Electrical Testing Laboratories(E.T.L.) Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association(I.P.C.E.A.) National Bureau of Standards(N.B.S.) National Electrical Contractors Associations(N.E.C.A.) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(N.E.M.A.) National Fire Protection Association(N.F.P.A.) Radio-Television Manufacturer's Association(R.T.M.A.) Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers(R.L.M.) Underwriters' Laboratories,Inc.(U.L.) 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Act are by reference made a part of these specifications and all electrical work shall comply with their requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other divisions of the contract documents. Refer to each division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of this section. B. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 16. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which,when reviewed by the Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. C. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Branch circuit panelboards. 3. Safety switches. 4. Transformers. 5. Circuit breakers. 6. Lighting fixtures. 7. Lamps. 8. Conductors. Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 9. Conduit and fittings. 10. Motor Controls. 11. Cabinets. 12. Contactors,relays,timeclocks and controls. 13. Photo cell controls. 14. Wiring devices and cover plates;receptacles,switches. 15. Grounding and Bonding system components. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The use of manufacturers'names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase"or equal"is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. B. Submittals for"equal"items shall,where applicable,include the following data which are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. C. Submittals of"equal"components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical,architectural,or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten(10)days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise,such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the bidders. Manufacturers,distributions,and sub- contractors shall not make proposals to the Owner for substitutions. E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Owner. Should a substitution be accepted,and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended,and within the guarantee period,the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified,at his own expense,and to the satisfaction of the Owner. F. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also submit a bid on the"as specified"materials and equipment. Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 G. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Owner. 1.7 UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY POWER A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 16. The location and sizes of electrical lines are shown in accordance with data secured from the Owner's survey. Data shown is offered as an estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy. B. Temporary Power: 1. Provide temporary power in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. 2. Provide temporary lighting and power system required by the building trades installed in accordance with OSHA requirements and described in the General Requirements Division 1. 1.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform excavation and backfilling associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth,with allowances made for floor slabs,forms,beams etc. Ground under conduits shall be well compacted before conduits are installed. D. Exterior conduits shall be installed with a minimum of 24 inches of cover below the finished grade, unless otherwise indicated or required by local ordinances. All exterior conduit shall be installed with a minimum of 12"of cover below the finished paving grade,unless otherwise indicated or required by local ordinances. E. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil,free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 90 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-58T(Proctor Soil Compaction Test). F. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. G. Coordinate and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged,they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. H. In a line stabilized area,the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. I. Replace concrete,curbs,paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 1.9 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES AND INSERTS Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Furnish and install flashings where conduits pass through outside walls. Flashings shall be properly formed to fit around conduit and shall be caulked,with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation,so as to make a watertight seal between conduit and building. B. Unless otherwise specified,install sleeves for each conduit where it may pass through interior walls or floors. Galvanized 22 gauge sheet iron sleeves shall be used. Finish flush with each finished wall surface. In pipe chases,they shall extend 1-1/2"above the floor slab and be watertight cemented. The sized of sleeves shall be such as to readily permit the subsequent insertion of the proper size conduits of raceways. C. The conduits and raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. The inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least'/2 inch greater than the outside diameters of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed in these sleeves,fill the annular space between pipes and sleeves with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. The completed installation shall be watertight. D. All roof penetrations shall be provided with counter flashings arranged to provide a weatherproof installation. E. Penetration through walls floors and ceilings shall be done in such a manner to maintain the integrity of the fire rating of the respective wall,floor or ceiling. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching of work. 2. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work. 3. Request for Architect's Consent: a. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety,submit written request to the Architect for permission to proceed with cutting. b. Should conditions of the work,or schedule indicate a required change of materials or methods for cutting and patching,so notify the Architect and secure his written permission and the required change order prior to proceeding. 4. Perform cutting by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. 5. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 1.11 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide stamped steel access doors at each location where access is required for junction boxes,pull Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-5 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 boxes,outlet boxes and conduit boxes that contain electrical wiring. Access doors shall be fully insulated complete with mounting flange,double thickness door,cam latch, gasket,and retaining wire. No tools shall be required to open the access door. B. The minimum size of each access door shall be sufficient to provide adequate access for the intended purpose of installation. C. Access door finish shall match adjacent architectural finishes. D. Provide access doors equal to Nailor-Hart Industries, Inc.,series 0800. E. Access doors shall be coordinated with the architect prior to installation. 1.12 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Work required to correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work shall be included as part of the work of this section. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement,or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner,the Contractor shall,before proceeding with the work,prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Engineer's review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment,he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Engineer review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such a change shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. C. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes,or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work,and for the correct locations of pipe sleeves. 1.14 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision for interface with the work in this Section. 2. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the schedule for work of other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total work. 3. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment,provide required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment. Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 4. Install all power and control wiring for the installation of equipment furnished under Division 15 sections of work. The Contractor shall furnish all disconnect switches and other equipment as required for the proper operation of the equipment unless such equipment is specified to be factory mounted. 5. Coordinate equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with work affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes are the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. Data indicated on the drawings and in these specifications are as exact as could be secured,but their absolute accuracy is not warranted. The exact locations,distances, levels,and other conditions will be governed by actual construction and the drawings and specifications should be used only for guidance in such regard. C. Where outlets are not specifically located on the drawings,locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where outlets are installed without such specific direction,relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Field verify all measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the drawings and actual measurements at the site of construction. E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs have been designed for maximum economy consistent with adequate sizing for voltage drops and other considerations. Install the wiring with circuits arranged exactly as shown on the drawings,except as otherwise approved in advance by the Engineer. F. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic,but are required to be followed as closely as actual construction and other work will permit. 1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide project record documents associated with the work of Division 16 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 16 Work,maintain an accurate record of changes in the contract documents that apply to work of Division 16. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of record documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records: 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the record documents,making adequate and proper entries on each page of specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the contract documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved project record documents. E. Maintain the job set of record documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the fmal project record documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings: 1. Using an erasable colored pencil(not ink or indelible pencil),clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a"cloud"drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes,use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: 1. In some cases,on the drawings,arrangements of conduits,circuits,and similar items,are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor,subject to the Engineer's approval. However,design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings,by dimension the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and conduit below grade,in walls,or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as"Rigid Conduit"and the like. b. Show,by symbol or note,the vertical location of the item"under slab,""in ceiling plenum,""exposed,"and the like. c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents: 1. The purpose of the fmal project record documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the work,both concealed and visible,to enable future modification of the work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement,investigation and examination. 2. Present a clean,neat set of reproducible mylars showing"as-build"conditions in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph"Project Record Documents". 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Engineer for review and comments. B. Unless otherwise directed in other sections,or in writing by the Architect,submit three copies of the Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-8 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 final manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Where instruction manuals are required to be submitted under other sections of these specifications, prepare in accordance with the following. Format: Size: 8 'h"x 11" Paper: White bond,at least 20 lb. Weight Text: Neatly written or printed Drawings: 11"in height preferable;bind in with text;foldout acceptable;larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section;flysheets may be in color. Bindings: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber-board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual;3-ring binders will be acceptable;all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S.standard units such as feet-and- inches,lbs,and cfm;where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formula,provide additional measurements in the"International System of Units"(SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual,using durable material approved by the Architects,and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work General subject of this manual Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-9 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual,giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved including lubrication,disassembly,and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts,name and address of nearest vendor and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins,cuts,and descriptive data,where pertinent,clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting,or otherwise clearly indicating,all manufacturers'data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of three specifications. 1.17 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work of Division 16 in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for main switchboard,distribution panels,and floor mounted transformers. Bases shall be four inches(4")above finished floors or grades(unless otherwise noted)and shall protrude two inches(2")beyond all sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases from ready-mixed hardrock concrete,ASTM C94,reinforced with#3 rebars,ASTM A615,Grade 40,at 18"on center each way. C. Field verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted electrical equipment with the Architect. Supply necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away from equipment. 1.18 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory fmish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation,it shall be finished to match appearance of original fmish. 1.19 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment,make required tests,and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-10 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 construction: 1. When all rough-in is complete,but not covered. 2. At completion of the work of this section. 3. In the underground condition prior to placing backfill,concrete floor slab,and when all associated electrical work is in place. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements,remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. D. In the Architect's Presence: 1. Test all parts of the electrical system and prove that all such items provided under this section function electrically in the required manner. 1.20 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of the work of this section,thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the electrical installation,removing all traces of soil,labels,grease,oil,and other foreign material, and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. B. Thoroughly indoctrinate the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel in the contents of the operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted as part of this section of these specifications. C. All new lighting fixtures shall be operational at final inspection including replacing all lamps that do not operate. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates General Requirements 16010-11 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16111 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16190-Supporting Devices. 2. Section 16195-Electrical Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating electrical raceway system as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. 2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. 4. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. 5. Non-metallic conduit and fittings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Provide metal conduits,tubing,fittings,and couplings of types,grades,sizes,and weights(wall thicknesses)for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated,provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings: Engineering Associates Raceways and Fittings 16111-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. Rigid steel conduit:ANSI C80.1. 2. Fittings and conduit bodies:ANSI/NEMA FB 1;threaded type,material to match conduit. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT)and Fittings. 1. EMT:ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:ANSI/NEMA FB 1: steel compression type. D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: 1. Conduit:FS WW-0566;steel. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:ANSI/NEMA FB 1. E. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit and Fittings: 1. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:ANSI/NEMA FB 1. F. Plastic Conduit and Fittings: 1. Conduit:NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:NEMA TC 3. 2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps,straps and supports: Steel or malleable iron. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING,ARRANGEMENT,AND SUPPORT A. Size of conduit shall be as scheduled on the drawings or sized for conductor type installed, whichever is larger. B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. D. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues,steam pipes,and heating. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps,lay-in adjustable hangers,clevis hangers,or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction,before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION Engineering Associates Raceways and Fittings 16111-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter;de-burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes,and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction,as around beams. F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2 inch size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible;where unavoidable,provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. I. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit. J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints and for seismic considerations. K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors,provide mechanical firestop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible;otherwise route through roof jack with pitch pocket. M. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade: 3/4 inch. N. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet or in plastic conduit runs which have more than two bends regardless of length. O. Make joints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. P. Provide plastic warning tape for underground conduit installation. 3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground installations more than two feet from foundation wall: Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Installations in or under concrete slab,or underground within two feet of foundation wall:Rigid steel conduit. C. In slab above grade:Rigid steel conduit. D. Exposed outdoor locations:Rigid steel conduit or EMT with weathertight fittings. E. Wet interior locations:Electrical metallic tubing with weathertight fittings or where allowed by code,PVC. Engineering Associates Raceways and Fittings 16111-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 F. Concealed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. G. Exposed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. H. Where allowed by local authorities having jurisdiction,PVC schedule 40 may be installed in exposed locations at the filtration building. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Raceways and Fittings 16111-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16110-General requirements for Electrical Work. 2. Section 16141 -Wiring Devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a completed surface raceway system as indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Auxiliary Gutters(Wireways). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new,of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter's Laboratories,have established standards for such materials,provide only materials bearing the UL label. 2.2 AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Auxiliary Gutters:General purpose or Rain-tight type wireway,with knockouts. B. Size:As indicated on Drawings. C. Cover:Hinged screw applied cover with full gasketing. D. Fittings:Lay-in type with removable top,bottom,and side;captive screws and drip shield. Engineering Associates Surface Raceways 16112-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 E. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION-AUXILIARY GUTTER A. Bolt auxiliary gutter to wall using two-piece hangers or steel channels fastened to the wall or in self- supporting structure. Install level. B. Gasket each joint in oil-tight gutter. C. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Surface Raceways 16112-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16111 -Raceways and Fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of conductors as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Building Wire. 2. Cable. 3. Wiring connections and terminations. 4. Underground wire installed in conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn annealed copper with conductivity not less than that of 98% pure copper;Anaconda,Triangle Cable Company,or approved equal. B. Building Wire: 1. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire:NEMA WC 5. 2. Feeders and branch circuits:Copper,stranded conductor,600 volt insulation,THHN/THWN. 3. Control circuits:Copper,stranded conductor 600 volt insulation,THHN/THWN. 4. Use the following color code system: Engineering Associates Wire and Cable 16120-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 120/208 Volt 277/480 Volt System System Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green C. Remote Control and Signal Cables: 1. Control cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor,300 volt insulation,rated 60 degree C,individual conductors twisted together,shielded,and covered with PVC jacket;UL listed. 2. Plenum cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits:Copper conductor,300 volt insulation,rated 60 degree C,individual conductors twisted together,shielded,and covered with a nonmetallic jacket;UL listed for use in air handling ducts,hollow spaces used as ducts,and plenums. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits,and no smaller than 20 AWG for control wiring. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the contract drawings,use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch ampere,277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet. C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes,equipment,and panelboards. F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. Engineering Associates Wire and Cable 16120-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Plenum rated cable above ceilings shall be routed in neat and workmanship manner,bundle cables together with cable ties and route parallel to building walls and structure. Support bundles from walls or structure,not from equipment. C. Support cables above accessible ceilings;do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. D. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps,8 AWG and smaller. C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps,6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices,tape,and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under applicable provisions of Division 1 and Division 16. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing of all connections. 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. All locations:Building wire in raceways. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Wire and Cable 16120-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16141 -Wiring Devices. 2. Section 16160-Cabinets and Enclosures. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of outlet,pull,and junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide standard,stamped galvanized steel outlet boxes except as hereinafter noted,by Steel City or approved equal. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Sheet metal outlet boxes:ANSI/NEMA OS 1;galvanized steel,with inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Cast boxes:Aluminum or cast ferroalloy,deep type,gasketed cover,threaded hubs. C. Floor Boxes: Engineering Associates Boxes 16130-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. Floor boxes for installation in cast-in-place concrete floor:Full adjustable,formed steel. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Sheet metal boxes:ANSI/NEMA OS 1;galvanized steel. 2. Sheet metal boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 16160. 3. Cast metal boxes for outdoor and wet location installation NEMA 250;Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged,surface-mounted junction box,UL listed as raintight.Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange,neoprene gasket,and stainless steel cover screws. 4. Cast concrete boxes for in ground installations: outside flanged,recessed cover box for flush mounting,UL listed as raintight. Concrete bolt down lid with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings,and as required for splices,taps,wire pulling, equipment connections,and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6 inch separation,except provide minimum 24 inch separation in acoustic-rated walls. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes independently of conduit. E. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device are mounted together;do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,benches,and backsplashes. H. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans. Engineering Associates Boxes 16130-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 I. In inaccessible ceiling areas,position outlets,and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaire,to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas;secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall,and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats,and similar devices. L. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations and wet locations. 3.3 FLOOR BOX INSTALLATION A. Set boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. B. Use formed steel floor boxes for installations in slab. 3.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. C. Set underground pull and junction boxes level and flush with finished grade. D. Provide coverplates for all junction boxes. E. Indicate on cover plates,with permanent marker,circuits contained within junction boxes. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Boxes 16130-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Motion Detectors. 4. Device plates and box covers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types,colors,and electrical ratings for applications indicated. B. Provide color selection chart to the Architect for review and selection for all wiring devices and device plates. C. Wall Switches: 1. Snap Switches:General duty flush single pole,20-amperes, 120/277 volts AC,Leviton 5521 series. 2. Three-way Switches:General duty flush single pole,20-ampere, 120/277 volts AC,Leviton 5523 series. D. Motion Detectors: Engineering Associates Wiring Devices 16141-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. Motion detectors:Passive infrared wall sensors,Hubbell IWSZP series, 120/277 volt. D. Receptacles: 1. General Duty Duplex:Flush 2-pole,3-wire,grounding type,20-amperes, 125 volts AC with NEMA Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. Leviton 16362 series. E Device Plates and Box Covers: 1. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices,of types,sizes,and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices;screw heads colored to match fmish of plates;wallplates colored to match wiring devices. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. Provide non-metallic coverplates in Chemical Rooms. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices as indicated,in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's"Standard of Installation: and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other work,including painting,electrical boxes and wiring work,as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. C. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings. D. Install decorative plates on switch,receptacle,and blank outlets in finished areas,using jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,above accessible ceilings,and on surface-mounted outlets. F. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. H. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean;free from excess building materials. dirt,and debris. I. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces. J. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. K. Install wallplates after painting work is completed. L. Tighten connectors and terminals,including screws and bolts,in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. M. The Contractor may be directed by the Architect to move a wiring device during the rough-in stage Engineering Associates Wiring Devices 16141-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 of construction. The Contractor shall move devices at no additional cost if within six(6)feet of where shown on the documents. 3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES A. At time of Substantial Completion,replace those items which have been damaged,including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices,unless otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.4 TESTING A. Prior to energizing circuitry,test wiring for electrical continuity,and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization,test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirement. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Wiring Devices 16141-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16190-Supporting Devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Hinged cover enclosures. 2. Cabinets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction:NEMA Type for 3R as indicated. B. Finish:Manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish. C. Covers:Continuous hinge,held closed by flush vandal resistant latch operable by key. Make keys interchangeable with new enclosures of the same voltage and use. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel,manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.2. CABINETS A. Cabinet Boxes:Galvanized steel with removable endwalls,24 inches wide, 10 inches deep. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white,for mounting terminal blocks. B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel,surface type with concealed trim clamps,screw cover front concealed hinge Engineering Associates Cabinets and Enclosures 16160-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard;fmish in gray baked enamel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram,connection diagram,and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosures. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb;anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb minimum 6'-6"from finished grade or floor to top of enclosure. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Cabinets and Enclosures 16160-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of identification for electrical equipment as shown and/or as specified. B. Work included; 1. Nameplates and tape labels. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Buried conduit markers. 4. Junction and pull box identifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers:Cloth markers,split sleeve,or tubing type. C. Buried Conduit Marker:Continuous printed plastic tape. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. Engineering Associates Electrical Identification 16195-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. 3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters,pull boxes,and junction boxes,and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits,and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.3 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment,and loads served. Letter Height: 1/4 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.4 BURIED CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker:Manufacturer's standard permanent,bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape,intended for direct-burial service;not less than 6"wide x 4 mils thick. B. Provide tape with printing of"Buried Electrical Conduit"or other similar warning. Install directly above buried conduit 10"below finished grade. 3.5 JUNCTION AND PULL BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Identify circuits contained within each junction and pull box with permanent marker. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Electrical Identification 16195-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16418 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PART I GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 1 1 00-Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment. 2. IEEE C62.41 -Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 3. IEEE C62.45-Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA LS 1 -Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 780-Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 1283-Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 2. UL 1449—Surge Protection Devices. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013 3 00-Submittal Procedures:Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data:Submit capacity,dimensions,weights,details,and wiring configuration. C. Test Reports: 1. Indicate Let-Through voltage test data. 2. Submit spectrum analysis of each unit. 3. Submit test reports from nationally recognized independent testing laboratory verifying suppressors can survive published surge current rating. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:Submit installation instructions and connection requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate:Certify surge protection device complies with UL 1449 Third Edition Surge Voltage Ratings. F. The contractor shall submit surge protective device model numbers and product data sheets to the Owner priorto construction. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents:Record actual locations of surge protection devices. Kim ley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Surge Protection Devices, 16418-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Operation and Maintenance Data:Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature,installation instructions,and maintenance and repair data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. List individual units under UL 1449andUL 1283. B. Perform Work in accordance with Fairfax County Public Works and National Electrical Code standards and requirements. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer:Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept equipment on site in factory packaging.Inspect for damage. B. Protect equipment from damage by providing temporary covers until construction is co plete in a djacent space. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for surge protective devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE(SPD) A. Manufacturers: 1. Cutler-Hammer,Inc. 2. General Electric Company. 3. SquareDCompany. 4. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. B. Furnish materials in accordance with the Fairfax County Public Work's standards. C. Product Description:Surge protective devices for protection of AC electrical circuits. D. Types:Lighting panelboards. E. Unit Operating Voltage:As indicated on Drawings. F. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage:Greater than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage. G. Construction: 1. Finish:Factory finish ofbaked enamel. 2. Balanced Suppression Platform:Equally distribute surge current to Metal Oxide Varistor(MOV) components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance.Furnish surge suppression platform with equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Kim ley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Surge Protection Devices, 16418-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3. Internal Connections:Hardwired with connections using low impedance conductors and compression fittings. 4. Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring:Equipped with standard overcurrent protection: a. Continuous monitoring of fusing system. b. Monitor individual MOV's(including neutral to ground).Capable of identifying open circuit failures not monitored by conventional fusing systems. c. Monitor for overheating in each mode due to thermal runaway. d. Furnish green and red solid state indicator light on each phase.Absence of green light and presence ofred light indicates which phases have been damaged.Fault detection activates flashingtrouble light.Units not capable of detecting open circuit damage,thermal conditions, and over current will not be accepted. 5. Labeling:Permanently affix UL 1449 suppression v oltage ratings and C SA to unit. H. Rating: 1. Electrical Noise Filter:Furnish each unit with high performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Electric line noise attenuation no less than 45 dB at 100 kHz using MlL-S1D-220A insertion loss test method I. Accessories: 1. Digital display transient event counter with manual reset. 2. Local audible alarm. 3. Form C dry contacts one normally open(NO)and one normally closed(NC)for remote status monitoring. 4. Remote monitor panel with indicating lights and audible alarm for m ounting in remote location. 5. Push-to-test feature. J. Surge Current Capacity:Total surge current(based on 8 x 20 microsecond waveform)device is capable of surviving is not less than: Application Min Surge Current Per Min Surge Current Per Phase _ Mode* Service Entrance(Switchboards,Switchgear, 250 kA 125 kA MCC) High Exposure Roof Top Locations 160 kA 80 kA Distribution and branch locations 120 kA 60 kA (Panelboards,MCC,Bus Duct) *L-G,L-N and N-G(WYE system);L-L,L-G(Delta system) K. Protection Modes:For Wye configured system,furnish device with directly connected suppression elements between line-neutral(L-N),line-ground(L-G),and neutral-ground(N-G).For Delta configured system,furnish device with suppression elements between line to line(L-L)and line to ground(L-G). L. Do not exceed the following for maximum UL 1449 suppression voltage ratings: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 WYE-L-N; L-G; N-G 400 V 800 V 1200 V Delta-L-L,L-G 800 V 1500 V 2000 V M. ANSI/IEEE Catalog C3 Let Through Voltage:Based on ANSI/IFFE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Catalog C3 surges(20 kV,l OkA)and not less than: Kim ley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Surge Protection Devices, 16418-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 L-N 500 V 900 V 1300V N. ANSI/IEEE Cat.B3 Let Through Voltage:Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.4 1 andC62.45 recommended procedures for ANSI/IEEE Catalog B3 Ringwave(6 kV,500 amps)not less than: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347 WYE-L-N; L-G; N-G 400 V 800 V 1200 V L-N 170 V 300 V 470 V 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Section 0140 00-Quality Requirements:Testing,inspection and analysis requirements. B. Test units to specified surge ratings to ensure devices will achieve required life expectancy and reliability. Testing to full ratings also verifies internal construction quality of suppressors.Provide withstand testing for each mode and each phase basis. C. Perform actual Let-Through voltage test data in form ofoscillograph results for ANSI/IEEE C62.4 1 Catalog C3(20 kV,10 kA),Catalog C 1 (6 kV,3 kA),and Catalog.B3(6 kv,500 A at 100 kHz)tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45. D. Perform spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying device noise attenuation exceeds45 dB at 100 kHz. E. Perform test verifying suppressors can survive published surge current rating for each mode and each phase basis.Test wave based on ANSI/IEEE C62.4 1,8x20 microsecond current wave. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify mounting area is ready for equipment. B. Verify circuit rough-ins are at correct location. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with IEEE 1100. B. Install distribution and branch suppressors in panelboards. C. Install using direct bus bar connection. D. Install indicator lights,trouble alarms,surge counter within existing electrical cabinet. E. Install with maximum conductor length of 14 inches.Install SPD with internal fusing. F. Install Work in accordance Fairfax County Public Works andNational Electrical Code standards and requirements END OF SECTION Kim ley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Surge Protection Devices, 16418-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16111 -Raceways and Fittings. 2. Section 16120-Wire and Cable. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical systems grounding as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Power system grounding. 2. Communication system grounding. 3. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 4. Equipment bonding. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval: 1. Material list of items proposed to be provided as part of the work of this section. 2. Proposed method of grounding,including drawings indicating location and sizes of grounding materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS Engineering Associates Grounding and Bonding 16450-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Provide electrical grounding system indicated with assembly of materials,including but not limited to: 1. Wires and cables. 2. Connectors. 3. Terminals. 4. Ground rods. 5. Bonding jumper braid. 6. Surge arrestors. B. Where materials or components are not indicated,provide products complying with NEC,UL,IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. C. Ground Rods:Copper-encased steel,3/4"diameter,minimum length 8 feet. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC,with NECA's "Standard of Installation,"and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug,bus,or bushing. C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged opening at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. D. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod in main service equipment areas. E. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Grounding and Bonding 16450-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16461 TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -GENERAL L1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16450-Secondary Grounding. 2. Section 03300-Cast In Place Concrete. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of power transformers as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Dry type transformers. (Primary less than 600 volts.). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided as part of the work of the section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which,when approved will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The transformers shall be manufactured by the following: Engineering Associates Transformers 16461-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. General Electric 2. Hevi-Duty Electric Division/General Signal Corporation 3. Jefferson 4. Square D Company 5. Cutler-Hammer 6. Approved Equal B. All transformers shall be new and manufactured by the same company and have copper windings. 2.2 DRY TYPE TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS(PRIMARY LESS THAN 600 VOLTS) A. Dry-Type Transformers:ANSI/NEMA ST20;factory-assembled,air cooled dry type transformers; ratings as scheduled on the Drawings. Transformers shall conform with ANSI C89.2 and NEMA ST20 standards and Underwriters Laboratories Listing UL506. B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated KVA as follows: Insulation Class Rise(degree KVA Rating c) 1-15 Class F UL185C [115c.] 30-500 Class H UL220C [150c.] C. Maximum case temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40 Degree C.ambient at its warmest point. D. Winding Taps 25 KVA and Smaller:ANSI/NEMA ST 20. Primary windings shall have 4 taps;two 2-1/2%increments above full-rated voltage and two 2-1/2%increments below full rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operations. E. Winding Taps 25 KVA and Larger:ANSI/NEMA ST 20. Primary windings shall have 6 taps;two 1-1/2%increments above full-rated voltage and four 2-1/2%increments below full-rated voltage for de-energized tap-changing operation. F. Sound Levels:Guaranteed sound ratings hall no exceed ANSI standard decibel levels. G. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV for transformers less than 300 KVA,30 KV for transformers 300 KVA and larger. H. Enclosures: 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations-NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. I. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. Transformers 30 KVA and larger shall have core and core assembly completely isolated from enclosure with neoprene rubber pads. Engineering Associates Transformers 16461-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 J. Transformers shall have heat barriered termination compartment arranged for feeder terminations for side or bottom entrance of flexible metallic raceways. K. Transformers shall have a bonding jumper installed between the secondary neutral terminal and the metal case and shall include a ground terminal of proper size to receive ground conductor. L. The transformer impedance shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Coordinate with loadside power distribution equipment manufacturer and verify that the maximum transformer short circuit current availability from the transformer does not exceed loadside equipment short circuit ratings. Report discrepancies to the Engineer. Revise transformer impedance(if required)at no additional cost to Owner. 2.3 IDENTIFICATION A. All associated conductors and/or cables exiting from conduit or cable shall be bundled with ties, similar to the T&B conductor markers. B. All individual conductors shall be identified at their termination by a wraparound type of identification similar to T&B conductor markers. C. All terminal blocks and terminals in the switchgear and control cabinets shall have identification similar to the conductor groups mentioned above. D. The identification of conductors,cables,and conduit shall conform to that set forth in their respective schedules. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC,NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards. Install in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate transformer installation work with electrical raceway and wire/cable work,as necessary for proper interface. C. Provide equipment grounding connections,sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective ground. D. Set transformer plumb and level. Install vibration isolation pads for all transformers. E. Adjust taps to provide rated secondary voltage as close as practicable and as required to accommodate owner's requirements. F. Field modify transformer pad,primary and secondary conduit locations and switchgear interface as required to accommodate new transformers. All modifications shall be in accordance with existing equipment manufacturers recommendations and requirements. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Within 5 days after delivery to the work site and prior to installation perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. Compare transformer and accessories nameplate information with the specification and report Engineering Associates Transformers 16461-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 discrepancies. 2. Inspect transformer and accessories and report installation or shipping damage,loose material, shipping blocks or contamination that must be corrected. 3. Check operation of doors and access covers. Report deficiencies. 4. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Check pressure relief,fault pressure,temperature meters for functional operation. Report deficiencies. 5. Silicone or Oil Filled Units: Take an insulating liquid sample,test dielectric,and water content. Record values and report deficiencies. 6. Silicone or Oil Filled Units:Remove access covers and report any damage or loose materials inside of tank 1 enclosure that must be corrected. 7. Move no-load tap changer through all positions and test turns-ratio on each point. Record values and report deficiencies. 8. Units with Primaries Rated Greater than 1000 Volts:Power Factor test transformer bushings, record values and report unfavorable conditions. 9. Dry Type Units: Check air filters and air circulation for proper operation, correct deficiencies. B. Repairs and Replacements: 1. In event of damage or deficiencies promptly make replacement and repairs to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Promptly remove damaged and unsuitable transformers from the job site,and promptly replace with equipment meeting the specified requirements,at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered as a means to justify and extension in the Contract Time of Completion. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer. B. Check transformer for level,security to foundation and operation of doors. Correct deficiencies. C. Check the equipment ground bus and straps. Correct deficiencies. D. Make necessary tap adjustments on transformers to ensure that the secondary voltages at the transformer terminals will be as close as possible to design voltage when the building is in normal operation. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Transformers 16461-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16471 PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16160-Cabinets and Enclosures. 2. Section 16195-Electrical Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical panelboards as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Power distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D Company 2. Siemens 3. General Electric 2.2 PANELBOARDS(GENERAL) A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.,and shall be so labeled,rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled. Engineering Associates Panelboards 16471-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gage sheet steel having steel doors and trim to conform to the cabinet mounting. The trim on cabinets shall be made adjustable with the door. Door shall be mounted with heavy concealed hinges. C. Cabinets shall have wiring space top,bottom,and both sides in accordance with the National Electrical Code,but no less than 4-inches wide,with standard knockouts. D. Provide a clear plastic covered typed directory card and card holder on the inside of each door. Key locks alike and provide Owner with not less than 5 keys. Finish shall be gray enamel over a rust inhibitor,except cans may be galvanized. E. Multi section panels shall be same height and depth. F. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled,consisting of rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus,mains,neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be copper and sized in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standards,braced throughout to conform with industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards,and arranged for sequence phasing throughout. G. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction,full size neutral,unless otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral connection. H. Terminals for feeder conductors,branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductors specified. I. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed,replaced,or additional circuits added without disturbing adjacent units and without machining, drilling,or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure be less than 20-inches. J. Enclosures: 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations-NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Outdoor or vault locations-NEMA 3R. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated,with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities,ratings,types,and with arrangement shown;with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98%conductivity,and with full-sized neutral bus;provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. B. Provide bolt-in type heavy duty molded-case main and branch circuit-breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated,provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated Engineering Associates Panelboards 16471-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 by same manufacturer as panelboards,which mate properly with panelboards. C. On Multi section and split-bus panels,the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral,ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars(rather than series)where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.4 LIGHTING AND BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated,with switching and protective devices in quantities,ratings,types,and arrangements shown;with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors. B. Equip with copper bus bars,full-sized neutral bar,with bolt-in type heavy-duty,quick-make,quick- break,single-pole circuit-breakers,with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Interrupting rating shall be in excess of the available fault current at the panel in accordance with UL listing for sizes involved,but no less than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. C. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required;provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards,which mate properly with panelboard. D. On multisection and split-bus panels,the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral,ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars(rather than series)where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.5 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall be molded case,capacity as indicated,in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be quick-make,quick-break thermal magnetic common trip type,ambient compensated with trip-free handle and have interrupting rating in accordance with UL listings for sizes required,but not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and conform to requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No.AB 1-1969. Each unit shall have insulated neutral and/or ground terminal of proper size,where indicated. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper cables. B. Enclosures: 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 2. Normal indoor locations-NEMA 1 general purpose. 3. Outdoor or vault locations-NEMA 3R. C. Circuit breakers shall be of same manufacturer as panelboards. D. Acceptable Manufacturers-Square D Company,Siemens and GE. Engineering Associates Panelboards 16471-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.6 PANELBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including,but not necessarily limited to,circuit- breakers,ground-fault protection units,etc.,as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated,in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA'S"Standard of Installation",and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces,ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. D. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. E. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating loads controlled by each circuit. F. Install wall mounted panelboards a maximum of 6 feet 6 inches above fmish floor to top of panel. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Panelboards 16471-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16483 MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16110-General Requirements for Electrical Work. 2. Section 16160-Cabinets and Enclosures. 3. Section 16491 —Disconnect Switches. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of contactors as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Manual Motor Starters. 2. Magnetic Motor Starters. 3. Combination Motor Starters. 4. Variable Frequency Drive Motor Starters. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new,of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter's Laboratories,Inc.have established standards for such materials,provide only materials bearing the UL label. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The contactors shall be Square D Company or approved equal as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, Siemens or General Electric Company. 2.3 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS Engineering Associates Motor Starters 16483-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 A. Provide single-phase,horsepower rated manual motor starters of sizes and ratings indicated.Equip with manually operated quick-make,quick-break toggle mechanisms and one piece melting alloy type thermal units. B. Size: as indicated on drawings. 2.4 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide circuit breaker type with motor circuit protector type breakers. B. Coil Operating Voltages: 120 or 480 volts,60 Hertz as specified. C. Contacts: Two(2)sets of normally open auxiliary contacts.. D. Enclosure:ANSI/NEMA ICS 6:Type 3R. E. Provide pilot light(RUN)in cover and Hand-Off-Automatic switch in cover,field convertible to Start/Stop. 2.5 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide circuit breaker type with motor circuit protector type breakers. B. Coil Operating Voltages: 120 volts,60 Hertz as specified. C. Contacts:Two(2)sets of normally open auxiliary contacts. D. Enclosure:ANSI/NEMA ICS 6:Type 3R. E. Provide pilot light(RUN)in cover and Hand-Off-Automatic switch in cover,field convertible to Start/Stop. F. Provide control power transformer of sufficient capacity to handle operating coil and associated controls 2.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Provide Pentair Acu Drive XS series or equal by WEG#CFW11. B. Operating Voltages:480 volts,60 Hertz as specified. C. Contacts:Two(2)sets of normally open auxiliary contacts. D. Provide pilot light(RUN)in cover and Hand-Off-Automatic switch in cover,field convertible to Start/Stop. 2.7 VFD ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Provide combination soft start controllers manufactured by Schneider Electric AltiStart 22 series or equal by Cutler-Hammer or Siemens. Engineering Associates Motor Starters 16483-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Motor Starters 16483-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16485 CONTACTORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Section 16110-General Requirements for Electrical Work. 2. Section 16160-Cabinets and Enclosures. 3. Section 16471 -Panelboards. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials, labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of contactors as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. General purpose contactors. 2. Lighting contactors. 3. Enclosures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new,of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter's Laboratories,Inc.have established standards for such materials,provide only materials bearing the UL label. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. The contactors shall be Siemens or approved equal as manufactured by Square D Company, Siemens or General Electric Company. 2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. Contactors:NEMA ICS 2;electrically held,2 wire control. B. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts,60 Hertz. Engineering Associates Contactors 16485-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Size:NEMA ICS 2;size as indicated on drawings. D. Contacts:4 pole,600 volts,60 Hertz. E. Enclosure:ANSI/NEMA ICS 6;Type 3R. F. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals. 2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Contactors:NEMA ICS 2: electrically held,2 wire control. B. Coil Operating Voltages: 120 volts,60 Hertz. C. Contacts:As indicated on drawings. D. Enclosure:ANSI/NEMA ICS 6: Type 1 R. E. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Contactors 16485-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16491 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following; 1. Division 15-Controls and Instrumentation. 2. Section 16195 -Electrical Identification. 3. Section 16483 -Motor Service. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Service Entrance Rated Fused Disconnect. 2. Circuit disconnects. 3. Motor disconnects. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D Company. 2. Siemens. 3. General Electric Company. 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide surface-mounted,heavy-duty type,sheet-steel enclosed safety switches,of types,sizes and electrical characteristics indicated;rated 600 volts,and incorporating quick-make,quick-break type switches;construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is padlockable in OFF position;construct current carrying parts of high- conductivity copper. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures. Engineering Associates Disconnect Switches 16491-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory Label. B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches:Two pole toggle switch in NEMA type/or 3R enclosure as indicated. C. Three Phase Disconnect Switches:Three pole heavy duty 600 volt as required in NEMA Type 1 or 3R enclosures as indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated complying with manufacturer's written instructions,applicable requirements of NEC,NEMA,and NECA's"Standard of Installation",and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Disconnect Switches 16491-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 16120-Wires and Cables. 2. Section 16190-Supporting Devices. 3. Section 16501 -Lamps. 4. Section 16502-Ballasts and Accessories. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of lighting fixtures as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. LED lighting fixtures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide lighting fixtures of the types specified on the Drawings or an approved equal. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Prime coat and fmish in high reflectance baked white enamel,two coats minimum on exposed and reflective surfaces,giving reflectance of 85 percent. B. Reflective plates may be 22 gage metal. C. Provide 22 gage steel housing. D. Provide hinged frames with catches,removable for cleaning without tools. Support lay-in lenses Engineering Associates Lighting Fixtures 16510-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 on four sides with flip ends on short dimension. E. Provide gasketing,stops,and barriers to form light traps and prevent light leaks. F. Design luminaire to dissipate ballast and lamp heat. G. Use formed or ribbed backplates,endplates,reinforcing channels. H. Provide virgin acrylic diffusers,0.125 inch thick minimum. 2.3 RECESSED LUMINAIRES A. Recessed Luminaires:Prewired type with junction box forming an integral part of the assembly. B. Supply recessed luminaire complete with trim type required for ceiling system installed. Before ordering,confirm ceiling construction details and architectural fmish for each area. C. Select reflector and lamp positions to provide high efficiency,and even brightness to eliminate lamp lines. 2.4 EXIT LIGHTS A. Thin profile LED exit sign;cast metal frame with cast aluminum faceplate,satin fmish,6 inch high cutout letters. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 16190. B. Support fluorescent luminaires directly from building structure by rod hangers and inserts or metal angle headers supported from framing structure of ceiling suspension system. C. Support luminaires more than 2 ft.long by four hangers per luminaire minimum,independent of ceiling structure or T-Bars. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance,thoroughly clean all fixtures, inside and out,including plastics and glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surface,replace broken or damaged parts and lamps. Test all fixtures for proper operation. B. Replace all lamps prior to final acceptance that are not operational. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Lighting Fixtures 16510-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16527 LIGHTING CONTROL CABINET PARTI -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions shall,apply to this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. This specification shall apply to the modification of the existing lighting control cabinet. This work includes the addition of required contactors,lighting controls,switches,etc as shown on the drawings and as designed by the Manufacturer to provide the required functionality. B. The lighting control system(schematic)and power distribution system(one-line diagram)shall be as noted on the contract drawings. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. Abbreviations are as follows: 1. ANSI-AmericanNational Standards Institute 2. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturers Association 3. NEC-National Electrical Code 4. UL-Underwriters Laboratory 5. CNC—Computer Numerical Control 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the followinginfotmation for Engineer review prior to construction: 1. Detailed cabinet and door shop drawings showing all fabrication and the layout ofall internal components. 2. List of all components(by manufacturer and model number)and product sheets for each item. 3. Plan drawing showing conduit and layout relative to components and cabinet. 4. Wiring control schematic for switches and remote control system including all relays and contactors. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 QUALITY CONTROL A. The supplier shall have and maintain a suitable quality control program throughout the contract.The purpose ofthe quality control program is to ensure that the product meets the quality requirements of these qualifications,is delivered on time,and is produced in a cost-effective manner. The supplier's quality control program shall apply to all stages ofthe design,procurement,manufacturing,testing and delivery of the product. 2.02 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING INNER WALL A. Equipment shall be mounted on an inner wall. Kimley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Lighting Control Cabinet 16527-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.03 GENERAL ELECTRICAL A. The supplier shall provide equipment layoutdetails with the shop drawings. 2.04 GROUNDING A. The grounding system shall be designed to meet allNEC standards and any codes and local utility standards. B. The grounding system shall be designed as part of the power distribution system. 2.05 LIGHTING CONTROLS A. The lighting control cabinet shall contain all contactors,switches,terminals and lighting controls required to control the lights as shown on the contract drawings. B. Off-On-Auto switches shall be utilized to manually over-ride the lighting control system.One switch shall be required for each lighting zone or system.Switches shall be supplied with on,off,and auto nameplates and labels clearly identifying the zone by field or location. C. The lighting system shall be controlled via an existing remote system or via astromic time clock. D. Terminals,fuses,relays etc,shall be din-rail mounted. E. Wiring shall be routed through suitably sized wire way. F. All control wiring shall be labeled in accordance with the schematic diagram. 2.06 PULL BOXES AND WIREWAYS A. Pull boxes and wire ways shall be provided for easy field wiring and trouble shooting.All wire way shall haveremovable covers. 2.07 CONTACTORS A. Contactors shall be submitted to the owner for approval. Contractors shall be rated for designed voltage and use. Contactors shall be 30A rated. 2.08 WIRING A. All wiring shall be neatly grouped,bundled and tie-wrapped as shown below. B. All conductors shall be stranded copper THHN or THWN(90C)insulation. C. Wiring and terminal blocks shall be labeled. D. All wiring sha 11 m eet NEC standards. 2.09 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal blocks in the contactor cabinet shall be din-rail mounted as noted under Paragraph 2.1 7 above. B. Output wiring shall be connected via terminal blocks to accept field wiring. Kimley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Lighting Control Cabinet 16527-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Terminals for bonding conductors shall also be provided. 2.10 LABELING A. All products shall be labeled(inside)with the supplier's company name,model number,panel rating and the date ofmanufacture. B. The supplier shall also provide adhesive Lamicoid or vinyl labels on the inside of each cabinet for each component.Each contactor and output circuit shall also be labeled in accordance with the suppliers lighting design. C. All ID labels shall have'A"to high black characters on a white background. D. All wiring shall be labeled with computer generated sleeve type wire markers. 2.11 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. The supplier shall test all equipment circuits and lighting controls prior to shipment.Test results shall be provided upon request. 2.12 PACKAGING A. Any product damaged in shipping shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged components. B. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests. C. Provide instruments to make and record test results. D. Tests and Observations: Supplier shall test all circuits and controls prior to shipping. E. Replace or repair damaged and malfunctioning units,make necessary adjustments,and retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. F. The lighting controls supplier shall undertake all required set-up,testing,commissioning and training ofthe engineer as required forthe proper operation ofthe system. END OF SECTION 16527 Kim ley-Horn and Associates,Inc. Lighting Control Cabinet 16527-3 (This page is intentionally left blank) 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 16535 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements,including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 16120-Wires and Cables. 2. Section 16190-Supporting Devices. 3. Section 16501 -Lamps. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment,materials,labor,supervision,and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of emergency lighting equipment. As shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Emergency LED power supplies. 2. Emergency exit signs. 3. Emergency LED wall units. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested,provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide emergency lighting equipment of the types specified on the Drawings or an approved equal. 2.2 SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY POWER EXIT SIGNS A. Type: Exit signs with integral battery-operated emergency power supply, including power failure relay,test switch,AC ON pilot light,battery,and fully-automatic two-rate charger. B. Battery: Sealed lead acid requiring no maintenance or replacement for 8 years under normal conditions. Engineering Associates Emergency Lighting Equipment 16535-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2.3 LED EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Emergency Lighting Unit: Self-contained unit with rechargeable storage batteries, charger,and lamps. B. Battery: 6 volt, lead calcium type,with 1.5 hour capacity to supply the connected lamp load. C. Charger: Solid state charger,capable of maintaining the battery in a full-charge state during normal conditions,and capable of recharging discharged battery to full charged within 12 hours. D. Lamps: furnished with fixture. E. Unit Housing: Steel with gray hammer tone finish. F. Indicators:Provide lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING. G. Provide switch to transfer unit from normal supply to battery supply. H. Electrical Connection:Knockout for conduit connection. I. Unit Voltage:As indicated on schedule. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units plumb and level. B. Aim directional lampheads as directed. END OF SECTION Engineering Associates Emergency Lighting Equipment 16535-2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR INFORMATION ONLY (CITY TO DIRECT PURCHASE) (This page is intentionally left blank) Brock USA LLC Page 1 of 8 OCT 2018 Technical Guidelines Brock PowerBase YSR Synthetic Base System for Synthetic Turf Fields Materials, Installation, and Performance Guidelines for Synthetic (Drainage and Impact) Underlayment This document does not create any warranty, express or implied. Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 2 of 8 OCT 2018 Synthetic Base Material and Performance Scope: This document defines requirements for the installation and operating performance of an athletic field synthetic base underlayment material needed for a professional-grade synthetic turf field. Defined are the primary system requirements for insuring quality, environmental compatibility, optimum safety of the playing surface (impact attenuation/surface playability) and high capacity subsurface drainage of the installed playing field. Specifications listed are defined per applicable ASTM standard test methods, or other national or internationally recognized testing standards. All other specifications and tolerances listed shall be defined under standard ANSI and/or ISO drawing and specification rules. Note: This specification requires prior installation of stabilized subsurface base, including a perimeter foundation-grade concrete curb and high-capacity trenched storm drain system. Part 1: Specification References 1.1 Related Specification Sections Section 02319: Sub-Grade Foundation and Drainage Section 02792: Synthetic Turf System Part 2: Testing References 2.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), International Standards Organization (ISO), European Committee for Standardization (EN), German Institute for Standardization (DIN), Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute (C2CPII), Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): ASTM D3574-08 Standard Specification for Flexible Materials - Tensile Strength, Test E Tensile Elongation ASTM D3575-08, Flexible cellular polymeric materials - Determination of Compression Test D Strength ASTM D696 Determination of Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion ISO 62:2008 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics DIN 53 428 ASTM 1551: DIN Water Permeability of Synthetic Turf Systems and Permeable 18-035, Part 6 Bases ASTM D4716-14 Standard Test Method for Determining the (In-plane) Flow Rate per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head —TRI procedure using characteristic flow equation. This document does not create any warranty, express or implied. Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 3 of 8 OCT 2018 ASTM F355-16 Standard Test Method for Impact Attenuation of Turf Playing Missile E Surface Systems, Other Protective Sport Systems, and Materials Used for Athletics, Recreation and Play ASTM F3146-18 Standard Test Method for Impact Attenuation of Turf Playing Surface Systems Designated for Rugby ASTM F355-16 Standard Test Method for Impact Attenuation of Playing Surface Missile A Systems, Other Protective Sport Systems, and Materials Used for Athletics, Recreation and Play ASTM F3189-17 Standard Method for Measuring Force Reduction, Vertical Deformation, Energy Restitution of Synthetic Turf Systems Using the Advanced Artificial Athlete EN 14808:2005 Surfaces for Sports Areas. Determination of Shock Absorption EN 14809:2005 Surfaces for Sports Areas. Determination of Vertical Deformation ASTM F1936-10 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Turf Playing Systems as Measured in the Field ASTM F925 Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring EN 14030:2010 Resistance to Acid and Alkaline Liquids ISO 12960:1998 ISO 13438:2004 Resistance to Oxidation (Accelerating Aging) ASTM G22-76 Determining the Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria ASTM G21-96 Determining Resistance of Synthetic Materials to Fungi ISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management Systems ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management Systems C2CPII Cradle to Cradle EPA 6010E Heavy Metals, Mercury 7470A, 7471A EPA 8260B Volatile Organics EPA 8270C Semi-Volatile Organics This document does not create any warranty, express or implied.Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 4 of 8 OCT 2018 Part 3: Synthetic Turf Underlayment Description 3.1 General Requirements for Underlayment System —An impact energy absorbing sub-base drainage system designed specifically for use with synthetic turf is required. The specified material must have physical, drainage and performance properties that meet the following requirements: 3.1.1 Minimum material nominal thickness 25mm — material thickness must be within ± 1.5mm 3.1.2 Tensile Strength >80 psi (ASTM D3574-08 Test E) 3.1.3 Tensile Elongation >30% (ASTM D3574-08 Test E) 3.1.4 Compression Strength >20psi @ 25% strain (ASTM 3575-08 Test D) 3.1.5 Linear Thermal Expansion < 0.10 mm /m /° C (ASTM D696) 3.1.6 Water Absorption 51% after 24 hrs (ISO 62:2008 / DIN 52 438) 3.1.7 Water Permeability >500"/hr (ASTM 1551 DIN 18-035, Part 6) 3.1.8 Lateral Transmissivity at 0.005 gradient >_ 0.50 gpm/ft (ASTM D4716 —TRI Environmental method using characteristic flow equation) 3.1.9 Head Injury Criterion <1000 from a 1.2m drop height and <700 from a 1.0m drop height (ASTM F3146-18, Procedure A) 3.1.10 Gmax <90 G's (ASTM 355-16, missile A) 3.1.11 Shock Absorption >60% (ASTM F3189-17 / EN 14808:2005) 3.1.12 Vertical Deformation <7.0mm (EN 14809:2005) 3.1.13 Resistance to Chemicals < 2 (ASTM F925) 3.1.14 Resistance to Acid and Alkaline Liquids 0% tensile strength loss after 100- year model (EN 14030:2010 / ISO 12960:1998) 3.1.15 Resistance to Accelerated Aging (Oxidation) <10% tensile strength loss after 100-year model of 56 days at 110°C (ISO 13438:2004) 3.1.16 Resistance to Bacteria - no growth (ASTM G22) 3.1.17 Resistance to Fungi - no growth (ASTM G21) Impact Safety Requirements for installed Surface System of Infilled Synthetic Turf and Underlayment: 3.1.18 Surface system must provide average HIC <700 from a 1.3m drop height upon initial testing of installed field. (ASTM F3146-18, Procedure A) 3.1.19 Surface system must provide maximum average Gmax of<100 g upon initial testing of installed field (ASTM F1936-10) 3.1.20 Surface system must provide maximum average Gmax of field of 120 g during warranty period of artificial turf. (ASTM F1936-10) This document does not create any warranty, express or implied. Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 5 of 8 OCT 2018 3.1.21 Surface system must provide critical fall height of 1.6m or higher upon initial testing of the field. (ASTM F355-2016 Missile E) Part 4: Quality Assurance, Guarantees and Insurance 4.1 Product must be made in ISO accredited facility in the United States of America according to the Federal Trade Commission Made in USA Standard. 4.2 Material must be manufactured in an ISO 9000:2008 certified facility. 4.3 Product must be of a homogenous material composition, with a documented chain of custody of all raw materials. Variable content material will not be accepted. 4.4 Manufacturer must provide documentation of material content and pre-approved standard OSHA MSDS sheet. 4.5 Manufacturer must demonstrate successful athletic field installation in the United States of at least 40 million square feet (approx. 500 fields) over a minimum period of 10 years. 4.6 Material must be covered by a pre-approved and binding 25-year limited product and performance warranty issue by a company in the United States of America. Warranty shall include the provision that manufacturer will deliver to the Owner and install new panels to replace the non-conforming panels. The installation shall include the temporary removal and repair or replacement of the artificial turf and infill over the affected area. 4.7 Warranty must specify static and dynamic load limits in pounds and pounds per square inch. Warranty must not specify monetary limits of liability. Warranty must allow owner a notice period of at least 30 days for non-compliance claims. 4.8 Warranty must include guarantee for surface system HIC <700 from a 1.3m drop height according to ASTM F3148-18 upon initial testing of installed field. 4.9 Warranty must include guarantee for surface system Gmax <120 g according to ASTM F1936-10 for warranty period of artificial turf. 4.10 System seams should be mechanically locked into place by hand without cutting, splicing, use of additional materials, glue, fasteners, or secondary processes and equipment. 4.11 Material must be installed according to manufacturer's instructions, without exceptions. 4.12 Manufacturer must provide written procedures to selected turf supplier or contractor for the installation of turf on top of underlayment. 4.13 Product is to be shipped as flat panels on pre-packaged pallets. 4.14 Prior to installation, manufacturer must provide an endorsed certificate as proof of at least $1,000,000 product liability insurance stipulated in the United States of America with field owner named as the certificate holder. The insurance certificate must specify the name and address of the field facility at which the specified product will be installed. This document does not create any warranty, express or implied.Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 6 of 8 OCT 2018 Part 5: Environmental Compatibility 5.1 Material must be manufactured in an ISO 14001:2004 certified facility. 5.2 Product must be Cradle to Cradle TM Certified by the Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute. 5.3 Product must not contain concentrations of metals, volatile organic compounds (VOCs), or semi-volatile organic compounds (SVOCs) at concentrations greater than EPA Regional Screening Levels or Department of Toxic Substances Control Human Health Risk Assessment (HHRA) Note 3 thresholds. (EPA 60108, EPA 7470A EPA 7471A, EPA 8260B, EPA 8270C). 5.4 Product must not contain leachable concentrations of metals, VOCs, or SVOCs (using the synthetic precipitation leaching procedure) greater than maximum contaminant levels (MCLs) or Regional Water Quality Control Board Environmental Screening Levels for groundwater and surface water-fresh water aquatic habitat. (EPA 60108, EPA 7470A EPA 7471A, EPA 8260B, EPA 8270C). 5.5 Manufacturer must provide a product lifetime recycle / reuse program within the United States of America. Down-cycling and/or energy production not acceptable. Additional Requirements for California: 5.6 Product must not contain a chemical on the current California Proposition 65 Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 - Update effective 06 JUNE 2014 5.7 Product must not contain concentrations of substances at hazardous waste levels per California Code of Regulations, Title 22, Division 4.5, Chapter 11 — Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste. Part 6: Submittals 6.1 General: Bidding contractor must identify performance base system with bid package. If a non-specified product is identified, the proposed alternate product must be submitted and pre-approved by the design architect/engineer 10 days prior to the bid opening. If bidding contractor does not identify a manufacturer, the Township/School District will assume that the specified product is included in the bid package and will not consider substitutions. 6.2 Product Data: Submit 8" x 12" product sample and typical properties sheet. 6.3 Shop Drawings: Submit cross-sectional view showing product installation in relation to sub-base and synthetic turf(including edge attachment). 6.4 Test Data: Submit all applicable test data for compliance to specifications. All testing to be performed following applicable ASTM or other internationally recognized standards and procedures. This document does not create any warranty, express or implied. Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 7 of 8 OCT 2018 6.5 Installation: Submit copy of product installation instructions. Submit copy installation recommendations. 6.6 Warranty: Submit copy of product 25 -Year warranty coverage as specified in 4.6—4.8. 6.7 Insurance: Submit copy of endorsed insurance certificate as specified in 4.13. Part 7: Products 7.1 Description: Resilient Molded Expanded Polypropylene Base System 7.2 Product: Brock PowerBase YSR or pre-approved equal 7.3 Contact Information: Brock USA LLC 3090 Sterling Circle Boulder, CO 80301 Telephone: (303) 544-5800 Fax: 866-850-9421 sales(a�brockusa.com www.brockusa.com Ronnie Pascale East Region Vice President Telephone: (804) 366-1368 rpascale(cc�brockusa.com 7.4 Manufacturing/Ordering Information: Brock USA LLC 3090 Sterling Circle Boulder, CO 80301 Telephone: (303) 544-5800 Fax: 866-850-9421 sales@brockusa.com 7.5 Product format: Interlocking panels Size: approximately 73.5 x 49.0 inches (1867 x 1245 mm) overall dimensions Area: Net coverage per panel 24.15 ft2 (2.24 m2) Thickness: 1.00" (25.4mm) ± .08" Panel Weight: approximately 5.2 lbs / panel Part 8: Product Substitutions 8.1 Product substitutions are allowed only in accordance with pre-bid substitution request procedures outlined in the contract documents. No substitutions will be allowed after the bid date. Bidding contractor must identify performance base system with bid package. If a non-specified product is identified, the proposed alternate product must be submitted and pre-approved by the design architect/engineer 10 days prior to the bid opening. If bidding contractor does not identify a manufacturer, the Township/School District will This document does not create any warranty, express or implied.Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. Brock USA LLC Page 8 of 8 OCT 2018 assume that the specified product is included in the bid package and will not consider substitutions. Part 9: Installation 9.1 Per manufacturer's recommendation - obtain written installation instructions and procedures from the manufacturer. Part 10: Surplus Material 10.1 Surplus materials to be determined by the Owner prior to order and delivery of product to the installation site. Surplus quantities to be identified in writing by the General Contractor at the time of order placement. Part 11: Project Completion 11.1 Upon completion of installation, a walk-through will be conducted to inspect the quality of work and ensure all details meet specifications. 11.2 A punch list of unacceptable or incomplete items will be documented and agreed upon for completion prior to final project closeout and acceptance. Part 12: Approvals 12.1 Finished synthetic base installation workmanship must be approved in advance by the turf manufacturer. Approvals to be based on a physical inspection performed at the site prior to installation of any synthetic turf material. 12.2 Any approvals sought after turf installation will be declined. Any associated repair or replacement costs associated with rework of the synthetic base will be the responsibility of the turf supplier/installer. END OF SECTION This document does not create any warranty, express or implied. Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. (This page is intentionally left blank) ❑r❑m❑❑❑❑❑❑ ❑❑❑❑1 ❑❑I ❑I1111ID'❑201❑ uru -TM r=== r - H , iir - [d _ o 0111 I Dili iu❑❑❑❑❑ m0rOd ❑❑D1 ❑D'I11 I I I I I I I I❑ D'®d 01 I Irl❑®❑❑IIITEI 1 I®❑❑❑ d D'❑❑❑ ❑D1 ❑ ❑❑❑®QID'❑d ® = ❑❑❑❑ o ®1 I I i I I i I❑®❑ lim ❑❑❑❑I 111 I Id❑❑❑Ed ❑❑❑I I I OE® o ®I 11111 I I❑®❑®®® ❑ I 1 r®Cd r❑[Imm r❑® ®TI❑I I 1 la1❑ CD 11110 a nnnnli:Ea❑ ❑❑❑❑ ®®d rimrn ❑Lmd®®®l 1 10 ❑EA ❑❑❑M 1 001❑ o W I MI 1 ❑ummu❑ElY®®d❑-Y❑d❑ I 1 I ❑❑ ®®d❑mTTTrd C ❑ ❑ ®® ❑❑ ❑❑E0❑ ❑❑ ®❑ ❑ ❑ar= ❑® ®® =Emu ®1 I I I I r❑❑❑❑ ❑❑ rim ❑ [2❑ ❑ ❑❑❑❑ I I I i Ill d ❑L'dum ®❑❑ ❑❑ 9❑❑d[2012❑ o ®I i i I i I 1 I❑®❑ ❑ ❑d❑ T❑❑ ❑ I I 1 II 1111 1 OUTDO [11❑❑011 1 II 11 I ED=❑D'i I I®d❑ o ®I H u l l I❑[T1Tmrl dill ❑I 11 I I I MI 1 ID'I I d — ❑ a)❑ ® ®❑ ❑❑❑ ❑❑® o ®111111 I I❑1 I I1 ❑I I I ❑ ❑ HU ❑❑ ❑❑❑10 DIUr ❑DT❑❑® o ®® 01 1 I❑❑ ❑Cd r❑❑❑®❑Dd ®❑ ❑❑I 1 r❑ no ❑D-❑® D' I I IOd❑❑I 111111❑❑ o 11:1= 111111101111DOMEIM ❑❑®d❑❑I l i i i l❑❑1❑ ®❑I I I I This document does not create any warranty, express or implied. Limited warranties will be established by separate documents provided by the vendors of the respective materials and the installation contractor. (This page is intentionally left blank) slaw LEGION PROTM 1.75 SPORTS TURF 1. 0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this section. 1.2 Scope of Work A. Furnish all labor,materials,tools,and equipment necessary to install, in place,all synthetic turf material, infill and underlayment/shock pad as indicated on the plans and as specified herein. The installation of all new materials shall be performed in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's written installation instructions, and in accordance with all approved shop drawings. B. Work shall be delivered complete-in place and ready for Owner use. C. Prior to order of materials,the Synthetic Turf Contractor shall submit the following 1. Product data, including Independent Laboratory Test Results, 2. Installation details 3. Warranty 4. Underlayment/Shock Pad 5. Infill 6. Field layout and striping plans, 7. Details on construction,especially any details that are anticipated to deviate from plans and specifications. D. Prior to the beginning of installation,the Synthetic Turf Contractor of the synthetic turf shall verify the base for planarity.Upon written confirmation from the base contractor that compaction/planarity and drainage/permeability specifications have been achieved,the installation of synthetic turf system will proceed as arranged. E. Prior to Final Acceptance,the Synthetic Turf Contractor shall submit to the Owner three(3)copies of Executed Warranty Documents and Maintenance Manuals,which will include necessary instructions for the proper care and preventative maintenance of the infill, underlayment/shock pad, synthetic turf system, including painting and striping. Documents shall be provided in electronic format and as bound-hard copies. 1.3 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Shop drawings shall be prepared and contain all pertinent information regarding installation. These drawings shall be submitted to the Owner or Owner's representative for approval prior to the manufacturing and shipment of materials. 11012017 B. Submit drawings, product data and samples for: 1. Installation details,edge detail,other inserts,covers, etc., required by contract. 2. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must have been in business under the same ownership for a minimum of five years, and shall have been installing similar sports fields for that entire period. 3. Striping plan showing any field lines,markings and boundaries, and field logos per project drawings. 4. Placement of underlayment/shock pad. 5. Placement, distribution and installation of infill. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Synthetic Turf Manufacturer is defined as: 1. A company specializing in the design and manufacturing of infilled turf systems with not less than five(5)years documented experience. 2. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must have been in business under the same ownership for at least five(5)years, and shall have been installing similar sports fields for that entire period. 3. Manufacturer shall have an experienced technical services and sales professional who is available during the course of the work to meet personally with the Owner,Contractor,and Landscape Architect. 4. The Contractor shall be approved and certified to install the specified product by the manufacturer. 5. The Owner shall have final determination on Contractor selection. B. Synthetic Turf Manufacturer's Experience: 1. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer shall have the experience of at least one hundred(100)acceptable installations of full-size fields(minimum 65,000 sq. ft.) in the United States within the past five(5)years of tufted, polyethylene grass-like fabrics that are filled with either all rubber or a mixture of SBR rubber and sand. Submit a list of all applicable installations with the bid. 2. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer shall have the experience of twenty-five(25) acceptable installations(minimum 65,000 sq. ft.)of fields that are at least eight(8)years old. Submit a list of all applicable installations with the bid. 3. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer shall have the experience of fifty(50) acceptable installations of the specific fiber system specified. Submit a list of all applicable installations with the bid. 4. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer shall have the experience(if applicable to this project specification)of one hundred(100)installations with sewn main fabric seams. 5. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must be a certified member of the Synthetic Turf Council in good standing. 11012017 6. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must have and operate its own extensive research and development laboratory. This laboratory must include testing devices for the following tests: Yarn Tensile Strength, Yarn Elongation,Tuft Bind, Grab Tear Strength, Seam Strength, g-max, Force Reduction,Vertical Deformation,Ball Roll, Ball Rebound, Rotational Resistance, Linear Traction,Relative Abrasive Index,UV Resistance, Flammability, and Simulated Aging. 7. Testing of the synthetic turf system is mandatory and must be provided from a laboratory that is accredited by the NVLAP. Testing from laboratories that are not NVLAP accredited will not be accepted. The National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST)is part of the U.S. Department of Commerce and administers the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program(NVLAP). Accreditation requirements are established in accordance with the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations(CFR, Title 15,Part 285),National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program, and encompass the requirements of ISO/IEC 17025. 8. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must have manufactured and installed fields at every level of competition, including high school,college and professional. 9. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must have at least(1)one current NCAA Division 1 and(1)one current NFL game stadium or NFL practice field installation. 10. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must not have had more than(5)five fields replaced,under warranty,during the past 5 years. 11. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must be vertically integrated including in- house tufting, polyethylene monofilament extrusion, in-house coating, polyurethane compounding,manufacture own primary backing, in-house yarn texturizing, ability and flexibility to tuft various gauge widths and have the ability to recycle used/old fields. 12. The Synthetic Turf Manufacturer must have a fully integrated quality system, directly based on and compliant with ISO 9000, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 international standards. C. Synthetic Turf Contractor is defined as: 1. Have built and installed a minimum of ten(10)infilled synthetic turf fields. Turf contractors and on-site superintendent shall provide a resume to provide proof of experience. a. At any time after award of the contract and before the completion of the project, should any member of the approved crew or subcontractor discontinue their relationship with the synthetic turf crew or subcontractor,the Owner shall be notified. Failure to provide personnel meeting the minimum qualifications shall be considered default of the contract requirements. b. The Synthetic Turf Contractor shall be approved by Owner and system-wide component manufacturers as qualified to install and warranty the turf system, underlayment/shock pad and infill. 11012017 D. Warranty:The Synthetic Turf Contractor shall submit its Manufacturer's Warranty,which guarantees the usability and playability of the synthetic turf system for its intended uses for an eight(8)year period commencing with the date of Final Acceptance. 1. The warranty submitted must have the following characteristics: a) Must provide full-field coverage for eight(8)years from date of Substantial Completion, b) Must warrant materials and workmanship, c) Must warrant that the materials installed meet or the product specifications within manufacturing tolerances, d) Must have a provision to either repair or replace such portion of the installed materials that are no longer serviceable to maintain a serviceable and playable surface, e) Must be a Manufacturer's warranty from a single source covering workmanship and all self-manufactured or procured materials, f) Must not be limited to the amount of annual usage, g) Must provide,at the time of bid, a copy of its pre-paid 3rd party insurance policy. This policy must have an annual aggregate amount of no less than$60 million, and a per incident limit of no less than$7 million per claim. The third party insurer must have an AM Best rating of A++or better. 1.5 Existing Conditions A. If the surface on which the new synthetic turf is to be installed is an existing asphaltic/concrete base,the Synthetic Turf Contractor will be responsible for any damage due to negligence to the concrete during removal/installation of the synthetic turf system provided there are no failures below the surface which contribute to the damage. The football goal posts, if any,are to be removed and reinstalled by the Owner or Prime Contractor to facilitate the installation of the new synthetic turf system. B. If the surface on which the new synthetic turf to be installed is a new asphaltic/concrete base or a new base of compacted,porous aggregate,the Synthetic Turf Contractor will be responsible for any damage to the base during removal/installation of the synthetic turf system after the deficiencies(if any) have been corrected by the base contractor with respect to planarity, compaction, and drainage/permeability. New in ground equipment, football goal post(if any) and/or infield mix backfill within the contiguous synthetic turf limits or immediately adjacent thereto are to be installed prior to the installation of the synthetic turf system. Damage to the synthetic turf system during the installation of such materials is not the responsibility of the Synthetic Turf Contactor. 1.6 Schedule 11012017 A. The Synthetic Turf Contractor shall complete all work on the synthetic turf system in accordance with the published project schedule, or as mutually agreed upon. B. The synthetic turf contractor will require unencumbered use of staging area within one-hundred-fifty(150)feet of the synthetic turf area(s)being installed in order to complete the work. The Synthetic Turf Contractor shall also be afforded unencumbered access through the construction site to reach the synthetic turf field area being installed. 1.7 Surface Area A. The Synthetic Turf Contractor is to verify all measurements. 1.8 Utilities A. Owner or Prime Contractor will supply necessary water,adequate lighting,and electricity for installation. Owner or Prime Contractor shall permit use of toilet and wash up facilities. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Approved Products: Shaw Sports Turf:Legion Pro Contact: Matt Stanley Territory Manager-Texas, Shaw Sports Turf Phone: 214-864-4347 Email: matt.stanley@shawinc.com 2.2 Materials A. Shall be tufted, polyethylene, grass-like fabric coated with a secondary backing of high-grade polyurethane. Refer to grid in section 2.2 H. The two fibers specified in this grid shall be tufted through the same needle in a grass-like fabric to a finished pile-height also specified in the grid. The monofilament fiber must have multiple contours in the fiber cross-section consisting of a four-peak wave. The contour angles of the surface must result in interference of the light rays reflected by the surface to produce a dull appearance to the turf surface. The fiber must exhibit a general decrease in thickness from the center of the cross section to each tip. B. All components and their installation method shall be designed and manufactured for use on outdoor athletic fields. The materials as hereinafter specified should be able to withstand exposure in all climates, be resistant to insect infestation, rot, fungus,mildew,ultraviolet light and heat degradation,and shall have the basic characteristics of flow-through drainage, allowing free movement of surface 11012017 runoff through the synthetic turf fabric where such water may flow to the existing base and into the field drainage system. C. The finished playing surface shall appear as mowed grass and shall resist abrasion and cutting from normal use. D. The polyethylene pile yarn shall be a proven athletic caliber yarn designed specifically for outdoor use and stabilized to resist the effect of ultraviolet degradation, heat, foot traffic,water, and airborne pollutants. E. The system shall be tufted at the pile height and gauge listed in specification grid, refer to grid in section 2.2 H. F. The Primary Backing must be a multi-layer backing, contain UV stabilizers and must pass 3000 hours of QUV A testing,refer to grid in section 2.2 H. G. The Secondary Backing of high-grade polyurethane shall be applied to the Primary Backing. Secondary Backing adds resistance to water degradation and strengthens grip on fibers,refer to grid in 2.2 H. H. The entire backing shall be coated with holes perforated throughout the backing at the Synthetic Turf Manufacturer's recommended interval to allow for drainage. Partially coated backings or latex coating materials shall not be acceptable. Polyethelene Pile Yarn Monofilament/Slit METHOD Film Linear Density (Denier)Mono/Slit* 10,800/5,000 ASTM D 1577 Yarn Thickness Mono/Slit 300/100 microns ASTM D 3218 Pile Weight**** 40 oz./yd2 ASTM D 5848 Finished Pile Height**** 1.75 ASTM D 5823 Product Weight(total)*** 68 oz./yd2 ASTM D 5848 Primary Backing Weight**** 8 oz./yd2 ASTM D 5848 Secondary Coating Weight+ 20 oz./yd2 ASTM D 5848 Fabric Width 15' (4.57m) ASTM D 5793 Tuft Gauge 1/2" ASTM D 5793 Grab Tear Strength Avg. > 200 lb.-F ASTM D 5034 Tuft Bind(Avg.) > 10 lb.-F ASTM D 1335 Infilltrometer >25 ASTM D3885 Except where noted the above specifications are nominal. *Values are+/-8%. ***Values are+/- l0oz.****Values are+/-5%.+Values are+/-3 oz./yd2. 11012017 I. Infill materials. Brockfill by Brock, USA as approved by Owner. J. Maintenance/Grooming Machine. (1)one rotary sweeper/turf grooming and tinning machine suitable for towing behind a compact tractor or quad maintenance vehicle. The machine shall be provided and certified by the turf manufacturer as consistent and supporting of the turf and infill warranty requirements. K. Underlayment/Shock Pad. Powerbase Pro by Brock USA as approved by Owner. L. Perimeter edge details, underground storm sewer piping and connections, and foundations required for the system shall be as detailed as approved by the Owner. The cost for these embedded items shall be included in the General Contractor's price along with the compacted,porous base. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The installation shall be performed in full compliance with approved shop drawings. B. Only factory-trained technicians approved by Owner skilled in the installation of athletic caliber synthetic turf systems shall undertake the placement of the system. C. Subject to the requirements in Section 1.2(B),the surface to receive the synthetic turf shall be verified by the Synthetic Turf Contractor as ready for the installation of the synthetic turf system and must be perfectly clean as installation commences and shall be maintained in that condition throughout the process. 3.2 Removal(if necessary) A. Synthetic Turf Contractor shall remove the existing synthetic turf and under-pad from the field(as required by contract). B. After removal of the stadium surface,the existing synthetic turf and pad materials shall be rolled up and placed at a location designated by the Owner. 3.3 Installation A. The completed base and adjacent curbs/perimeter nailer shall be inspected by the Engineer or General Contractor by means of a laser and plotted on a 10-foot grid. Based upon the Contractor's inspection of the topographical survey,the General Contractor shall fine grade the base suitably, including properly rolling and compacting the base to achieve a surface planarity within'/a"in 10-feet(+0, - 11012017 1/4"). OWNER, OR PRIME CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT APPROVE THE BASE FOR TOLERANCE TO GRADE WITHOUT OBTAINING THE TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY. C. Subgrade and base shall be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95%of maximum dry density. Care must be exercised to minimize segregation. General Contractor shall make written records available to Synthetic Turf Contractor's inspector for both drainage/permeability and compaction/planarity as obtained from a minimum 10' x 10' grid. D. Underlayment/Shock Pad shall be installed consistent and in compliance with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. C. The Synthetic Turf Project Superintendent shall thoroughly inspect all synthetic turf materials delivered to the site for both mixing and quantity to assure that the entire installation shall have sufficient material to maintain proper mixing ratios. D. Synthetic turf shall be loose-laid across the field, stretched,and attached to the perimeter edge detail. Synthetic turf shall be of sufficient length to permit full cross-field installation. No head or cross seams will be allowed except as needed for inlaid fabric striping or to accommodate programmed cut-outs. E. All seams shall be flat,tight, and permanent with no separation or fraying. Selvedge edges of all panels must be cut and discarded prior to being sewn together. A butt-stitch method of seaming must be implemented and a double- lock stitch with cord recommended by the Synthetic Turf Manufacturer shall be utilized. Bagger stitching is prohibited. Seaming tape is to be constructed of high tenacity,coated non-woven fabric. Inlaid markings shall be adhered to seaming tape with a high strength polyurethane adhesive applied per the Synthetic Turf Manufacturer's standard procedures for outdoor applications. All main fabric seams shall be transverse to the field direction(i.e. run perpendicularly across the field). F. Infll materials shall be properly applied in numerous lifts using special broadcasting equipment. The synthetic turf shall be raked and brushed properly as the mixture is applied. The infill materials can only be applied when the synthetic turf fabric is dry. M. g-Max(shock attenuation)test<200 at installation. 3.4 Field Markings and Decorations A. Field markings and decorations shall be installed in accordance with approved project shop drawings. 3.5 Clean Up 11012017 A. Synthetic Turf Contractor shall provide the labor, supplies, and equipment,as necessary,for final cleaning of the surfaces. B. The Synthetic Turf Contractor shall keep the area clean and clear of debris throughout the project. C. Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc., shall be cleaned as necessary to leave the work area in a clean, immaculate condition ready for immediate occupancy and use by Owner. 11012017 LEtilON PROTM Shaw AINF SPORTS TURF atiff SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM TEST ASTM TESTING UNIT LEGION PRO LEGION PRO 2.0 LEGION PRO 2.25 COMPONENT PROCEDURE 1.75 Yarn Linear Density- Denier Mono* D1577-07 Denier 10,800 10,800 10,800 Linear Density- Denier Tape* D1577-07 Denier 5,000 5,000 5,000 Thickness - Mono** D3218-07 Microns 300 300 300 Thickness -Tape** D3218-07 Microns 100 100 100 Break Strength - Mono*** D2256-10 lbs/force 20 20 20 Break Strength -Tape*** D2256-10 lbs/force 12 12 12 Elongation - Mono &Tape D2256-10 % >30 >30 >30 Total Lead Content- Mono&Tape F2765-14 ppm < 100 < 100 < 100 Turf Fabric Total Product Weight**** D5848-10e1 oz/yd2 74 74 78 Pile Yarn Fiber Weight** D5848-10e1 oz/yd2 40 46 50 Primary Backing Weight** D5848-10e 1 oz/yd 2 8 8 8 Secondary Backing Weight' D5848-10e1 oz/yd' 20 20 20 Average Pile Height** D5823-13 inches 1.75 2.0 2.25 Average Tuft Bind Strength D1335-12 lb/force >10 > 10 >10 Tufting Gauge D5793-05 inches 1/2 1/2 1/2 Average Grab Tear Strength D5034-09 lb/force >200 > 200 >200 Turf System g-Max F355-10a <200 < 200 <200 Pill Flammability D2859-06 (2011) Pass Pass Pass Infiltrometer(Drainage) BS 7044 Method 4 in/hr >25 > 25 >25 Except where noted as a minimum or maximum,the above specifications are nominal. *All values are±8% **All values are±5% ***All values are±25% ****All values are±10% t All values are±3 oz ©2015 Shaw Sports Turf Fiber Backing System shawgrass a synthetic turf system 1 56SG All Seasons 2 Property Imperial Unit Metric Unit Description PRODUCT Fiber Type 100% Nylon PROPERTIES Fiber Mass 4400 denier 4888 dtex Nylon Mono Finished .478 in 12.14 mm Pile Height Color(s) 00300 Green Tufting Gauge 3/16 in Backing Matrix 20.5 oz/yd2 695.1 g/m2 Stabilized Dual Layered Woven Polypropylene/Urethane Unitary PERFORMANCE Total Weight 55.5 oz/yd2 1879.1 g/m2 ASTM D418 PROPERTIES PACKAGING Item Number 156SG Roll Width 12 ft 3.66 m Standard Roll 100 ft 30.47 m Length 5 YEAR LIMITED INDOOR COMMERCIAL WARRANTY. 'For full terms,please see the complete 5 year limited indoor warranty. All specifications subject to a manufacturing tolerance of+/-5%. Tufting gauge is the manufacturing standard.Values will change slightly during the secondary backing process. Custom roll lengths and cuts are available upon request. 5/4"'For reference .ur.oses onl if .rinted or downloaded. (This page is intentionally left blank) TRuHOPR shave AMP SPORTS TURF Aar SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM TEST ASTM TESTING UNIT TRUHOP 46 TRUHOP 50 COMPONENT PROCEDURE Yarn Linear Density- Denier' D1577-07 Denier 9,000 9,000 Thickness D3218-07 Microns 110 110 Break Strength'* D2256-10 lbs/force 20 20 Elongation D2256-10 % >30 >30 Total Lead Content F2765-14 ppm < 100 < 100 Turf Fabric Total Product Weight"* D5848-10e 1 oz/yd 2 74 78 Pile Yarn Fiber Weight**** D5848-10e 1 oz/yd 2 46 50 Primary Backing Weight**'* D5848-10e1 oz/yd2 8 8 Secondary Backing Weight' D5848-10e 1 oz/yd 2 20 20 Average Pile Height***' D5823-13 inches 1.625 1.75 Average Tuft Bind Strength D 1335-12 lb/force >10 >10 Tufting Gauge D5793-05 inches 1/4 1/4 Average Grab Tear Strength D5034-09 lb/force >200 >200 Turf System Pill Flammability D2859-06 (2011) Pass Pass Infiltrometer(Drainage) BS 7044 Method 4 in/hr >25 >25 Except where noted as a minimum or maximum,the above specifications are nominal. *All values are±80/0 **All values are±25% ***All values are±10% ****All values are±5% t All values are±3 oz ©2015 Shaw Sports Turf (This page is intentionally left blank) Fiber .— Backing System shawgrass Elevate 68 740TF Yarn Description Slit film/Nylon thatch Melt nit(tape) 120°C Melt Poit(Spikezone) 220° C Linear Density(Denier,Tape)* 8,000 Linear Density(Denier, Nylon) 4,400 Specific Gravity(Tape) 0.945 g/cc Specific Gravity(Nylon) 1.15 g/cc Thickness(Tape) 100 microns Thickness(Nylon) 100 microns Yarn Break Strength (Tape) 16 lb-F Yarn Break Strength (Nylon) 20 lb-F Yarn Elongation (Tape) 50% Yarn Elongation (Nylon) 50% Total Lead Content(Tape) < 100 ppm Total Lead Content(Nylon) < 100 ppm Total Weight* 94 oz/yd2 Pile Weight* 68 oz/yd2 Primary Backing Weight* 6 oz/yd2 Secondary Backing Weight** 20 oz/yd2 Average Pile Height* 0.75" Colors Field Green (Black&White line packages only) Average Tuft Bind Strength as required Average Breaking Strength > 150 lb-F Stitches Per Inch as needed Gauge 1/4 Pill Flammability 8 of 8 pass Abrasive Index <30 Infiltration Rate > 14 in/hr Football Shoe Traction (Dry) Initiate 1.0 Slide 0.8 Football Shoe Traction (Wet) Initiate 1.0 Slide 0.8 Soccer Shoe Traction (Dry) Initiate 1.0 Slide 0.8 Soccer Shoe Traction (Wet) Initiate 1.0 Slide 0.8 Average Soccer Ball Rebound > 0.6 m Average G-Max <200 Except where noted as a minimum or maximum,the above specifications are nominal. *All values are±5% **All values are±3 oz/yd2 09/12/17 For reference •ur•oses onl if •rinted or downloaded. (This page is intentionally left blank) TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE EVALUATIONS FOR INFORMATION ONLY NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS. Fs tiE:ti:.. Product Evaluation RC611 0317 Engineering Services Program The following product has been evaluated for compliance with the wind loads specified in the International Residential Code(IRC)and the International Building Code(IBC). This product evaluation is not an endorsement of this product or a recommendation that this product be used. The Texas Department of Insurance has not authorized the use of any information contained in the product evaluation for advertising, or other commercial or promotional purpose. This product evaluation is intended for use by those individuals who are following the design wind load criteria in Chapter 3 of the IRC and Section 1609 of the IBC. The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation. This product evaluation does not relieve a Texas licensed engineer of his responsibilities as outlined in the Texas Insurance Code, the Texas Administrative Code, and the Texas Engineering Practice Act. For more information, contact TDI Engineering Services Program at(800)248-6032. Evaluation ID: RC-61 Effective Date: March 1, 2017 Re-evaluation Date: March 2021 Product Name: LokSeam Standing Seam Steel Roof Panels Installed over Plywood Decks Manufacturer: Metal Building Components, Inc. (MBCI), L.P., a division of NCI, L.P. 14031 West Hardy Houston,TX 77060 281-445-8555 General Description: The LokSeam standing seam roof panels are minimum 24-gauge steel panels. The metal panels have a maximum exposure of 18". The metal wall panels have a 1-3/4" rib height. The steel roof panels are Galvalume steel with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. Limitations: Roof Deck:The roof deck is minimum 5/8" plywood. Solidly sheathed. Roof Deck Attachment: A new roof deck must meet or exceed the uplift wind pressure requirements of the IRC or IBC and must be installed as required to resist lateral loads. Roof Framing Spacing:The roof framing must be spaced a maximum of 24" on center. Installation over an Existing Roof Covering: Not permitted. Roof Slope: Do not install panels on roofs with a roof slope less than 3:12. RC61 10317 Design Wind Pressure:The design pressure uplift load resistance is specified in Table 1. Table 1 Attachment of minimum 24-gauge steel LokSeam roof panels to plywood decks System Design Wind Pressure Panel Exposure Clips Clip Fasteners Selected LokSeam Clip; No. 10 x 1" screw; System 1 -52.5 psf 18 48" on center Two per clip 2 101.0 psf 16" LokSeam Clip; No. 10 x 1" screw; 6" on center Two per clip Installation: General: The metal roof panels must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and this evaluation report. Roof Deck:The roof deck is minimum 5/8" plywood. Solidly sheathed. Underlayment:A minimum of one layer of Type I asphalt felt must be used.The underlayment used must comply with one or more of the following:ASTM D 226,ASTM D 4869,or ASTM D 1970. The underlayment must be fastened to the roof deck with corrosion resistant fasteners in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Fasteners must be applied along the overlaps not farther apart than 36" on center. Attachment of Roof Panels to the Deck: System 1:Secure the panels to the decks with 18-gauge galvanized steel LokSeam clips(1-7/8" high x ielected iystem 2"wide x 3-1/2" long).The clips are secured to the male leg of the panels. Adjacent panels are secured together using a snap-lock seam.The clips are spaced a maximum of 6"from each end and a maximum of 48"on center. Each clip is secured to the deck with two No. 10 x 1" long Pancake head screws with a No. 2 Phillips head size. The fasteners must be long enough to completely penetration through the deck. System 2:Secure the panels to the decks with 18-gauge galvanized steel LokSeam clips (1-7/8" high x 2"wide x 3-1/2" long).The clips are secured to the male leg of the panels. Adjacent panels are secured together using a snap-lock seam.The clips are spaced a maximum of 6"from each end and a maximum of 6" on center. Each clip is secured to the deck with two No. 10 x 1" long Pancake head screws with a No. 2 Phillips head size. The fasteners must be long enough to completely penetration through the deck. Panel Ends and End Laps:As required by the manufacturer. Trims,Closures,and Accessories: Components, such as trims, closures, and accessories must be installed as required by the manufacturer. Note: Keep the manufacturer's installation instructions available on the job site during installation. Use corrosion resistant fasteners as specified in the IRC,the IBC, and the Texas Revisions. NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO SECTION 07500 METAL PANELS. TDITexas Department of Insurance PO Box 149104 I Austin, TX 78714 I 1-800-578-4677 I tdi.texas.gov Product Evaluation RC42110220 Engineering Services Program The following product has been evaluated for compliance with the wind loads specified in the International Residential Code(IRC) and the International Building Code (IBC). This product evaluation is not an endorsement of this product or a recommendation that this product be used. The Texas Department of Insurance has not authorized the use of any information contained in the product evaluation for advertising, or other commercial or promotional purpose. This product evaluation is intended for use by those individuals who are following the design wind load criteria in Chapter 3 of the IRC and Section 1609 of the IBC.The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation.This product evaluation does not relieve a Texas licensed engineer of his responsibilities as outlined in the Texas Insurance Code,the Texas Administrative Code,and the Texas Engineering Practice Act. For more information, contact TDI Engineering Services Program at(800) 248-6032. Evaluation ID: RC-421 Effective Date: February 1, 2020 Re-evaluation Date: February 2024 Product Name: Minimum 26-Gauge PBR Steel Roofing Panels Installed over 1 x 4 Wood Purlins Manufacturer: Metal Building Components, Inc. (MBCI), L.P., a division of NCI, L.P. 14031 West Hardy Houston, TX 77060 (281) 445-8555 General Description: The PBR metal roofing panel is minimum 26-gauge galvalume steel with an optional paint finish. The 26-gauge panel has an actual coverage of 36".The metal roof panels have a 1-1/4" rib height. The metal roof panels conform to ASTM A792 with minimum yield strength of 80,000 psi. Limitations: Roof Framing: Install the metal roofing panels over open wood purlins. New Roof Framing Attachment: The roof framing must meet or exceed the uplift requirements of the IRC or IBC. Install as required for resistance to wind loads. Design Wind Pressures: Table 1 specifies the design pressure uplift load resistance. Roof Slope: Do not install the panels on roofs with a roof slope less than 1/2:12. 1/2 RC421 1 0220 Installation Over an Existing Roof Covering:Installation over an existing roof covering is limited to a maximum of one existing layer of composition shingles, wood shingles or shakes, built-up roofing, or roll roofing applied over an existing, solid roof deck. Secure the wood purlins to the wood rafters or trusses using two minimum No. 8 wood screws. Use fasteners long enough to penetrate a minimum of 1-3/4" into the roof framing. The roof framing shall be minimum No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine dimension lumber. Table 1. Attachment of Minimum 26-Gauge PBR Metal Roofing Panels to lx4 Wood Purlins Design Wind Pressure Purlins Attachment of Panels to Wood Purlins -93.5 psf Min. No. 2 Southern Pine Fasteners at 12"-12"-12"; 2'-0" on center 2'-0" on center -183.5 psf Min. No. 2 Southern Pine Fasteners at 7"-5"-7"-5"-7"; 1'-0" on center 1'-0" on center Installation Instructions: General: Install the metal roofing panels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and this evaluation report. Wood Purlins: Minimum nominal 1" x 4" No. 2 Southern Pine wood purlins. Table 1 specifies the maximum spacing of the purlins. Underlayment: Underlayment is not required. Attachment of Metal Roofing Panels to the Wood Purlins: Secure the PBR metal roofing panels to the wood purlins with No. 10-14 x 1-1/2" Ultimate LocFast w/sealing washers by Atlas. Fasteners offset from rib 1/2". Locate a line of fasteners along each purlin. Table 1 specifies the fastener pattern and the spacing of the fasteners. Panel Side Laps: Stitch the panels together with minimum 1/4"-14 x 7/8" Lap Tek screws with a sealing washer. Space the fasteners at 20" on center along the length of the side lap. Trims, Closures,and Accessories:Install components, such as the eave trim, rake trim, ridge trim, hip trim, and valley trim as required by the manufacturer. Note: Keep the manufacturer's installation instructions available on the job site during the installation. Use corrosion resistant fasteners as specified in the IRC and the IBC. 2/2 NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO SECTION 08420 EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES.THE INCLUDED PLANS IDENTIFY NECESSARY INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. l <F � tF Product Evaluation '.... :X AS• DR901 10618 Engineering Services Program The following product has been evaluated for compliance with the wind loads specified in the International Residential Code(IRC)and the International Building Code(IBC). This product evaluation is not an endorsement of this product or a recommendation that this product be used. The Texas Department of Insurance has not authorized the use of any information contained in the product evaluation for advertising, or other commercial or promotional purpose. This product evaluation is intended for use by those individuals who are following the design wind load criteria in Chapter 3 of the IRC and Section 1609 of the IBC. The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation. This product evaluation does not relieve a Texas licensed engineer of his responsibilities as outlined in the Texas Insurance Code, the Texas Administrative Code, and the Texas Engineering Practice Act. For more information,contact TD/Engineering Services Program at(800)248-6032. Evaluation ID: DR-901 Effective Date: June 1, 2018 Re-evaluation Date: May 2022 Product Name: "N" Series Commercial Steel Glazed Outswing Side Hinged Doors, Impact Resistant Manufacturer: Mesker Door, Inc. 3440 Stanwood Blvd. Huntsville, AL 35811 (256)851-6670 General Description: The "N" Series Commercial Steel Glazed Outswing Side Hinged Doors are steel frame and steel panel glazed side hinged outswing doors used for commercial installations. This evaluation report includes the following door assemblies: • Double Door Assembly(XX) • Double Door with Transom Assembly(XX/O) • Single Door Assembly(X) Product Identification: A Mesker Door Inc. label will be affixed to the door assembly. The label includes the manufacturer's name (Mesker Door, Inc.); the product name ("N" Series Commercial Outswing Steel Door); that the design pressure and size are per drawing MDI010; and that the product complies with TAS 201, TAS-202, and TAS-203, Large Missile Impact. DR901 10618 Limitations: Design Drawings: Door assemblies must comply and be installed in accordance with the following design drawing: • Drawing No. MDI010, "'N' Series Commercial Outswing Steel Door," Sheets 1 thru 14 of 14, dated February 6,2017, signed and sealed by Hermes F. Norero, P.E on April 4, 2018. This evaluation report refers to the stated drawings as the approved drawings. Design Pressure (DP): The door assemblies have a maximum design pressure rating of +65 psf / -65 psf. Refer to approved drawing (Sheet 12 of 14)for specific design pressure requirements. Hardware: Hardware requirements are specified on the approved drawings. Impact Resistance: The door assemblies satisfy TDI's criteria for protection from windborne debris in both the Inland I and Seaward zones. These assemblies passed an impact criteria of equivalent to Missile Level D specified in ASTM E 1996. Install these assemblies at any height on the structure that does not exceed the assembly's design pressure rating. These assemblies do not require protection with an impact protective system when installed in areas that require windborne debris protection. Installation Instructions: General: Prepare and install the assembly in accordance with Mesker Door, Inc. installation instructions and the approved drawings specified in this evaluation report. Detailed installation instructions are available from Mesker Door, Inc. Installation: Wall Framing Construction: The door assemblies may be mounted to several types of wall framing construction. The types of wall framing construction allowed include: • concrete (minimum compressive strength: 3,000 psi) • grout filled concrete block • hollow concrete block • steel ((minimum 1/8", Fy=36 ksi) • Aluminum (minimum 1/8"thick, 6063-T6) • Wood (Spruce-Pine-Fir, minimum S.G. =0.42) Fastener Requirements: • Refer to the approved drawings for the anchor layout and notes. • Refer to the approved drawings for the minimum embedment depths for the fasteners and the minimum edge distances (minimum distance fastener must be from the edge of the substrate material)for the fasteners. Note: Keep the manufacturer's installation instructions and the approved drawings available at the job site during installation. Use corrosion resistant fasteners as specified in the IRC, the IBC, and the Texas Revisions. 75 1, 1' "N"SERIES SERIES COMMERCIAL OUTSWING STEEL DOOR(LMI) !-__. __... FRAME WIDTH..... .0 '0 0, ' �,MESKER i D,L,O 1. THE PRODUCT SHOWN HEREIN IS DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED TO COMPLY WITH 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE(IBC)AND INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE(IRC)WITH 2006 TEXAS REVISIONS^a�a ;wn sL XOa�Ma d' 2. DOORS RATED FOR LARGE MISSILE IMPACT AND DO NOT REQUIRE SHUTTERS, """'"�`rrxe"' w t ' 0 ll j Q(� 3, ANCHORS SHALL BE AS LISTED. SPACED AS SHOWN ON ELEVATIONS/DETAILS. 4 . * i Vv© ANCHOR EMBEDMENT TO BASE MATERIAL SHALL BE BEYOND WALL DRESSING 2 _ UU ,� OR STUCCO, 2 2 g 1. t`� J!'f I ` - / \ . 4, ANCHORING OR LOADING CONDITIONS NOT SHOWN IN THESE DETAILS ARE NOT §d di O s �, PART OF THIS APPROVAL, ui so a ,E \ j/ 5, MATERIALS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO STEEL/METAL SCREWS THAT vim+ p Y a al e 0 `, / /, I,. COME INTO CONTACT WITH OTHER DISSIMILAR MATERIALS SHALL MEET '5 3 w 9 2 1 1 1 ,,� THE REQUIREMENTS. W a 2ul a la �, 6, METAL STRUCTURES NOT BY MESKER INC.MUST SUPPORT LOADS IMPOSED i OF' 1 0• • k ,I X X , BY DOOR SYSTEM AND TRANSFER THEM TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE, W A` ash ,'Aa II �i'�i a "�� �, /3 7, SEE SHEET 5 FOR WATER INFILTRATION RATING DETAILS, 0 f SZS2 �7 , WATER TEST PRESSURE=0.15 x POSITIVE DESIGN PRESSURE co An AS ! �i' 8. DOORS THAT DO NOT MEET THE WATER INFILTRATION REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE INSTAI 1 FY)ONLY IN NON-HABITABLE AREAS OR HABITABLE r \ '7 LOCATIONS PROTECTED BY AN OVERHANG OR CANOPY SUCH I HAL THE z '. ; " .\-1' -' ANGLE BETWEEN THE EDGE OF CANOPY OR OVERHANG TO SILL IS LESS THAN 0 z \ 45 DEGREES. r ri O --- , 14 9, OTHER DOOR PANEL CONFIGURATIONS AVAILABLE PER REQUEST TO 5 ti 3. 4-, MANUFACTURE w H s ' b 5_, C' n •,3:e' 3,f4' NOTES: / u i C3 _e / / EGRESS REQUIREMENTS TO BE REVIEWED BY BUILDING OFFICIAL. 1 4' , DOOR n,�C=,,ING TABLE OF CONTENTS DOUBLE DOOR TYP, ELEVATION SHEET REVISION SHEET DESCRIPTION DOOR PANEL:MIN,18 GA.(0.042"THK,)STEEL MIN.Fy-42 KSI MIN• t - TYPICAL ELEVATIONS,DESIGN PRESSURES,&GENERAL NOTES ".•• ~'� DOOR FRAME:MIN,14 GA,(0,067"THK,)STEEL MIN,Fy=42 KSI MIN. 2 TYPICAL ELEVATIONS&DESIGN PRESSURES I ' ,n. b# : 3 - DOOR PANEL DETAILS • - %? Z ai 4 - VERTICAL&HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTIONS it ' ) 5 . VERTICAL CROSS SECTIONS&GLAZING DETAILS KE I N. ,' s' OVERALL FRAME DOOR TRANSOM DESIGN PRESSURE(PSF) 6 - VERTICAL&HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION yNI . x . I--•R :• '? SIZE D,L,O D,L,O 7 - HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTIONS WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT POSITIVE NEGATIVE 8 - HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTIONS 75.75" 111.75" 23,75" 59.75" 70.125" 23.50" +85.0 -85,0 9 ANCHORING DETAILS ti l' m m z m m 10 - ANCHORING DETAILS Q S z 9 Z Z SEE SHEET 12 FOR ADDITIONAL DESIGN PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS DUE TO 11 ANCHORING DETAILS o o a 0 4 HARDWARE COMPONENT SELECTION 12 _ - HARDWARE r LOCK OPTIONS DWG 0: 13 COMPONENTS Dgr,siq,ynE e,I mares F.Harem E. M D I O 1 O 14 BILL OF MATERIALS&COMPONENTS Reason:I am appme1g Urs OocumeT Date:2018_04.04 12:09:27-0400' .*I"-: 1 OF 14 'MAX ALL F OVER f FRAMEVADTH l' �,MESKER 48" 96- ( ,..�.. •.. / DOOR OPENNO 23 3l4" 47 VT 23 3f4" r U PANEL WIDTH D,t•O, MEOW.Voot Ins. I M44 Ahreh od Mr. F+e 126)65,4161A V V 1 • 4 wFoom7 i E 117-e-------- --- : 1/7.• i Aft /. ' F ji . ' g co m �\ I ,// , � fr\ zy 3 o a_Q i w w w •T Ja„d U. u u.. . X \ �vv ' � as /� f \ _ OCao •V W fV J 4�d{.j X ."O W N W _ `2 0 NY f; !=� 3 x �w aJitx ( /� I w 'sw m _vJei x 2 ��_� + WLL � �' �dt� � I /_ ' 3 a c o ` W � : / a yi% 0 ,1 �/ / i/i \ / Z / = -/• - / \ I / o / ACTIVE , INACTIVE \ 1 / ACTIVE 5 s - • • a i V W N a 5 5 VP SINGLE DOOR TYP.ELEVATION DOUBLE DOOR TYP, ELEVATION DOOR PANEL:MIN.18 GA.(0.042"THK.)STEEL MIN.Fy=42 KSI MIN. DOOR PANEL;MIN,18 GA,(0,042"THK,)STEEL MIN,Fy=42 KSI MIN, d DOOR FRAME;MIN,16 GA,(0,053'THK,)STEEL MIN,Fy=42 KSI MIN, DOOR FRAME;MIN.16 GA.(0.053"THK.)STEEL MIN.Fy=42 KSI MIN. OVERALL FRAME DOOR OVERALL FRAME DOOR '�I - .- .' DESIGN PRESSURE(PSF) DESIGN PRESSURE(PSF) :AC= _€i SIZE D.L,O SIZE D,L.O -�l a S WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT POSITIVE NEGATIVE WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT POSITIVE NEGATIVE °a`- 1114' `03i... * `<g3 52,00• 100" 23.75' 59,75" +65,0 -65.0 100' 100" 23,75' 59.75" +65,0 -65.0 1 t+'- SEE SHEET 12 FOR ADDITIONAL DESIGN PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS SEE SHEET 12 FOR ADDITIONAL.DESIGN PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS DUE TO HARDWARE COMPONENT SELECTION DUE TO HARDWARE COMPONENT SELECTION ,,, m > a m to O o Ca U N DWG#: MDI010 SHFF-: 2 OF 14 `v IN-PRIOR �88� t2 II 1 OTIS 1 OMESKER „ -. AI ..--_-.. .r...... _____ _ _ / K1..eR coOK INC. PM* d7,75"MAX, I. i.1 I M.W�,t etl:tress es+ana LI 23.75'MAX. vlr MOTH 2 EXTERIOR G2 ') ( ) La cm s D.LO WIDTH 4� `2J x I ()HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION r � o§ aI�IIII■1 V W W JGtass stop retaining screws DOOR PANE- =_t er of 0 LL 2"from comers and f W m w oC Q x 71 lfy� 7.3/4"max.o.c. a WELOJE I I'_v 86 Iii,- 'IF � y; ce O2A co .. 95.38• 76 a-- W § MAX, 2 11 r o J UNITIL HEIGHT EXTC R:OR 61 INTERIOR r L. to w O i `„ 1 r Of.. C^ d IF SB.TS" i } SEE SHEET 12 FOR ADDITIONAL { W HARDWARE OPTIONS ' F MAX. ' I 0.L.0 72 / 3 PROJECTION HEIGHT I/ ID WELDS I *DOOR HINGE REINFORCEMENT • Z Z to g (\/ "N" STEEL DOOR PANEL N 1 -l;�WE SPOT __rill w/ N `�.. r ����- Et O I I t r - r , \ _•.�2 SPOT -L1l__a - WELDS O n ` I L ' (DVERTICAL CROSS SECTION DOOR PANEL I;, I ;a�,y• 1® C'DOOR TOP & BOTTOM CLOSER C)LOCK BOX REINFORCEMENT 7. C��.;: ;; •_ `I! (� - a: aoaoa°a"o°o 0 0 o a aao"o 0 .3-11° 0 0 0 0 0 0 o°a°o°t Y oaoao*000000e< °a°aa°a 0 o o O°a a s oa ov00000;o Oo-oav°oI 1 I oao ° oo ooOot aoo°a°a oO°a°o°< oDoo ° 000Oa v v o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o v o 0 0 0 o v o e a o 0 0 0 0 0 o a .. ` °°o 0 o a o 0 0 0 o e 0 a o v o 0 o a o < o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o t aao°o°O°O°a°O°O°O°O°O O a°D O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 � 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 � 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o a0°o°o°O°o0o000°a°0°t o°O 000°O°O°a°a°O°Ot 000°a°a°0o0o0o0o0a00at ` }• °a°o°a°oo°°ooOo°°O0001 a°a000a°000g0000a°O°[ °O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O°O°< O_o_O o°o°O°O°o°O°O°s 4..4 aoao,O,oioioio,°,oj P„, O°o°ooao,en.n i F 0 m y m'LL a N Pn n n n n n n j SEAMED TOP VIEW / TOP VIEW rw P VIEW o c g J U I vvi Z 'M SERIES STITCHED AND FULLY SPOT ----+1 DWG#: FILLED"N"SERIES WELDED'NVS"SERIES M DIO 1 O DOOR EDGE SEAM OPTIONS "Er' 3 OF 14 TYPICAL ANCHORS @ HEAD/JAMB:(REFER TO ELEVATION FOR SPACING) TYPE A 318"DIA,DYNABOLT SLEEVE ANCHOR BY'ITW TYPE F 3/8"DIA.HLC SLEEVE ANCHOR BY"H ILTP OMESKER DIRECTLY • INTO fc�3000 PSI CONCRETE, 1.1/2'MIN,EMBED DIRECTLY INTO fc'=3000 PSI CONCRETE O DIRECTLY INTO GROUT FILLED CONCRETE BLOCK,1-112'MIN,EMBED O MIN.EMBED.1-318' .' , MIN.EDGE DIST 2-1/2" MIN,EDGE DIST 3-1/4" 0 V d1 vrc ,.XX.PA. MIN,SPACING 4-1/2" MIN,SPACING 4-1/2` , • • �• wn �.,3 d — TYPE B 3/8"POWER-BOLT BY`POWERS' TYPE F1 3/8"DIA.HLC SLEEVE ANCHOR BY"mar" ,,^�DIRECTLY INTO fe=3000 PSI CONCRETE, 2"MIN,EMBEDiv% DIRECTLY INTO GROUT FILLED/HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK O DIRECTLY INTO GROUT FILLED/HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK 1-1l4'MIN,.EMBED i • a J MIN,EMBED.1.3/8" MIN,EDGE DIST 3-3/4" MIN,EDGE 01ST 3-1/2" C ->T I MIN,SPACING 4-1/2" MIN.SPACING 4.1/2" a w o. 4 d LL y TYPE C 5/18"DIA.SMS OR MACHINE BOLTS(MIN.GRADE 5 CRS)OR ST/ST TYPE G 3/8"DIA.LOK BOLT BY"POWERS" w y b u S 65 ,aeoeoageoa 25 Z OSTEEL:Fy=36 KSI MIN, O DIRECTLY INTO fe=3000 PSI CONCRETE :0000000000 ( '�' b `* m 2 S m - INTO METAL STRUCTURES(STEEL OR ALUMINUM 1/B"MIN.THICK.) MIN.EMBED.1-5/8" ,0000000000 4 01 9 Z 4 ALUMINUM:8063-T8 MIN, MIN.EDGE DIST 3-3/4" 0 oa0000000° 4 3 v < 5 co t (STEEL IN CONTACT WITH ALUMINUM TO BE PLATED OR PAINTED) MIN.SPACING 4-1/2" iaoe000D000e0000 III W w 0 0 ° D o TYPICAL ANCHORS @ THRESHOLD:(REFER TO ELEVATION FOR SPACING) TYPE Cl 3/8"DIA.LOK BOLT BY"POWERS" io0oeo0000°0' ~ _ 0. d © DIRECTLY INTO GROUT FILLED/HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK >000eoc000°o MIN.EMBED.1-1/2" >aoeoeoe000 TYPED 114"TAPCON BY'ITW"DIRECTLY INTO fc 000 PSI CONCRETE ,0-o-°oaoo < O 1-1/4"MIN,EMBED MIN.EDGE DIST 3-3/4" ;o°o°Do°eDo°ao G H MIN,EDGE DIST 2-1/2" MIN,SPACING 4-1/2' EXTERIOR a-O �o INTFRIOR m MIN.SPACING 3" 0 VERTICAL CROSS SECTION U) TYPE E 5/16"DIA.ULTRACONS BY"ELCO"DIRECTLY INTO fc 3000 PSI CONCRETF 4 WI 2"FRAME Z O 1-3/4"MIN.EMBED 0 MIN.EDGE DIST 2 3+18' 1-1/2" MIN — SEALAN MIN.SPACING 3" SQUARED EDGE DAB. (TYP.) f h. ALL FRAME JOINTS AND CORNERS TO BE SEALED WITH SILICONE 3 J -• • _ LLB AT PERIMETER aoaooaoa0000� �o°o°o°o o° O d •• • D a a 6 0a0 �0°0°O°O°O Oa • °0a°°e°e°OO°1 10°0°e°O°O°D oeDQaa000°o� r0°a°0000ao. a°aaaaa0 O( O Oa0 0 * ® 0 0 0 0 O O °OOO Q O n°�anOa_JO^O^On O5/16'TEKS INTO . :4• ST.1/8'THK MIN O FOR SPACING , 410 X 3;4'PH SOS ; 4.• ` w REFER TO 3"FROM END ' r-... ©O O • 4t t ELEVATION 8"O,C,TYP. :'\'7 �� . 3 © INTERIOR i '• ��• L _ BEVELED EDGE i ; `i� 000a000a000'I °a°aa00000; CI ) • /�L4— 0 0 o a oa a0°a oao �� -4' ' . Ifs 1 I • - eooD°Oo°°Oa °°°e°a°oan •o 0 0 0 0 0 o D o 0 0' 1 • X i.. o 000 000 °000 0 0 o eeeeeee000 1 _4 a a o 0 0 o a o 0 o Oe0a0e0e0e0°OODo0o0°° � d• °'C'°'o'o'°'o'°'o'I 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 , E O O O D O D O O O 4io 0 0 0 o D o e oa� :0e0o0e0o4,1400o06 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 � 0 0 0 0 O O 0 0 0 0 Deeeeeeee°D°Dee� eeeeoeaOa 0 O eeaeeeeee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeao°/ • . W OoOaD°Oa0e0°°°O� 00000ao a e0°Oe0° 4 O O a O D O D O O d 'f ao°0e0eoe0e0000000r p0a0e0a0a0°0a0a*o000oa% O 00000eoe*000o00� 0a0 g000gogozogo0aa OQ O°DeaeDe4e0°ae°i O O D 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 o a o 0 o Y Y LJ 4 o_a.o_o o_o_o_a_o_a_o°yb J F m y m z J V' , o2cgea,°oa,ORn,D,oR:2:2: �./N10 X 3/4"PH SOS ' ! •44 r 0 g _ = V 3"FROM END r MTh - 0 p cU 0 O8"O.C.TYP. EXTERIOR d 2 ib V/ • DWG a: I)ANCHOR OPTION HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION ilk HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION 0 M DIO Q -4 4 DOOR EDGE OPTIONS NIL, SHEET 4 OF 14 _-_0.496" GLASS 0,50" GLASS INTERIOR BITE INTERIOR ` BITE • /` 1/4"THICK N. �MESKER va / �� ,` 4 \ 0.58"THICK re• v. r r 'w I ti 1l4'LEXANBYSABIC I 1(4"HS r .• .. ., v .' r �m 13 , J INNOVATIVE PLASTICS I __ D,D75"VAN A a""°b"°°"N`"' ' .. .� 1 + t•._ _ 1 \ "' BY EASTMAN .w,�zaesea*a•ro — \ e / \ e1 / \ CHEM.CO, , . • / • \ OEXTERIOR` 89 EXTERIOR\ i / 1!4'HS i 1�,q' ci yppy 77 L te g g J -.QQ Q G1 GLAZING DETAIL G3 GLAZING DETAIL 2 0000 R cri a m_PPS y DOOR LTTE KIT TRANSOM co U W41 c7 = +` F r m 0.606" GLASS a Z BITE 0,50" GLASS 4 wa o <_ i �pppQE) INTERIOR — f 7/16"THICK INTERIOR — BITE a m 6f 1 1116"THICK w S Fs3, /` \ 1/4`TEMPERED ` \ 114"TEMPERED as IS^' I EXTERIOR INTERIOR / _ 11 MN. \ • _5!g"AIR SPACE / \ 7/1e"AIR SPACE / 114"HS II 3116"HS 0 l'i', 0.090"SENTRYGLAS 1 0,090"PVB SAFLEX 11 VERTICAL CROSS SECTION .iI. ``BY KURARAY \ `` BY EASTMAN )- 5 WI r FRAME \ / \ / CHEM.CO. EXTERIOR �� / EXTERIOR 114"HS N. — '. ` L 3116"HS CO Z O GLAZING DETAIL ®QLAZING DETAIL 2 DOOR LITE KIT TRANSOM CO p > a /!`/ oDaDa CODaD LL O EXTERIOR 000 o-ooa INTERIOR EXTERIOR // INTERIOR EXTERIOR 100o o0oao 00 00 < 000 ° o ° INTERIOR o°o o°o°o°< �ODODOO O O D O O DooDD� � ° ° ° ° °o oDODeDO :8:. 0 'D°o°D°D°D°° e0°Oe0e000� �o°o°O°O°o°o 0 D O D O O ',0°e°O°e°O°a ci 0 0 0 o e c o a o 0 0 0 D D D D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 ODODODeDOD< D00a0°0e0aae oaoaoao°oa< 7oDOO°Oe0°Do • • r'•.. 0 0 6 0 0 1 D O a e a cli, . • 1 0 0 0 0 0 D O O O O O a O D O O C 5 D°O D O D �,,,���1111��� OOOOOOOOOO< 64DOadapopap 7 v. '- �6 L Z a °Op06Dg.go°°Opa` Z^ /}� / °.0.0.gene�e w ," } O°O°O°O°O°� CO . [;y1} �•`+l/' Q� •uoee �'i h. • •i v D000aoaoao� I s Y� I .oDODo°aD°D, Z L m 0000Q00000� \m .. ° a o ° o I_ �' I � o 0 0 0 0 ^' �W ©a W a ; - :4v 4• ! 1. . . i • - 1p D) � 2-1/2" MIN. I I 2-1/2" MIN. + \m 00o p C) EDGE DISTANCE EDGE DISTANCE I I 2-I/2" MIN DWG*: W E)CE C ISTANCE 2 VERTICAL CROSS SECTION ci)VERTICAL CROSS SECTION 4 VERTICAL CROSS SECTION MDIO O WATER RATED THRESHOLD 5 WATER RATED THRESHOLD SHEET: r- OF 14 1-1/2" MIN. I- EMS. (TYP.) •• . •- - .' 63 5il 25 � '" fl . / ' :... •. .. -.. . .•: ... . �. •. _ 0MESKER 15 ( ! .a . .. • • • ...tea • .. -. M.•Wl.urn \ \r \' •1 . • . . .. ., •• . .. .. . . ,. ,1 ' �' Z D g cf" :...„ . . ._ . • • •••. . . . .. . • -� °emu a of=}� R0°ao0°0o00 1� \_� r : • N y = <I ,°aaaOoaoaa 0000o0o0oa'.. . u- m .5 } m U O ° O O O ` j :oo°n000noo QO©o ) •l' ' • °°o°ooa°°°o\. FULLY GROUTED Ik Z d C m 1, z :a°a°O°a°O° °ODDaa°a Z S m .000°Oo0°oo }'SPOT WELD OR .• d, o°o°o°o°o° 7- z�4 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 o WITH MIN.3000 PSI (F ac w o9 z i e o o ° o o I 1+ G o 0 0 0 ° o eoo°o°o°o°0 2 X.PROJECTION WELD W °oo°000°oa° 0 a°o°o°0°0°0 EACH CUP,MAX.18"5PAC WG •'� °°o°o°o°o°o I NON-SHRINK GROUT 8 5 R 7 .< 0 0 ° o°o • °0000a000°o -; O co w O t :000000000o FAILURE STRENGTH 500 LB5 - 000°oa000°o -� o a o ° ° ° ° a ° o I- M f :3°3°3°3°3° _ °3°3°000°3° EXTERIOR +,oa00000000. I\':'Hick a 4 o°O°e°o°°o°°o°°° o a �° ° a l_. °poo°°°°ooQ° (�F-J 4110 °o o°°°°°°° a ° c°e°o eOa 1�.,VERTICAL CROSS SECTION EXTERIOR _ INTERIOR m 6 HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION 6 OPTIONAL GLAZING DETAIL IS ONLY Cr) C)VERTICAL CROSS SECTION QUALIFIED FOR USE Z WI 4"HEAD ON DOORS WITHOUT 0 I-1/2" MIN. EMS- (DP.) I TRANSOMS Q - INTERI° T5 <c -- - �>ll 15 � � 8 • illih . : t • 63 'ili ® � ° 0 0 a0ao o a a o a o 0 000 ° ° t .4 � _tt o3o3e Qo3� Y SPOT WELD OR 9 tia i../!�� 7 S o°ooe°o°°oc �-2 X}"PROJECTION WEB I ' • ,4 W • I Y a O O O ° • °°°O°O°O°O` EACH CLIP.MAX.16'SPACING • , 1 o°o° ° ° o< FAILURE STRENGTH 500 LBS EXTERIOR 4.: o ° o a 0 • o°o°e°e°o°i • W m m Z J(A EXTERIOR ao osoe3o3� INTERIOR • 4 - t • y z= (.2 Z o�o„o o�o2( © - ' O c 0 U -^`� DWG#: CVERTICAL CROSS SECTION CD,HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION M DIO 10 OPTIONAL GLAZING SHEET: 6 OF 14 INTERIOR Q QMESKER ` 2� FULLY GROUTED TYPICAL ANCHORS Ccb JAMB:(REFER TO ELEVATION FOR SPACING) • v WITH MIN,3000 PSI ° i NON-SHRINK GROUT 1,..';.u.....,.., �.. v •a a 4 4 : 40P TYPE I STRAP ANCHOR(PF-2)(Fy�O KSI)MIN, „ ,• "o :n ,• ;' 0 O DIRECTLY INTO(e=3000 PSI GROUT FILLED CONCRETE BLOCK 4 a 4'a 4 C if' 7 a o d INTERIOR 2 g, ' I TYPE j STRAP ANCHOR(PS-241)(Fy=80 KSI)MIN, o d coi d,d° ` I -�zJ `�� i• 31 DIRECTLY INTO fc''i000 PSI GROUT FILLED CONCRETE BLOCK W y * :550..:; U '''''co°000000a000eppopaoaoaa°a° y2 t-, m KA ;4 .� I °o o°O°O°o°'o°'o o°°o°'°°'o°'o a'a°'°°o° /f W Q° 4 a a°a af v 4 Ale j .E�•O°o°o°o°o°o°°°°°°°a°o a:4 w.p • ` . , TYPE K WIRE ANCHOR(PF-2)(Fy"6OKSI)MIN, uj a p 0 t % 0 rl) 0DIRECTLY INTO fc 3000 PSI CONCRETE, 1-1t2`MIN.EMBED I- DIRECTLY INTO GROUT FILLED/HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK, 1-1/4`MN.EMBED r= a C a EXTERIOR 28 21 EXTERIOR Q O 2 , HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION NOTE: HEAD 8 JAMBS TO BE FULLY GOUTED WITH MIN,3000 PSI NON-SHRINK GROUT m T STRAP ANCHOR(PF-2) Z 0 z INTERIOR INTERIOR c O f- a q 3s q > rr 23 FULLY GROUTED 25 v v W iui ° v WITH MIN.3000 PSI a 4 a 4 FULLY GROUTED NON-SHRINK GROUT . a d v ° a o WITH MIN.3000 PSI NONSHRINK GROUT Q) .. • o. a a�_--+' ° v Cj7 v 4 4°tl Q R i'4 s d o '` INTERIOR INTERIOR e 4 a c` �A 4 5•.7} • i . 4? I Ol ; m o e A. o f ' 1 'd1 ; 4 1 •°a000eotyl°o°o°a o 0 o 0 opo) ooaoaaaoamaaaoaoaaao a o o `'.... �l ;is- _ aa°o°aa°a a °e a e o°o° °a°°a°o a°a °°O°O°D `, 'i °e° aaaaovovQeovOepea°e0°� a eaaaa0eeoeppaaoeaeoe a 1: \ 4 ° e °e°°°a°° as"a°°°°a°°a° ° a a d ° 4 0 X) V y V rli �l 1'� •. o o a°a°a.°...°°°�°�°�°�°� a„°„°-°°,°,°,°,°,°.o°,000�°�°�°�a,°,or iv..:Ai m \ �w °n• t .2 �sY o i o (LI) 40) o 0 \_o ii„, . ,.,. . -F., q 28 COXTERIOR EXTERIOR COB EXTERIOR i7 EXTERIOR mfl ). m U , HORIZONTALCROSS SECTION DWG* e_i WIRE ANCHOR STRA* ANCHOR.FS-241 MDIO1O HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION 3 SHEET: 7 OF 14 INTERIOR QMESKER a.1-. -!.::,,I 25 TYPICAL ANCHORS JAMB:(REFER TO ELEVATION FOR SPACING) vr$Nac-vtx Nx:, TUBE ANCHOR PF 10 w rdM• ma• 's+' .; ( 0 TYPEL ( 1 SEEELEVATIONS FOR ANCHOR BRACKET LAYOUT °"`'rar M•a`', 0000 OD t I N tERtOR :::fE M Z ANCHOR(PF-8) ,g'i e . y 2f1 33 SEE ELEVATIONS FOR ANCHOR BRACKET LAYOUT w y-' ^.Ni 47 1- Z . 4: .. iiJ- .••oeeeae9eg.• °a°e°e°e � �.,\ W N H U •a •.!ma - 9e°°gaga°ag Dag4.g.oaoaoa p �IVI 6 pi''1•1 a'• °a^Oagggggd~::$agog°°o°go. C', A } !. '• •1; ,r °°0 9 a: a o 0 0 0 0° TYPE N WOOD STUD ANCHOR(F-24) O�� S • . `"''�"� D°°o°D°a°a° °°a°oOo°e°o°e �� � 34 SEE ELEVATIONS FOR ANCHOR BRACKET LAYOUTA FH 1TEKS X 3/4" r § L ?i Z �.'. o } O gil 8 Ill 2WA EXTERIOR ® EXTERIOR T •iJ 0 0 HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION m TUBE ANCHOR (2)114"-20 X 1 1J2` FM TEKS CO Z INTERIOR ,, Q 6 b. EZZ G 25 SPOT WELDED (2)5/16"ULTRACON LU N £gggg pggg ,r_,, 1 3/4-EMBED, 8 IN'FRICtR. ti#=#9#9 H8H N _ I 5'MIN.EDGE ®®®id r DISTANCE _1 • ® ithik r 2X WOOD I /II BY OTHERS 111 /I MIN.SG=0.420 11) INTERIOR INTERIOR ,III 14-111 �f n i� OD (2)#12 X 1 1/2" �' _ oaoaoaoao•oao•D o•ob•a•o• •a•a•a•a oaeaaaeai;aoao•oaa° - �� HH SDS • ti r / ma`s I °age°eeo°•°°ogag9go°9g °agegogg°e eeo ; °g g ea9°g°g°g e g gogogo o D D le212.O,C. DESIGN HARDWARE SERIES • D O O°O°e O D D 9 9 9 9°O I°O g a g 0 0 e° O•�.'t 1 i IIk ggog9gogggo°oa9aDo g9g9g9g9' p9gggega°g o oa°aoavgoeag 9 {' geaaaoaoaoaogoaoao°° °a a as ° e o o a o a ° ao a I`! PER LOCATION KRMREMOVABLEMULLION 00 L•� I��' .g9�agagDgg agggDgDgugngugggg, O°a°9°a°O°O°e°O°O°O°D°D°9 9 9�••r� I MU •/y'd. (4)p8X1314'SMS OR(4)118 X 1 3/4" EXTERIOR 0 �5/ !�J O g Fy=36 KSI MIN h�'r •• x WOOD SCREWS 1/8"THK.STEEL PER BRACKET 28 CO EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR IJ m m Z J u! ao _U 1 `, HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION0 HORIZONTAL CROSS SECTION DWGlt: 8 WOOD' ST,1J ANCHOR z ANCHOR M D1010 SHEET: p OF 1 4 ®MESKER n�...ndM P..v.� N SEE n SEE q3:'.j t'%.S'�':.• 1."FM'n..WIlo a DETAIL 1 °f DETAIL 1 t-a4 0 ci g: --1 Q 1 Y © �� • amp E I 1.1AS(NVRY a w Q o LL OPrNINGG © W y Z S 6 U N n ` n JAMBS wZ m C7mw Z II O TM) y3 zSm I v- 511 W ,� m ui O .1. /� ' + — N i t-i�^ i ' M „ FRAME ! w ?r--3 sEe , . a i� l ri .. :': SILL 1.1p3 ;° DETAIL 2 °1 I mP,> NQ1 1 I `I _ } 11 1 i• m DETAIL 2 Z 12" MAX O.0 Tw. O DETAIL 1 HINGE JAMB HINGE JAMB FRAME ANCHORING STRIKE JAMB U) 4 HINGE OPTION 3 HINGE OPTION CONCRETE/MASONRY > Fe 100'MAX.FRAME HEIGHT B0'MAX.FRAME HEIGHT LI N —_ L 14 X 1 1/2"FH SOS CD LJLN O 0 81�-O.G JIIIIIIL Q 4A 1 -//11l♦ !iI, y I 1 )rm B NW Oi 1.7S'X FJLL LENGTH �,w �1 _ :OZ t8 0.061^THICK STEEL PLATE. _ __ - y I�1 ` • n ' ',ti �� La --q1 SPOT WELDED r - 'obi ;;�1r z to : FROM TOP A 8'G.C. DETAIL 3 ` /� HINGE OPTION 1 HINGE OPTION 2 BBS BALL BEARING HINGE CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGE s PI :3' `'e. ANCHOR NOTES: ��� 1 1. Substitution of equal concrete screws from a different supplier may have different edge distance and center distance requirements. ..! ,- m m z Li �, Min.edge distances shown in details are for Dynalbolt Sleeve Anchors.Adjust min.clearances for Tapper concrete screws as necessary. Q z _, Y © a p U to2. Concrete screw locations at the centers may be adjusted to maintain the minimum edge distance to mortar joints. If concrete screw locations noted as"MAX.ON CENTER"must be adjusted to maintain minimum edge distance to mortar joints,additional concrete DWG lVl D1010 screws may be required to ensure the maximum on center dimension is not exceeded. SHEET; 9 OF 14 ?, m .6 2 33 ..•• 1 0-< 1.;r:;;•p, 7.4: :,.. t.:,'•.4,, ,,.. ., z., ',-.- ..... . .3... -.).; 00000 a _ . 47. z - .......,,, c el - 1 . . . 6 0 . - ...F- M -..6 Z '7' Z _ CI 0 --i Lp , 7 I rn IP..... ..........m......... ...................... ...........L. __ V, i EI- S 7=-Iot MAX8.. rn 21 1/2 MAX. 0.C. 4.1. r MAX m -1 4'--.- ..- LID -Cr) 32 I z L'). m > z 0 2; K OD 0 m -1 > r= ••••• .:°:".:• u.: - .•....•... ,:,,:-• :••.:..•..!..:!.., v.: ,.. ... • i.. mt,":.;.• -n 4' '-1 1 I I I .t,.. 't. C 000 ',NO 0 .:• .4, e 0 ----- Z - i I GI m> L.• 0. 0 I 11 [I III I ,—. 41 •-•,-, ....... ........... 1 4 _ t °`. r 19' MAX. 0.C. x .*4-.. 16'MAX_ 0.C. ; 02.06.17 Ar .r iea•cl'• - e.. • t REVISIONS TITLE: 'N'SERIES COMMERCIAL 1 1 Alk '6' OtJTSWING STEEL DOOR lin OWN BY: 4,,, .. s,‘ ,„! DESCRIPTION BY DATE ANCHORING DETAILS III! & $ Al I '• 0 CD 1.$ #... P PREPARED BY: 1 m m --1. HFN :: -i - 4it M 74 4 . . .-,,+ te BUILDING DROPS,INC. 4 f a- 396 E.DANIA BEACH BLVD.#338 --,. C) -SCALE: ,:'-'4,'r.4-.4,4 DANIA BEACH.FL 33004 37 NTS HIM. 01h114114,1 3714 Pli• .1.11 9114.441 hA FV. 11:15..1,,,,t1I t I 1 QMESKER .g$ c SEE DETAIL 3, % - ayiroAhrm.teeNw SHEET 9 t .MrAh M.use+. � R/;'2`e1 l3'MIV v O O JAMBS IJ C W JAMBs V E5 SEE ao m 0(rm.) Lg ,(I'M) ^�S DETAIL 3. U '^ "1 a i e Si7 :.O SHEET 9 - cC y `g' 7 eo ® '_ C C E$ o a!o CD JAMBS N • ... = f; 1 W(n'P,) IX > gmU CD2I.m H (n v.) _l_ ._ H SILL a j o i iI uifl o m..1 3 ,`,10 I I I , I I II I I 3 I I I {H) psui.) - a s _� 12' MAX. o.C.—j ---I -I I`S TMp X �k k 8"wUt.�I I� Y r••2" MAX. O.C. I '��`-' W g g ro.. I ( I I 1_ 1 Q VIA FRAME ANCHORING FRAME ANCHORING = �` MAX. o ct e �' 12"MAX, D.C.j..._LI I� TY.' r u,o T STRAP&WIRE ANCHOR urio T STRAP&WIRE ANCHOR ! m 0�� FRAME ANCHORING mei T STRAP&WIRE ANCHOR Z NOTE: 1. SEE SHEET 9 FOR HINGE AND JAMB DETAILS i o i i f 1 > a r— — /— U 1 - I } f. �' SEE DETAIL 3. SHEET 9 SEE - DETAIL 3.JAMBS m JAMBS M JAMBS SHEETS O ® (TVP.) mR.) (ryR.) i SILL j SILL H SILL a • LLLLLL H (TYP,) H frtro,l RvP,) ` I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 I _ I 1 1 r ^- }} 2 L) 12"MAX. Q.[.-l—lMAI.—I I` L I��' MAX- 0 N N = = N Z L`6" MAX. a 2"MAX. Q.C. 12 VAx 0 r TYP o 0 0 DWG#: FRAME ANCHORING FRAME ANCHORING FRAME ANCHORING MDI010 Z ANCHOR&WOOD STUD ANCHOR 7 ANCHOR&WOOD STUD ANCHOR Z ANCHOR&WOOD STUD ANCHOR SHEET:11 OF 14 HARDWARE/LOCK OPTIONS OPTION 3 ACTIVE DOOR HARDWARE CAN APPLY TO SINGLE DOORS CIMESKER (EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS-OUTSWING DOORS) PT DC amm o TT—FRAME*IDTH I ACTIVE TEAR/INACTIVE LEAF: DESIGN HARDWARE 2000 SERIES STANDARD DUTY SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC RIM PANIC M+D a4"nr-"+H..,. T ,amr.dM A:yam,1 PTI DEVICE WITH(6)14%11/2"FH SOS,RIM PANIC LATCH AT LOCKS=S/8"THROW.ROLLER p.:?SW el'AeFD OSTRIKE WITH S/I'PROJECTION d i/8"SHIM. WITH 2"X 3'X 1/8"THICK STEEL VERTICAL TUBE MUl LION,FY=36 KSI MIN. ,a0„ L FRAME NTH ` OPTION LA(+/-65 PEE,100"x ion x 73 1 0 4 OPTION 3 (4-65 PEE,100"X 100"1 12j �j ACTIVE LEAF: —.r ACTIVE LEAF/INACTIVE LEAF: N> 4 DESIGN HARDWARE M SERIES EXTRA HEAVE DUTY(GRADE 1)MORTISE LOCK WITH DESIGN HARDWARE 1000 SERIES HEAVY DUTY SURFACE MOUNI METALLIC PANIC DEVICE WI1H O M E 4. a {2)8-32%1 1/8"FH MS,LATCH=55 3J4'THROW,DEADEOLT=SE I"THROW i 3 [1 (5)14 X 1 In'FH SOS,ROLLER STRIKE WITH 5/8"PROJECTION&1/8"SHIM WI-U LIT w p�p��t. = E - INACTIVE LEAF: ¢ p U 8 g twn:.aF n;F WITH 2"X 3'X 1J8"THICK STEEL VERTICAL TUBE MULLION,FY"36 K51 MIN. IK LQ < } >r • DESIGN HARDWARE UL-MFB-M FLUSH BOLTS WITH{4)8 X 3/4"FN MULTI THREAD .�_ moon Z m Z q m SCREWS,TOP AND BOTTOM,FLUSH MOUNT METALLIC FLUSH BOLT GUIDE WITH(21 P K,e u.r 3•C(+/`SS PST,S2"%36"1 R _ SEE SeEET a Fee ACTIVE LEAF: < W O Q Hsrw,nne nETAL: H 2 Q' J Z 1/4"X 3/4"FH THREAD SCREWS,FLUSH MWNT METALLIC:STRIKE PiATf,WITH(2) VON DUPRIN 99 SERIES STANDARD DUTY SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC RIM PANIC DEVICE WITH W 6 5 p %3/8'FH MS (6)14 K 1 1/2'FH SOS,RIM PANIC LATCH AT LOCKS-Sj8"THROW Ui ),Q 8 e ACTIVETION 1.3(+/-60 PST,40"X III") F' a 0°f I ROLLER STRIKE WITH •5/8"PROJECTION&1/8'SHIM. WA.:!1vE .. , ACTIVE LEAF. WITH 2"X 3'X 1/8"THICK STEEL VERTICAL TUBE MULLION,FY"36 KSI MIN. +_— OMIT 86E SERIES EXTRA HEAVY DUTY(GRADE 1)MORTISE LOCK WITH(2)N12.24 X Q 1'COMBINATION MS.LATCH-SS 3/4"THROW,DEADBOL1 SS 1"THROW O ,� OPTION 4 IFRAME MIDTH m OPTION 2 OPTION� CO ON A./-`S PS`''°°"X I ; rn ACTIVE LEAF/INACTIVE LEAF: Z DESIGN HARDWARE 2000 SERIES STANDARD DUTY SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC PANIC DEVICE OPTION 2.A(.j 65 PSI,100"X 100") , H DESIGN KIL TRIM,WITH(4)14 X 1 1/2"FH SOS,HANDLE WITH(2188-36 X 1 1/2'PH MS. 0 a Z ACTIVE LEAF: S _ E^J.t2"X 3"X 1J8°THICK STEEL VERTICAL TUBE MULLION,FY=36 KSI MIN.DESIGN HARDWAR€X OR Z SERIES(GRADE 2)CYLINDRICAL LOCK,WRN(2)M8X toD OPTION4.3(+/-6SPST100"x10Y) >FRAME WIDTFI 3/4"FHTHREADSCREWSAND(2)810X19/16"FHMS.LATCH"SS1/2'THROWACTIVE U.S(+/.A 5 PSiIVE LEAF:INACTIVE LEAF: WDESIGN HARDWARE 10D0 SERIES HEAVY DUTY SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC PANIC DEVICE Y,'I'HQESIGN HARDWARE UL-MFB-M FLUSH BOLTS,FLUSH MOUNT METAIIit FW5H BOLT GUIDE,SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC STRIKE PLATE,WITH(4)RX 3/4"FHDESIGN KIL TRIM WITH(5)34 X 1 1/2'FH SOS,HANDLE WITH(2)88-36%1 1/2"PH MS. MULTI THREAD SCREWS,TOP ANO BOTTOM �� WITH 2'X 3"X 1/8"THICK STEEL VERTICAL TUBE MULLION,FY=36 KSI MIN lE MEE' ET I Fe. 4.0+- OPTION 2.B(+/-6S PST,S2'x 100") EST IMWI'DETAILS (/ ES PST,5Y x SI') ACTIVE LEAF: ACTIVE LEAF DESIGN HARDWARE X OR 2 SERIES(GRADE 1)CYLINDRICAL LOCK,WITH(2)TM X VON DUPRIN 99 SERIES STANDARD DUTY SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC RIM PANIC DEVICE WITH C) 1 I - DESIGN KIL TRIM,WITH(4)14 X 1 1/2"FH SOS,HANDLE WITH(2)N8-36 X 11/2'PH M S.WITH 3/4"FH THREAD SCREWS AND(2)N10 X 19/16"FH MS.LATCH=SSW'THROW, 1 !�• d ..d*� { WITH DEADBOLT 0-IS OR 02-5. 2"X 3'X 1/8"THICK STEEL VERTICAL TUBE MULLION,FY=36 K51 MIN. �. "rr �01 •. II. e:nvE OPTION LC(+/-SS PSI,40"XIS") ACTIVE LEAF: FRAM' NM ' OPTIONS C•''4i11 ._ . SCHLAGE 161(GRADE 1)CYUNDRICAL LOCK WITH(2)I18 X 3/4"PH THREAD SCREWS AND(2)81OK 19/16"FH MS.LATCH=S5 1/2"THROW 4 � z OPTWNSA(+/-6SPSF,100"X10') ACTIVE LEAF/INACTIVE LEAF: 1Ii i.._, 4 :�y' DESIGN HARDWARE 2000 SERIES STANDARD DUTY(GRADE 1)SVR SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC 2 • 1 4= POINT LOCK SYSTEM WITH PANIC DEVICE AND VERTICAL RODS ON EXTERIOR WITH(6)14"20 X 3/4 PH EMS AND(6)14-20 X 3/4"FH MS.TOP STRIKE WITH(3)1/4'-20P X 3/4'PH MS. Ij`.. m EA ' Z L N NOTE: - OPTION 5.5(+/.6S►SF,100"K 100") C,8{ -I = t 6 Z CONTINUOUS HINGE OR BBS HINGE ACCEPTABLE 1 i ACTIVE LEAF/INACTIVE LI:AE: C]73 p Li N ON ALL COTTONS.FOR PANEL HINGE OPTIONS, vu_-_,,c A.-rl,:e DESIGN HARDWARE 1000 SERIES HEAVY DUTY(GRADE 1)SVR SURFACE MOUNT METALLIC PANIC DWG N.: SEE SHEET 9. "--J DEVICE WITH(2)14-20"PH MS AND(4)14 X 1/4"FH SMS,VERTICAL ROD AT TOP AND BOTTOM M D I010 ;2)14 X 1 1/2'PH SOS TOP STRIKE WI'H(3)1/4"-20P X 3M"FH MS. o/s CT:12OF 14 7.84"_� 63 " 1.25' 0 06p"r-- .n I -I1.19' ,a• 1I,,,.1s• 3.8$` ,MESKER n r- II °� I I ° n n Irc) ',.., rp 0 Q wSx+R at7aw INc. N I I A ANb 11rM°.etl Nw. Y �' ri - ikww,h.K 351111 Iti 1 Q t 91 SURFACE BOLT PLATEt�1+�m iR m 0.075" 'i l U tO - r� I`l;.88• G M n ki I —II�0.075" ^4.68"—.-I re it :Li i191 DEADBOLT STRIKE REINFORCEMENT $ LOCK BOX REINFORCEMENT W§ to �?, IIIIrmWll �J uW ii o5w 1 . i ♦ C Wy441 I- O �WU u W 0.76' a MIIIIMI mr.+@ 1.25" I �� W Z g 2I:,6 U Z ; • E S_1<z 1 5.68- -I -"I '.25" o n 9 f ti)O d u's O _ m n, ter). + a to ag 3 J�s,TUBE ANCHOR 27 LATCH STRIKE REINFORCEMENT _ i o �J _ Q 4s a o o O 12 MULLION Z BRACKET d S?St 3.48' q 1 t >. n - n } tiU f � 1.13` 1-2,Y N rV g V! o �I 0.38 0.62• / I , tr Io I'-� z 47 U J }T —It'1`a` In ry — 17 g U: t I �0.65" 0 ® aO O#� a I: 0 t a0_ e l° a rIl '; ep• I, tl- > U 1.00' 1.19" �. 1.19' ^ .. 0.75' 0.75- t UJ N ' 1.13. o c 53 GLASS STOP Lt 8 L 0.18 I 3 FRAME HINGE *2$)RF M1FOSCFMENT °STANDARD(SHORT)DOOR HINGE 1`2i%STANDARD(LONG)DOOR HINGE •�- i 44 Reinforcement middle and bottom hinge \�RNn<orcement top hinge 1��1 '.A , 1 3.83" - / _7-. , •_. it 1.98' i� r` -_ ,p I 4.56' S.00" �i ` 9 it 1 1 . i 1 ` ¢.t I- 5.00' 1 0,056' T o '. 1111 } 1 Cd,'7 COy LaZ JU/ IL. Q~ OQOSH BY DOOUTSWING THRESHOLD o °THRESHOLD 41 THRESHOLD �5 DOOR SWEEP DWG itNGP 8895V PIMKD 7005_V MULLION MDI010 SHEET: 1 3 OF 14 BILL OF MATERIALS IL"r DESCRIPTION MATERIAL ITEM# DESCRIPTION MATERIAL OMESKER C. 1/4"MAX.SHIM SPACE - 40 THRESHOLD(NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCTS,INC.#896V) ALUMINUM D 1/4"X 2-3/4"ELCO OR ITW CONCRETE SCREWS STEEL 41 THRESHOLD(PEMKO 2005_V) ALUMINUM MASONRY-3000 PSI MIN.CONCRETE CONFORMING TO 42 1"BUMPER THRESHOLD BY DESIGN HARDWARE ALUMINUM w;• i., E ACI 301 OR HOLLOW BLOCK CONFORMING TO ASTM C90 CONCRETE ,-,,,,,,,,,,,,..--,4 45 95WHA DOOR SWEEP NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCTS,INC. ALUMINUM ,is>.+w,��1, H 1/4"X 1-3/4"ITW PFH CONCRETE SCREW STEEL 46 #6 X 3/4"PHILPS HEAD SMS STEEL W1,re P.A, I 5/16"X 1-3/4"ELCO ULTRACON CONCRETE SCREW STEEL 51 L CHANNEL FIXED GLASS STOP STEEL i 3/8"X 5"PFH ITW DYNABOLT SLEEVE ANCHOR STEEL 52 #8 X 0.5"HH SELF DRILLING SCREW STEEL ci"aa 53 U CHANNEL FIXED GLASS STOP STEEL ' K 3/8"X 5"HLC HILTI SLEEVE ANCHOR STEEL x m �o R i a m L 3/8"X 5"SLEEVE ANCHOR BY POWERS FASTENERS STEEL 54 #8 X 0,125"PFH SHEET METAL SCREW STEEL 8 w k+ O LL M 3/8"X 5"TAPPER CONCRETE SCREW BY POWERS FASTENERS STEEL 71 DESIGN HARDWARE D1-S SERIES DEADBOLT STEEL LA * y g I,zi N 5/16"SMS OR MACHINE BOLT(MIN.GRADE 5 CRS) STEEL 72 DESIGN HARDWARE"2"SERIES ENTRY STEEL y' o z a m O 3/8"X 5"WEDGE BOLT CONCRETE SCREW BY POWERS FASTENERS STEEL 76 DESIGN HARDWARE D2-S SERIES DEADBOLT STEEL `f f2 3 ict 94z 1 1 "N"STEEL DOOR PANEL - 77 DESIGN HARDWARE"X"SERIES ENTRY STEEL w 8 a m u1 a 2 DOOR SKIN-BY MESKER STEEL 78 - - E a +] 3 FOAM 1.0 PCF MIN.DENSITY POLYSTYRENE 79 BULB GASKET VINYL I 4 DOOR TOP&BOTTOM CLOSER STEEL 81 DOW 995 STRUCTURAL SILICONE SILICONE 5 LOCK BOX REINFORCEMENT STEEL 83 1/4"X 2-1/2"PPH MS STEEL R #12-24 X 1/2"SELF TAPPER STEEL 86 LITE FRAME BY AIR LOUVERS VLFEZ-HRC STEEL m g TUBE ANCHOR(PF 10) STEEL 86A LITE FRAME BY AIR LOUVERS VLFIG-HRC STEEL 10 #12-24 X 1"COMBINATION MACHINE/WOOD SCREW STEEL 68 #8 X 1-1/2"PPH MS STEEL Z 12 MULLION Z BRACKET STEEL 89 SCREW COVER STEEL 0 ZZ 15 MULLION MIN,(0.056"THK)BY MESKER STEEL 92 #8 X 1-1/4"PPH SELF TAPPER STEEL 7 16 ANSI LATCH STRIKE STEEL 93 KRM REMOVABLE MULLION STEEL -- a 17 DEADBOLT STRIKE STEEL Ll.) N 19 DEADBOLT STRIKE REINFORCEMENT STEEL ct g 20 WEATHERSTRIP(PEMKO S-88) NEOPRENE 21 4-112"X 4-1/2"X 0,125"TEMPLATE HINGE STEEL I--0.50_ 22 STANDARD(LONG)DOOR HINGE TOP HINGE REINFORCEMENT STEEL 23 STANDARD(SHORT)DOOR HINGE MIDDLE BOTTOM HINGE REINF. STEEL O 24 WEATHERSTRIP(THRESHOLD) NEOPRENE i - • . ., 25 HOLLOW METAL FRAME-BY MESKER STEEL m r_ t__1 �._ I '•..aZ S 27 LATCH STRIKE REINFORCEMENT STEEL N o r' 28 FRAME HINGE REINFORCEMENT m II `• ' .A � R .! STEEL t s 1 - �: s 30 MASONRY'TEE'ANCHOR(MESKER PFMTS) STEEL Jj 31 STRAP ANCHOR(PS-241) STEEL I I 111; i F , g. 33 Z ANCHOR(PF 9) STEEL ? 1 34 WOOD STUD ANCHOR(F-24) STEEL 35 WIRE ANCHOR(PF-2) STEEL W.- m 0 w 14.75`MAX. 36 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGE ALUMINUM <g r y =I. Z o U ZS HOLLOW METAL FRAME DWG#: MDI010 SHEET:1 4 OF 14 NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO SECTION 08411 STOREFRONT WINDOWS. it ,• Product Evaluation CWSF32 10918 Engineering Services Program The following product has been evaluated for compliance with the wind loads specified in the International Residential Code(IRC)and the International Building Code(IBC). This product evaluation is not an endorsement of this product or a recommendation that this product be used. The Texas Department of Insurance has not authorized the use of any information contained in the product evaluation for advertising, or other commercial or promotional purpose. This product evaluation is intended for use by those individuals who are following the design wind load criteria in Chapter 3 of the IRC and Section 1609 of the IBC. The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation. This product evaluation does not relieve a Texas licensed engineer of his responsibilities as outlined in the Texas Insurance Code, the Texas Administrative Code, and the Texas Engineering Practice Act. For more information, contact TDI Engineering Services Program at(800)248-6032. Evaluation ID: CWSF-32 Effective Date: September 1, 2018 Re-evaluation Date: September 2022 Product Name: IR501 Aluminum Storefront System, Impact Resistant Manufacturer: Kawneer Company, Inc. 555 Guthridge Court Norcross, Georgia 30092-3503 (770) 840-6426 General Description: This evaluation report is for the IR501 aluminum storefront system. The system is used for commercial installations. This evaluation report includes the following storefront assemblies: • Multiple Fixed Panel Storefront Assembly • Storefront Assembly with Doors and Transom • Storefront Framing with Doors and Rectangular Transom Doors: Doors referenced in this evaluation report are Kawneer 350 IR doors. The 350 IR doors are not part of this product evaluation report. Kawneer 350 IR doors used with these assemblies must be listed in a separate TDI product evaluation report. Product Identification:A Kawneer label will be affixed to the storefront assembly. Products Installed in Accordance with Drawing No. 1461T Rev. B (Large Missile Impact): The label includes the manufacturer's name (Kawneer); the product name (IR501 Framing); that the design pressure and size are per drawings#1461T;and that the product complies with ASTM E 330-14,ASTM E 1886-13a, ASTM E 1996-14a, Large Missile Impact,Zone 4-Level D. Selected NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO SECTION 08411 STOREFRONT WINDOWS. �yaT OF,�, <a Product Evaluation 1p5 CWSF32 1 0918 Engineering Services Program The following product has been evaluated for compliance with the wind loads specified in the International Residential Code(IRC)and the International Building Code(IBC). This product evaluation is not an endorsement of this product or a recommendation that this product be used. The Texas Department of Insurance has not authorized the use of any information contained in the product evaluation for advertising, or other commercial or promotional purpose. This product evaluation is intended for use by those individuals who are following the design wind load criteria in Chapter 3 of the IRC and Section 1609 of the IBC. The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation. This product evaluation does not relieve a Texas licensed engineer of his responsibilities as outlined l in the Texas Insurance Code, the Texas Administrative Code, and the Texas Engineering Practice Act. For more information, contact TDI Engineering Services Program at(800)248-6032. Evaluation ID: CWSF-32 Effective Date: September 1, 2018 Re-evaluation Date: September 2022 Product Name: IR501 Aluminum Storefront System, Impact Resistant Manufacturer: Kawneer Company, Inc. (1111" , 555 Guthridge Court Norcross, Georgia 30092-3503 (770)840-6426 General Description: This evaluation report is for the IR501 aluminum storefront system. The system is used for commercial installations. This evaluation report includes the following storefront assemblies: • Multiple Fixed Panel Storefront Assembly • Storefront Assembly with Doors and Transom • Storefront Framing with Doors and Rectangular Transom Doors: Doors referenced in this evaluation report are Kawneer 350 IR doors. The 350 IR doors are not part of this product evaluation report. Kawneer 350 IR doors used with these assemblies must be listed in a separate TDI product evaluation report. Product Identification:A Kawneer label will be affixed to the storefront assembly. Products Installed in Accordance with Drawing No. 1461T Rev. B (Large Missile Impact): The label includes the manufacturer's name (Kawneer); the product name (IR501 Framing); that the design pressure and size are per drawings#1461T;and that the product complies with ASTM E 330-14,ASTM E 1886-13a,ASTM E 1996-14a, Large Missile Impact,Zone 4-Level D. Selected I Texas Department of Insurance 1333 Guadalupe Street I Austin.Texas 78714 I (800)248-6032 I www.tdi.texas.gov I @TexasTD CWSF32 10918 Acceptance of Other Assemblies: • Limitations on horizontal stacking, overall width, and the number of vertical panels used must be as specified on the approved drawings. • Either single doors or double doors may be used with the assemblies specified on the approved drawingsP' Installation Instructions: General: Prepare and install the assembly in accordance with Kawneer installation instructions and the approved drawings specified in this evaluation report. Wall Framing Construction: The aluminum storefront system may be mounted to several types of wall framing construction. The types of wall framing construction allowed include: • Concrete (minimum compressive strength: 3,000 psi) • Wood dimension lumber(minimum Southern Yellow Pine) • Masonry(ASTM C-90, Grade N,Type 1 or greater) • Steel studs (minimum 18-gauge, 33 ksi) • Steel (1/8"thick,A36 (minimum Fy= 36 ksi)) Fastener Requirements: • Refer to the approved drawings for the anchor layout and notes. • Refer to the approved drawings for the minimum embedment depths for the fasteners and the minimum edge distances (minimum distance fastener must be from the edge of the substrate material)for the fasteners. Note: Keep the manufacturer's installation instructions available on the job site during installation. Use corrosion resistant fasteners as specified in the IRC,the IBC, and the Texas Revisions. BY:GENERAL NOTES' �_W WAN THESE STORE FRONT SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN ILSIED,ANALYZED&APPROVED FOR DESIGN PRESSURES NOT ALLOWABLE GLASS D.L.O. ALLOWABLE GLASS D.L.O. PLOT: DATE TO EXCEED THOSE SHOWN IN THE"ALLOWABLE DESIGN PRESSURE TABLE(S). 1-24r 01/2R/13 2. OPENINGS,BUCKING&BUCKING FASTENERS MUST BE PROPERLY DESIGNED&INSTALLED TO TRANSFER SIZE/PRESSURE TABLE SIZE/PRESSURE TABLE WIND LOADS TO THE STRUCTURE. 3. ALL HARDWARE&FASTENERS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE DRAWINGS&SHALL NOT VARY (GLASS OPTION 1, 3 & 4) (GLASS OPTION 2 & 5) a g UNLESS SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED ON THE DRAWINGS. SPECIFIED ANCHOR EMBED TO BASE MATERIAL SHALL BE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE BEYOND WALL FINISH OR STUCCO. 4. THE DETAILS&SPECIFICATIONS SHOWN HERON REPRESENT THE PRODUCTS TESTED&PROPOSED FOR D.L.O. D.L.O. PRESSURE D.L.O. D.LO. PRESSURE WATER,AIR,IMPACT,CYCUC&UNIFORM STATIC AIR PRESSURE TESTING IN CONFORMANCE WITH ASTM E330, WIDTH HEIGHT (+/- PSF) WIDTH HEIGHT (+/- PSF) E283,E331,E1886&E1996 FOR LARGE MISSILE IMPACT WINDOWS. 5. THESE STORE FRONT SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND MEET THE REQUIREMENTS (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) OF THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE(IBC). 48 92 3/4 65.0 60 103 70.0 6. IMPACT SHUTTERS ARE NOT REQUIRED WITH THIS STORE FRONT SYSTEM. 7. ALL ANCHORS SECURING STORE FRONT FRAME TO PRESSURE TREATED BUCKS OR WOOD FRAMING SHALL o BE CAPABLE OF RESISTING CORROSION CAUSED BY THE PRESSURE TREATING CHEMICALS IN THE WOOD. GLASS D.L.O. SIZE/PRESSURE TABLE NOTES: 8. DETERMINE THE POSITIVE&NEGATIVE DESIGN LOADS TO USE WHEN REFERENCING THESE DOCUMENTS IN D.L.O. SIZESSHOWN ARE MAXIMUM SIZES. SMALLER SIZES SHALL APPLY. ACCORDANCE WITH THE GOVERNING CODE AND GOVERNING WIND VELOCITY. FOR WIND LOAD CALCULATIONS IN 1. ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE,A DIRECTIONALITY FACTOR OF KD=0.85 MAY BE 2. WHEN GLASS IS ABOVE A DOOR, THE D.LO. HEIGHT & WIDTH STATED IN APPLIED PER THE ASCE-7 STANDARD. THESE TABLES MAY BE INTERCHANGED SUCH THAT THE HEIGHT SHALL BE CD- 1 L. NO INCREASE IN ALLOWABLE6 ASS HAS BEEN USED IN THE CERTIFICATION OF THIS PRODUCT. WIND CONSIDERED THE WIDTH AND WIDTH THE HEIGHT. NOTE THAT THE ACTUAL LOAD DURATION FACTORO WAS USED FOR WOOD SCREW ANALYSIS S ONLY. 10.MATERIALS,INCLUDINGGBUT NOT UNITED TO STEEL SCREWS,THAT COME INTO CONTACT WITH OTHER D.L.O. WIDTH ABOVE THE DOOR SHALL NOT EXCEED 96"AS SPECIFIED IN g DISSIMILAR MATERIALS SHALL BE SEPARATED OR COATED AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CORROSION OF EITHER THE DOOR ELEVATIONS REGARDLESS OF WHAT GLASS TYPE IS USED. MATERIAL. C7 11.CONDITIONS OUTSIDE OF THOSE SHOWN IN THIS DRAWING SHALL BE REVIEWED&CERTIFIED BY A FLORIDA 3. SEE GLAZING DETAILS FOR GLASS OPTIONS. Cr o o UCENCED P.E.UNDER A JOB SPECIFIC CERTIFICATION. U N N Q.Ma(2m BIEI ,. ERAME 01 CIZSTRLR:T10Nc NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT al v=vi.t FRAME HEAD CORNER(APPI[CAM F TO IfFM 11A1•HEAD IS SQUARE CUT,BUTTED TO SIDE,FASTENED SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO SECTION 008411 LWD =oo WITH THREE(3) NO. 12 X 1"PHTFS FASTENERS THROUGH THE SIDE MEMBER INTO THE HEAD MEMBER cc W CO U n SCREW SPUNES&SEALED WITH SILICONE STOREFRONT WINDOWS 5 3 U)o FRAME HEAD CORNER IAPPICABLE TO ITEM/1BY HEAD IS MITER CUT,SUITED TO SIDE,FASTENED WITH TWO(2) I 1In Z NO. 12 X 1 1/2"PHTFS FASTENERS THROUGH THE SIDE MEMBER INTO THE HEAD MEMBER SCREW SPUNES& SEALED WITH SILICONE. FASTET I CORNER.SILL IS NERS THROUGH THE SIDE UARE CUT,MEMBERINTO�THED TO SIDE,SILL MEMBER SCREW ED WITH SPUNES&(SEALED)NO.1WITH SILICONE Al 1 TR 'E DOOR I MB rn I CORNER SILL IS SQUARE CUT,BUTTED TO SIDE.FASTENED WITH 1 JAMB PIVOT 172 `e ASSEMBLY.EACH PIVOT ASSEMBLY WAS FASTENED TO TO THE SIDE WITH THREE(3)NO. 12-24 X 5/8"FHIAS. .n THE THRESHOLD IS THEN FASTENED TO PIVOT ASSEMBLY WITH TWO(2)NO. 12-24 X 3/B'FHMS&SEALED FZ o29 WITH SILICONE. a� SIDE,HORIZONTAL FASTENEFRAME DD WITH THREE(3)NO END .12 S II!ESSO PHTFS FASTENERSITHROUGHM E ISAL SQUARE MEEMEBER INTO THE TO `+ to - MUWON MEMBER SCREW SPUNES&SEAL FD WITH SILICONE W 443 HORIZONTAL FRAME MUWON FND(APPLICABLE TO ITEM 66131'HORIZONTAL IS SQUARE CUT,BUTTED TO SIDE. w JOINED VIA A SHEAR BLOCK(PART/21).THE SHEAR BLOCK IS FASTENED TO THE VERTICAL FRAME MEMBER O4 WITH FOUR(4)NO. 12 X 1 7/8'FHIF TYPE B SCREWS.THE HORIZONTAL MEMBER IS FASTENED TO THE SHEAR In m BLOCK WITH THREE(3)NO. 12 X 1'FHTF TYPE AB SCREWS.EACH CORNER IS SEALED WITH DOW 795 SILICONE H- SEALANT. Dt 1?ge71'-a. 6(3' of FRAME ANCHOR REQUIREMENTS TABLE $i ANCHOR OPENING TYPE JAMB TO OPENING MINIMUM MINIMUM y TYPE (SUBSTRATE) FASTENER TYPE EMBED EDGE DIST. N a,m o 2X_WOOD FRAME OR BUCK NO. 12 SMS SCREWS 1 1/4" 3/4" �� 0zAa A (MIN. GR. 3 & G=0.55) • F •3—I B MIN. 1/8" THICK A36 STEEL(2) 1/4-20 SELF FULL 3/4" 3 '30 (MIN. Fy = 36 ksi) DRILLING/TAPPING SCREW C MIN. 3000 P.S.I. CONCRETE co 1/4" CONCRETE SCREW 1 1/2" 2 1/2" ' ," 0 0 T'; Nt,. D MIN. 18 GA. 33 KSI (2) NO. 12 SELF FULL 1/2" _^y°' •'�1 .I METAL STUD DRIWNG/TAPPING SCREW j `� „, m an NOTE: RAMSET RED HEAD TAPCONS Y CV MIN. C90 BLOCK (1) 1/4" CONCRETE SCREW 1 1/4" 2 1/2" MAY NOT BE USED WITH CMU. I (4) F MIN. 3000 P.S.I. CONCRETE (3)3/8" WEDGE/SLEEVE ANCHOR 2 1/2" 3" - :_'e ''"'-.' e`'' (' wS O CONCRETE SCREWS SHALL BE ELCO ULTRACONS, ELCO CRETE-FLEX, ITW RAMSET/RED �, .' j 3W HEAD TAPCONS OR HILTI KWIK-CON II (HARDENED STEEL OR S.S.). NOTE THAT RED EVALUATION OF THIS PRODUCT IS BASED ON APPL CABLE STANDARDS AND/OR I �'' za HEAD TAPCONS MAY NOT BE USED WITH CMU. Ir INFORMATION&RESULTS FROM APPLICABLE TEST REPORTS. THE BUILDING CODE I°,, '^' (2)SELF DRIWNG & SELF TAPPING SCREWS SHALL BE MIN. GRADE 5 CORRISION RESISTANT VERSION CONSIDERED REM THIS EVALUATION WAS THAT IN FORCE AT THE TIME OF ISM STEEL THE EVALUATION. IN THE EVENT OF CODE VERSION CHANGES/UPDATES OR IN THE 3 (J)WEDGE SLEEVE ANCHORS SHALL BE RAMSET/RED HEAD DYNABOLT, HILTI KWIK-BOLT 3, OR EVENT THAT NEW OR ADDITIONAL TESTING IS COMPLETED ON THIS PRODUCT,PRIOR TO THESE DRAWINGS ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO THE PRODUCT DRAWING NO. REV. / STATING CODE COMPLIANCE.THE MANUFACTURER SHALL CONFIRM WITH THE SPECIFIED.THEY MAY NOT BE USED FUR THE ASSEMBLY 1461 T B POWERS RAWL POWER BOLT (STEEL OR S.S. EVALUATION ENGINEER OF RECORD THAT EVERYTHING SPECIFIED HERE-IN IS CURRENT AND/oR INSTALUTX)N OF ANY TITHER PRODUCT NOR MAY (4)ANCHOR TYPE "F" IS ONLY APPLICABLE FOR USE WITH THE SILL ANCHOR BLOCK AT THE WITH ALL CURRENT Its]LNG,CODES AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS. THEY BE USED FOR RATIONAL AND/OR LOCAL APPROVAL SHEET NO. VERTICAL DOOR MULLION BOTTOM END. OF ANY PRODUCT NOT PRODUCED BY THE MANUFACTURER 1 OF 10 STATED ON THESE DRAWINGS. Plf SIDE JAMB MULLION INTERMEDIATE MULLION DRAWN.w.S `"`EO FOR MAX. D.LO. WIDTH, FOR MAX. D.LO. WIDTH, FOR MAX. D.L.O. WIDTH, vioe w�. / SEE GLASS D.L.O. SEE GLASS D.L.O. SEE GLASS D.LO. ALLOWABLE PRESSURE ALLOWABLE PRESSURE ,-. o,a9n, 2 1/2" SIZE/PRESSURE TABLE SIZE/PRESSURE TABLE SIZE/PRESSURE TABLE 2 1/2" TABLE TABLE ON SHEET 1. ON SHEET 1. ON SHEET 1. MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE 6" ® 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 6" FRAME LOAD PRESSURE FRAME LOAD PRESSURE HEIGHT WIDTH (+/- PSF) HEIGHT WIDTH (+/- PSF) MAX 3 ® 3" 3" 3" MAX. (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) z 32.5 52.5 62.5 29.5 r 2 1/2' 29.5 57.8 56.5 32.7 t III 1 _ I'1 1 I III /l I III 144 26.59 64.4 50.5 36.5 t l J 23.5 70.0 144 44.5 41.5 } / /� / 32.5 57.3 38.5 47.9 TYP. FRAME ANCHOR z B WHERE SHOWN. SEE MIDDLE ANCHOR IS NOT 132 29.5 63.1 32.5 56.8 o �O / "FRAME ANCHOR REQUIRED AT ANY BAY 26.5 70.0 26.5 69.6 5 • z o REQUIREMENTS TABLE" WHEN D.L.O. WIDTH IS 32.5 63.0 62.5 38.3 0 a z Fr; # 2 1/2"] ON SHEET 1 FOR 36" OR LESS. 120 29.5 69.4 56.5 42.4 z m z O_ Q REQUIREMENTS. 28.5 70.0 50.5 47.4 -1 -o o n w Iw- A Lu-- - H H �� 114 32.5 66.3 132 44.5 53.8 < a a, ▪ En m uo w e d GLASS O Co GLASS O co GLASS v 30.5 70.0 38.5 62.2 o D ~ CENTERLINE CENTERLINE CENTERLINE _ cc N a-N 108 32.5 70.0 33.5 70.0 00 0'vi a "'-� 3 " 62.5 51.0 w.00 Z▪ ZZc� g= 2 1 2" L 120 56.5 56.4 "C�n w r / /4_ N o 3 VI Oz w z 1 -2" TO 3" 50.5 63.2 z m-x z vow 4" _ i�I I z' I I _t " 44.5 70.0 I 'g o�- '¢ rm ` 62.5 59.5 w _ B w a c�r- JAMB MID-SPAN ANCHOR CLUSTER" FOR MAX. LOAD WIDTH, FOR MAX. LOAD WIDTH, ---- JAMB MID-SPAN ANCHOR CLUSTER. 114 56.5 65.8 0 o w CO.„0 j' _IELJ SEE "JAMB MID-SPAN ANCHOR SEE INTERMEDIATE SEE INTERMEDIATE SEE "JAMB MID-SPAN ANCHOR 52.5 70.0 cow - d o d CLUSTER REQUIREMENTS NOTE ON MULLION & ANCHOR MULLION & ANCHOR CLUSTER REQUIREMENTS NOTE ON 108 62.5 70.0 F N PRESSURE TABLES PRESSURE TABLES THIS SHEET FOR REQUIREMENTS. z w Sc.o o m Jo LI THIS SHEET FOR REQUIREMENTS. 0 o I I I MULLION PRESSURE TABLE NOTES: w a o z a X FOR MAX. LOAD FOR MAX. LOAD 1. THE LESSER OF THE PRESSURES SHOWN IN w dSa a N WIDTH, SEE SIDE WIDTH, SEE SIDE THESE TABLES AND THOSE IN THE D.L.O. AND re 2 cc`^ JAMB MUWON & - / - JAMB MULLION & ANCHOR TABLES SHALL CONTROL AS THE OVERALL ?LL 2 ANCHOR PRESSURE 2 1 2' ANCHOR PRESSURE UNIT ALLOWABLE PRESSURE. rn w •1 TABLES TABLES 2. EACH MULLION SHALL BE EVALUATED OF zz Irk. e i� . I L I SEPARATELY WHEN C0N017I0NS VARY FROM z0 5 2d III I I I 1111 H I III - I \ MULLION TO MULLION OR WORSE CASE MULLION f d w w 83.Y 1 CONDMON MAY BE USED FOR EVALUATION OF ALL -J- I - 2 1/2", I Q 1 \ MULLIONS. a J w�N � MID-SPAN ANCHOR CLUSTER REQUIREMENTS; o - as-;€ SEE "INTERMEDIATE MUWON END ANCHOR SEE "JAMB MUWON END ANCHOR QUANTITY/PRESSURE TABLE" ON JAMB A CLUSTER OF 4 ANCHORS ARE REQUIRED AT x� Nz y a QUANTITY/PRESSURE TABLE" ON SHEET 3 SHEET 3 FOR QUANTITY OF ANCHORS REQUIRED AT THE MID-SPAN OF ANY JAMB WHEN THE z ' FOR QUANTITY OF ANCHORS REQUIRED AT CORRESPONDING JOB REQUIRED PRESSURES (3 ANCHORS SHOWN; <3 ED CORRESPONDING JOB REQUIRED PRESSURES 2, 3 OR 4 REQUIRED). NOTE THAT WHEN A MID-SPAN ANCHOR FRAME HEIGHT EXCEEDS 108" (NOT REQUIRED I =3z (6 ANCHORS SHOWN; 4, 6 OR 8 REQUIRED) CLUSTER EXISTS, THE QUANTITY OF ANCHORS AT THE JAMB END WHEN FRAME HEIGHT IS 108" OR LESS). Q 6 o SHALL ONLY BE 2, REGARDLESS OF UNIT SIZE OR REQUIRED 2. WHEN A HORIZONTAL MEMBER INTERSECTS THE w''"">‘,, o JAMB AT OR VERY NEAR ITS MID-SPAN, THE C'ej L' ?ry;;*, PRESSURE. ANCHORS SHALL BE SPREAD AS REQUIRED TO ` . ,•""" Li. w EXTERIOR ELEVATION; AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE HORIZONTAL `+ MEMBER (SEE RIGHT SIDE OF ELEVATION FOR i o ' MULTIPLE FIXED PANEL STORE FRONT ASSEMBLY EXAMPLE). c 1.)--' en _ SCALE: 1/2"=1'-O" -,.L•"<`Y,C. ? w Mg ELEVATION NOTES: ' w = ;w 1. HORIZONTAL STACKING & OVERALL UNIT WIDTH IS UNLIMITED PROVIDING D.L.O. DOES NOT a EXCEED 60" WIDE AT EACH PANEL c 2. NUMBER OF GLASS PANEL SECTIONS VERTICALLY IS UNLIMITED BUT MUST FIT INSIDE MAXIMUM FRAME HEIGHT SPECIFIED. 3. EACH HORIZONTALLY STACKED PANEL SECTION MAY CONSIST OF ONE INDIVIDUAL GLASS PANEL DRAWING NO. Rev. OR BE BROKEN UP WITH HORIZONTAL FRAME MEMBERS PROVIDING THE CONDITIONS STATED 1461 T B HERE-IN ARE NOT EXCEEDED. SHEET NO. 2 OF 10 = 0 m N LA ? v Z 0 CO A 0 N _ I�*3Am0w zNfz -ImK Z cF OC20N o=m= C-0- o M m m 0 c 71 Z 2 m m C 'X/ W A LH Ut 0 W W A C. N 01 W W A N UI Cr, N W W A U: U1 01 N W W A U1 VI 01 .-.g,r 77 O 0 0 L F Tr*i Z CO A O 01 N W CO A O CO N N CO A O 01 N CO N 03 A o 01 N 01 N CO A O 01 N Z=0 C r*1 Z O C a••k O N=C U it UI (n N in VI in Ls, it U1 U1 in In 'en in U1 N!n U1 U1 U1 In in in it in(P in U1 U1 .� m C F'a m Z m 0 T1 0 O y c Z j LA- r p x 0 W O m c0O1 cn c00 A 0 0 0 W .AI N 00 [00 COC O A O 0011 O c0.1 LA 00) O 0W1 W O coh 10 N J cCA 0 LD m rrl Z=m 0 Z N=Q�1 A 0 o on W O i0 a1 N N N J CO c0 c0 .+ N O A U W CO in O O O A A A N IA ?C rp C r O r O Z 2=m m N O m y r 0FC Z.17 PArr11,Cj W (Zn A m N°-r N 0 0 0 001 O O O O O c0.+ .N1 0 0 0 0) ? 0 0 0 c0 -- A t0 O O O W m O N O+ r 0 I'x1 (VVn11 m Z N x_pa 00Z c -4 0 0 o CO A 0 0 0 O W N o 0 O W V O O o A N Ks A 0 0 0 Cr, .+ W II n 0E -N--I mDr 0 n�C 0Z >a 0cmcnmm o =cnr SD ~p r A U1 m Z .I.I V V V .I.1 V V .I 0 .I .I V .I m m V V V V V m 0 V V V V 0 UI UI . pv O O o r"c r 2 0 O o 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 o c0 W 0 0 0 0 0 W V 0 0 0 0 cn CO n1 A Z n C�Nm m=O'CZ� obobbobobocwo000J000000 (.+ i.+ 00000� iP II NN AZ co (n C7 r Zcn.. y= __ 0 m m O - rn � m o m � — m o to A o cn en N 11 xm ,0 N mR o2z-i"l oZ Z z=z m z m o ((nn (,ny 0= OO m,m0 N W N LA 01 N 1 O 01 coN tn O T N N A O .00i N O A Co0 .0�I N .WI W $ O O NJ O Z ODX O A S x N f7 V cn c.11 (n (n(n (n U(n N U in(n in cn cn cn U1 in in [n (n U1 U U in Cn U1(n in cn 1 3 =O <Zp-o 0 OZv m 2 m a x f o-1 O A r 1 0 z i> o C Z Ul=O mr Z V V 01 V 01 01 V 01 01 U1 V 01 N U1 V 0t LA N A 01 01 Ul cn A V 0 LP U1 A A V O zi (n 71 N N x0 0 O O 0 o cn o a/O O c0 c11 o A V O V<0 W CO c0 W 01 O U1 O IO c0 N V N O Cl) mO D!Cn 70-. TNr1 m o b i0 0 OO A o O J co b (.+Co b i0 O Ut (., i0 it _. - (.,b N CO Co f.1 01 0 II ZI cn C r C Xl 0 • cCOFil A-D O cmD m Z a 0 Z 0 CO V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V a1 V V 4 V V a1 V O.-.r 0 0`<C=O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 o A o m+ m D c m m m cn03 o b b b o b o b o b b o b b o o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o o o 11 Co o'hP rn z I E r- c z rT V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V -c O�0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .Z1 z o b b b b b o b o o b b b o o b b 0 b 0 0 0 b o b 0 b b b o b II cn N co coo A O N A Z 0�3; 0 0 ON 2 Z 0-, .. mC O O `�-Imc ),71 _ a1 al a1 U1 V1 01 Ut 0 01 A Ut 0 01 .-.*I- Z- N W - N N N N W N N N N W-' N N N N W `c r C- E N CO N U1 01 N 0 01 N 01 O Co N Z p{O- --1 n CO N ca O W 0 0 N OO O W 0 co N�1 O W 01 OD N Z p 0- n IN is, in in in in in in U1 in 01U1 in v=O C �--�_4--i (n cn In in N (n in in U1 U1 in cm N (n inCn N Cn In in v 28 C W Z 1,1 -0 K O-11 M CD 71 C j A V 01 w cn A A V 01 U1 LN A V 01 Ut A A W K 0 r', C OM Smr- OOpoo W co W Ocnrn ON O W VNOO a i F. O W 0 N in O -i..1 A b Cr, b b J W N O b A(n in J V II >U)a I_ N Z 141 r 0 0 WIZ O-I -mj Z V V 0 V 0 01 a, 0 Ut V Of 0,Ut W �/r>1 ITI V 01 V V V V V 0 V V V V 01 01 V V V V 01 LB < O{• m Z O O 01 O CO W 10 W V O Ut 00 N O ' r Z O 0 0 0 O O O U1 0 0 0 O V O O o 0 A 0O �\ b 0 (.., o J b J 1,,(... o o •U1 II ''\m -1 p o J o 0 0 o b A b o 0 o bo U1 0 0 0 o b - II \ p a I s D A caz7-0c �n o =-0r- 0> Z Nr =Z =m o rTI= V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V Ov Z O(•) O"Z = O O O o O O O o O O O O O O O O O O O O N� 0 b b b b b o b b b b b b b b b b b o b o ll in N� A • D 0 x m 01 01 .1 V au 0 0. C m W Z0>s O 01 IV CO A 0 M Sy,4 xm� .� me O> v\ c >co j W N N W N N W N N N W N N N N W N N ..-.F r _ Z N a, no N 01 co N A of c0 N N W 01 co N W 01 Z p O X N Z 5 O- --I M in U1 in (P 0 In U U1 in in N (n cm Cn c.n Cn UI 0, U1 v 2 ap M 70 (n ....=OC ��C Cn D� c0 C V 0, V 01 01 V a1 (n V 01 LI1 U1 V 01 01 U1 A V 0 cn -c 0 X) n m Z0 o co o CO W o A CO o c.11 co W O CO -. A 0 0 A V CM =ONZ .JbCo > bb -. 000 � bbio� icoobwb ll ZN> r'� >EnZ 01F X/C)rTl N MA 0 O C O ma CO O m� W I C .1 V V V .1 .1 V V .1 V .1 .1 V .1.1 .1 V V .I V -C O^CO r- .1 -< m `'r''1 0000000000000000000o m+ m rTl 'bo 11 om\m -IZ bobbbb0bbb00000bb000 II \ = E N Z 0 C wF N 0 x N x Crr C V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V - pT Z =m O Z1 OoOOOOOOOOOOOOoOOoOO Ai A" bobo000bb000bb000bOol1 1nw< U1 A ▪ .4, -:'' . • .................` .•• ''mac. CERTif'ICwt.1 'DRAWING TITLE IR501 ALUMINUM STORE FRONT SYSTEM - LARGE & SMALL NO. REVISION DESCRIPTION BY DATE W=jg au 4a MISSILE IMPACT 18 : of CONSULTANTS JOB INFORMATION: o 1) W. W. SCHAEFER ENGINEERING & KAWNEER COMPANY, INC. _5• 'i 5 CONSULTING, P.A. (REG. NO. F-14980) 555 GUTHRIDGE COURT g.2 7480 150TH COURT NORTH NORCROSS, GA 30092 a r,2 O COi 'N W.SCHAEFER, P.E. PALM BEACH GARDENS,FL 33418 770-449-5555 ,. g .E. N0. 113497 PHONE:GARDENS, ED BY: INTERMEDIATE DOOR JAMB DRAWN L ws. INTERMEDIATE DOOR JAMB MULLION END DRA,; are s 6' MAX. 17" MAX. O.C. 3• ANCHORS CLUSTERED AS SHOWN. QUANTITY MULLION ALLOWABLE ;-, °+nsi+s nn inn = 8 TOTAL WITH ANCHORS TYPE A, C OR D; PRESSURE TABLE 6' MAX. mm r 2 1/2" In ��` QUANTITY = 6 TOTAL WITH ANCHOR TYPE B. I I I I +} I t I I I III ) I III MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE FRAME LOAD PRESSURE HEIGHT WIDTH (+/- PSF) 44- jv a j� (IN.) (IN.) 96" MAX. OPENING 2 1/2" 81.75 34.9 J F THIS ANCHOR IS _ ®� 7O v z 75.75 37.6 - ONLY REQUIRED o 69.75 40.9 WHEN THE ^ i = 63.75 44.7 SUBSTRATE IS CMU �r /i ,� j 144 57.75 49.3 & THE DOOR 1-OPENING WIDTH o F II 4 / O a 1-. 51.75 55.1 D_ IIO / \ 7 p -,x 45.75 62.3 EXCEEDS 72" M 7 II / \ in; 9 / \ FOR ALL STOREFRONT o Ena 43.75 65.0 - -5" II / \ REQUIREMENTS OTHER THAN o rz-a 81.75 45.3 z m J II / \ THOSE SPECIFIC TO THE z w z w 75.75 48.8 o- o \ -jr // I \\ DOOR & TRANSOM, SEE w ' o 69.75 53.0 • <w ELEVATION ON SHEET 2. a w x 132 to n a / \ �mw 63.75 58.0 moc�m 0 5"� I�/ \ \ oa0 57.75 64.1 "13 0E2v.: II / 0 iw� 56.75 65.0 moo -5 IIII s0? 120 81.75 60.2 g Z"cceN \ II TYP. FRAME I L w 75.75 65.0 n o -\---,,, -1 II ANCHORS WHERE // ``d 81.75 63.4 I O N z SHOWN. SEE / 11 xa 114 78.75 65.0 w }_ II "FRAME ANCHOR II II / SILL 111 75.75 65.0 r o 1- REQUIREMENTS II II / o >2 - z -5" TABLE" ON SHEET 1 / ANCHOR w 1. THE LESSER OF THEco o I 4 II / BLOCK I PRESSURES SHOWN IN THIS z a el II •FOR REQUIREMENTS. II II / / TABLE AND THOSE IN THE 0 LL \J Lam/ D.L.O. AND STORE FRONT {i / MULLION & END ANCHOR w 3!a 1 I , TABLES SHALL CONTROL AS o 0'- } I I I 1 1 4 III THE OVERALL UNIT ALLOWABLE H- 21 6" MAX J 1 PRESSURE. La• wo G. 350 IR LARGE MISSILE IMPACT FOR MAX. LOAD WIDTH, SEE I SEE MUWON SILL END a zc OUT-SWING DOORS & SILL ANCHORS INTERMEDIATE DOOR JAMB CONNECTION DETAILS ON Da ww 3 `7 UNDER SEPERATE APPROVAL DOOR MULLION PRESSURE TABLE GLASS SHEET 8. aW ��83N CENTERLINE CENTERLINE = Lea.R.w N O la fgo EXTERIOR ELEVATION oc6 T°a STORE FRONT ASSEMBLY WITH DOORS & TRANSOM , 35 o. z „ SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" 5' SINGLE SIDELIGHT SHOWN, MULTIPLE SIDELIGHT CONDITION ALSO APPLIES WITH 3 z SIDELIGHT AT ONE OR BOTH SIDES. `N `^a DOUBLE DOOR CONDITION SHOWN, SINGLE DOOR CONDITION ALSO APPLIES. _ is- •.;'., HORIZONTAL STACKING & OVERALL UNIT WIDTH IS UNLIMITED. NUMBER OF VERTICAL • = w PANELS IS UNLIMITED BUT MUST FIT INSIDE MAXIMUM FRAME HEIGHT SPECIFIED. _ a:x S. o zY ,- 1; i:; E..., 'n �fyi C.. DRAWING N0. REV_ 1461T B SHEET NO. 4 GE 10 tee, CKCICED Eft CALL VMS 17 1/2" MAX. O.C. PLOT: DATE M/u 16 1/4" MAX. O.C. (AT HEAD) se (AT HEAD) 6" MAX.—I I- e0 - -6" MAX. a + I 6" MAX. I I I I I I ° T-0 4 _ I 3 < o et 13 _ I r —11 — ,. I 3- - j -— /i( r -i — 1 N� 3}_ ,//, 4 // \ II W` z 3—s 4 II a w z / \ 0F II a a F THIS ANCHOR IS \ ME II a w a O THIS ANCHOR IS \ r. 1 II v w n O 1 v ONLY REQUIRED \\ II v Z cc a, 7 ONLY REQUIRED \ 2 1/2" w 2 1/2" w naaN N z - _5" I WHEN THE \ II - -5" I WHEN THE \ II w o _ I SUBSTRATE IS CMU \ II — I — I SUBSTRATE IS CMU \\ II — w n,'r) _ z < & THE DOOR \ w ? $ _ 1 & THE DOOR \ II o o w= z < — 1 OPENING WIDTH \\ II w N w < /OPENING WIDTH \ II ,y c0i a = ao < — I //EXCEEDS 72" \ I — w u> 0 \ I / EXCEEDS 72" \yl r; 0 p~ ce 0 a -5" I II\ �z o a -5" CI II\ g ��� 0 o n III} n ,, `r)i z Z o -5" \ II I /II " ' -5— I TYP. FRAME III — I c a_, x — TYP. FRAME / -- m < / 8 a m < _ I ANCHORS WHERE IL, d / II a m _ I ANCHORS WHERE IL, 4 / II i < SHOWN. SEE / II o t- < SHOWN. SEE / II _ jj fI "FRAME ANCHOR II II // II 350 IR LARGE w rn �'�I FRAME ANCHOR II II // II 350 IR LARGE m 1- -5" REQUIREMENTS II II / MISSILE IMPACT -5" REQUIREMENTS II II / MISSILE IMPACT o TABLE" ON SHEET 1 II II / II OUT-SWING DOORS b TABLE" ON SHEET 1 II II / II OUT-SWING DOORS 0 a FOR REQUIREMENTS. / & SILL ANCHORS a FOR REQUIREMENTS. II II / II & SILL ANCHORS (i - , I- \ .4 Ico LT ---_J — APPROVALUNDER �_ I J L ^!� L / --_I — APPROVALUNDER 4I� 1 5�/\ / j 6"JI—.. \ /T Zw 1 6" MAX. I I I ly I - — - i - 1 f 1 I I II 1 T _ 1 �� '. zz 96" MAX. D.L.O./DOOR OPENING I 96" MAX. D.L.O./DOOR OPENING zw 6.Sw&eY fix_ re§b i FOR MAX. FRAME WIDTH, SEE PRESSURE FOR MAX. FRAME WIDTH, SEE PRESSURE TABLES ON THIS SHEET (N.T.E. 101" FOR DOUBLE TABLES ON THIS SHEET (N.T.E. 101" FOR DOUBLE 1'dr- DOOR AND 53" FOR SINGLE DOOR) DOOR AND 53" FOR SINGLE DOOR) Sill a- m6 EXTERIOR ELEVATION EXTERIOR ELEVATION �� Enz STORE FRONT FRAMING WITH DOORS & EYEBROW TRANSOM STORE FRONT FRAMING WITH DOORS & RECTANGULAR TRANSOM '' W;5 (DOUBLE DOOR CONDITION SHOWN, SINGLE DOOR CONDITION ALSO APPLIES) (DOUBLE DOOR CONDITION SHOWN, SINGLE DOOR CONDIION A'.SO APPLIES) I; i30 SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" SCALE: 1/2"=1'-0" o S 8 L. ALLOWABLE PRESSURE ALLOWABLE PRESSURE • • u• ••.•b; m •L;: (DOUBLE DOOR WITH TRANSOM) (SINGLE DOOR WITH TRANSOM) -' ••'•y^ N zm v.'s 1, i•y ' MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE •!„y ;.`.7+ ••, (. ,. Es, FRAME FRAME PRESSURE FRAME FRAME PRESSURE = } WIDTH HEIGHT (+/- PSF) WIDTH HEIGHT (+/- PSF) _,_.`.,./)-, "% '.'" '{r (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) c`,•• s- '. _, , .;. ,W 101 123 1/4 65.0 53 144 65.0 c: " 3 95 131 65.0 NOTE THE LESSER OF THE ALLOWABLE PRESSURE 89 139 3/4 65.0 SHOWN IN THESE TABLES AND THAT IN THE DOOR _ DRAWING NO. REV. 86 144 65.0 APPROVAL SHALL CONTROL. 1461 T B SHEET NO. 5 OE 10 DRAWN El, ANY: FRAME ANCHOR FRAME ANCHOR NAIL r..s PER ELEVATIONS SUBSTRATE BY PER ELEVATIONS SUBSTRATE BY 3/8" MAX. SHIM AT- I FRAME WIDTH (F.W.) P A1I., ao/m/+s OTHERS PER OTHERS PER EACH ANCHOR s FRAME ANCHOR 3 8" MAX ► FRAME ANCHOR © 3 3/8" MAX. s / • REQUIREMENTS SUBSTRATE BY • REQUIREMENTS • r SHIM AT EACH • SHIM •AT EACH + TABLE" ON OTHERS PER l • TABLE" ON SHEET 1 • ANCHOR ANCHOR : SHEET 1 "FRAME ANCHOR SEE GLAZING 1 ___ I]�_ ��� REQUIREMENTS �/ DETALS ON , ,,,,,,..,. �•� •• TABLE" ON SHEET 8 SEALANTS t� SEALANTSglirffill SHEET 1BY OTHERS �"��7 t�� BY OTHERS i , ,f-I p1\\\\\�mEE r; 1 EMM IN M%i ._. I o w Ot pl FRAME I el x ANCHOR "' PER I EXTERIOR I EXTERIOR I L I EXTERIOR I ELEVATIONS r-� o c N EE GLAZING SEE GLAZING DETAILS ON DETAILS ON i SECTION 8 , SECTION A2 SHEET 8SEALANTS a o SCALE: 1/2 FULL a SCALE: 1/2 FULL O BY OTHERS 07 a.o a j' 43 rn SEE GLAZING SECTION e $=vi a SCALE: 1/2 FULL 0 0 0 EXTERIOR I/ DETAILS ON 1 \ EE GLAZING g Z cD cwi n SHEET 8 = EXTERIOR / v I DETAILS ON 3/8" MAX. SHIM Al FRAME WIDTH (F.W.) I n z EACH ANCHOR w lifilillni I ■ ■ ■0;" = Lig-) SSUBSTRATE BYWI © v}ix �� w © OTHERSPER SEE GLAZING r mw 0 ��� 0 "FRAMEANCHOR -1 ��DETAILS ON Z u. 11 s 1 ll REQUIREMENTSSEALANTSr'—‘11411E1 SHEET 8 cew ' BY OTHERS _Ira����JI TABLE"10N \\\\\\ _ ___ \ w �� I EXTERIOR I I r 7 ;� y_1 or z . �i�� 4miuNF INNNU I ' = U7 w m 1p SECTION eL I411 -7/ m Ho z� �Z .3/8" MAX.SCALE: 1/2 FULL O SHIM AT EACH 2� Mw 6 D'BE, r SEE GLAZING ANCHOR I EXTERIOR I Q— �" n [EXTERIORI/ SUBSTRATE BY OTHERS FRAME d DETAILS ON FRAME ANCHOR PER "FRAME ANCHOR ANCHOR 0 N d' o SHEET 8 SECTION ® ® �,v� Q PER ELEVATIONS REQUIREMENTS TABLE" PER g 5 0,0E 0 SCALE: 1/2 FULL ON SHEET 1 ELEVATIONS SEALANTS NF R . : • ,,,. BY OTHERS R 3y 0 © SECTION 0 1 U3Z _��i _0 ® SCALE: 1/2 FULL SEALANTS -'% :t�`�, 03 aBY OTHERS I 'ii: e ; o • 1 c.. c, �Qi f U1: L 3/8" + ,i,_• ,_`'µ;Y ',2 .`:SHIM AT EACH • ;'--•"\ =a• •• " ¢ 3�SUBSTRATE BY OTHERS a ANCHOR PER "FRAME ANCHOR r 3 �1 REQUIREMENTS TABLE" FRAME ANCHOR ON SHEET 1 DRAWING NO. REV. PER ELEVATIONS SECTION 1461T B SHEET No. SCALE: 1/2 FULL e 6 OF 10 DRAM er: cxam m: N EE GLAZING / N GLAZING 3/8" MAX. SHIM AT r , o+/a/o / / FRAME WIDTH (F.W.) �� IM DETAILS ON DETAILS ON EACH ANCHOR 1„,..„ SHEET 8 [...... SHEET 8 SEALANTS BY OTHERS 3 SUBSTRATE BY Olt tilil ` _.■Fino_.�i. OTHERS PER 1 "FRAME REQUIREMENTSR © /i01:0,0ARcisTRURGWINGILE i TABLE" ONUNDERn I, SHEET 1RATE APPROVAL r L r I I L---J I1_ '� ' ti iwu Z.-o I I 350 IR LARGE MISSILE r~rL 0 0 V) IMPACT OUT-SWINGI I , 11 1 — I U a EXTERIOR 1 1 DOORS UNDER I w vN fl SEPERATE APPROVAL I II ® ® SEALANTS 3 00 c'a_ III 1 I FRAME ANCHOR / EXTERIOR ' 0 I BY OTHERS 0 vi< 350 IR LARGE MISSILE PER ELEVATIONS w N I I I IMPACT OUT-SWING D o Imp I EXTERIOR I I I DOORS UNDER SECTION F fx D o o �I SEPERATE APPROVAL O l S o SCALE: 1/2 FULL 7 1 1 e)z ® © g SECTION ® I m SCALE: 1/2 FULL 13 o SECTION E2 i \ �I -�.,\,. o SCALE: 1/2 FULL O7 1 Q j p` \ w� iSco ittfs it f 1 6 z� 4 iq'A •�—FRAME WIDTH (F.W.) I EXTERIOR I cSEECLNG I M fe 5�s DETAILS ON ��ug� / SHEET 8 i € .SEE GLAZING ISEE GLAZING SECTION O ® '•��1 DETAILS ON voiN Fi!:.. o © 4*3;) I DETAILS ON SCALE: 1/2 FULL 7 SHEET B �5 SiZ g a 350 IR LARGE MISSILE ' p�1 SHEET B (EXTERIOR) SECTION ; IMPACT OUT-SWING () SCALE: 1/2 FULL O7 g N;Z DOORS UNDER ® j L sy o 8 SEPERATE APPROVAL '�/ i cf: ?';/ nn11111 II'Rum �n nowtmur c9 ,..1 Ih / ',0;�.'-;,'+ira :'. 'Xz / I EXTERIOR I :,,..' c; ., '0 SECTION ,0 "` E SCALE: 1/2 FULL DRAWING NO. R . 1461T B SHEET NO. 7 of 10 DRAWN FM CHECKED BY: SEE GLASS SEE GLASS W.P.M. WWS DOOR JAMB MULLION END CONNECTION OPTIONS BELOW I DOW 995 OR OPTIONS BELOW 1 I DOW PLO, �-_ DIOE1 DETAILS AT SILL [EXTERIOR TREMCO IEXTERIOR� TREMCO OR PROGLAZE SSG PROGLAZE SSG o 5" 3" 3" SILL ANCHOR 5/8" MIN BITE 5/8" MIN. BITE — a , MAX. BLOCK '!J!;AI 71 44IDIli- .�®� tv IL (LMI WET GLAZED: SINGLE GLAZING BEAD CONDITION)_ TYP. GLAZING DETAIL_ GLASS OPTIONS (LMI WET GLAZED): (LMI WET GLAZED: DOUBLE GLAZING BEAD CONDITION). _ �� OPTION 1: 1 5/16" THICK LAMINATED GLASS (1/4" HT. ST./1/2" AIR SPACER/1/4" HT. ST./0.09 EASTMAN CHEM. CO. SAFLEX/1/4" HT. ST.) SILL ANCHOR ANCHOR TYPE "F" OPTION 2: 1 5/16" THICK LAMINATED GLASS (1/4"TEMPERED/1/2" AIR SPACER/1/4" FIT. ST./0.09 KURARAY BUTICITE PVB/1/4" HT. ST.) ANCHOR TYPE F Zno SEE GLASS Q UN)N (3 ANCHORS PER SILL ANCHOR BLOCK) SEE GLASS I I OPTIONS BELOW I 1 ® N o_id a OPTION BELOW m o a, EXITERIOR �It EXTERIOR+ I � ' `'1 ce=N 0 1 � I woo 5 8" MIN. BITE M�� 5/8" MIN. BITE ICI �'it-a . 3 c.o ca. n 5' 2" 2" SILL ANCHOR / I�1 i I (MO • I i 3 S)z MAX Li 1 DOOR SILL v ,, ®® 0,a, IPA, • . . +41)® z — TfP. GLAZIN DETAIL Z o 011ai* I (LMI DRY GLAZED; SINGLE GLAZING BEAD CONDITION) TYP. GLAZING DETAIL o cuss OPTION (LMI DRY GuMINA (SMI DRY GLAZED CONDITION) W �a OPTION 3: 1 5/16" THICK LAMINATED GLASS (1/4" HT. ST./1/2" MR cc 4. SPACER/1/4" FIT. ST./0.09 KURARAY SG/1/4" FIT. ST.) GLASS OPTIONS (SMI DRY GLAZED): or z- ANCHOR TYPE "B" T OPTION 4: 1 5/16"THICK LAMINATED GLASS (1/4" TEMPERED/1/2" AIR n SILL AN HOR SPACER/1/4" HT. ST./0.06 EASTMAN CHEM. CO. SAFLEX/1/4" HT. m w0 el„ ANCHOR TYPE B sr.) C. Z" "Z geC. (3 ANCHORS PER SILL ANCHOR BLOCK) OPTION 5: 1 5/16" THICK LAMINATED GLASS BY (1/4"TEMPERED/1/2" AIR is ESE .g SPACER/1/4" HT. ST./0.06 KURARAY BUTICITE PVB/1/4" HT. ST.) 2 �ce EE4 oI 1aw �� UEj 5" II�III 1" 3� MAX. j111. i z v> DOOR SILLri.,,,,,„„ ;'~[C , s 8 3 0 ti . „,., ,,, _ aI,�-,-- _ , 0 .,. .:„ .„.:•,,.... „._ :_ :,: :c¢i tip Nz �� ANCHOR TYPE "A" id SILL ANCHOR & D SILL ANCHOR ANCHOR TYPES A & D BLOCK % \ (6 ANCHORS PER SILL ANCHOR BLOCK) \ DRAWING NO. REV. �' 1461T B SHEET NO. 8 or 10 PRAM BY: 00000m BY: x. 2.500 3.000 4.952 ROT OM Ms 4.952 I I--3.174---I I- -"� I`- : 01/22/13 1 -.] 0.100 0.090 3 0.090 2.500 2.500 2.500 1AHEAD FRAME 0.090 I i ORECTANGULAR1 IE- UNITS) s.000 o.oso-- s.000 ()HEAD HEAD FRAME (RADIUS & g 5.188 I RECTANGULAR UNITS) I-1.528-I I I 0.844 _1.588-I I-1 492 O iI 0.099 0.100 1.500 ef -- L594 1.651 1.650 0.063 4- )� I�'J C 0.075 II I 1.573 O5 HP SILL FLASHING ()JAMB ®DOOR JAMB i + iCCCD --II 0.070 O 1 Q 0°In 4.952 I I 4.764 I _ 4.952 I 8A GLASS @GLASS 80 STOPS O9 HP COVER 13-o z-r---� STOP STOP m _� G_ Wc�teo 0.125 2.500 0.125 1.000 g 3S0 3.000 2.500 00.265 111 1 z 0.125 7 P265 1.000 � I 0.090 - N OHORIZONTAL 4.sss 1.000 @TRANSOM BAR WITH FIN 6B C.O.C. TRANSOM BAR s 0 f m 1.000 w `'1 a f---2.500--I 4.500 Cr 0 -1I- 0.040 -1.748-I 0.855 I- 0.., 8.000 • z 4 m t - 1.096 0.1 S' 1.000 wok. s i� �z9 L . � I'--1.575- �Qa W W = 2.999 n 16 STEEL REINF. 1.000 3- w0 ^ 0.080 3.320 10 DEEP s a J � 3e s.000 o.oso POCKET _ 4.656 I 4.656 IT`o.o8o FILLER 1.000 � �; g 1 1.000 6 WATER 13 POCKET I 0.800 JJ �_ 3 t.3Z 12ODEFLECTOR OINSERT 0.090 )L 17 POCKET INSERT �- 1.646-I o s 8 [0.357 + -'4\-<.. lyrk w 814 POCKET 4J d FILLER 15 HW T- -1 MULLION ,, .' L: 11 SILL ANCHOR BLOC!<, '.:-3 W "_ (AT DOOR JAMB) ^c'' ;5.1. uJ y 3 -0RA1ANG-'10.'.REV. --,,..1.461-T B SHEET NO. 9 OF 10 ...CM w.ws ITEM oawN we [NECKED PART # ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER/NOTES E PARTS 0.531 --I 1.282 I- I---2.000---I j I� ROT: w 1.825--i ire IE: o 1A 575-103 HEAD FRAME (RECTANGULAR UNITS) 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.742 1B 575-163 HEAD FRAME 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.100 0.070 1.062 0.062---- 0.047 3 (RADIUS & RECTANGULAR UNITS) J-- 21 SHEAR BLOCK 2 575-101 JAMB 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 2.500 2.500 20 DOOR STOP 8 3 575-051 DOOR JAMB 6063-T6 ALUMINUM I.__ 0.591 4 575-158 HP SILL 6063-T6 ALUMINUM ---1 0.492�- 5 575-157 HP SILL FLASHING 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.248 ÷0.011 0.493 0.305 0 6A 575-122 TRANSOM BAR WITH FIN 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 1g 19 PRESSURE PRESSURE —� 68 575-162 C.O.C. TRANSOM BAR _6063-T6 ALUMINUM PLATE COVER PLATE COVER 22 1)2" I.G. GLASS 28 STANDARD 9. 7 575-115 HORIZONTAL 6063-T6 ALUMINUM SPACER 8A 575-104 GLASS STOP 6063-T6 ALUMINUM PUSH-IN 88 575-160 GLASS STOP 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.409 GASKET g BC 575-161 GLASS STOP 6063-T6 ALUMINUM T 0.505 9 575-159 HP COVER 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 1 —T di__,i z.., 10 575-135 DEEP POCKET FILLER 6063-T6 ALUMINUM "'°' 11 575-297 SILL ANCHOR BLOCK (AT DOOR JAMB) 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.914 0.621 'n I N i' 12 451-105 WATER DEFLECTOR 6063-T6 ALUMINUM Al v < 13 575-133 POCKET INSERT 6063-T6 ALUMINUM I 0.090 14 575-102 POCKET FILLER 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.180L La 0 o 0 15 575-116 HW MUWON 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0.250 34 EXTERIOR PUSH i FD(2 r 16 575-310 STEEL REINF. A36 STEEL 30 INTERIOR FIXED IN GASKET (LMI & I �Z 17 575-052 POCKET INSERT 6063-T6 ALUMINUM GASKET SMI) 18 575-065 PRESSURE PLATE 6063-T6 ALUMINUM m o 19 575-164 PRESSURE PLATE COVER 6063-T6 ALUMINUM W 20 041-045 DOOR STOP 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 21 450-140 SHEAR BLOCK 6063-T6 ALUMINUM 0 22 - 1/2" I.G. GLASS SPACER 3005 OR 3105 ALUMINUM 0 coo SEALS AND SEALANTS La c 8 T. 25 027-078 DOOR BULB WEATHERING ALCRYN La ¢4 26 127-120 SILL TO FLASHING GASKET CCN SPONGE 27 127-191 SLIDE IN SPACER SANTOPRENE z 3z 9e' 28 027-074 STANDARD PUSH IN GASKET EPDM (DUROMETER = 70 +/-5) 29 127-070 SETTING BLOCK EPDM (DUROMETER = 85 +/-5) z< 0. 7 30 127-121 INTERIOR FIXED GASKET EPDM (DUROMETER = SPONGE) BY TREMCO -'— 87, 31 127-138 SETTING BLOCK EPDM (DUROMETER = 85 +/-5) a la: y d 81, 32 027-916 GASKET EPDM (DUROMETER = 70) �N a-gz 33 163-303 THERMAL SEPARATOR EPDM (DUROMETER = 70) Ea V .-ma vlz�3 34 127-127 EXTERIOR PUSH IN GASKET EPDM (DUROMETER = 70) BY TREMCO ;5 FASTENERS 38 128-396 NO. 12 X 7/16" S.S. PHTF SCREW 2" FROM ENDS & MAX. 18" O.C. „ •a 39 128-271 NO. 12 X 5/8" S.S. PHTF SCRERW 4" FROM ENDS (2 ROWS) -.�t, " U 40 128-406 1/4" X 1" S.S. HWHTF SCREW 3" FROM ENDS & MAX. 9" O.C. 7a:k��p w 41 128-910 NO. 10 X 1/2" S.S. FHTF SCREW 3" FROM ENDS & MAX. 18" 0.C. ''•• I! • .'Z,. CO 42 028-336 NO. 10 X 1 5/8" S.S. FHTF SCREW 1" FROM ENDS; 4 GROUPED 1! ••.'' c '' N Ian AT MID-SPAN; 16" MAX. BETWEEN %• Q to i` v \ �, .y:ti ', •:.)C o Q Z. DRAWING NO. REV 1461T I B SHEET NO. 10 or 10 (This page is intentionally left blank) If NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND INSTALLATION INFORMATION 0 ROLL UP DOORS NOTED IN PLANS. <,* Product Evaluation GDR122 I 0218 Engineering Services Program The following product has been evaluated for compliance with the wind loads specified in the International Residential Code(IRC)and the International Building Code(IBC). This product evaluation is not an endorsement of this product or a recommendation that this product be used. The Texas Department of Insurance has not authorized the use of any information contained in the product evaluation for advertising, or other commercial or promotional purpose. This product evaluation is intended for use by those individuals who are following the design wind load criteria in Chapter 3 of the IRC and Section 1609 of the IBC. The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation. This product evaluation does not relieve a Texas licensed engineer of his responsibilities as outlined in the Texas Insurance Code, the Texas Administrative Code, and the Texas Engineering Practice Act. For more information, contact TDI Engineering Services Program at(800)248-6032. Evaluation ID: GDR-122 Effective Date: February 1, 2018 Re-evaluation Date: February 2022 Product Name: CP0005 Steel Roll-up Counter Doors, Impact Resistant Manufacturer: Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Crestwood Industrial Park Mountain Top, PA 18707 (800) 233-8366 General Description: Curtain: The curtain is constructed of interlocking steel slats. Slats are 1/2" deep and 1-1/2" high and fabricated from steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A 653 HSLAS Type A Grade 40 G40, HSLAS Type B Grade 40 G40,or ASTM A653 Structural Steel Grade 40 G40 or Type 201,304, 316,or 430 stainless steel with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi. Steel doors are provided with baked on enamel or powder coat finish while stainless steel doors are provided with a #4 finish. Bent steel windlocks are attached to the ends of the slats with 1/8" rivets. Refer to the design drawings for more details. Bottom Bar:The bottom bar is constructed of one 1-3/4" x 1-3/4"full width steel or stainless steel angles or an extruded aluminum profile. Refer to the design drawings for details. Guides:The guides are constructed of two bent steel pieces bolted together. Refer to the design drawings for details. Limitations: Maximum Opening Width: 14'-5" (distance between guides). Maximum Opening Height: 10'-0". Glazing: Not permitted. GDR122 10218 Allowable Design Pressure Rating:±40 psf. Product Identification: The rolling door assemblies have a label that identifies the manufacturer, the model number, the design pressure rating, the test standards, the Cornell Counter Door Installation Instructions document, ES 10-345, and the drawing number. Impact Resistance: • The rolling steel doors installed in accordance with drawing ES-16-76-CIW have been tested for windborne debris resistance. These doors satisfy the Texas Department of Insurance's criteria for protection from windborne debris resistance in the Inland I and Seaward zones. The door assemblies passed the equivalent of Missile Level D as specified in ASTM E 1996-04. Acceptance of Smaller Assemblies: Door assemblies with dimensions equal to or smaller than those specified above are acceptable within the limitations specified in this report. Installation: General: Install these doors in accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions, ES 10-345,the approved drawings,and this product evaluation report. A copy of the approved drawings and the manufacturer's installation instructions, ES 10-345, must be available at all times at the job site during installation. The information within this evaluation report governs if there are any conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and this evaluation report. Design Drawings: The rolling doors must be installed in accordance with one of the following: • "Wind Load Configuration Rolling Steel Counter Door CP0005 Slat Impact Rated," Drawing ES-16-76 (411111 - CIW,Sheets 1 through 5,issued September 02,2015,signed and sealed December 12,2017,by Shawn Patrick Kelley, PE. The stated drawings will be referred to as approved drawings in this report.A copy of the approved drawings must be available at the job site. Anchorage: The rolling doors must be anchored to the structure in accordance with the approved drawings. Anchorage of the rolling doors to concrete, steel, and grout-filled CMU must follow the mounting details on the approved drawings and the fasteners specified in the mounting details. Minimum edge distances and minimum embedment depths for all fasteners that penetrate into the structure must be as specified on the design drawings and the manufacture's installation instructions. Note: Keep the manufacturer's installation instructions, ES 10-345, and the approved design drawings available on the job site during installation. Use corrosion resistant fasteners as specified in the IRC,the IBC, and the Texas Revisions. Texas Department of Insurance I www.tdi.texas.gov Page 2 of 2 L'TR REVISION DATE BY E.C.O. HOOD * ORIGINAL ISSUE 09/02/15 TJE 1677 #24 GA.(0.0219 MIN.) GALVANIZED OR HOOD SUPPORT,WHEN REQUIRED STAINLESS STEEL ROLL-UP MECHANISM NOT INCLUDED IN THIS APPROVAL,MUST BE CERTIFIED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY IF REQUIRED. " SPRING OPERATION: ADJUSTOR PUSH-UP ow !'►� I I� (SHOWN) � EXISTING STRUCTURE CHAIN •A NOTE:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFING AND CRANK • INSTALLATION INFORMATION TO ROLL UP DOORS NOTED IN PLANS MOTOR STOPPERS miiwwwwwilim BRACKET wwwwwimmmmimmimmimmi 0 SLAT I- mimiiinimmommomilmminmeimmni x W — -1/2 x O z GUIDE ASSEMBL © w a 0 wwwwiimmommimimimmimmimmiwiw rr wwwimimmiimemrimmimmmwwwwwiiimmimmmw © UIDE ASSEMBLY 0 MIN.0.0236 -1 1/2 •wiwiww nimminnimmENN nmnmwnnnenwmnmmmmm ©BOTTOM BAR wiimmilmmmmimmwimm i • e ' 1 O 2 SLAT DETAIL TYPICAL SECTION EXISTING STRUCTURE ASTM A653 HSLAS TYPE B GRADE 40 G40 OR ASTM A653 HSLAS TYPE A GRADE 40 G40 OR ASTM A653 STRUCTURAL STEEL GRADE 40 G40 A V�/� OR TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL(MIN.YIELD 40,000 psi) OR TYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL(MIN.YIELD 40,000 psi) GUIDE SETBACK VARIES HI GUIDE SETBACK VARIES OR TYPE 430 STAINLESS STEEL(MIN.YIELD 40,000 psi) /z"STANDARD OPENING WIDTH Y2^STANDARD OR TYPE 201 STAINLESS STEEL(MIN.YIELD 40,000 psi) 14'-5"MAX.DISTANCE BETWEEN GUIDES(D.B.G.) FULL SCALE O OVERALL DOOR ASSEMBLY 1:16 SCALE 24 ELMWOOD AVE 1901 S.LITCHFIELD RD Unless otherwise specified, MOUNTAINTOP,PA GOODYEAR,AZ dimensions are in inches& _ ��i\\\ COFV E L L tolerances are: t ac 0r r f t, 800 TULIP DRIVE '- `'••"••�•...'.+yl GASTONIA,NC •: .•�1� innovative door aolutbna P:800.233.8366 0.000=+/-0.031 • 11I F:800.526.0841 FRACTIONAL=+/-1/32 / $� ' NPA IC ••••'•"1 E:ADSQCORNELLIRON.COM ANGLES=+/-1/2 DEG b. TITLE. DRAWN BY: SIZE: SCALE: SHEET: ��,r WIND LOAD CONFIGURATION TJE B AS NOTED 1/5 r 11es ..sF1as • At417 ROLLING STEEL COUNTER DOOR DWG NO: %. ES-16-76-CIW CP0005 SLAT IMPACT RATED MINIMUM 0.1046 THICK L'TR REVISION DATE BY E.C.O. STEEL OR STAINLESS STEEL * ORIGINAL ISSUE 09/02/15 TJE 1677 TRIM GENERAL NOTES: BOT1OM BAR 1.THESE PRODUCT EVALUATION DOCUMENTS REPRESENT A ROLL-UP DOOR ASSEMBLY DESIGNED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARD BUILDING CODE,THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE,AND THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. 1 3/4 X 1 3/4 2.THIS ROLL-UP DOOR HAS BEEN TESTED FOR UNIFORM STATIC PRESSURE, BENT ANGLE IMPACT AND FATIGUE RESISTANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FBC TEST 1/4.20 X 1l2 MIN. MIN.0.1046 THICK PROTOCOLS FOR HIGH VELOCITY HURRICANE ZONES TAS 201,TAS 202,AND SAE GR.5 SCREW TAS 203. &LOCK WASHER 3.ANALYSIS OF FASTENERS AND COMPONENTS IS BASED ON A MAXIMUM 40 PSF DESIGN WIND PRESSURE AND APPLICABLE TESTED LOADING OR EQUIAVLENT CONDITIONS,AS NOTED. 4.A 33%INCREASE IN ALLOWABLE STRESS HAS NOT BEEN USED IN THE DESIGN OF THIS PRODUCT. 5.DETERMINE THE POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE DESIGN LOADS TO USE WHEN REFERENCING THESE DOCUMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GOVERNING MIN.0.1793 THICK CODE AND GOVERNING WIND VELOCITY. Q GUIDE DETAIL STEEL OR STAINLESS STEEL OPTIONAL: 8.THESE PRODUCT EVALUATION DOCUMENTS ARE PREPARED BY THE ASTM A1011 CS TYPE B STEEL OR WEATHERING PRODUCT ENGINEER AND ARE GENERIC.THEY DO NOT INCLUDE TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL OR OR SENSING EDGE 7IN.FT HESEORMA Tip RODUCTONPREP EVA AREpi) L D U FATIONO RA SP DOCUMENTS EC IFIC:SI IE.ARE NOT VALID FOR PERMIT TYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL in 5 O BENT ANGULAR BOTTOM BAR DETAIL WITHOUT ORIGINAL SIGNATURE,DATE AND EMBOSSED SEAL ON EACH PERMIT WHETHER OR NOT A MASTER APPROVAL ASTM A1011 CS TYPE B STEEL OR FILE WITH A MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNING AGENCOY. CUMENT IS ON ®EXTRUDED BOTTOM BAR DETAIL TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL OR 8.THESE PRODUCT EVALUATION DOCUMENTS ARE SUITABLE TO BE 6063-T6 APPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR PROVIDED THE CONTRACTOR DOES NOT 4ALUMINUMTYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL DEVIATE FROM THE CONDITIONS DETAILED HEREIN AND THE CONTRACTOR VERIFIES THE EXISTING STRUCTURE IS CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING THE 0.500±0.005 0.396SUPERIMPOSED LOADS Vx&Vy ON THE JAMBS OF THE DOOR. 9.ALTERATIONS OR ADDITIONS TO THIS DOCUMENT ARE NOT PERMITTED. 10.WHEN THE SITE CONDITIONS DEVIATE FROM THESE PRODUCT 1 EVALUATION DOCUMENTS,SITE SPECIFIC DOCUMENTS SHALL BE PREPARED BY A DULY LICENSED AND REGISTERED ENGINEER OR 0.105 2 O ARCHITECT. 3 ' 11.IF THE DEVIATING SITE SPECIFIC DOCUMENTS ARE PREPARED BY A 90° 4 \••, DELEGATED REGISTERED ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT,SAID DOCUMENTS 1 SHALL BEAR THE DATE,SIGNATURE.AND EMBOSSED SEAL OF THE DELEGATED ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT AND SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE 2X 00.129+0 004 + PROJECT ENGINEER FOR REVIEW. 0 6 I 0 229°��� -0.000 12.ALL BOLTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL OR STAINLESS TYP. o.boo STEEL WITH A MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH OF 60 K.S.I. 90, 13.ALL WINDLOCK RIVETS SHALL BE 1/8' RIVETS IFI GRADE 30,50,or 51 WITH A MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH OF 425 Lbs.,AND SHEAR STRENGTH OF 295 Lbs.,U.O.N..RIVETS TO BE INSTALLED IN ALL WINDLOCK HOLES. 14.ALL WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED WELDERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.W.S.SPECIFICATIONS,LATEST EDITION.ALL WELDING ELECTRODES SHALL CONFORM TO A.W.S.A5.1 GRADE E-70.MINIMUM WELDING PROCESSES SHALL BE ARC WELDING A.W.S.E7014 OR MIG 0.890;o ui —1 7/8 0.105 0.375_+U�� WELDING A.W.S.ER70S-6. 7 WIND-LOCK DETAIL 15.ANCHOR NOTES: Q A.EMBEDMENT LENGTH DOES NOT INCLUDE STUCCO FINISH. ASTM A1011 CS TYPE B STEEL OR B.ANCHORS SHALL BE INSTALLEIN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS ASTM A1008 TYPE B STEEL SPECIFICATIONS. 00.132 GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123,G90 ZINC COATING 16.DOOR MAY BE INSTALLED ON THE INSIDE OR OUTSIDE OF AN EXTERIOR WALL OR TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL OR TYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL (0 ENDLOCK DETAIL 24 ELMWOOD AVE 1901 S.LITCHFIELD RD Unless otherwise specified, ASTNI'A1011 CS TYPE B STEEL OR MOUNTAINTOP,PA GOODYEAR,AZ dimensions are in inches& ASTM A1008 TYPE B STEEL tptE Oc T\\ � ELL 800 TULIP tolerances are: GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH S. �fi7III GATULIP DRIVE,NC ASTM A123,G90 ZINC COATING �+:' �++ yMq��deer�R P:800.233.8366 0.000=+/-0.031 OR TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL OR e••-F••.......•••,. _,r+� F:800.526.0841 FRACTIONAL=+/-1/32 TYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL / N PAi ECLEv I E:ADS@CORNELLIRON.COM ANGLES=+/-112 DEG / TITLE: DRAWN BY: SIZE: SCALE: SHEET: ++p 4 '�.� WIND LOAD CONFIGURATION I,, ,,:-FNsEO.; =' ROLLING STEEL COUNTER DOOR TJE B 1:1 2/5 DWG NO: `n 7017 CP0005 SLAT IMPACT RATED _ ES-16-76-CIW L'TR REVISION DATE BY E.C.O. ORIGINAL ISSUE 09/02/15 TJE 1677 EXISTING STUCCO FINISH, EXISTING WHERE APPLICABLE EDGE DISTANCE MASONRY SEE CHARTS — STRUCTURE EXISTING STEEL (BY OTHERS) STRUCTURE a 1 (BY OTHERS) i ° MINIMUM 36,000 EMBED. PSI YIELD STRENGTH! • ` • SEE CHARTS I _ •i _ _____r, WALL FASTENER ^ (SEE CHART BELOW) WALL FASTENER ` SEE CHARTS BELOW 1.312 1.312 SLIP }— SLIPK GUIDE ASSEMBLY GUIDE ASSEMBLY i— OPENING WIDTH -.— GUIDE SETBACK F— OPENING WIDTH --► F- GUIDE SETBACK J— 14.-5"MAX.D.B.G. Q GUIDE ASSEMBLY Q 3 GUIDE ASSEMBLY i 14'-5"MAX.D.B.G. CONCRETE AND FILLED CMU JAMBS STEEL JAMBS MAXIMUM CONCRETE FASTENER SPACING SIMPSON WEDGE ALL HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 ITW REDHEAD TRUBOLT STEEL FASTENER SPACING MIN.CONCRETE (2 5/8 MIN EMBED) (2 3/8 MIN.EMBED) (3 MIN.EMBED) FASTENER 3/8-16 SCREW 3/8-16 SCREW 1/8"FILLET WELD STRENGTH(psi) 1 3/4 MIN. 2 1/4 MIN. 1 3/4 MIN. 2 1/4 MIN. 2 1/4 MIN. (THROUGH BOLTED) (DRILLED&TAPPED) FULLY AROUND SLOT EDGE DISTANCE EDGE DISTANCE EDGE DISTANCE EDGE DISTANCE EDGE DISTANCE MIN.JAMB 1/8 1/8 3/16 1/8 2000 10(9 1/2) 12(11) 12 12 11 MAT.THICK. 3000 11(11) 12(12) 12 12 12 SPACING 12 8 12 12 NOTE:ALL SPACINGS ARE BASED ON CARBON STEEL ANCHORS. STAINLESS STEEL SIMPSON ANCHORS MAY BE PROVIDED WITH THE SPACING LISTED IN THE PARENTHESIS(). STAINLESS STEEL HILTI ANCHORS ARE NOT AVAILABLE UNDER THIS APPROVAL. STAINLESS STEEL ITW REDHEAD ANCHORS MAY BE PROVIDED WITH THE LISTED SPACING. 24 ELMWOOD AVE 1901 S.LITCHFIELDRD Unless otherwise specified, MAXIMUM FILLED CMU ..".11.1t MOUNTAINTOP,PA GOODYEAR,AZ dimensions are in inches& FASTENER SPACING _'. aF rfi%y\ E�I 800 TULIP DRIVE tolerances are: 4 MIN, A.•.•' •.e 11 GASTONIA,NC MIN.JAMB EDGE DISTANCE •/ novative - P:800.233.8366 0.000=+/-0.031 STRENGTH(psi) HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 SIMPSON STRONG BOLT 2 %(. .... :e, le g F:800.526.0841 FRACTIONAL=+1-1/32 (2 1/2 MIN.EMBED) (2 5/8 MIN.EMBED) %. A PAT LL v E:ADSQCORNELLIRON.COM ANGLES=+/-1/2 DEG 1500 8 8 / . . TITLE: DRAWN BY: SIZE: SCALE: SHEET: NOTE:ALL SPACINGS ARE BASED ON CARBON STEEL ANCHORS. f ... •f�" WIND LOAD CONFIGURATION STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS ARE NOT AVAILABLE UNDER THIS '.ftENSE-••,- TJE B 1:1 3/5 APPROVAL. l\x`�`'y"`y� ROLLING STEEL COUNTER DOOR DWG NO: DEC 12 2017 CP0005 SLAT IMPACT RATED ES-16-76-CIW L'TR REVISION DATE BY E.C.O. EXISTING STRUCTURE * ORIGINAL ISSUE 09/02/15 TJE 1677 (BY OTHERS) DEAD LOAD(CURTAIN. _SHAFT,HOOD,BRACKETS /f/ AND MOTOR PRESENT) '///f/ MAX LOAD=1000 LBS !BS / / f I \ / Vy(-) 1 r—' 0 V Vx _ = 0 0, ////7/ O Vy(+) 0 Q SUPERIMPOSED LOAD DIAGRAM NOTE: / Vx&Vy ARE IN-PLANE AND OUT-OF-PLANE COMPONENTS OF THE � _I REACTION,RESPECTIVELY,RESULTING FROM WIND LOADS ON THE ROLL-UP DOOR.THE EXISTING STRUCTURE SHALL BE CAPABLE OF WIDTH -I RKT.PACKOFF RESISTING Vx&Vy FORCES SHOWN AND THE CORRESPONDING REACTIONS DUE TO THE ECCENTRICITIES OF THESE FORCES. DESIGN AND/OR ANALYSIS OF EXISTING STRUCTURE(S)SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF OTHERS. _____ ! __I UNREDUCED WIND FORCES NOTE: VV � ON BUILDING STRUCTURE BRACKET HEIGHT AND WIDTH DIMENSION ARE TYPICALLY EQUAL TO COIL DIMENSION(14" (LBS/FOOT OF HEIGHT) MAXIMUM) ACUTAL DIMENSION MAY INCREASE BASED ON OPERATION METHOD OF DOOR. POSITIVE NEGATIVE Vx 521 Vx 523 Vy 287 Vy 287 24 ELMWOOD AVE 1901 S.LITCHFIELDRD Unless otherwise specified, _.:+7.!�� MOUNTAINTOP,PA GOODYEAR,AZ dimensions are in inches& �,1S"tF'TEa.Ayll 800 TULIP DRIVE tolerances are: 5 i. tt COIELI. GASTONIA,NC .'t i Innovative door�oNAlda P:800.233.8366 0.000=+/-0.031 F:800.526.0841 FRACTIONAL=+/-1/32 0""' PATH lE '' E:ADS@CORNELLIRON.COM ANGLES=+/-1/2 DEG I4p TITLE: WIND LOAD CONFIGURATION DRAWN BY: SIZE: SCALE: SHEET: tli .,,,, Sfo,,�r TJE B NTS 4/5 trs; ''', ROLLING STEEL COUNTER DOOR DWG NO: CP0005 SLAT IMPACT RATED ES-16-76-CIW DEC 12 2017 BRACKET MOUNTING LTR REVISION DATE BY E.C.O. BOLT ' ORIGINAL ISSUE 09/02/15 TJE 1677 QTY(2)1/2"GR.5 CARRIAGE BOLTS OR EQUIV. OR SHAFT ASSEMBLY � BRACKET PACKOFF QTY(3) 5/16"GR.2 SOCKET CAP FLAT SCREWS OR EQUIV. r WASHER O COIL HEX NUT DIMENSION L 1/4 14 r 1/4 ,i O 111?11.4 0 0• O 4a3xYax6LONG ASTM A36 STEEL OR ' ASTM A276 STAINLESS STEEL f1 BRACKET I TYPES 304 OR 316 / 0 PLATE 04 p WEDGE ANCHOR, _\1p SLEEVE ANCHOR,OR THRU BOLT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURE O O X-16 x 1"HEX HEAD O O CAP SCREW OR WELD • FOR STEEL STRUCTURE O TYP.AT(2)SLOTS INNER GUIDE SHAPE cpl pN MID-HOOD SUPPORT I le. (WHEN REQUIRED) SQUARE STYLE DEPICTED, OTHER STYLES ALSO AVAILABLE NOTE: SCALE:NTS REPRESENTATIVE BRACKET MOUNTING SHOWN. OTHER MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS ARE ABVAILABLE. Y4 x 2 ASTM A36 STEEL OR ASTM A276 STAINLESS STEEL TYPES 304 OR 316 �����` 24 ELMWOOD AVE 1901 S.UTCHFELD RD Unless otherwise specified, -1r,1E c.rEX�11 MOUNTAINTOP,PA GOODYEAR,AZ dimensions are in inches 8 # CELL 800 TULIP DRIVE tolerances are: • GASTONIA,NC i•' ' Iryq„�door�pc P:800.233.8366 0.000=+/-0.031 j -,.� .a7 eIC E Y $ F:800.526.0841 FRACTIONAL=+/-1/32 II E:ADS(a�CORNELLIRON.COM ANGLES=+/-1/2 DEG r 04�34 =�� TITLE DRAWN BY: SIZE: SCALE: SHEET: h, ,•__,,._ ;Fo,c;z WIND LOAD CONFIGURATION TJE B NTS 5/5 gE�� *'f"" 2017 ROLLING STEEL COUNTER DOOR DWG NO: CP0005 SLAT IMPACT RATED ES-16-76-CIW SUPPLEMENAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE MAINTENACE BUILDING ONLY 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 SECTION 0871 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTI ON INCLUDES Hardware for swinging,sliding,and folding doorsexcept special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in other sections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 including Accessibility Guidelines as amended by the D.O.J.September 15,2010,as adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). B. ANSI Al I 7.1-Buildings and Facilities-Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. C. ANSI/B HMA A156(.1 through.21) D. ANSI/DHI—Al 15.IGInstallationGuideforpoorsandHardware. E. FEMAP-361—Safe Rooms for TomadosandHurricanes. F. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 101—Life Safety Code H. IBC-International Building Code,asadopted by public Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). I. St ate and local Rules and Regulations for Barrier Free Facilities,a s a dopted by AHJ. 1.03 DOOR HARDWARE TYPES A. Types of finish hardware required include,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Pivot sets and intetnediate pivots. 2. Hinges. 3. Lock cylinders. 4. Keys,keying,and key control. 5. Locksets,latchsets,and privacy sets. 6. Exit devices. 7. Closers. 8. Mullions. 9. Overhead,wall,and floor stops. 10. Protection plates. 11. Gasketing for exterior and interior doors,as required. 12. Doorholders. 13. Door bottoms. 14. Thresholds. 15. Silencers. B. Requirements for design,grade,function,finish,size and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware is indicated elsewhere in this section or in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end ofthis section. Refer to Part 2 Products for Manufacturer's identification and allowable substitutions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product information:Manufacturer's published technical product data for all specified door hardware items indicating compliance with the requirements. 2. Hardware Schedule: a. Hardware schedules are intended for the Contractor's coordination ofthe work. Review and acceptance by the Architect or Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. b. Submit hardware schedule in the manner and foimat as specified,complying with the actual construction progress schedule requirements for each draft. Include the following information: RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 0871 00-1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1) Explanation ofall abbreviations,symbols,codes,at the like,including door handing. 2) Type,style,function,size,and finish of each hardware item. 3) Door and frame sizes and materials cross referenced to the Architect's marks in the door schedule. 4) Room identification(name and number)on each side ofdoor opening as indicated on the drawings. 5) Product name,modelnumber,description,and name o f manufacturer o f each item. 6) Fastenings and other pertinent infoimation. 7) Locations of hardware cross referenced to architectural floor plans and door schedules 8) Mounting heights and locations ofeach type ofhardware. 3. Key Schedule: a. Require a qualified representative ofthe hardware supplier topersonally meet with the Own er and Architect to obtain the Owner's written key requirements. b. Include a separate key schedule,showing clearly how the Owner's instructions on keying o f locks has been fulfilled. 4. Samples: Upon request,submit actual material samples of items indicated as for color selection. 5. Tem plates: Hardware supplier will furnish hardware templates to the Contractor for each fabricator ofdoors, frames,and other work to be shop prepared or factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request check shop drawings of such other work,to conform that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 6. Provide electrical operation technical sheets including product schematics,point to point diagrams,and electrical requirements of all electrified hardware. Completely coordinate with the general contractor,electrical engineer, electrician,security access subcontractor and the installer. Operational descriptions are for demonstration only— verify operational intent with the owner,architect and electrical engineer. B. Submit the following: 1. Product infom►ation. 2. Hardware schedule. 3. Manufacturer's published operation and maintenance data Include data on operating hardware,lubrication requirements,and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Tools and extra materials as required. 5. Ma nufacturer'swananties revise to meet criteria as established within this section. Warranty periods shall commence upon acceptance ofthe building by the owner. Where wananties listed exceed the manufacturer's standard warranty,obtain in writing an extended warranty to meet the requirements above and as noted. I fthe manufacturer will not meet these requirements,and another approved manufacturer will comply,supply the alternate approved manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Designs: 1. Items specified in this section are products which areofacceptable design. 2. Do not substitute products without Architect's written prior approval. Requests for approval shall be submitted by factory authorized distributor firms representing the products proposed for substitution. Items that are noted to allow no substitution are matching existing materials and the owner's material inventory for servicing the facility. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Manufacturers named in Part2 ofthis section with not less than years'experience in manufacturing commercial door hardware ofthe type indicated. 2. Hardware Supplier: a. A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same state as the project fora period of not less than 5 years b. Hardware suppliers organization shall include an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC), certified by the Door and Hardware Institute(DHI),who is physically available,at reasonable times during the course ofthe work,for consultation about project's hardware requirements,to Owner,Architect and Contractor. Mail or telephone correspondence is not acceptable. c. Hardware sup pliershall have local warehousing facilities and shall maintain an adequate parts inventory of items supplied for future service tothe owner. Supplier will be a factory authorized distributor ofall hardware specified. 3. Installer: Company specializing in installing work ofthis section with not less than 5 years'experience and acceptable tothe manufacturers and the hardware supplier. Maintain regular work force ofqualified personnel, trained,skilled,and experienced in installing door hardware and constant,competent supervision per the RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 0871 00-2 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 requirements ofthe General Contractor. The hardware installer shall meet with the representatives of the General Contractor and hardware supplier to jointly inventory all hardware items. Upon satisfactory inventory ofproducts, the hardware installer accepts responsibility for all hardware items inventoried. C. Regulatory and Operational Requirements: 1. Provide hardware for all openings,whether specified or not,in compliance with NFPA Standard No.80,proper operation and local building code requirements. Where required,provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes ofdoors required and complies with requirements ofdoor and door frame labels. Label hardware,a s required,for compliance with pressure testing criteria as dictated in IBC. 2. Provide hardware which meets or exceeds handicap accessibility per local building code requirements. Confonn to the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)of 1990 a s amended by the D.O.J.September 15,2010,as adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). 1.06 DELI VERY,STORAGE,HANDLING,AND PROTECTION A. Deliver,store,handle,and protect products to project site and as specified herein. B. Require hardware supplier to: 1. Tag each item or pacicage separately,with identification related to fmal hardware schedule. 2. Include manufacturers basic installation instructions with each item or package. 3. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers,sort and repackage in containers with each item clearly marked with appropriate opening numbersto match the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical items may be packed in the same container. 4. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations(shop or project site)for installation. 5. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives ofthe General Contractor,hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. Refer to paragraph 1.6-B-3. C. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in a secure and lockable area. Control the handling and installation ofhardwareit ems which are not immediately replaceable,so that the completion ofthe work will not be delayed by hardware losses,both before and after installation. Replace lost,missing,damaged,or stolen door hardware item sat no additional cost to the Owner as required to meet schedule requirements. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate woik ofthis section with the work ofother sections of work. B. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors,flames,and other work to be shop or factory prepared for the installation o f hardware. C. Verify completeness and suitability of door hardware with the hardware supplier and the hardware installer. 1.0 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish to Owner a complete set o f special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,maintenance,removal,and replacementofdoorhardware. B. Special tools and accessories shall be supplied by the hardware component manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: 1. Provide all door hardware for complete woik,in accordance withthe diawingsand as specified herein. 2. Quantities listed,in any instance,are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. 3. Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational installation. Match the quality and finish of items specified. 4. Provide miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware groups. B. Hand ofdoor:Drawings show direction ofslide,swing or hand of each door leaf. Door schedule indicates door and frame sizes,materials,required fire ratings,and other pertinent infomiation. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation ofdoor movement as indicated. C. Where required,providethe manufacturer's standard Molex quick connect wiring system. RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 71 00-3 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 D. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location(omit removable name plates),except in conjunction with required UL or FM labels ar as otherwise acceptable to the Architect Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders and latchfaceplatesonly. E. Base Metals:Produce hardware units of basicmetalandformingmethodindicated,usingmanufacturer'sstandardmetal alloy,composition,temper and hardness,but in no case of lesser(commercially recognized)quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A 156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI Al 56.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish"optional"materials or forming methods for those indicated, except a s otherwise specified. F. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. 1. Screws:Furnish screws for installation,with each hardware item.Provide Phillips flat head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition)screws to match hardware finish or,if exposed in surfaces o f other work,to match fmishes o f such other work as closely as possible,including"prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 2. Concealed Fasteners:Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units wh ich are exposed when door is closed,except to extent no standard units oftype specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not usethru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work,except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Stanley 2. Approved Substitutions:Hager,Bommer 3. Continuous hinges will be as manufactured by Stanley.Equal products by Select or ABH are acceptable. B. Templates:Except for hinges and pivotsto be installed entirely(both leaves)into wood doors and frames,provide on'- tern plate produced units. C. Screws:Furnish Phillips flat head or machine screws for installation of units,except furnish Phillips flat head orwoou screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surfaceofhinges. D. Hinge Pins:Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Steel Hinges:Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges:Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior doors:Non-removablepins. 4. Reverse bevel interior doors(lockable):Non-removable pins. 5. Interior doors:Non-rising pins. E. Pin Tips:Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves. F. Number of H inges:Provide number ofhinges indicated,but not less than 3 hinges per doorleaf for doors 90"or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30"ofadditional height G. Butt type hinges and continuous h inges areto be wananted for a period o ftwo y ears. 2.03 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Best Patented B. Equip locks with 7-pin cylinders for small format interchangeable core pin tumbler inserts with brass construction cores for use during the construction phases. Temporary construction cores shall be removed upon installation of the permanentkey system by theownerand returned to the hardware supplier. C. Construct lock cylinderparts from brass/bronze,stainless steel,or nickel silver. 2.04 KEYS,KEYING,AND KEY CONTROL A. Keys: 1. Material:Provide keys ofnickel silver only. RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 71 00-4 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 2. Quantities:These quantitiesareto establish a maximum allowable quantity of cut keys to service the project and may not necessarily be assigned as noted. A lesser quantity of cut keys req uired will not result in any credits,nor a quantity ofuncut keys to be issued unless noted otherwise. a. 3 change keys per each cylinder unit. b. 6 master keys per master key level. c. 2 control keys d. 2 construction control keys e. 10 construction keys. 3. Deliver keys to the Owner's representative:Send masterkeys to the Owner via U.S.registered mail direct from hardware supplier or manufacturer. B. Keying: 1. General: Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet in person with owner 8 months prior to occupancy to finalize keying requirements prior to the locks and exit devices being ordered for the project. During keying meeting all hardware functions should be reviewed with the owner to finalize lock and exit device functions. During Keying Meeting obtain Letter ofAuthorization,Face Sheet and Signature Card required. 2. Comply with Owner's written instructions for masterkeying and,except as otherwise indicated,provide individual changekeysfor each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 3. Gra n dmasterkey all cylinder items to coordinate with the Owner's instructions.Allow for expansion. Permanently inscribe each key with the notation"DO NOT DUPLICATE". C. Key Control: 1. Provide a key control system including envelopes,labels,tags with self-locking key clips,receipt forms,3-way visible card index,temporary markers,permanent markers,and standard metal cabinet,all as recommended by the system manufacturer,with capacity for 150%of the number of locks required for the proj ect. 2. Provide a hinged panel type cabinet,for wall m ounting,Telkee RWC-75S or equal. 3. Provide cylinder units with concealed key control and keys with visual key control. 2.05 LOCKSETS,LATCHSETS,AND PRIVACY SETS: A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Best 2. Approved Substitutions:Dorma SFI C Patented B. Types:Locksets,latchsets,and privacy sets a s indicated in Door Hardware Schedule. C. Strikes:Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt.Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts,except where not available.At these locations,provide manufacturer's standard recessed strike. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by lock,latch or bolt manufacturer. I faluminum frames are specified,confirm with the a luminum frame supplier that the standard lock strikes will function. Pro vide the manufacturer's standard extended lip strikes if required. D. Lock Throw:Provide 3/4"m inimum throw o f mortise type latches and deadbolts used. Cylindrical latches will be 1/2" minimum. Comply with UL requirements for throw ofbolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. E. Levers shall be cast solid brass,bronze or stainless steel.Wrought hollow levers are not acceptable. F. Locks and latches shall be warranted for a period of fiv e years. 2.06 EXI T DEVICES AND MULLIONS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Precision,Precision 2. Approved Substitutions:Dorma,Detex B. Provide risers,a s needed,to prevent interference with door glazing kits. C. Provide spacers as needed for proper application of removable mullions on narrowstop type frames. D. Devices will be architecturally fmished as specified.Powder coat fmish will not be allowed. E. Exit dev ices and related hardware shall be warranted for a period of five years. 2.07 CLOSERS: A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Stanley QDC 100 2. Approved Substitutions:Dorma 8900-DA,LCK4040 XP-DEL RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 7100-5 1 00%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 B. Size of Units:Except as otherwise specifically indicated,comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit,depending on the size ofthe door,exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. C. Provide manufacturer's standard through bolt attachment where door construction is not adequate for support. D. Arms: 1. Provide parallel aims for all overhead closers,except as otherwise indicated. Provide drop plates as needed to prevent gla zing interference. E. Mount a 11 closers to the maximum allowable degree ofopening by the closer manufacturer's template. Where closer arms incorporate dead stop features,mount closers to the maximum degree ofopening available before conflict with adjacent structures. I fnot apparent on the contract documents,verify the use ofopen space with the Architect or Owner's Representative to deteiminethe maximum allowable degree of opening. F. Access Free Manual Closers:Where manual closers a re indicated for doors required to be a ccessib le to the physically handicapped,provide adjustable units complying with ANSI Al 17.1 provisions for door opening force. Fire protection has precedence over handicap compatibility,check with local jurisdiction. G. Closers shall be cast iron. H. Provide closers with the manufacturer's standard adjustable delayed closing feature. I. Door closers and related hardware shall be warranted fora periodoftwenty-fiveyears. Electronic closers shall be warranted fora period of two years. 2.9 OVERHEAD STOPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:ABH 2. Approved Substitutions:Glynn Johnson,Rixson B. Mount stops to the maximum degyee ofopening available before conflict with adjacent structures,or,if adjacent structures are n of considered,to the maximum allowable by stop manufacturer's template. C. If not apparent on the contract documents,verify the use of open space with the Architect or Owner's Representative to determine the maximum allowable degree ofopening. D. Overhead stops in exterior doors must be manufactured from stainless steel,US32D finish. E. Overhead stops shall be warranted for a period of two years. 2.08 WALL AND FLOOR STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions:Ives,Rockwood B. General:Except as otherwise indicated,provide stops(wall,floor or overhead)at each leaf of every swinging door leaf. 2.09 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions:Ives,Rockwood B. Types:Armor Plates,Kick Plates,Mop Plates C. Fasteners:Provide manufacturer's standard exposed Phillips head fasteners for door trim units;either machine screws or self-tapping sheet metal type screws per manufacturer's recommendations for application to the specified door construction. D. Sizes:Fabricate protection p lates(armor,kick or mop)not more than 2"less than door width on stop side and notm ore than 1"less than door width on pull side,x the height indicated. E. Plastic Laminate Plates: 1/8"color as selected,beveled four edges(B4E). 2.10 GASKETS AND SWEEPS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:National Guard 2. Approved Substitutions:Zero,Pemko B. General:Except as otherwise indicated,provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type,sizes and profiles indicated as drawn or scheduled. RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 71 00-6 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 C. Fasteners:Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated. D. Replaceable seal strips:Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the manufacturer. E. Perimeter weatherstripping:Flexible,h o llow neoprene b ulb or loop insert,conforming to MIL R 6055,Class II,Grade 40. F. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms:Provide door bottoms consisting ofcontact ty pe resilient insert and metal housing of design and size indicated. G. Hot smoke seal,if required by I BC and subsequent UL testing procedures,will be supplied as an integral part ofthe door assembly by the door manufacturer. H. Gasketsand sweeps shall be warianted for a period of three years. 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturer: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:National Guard 2. Approved Substitutions:Zero,Pemko B. Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal threshold unit oftype,size and profile as detailed or scheduled. C. Where there is conflict between scheduled thresholds and details,details shall have precedence. Revise details only if necessary,to comply with handicap accessibility requirements.Notify the Architect of such required modifications. D. Verify all existing conditions and revise if necessary.All thresholds m ust be within ADA parameters.Notify the Architect of require d revisions if applicable. E. Thresholds and related items shall be warranted for a period of three y ears,abrasive coatings shall be warranted for a period often years. 2.12 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Listed in Door Hardware Schedule:Trimco 2. Approved Substitutions:Rockwood,Ives 2.13 FINISHES A. Exposed surfaces of hardware shall be Brushed Chrome(US26D,626),unless otherwise indicated. Items specified in Satin Stainless Steel(US32D,630)shall be supplied in stainless steel with no exceptions. B. The designations used in the schedule and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes a re the industry recognized standard commercial fmishes common to the product's manufacturer listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and verify that substrates and project site conditions are ready to receive work ofthis section. B. Do not begin installation until finishes indicated to be field applied have been applied to doors,frames,and similar items requiring project site finishing and are thoroughly dry and cured. C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are coi►cued ina manner acceptable to the installer. Beginning installation means installer accepts project site conditions and substrates as ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General:The types and approximate quantities of door hardware required for this proj ect are indicated a t the end of this section. B. Key Cabinet:Install in location as indicated on drawingsor a s directed by the Architect. C. Heights:Mount hardware units at heights indicated in"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for/standard Steel Doors and Frames"by the Door and Hardware Institute,except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations,and except a s may be otherwise directed by the Architect. D. Substrates:Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation of hardware. E. Installation: RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 7100-7 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions,requirementsofNFPA 80,NFPA 101,IBC,ADA,State Rules and Regulations for Barrier Free Facilities a nd recommendations of the DH I. 2. Set units level,plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessaryfo proper installation and operation. 3. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 4. Where not factory machined,machine cut for hardware per template,as required. 5. Cut and fit thresholds and floor covers to profile of door frames. Join units with concealed welds. Cut smooth openings for spindles,bolts,or similar items. Screw thresholds to substrate with the manufacturer's standard machine screws and expansion anchors(MS/EA)unless otherwise noted. Fill cavities of thresholds at sound rated openings with 1 inch thick(uncompressed thickness)low density fiberglass sill sealer insulation full width and length of the threshold. I n addition to fastening requirements,set thresholds for exterior doors in a full bed ofbutyl- rub b e ro r polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 6. Do not install hardware which is incomplete or apparently improper for application. Notify the hardware supplier imm ediately o f a ny such deficiencies. Failure to comply with this requirement indicates the hardware installer's acceptance ofresponsibility for proper application and performance. F. Cutting and Patching: Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto orinto surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way,coordinate removal,storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work. G. Where existing components are to receive new hardware,prepare the existing component to accept the new hardware as specified.I fthe existing component cannot be fabricated to accept the new hardware,or if the revisions will result in a voided label,immediately contact the architect for direction. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. I n it is l Adjustment: 1. Adjust and check each operating item ofhardware and each door,to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Adjust resilient faced sound stops for continuous contact with door and threshold. Adjust weatherstripping and sweepsto completely seal doors with frames and to adjacent structures. 2. Replace units which cannot b e a djusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended fort he application made. B. Final Adjustment:Wherever haid ware installation is m ade morethan one m onth prior to acceptance or occupancy ofa space or area,return to the work during the week prior to a cceptance or occupancy,and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final opetation ofheating and ventilating equipment 3.04 DEMONSTRATION Instruct Owner's p ersonnel in proper adjustment and maintenance o f h ardwa re and hardware finishes,during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.05 CLEANINGAND DEBRIS A. Cleaning: 1. Clean work. 2. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by work of th is section. B. Debris:Remove debris from project site and legally dispose ofoff--site. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area,the hardware installer shall: 1. Return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,materials or installation of h ardware units. 4. Prepare a written report o f current and predictable problems(of substantial nature)in the performance of the hardware and submit to the Architect. RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 0871 00-8 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 3.07 PROTECTION Protect work ofthis section asrequired so that work will be without damage or deterioration at the time of completion and acceptance by the Owner. 3.08 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Manufacturer List Code Name BE Best Access Systems BY By Others DJ Don-Jo IV Ives NA National Guard PR Precision SDCO Security Door Controls SH Stanley Commercial Hardware ST Stanley TR Trim co Option List Code Description K Rust Resisting Base-Ball Bearings BF Barrier Free CD Cylinder Dogging M 1 Bronze Chain SN Sex Nuts WC Padlock Weather Cover CSK Counter Sinking of Kick and Mop Plates VIB Double Visual Indictor Option B4E-HEAVY-KP Beveled Four Edges—Kick Plates 1/4-20-2"COMBO 1/4-20 X Combo with Masonry Anchor(SS) SMS-TEKS 6 X 3/4" Self-Drilling Screws6 X 3/4" Finish List Code Description AL Aluminum DU Duro Coat 613 Oxidized Satin Bronze,Oil Rubbed 625 Bright Chromium Plated 626 Satin Chromium Plated 630 Satin Stainless Steel 689 Aluminum Painted 626W Weatherized Satin Chrome GREY Grey 626AM Satin Chrome-Antimicrobial Coating US26D Chromium Plated,Dull RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 7100-9 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Hardware Sets SET#1A-Entry Alum-Single Hurricane Rated 1 Cylinder 1 E-74 or 12E-72 as required 613 BE 1 Hurricane Rated Hardware By OH Door Manufacturer BY 1 Card Reader By Access Control Supplier ST 1 Door Contact By Access Control Supplier BY 1 Power Supply By Access Control Supplier BY 1 Filler Plate EPT-1 AL DJ NOTE:Prep hurricane rated aluminum doors and frames for future Card Reader and EPT Wiring. SET#IB-Rear Exit-HM HC 3 Hinges K FBB 168 41/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Exit Device 2108X4908DCD 626W PR 1 Cylinder If Required 1E-74 PAID 626 BE I Rim Cylinder 12E-72 PATD 626 BE I Door Closer w/Cush Stop QDC 1 l 9 SN 689 SH I Kick Plate K0050 10"x 2"LDW B4E CS 630 TR I DoorPosition Switch MC-4 SDCO 1 Drip Cap 16A-4"ODW NA 1 Door Sweep 200NA36" NA 1 Threshold 896 N36"1/4-20-2"COMBO AL NA 1 Door Viewer 976U-CAP 625 TR 1 Filler Plate EPT-1 DU DJ NOTE:DeenSteel Rated Doors are available with Hurricane Rated Hardware from Best/Precisiondevices. Prep hurricane rated Hollow Metal doors and frames for future Card Reader and EPT Wiring. SET#2-Office 3 Hinges CB17941/2X41/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 45H-7AB14HPATD 626AM BE 1 DoorCloserw/HOCS QDC120BFPA 689 SH 1 Kick Plate K0050 10"x 2"LDW B4E CS 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5040 B NA SET#3-OfficeCloset 3 Hinges CB17941/2X41/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 45H-7R14HPATD 626AM BE 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 3 Door Silencers 1229A GREY TR SET#4-Janitor's Closet 3 Hinges CB17941/2X41/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 45H-7R14H PATD 626AM BE 1 Door Closer QDC 111 BF PA 689 SH 1 Kick Plate K0050 10"x 2"LDW B4E CS 630 TR 1 Wall Bumper 1270WV 630 TR 1 Gasketing 5040 B NA SET#5-Locker Room 3 Hinges CB17941/2X41/2 US26D ST 1 Privacy Set 45H-OL14H VIB 626AM BE 1 Door Closer w/Cush Stop QDC 119 BF PA 689 SH 1 Kick Plate K0050 10"x 2"LDW B4E CS 630 TR RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 087100-10 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 1 Sound Seal 5040 B NA SET#6-Private Restroom 3 Hinges CB 179 41/2 X 41/2 US26D ST 1 Privacy Set 45H-OL14H VIB 626AM BE 1 Door Closer w/Cush Stop QDC 119 BF PA 689 SH 1 Kick Plate K0050 10"x 2"LDW B4E CS 630 TR 1 Mop Plate KM0506"x 1"LDWB4ECSK 630 TR 1 Coat Hook 554 626 IV 1 Gasketing 5040 B NA SET#7-Shop Entrance from Group Office 3 Hinges FBB 168 4 1/2 X 41/2 NRP US26D ST 1 Lockset 45H-7R14H PATD 626AM BE 1 Door Closer w/Cush Stop QDC 119 BF PA 689 SH I Kick Plate K0050 10"x 2"LDW B4E CS 630 TR I PerimeterGasket 5075 B x Head&Jambs NA 1 Door Sweep 200NA 36" NA 1 Threshold 896 N 36"1/4-20-2"COMBO AL NA SET#8-Overhead Door 1 Cylinder If Required 1E-74PATD 626 BE I Padlock 21 B-722L PATD MI WC 626 BE 1 Ba lance Of Hardware By OH Door Manufacturer BY SET#9A-Gate Hardware-Single 1 Padlock 21 B-722L PATD M 1 WC 626 BE 1 Balanceof Gate Hardware By Gate Supplier BY SET#9B-Gate Hardware-Pair 1 Padlock 21 B-722L PATD M 1 WC 626 BE 2 Ba lance of Gate Hardware By Gate Supplier BY 1 Cane Bolt w/Bottom Strike By Gate Supplier BY RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 08 71 00-1 1 100%CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHADOW CREEK RANCH PARK PHASE 2 Opening List Opening Hardware Set Opening Label DoorType FrameTNpe 101A 2 101B 3 101C 4 102A 7 90 102B 1A 102C 1A 103 6 104 5 105 9A 106 9A I07 8 107A 1B 108 8 108A 9A 109 8 109A 9B RPA Architects Maintenance Bldg-Finish Hardware 087100-12 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Geotechnical Engineering Report Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex NWQ of Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Prepared for: Kimley-Horn Houston, Texas Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. League City, Texas Offices Nationwide Established in 1965 r....M.M.IMMIII 7 BIIacoii Employee-Owned terra con.com Geotechnical Environmental Construction Materials Facilities June 12, 2019 llerracon Kimley-Hom and Associates, Inc. 11700 Katy Freeway, Suite 800 Houston, Texas 77079 Attn: Ms. Kristina Malek, PLA Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex NWQ of Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Dear Ms. Malek: Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) is pleased to submit our geotechnical engineering report for the project referenced above in Pearland, Texas. We trust that this report is responsive to your project needs. Please contact us if you have any questions or if we can be of further assistance. We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this project and look forward to providing additional geotechnical engineering and construction materials testing services in the future. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Texas Firm Registration No.: F-3272) +) • BOBBIE S.HOOD '4'11 92951 t unk Rehan Khan, E.I.T. Bobbie S. Hood, P.E. Staff Geotechnical Engineer Geotechnical Services Manager Enclosures Copies Submitted: Addressee: (3)Bound&(1)Electronic Terracon Consultants, Inc. 551 W. League City Pkwy., Suite F League City,Texas 77573 Registration No. F-3272 P [281] 557 2900 F [281] 557 2990 terracon.corn Environmental • Facilities • Geotechnical ■ Materials TABLE OF CONTENTS Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 1 2.1 Project Description 1 2.2 Site Description 2 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 2 3.1 Geology 2 3.2 Typical Profile 2 3.3 Groundwater 3 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 3 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations 4 4.2 Earthwork 4 4.2.1 Compaction Requirements 5 4.2.2 Wet Weather/ Soft Subgrade Considerations 5 4.2.3 Grading and Drainage 6 4.3 Foundation System 6 4.3.1 Design Recommendations— Slab-on-Grade 7 4.3.2 Construction Considerations — Slab-on-Grade 8 4.3.3 Foundation Construction Monitoring 9 4.4 Pavements and Sports Fields 9 4.4.1 Preventive Maintenance 13 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS 13 APPENDIX A— FIELD EXPLORATION Exhibit A-1 Site Location Plan Exhibit A-2 Boring Location Plan Exhibit A-3 Field Exploration Description Exhibits A-4 through A-18 Boring Logs APPENDIX B — LABORATORY TESTING Exhibit B-1 Laboratory Testing APPENDIX C — SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS Exhibit C-1 General Notes Exhibit C-2 Unified Soil Classification System Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This geotechnical engineering report has been prepared for the proposed improvements within the existing Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex facility located at the northwest quadrant (NWQ) of the intersection of Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive in Pearland, Texas. Based on the information obtained from our subsurface exploration, the proposed improvements can be constructed at this site. A summary of our findings and recommendations is listed below: • Expansive soils are present on this site. This report provides recommendations to help reduce the effects of soil shrinkage and expansion. However, even if these procedures are followed, some movement and distress in the proposed restroom building should be anticipated. • A conventionally-reinforced, monolithically-poured slab-on-grade foundation system should be utilized to support the proposed restroom building. • A minimum 60-inch thick select fill pad should be placed under the proposed restroom building to provide uniform support to the floor slab and reduce the estimated Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) to approximately one inch or less. • Concrete pavement sections vary from 5 to 7 inches of portland cement concrete with a minimum of 6 inches of treated subgrade. Asphalt pavement sections vary from 2 to 2.5 inches of hot mix asphaltic concrete over 8 to 10 inches of base material with a minimum of 6 inches of treated subgrade. • We recommend treating the subgrade soils under the proposed pavement and sports fields with 8 to 10 percent lime by dry weight. This summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design purposes. Details were not included or fully developed in this section, and the report must be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The section titled "5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS" should be read for an understanding of the report limitations. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT SHADOW CREEK RANCH SPORTS COMPLEX NWQ OF SHADOW CREEK PARKWAY AND KINGSLEY DRIVE PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 June 12, 2019 1.0 INTRODUCTION Terracon is pleased to submit our geotechnical engineering report for the proposed improvements within the existing Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex facility in Pearland, Texas. This project was authorized by Ms. Ashley Frysinger, Senior VP of Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. through signature of the client's "Individual Project Order Number 1" on May 16, 2019. The project scope was performed in general accordance with Terracon Document No. P91120084.Supplement 1, dated January 7, 2019. The purpose of this report is to describe the subsurface conditions observed at the 15 borings drilled for this project, analyze and evaluate the test data, and provide recommendations with respect to: Foundation design and construction for the restroom building; Pavement design guidelines; and Chemical treatment recommendations for the subgrade under pavements and sports fields. 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 2.1 Project Description Item Description The project site is located at the northwest quadrant (NWQ) of the Project location intersection of Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive in Pearland, Texas See Appendix A, Exhibit A-1, Site Location Plan. Site layout See Appendix A, Exhibit A-2, Boring Location Plan. • An approximate 900-square foot restroom building. Proposed structures • Sports fields. • Pavements. Proposed building construction (assumed) Pre-engineered metal structure. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 1 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Planned finished floor grades Approximately one to 2 feet above existing grade. (assumed) Maximum building loads • Column loads—40 to 50 kips. (assumed) • Floor slab pressures— 125 psf. 2.2 Site Description Item Description Existing conditions The site was vacant and covered in grass at the time of our field program. Existing topography Relatively level. 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3.1 Geology Based on the geologic maps published by the Bureau of Economic Geology, the site for the proposed construction is located on the Beaumont formation, a deltaic nonmarine Pleistocene deposit. The Beaumont formation is heterogeneous containing thick interbedded layers of clay, fine sand, and silt. The coastal plain in this region has a complex tectonic geology, several major features of which are: Gulf Coastal geosyncline, salt domes, and major sea level fluctuations during the glacial stages, subsidence and geologic faulting activities. Most of these geologic faulting activities have ceased for millions of years, but some are still active. A detailed geologic fault investigation and study of the site geology are beyond the scope of this report. 3.2 Typical Profile The particular subsurface stratigraphy, as determined from our field and laboratory programs, is shown in detail on the Boring Logs in Appendix A. Stratification boundaries on the Boring Logs represent the approximate location of changes in soil types; in-situ, the transition between materials may be gradual. The native soils at the site consisted of fat clays, lean clays, and sandy lean clays that extended to the termination depths (approximately 5 to 20 feet) of the borings. The results of our field and laboratory programs, can be summarized as follows: Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Subsurface Soils Plasticity In-situ Moisture Undrained Percentage Moisture Content vs. N-value Description Index Content Plastic Limit' Shear Strength (bpf)2 of Fines 3 (%) (%) (%) (psf) (%) Fat Clay 42 to 65 19 to 28 +3 to+15 1,000 to 2,200 4 --- -- Lean Clay, Lean Clay with Sand, and 19 to 31 18 to 27 +6 to+14 0.25 to 2.5 5 14 57 to 76 Sandy Lean Clay ' The difference between a soil sample's in-situ moisture content and its corresponding plastic limit. 2. bpf= blows per foot. 3. Percent passing the No. 200 sieve. 4. Based on unconfined compressive strength tests. 5. Hand penetrometer readings in tons per square foot. 3.3 Groundwater In an effort to evaluate groundwater conditions at the time of our field program, borings B-1 through B-14 were advanced using dry drilling techniques to their termination depths (approximately 5 to 10 feet) and boring B-15 was advanced using dry drilling techniques to a depth of about 13 feet followed by the wet rotary method. Upon reaching groundwater, drilling was suspended for a period of about 15 minutes to allow groundwater to rise and groundwater levels to be recorded. Groundwater was initially observed during dry drilling at boring B-15 at a depth of about 13 feet. After an observation period of approximately 15 minutes, water was observed at boring B-15 at a depth of about 5 feet. Groundwater was not observed at borings B- 1 through B-14 during or upon completion of drilling. These groundwater measurements are considered short-term, since the borings were open for a short time period. On a long-term basis, groundwater may be present at shallower depths. Additionally, groundwater will fluctuate seasonally with climatic changes and should be evaluated at the time of construction. 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION The following recommendations are based upon the data obtained in our field and laboratory programs, project information provided to us, and on our experience with similar subsurface and site conditions. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 3 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations Expansive soils are present on this site. This report provides recommendations to help reduce the effects of soil shrinkage and expansion. However, even if these procedures are followed, some movement and distress in the proposed restroom building should be anticipated. The severity of distress and other damage will increase if any modifications of the site result in excessive wetting or drying of the expansive soils. Eliminating the risk of movement and distress may not be feasible, however further reduction in the risk of movement associated with the expansive soils may be possible if the floor slab is designed as a suspended structural slab with a void space with structural loads supported by a foundation system extending below the active zone. Terracon can provide recommendations for a structural floor slab system, if requested. 4.2 Earthwork Construction areas should be stripped of vegetation, topsoil, and other debris/unsuitable material. Proper site drainage should be maintained during construction so that ponding of surface runoff does not occur and cause construction delays and/or inhibit site access. Once initial site stripping and excavation is completed and final subgrade elevations have been achieved, the exposed soil subgrade area should be proofrolled with a 20-ton pneumatic roller or similar equipment, such as a fully loaded dump truck, to detect weak areas. Weak areas detected during proofrolling, as well as zones containing organics and/or debris, should be removed and replaced with select fill soils or soils exhibiting similar classification, moisture content, and density as the adjacent in-situ soils. Proofrolling should be performed under the direct observation of the geotechnical engineer or his/her representative. Subsequent to proofrolling, and just prior to placement of fill, the exposed subgrade within the construction areas should be evaluated for moisture and density. If the moisture, density, and/or the requirements do not meet the criteria described in the "4.2.1 Compaction Requirements" section for on-site soils, the subgrade should be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches, moisture adjusted and compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Effort (ASTM D698) maximum dry density. Select fill and on-site soils to be used at this site for grade adjustments should meet the following criteria. Fill Type USCS Classification Acceptable Location for Placement CL and/or SC Must be used to construct the fill pad under the building floor Select fill slab and for all grade adjustments within the areas of the (10sP1<_20) proposed building. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 4 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 The on-site soils appear to be suitable for use as fill within On-site soils Varies the pavement and sports field/court areas provided they are free of organics and debris. If blended or mixed soils are intended for use to construct the fill pads, Terracon should be contacted to provide additional recommendations. Blended or mixed soils do not occur naturally. These soils are a blend of sand and clay and will require mechanical mixing with a pulvimixer at the site. If these soils are not mixed thoroughly to break down the clay clods and blend-in the sand to produce a uniform soil matrix, the fill material may be detrimental to the slab performance. If blended soils are used, we recommend that additional samples of the blended soils, as well as the clay clods, be obtained prior to and during earthwork operations to evaluate if the blended soils can be used in lieu of select fill. The actual type and amount of mechanical mixing at the site will depend on the amount of clay and sand, and properties of the clay. 4.2.1 Compaction Requirements Item Description The fill soils should be placed on prepared surfaces in lifts not to Fill lift thickness exceed 8 inches loose measure, with compacted thickness not to exceed 6 inches. ■ The select fill soils should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Effort (ASTM D698) maximum dry density at a moisture content within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Compaction requirements • The on-site clay soils should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Effort (ASTM D698) maximum dry density at a moisture content between optimum and 4 percent wet of the optimum moisture content. Prior to any filling operations, samples of the proposed borrow and on-site materials should be obtained for laboratory moisture-density testing. The tests will provide a basis for evaluation of fill compaction by in-place density testing. A qualified soil technician should perform sufficient in-place density tests during the filling operations to evaluate that proper levels of compaction, including dry unit weight and moisture content, are being attained. 4.2.2 Wet Weather/ Soft Subgrade Considerations Construction operations may encounter difficulties due to wet or soft surface soils becoming a general hindrance to equipment due to rutting and pumping of the soil surface, especially during and soon after periods of wet weather. If the subgrade cannot be adequately compacted to the minimum densities as described above, one of the following measures will be required: 1) removal and replacement with select fill, 2) chemical treatment of the soil to dry and improve the condition of the subgrade, or 3) drying by natural means if the schedule allows. In our experience with similar soils in this area, chemical treatment is the most efficient and effective Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 5 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 method to increase the supporting value of wet and weak subgrade. Terracon should be contacted for additional recommendations if chemical treatment of the soils is needed. 4.2.3 Grading and Drainage All grades must provide effective drainage away from the proposed building during and after construction. Water permitted to pond next to the building can result in distress in the building. These greater movements can result in unacceptable differential floor slab movements, cracked slabs and walls, and roof leaks. Floor slab and foundation performances described in this report are based on effective drainage for the life of the building and cannot be relied upon if effective drainage is not maintained. Exposed ground should be sloped away from the building for at least 10 feet beyond the perimeter of the building. After construction of the structures and landscaping, we recommend verifying final grades to document that effective drainage has been achieved. Grades around the building should also be periodically inspected and adjusted as necessary, as part of the building 's maintenance program. Planters located within 10 feet of the building should be self-contained to prevent water accessing the building and pavement subgrade soils. Locate sprinkler mains and spray heads a minimum of 5 feet away from the building lines. Low-volume, drip-style landscaped irrigation should not be used near the building. Collect roof runoff in drains or gutters. Discharge roof drains and downspouts onto pavements and/or flatworks which slope away from the building or extend down spouts a minimum of 10 feet away from the building. Flatworks and pavements will be subject to post construction movement. Maximum grades practical should be used for paving and flatwork to prevent water from ponding. Allowances in final grades should also consider post-construction movement of flatwork, particularly if such movement would be critical. Where paving or flatwork abuts the building, effectively seal and maintain joints to prevent surface water infiltration. Utility trenches are a common source of water infiltration and migration. All utility trenches that penetrate beneath the building should be effectively sealed to restrict water intrusion and flow through the trenches that could migrate below the building. We recommend constructing an effective clay "trench plug" that extends at least 5 feet out from the face of the building exterior. The plug material should consist of clay compacted at a water content at or above the soils optimum water content. The clay fill should be placed to completely surround the utility line and be compacted in accordance with recommendations in this report. 4.3 Foundation System Based on the subsurface conditions observed during our field and laboratory programs, a conventionally-reinforced, monolithically-poured slab-on-grade may be utilized to support the Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 proposed restroom building planned at this site. Recommendations for this type of foundation system are provided in the following sections, along with other geotechnical considerations for this project. 4.3.1 Design Recommendations — Slab-on-Grade The near surface soils at this site generally exhibited a high expansion potential. These soils can subject the proposed building to significant movements (due to shrinking and swelling) with fluctuations in their moisture content. This movement potential is influenced primarily by the properties of the subgrade soils, as well as the moisture content of the subgrade at the time of construction, overburden pressures, and the stability of the moisture contents throughout the life of the building. Based on the information developed from our field and laboratory programs and on method TEX-124-E in the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Manual of Testing Procedures, we estimate that the subgrade soils at this site exhibit a Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) of up to approximately 4'/4 inches. Therefore, we highly recommend that the near-surface soils be prepared as stated below to reduce the potential for slab movement associated with volumetric changes of the near-surface clay soils due to moisture variations to a more acceptable level. The actual movements could be greater if poor drainage, ponded water, and/or other sources of moisture are allowed to infiltrate beneath the building after construction. The most common method of subgrade preparation to reduce potential expansion of the subgrade would be to provide a pad of properly placed and compacted select fill beneath the proposed building. The corresponding decrease in the potential soil movements is primarily a function of the fill pad thickness and the moisture levels of the underlying clay subgrade. While the indicated preparations do not eliminate the potential for soil movement, the magnitude of such movements should be reduced to more acceptable levels. To provide uniform support beneath the building and reduce the estimated PVR to approximately one inch or less, we recommend that a minimum 60-inch thick pad of properly placed and compacted select fill material be constructed immediately beneath the slabs. We recommend that the select fill pad extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond the edges of the building. Select fill should be used for all grade adjustments in the building area. Based on the above recommendations, the slab-on-grade foundation may bear within the properly compacted select fill soils, provided that the structure's select fill pad and subgrade soils are prepared as outlined in the "4.2 Earthwork" section of this report, which contains material and placement requirements for select fill, as well as other subgrade preparation recommendations. The slab-on-grade foundation may be designed using the following parameters provided that the structure's subgrade is prepared as discussed above: Responsive • Resourceful ■ Reliable 7 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Description Design Parameters Select fill building pad Minimum thickness of 60 inches Estimated PVR' Approximately one inch or less Climatic rating 25 Design Plasticity Index' 29 Soil support index 0.89 Minimum perimeter grade beam embedment depth 18 inches below final exterior grade Dead Load Plus Sustained Live Load: 1,200 psf Allowable bearing capacity Total Net Load: 1,800 psf 1 Based on 60-inch thick select fill pad. The parameters indicated for the above design conditions are based on criteria published by the Building Research Advisory Board (B.R.A.B.). The B.R.A.B. method is essentially an empirical design technique and the parameters provided are based on our interpretation of the project soil borings and criteria published in the B.R.A.B. design manual. The slab-on-grade foundation system should be designed to tolerate the anticipated soil movement and provide satisfactory support to the proposed skid structures and cooler. The foundation should have adequate exterior and interior grade beams to provide sufficient rigidity to the foundation system such that the slab deflections that result are considered tolerable to the supported structure. The minimum perimeter grade beam depth recommendation provided above is to reduce surface water migration below the foundation elements and to develop proper end bearing and is not based on structural considerations. Post construction settlements for the described slab-on-grade foundation system should be one inch or less, provided that the subgrade soils are prepared as outlined herein and that the select fill is properly placed and compacted in accordance with the recommendations contained in this report. Settlement response of the slab-on-grade foundation system is expected to be influenced more by the quality of construction and fill placement than by soil-structure interaction. 4.3.2 Construction Considerations —Slab-on-Grade Excavations for shallow foundations should be performed with equipment capable of providing a relatively clean bearing area. The bottom 6 inches of the foundation excavations should be completed with a smooth-mouthed bucket or by hand labor. The excavations should be neatly excavated and properly formed. Debris in the bottom of the excavation should be removed prior Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 8 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 to steel placement. Water should not be allowed to accumulate at the bottom of the foundation excavations. To reduce the potential for groundwater seepage into the excavations and to minimize disturbance to the bearing area, we recommend that steel and concrete be placed as soon as possible after the excavations are completed and properly cleaned. The bearing surface of the foundations should be evaluated after excavation is completed and immediately prior to placing concrete. Excavations should not be left open overnight. If the foundation excavations are planned to be open overnight, we recommend that a thin seal slab (about 2 to 4 inches thick) of lean concrete be placed over the excavation bottom to protect the bearing surface from disturbance. 4.3.3 Foundation Construction Monitoring The performance of the foundation systems for the proposed structures will be highly dependent upon the quality of construction. Thus, we recommend that the subgrade preparation, fill compaction, and foundation installation be monitored full-time by an experienced Terracon soil technician under the direction of our geotechnical engineer. During foundation installation, the base of foundations should be monitored to evaluate the subgrade. We would be pleased to develop a plan for compaction and foundation installation monitoring to be incorporated in the overall quality control program. 4.4 Pavements and Sports Fields Based on the subsurface conditions, we anticipate that the pavement subgrade will generally consist of on-site high plasticity clay soils. We recommend that the top 6 inches of the finished subgrade soils directly beneath the pavements be chemically treated. Chemical treatment will increase the supporting value of the subgrade and decrease the effect of moisture on subgrade soils. This 6 inches of treatment is a required part of the pavement design and is not a part of site and subgrade preparation for wet/soft subgrade conditions. Once the subgrade is properly prepared both concrete and asphalt pavement systems may be considered for this project. Detailed traffic loads and frequencies were not available. However, we anticipate that traffic will consist primarily of passenger vehicles and buses in the parking areas combined with occasional large multi-axle delivery and garbage trucks in the driveways. Tabulated in the following table are the assumed traffic frequencies and loads used to design pavement sections for this project. Pavement Area Traffic Description Design Index Automobile DI-1 Light traffic (Few vehicles heavier than passenger cars, no Parking Areas I regular use by heavily loaded two axle trucks/buses.) (EAL1 < 6) Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 9 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Medium to light traffic (Similar to DI-1 including not over Driveways D1-2 50 loaded two axle trucks/buses or lightly loaded larger vehicles (Light Duty) per day. No regular use by heavily loaded trucks/buses with three or more axles.) (EAL = 6-20) Driveways and Medium traffic (Including not over 300 heavily loaded two axle Truck Traffic Areas DI-3 trucks/buses plus lightly loaded trucks/buses with three or more (Medium Duty) axles and no more than 30 heavily loaded trucks/buses with more than three axles per day.) (EAL = 21-75) 1 Equivalent daily 18-kip single-axle load applications. Listed in the following tables are pavement component thicknesses, which may be used as a guide for pavement systems at the site for the traffic classifications stated herein. These systems were derived based on general characterization of the subgrade. Specific testing (such as CBR tests, resilient modulus tests, etc.) was not performed for this project to evaluate the support characteristics of the subgrade. At the time of construction, we recommend to perform a laboratory compaction (standard proctor) test and a laboratory California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test on at least one bulk sample of the anticipated pavement subgrade material to verify our design assumptions. Concrete Pavement Systems Material Thickness (Inches) Component DI-1 DI-2 DI-3 Portland Cement Concrete 5 6 7 Treated Subgrade 6 6 6 Asphalt Pavement Systems Material Thickness (Inches) Component DI-1 DI-2 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 2 2.5 Base Material 8 10 Treated Subgrade 6 6 We recommend that the waste dumpster areas be constructed of at least 7 inches of reinforced concrete pavement. The concrete pad areas should be designed so that the vehicle wheels of the collection truck are supported on the concrete while the dumpster is being lifted to support the large wheel loading imposed during waste collection. Pavement areas that are not designed in this manner often experience localized failures due to large wheel loads imposed on the pavement and underlying subgrade soils. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 10 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Presented below are our recommended material requirements for the various pavement sections. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement — The materials and properties of a portland cement concrete pavement shall meet applicable requirements in the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. The portland cement concrete mix should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Reinforcing Steel — ACI recommendations indicate that distributed steel reinforcement is not necessary when the pavement is properly jointed to form short panel lengths that will help reduce intermediate cracking. Provided the concrete pavement is designed and constructed as stated herein, the installation of reinforcing steel is optional and should be evaluated by the design team. Proper layout and installation of the joints within the pavement is critical to help control intermediate cracking. If reinforcing steel is planned to be utilized in the concrete pavement by the design team, the following amount of reinforcing steel should be used as a guideline: DI-1: #3 bars spaced at 18 inches or#4 bars spaced at 24 inches on centers in both directions. DI-2: #3 bars spaced at 12 inches or#4 bars spaced at 18 inches on centers in both directions. DI-3: #4 bars spaced at 18 inches on centers in both directions. Control Joint Spacing —ACI recommendations indicate that control joints should be spaced at a maximum spacing of 30 times the thickness of the pavement for unreinforced parking lot pavements. Furthermore, ACI recommends a maximum control joint spacing of 12.5 feet for 5-inch pavements and a maximum control joint spacing of 15 feet for 6-inch or thicker pavements. Sawcut control joints should be cut within 4 to 12 hours of concrete placement to help control the formation of plastic shrinkage cracks as the concrete cures. The depth of the joint should be at least one-quarter of the slab depth when using a conventional saw or one inch when using early entry saws. The width of the cut should be in accordance with the joint sealant manufacturer recommendations. Expansion Joint Spacing — ACI recommendations indicate that regularly spaced expansion joints may be deleted from concrete pavements. Therefore, the installation of expansion joints is optional and should be evaluated by the design team. Construction Joints —When concrete is planned to be placed at different times, we recommend the use of a construction joint between paving areas. The construction joint should consist of a butt joint (not a keyway joint). Concrete Curing Compound —A concrete curing compound, such as a Type 2 membrane curing compound conforming to TxDOT DMS-4650, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants" or equivalent, should be applied to the concrete surface immediately Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 11 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 after placement of the concrete in accordance with TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications Item 360. Dowels at Expansion Joints — The dowels at expansion joints should be spaced at 12-inch centers and consist of the following: DI-1: 5/8-inch diameter, 12-inches long with 5-inch embedment DI-2: 3/4-inch diameter, 14-inches long with 6-inch embedment DI-3: 7/8-inch diameter, 14-inches long with 6-inch embedment Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course — The asphaltic concrete surface course should be plant mixed, hot laid Type D (Fine Graded Surface Course) meeting the specifications requirements in TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications Item 340. Specific criteria for the job specifications should include compaction to within an air void range of 5 to 9 percent calculated using the maximum theoretical specific gravity mix measured by TxDOT TEX-227-F. The asphalt cement content by percent of total mixture weight should be within ± 0.5 percent asphalt cement from the job mix design. Base Material — Base material should be composed of crushed limestone or crushed concrete meeting the requirements of TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications Item 247, Type A or D, Grade 1-2. The base material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the Modified Effort (ASTM D1557) maximum dry density at a moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Lime Treated Subgrade — The on-site high plasticity clay soils should be treated with lime in accordance with the TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications Item 260. We recommend that 8 to 10 percent lime by dry weight be used for estimating and planning. These percentages are given as application by dry weight and are typically equivalent to about 40 to 50 pounds of lime per square yard per 6-inch depth. The actual quantity of the lime should be determined at the time of construction based on lime determination testing conducted using bulk samples of the subgrade soils. The pulverization, mixing and curing of the lime treated subgrade is of particular importance in these plastic clays. The subgrade should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the Standard Effort (ASTM D698) maximum dry density between optimum and +4 percent of the optimum moisture content. Preferably, traffic should be kept off the treated subgrade for 7 days to facilitate curing of the soil-chemical mixture. In addition, the subgrade is not suitable for heavy construction traffic prior to paving. The pavement design methods described above are intended to provide structural sections with adequate thickness over a particular subgrade such that wheel loads are reduced to a level the subgrade can support. The support characteristics of the subgrade for pavement design do not account for shrink/swell movements of an expansive clay subgrade such as the soils encountered at this site. Thus the pavement may be adequate from a structural standpoint, yet still experience cracking and deformation due to shrink/swell related movement of the subgrade. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 12 Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Post-construction subgrade movements and some cracking of the pavements are not uncommon for subgrade conditions such as those observed at this site. Reducing moisture changes in the subgrade is important to reduce shrink/swell movements. Although chemical treatment of the subgrade will help to reduce such movement/cracking, this movement/cracking cannot be economically eliminated. Related civil design factors such as subgrade drainage, shoulder support, cross-sectional configurations, surface elevations and environmental factors which will affect the service life must be included in the preparation of the construction drawings and specifications. Normal periodic maintenance will be required. 4.4.1 Preventive Maintenance Long-term pavement performance will be dependant upon several factors, including maintaining subgrade moisture levels and providing for preventive maintenance. The following recommendations should be implemented to help promote long-term pavement performance. • Site grading should be designed to drain away from the pavements, preferably at a minimum grade of 2 percent; • The subgrade and the pavement surface should be designed to promote proper surface drainage, preferably at a minimum grade of 2 percent; • Install joint sealant, and seal cracks immediately; • Extend curbs into the treated subgrade for a depth of at least 4 inches to help prevent moisture migration into the subgrade soils beneath the pavement section; and • Place compacted, low permeability clayey backfill against the exterior side of the curb and gutter. Preventative maintenance should be planned and provided for the pavements at this site. Preventative maintenance activities are intended to slow the rate of pavement deterioration, and consist of both localized maintenance (e.g. crack and joint sealing and patching) and global maintenance (e.g. surface sealing). Prior to implementing any maintenance, additional engineering observations are recommended to determine the type and extent of preventative maintenance. 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation installation, and other earth-related construction phases of the project. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 13 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across the site, or due to the modifying effects of weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, and bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other services should be undertaken. For any excavation construction activities at this site, all Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines and directives should be followed by the Contractor during construction to insure a safe working environment. In regards to worker safety, OSHA Safety and Health Standards require the protection of workers from excavation instability in trench situations. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. Responsive • Resourceful • Reliable 14 APPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATION b. talell - . " • y m t R �� Basi FJ w' .-.� "e'g*renal i � . rr 1 + • J " # �� Pak 1 « v 114 } .', IT R w y , ie"w R1t, 'r, a. . _ w. . ` 4 .. cill ,g ` 11t ",4 ... • , Apr . ,. . .....4.x V. , r;,' ,*,. }'-.t �' w Ai rt {' - 14 X '..7 i'``V) i - ., '+' .1,,,,,,,, 7., ++ „= , ,..,..-, f It ..te, i vs;,t., f - f - - -. "tZ B• t.r t [ '.- -'- .. 4, i. Wk� O' 11144 'F I ko 410 I AliL s F Pl. 1 r- `, , p E Dallas Rd :Ai, . re..'. t q +ks A ' -" F FreSr i tt � Wi ." 'I « ° 4rsfrs!r1+- o Rd a. , tRt li • RRA „' MAGNOLIA P t ., , -.;a..-_ �{ w !" ate. .1M. fi " w , �. r 4 fr s. V ..,. .. kt ,_ .:‘ ,r, 411*:. 11- .,,,ft • N thwe'at • ;, a rport . -. "..' • }� '' ( 1 ` M1. fk " yam._,y'S' ' �i ., 4. � , Jik e. fill • ' t • 3 { • �c she Sa . wf ' _ iZ w= 10, tCig"dpn . ^20 e1icresoh C. .. .: 20 t 5E 2014 D g tail DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY.AND IS AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY PROVIDED NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS Project Manager: Project No. SITE LOCATION RK 91125089 1 r�rracon Exhibit Drawn by: Scale: RK AS SHOWN Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex Checked by: BH File Name: CAD 551 W League City Pkwy,Ste F NWQ of Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive A-2 Approved by: Date: League City,TX 77573-5463 Pearland, Texas BH 6/10/19 ..'... 41 ,. Ilit B-1 B-3 B-4 , lit • / , * ....." It' • s % i lit ., ....,,... a 8-5 B-6 8-8 'v ' o 1 B-7 ., r. 4 *1 IR. JO i 4 0 ei 1. ,.. ,... 8-9 - , 141111 op B-14 B-1 8-12 ,,,,„ B-15 . . - B-13 I ..•' •', • .'''' ". - - - ., - kr,•4 -"s. ,.: ., if.,,,.,.-'..• ; ,, 'tlt,, , -: • -* ; ... ...s.1:.i;,,, '.,',* .11. • • :e".:;41-2,:. .e.r..11/‘.4..' li, •' i.,, I.# 1 ',4-.7., / '- - - : - ';1' 1*,•;ortjr-011 'e -1`''' N .,,, -- 4,..- . ,,- . , - -• -- _,Ate.-",,,-, -" ---11 ,'.. .• • — -----4- "-,..., , . „ , .* •, X, 1."; 4.:otit. ' ,'•. • 1/4' - . . . „,, • • ,* Ana • '• , ".. Ilk .tr A -44,1*-44Arr , ft, , lip 4 ,i ., 4 , 4 500 feet -D-• Dt'Jr.tiatztoir.i'Liptor:ati.Vr ....'i"2:J I,0 4i..jr:c.,,,,i.- I.-.)"019 HERE * .0•.: DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY AND IS AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY PROVIDED NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS Project Manager:RIK Project N91.125089 BORING LOCATION PLAN Exhibit Drawn by: RK Scale: SHOWN erracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex Checked by: BH File Name: CAD 551 W League City Pkwy,Ste F NWQ of Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive A-2 Approved by: Date: Pearland, Texas BH 6/10/19 League City,TX 77573-5463 Geotechnical Engineering Report lrerracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Field Exploration Description As requested, subsurface conditions were evaluated by drilling fifteen borings, designated B-1 through B-15, to depths that ranged from about 5 to 20 feet below existing grade (grade at the time of our field program). Outlined below is the drilled boring schedule performed for this project. Proposed Structures Boring Nos. Approximate Depth of Borings(feet) Sports Fields B-1 through B-8 and 10 B-11 through B-14 Pavement B-9 and B-10 5 Restroom Building B-15 20 The borings were drilled using all-terrain vehicle (ATV) mounted drilling equipment at the approximate locations shown on the Boring Location Plan, Exhibit A-2 of Appendix A. The borings were located in the field using a handheld GPS unit with an accuracy of±25 feet. Boring depths were measured from existing grade at the time of our field program. Upon completion of our field program, the borings were backfilled with soil cuttings. The Boring Logs, presenting the subsurface soil descriptions, type of sampling used, and additional field data, are presented on Exhibits A-4 through A-18 of Appendix A. The General Notes, which defines the terms used on the logs, are presented on Exhibit C-1 of Appendix C. The Unified Soil Classification System is presented on Exhibit C-2 of Appendix C. Soil samples were generally recovered using open-tube samplers. Pocket penetrometer tests were performed on samples of cohesive soils in the field to serve as a general measure of consistency. Soils for which good quality open-tube samples cannot be recovered were sampled by means of the Standard Penetration Test (SPT). This test consists of measuring the number of blows (N) required for a 140-pound hammer free falling 30 inches to drive a standard split-spoon sampler 12 inches into the subsurface material after being seated six inches. This blow count or SPT N-value is used to evaluate the stratum. Samples were removed from samplers in the field, visually classified, and appropriately sealed in sample containers to preserve their in-situ moisture contents. Samples were then transported to our laboratory in League City, Texas. Exhibit A-3 BORING LOG NO. B-1 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston,Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas ATTERBERG 0 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z STRENGTH TEST LIMITS w • O LU Latitude:29.58254° Longitude: -95.41916° v j ~- a w c, H w = z Q. IZ H a N Z 3 z - LL-PL-PI 0 30 w U O- 1E O ow a DEPTH 0 U w FAT CLAY(CH),dark gray,medium stiff to stiff — %� 0.75(HP) — 1.25(HP) 1.11 7.5 21 98 67-16-51 -gray 4 to 6 feet HP 1.5 5— (HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules 6 to 8 feet — � 2.0(HP) A8.0 O LEAN CLAY(CL),tan and light gray,very stiff,with o ferrous and calcareous nodules — 2.25(HP) 0 O 10.0 10— Boring Terminated at 10 Feet 0 m ro N rn w 0 z 0 I- 0 w 0 0 0 0 w z Z 0 0 0 0 U- LL 0 w Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. 0 CL 0 w LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. • 0 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lrerracon O Drill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Geo N 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-4 BORING LOG NO. B-2 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas ATTERBERG LO LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w z w STRENGTH TEST o E. LIMITS z O Latitude:29.58251° Longitude: -95.41864° j 0- w = z 0 W W a w w it w Z Z o w LL-PL-PI U Q o 0 <0 < LL §O� y U 3 iL DEPTH 0 FAT CLAY(CHI,dark gray,stiff — / 1.5(HP) 21 60-14-46 — 1.5(HP) gray,with ferrous nodules 4 to 6 feet 5— 1.75(HP) -tan and light gray 6 to 8 feet — 1.5(HP) 80 / BAN CLAY(CLI,tan and light gray,very stiff,with ferrous and calcareous nodules �j� 2.5(HP) o10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet 0- CD of J J W 0 z 0 J o: 0 w 0 ce o! a w o: J Z 0: 0 2 0 U. LL 0 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. co Advancement Method: Notes: LL Dryaugered to a depth of about 10 feet. See Exhibit A-3 for description of field P procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS No free water observed lii!rracon Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 0 Drill Rig:AN Driller:Dimond Geo co 551 League City Pkwy Ste F = League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-5 F- BORING LOG NO. B-3 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas ATTERBERG 0 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w_co wa STRENGTH TEST a LIMITS w torn w � 0 Latitude:29.58252° Longitude: -95.41821° v j Q F—I a y H a w z F F 1±11 a. w W w w a W y z 3 z a W LL-PL-PI V 00 3o w LL w oNv 0 3 w co a. DEPTH 0 FAT CLAY(CH},dark gray,stiff — 2.0(HP) -gray 2 to 4 feet 1.25(HP) 5— 1.25(HP) 25 55-13-42 -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous 6 to 8 feet m — 1.75(HP) ;, LEAN CLAY(CO,tan and light gray,very stiff,with ferrous and calcareous nodules 2.25(HP) o 2 1 o.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet cc o. o. 0 c9 m J J W 0 re t7 0 J re 0 w 0 H 0 a w J z Z 0 0 LL Ui W Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a w LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). zAbandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. co O J WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS i Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lerraCon Drill Rig:AN Driller:Dimond Geo m 551 League City Pkwy Ste F F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-6 BORING LOG NO. B-4 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston,Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas O LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 J z w STRENGTH TEST ATTE ITERG uj LIMITS w �O ai'— H z Latitude:29.5825° Longitude: -95.41763° J j J a 2, w z = a_ a. Hw a Ww F itw� �W LL-PLPI v rn y Q. g O 0 c7 DEPTH 0 O U. I— 0 co w O a U LEAN CLAY(CLI,tan and gray,stiff — 1.5(HP) 18 43-12-31 �2.0 FAT CLAY(CH),tan and light gray,stiff to very stiff,with f ferrous and calcareous nodules — 1.5(HP) 5— 1.5(HP) 2.5(HP) — 2.75(HP) i A10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet a. c� of N J J w 3 0 z th 0 w 0 a. a. re J z _z S 0 0 re LL 0 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a en Advancement Method: Notes: LL Drya to a depth of about 10 feet. See Exhibit A-3 for description of field eyed u9 P procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). lbandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS 0 Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lierraco n m Drill Rig:AN Driller:Dimond Geo cl) 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-7 BORING LOG NO. B-5 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas ATTERBERG LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z wa F STRENGTH TEST o LIMITS w p a Latitude:29.58154° Longitude: -95.41915° v < i W ro(7 w w = z a w J z a w Hw a wW itw z 3z aS2 LL-PL-PI w 3O LLa o 0 0� W CO 0 DEPTH U FAT CLAY(CHI,dark gray,medium stiff to stiff 2.0(HP) 19 54-11-43 0.75(HP) 5— 1.5(HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules below 6 feet — 1.75(HP) N 1.5(HP) p 41OO Boring Terminated at 10 Feet W 0) CV N J W 0 z ch O J co co 0 ce 0 0 re o. w J z Z 0 O LL- Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. W w co Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). O Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS c7 Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lerracon m Drill Rig:AN Driller:Dimond Geo 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-8 BORING LOG NO. B-6 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas ATTERBERG 0 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z o w STRENGTH TEST o q• LIMITS Z O a Latitude:29.58154° Longitude: -95.41866° CC j a o W Z D= LT_ 0- a_ ww a w_W itwN z 3z XW LL-PL-PI rt ate_ g o ❑ O 3� U w 0Ou~i w U a DEPTH 0 FAT CLAY(CHI,dark gray,stiff to very stiff — 1.5(HP) 2.16 14.6 22 101 59-16-43 1.25(HP) -gray with ferrous nodules 4 to 6 feet 5— 1.25(HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules below 6 feet / — 2.25(HP) N — 2.5(HP) z O /10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet 0 c� of N J J W 0 z 6 O J cc U) 0 W C1 0 0 a cc J z Z_ 5 0 0 LL- O H Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a co Advancement Method: Notes: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field LL Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). n Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z lierraco F1 Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed mDrill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Geo co 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-9 BORING LOG NO. B-7 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas 00 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z Lu STRENGTH TEST o ATTER L M BSRG w O z v Latitude:29.58158° Longitude: -95.41822° Q a > o w Z z F d d W> J °ui Zc z Q� >" w w g w� awr 3z �� LL-PL-PI 0 0O <p N LL W I— 0- OV � w DEPTH — FAT CLAY(CH),dark gray,stiff to very stiff 1.5(HP) — 1.25(HP) -gray 4 to 6 feet 5— 1.25 1.05 6.5 25 90 71-19-52 (HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules below 6 feet — 1.75(HP) N 3.0(HP) 0 /10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet re w a. a o m N J J W 0 z J H CL Co Co 0 w (9 H 0 0 a. J 0 0 rr LL H Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). zAbandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. cn o WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lerracon 9 0 Drill Rig: Driller:Dimond Geo rn 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-10 BORING LOG NO. B-8 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas ATTERBERG C LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z ww STRENGTH TEST e LIMITS w LI' a z Latitude:29.58163° Longitude: -95.41772° J< I a o w D z a_ 0_ W> 0w Z w w w a 3 Z o W LL-PL-PI ow cn LL oc 8a DEPTH 0 FAT CLAY(CH),dark gray,medium stiff to very stiff 1.25(HP) — 1.5(HP) 1.11 7.9 26 97 64-13-51 -gray 4 to 6 feet 5 1.25(HP) -with ferrous and calcareous nodules below 6 feet -tan and light gray 6 to 8 feet / — 0.75(HP) N17. -gray and tan below 8 feet — 2.5(HP) 0 A10.0 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet 10 (9 (9 0, 0 N Zr; J J w 0 z th 0 J I- N 0 w (9 I- O a w z Z 0 O 0 rc LL Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a cn Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: 8, Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). lbandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z No free water observed Ierracon Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 0 Drill Rig:AN Driller:Dimond Geo 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-11 BORING LOG NO. B-9 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas • SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas 0 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 J z w STRENGTH TEST ATTE ITERGco w G a o LIMITS Z a Latitude:29.58118° Longitude: -95.41883° = J j I__i w � w w D s z a wo � E- wZw z QW >c9 w w t-w w Ui H a UJ < 3 z o— LL-PL-PI 0 LL U' m<co < hw- ON U w DEPTH 0 FAT CLAY(CHI,dark gray,soft to stiff — 0.5(HP) 20 69-15-54 -with calcareous nodules below 2 feet 1.5(HP) -gray and tan with ferrous nodules below 4 feet 5.0 1.25(HP) Boring Terminated at 5 Feet 5 r z Z 0 ce U • H c� of N J J w 0 cc J ❑ 0 ce 0 0 a cc J Z _0 E2 0 0 U- LL Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. w co Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: `-` Dry augered to a depth of about 5 feet. procedures. ❑ See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). O Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. • 0 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS z Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed Ierracon coDrill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Geo N 551 League City Pkwy Ste F F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-12 BORING LOG NO. B-10 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas See Exhibit A-2 ATTERBERG LOCATION w Z a STRENGTH TEST o LIMITS w to rn H a Latitude:29.58113° Longitude: -95.41802° v a wH w w = z 0 co c z < H w a w >- qa 3 z �o W LL-PL-PI 0 ce �O W w O ,q a DEPTH c.) FAT CLAY ICHI,dark gray and tan,medium stiff to stiff — / -with scattered roots 0 to 2 feet 1.25(HP) 21 83-18-65 -gray 2 to 4 feet — 1.0(HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous nodules below 4 feet 1.5(HP) 5.0 Boring Terminated at 5 Feet 5 it io I- c� Z 0 0- 0 c� of W W 0 z 0 J H U) 0 W 0 0 a w J C9 K 0 2 0 LL_ 0 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. w 0) Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for descriptionNotes: `—` Dry augered to a depth of about 5 feet. prrocedures. of field See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). n Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 • No free water observed Ierracon m Drill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Geo 0 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-13 BORING LOG NO. B-11 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas • SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas ATTERBERG LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w z w STRENGTH TEST o m- LIMITS z Latitude:29.58034° Longitude: -95.41908° J 4 1—ll 7 ya 2, ae Z Z W F-w a w w F- w« 3 Z z W LL-PL-PI V p ¢(A u_ (n O. O o 0 O DEPTH O u) ~ O(0 � U 3 r 0 FAT CLAY(CHI,tan and light gray,medium stiff to stiff, / with ferrous and calcareous nodules 0.75(HP) / — 1.25(HP) 44.0 � LEAN CLAY WITH SAND(CLI,tan,very soft 5— 0.25(HP) 23 28-9-19 75 q6.0 LEAN CLAY(CL),tan and light gray,medium stiff to stiff, with silt pockets — 0.75(HP) '0 - — 1.5(HP) z /i% • 10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet • Lu I° 0 of Lu N m J J W 0 J F- K U) 0 cc O a w J Z 0 0 0 cc LL Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a • Advancement Method:DryNotes: augered to a depth of about 10 feet. See Exhibit A-3 for description of field procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). O Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and • Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. • rn WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring z lierracon Drill Rig Started: ATV 5/22/2019 Driller:Boring Completed:Dimond Geo/22/2019 No free water observed m 551 League City Pkwy Ste F - League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-14 BORING LOG NO. B-12 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas ATTERBERG LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 Z wo STRENGTH TEST o LIMITS w • O }} n U Latitude:29.58036° Longitude: -95.41871° < W H j a. w H a w Z D F o W w � a W� Z 3 z o 2 LL-PL-PI U 3O < LL o OU a DEPTH U FAT CLAY(CH),dark gray,medium stiff to stiff 1.0(HP) 0.75(HP) 0.97 9.9 28 96 70-16-54 5 1.25(HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules below 6 feet / 1.5(HP) i — 1.25(HP) /10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet a c9 of C J J w 0 Z O J ce re U) O w re a- a w o: J Z_ O ce U- LL 0 Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. La Advancement Method: Notes: LL D au Bred to a depth of about 10 feet. See Exhibit A-3 for description of field o ry 9 P procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lierraco n Drill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Geo 0 m 551 League City Pkwy Ste F F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-15 BORING LOG NO. B-13 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas • SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland, Texas ATTERBERG O• LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w z WW STRENGTH TEST o LIMITS z O Latitude:29.58004° Longitude: -95.41878° j a ;Liz = L Ww 2 w� F aU Z 3 E- LL-PL-PI o C9 0 3� LL o� O OW a U > W DEPTH 0 %/♦ FAT CLAY(CHI,dark gray,medium stiff to stiff — 1.25(HP) 23 60-13-47 — 1.0(HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules 4 to 6 feet 5— 1.0(HP) LEAN CLAY(CLI,tan,stiff to very stiff,with ferrous and calcareous nodules — 2.25(HP) o j — 1.25(HP) z 10.0 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet LU r, of N -J W 0 Z J K (I) 0 W U' 0 a. w J Z 0 0 U- LL LU W Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a- a w 0' Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: `A. Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. procedures. See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). O Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. • 0 J WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS c� -- Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed lerra con 0 Drill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Gee 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-16 BORING LOG NO. B-14 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston, Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas ATTERBERG 0 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z wa F STRENGTH TEST o U LIMITS w co cow .� a Latitude:29.58047° Longitude: -95.41829° LL J a 1—--I a col-- H w Z s z 111 H w 2 w L I- a W Z S i w LL-PL-PI 0 ° �8 LL U 0E- �� a DEPTH 0 FAT CLAY(CH).,dark gray,medium stiff to stiff -with scattered roots 0 to 2 feet 1.75(HP) 25 69-14-55 -gray 2 to 4 feet 1.0(HP) -tan and light gray with ferrous and calcareous nodules 4 to 8 feet 5 1.5(HP) 2.0(HP) 7-7 A 8.0 LEAN CLAY(CL),tan,stiff,with ferrous and calcareous 8 % • nodules o j' 1.5(HP) N '. p ion 10 Boring Terminated at 10 Feet 'LL c� of Of J J w 0 Z th 0 J cn 0 w 0 I- 0 a w Z O 0 U- LL 0 W Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. a co Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for descriptionNotes: LL p Dry augered to a depth of about 10 feet. rrocedures. of field See Appendix B for description of laboratory procedures and additional data(if any). n Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 No free water observed 1 ierracon 9 0 Drill Ri :ATV Driller:Dimond Geo 551 League City Pkwy Ste F League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-17 BORING LOG NO. B-15 Page 1 of 1 PROJECT: Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex CLIENT: Kimley-Horn and Associates, Inc. Houston,Texas SITE: Shadow Creek Parkway and Kingsley Drive Pearland,Texas ATTERBERG 00 LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w z wa F STRENGTH TEST o LIMITS Z O a Latitude:29.58042° Longitude: -95.41788° _1¢ w 1-J a x i.- w w D= z a d w> � 00 — i w w w a w w Z z LL-PL-PI U C'1 0 �m U- W oF.... F O Dw w U w DEPTH O 0 a roor FAT CLAY(CH),dark gray,medium stiff to stiff — 1.0(HP) — 1.25(HP) 1.17 8.3 25 98 70-12-58 -tan and light gray with calcareous nodules 4 to 10 feet — 1.75(HP) 1.31 6.8 26 108 65-11-54 tz N !D o -with ferrous nodules 8 to 10 feet o 0 —� 1.5(HP) 0 0 /10.0 10 g SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),tan,soft to stiff cc • W — 0.5(HP) 27 'a of — I — 6-5-9 N=14 6 /15.0 H 1 FAT CLAY(CHI,reddish brown,very stiff,with ct calcareous nodules - o � O — ct — o 0 z — 2.25(HP) o 20.0 20 . O Boring Terminated at 20 Feet cc LL 0 aStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Rope and Cathead a a w O Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes: LL Dry agured to a depth of about 13 feet and wet rotary procedures. athereafter. See Appendix B for description of laboratory > procedures and additional data(if any). o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and Z Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. u) 0 2 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS O Boring Started:5/22/2019 Boring Completed:5/22/2019 - 13 ft While drilling i Iarracon O Drill Rig:ATV Driller:Dimond Geo m 9 ft After 5 minutes U) 551 League City Pkwy Ste F F _Z 5 ft After 15 minutes League City,TX Project No.:91125089 Exhibit: A-18 APPENDIX B LABORATORY TESTING Geotechnical Engineering Report lierracon Shadow Creek Ranch Sports Complex • Pearland, Texas June 12, 2019 • Terracon Project No. 91125089 Supplement 1 Laboratory Testing Soil samples were tested in the laboratory to measure their dry unit weight and natural water content. Unconfined compression tests were performed on selected samples and a calibrated hand penetrometer was used to estimate the approximate unconfined compressive strength of some cohesive samples. The calibrated hand penetrometer values have been correlated with unconfined compression tests and provide a better estimate of soil consistency than visual examination alone. Selected samples were also classified using the results of Atterberg Limits and sieve analysis testing. The test results are provided on the Boring Logs included in Appendix A and in "3.2 Typical Profile" section of this report. Descriptive classifications of the soils indicated on the Boring Logs are in general accordance with the enclosed General Notes and the Unified Soil Classification System. Also shown are estimated Unified Soil Classification Symbols. A brief description of this classification system is attached to this report. Classification of the soil samples was generally determined by visual manual procedures. Samples not tested in the laboratory will be stored for a period of 30 days subsequent to submittal of this report and will be discarded after this period, unless we are notified otherwise. Exhibit B-1 APPENDIX C SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS GENERAL NOTES DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS V Water Initially N Standard Penetration Test Encountered Resistance(Blows/Ft.) 17 Water Level After a (HP) Hand Penetrometer Specified Period of Time W V Water Level After () I— (T) Torvane a Specified Period of Time Z —I Shelb Standard W W J Tube y X J Penetration Water levels indicated on the soil boring Test g (DCP) Dynamic Cone Penetrometer 2 w logs are the levels measured in thefa co Q borehole at the times indicated. w Groundwater level variations will occur Li (PID) Photo-Ionization Detector over time. In low permeability soils, accurate determination of groundwater (OVA) Organic Vapor Analyzer levels is not possible with short term water level observations. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50%of their dry weight retained on a#200 sieve;their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles,gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50%of their dry weight retained on a#200 sieve;they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non-plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device.The accuracy of such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with+/-indicates that no actual topographical survey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead,the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographic maps of the area. RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS (50%or more passing the No.200 sieve.) (More than 50%retained on No.200 sieve.) Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing,field Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance visual-manual procedures or standard penetration resistance CO Descriptive Term Standard Penetration or Descriptive Term Unconfined Compressive Strength Standard Penetration or E (Density) N-Value (Consistency) Qu,(tsf) N-Value Ce Blows/Ft. Blows/Ft. W I— Very Loose 0-3 Very Soft less than 0.25 0-1 I I— () Loose 4-9 Soft 0.25 to 0.50 2-4 2 W IY Medium Dense 10-29 Medium Stiff 0.50 to 1.00 4-8 I— V) Dense 30-50 Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 8-15 Very Dense >50 Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 15-30 Hard >4.00 >30 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY Descriptive Term(s) Percent of Major Component Particle Size of other constituents Dry Weight of Sample Trace < 15 Boulders Over 12 in.(300 mm) With 15-29 Cobbles 12 in.to 3 in.(300mm to 75mm) Modifier >30 Gravel 3 in.to#4 sieve(75mm to 4.75 mm) Sand #4 to#200 sieve(4.75mm to 0.075mm Silt or Clay Passing#200 sieve(0.075mm) RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Descriptive Term(s) Percent of Term Plasticity Index of other constituents Dry Weight Non-plastic 0 Trace <5 Low 1 -10 With 5-12 Medium 11 -30 Modifier > 12 High >30 lierracon Exhibit: C-1 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Soil Classification Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A Group Group Name Symbol Gravels: Clean Gravels: Cu>_4 and 1 <_Cc<_3E GW Well-graded gravel F More than 50%of Less than 5%fines° Cu<4 and/or 1 >Cc>3 E GP Poorly graded gravel F coarse fraction retained on Gravels with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F G H Coarse Grained Soils: More than 12%fines° Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F G,H More than 50%retained No.4 sieve on No.200 sieve Sands: Clean Sands: Cu>_6 and 1 <_Cc<_3 E SW Well graded sand' 50%or more of coarse Less than 5%fines° Cu<6 and/or 1 >Cc>3 E SP Poorly graded sand' fraction passes Sands with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G,"'' No.4 sieve More than 12%fines° Fines Classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G,"' PI>7 and plots on or above"A"line J CL Lean clay KL,M Inorganic: Silts and Clays: PI<4 or plots below"A"lined ML Silt K,L M Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid limit-oven dried Organic clay K,L,M,N Fine-Grained Soils: Organic: <0.75 OL K, ,M,° 50%or more passes the Liquid limit not dried Organic K LIB No.200 sieve PI plots on or above"A"line CH Fat clay Inorganic: Silts and Clays: PI plots below"A line MH Elastic Silt K,L,M Liquid limit 50 or more Liquid limit-oven dried ( Organic clayKL,M,P Organic: - J <0.75 OH Liquid limit-not deed i Organic siltK'L,M,o Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter,dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat A Based on the material passing the 3-in. (75-mm)sieve " If fines are organic,add"with organic fines"to group name. 6 If field sample contained cobbles or boulders,or both,add"with cobbles ' If soil contains>_15%gravel, add"with gravel"to group name. or boulders,or both"to group name. J If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area,soil is a CL-ML,silty clay. ° Gravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded K If soil contains 15 to 29%plus No.200, add"with sand"or"with gravel with silt,GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay,GP-GM poorly gravel,"whichever is predominant. graded gravel with silt,GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. L If soil contains>_30%plus No.200 predominantly sand,add"sandy" D Sands with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded to group name. sand with silt,SW-SC well-graded sand with clay,SP-SM poorly graded M If soil contains>_30%plus No.200, predominantly gravel, add sand with silt,SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay "gravelly"to group name. z " PI>_4 and plots on or above"A"line. E Cu=D60/D10 Cc= (D3o) ° PI<4 or plots below"A"line. D10 x D60 P PI plots on or above"A"line. F If soil contains>_15%sand, add"with sand"to group name. ° PI plots below"A"line. G If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM,or SC-SM. 60 —T - i -i For classification of fine-grained )' soils and fine-grained fraction / 50 of coarse-grained soils �Vc•O,' P��e — Equation of"A"-line +J +P d Horizontal at P1=4 to LL=25.5. X 40 - then PI=0.73(LL•20) A--0+--t— pEquation of"U"-line ' +0C z Vertical at LL=16 to P1=7, G H 30 --- then PI=0.9(LL-8) -- :�' ? — -- cq 20 L i •' Gv g i ,"�! 1 MH or OH ' 10 , 7i- CL-ML 4h MLorOL 0 . 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT(LL) lierracon Exhibit C-2